Table of Contents

As filed with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission on April 28, 2017

File Nos. 811-07763

333-10015

 

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549

 

 

FORM N-1A

 

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

  
  THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933   
  Pre-Effective Amendment No.   
  Post-Effective Amendment No. 64   

and/or

 

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

  
  THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940   
  Amendment No. 65   

(Check appropriate box or boxes)

 

 

LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST

(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in Charter)

 

 

1676 N. California Blvd., Suite 500, Walnut Creek, California 94596

(Address of Principal Executive Offices) (Zip Code)

(925) 254-8999

(Registrant’s Telephone Number, including Area Code)

 

 

Copies of Communications to:

 

Jeremy L. DeGroot

1676 N. California Blvd., Suite 500

Walnut Creek, California 94596

(Name and Address of Agent for Service)

 

David A. Hearth, Esq.

Paul Hastings LLP

101 California Street, 48th Floor

San Francisco, California 94111

 

 

Approximate Date of Proposed Public Offering: As soon as practicable following effectiveness.

It is proposed that this filing will become effective (check appropriate box)

 

immediately upon filing pursuant to paragraph (b)
on April 30, 2017 pursuant to paragraph (b)
60 days after filing pursuant to paragraph (a)(1)
on (date) pursuant to paragraph (a)(1)
75 days after filing pursuant to paragraph (a)(2)
on (date) pursuant to paragraph (a)(2) of Rule 485.

If appropriate, check the following box:

 

this post-effective amendment designates a new effective date for a previously filed post-effective amendment.

 

 

 


Table of Contents

LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST

 

LOGO

 

Prospectus

(Share Class – Ticker Symbol)

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund - Institutional Class - MSEFX

Investor Class - MSENX

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund - Institutional Class - MSILX

Investor Class - MNILX

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund - Institutional Class - MSSFX

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund - Institutional Class - MASFX

Investor Class - MASNX

April 30, 2017

 

LOGO

 

As with all mutual funds, the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) has not approved or disapproved these securities, nor has the SEC judged whether the information in this Prospectus is accurate or adequate. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.


Table of Contents

Table of Contents

 

Summary Section

    2  

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund

    2  

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund

    5  

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund

    9  

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund

    12  

Summary of Other Important Information Regarding the Funds

    18  

Transaction Policies – All Funds

    18  

Tax Information – All Funds

    18  

Payments to Broker-Dealers and Other Financial Intermediaries – All Funds

    18  

Description of Principal Investment Risks

    19  

Fund Management and Investment Styles

    26  

The Advisor

    26  

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund – Sub-Advisors

    29  

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund – Sub-Advisors

    35  

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund – Sub-Advisors

    42  

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund – Sub-Advisors

    45  

Shareholder Services

    52  

Index Descriptions

    58  

Financial Highlights

    59  

Privacy Notice

    Inside Back Cover  

For More Information

    Back Cover  


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund

 

Summary Section

Investment Objective

 

The Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund (the “Equity Fund”) seeks long-term growth of capital; that is, the increase in the value of your investment over the long term.

Fees and Expenses of the Equity Fund

 

This table describes the fees and expenses that you may pay if you buy and hold shares of the Equity Fund.

Shareholder Fees (fees paid directly from your investment)

 

     Institutional
Class
    Investor
Class
 
    None       None  

Annual Operating Expenses (expenses that you pay each year as a percentage of the value of your investment)

 

     Institutional
Class
    Investor
Class
 

Management Fees

    1.10%       1.10%  

Distribution (12b-1) Fees

    None       0.25%  

Other Expenses

    0.19%       0.19%  
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses (1)

    1.29%       1.54%  

Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement ( 2 )

    -0.09%       -0.09%  

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses After Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement (1)(2)

    1.20%       1.45%  
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(1) The “Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses” and “Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses After Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement” will not correlate to the corresponding ratios included in the Equity Fund’s Financial Highlights due to a one-time expense reimbursement.

 

(2) Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC (“Litman Gregory”), the advisor to the Equity Fund, has contractually agreed, through April 30, 2018, to waive a portion of its advisory fees so that after paying all of the sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee as a percentage of the Equity Fund’s daily net assets retained by Litman Gregory is 0.40%. This agreement may be terminated at any time by the Board of Trustees of the Litman Gregory Funds Trust (the “Trust”) upon sixty (60) days’ written notice to Litman Gregory, and Litman Gregory may decline to renew this agreement by written notice to the Trust at least thirty (30) days before the agreement’s annual expiration date. Litman Gregory has waived its right to receive reimbursement of the portion of its advisory fees waived pursuant to this agreement.

Example

This example is intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the Equity Fund with the cost of investing in other mutual funds. The example assumes that you invest $10,000 in the Equity Fund for the time periods indicated and then redeem all of your shares at the end of those periods. The example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year and that the Equity Fund’s operating expenses remain the same. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions your costs would be:

 

     One Year     Three Years     Five Years     Ten Years  

Institutional Class

  $ 131     $ 409     $ 708     $ 1,556  

Investor Class

  $ 157     $ 486     $ 839     $ 1,835  

Portfolio Turnover

 

The Equity Fund pays transaction costs, such as commissions, when it buys and sells securities (or “turns over” its portfolio). A

higher portfolio turnover rate may indicate higher transaction costs and may result in higher taxes when shares of the Equity Fund are held in a taxable account as compared to shares of investment companies that hold investments for a longer period. These costs, which are not reflected in annual fund operating expenses or in the example, affect the Equity Fund’s performance. During the most recent fiscal year, the Equity Fund’s portfolio turnover rate was 26.98% of the average value of its portfolio.

Principal Strategies

 

Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC, the advisor to the Equity Fund, believes that it is possible to identify investment managers who, over a market cycle, will deliver superior returns relative to their peers. Litman Gregory also believes it can identify skilled stock pickers who, within their more diversified portfolios, have higher confidence in the return potential of some stocks than others. Litman Gregory believes a portfolio comprised only of these managers’ “higher confidence” stocks should outperform their more diversified portfolios over a market cycle.

Based on these beliefs, the Equity Fund’s strategy is to engage a number of proven managers as sub-advisors (each, a “manager” or “sub-advisor”), with each manager investing in the securities of companies that it believes have strong appreciation potential. Under normal conditions, each sub-advisor manages a portion of the Equity Fund’s assets by independently managing a portfolio typically composed of at least 5, but not more than 15, stocks. There is no minimum or maximum allocation of the Fund’s portfolio assets to each sub-advisor. Under normal market conditions, the Equity Fund invests at least 80% of its net assets, plus the amount of any borrowings for investment purposes, in equity securities. Equity securities in which the Equity Fund may invest include common stocks, preferred stocks and convertible debt securities, which may be converted on specified terms into stock of the issuer. The Fund invests primarily in the securities of large-, mid- and small-sized U.S. companies, although the managers also have flexibility to invest in the securities of foreign companies (up to 50% of the Equity Fund’s net assets may be invested in foreign equity securities, which may include emerging markets). Each sub-advisor uses its own discretion to invest in any sized company it deems appropriate. By executing this strategy, the Equity Fund seeks to:

 

  combine the efforts of several experienced, high quality managers;

 

  access the favorite stock-picking ideas of each manager at any point in time;

 

  deliver a portfolio that is prudently diversified in terms of stocks (typically 60 to 100) and industries while allowing each manager to run a portion of the portfolio focused on only its favorite stocks; and

 

  further diversify across different-sized companies and stock-picking styles by incorporating managers with a variety of stock-picking disciplines.
 

 

 
2       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Generally, a security may be sold: (1) if the manager believes the security’s market price exceeds the manager’s estimate of intrinsic value; (2) if the manager’s view of the business fundamentals or management of the underlying company changes; (3) if a more attractive investment opportunity is found; (4) if general market conditions trigger a change in the manager’s assessment criteria; or (5) for other portfolio management reasons.

Principal Risks

 

Investment in stocks exposes shareholders of the Equity Fund to the risk of losing money if the value of the stocks held by the Equity Fund declines during the period an investor owns shares in the Equity Fund. The following risks could affect the value of your investment:

 

  Market Risk. As with all mutual funds that invest in common stocks, the value of an individual’s investment will fluctuate daily in response to the performance of the individual stocks held in the Equity Fund. The stock market has been subject to significant volatility recently, which has increased the risks associated with an investment in the Equity Fund.

 

  Convertible Securities Risk. This is the risk that the market value of convertible securities may fluctuate due to changes in, among other things, interest rates; other general economic conditions; industry fundamentals; market sentiment; the issuer’s operating results, financial statements, and credit ratings; and the market value of the underlying common or preferred stock.

 

  Smaller Companies Risk. The Equity Fund may invest a portion of its assets in the securities of small- and mid-sized companies. Securities of small and mid-cap companies are generally more volatile and less liquid than the securities of large-cap companies. This is because smaller companies may be more reliant on a few products, services or key personnel, which can make it riskier than investing in larger companies with more diverse product lines and structured management.

 

  Foreign Company and Emerging Markets Risk. The Equity Fund may invest a portion of its assets in stocks of companies based outside of the United States. Foreign securities involve additional risks, including those related to currency-rate fluctuations, political and economic instability, differences in financial reporting standards, and less-strict regulation of securities markets. These risks are greater in emerging markets.

 

  Portfolio Turnover Risk. High portfolio turnover involves correspondingly greater expenses to the Equity Fund, including brokerage commissions or dealer mark-ups and other transaction costs on the sale of securities and reinvestments in other securities, which may result in adverse tax consequences to the Equity Fund’s shareholders as compared to shareholders of investment companies that hold investments for a longer period.

 

  Multi-Style Management Risk. Because portions of the Equity Fund’s assets are managed by different portfolio managers using different styles, the Equity Fund could experience overlapping security transactions. Certain portfolio managers may be purchasing securities at the same time other portfolio
   

managers may be selling those same securities, which may lead to higher transaction expenses compared to a Fund using a single investment management style.

 

  Technology Investment Risk . The Equity Fund may invest a portion of its assets in the technology sector, which is a very volatile segment of the market. The nature of technology is that it is rapidly changing. Therefore, products or services that may initially look promising may subsequently fail or become obsolete. In addition, many technology companies are younger, smaller and unseasoned companies which may not have established products, an experienced management team, or earnings history.

Performance

 

The following performance information provides some indication of the risks of investing in the Equity Fund. The bar chart shows changes in the performance of the Equity Fund’s Institutional Class shares from year to year. The table below shows how the Equity Fund’s average annual total returns of the Institutional Class and Investor Class for the 1-, 5- and 10-year periods compare to those of a broad-based market index and an index of peer group mutual funds. Past performance, before and after taxes, does not necessarily indicate how the Equity Fund will perform in the future. Updated performance information is available on the Equity Fund’s website at www.mastersfunds.com.

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund - Institutional Class Calendar Year Total Returns as of December 31

LOGO

During the period shown above, the highest and lowest quarterly returns earned by the Equity Fund were:

 

Highest:

    21.39%      Quarter ended June 30, 2009

Lowest:

    -29.78%      Quarter ended December 31, 2008
 

 

 
Fund Summary         3


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund — (Continued)

 

Average Annual Total Returns

(for the periods ended December 31, 2016)

 

 

     One Year     Five Years     Ten Years  

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund

     

Institutional Class

     

Return Before Taxes

    11.98%       13.42%       5.59%  

Return After Taxes on Distributions

    10.52%       11.67%       4.55%  

Return After Taxes on Distributions and Sale of Fund Shares

    8.01%       10.51%       4.34%  

Investor Class

     

Return Before Taxes

    11.72%       13.21%       14.17%

Russell 3000 ® Index

     

(reflects no deduction for fees, expenses or taxes)

    12.74%       14.67%       7.07%  

Morningstar Large Blend Category

     

(reflects net performance of funds in this group)

    10.07%       12.61%       5.58%  

 

* The Return Before Taxes shown above for the Investor Class shares of the Equity Fund is from April 30, 2009 (the inception date for the class) through December 31, 2016.

The Equity Fund’s after-tax returns as shown in the above table are calculated using the historical highest applicable individual federal marginal income tax rates for the period and do not reflect the impact of state and local taxes. Your actual after-tax returns depend on your tax situation and may differ from those shown. If you own shares of the Equity Fund in a tax-deferred account, such as a 401(k) plan or an individual retirement account, after-tax returns shown are not relevant to your investment. After-tax returns are shown for only the Equity Fund’s Institutional Class, and after-tax returns for the Equity Fund’s Investor Class will vary. The after-tax returns on distributions and sale of Fund shares may be higher than returns before taxes due to the effect of a tax benefit an investor may receive from the realization of capital losses that would have been incurred on the sale of Fund shares.

 

 

Management

 

 

INVESTMENT ADVISOR   PORTFOLIO MANAGER   

MANAGED THE

EQUITY FUND SINCE:

Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC   Jeremy DeGroot, CFA, President of the Trust, Principal, Chief Investment Officer and Co-Portfolio Manager        2005  
  Jack Chee, Principal, Senior Research Analyst and Co-Portfolio Manager        2014  
    Rajat Jain, CFA, Principal, Senior Research Analyst and Co-Portfolio Manager        2014  
SUB-ADVISOR   PORTFOLIO MANAGER   

MANAGED THE

EQUITY FUND SINCE:

Davis Selected Advisers, L.P.   Christopher C. Davis, Chairman        1999  
    Danton Goei, Portfolio Manager        2016  
Fiduciary Management, Inc.   Patrick J. English, CFA, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Investment Officer        2013  
  Andy P. Ramer, CFA, Director of Research – Domestic Equities        2013  
    Jonathan T. Bloom, CFA, Director of Research – International Equities        2017  
Harris Associates L.P.   Clyde S. McGregor, CFA, Vice President and Portfolio Manager        2008  
    William C. Nygren, CFA, Vice President, Chief Investment Officer – U.S. Equity, Portfolio Manager and Investment Analyst        2013  
Nuance Investments, LLC   Scott Moore, CFA, President, Chief Investment Officer and Portfolio Manager        2014  
Sands Capital Management, LLC   Frank M. Sands, CFA, Chief Investment Officer and Chief Executive Officer        2008  
    A. Michael Sramek, CFA, Senior Portfolio Manager, Research Analyst, Managing Director        2008  
Wells Capital Management, Inc.   Richard T. Weiss, CFA, Managing Director, Senior Portfolio Manager        1996  

For important information about the purchase and sale of fund shares, tax information and financial intermediary compensation, please turn to the “Summary of Other Important Information Regarding the Funds” section on page 18 of this Prospectus.

 

 
4       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund

 

Summary Section

Investment Objective

 

The Litman Gregory Masters International Fund (the “International Fund”) seeks long-term growth of capital; that is, the increase in the value of your investment over the long term.

Fees and Expenses of the International Fund

 

This table describes the fees and expenses that you may pay if you buy and hold shares of the International Fund.

Shareholder Fees (fees paid directly from your investment)

 

     Institutional
Class
    Investor
Class
 
    None       None  

Annual Operating Expenses (expenses that you pay each year as a percentage of the value of your investment)

 

     Institutional
Class
    Investor
Class
 

Management Fees

    1.10%       1.10%  

Distribution (12b-1) Fees

    None       0.25%  

Other Expenses

    0.19%       0.19%  
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses (1)

    1.29%       1.54%  

Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement (2)

    -0.23%       -0.23%  

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses After Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement (1)(2)

    1.06%       1.31%  
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(1) The “Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses” and “Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses After Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement ” will not correlate to the corresponding ratios included in the International Fund’s Financial Highlights for that class of shares because the contractual operating expense limitation expired on April 30, 2017.

 

(2) Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC (“Litman Gregory”), the advisor to the International Fund, has contractually agreed, through April 30, 2018, to waive a portion of its advisory fees so that after paying all of the sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee as a percentage of the International Fund’s daily net assets retained by Litman Gregory is 0.40% on the first $1 billion of the International Fund’s assets and 0.30% on assets over $1 billion. This agreement may be terminated at any time by the Board of Trustees (the “Board”) of the Litman Gregory Funds Trust (the “Trust”) upon sixty (60) days’ written notice to Litman Gregory, and Litman Gregory may decline to renew this agreement by written notice to the Trust at least thirty (30) days before the agreement’s annual expiration date. Litman Gregory has waived its right to receive reimbursement of the portion of its advisory fees waived pursuant to this agreement.

Example

This example is intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the International Fund with the cost of investing in other mutual funds. The example assumes that you invest $10,000 in the International Fund for the time periods indicated and then redeem all of your shares at the end of those periods. The example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year and that the International Fund’s operating expenses remain the same. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions your costs would be:

 

     One Year     Three Years     Five Years     Ten Years  

Institutional Class

  $ 108     $ 378     $ 678     $ 1,529  

Investor Class

  $ 133     $ 456     $ 810     $ 1,808  

Portfolio Turnover

 

The International Fund pays transaction costs, such as commissions, when it buys and sells securities (or “turns over” its portfolio). A higher portfolio turnover rate may indicate higher transaction costs and may result in higher taxes when shares of the International Fund are held in a taxable account as compared to shares in investment companies that hold investments for a longer period. These costs, which are not reflected in annual fund operating expenses or in the example, affect the International Fund’s performance. During the most recent fiscal year, the International Fund’s portfolio turnover rate was 43.84% of the average value of its portfolio.

Principal Strategies

 

Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC, the advisor to the International Fund, believes that it is possible to identify international investment managers who, over a market cycle, will deliver superior returns relative to their peers. Litman Gregory also believes it can identify skilled stock pickers who, within their more diversified portfolios, have higher confidence in the return potential of some stocks than others. Litman Gregory believes a portfolio comprised only of these managers’ “higher confidence” stocks should outperform their more diversified portfolios over a market cycle.

Based on these beliefs, the International Fund’s strategy is to engage a number of proven managers as sub-advisors (each a “manager” or “sub-advisor”), with each manager investing in the securities of companies that it believes have strong appreciation potential. Under normal conditions, each sub-advisor manages a portion of the International Fund’s assets by independently managing a portfolio typically composed of between 8 and 15 stocks. There is no minimum or maximum allocation of the Fund’s portfolio assets to each sub-advisor. Under normal market conditions, the International Fund will invest at least 80% of its net assets, plus the amount of any borrowings for investment purposes, in the securities of companies organized or located outside of the United States, including large-, mid-, and small-cap companies and companies located in emerging markets. The International Fund ordinarily invests in the securities markets of at least five countries outside of the United States. Each sub-advisor uses its own discretion to invest in any sized company it deems appropriate. The managers have limited flexibility to invest in the securities of U.S. companies. By executing this strategy, the International Fund seeks to:

 

  combine the efforts of several experienced, high quality international managers;

 

  access the favorite stock-picking ideas of each manager at any point in time;

 

  deliver a portfolio that is prudently diversified in terms of stocks (typically 48 to 90) and industries while still allowing each manager to run portfolio segments focused on only his favorite stocks; and

 

  further diversify across different sized companies, countries, and stock-picking styles by including managers with a variety of stock-picking disciplines.
 

 

 
Fund Summary         5


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund — (Continued)

 

Generally, a security may be sold: (1) if the manager believes the security’s market price exceeds the manager’s estimate of intrinsic value; (2) if the manager’s view of the business fundamentals or management of the underlying company changes; (3) if a more attractive investment opportunity is found; (4) if general market conditions trigger a change in the manager’s assessment criteria; or (5) for other portfolio management reasons. The International Fund’s managers may trade its portfolio frequently.

Principal Risks

 

Investment in stocks exposes shareholders of the International Fund to the risk of losing money if the value of the stocks held by the International Fund declines during the period an investor owns shares in the International Fund. The following risks could affect the value of your investment:

 

  Market Risk. As with all mutual funds that invest in common stocks, the value of an individual’s investment will fluctuate daily in response to the performance of the individual stocks held in the International Fund. The stock market has been subject to significant volatility recently, which has increased the risks associated with an investment in the International Fund.

 

  Foreign Company and Emerging Markets Risk. The International Fund will normally be invested in securities of companies based outside of the United States. Foreign securities involve additional risks, including those related to currency-rate fluctuations, political and economic instability, differences in financial reporting standards, and less-strict regulation of securities markets. These risks are greater in emerging markets.

 

  Emerging Markets Risk.  The International Fund may invest a portion of its assets in emerging market countries. Emerging market countries are those with immature economic and political structures, and investing in emerging markets entails greater risk than in developed markets. Such risks could include those related to government dependence on a few industries or resources, government-imposed taxes on foreign investment or limits on the removal of capital from a country, unstable government, and volatile markets.

 

  Smaller Companies Risk. The International Fund may invest a portion of its assets in the securities of small- and mid-sized companies. Securities of small- and mid-cap companies are generally more volatile and less liquid than the securities of large-cap companies. This is because smaller companies may be more reliant on a few products, services or key personnel, which can make it riskier than investing in larger companies with more diverse product lines and structured management.

 

  Portfolio Turnover Risk. High portfolio turnover involves correspondingly greater expenses to the International Fund, including brokerage commissions or dealer mark-ups and other transaction costs on the sale of securities and reinvestments in other securities, which may result in adverse tax consequences to the International Fund’s shareholders as compared to shareholders of investment companies that hold investments for a longer period.
  Multi-Style Management Risk. Because portions of the International Fund’s assets are managed by different portfolio managers using different styles, the International Fund could experience overlapping security transactions. Certain portfolio managers may be purchasing securities at the same time other portfolio managers may be selling those same securities, which may lead to higher transaction expenses compared to a Fund using a single investment management style.

Performance

 

The following performance information provides some indication of the risks of investing in the International Fund. The bar chart shows changes in the performance of the International Fund’s Institutional Class shares from year to year. The table below shows how the International Fund’s average annual total returns of the Institutional Class and Investor Class for the 1-, 5- and 10-year periods compare to those of a broad-based market index, a secondary market index, as well as an index of peer group mutual funds. Past performance, before and after taxes, does not necessarily indicate how the International Fund will perform in the future. Updated performance information is available on the International Fund’s website at www.mastersfunds.com.

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund - Institutional Class Calendar Year Total Returns as of December 31

 

LOGO

During the period shown above, the highest and lowest quarterly returns earned by the International Fund were:

 

Highest:

    26.71%      Quarter ended June 30, 2009

Lowest:

    -24.94%      Quarter ended December 31, 2008
 

 

 
6       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Average Annual Total Returns

(for the periods ended December 31, 2016)

 

 

     One Year     Five Years     Ten Years  

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund

 

Institutional Class

     

Return Before Taxes

    -4.61%       5.02%       1.24%  

Return After Taxes on Distributions

    -5.35%       4.65%       0.50%  

Return After Taxes on Distributions and Sale of Fund Shares

    -1.70%       3.98%       1.03%  

Investor Class

     

Return Before Taxes

    -4.93%       4.74%       6.47%

MSCI ACWI ex-U.S. Index

     

(reflects no deduction for fees, expenses or taxes)**

    4.49%       5.00%       0.96%  

Russell Global ex U.S. Large Cap Index

     

(reflects no deduction for fees, expenses or taxes)

    4.84%       5.90%       1.77%  

MSCI EAFE Index

     

(reflects no deduction of fees, expenses or taxes)

    1.00%       6.53%       0.75%  

Morningstar Foreign Large Blend Category

     

(reflects net performance of funds in this group)

    0.66%       5.80%       0.39%  

 

* The Return Before Taxes shown above for the Investor Class shares of the International Fund is from April 30, 2009 (the inception date for the class) through December 31, 2016.

 

** The International Fund changed its primary benchmark back to the MSCI ACWI ex-U.S. Index, the Fund’s original Index. While the Russell Global ex U.S. Large Cap Index gave the International Fund access to constituent data with relative ease, the Index is not as widely followed or used by investors as the MSCI ACWI ex-U.S. Index.

The International Fund’s after-tax returns as shown in the above table are calculated using the historical highest applicable individual federal marginal income tax rates for the period and do not reflect the impact of state and local taxes. Your actual after-tax returns depend on your tax situation and may differ from those shown. If you own shares of the International Fund in a tax-deferred account, such as a 401(k) plan or an individual retirement account, after-tax returns shown are not relevant to your investment. After-tax returns are shown for only the International Fund’s Institutional Class, and after-tax returns for the International Fund’s Investor Class will vary. The after-tax returns on distributions and sale of Fund shares may be higher than returns before taxes due to the effect of a tax benefit an investor may receive from the realization of capital losses that would have been incurred on the sale of Fund shares.

 

 

 
Fund Summary         7


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund — (Continued)

 

Management

 

 

INVESTMENT ADVISOR   PORTFOLIO MANAGER    MANAGED THE
INTERNATIONAL
FUND SINCE:
Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC   Jeremy DeGroot, CFA, President of the Trust, Principal, Chief Investment Officer and Co-Portfolio Manager        2005  
    Rajat Jain, Principal, CFA, Senior Research Analyst and Co-Portfolio Manager        2014  
SUB-ADVISOR   PORTFOLIO MANAGER   

MANAGED THE

INTERNATIONAL
FUND SINCE:

Evermore Global Advisors, LLC   David E. Marcus, Chief Investment Officer, Portfolio Manager        2017  
Harris Associates L.P.   David G. Herro, CFA, Deputy Chairman, Portfolio Manager and Chief Investment Officer, International Equity        1997  
Lazard Asset Management LLC   Mark Little, Portfolio Manager/Analyst        2013  
Northern Cross, LLC   Howard Appleby, CFA, Portfolio Manager        2007  
  Jean-Francois Ducrest, Portfolio Manager        2007  
    James LaTorre, CFA, Portfolio Manager        2007  
Pictet Asset Management, Ltd.   Fabio Paolini, CFA, Portfolio Manager, Head of EAFE Equities        2016  
    Benjamin (Ben) Beneche, CFA, Portfolio Manager, Senior Investment Manager        2016  
Thornburg Investment Management, Inc.   W. Vinson Walden, CFA, Portfolio Manager        2008  

For important information about the purchase and sale of fund shares, tax information and financial intermediary compensation, please turn to the “Summary of Other Important Information Regarding the Funds” section on page 18 of this Prospectus.

 

 
8       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund

 

Summary Section

Investment Objective

 

The Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund (the “Smaller Companies Fund”) seeks long-term growth of capital; that is, the increase in the value of your investment over the long term.

Fees and Expenses of the Smaller Companies Fund

 

This table describes the fees and expenses that you may pay if you buy and hold shares of the Smaller Companies Fund.

Shareholder Fees (paid directly from your investment)

 

     Institutional Class  
    None  

Annual Operating Expenses (expenses that you pay each year as a percentage of the value of your investment)

 

     Institutional Class  

Management Fees

    1.14%  

Other Expenses

    0.54%  
 

 

 

 

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses (1)

    1.68%  

Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement ( 2 )

    -0.42%  

 

 

 

 

 

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses After Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement (1)(2)

    1.26%  
 

 

 

 

 

(1) The “Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses” and “Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses After Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement” will not correlate to the corresponding ratios included in the Smaller Companies Fund’s Financial Highlights due to a one-time expense reimbursement.

 

(2) Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC (“Litman Gregory”), the advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund, has contractually agreed, through April 30, 2018, to waive a portion of its advisory fees so that after paying all of the sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee as a percentage of the Smaller Companies Fund’s daily net assets retained by Litman Gregory is 0.26%. This agreement may be terminated at any time by the Board of Trustees of the Litman Gregory Funds Trust (the “Trust”) upon sixty (60) days’ written notice to Litman Gregory, and Litman Gregory may decline to renew this agreement by written notice to the Trust at least thirty (30) days before the agreement’s annual expiration date. Litman Gregory has waived its right to receive reimbursement of the portion of its advisory fees waived pursuant to this agreement.

Example

This example is intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the Smaller Companies Fund with the cost of investing in other mutual funds. The example assumes that you invest $10,000 in the Smaller Companies Fund for the time periods indicated and then redeem all of your shares at the end of those periods. The example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year and that the Smaller Companies Fund’s operating expenses remain the same. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions your costs would be:

 

     One Year     Three Years     Five Years     Ten Years  

Institutional Class

  $ 171     $ 530     $ 913     $ 1,987  

Portfolio Turnover

 

The Smaller Companies Fund pays transaction costs, such as commissions, when it buys and sells securities (or “turns over” its portfolio). A higher portfolio turnover rate may indicate higher transaction costs and may result in higher taxes when shares of the Smaller Companies Fund are held in a taxable account as compared to shares in investment companies that hold investments for a longer period. These costs, which are not reflected in annual fund operating expenses or in the example, affect the Smaller Companies Fund’s performance. During the most recent fiscal year, the Smaller Companies Fund’s portfolio turnover rate was 51.32% of the average value of its portfolio.

Principal Strategies

 

Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC, the advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund, believes that it is possible to identify investment managers who, over a market cycle, will deliver superior returns relative to their peer groups. Litman Gregory also believes it can identify skilled stock pickers who, within their more diversified portfolios, have higher confidence in the return potential of some stocks than others. Litman Gregory believes a portfolio comprised only of these managers’ “higher confidence” stocks should outperform their more diversified portfolios over a market cycle.

Based on these beliefs, the Smaller Companies Fund’s strategy is to engage a number of proven managers as sub-advisors (each a “manager” or “sub-advisor’), with each manager investing in the securities of smaller companies that it believes have strong appreciation potential. Under normal conditions, each sub-advisor manages a portion of the Smaller Companies Fund’s assets by independently managing a portfolio typically composed of between 8 and 15 stocks. There is no minimum or maximum allocation of the Fund’s portfolio assets to each sub-advisor. Under normal market conditions, the Smaller Companies Fund invests at least 80% of its net assets, plus the amount of any borrowings for investment purposes, in securities of small- and mid-sized U.S. companies. The managers have limited flexibility to invest in the securities of foreign companies, including emerging markets (up to 15% of the Smaller Companies Fund’s net assets may be invested in foreign securities). By executing this strategy, the Smaller Companies Fund seeks to:

 

  combine the efforts of several experienced, high quality managers;

 

  access the favorite stock-picking ideas of each manager at any point in time;

 

  deliver a portfolio that is prudently diversified in terms of stocks (typically 24 to 45) and industries while still allowing each manager to run portfolio segments focused on only his favorite stocks; and

 

  further diversify across stock-picking styles by including managers with a variety of stock-picking disciplines.
 

 

 
Fund Summary         9


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund — (Continued)

 

Litman Gregory defines a “smaller company” as one whose market capitalization falls below the market capitalization of the largest company in the Russell 2500 ® Index, which, as of March 31, 2017, was $19.8 billion. The Russell 2500 ® Index measures the performance of 2,500 small- and mid-sized companies with market capitalizations averaging $4.6 billion as of March 31, 2017. Generally, Litman Gregory believes the majority of the Smaller Companies Fund’s holdings will typically fall within the range of the Russell 2000 ® Index, but the Smaller Companies Fund has the flexibility to hold mid-sized companies if the managers believe that holding these companies will lead to higher overall returns. As of March 31, 2017, the largest company in the Russell 2000 ® Index had a market capitalization of $13.2 billion.

Generally, a security may be sold: (1) if the manager believes the security’s market price exceeds the manager’s estimate of intrinsic value; (2) if the manager’s view of the business fundamentals or management of the underlying company changes; (3) if a more attractive investment opportunity is found; (4) if general market conditions trigger a change in the manager’s assessment criteria; or (5) for other portfolio management reasons. The Smaller Companies Fund’s investment managers may trade its portfolio frequently.

Principal Risks

 

Investment in stocks exposes shareholders of the Smaller Companies Fund to the risk of losing money if the value of the stocks held by the Smaller Companies Fund declines during the period an investor owns shares in the Smaller Companies Fund. The following risks could affect the value of your investment:

 

  Market Risk. As with all mutual funds that invest in common stocks, the value of an individual’s investment will fluctuate daily in response to the performance of the individual stocks held in the Smaller Companies Fund. The stock market has been subject to significant volatility recently, which has increased the risks associated with an investment in the Smaller Companies Fund.

 

  Smaller Companies Risk. The Smaller Companies Fund may invest a portion of its assets in the securities of small- and, at times, mid-sized companies. Securities of small-cap companies are generally more volatile and less liquid than the securities of large-cap companies. This is because small companies may be more reliant on a few products, services or key personnel, which can make it riskier than investing in larger companies with more diverse product lines and structured management.

 

  Portfolio Turnover Risk. High portfolio turnover involves correspondingly greater expenses to the Smaller Companies Fund, including brokerage commissions or dealer mark-ups and other transaction costs on the sale of securities and reinvestments in other securities, which may result in adverse tax consequences to the Smaller Companies Fund’s shareholders as compared to shareholders in investment companies that hold investments for a longer period.
  Multi-Style Management Risk.  Because portions of the Smaller Companies Fund’s assets are managed by different portfolio managers using different styles, the Smaller Companies Fund could experience overlapping security transactions. Certain portfolio managers may be purchasing securities at the same time other portfolio managers may be selling those same securities, which may lead to higher transaction expenses compared to a fund using a single investment management style.

Performance

 

The following performance information provides some indication of the risks of investing in the Smaller Companies Fund. The bar chart shows changes in the performance of the Smaller Companies Fund’s Institutional Class shares from year to year. The table below shows how the Smaller Companies Fund’s average annual total returns of the Institutional Class for the 1-, 5- and 10-year periods compare to those of a broad-based market index and an index of peer group mutual funds. Past performance, before and after taxes, does not necessarily indicate how the Smaller Companies Fund will perform in the future. Updated performance information is available on the Smaller Companies Fund’s website at www.mastersfunds.com.

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund - Institutional Class Calendar Year Total Returns as of December 31

 

LOGO

During the period shown above, the highest and lowest quarterly returns earned by the Smaller Companies Fund were:

 

Highest:

    31.77%      Quarter ended June 30, 2009

Lowest:

    -28.14%      Quarter ended December 31, 2008
 

 

 
10       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Average Annual Total Returns

(for the periods ended December 31, 2016)

 

 

     One Year     Five Years     Ten Years  

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund

 

Institutional Class

     

Return Before Taxes

    18.82     9.91     5.23

Return After Taxes on Distributions

    18.82     9.91     4.91

Return After Taxes on Distributions and Sale of Fund Shares

    10.65     7.87     4.13

Russell 2000 ® Index

     

(reflects no deduction for fees, expenses or taxes)

    21.31     14.46     7.07

Morningstar Small Blend Category

     

(reflects net performance of funds in this group)

    20.62     13.46     6.40

The Smaller Companies Fund’s after-tax returns as shown in the above table are calculated using the historical highest applicable individual federal marginal income tax rates for the period and do not reflect the impact of state and local taxes. Your actual after-tax returns depend on your tax situation and may differ from those shown. If you own shares of the Smaller Companies Fund in a tax-deferred account, such as a 401(k) plan or an individual retirement account, after-tax returns shown are not relevant to your investment. The after-tax returns on distributions and sale of Fund shares may be higher than returns before taxes due to the effect of a tax benefit an investor may receive from the realization of capital losses that would have been incurred on the sale of Fund shares.

 

 

Management

 

 

INVESTMENT ADVISOR   PORTFOLIO MANAGER    MANAGED THE SMALLER
COMPANIES FUND SINCE:
Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC   Jeremy DeGroot, CFA, President of the Trust, Principal, Chief Investment Officer and Co-Portfolio Manager        2005  
    Jack Chee, Principal, Senior Research Analyst and Co-Portfolio Manager        2014  
SUB-ADVISOR   PORTFOLIO MANAGER    MANAGED THE SMALLER
COMPANIES FUND SINCE:
Cove Street Capital, LLC   Jeffrey Bronchick, CFA, Managing Member, Portfolio Manager        2011  
First Pacific Advisors, LLC   Dennis Bryan, Partner and Portfolio Manager        2010  
    Arik Ahitov, Partner and Portfolio Manager        2014  
Wells Capital Management, Inc.   Richard T. Weiss, CFA, Managing Director and Senior Portfolio Manager        2003  

For important information about the purchase and sale of fund shares, tax information and financial intermediary compensation, please turn to the “Summary of Other Important Information Regarding the Funds” section on page 18 of this Prospectus.

 

 
Fund Summary         11


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund

 

Summary Section

Investment Objective

 

The Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund (the “Alternative Strategies Fund”) seeks to achieve long-term returns with lower risk and lower volatility than the stock market, and with relatively low correlation to stock and bond market indexes.

Fees and Expenses of the Alternative Strategies Fund

 

This table describes the fees and expenses that you may pay if you buy and hold shares of the Alternative Strategies Fund.

Shareholder Fees (fees paid directly from your investment)

 

     Institutional
Class
    Investor
Class
 
    None       None  

Annual Operating Expenses (expenses that you pay each year as a percentage of the value of your investment)

 

     Institutional
Class
   

Investor

Class

 

Management Fees

    1.40%       1.40%  

Distribution and or Service (12b-1) Fees

    None       0.25%  

Other Expenses Not Including Dividend or Interest Expense

    0.15%       0.15%  

Dividend and Interest Expense

    0.28%       0.28%  
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total Other Expenses

    0.43%       0.43%  
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses

    1.83%       2.08%  

Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement (1)(2)

    -0.08%       -0.08%  

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses After Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement (1)(2)

    1.75%       2.00%  
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(1) Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC (“Litman Gregory”), the advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund, has contractually agreed, through April 30, 2018, to waive a portion of its advisory fees so that after paying all of the sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee as a percentage of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s daily net assets retained by Litman Gregory is 0.50% on the first $2 billion of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets, 0.40% of the next $1 billion of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets, 0.35% of the next $1 billion of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets and 0.30% on assets over $4 billion. This agreement may be terminated at any time by the Board of Trustees (the “Board”) of the Litman Gregory Funds Trust (the “Trust”) upon sixty (60) days’ written notice to Litman Gregory, and Litman Gregory may decline to renew this agreement by written notice to the Trust at least thirty (30) days before the agreement’s annual expiration date. Litman Gregory has waived its right to receive reimbursement of the portion of its advisory fees waived pursuant to this agreement.

 

(2) Litman Gregory has also contractually agreed to limit the Alternative Strategies Fund’s operating expenses (including management fees payable to Litman Gregory but excluding any taxes, interest, brokerage commissions, expenses incurred in connection with any merger or reorganization, borrowing costs (including commitment fees), dividend expenses, acquired fund fees and expenses and extraordinary expenses such as but not limited to litigation costs) through April 30, 2018 (unless otherwise sooner terminated) to an annual rate of 1.49% for the Institutional Class and 1.74% for the Investor Class (the “Operating Expense Limitation”). Because operating expenses do not include dividend and interest expense, which fluctuates depending on the portfolio composition, the Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses After Fee Waiver and/or Expense Reimbursement disclosed in this table may exceed the Operating Expense Limitation. This agreement may be renewed for additional periods not exceeding one (1) year and may be terminated by the Board upon sixty (60) days’ written notice to Litman Gregory. Litman Gregory may also decline to renew this agreement by written notice to the Trust at least thirty (30) days before the renewal date. Any fee waiver or expense reimbursement made by Litman Gregory pursuant to this agreement is subject to the repayment by the Alternative Strategies Fund within three (3) years following the fiscal year in which the fee waiver or expense reimbursement occurred but only if the Alternative Strategies Fund is able to make the repayment without exceeding its current expense limitation and the repayment is approved by the Board.

Example

This example is intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the Alternative Strategies Fund with the cost of investing in other mutual funds. The example assumes that you invest $10,000 in the Alternative Strategies Fund for the time periods indicated and then redeem all of your shares at the end of those periods. The example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year and that the Alternative Strategies Fund’s operating expenses remain the same (taking into account the contractual expense waiver only in the first year). Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions your costs would be:

 

     One Year     Three Years     Five Years     Ten Years  

Institutional Class

  $ 178     $ 568     $ 983     $ 2,141  

Investor Class

  $ 203     $ 644     $ 1,111     $ 2,404  

Portfolio Turnover

 

The Alternative Strategies Fund pays transaction costs, such as commissions, when it buys and sells securities (or “turns over” its portfolio). A higher portfolio turnover rate may indicate higher transaction costs and may result in higher taxes when shares of the Alternative Strategies Fund are held in a taxable account as compared to shares in investment companies that hold investments for a longer period. These costs, which are not reflected in the annual fund operating expenses or in the example, will affect the Alternative Strategies Fund’s performance. During the most recent fiscal period, the Alternative Strategies Fund’s portfolio turnover rate was 142.24% of the average value of its portfolio.

Principal Strategies

 

Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC, the advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund, believes that it is possible to identify highly skilled and experienced investment managers who can successfully execute various investment approaches that target materially lower volatility than the stock market or that have a low correlation or low sensitivity to traditional investment strategies, or both, so that the overall performance of the Alternative Strategies Fund is not heavily dependent on steadily rising stock or bond market to earn its return over a market cycle. Furthermore, Litman Gregory believes that by allocating assets among multiple investment managers with different but complementary strategies it can further enhance the risk-adjusted return potential of an overall fund portfolio over a full market cycle. Over the long term, Litman Gregory’s goal is to achieve an annualized return of LIBOR plus a range of 4% to 8%. (LIBOR is short for the London Interbank Offered Rate, an interest rate used by banks for short-term loans to each other.) Litman Gregory has established this goal to emphasize the importance of preserving and increasing shareholders’ capital investment rather than simply beating an index, and we use it to select managers and allocate assets among them. Of course there are no guarantees that we will achieve this goal, and

 

 

 
12       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

investors may experience losses, especially over shorter time periods.

Based on these beliefs, the Alternative Strategies Fund’s strategy is to engage a number of established investment managers as sub-advisors (each a “sub-advisor” or “manager”) to offer investors a mix of strategies that Litman Gregory believes offer risk-return characteristics that are attractive individually and even more compelling collectively. The Alternative Strategies Fund is intended to be used by investors as a source of diversification for traditional stock and bond portfolios to reduce volatility and potentially enhance returns relative to various measures of risk.

Allocations among sub-advisors are based on a number of factors, including Litman Gregory’s expectation for the risk-adjusted return potential of each sub-advisor’s strategy and the impact on overall portfolio risk, with the objective of maximizing return subject to the goals of low volatility and relatively low correlation with broad financial markets, especially the stock market. Litman Gregory may at times adjust the allocations of capital to sub-advisors if it believes there is a highly compelling tactical opportunity in a particular sub-advisor’s strategy. A tactical opportunity could represent the potential for an exceptional risk-adjusted return opportunity relative to the other strategies, or it may represent a superior risk reduction opportunity that could benefit the Alternative Strategies Fund’s overall portfolio. Portfolio assets will be tactically allocated to the sub-advisors in accordance with the target allocation range for each sub-advisor as measured at the time of allocation. It is possible that additional managers and strategies will be added to the Alternative Strategies Fund in the future.

Sub-advisor strategies may seek to benefit from: opportunities to combine securities with differing risk characteristics; market inefficiencies; arbitrage opportunities; opportunities to provide liquidity; tactical opportunities in asset classes or securities; special situations such as spin offs; as well as other opportunities in areas such as real estate or managed futures. In the aggregate, the managers can invest globally in stocks of companies of any size, domicile or market capitalization, government and corporate bonds and other fixed income securities and currencies, including short positions of any of the foregoing, within their respective segments of the Alternative Strategies Fund. They may also invest in derivatives, including, without limitation, options, futures contracts, participatory notes (“P-Notes”) and swaps, to manage risk or enhance return and can also borrow amounts up to one third of the value of the Fund’s total assets (except that the Fund may exceed this limit to satisfy redemption requests or for other temporary purposes). Each of the managers may invest in illiquid securities; however, the Alternative Strategies Fund as a whole may not hold more than 15% of its net assets in illiquid securities. In some cases, the sub-advisors may seek to replicate strategies they employ in their private (hedge) funds. In other cases, the sub-advisors may seek to enhance strategies they run in other public funds by focusing on their highest conviction ideas to a greater extent or by pursuing certain aspects of their strategies with greater flexibility. However, the Alternative Strategies Fund

will only invest directly in portfolio securities selected by the sub-advisors and will not invest in any pooled investment vehicles or accounts managed by the sub-advisors.

Each sub-advisor will have an investment approach that generally focuses on a particular asset class or specific strategies. Currently, the strategies the sub-advisors focus on are as follows: (1) an arbitrage oriented strategy, (2) an opportunistic income strategy which will often focus on mortgage related securities, (3) a contrarian opportunity strategy that allows tactical investments throughout the capital structure (stocks and bonds), asset classes, market capitalization, industries and geographies, (4) a liquid long/short equity strategy, and (5) a strategic alpha strategy that focuses on the tactical allocation of long and short global fixed income opportunities and currencies. Litman Gregory may hire sub-advisors that focus on other strategies in the future, and not all strategies that may be appropriate will be represented in the Alternative Strategies Fund’s portfolio at all times.

The sub-advisor that manages the arbitrage strategy seeks to generate long-term returns of at least mid-single-digits with low correlation to the equity and bond markets and may follow merger arbitrage, convertible arbitrage and capital structure arbitrage strategies. This objective is pursued by investing in equity and debt securities of U.S. and non-U.S. companies that are impacted by corporate events such as mergers, acquisitions, restructurings, refinancings, recapitalizations, reorganizations or other special situations.

The sub-advisor that manages the opportunistic income strategy allocates investments to fixed income instruments and other investments with no limit on the duration of the portfolio. The sub-advisor may invest in, without limitation, asset-backed securities; domestic and foreign corporate bonds, including high-yield bonds; municipal bonds; bonds or other obligations issued by domestic or foreign governments, including emerging markets countries; real estate investment trust (“REIT”) debt securities; and mortgage related securities. When investing in mortgage-related securities, the sub-advisor may invest in obligations issued or guaranteed by agencies or instrumentalities of the U.S. Government; collateralized mortgage obligations (“CMOs”) issued by domestic or foreign private issuers that represent an interest in or are collateralized by mortgage related securities issued by agencies or instrumentalities of the U.S. Government; commercial mortgage backed securities (“CMBS”); obligations issued by private issuers that represent an interest in or are collateralized by whole mortgage loans or mortgage related securities without a government guarantee but typically with some form of private credit enhancement; “interest only” and “principal only” stripped mortgage securities; inverse floating rate securities; and debt or equity tranches of collateralized debt obligations collateralized by mortgage related securities.

The sub-advisor that manages the contrarian opportunity strategy focuses on investments that offer absolute rather than relative value. The goal is to provide equity-like returns over longer periods ( i.e. , five to seven years) while protecting against the permanent loss of capital. Attention is directed toward those

 

 

 
Fund Summary         13


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund — (Continued)

 

companies offering the best combination of such quality criteria as strong market share, good management, and high normalized return on capital.

The sub-advisor that manages the long/short strategy focuses on identifying durable and investable macroeconomic and industry specific themes that have the potential to drive returns over a longer timeframe than the market’s typical focus. Within these themes, the sub-advisor seeks to find compelling global investment opportunities (both long and short) based on fundamental company- and industry-specific research and analysis. However, investment ideas do not need to be part of a theme, and some of the biggest positions are idiosyncratic and company-specific. In addition to its thematic and bottom-up fundamental research, the sub-advisor also incorporates a variety of risk analytics in constructing and managing the portfolio.

The sub-advisor that manages the strategic alpha strategy seeks to achieve positive total returns over a full market cycle with relatively low volatility. The sub-advisor intends to pursue its objective by utilizing a flexible investment approach that allocates investments across a global range of investment opportunities related to credit, currencies and interest rates, while employing risk management strategies designed to mitigate downside risk. Under normal market conditions, the sub-advisor may invest (1) up to 75% of the total assets allocated to it in below investment-grade fixed income securities and related derivatives; (2) up to 75% of the total assets allocated to it in investments denominated in non-U.S. currencies and related derivatives, including up to 50% in investments denominated in emerging market currencies and related derivatives; and (3) up to 20% of the total assets allocated to it in equity related securities and derivatives as measured at time of allocation. A “related derivative” of a financial instrument means any derivative whose value is based upon or derived from that financial instrument or a related derivative of that financial instrument.

Principal Risks

 

As with all mutual funds, it is possible to lose money on an investment in the Alternative Strategies Fund. An investment in the Alternative Strategies Fund is not a deposit of any bank and is not guaranteed, endorsed or insured by any financial institution, government authority or the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC). The principal risks of investing in the Alternative Strategies Fund are:

 

  Equity Securities Risk. This is the risk that the value of equity securities may fluctuate, sometimes rapidly and unpredictably, due to factors affecting the general market, an entire industry or sector, or particular companies. These factors include, without limitation, adverse changes in economic conditions, the general outlook for corporate earnings, interest rates or investor sentiment; increases in production costs; and significant management decisions. This risk is greater for small- and medium-sized companies, which tend to be more vulnerable to adverse developments than larger companies.
  Debt Securities Risk. This is the risk that the value and liquidity of debt securities may be reduced under certain circumstances. The value of debt securities can fluctuate in response to issuer activity and changes in general economic and credit market conditions, including changes in interest rates. It is likely there will be less governmental action in the near future to maintain low interest rates. The negative impact on debt securities from the resulting rate increases for that and other reasons could be swift and significant. In recent years, dealer capacity in the debt and fixed income markets appears to have undergone fundamental changes, including a reduction in dealer market-making capacity. These changes have the potential to decrease substantially liquidity and increase volatility in the debt and fixed income markets.

 

  Below Investment-Grade Fixed Income Securities Risk. This is the risk of investing in below investment-grade fixed income securities (also known as “junk bonds”), which may be greater than that of higher rated fixed income securities. These securities are rated Ba1 through C by Moody’s Investors Service (“Moody’s”) or BB+ through D by Standard & Poor’s Rating Group (“S&P”) (or comparably rated by another nationally recognized statistical rating organization), or, if not rated by Moody’s or S&P, are considered by the sub-advisors to be of similar quality. These securities have greater risk of default than higher rated securities. The market value of these securities is more sensitive to corporate developments and economic conditions and can be volatile. Market conditions can diminish liquidity and make accurate valuations difficult to obtain. There is no limit to the Alternative Strategies Fund’s ability to invest in below investment-grade fixed income securities; however, under normal market conditions, it does not expect to invest more than 50% of its total assets in below investment-grade fixed income securities.

 

  Interest Rate Risk.  This is the risk that debt securities will decline in value because of changes in interest rates. A fund with a longer average portfolio duration will be more sensitive to changes in interest rates than a fund with a shorter average portfolio duration.

 

  Credit Risk. This is the risk that the Alternative Strategies Fund could lose money if the issuer or guarantor of a fixed income security, or the counterparty of a derivatives contract or other transaction, is unable or unwilling (or is perceived to be unable or unwilling) to make timely payment of principal and/or interest, or to otherwise honor its obligations.

 

  Convertible Securities Risk.  This is the risk that the market value of convertible securities may fluctuate due to changes in, among other things, interest rates; other general economic conditions; industry fundamentals; market sentiment; the issuer’s operating results, financial statements, and credit ratings; and the market value of the underlying common or preferred stock.

 

  Capital Structure Arbitrage Risk.  The perceived mispricing identified by the sub-advisor may not disappear or may even increase, in which case losses may be realized.

 

 

Convertible Arbitrage Risk. Arbitrage strategies involve engaging in transactions that attempt to exploit price

 

 

 
14       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents
   

differences of identical, related or similar securities on different markets or in different forms. A Fund may realize losses or reduced rate of return if underlying relationships among securities in which investment positions are taken change in an adverse manner or a transaction is unexpectedly terminated or delayed. Trading to seek short-term capital appreciation can be expected to cause the Fund’s portfolio turnover rate to be substantially higher than that of the average equity-oriented investment company, resulting in higher transaction costs and additional capital gains tax liabilities.

 

  Event-Driven Risk.  Event-driven investments involve the risk that certain of the events driving the investment may not happen or the market may react differently than expected to the anticipated transaction. In addition, although an event may occur or is announced, it may be renegotiated, terminated or involve a longer time frame than originally contemplated. Event-driven investment transactions are also subject to the risk of overall market movements. Any one of these risks could cause the Fund to experience investment losses, impacting its shares negatively.

 

  Mortgage-Backed Securities Risk.  This is the risk of investing in mortgaged-backed securities, which includes interest rate risk, prepayment risk and the risk of defaults on the mortgage loans underlying these securities.

 

  Foreign Investment and Emerging Markets Risk. This is the risk that an investment in foreign (non-U.S.) securities may cause the Alternative Strategies Fund to experience more rapid and extreme changes in value than a fund that invests exclusively in securities of U.S. companies, due to factors such as currency conversion rate fluctuations, currency blockages, political and economic instability, differences in financial reporting, accounting and auditing standards, nationalization, expropriation or confiscatory taxation, and smaller and less-strict regulation of securities markets. These risks are greater in emerging markets. There is no limit to the Alternative Strategies Fund’s ability to invest in emerging market securities; however, under normal market conditions, it does not expect to invest more than 50% of its total assets in emerging market securities.

 

  Currency Risk.  This is the risk that investing in foreign currencies may expose the Alternative Strategies Fund to fluctuations in currency exchange rates and that such fluctuations in the exchange rates may negatively affect an investment related to a currency or denominated in a foreign currency. The Alternative Strategies Fund may invest in foreign currencies for investment and hedging purposes.

 

  Leverage Risk.  This is the risk that leverage may cause the effect of an increase or decrease in the value of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s portfolio securities to be magnified and the Alternative Strategies Fund to be more volatile than if leverage was not used. Leverage may result from certain transactions, including the use of derivatives and borrowing.

 

  Derivatives Risk.  This is the risk that an investment in derivatives may not correlate completely to the performance of the underlying securities and may be volatile and that the
   

insolvency of the counterparty to a derivative instrument could cause the Alternative Strategies Fund to lose all or substantially all of its investment in the derivative instrument, as well as the benefits derived therefrom.

 

  ¡     Options Risk.  This is the risk that an investment in options may be subject to greater fluctuation than an investment in the underlying instruments themselves and may be subject to a complete loss of the amounts paid as premiums to purchase the options.

 

  ¡     Futures Contracts Risk.  This is the risk that an investment in futures contracts may be subject to losses that exceed the amount of the premiums paid and may subject the Alternative Strategies Fund’s net asset value to greater volatility.

 

  ¡     P-Notes Risk. This is the risk that the performance results of P-Notes will not replicate exactly the performance of the issuers or markets that the P-Notes seek to replicate. Investments in P-Notes involve risks normally associated with a direct investment in the underlying securities as well as additional risks, such as counterparty risk.

 

  ¡     Swaps Risk.  Risks inherent in the use of swaps include: (1) swap contracts may not be assigned without the consent of the counterparty; (2) potential default of the counterparty to the swap; (3) absence of a liquid secondary market for any particular swap at any time; and (4) possible inability of the Alternative Strategies Fund to close out the swap transaction at a time that otherwise would be favorable for it to do so.

 

  Short Sale Risk.  This is the risk that the value of a security the Alternative Strategies Fund sells short does not go down as expected. The risk of loss is theoretically unlimited if the value of the security sold short continues to increase. In addition, short sales may cause the Alternative Strategies Fund to be compelled, at a time disadvantageous to it, to buy the security previously sold short, thus resulting in a loss. To meet current margin requirements, the Alternative Strategies Fund is required to deposit with the broker additional cash or securities so that the total deposit with the broker is maintained daily at 150% of the current market value of the securities sold short.

 

  Merger Arbitrage Risk.  This is the risk that a proposed reorganization in which the Alternative Strategies Fund invests may be renegotiated or terminated.

 

  Multi-Style Management Risk.  This is the risk that the Alternative Strategies Fund could experience overlapping security transactions as a result of having different portfolio managers using different strategies to manage the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets. Certain portfolio managers may be purchasing securities at the same time other portfolio managers may be selling those same securities, which may lead to higher transaction expenses compared to a fund using a single investment strategy.

 

 

Portfolio Turnover Risk.  This is the risk that the Alternative Strategies Fund may experience high portfolio turnover rates as a result of its investment strategies. High portfolio turnover rates may indicate higher transaction costs and may result in higher taxes when shares of the Alternative Strategies Fund

 

 

 
Fund Summary         15


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund — (Continued)

 

    are held in a taxable account as compared to shares in investment companies that hold investments for a longer period.

 

  Unfavorable Tax Treatment Risk. This is the risk that a material portion of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s return could be in the form of net investment income or short-term capital gains, some of which may be distributed to shareholders and taxed at ordinary income tax rates. Therefore, shareholders may have a greater need to pay regular taxes than compared to other investment strategies that hold investments longer. Due to this investment strategy, it may be preferable for certain shareholders to invest in the Fund through pre-tax or tax-deferred accounts as compared to investment through currently taxable accounts. Potential shareholders are encouraged to consult their tax advisors in this regard.

Performance

 

The following performance information provides some indication of the risks of investing in the Alternative Strategies Fund. The bar chart shows changes in the performance of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s Institutional Class shares from year to year. The table below shows how the Alternative Strategies Fund’s average annual total returns of the Institutional Class and Investor Class for the 1-, 5-year and since inception periods compare to those of a broad-based market index, two secondary market indexes, the 3-month LIBOR as well as an index of peer group mutual funds. Past performance, before and after taxes, does not necessarily indicate how the Alternative Strategies Fund will perform in the future. Updated performance information is available on the Alternative Strategies Fund’s website at www.mastersfunds.com.

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund - Institutional Class Calendar Year Total Returns

as of December 31

 

LOGO

During the period shown above, the highest and lowest quarterly returns earned by the Alternative Strategies Fund were:

 

Highest:

    4.07%      Quarter ended March 31, 2012

Lowest:

    -2.74%      Quarter ended September 30, 2015

Average Annual Total Returns

(for the periods ended December 31, 2016)

 

 

     One Year     Five Years    

Since Fund
Inception

(9/30/2011)

 

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund

 

Institutional Class

     

Return Before Taxes

    6.87     -5.02     5.45

Return After Taxes on Distributions

    5.78     -3.93     4.38

Return After Taxes on Distributions and Sale of Fund Shares

    3.98     -3.47     3.82

Investor Class

     

Return Before Taxes

    6.67     -4.80     5.22

Bloomberg Barclays U.S.

     

Aggregate Bond Index

     

(reflects no deduction for fees, expenses or taxes)

    2.66     -2.24     2.35

3-Month LIBOR

     

(reflects no deduction for fees, expenses or taxes)

    0.68     0.40     0.39

Morningstar Multialternative

     

Category

     

(reflects net performance of funds in this group)

    0.76     -1.28     1.49

Russell 1000 ® Index

     

(reflects no deduction for fees, expenses or taxes)

    12.05     -14.69     16.40

HFRX Global Hedge Fund Index

     

(reflects no deduction for fees, expenses or taxes)

    2.51     1.64     1.47

The Alternative Strategies Fund’s after-tax returns as shown in the above table are calculated using the historical highest applicable individual federal marginal income tax rates for the period and do not reflect the impact of state and local taxes. Your actual after-tax returns depend on your tax situation and may differ from those shown. If you own shares of the Alternative Strategies Fund in a tax-deferred account, such as a 401(k) plan or an individual retirement account after-tax returns shown are not relevant to your investment. After-tax returns are shown for only the Alternative Strategies Fund’s Institutional Class, and after-tax returns for the Alternative Strategies Fund’s Investor Class will vary. The after-tax returns on distributions and sale of Fund shares may be higher than returns before taxes due to the effect of a tax benefit an investor may receive from the realization of capital losses that would have been incurred on the sale of Fund shares.

 

 

 
16       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Management

 

 

INVESTMENT ADVISOR   PORTFOLIO MANAGER   

MANAGED THE

ALTERNATIVE STRATEGIES

FUND SINCE:

Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC   Jeremy DeGroot, CFA, President of the Trust, Principal, Chief Investment Officer and Portfolio Manager        2011  
SUB-ADVISOR   PORTFOLIO MANAGER   

MANAGED THE

ALTERNATIVE STRATEGIES

FUND SINCE:

DoubleLine Capital LP   Jeffrey Gundlach, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Investment Officer and Portfolio Manager        2011  
    Jeffrey Sherman, CFA, Deputy Chief Investment Officer and Portfolio Manager        2017  
First Pacific Advisors, LLC   Steven Romick, CFA, Managing Partner and Portfolio Manager        2011  
  Brian Selmo, CFA, Partner and Portfolio Manager        2011  
    Mark Landecker, CFA, Partner and Portfolio Manager        2011  
Loomis, Sayles & Company, L.P.   Matthew Eagan, CFA, Vice President and Portfolio Manager        2011  
  Kevin Kearns, Vice President and Portfolio Manager        2011  
    Todd Vandam, CFA, Vice President and Portfolio Manager        2011  
Passport Capital, LLC   John Burbank, Chief Investment Officer and Portfolio Manager        2014  
Water Island Capital, LLC   John Orrico, CFA, President, Chief Investment Officer and Portfolio Manager        2011  
  Todd Munn, Portfolio Manager        2011  
  Roger Foltynowicz, CAIA, Portfolio Manager        2011  
    Gregg Loprete, Portfolio Manager        2011  

For important information about the purchase and sale of fund shares, tax information and financial intermediary compensation, please turn to the “Summary of Other Important Information Regarding the Funds” section on page 18 of this Prospectus.

 

 
Fund Summary         17


Table of Contents

Summary of Other Important Information Regarding the Funds

 

Transaction Policies – All Funds

 

You may purchase, redeem or exchange Fund shares on any business day by written request via mail (Litman Gregory Funds Trust, c/o Boston Financial Data Services, P.O. Box 219922, Kansas City, MO 64121-9922), by wire transfer, by telephone at 1-800-960-0188, or through a financial intermediary. The minimum initial and subsequent investment amounts for each Fund are shown below.

 

Fund/Type of Account  

Minimum
Initial

Investment

   

Minimum
Additional

Investment

   

Minimum

Account
Balance

 

Smaller Companies Fund

 

Regular

     

- Institutional Class

    $10,000       $250       $2,500  

Retirement Account

     

- Institutional Class

    $1,000       $100       $250  

Automatic Investment Account

     

- Institutional Class

    $2,500       $250       $2,500  
     

Equity Fund, International Fund, and

Alternative Strategies Fund (1)

 

 

Regular

     

- Institutional Class

    $100,000       $250       $2,500  

- Investor Class

    $1,000       $100       $250  

Retirement Account

     

- Institutional Class

    $5,000       $100       $250  

- Investor Class

    $500       $100       $250  

Automatic Investment Account

     

- Institutional Class

    $2,500       $250       $2,500  

- Investor Class

    $2,500       $250       $2,500  

 

(1) The minimum investment amounts may be waived or lowered for investments effected through banks and other institutions that have entered into arrangements with the Equity, International and Alternative Strategies Funds or the distributor of these Funds and for investments effected on a group basis by certain other entities and their employees, such as investments pursuant to a payroll deduction plan and asset-based or wrap programs. Please consult your financial intermediary for information about minimum investment requirements. The Equity, International and Alternative Strategies Funds reserve the right to change or waive the minimum initial and subsequent investment requirements at any time.

Tax Information – All Funds

 

Depending on the character of income distributed, the Funds’ distributions will be taxed as ordinary income or capital gains, unless you are investing through a tax-deferred arrangement, such as a 401(k) plan or an individual retirement account. Such tax-deferred arrangements may be taxed later upon withdrawal from those accounts.

Payments to Broker-Dealers and Other Financial Intermediaries – All Funds

 

If you purchase shares of a Fund through a broker-dealer or other financial intermediary (such as a bank), the Fund and/or Litman Gregory may pay the intermediary for the sale of Fund shares and related services. These payments may create a conflict of interest by influencing the broker-dealer or other intermediary and your salesperson to recommend the Fund over another investment. Ask your salesperson or visit your financial intermediary’s website for more information.

 

 

 
18       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Description of Principal Investment Risks

 

All mutual funds carry a certain amount of risk. The Funds’ returns will vary, and you could lose money on your investment in the Funds. An investment in a Fund is not a deposit of a bank and is not insured, endorsed or guaranteed by any financial institution, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) or any other government agency. The principal risks for each Fund are identified in the Funds’ Summary Sections and are described in further detail below. Additional information about the principal risks is included in the Funds’ Statement of Additional Information (the “SAI”).

 

Below Investment-Grade Fixed Income Securities Risk   Below investment-grade fixed income securities (also known as “junk bonds”) are considered speculative. These securities are rated Ba1 through C by Moody’s Investors Service (“Moody’s”) or BB+ through D by Standard & Poor’s Rating Group (“S&P”) (or comparably rated by another nationally recognized statistical rating organization), or, if not rated by Moody’s or S&P, are considered by the sub-advisors to be of similar quality. These securities may be subject to greater risks than those of higher rated fixed income securities, including greater risk of default. The market value of below investment-grade fixed income securities is more sensitive to individual corporate developments and economic changes than higher rated securities. Adverse publicity and investor perceptions, whether or not accurate, regarding below investment-grade fixed income securities may depress prices and diminish liquidity for such securities. The market for below investment-grade fixed income securities may be less active than the market for higher rated securities, which can adversely affect the price at which these securities may be sold. Less active markets may diminish the Alternative Strategies Fund’s ability to obtain accurate market quotations when valuing the portfolio securities and thereby giving rise to valuation risk. In addition, the Alternative Strategies Fund may incur additional expenses if a holding defaults and the Alternative Strategies Fund has to seek recovery of its principal investment. Below investment-grade fixed income securities may also present risks based on payment expectations. For example, these securities may contain redemption or call provisions. If an issuer exercises these provisions in a declining interest rate market, the Alternative Strategies Fund would have to replace the security with a lower yielding security resulting in a decreased return for investors. There is no limit to the Alternative Strategies Fund’s ability to invest in below investment-grade fixed income securities; however, under normal market conditions, it does not expect to invest more than 50% of its total assets in below investment-grade fixed income securities as measured at time of purchase.
Capital Structure Arbitrage Risk   The perceived mispricing identified by the sub-adviser may not disappear or may even increase, in which case losses may be realized.
Convertible Arbitrage Risk   Arbitrage strategies involve engaging in transactions that attempt to exploit price differences of identical, related or similar securities on different markets or in different forms. A Fund may realize losses or reduced rate of return if underlying relationships among securities in which investment positions are taken change in an adverse manner or a transaction is unexpectedly terminated or delayed. Trading to seek short-term capital appreciation can be expected to cause the Fund’s portfolio turnover rate to be substantially higher than that of the average equity-oriented investment company, resulting in higher transaction costs and additional capital gains tax liabilities.
Convertible Securities Risk   Convertible securities generally offer lower interest or dividend yields than non-convertible securities of similar quality. Because convertible securities are higher in an issuer’s capital structure than equity securities, convertible securities are generally not as risky as the equity securities of the same issuer. However, convertible securities may gain or lose value due to changes in, among other things, interest rates; other general economic conditions; industry fundamentals; market sentiment; and the issuer’s operating results, financial statements and credit ratings. The value of convertible securities also tends to change whenever the market value of the underlying common or preferred stock fluctuates.
Credit Risk   Credit risk is the risk that the issuer or the guarantor of a fixed income security, or the counterparty to a derivatives contract or other transaction, is unable or unwilling (or is perceived to be unable or unwilling) to make timely payments of principal and/or interest, or to otherwise honor its obligations. The Alternative Strategies Fund will be subject to credit risks with respect to the counterparties of its derivative transactions. Many of the protections afforded to participants on organized exchanges, such as the performance guarantee of an exchange clearing house, are not available in connection with over-the-counter (“OTC”) derivative transactions, such as foreign currency transactions. As a result, in instances where the Alternative Strategies Fund enters into OTC derivative transactions, the Alternative Strategies Fund will be subject to the risk that its direct counterparties will not perform their obligations under the transactions and that the Alternative Strategies Fund will sustain losses or be unable to realize gains.

 

 
Description of Principal Investment Risks         19


Table of Contents

Description of Principal Investment Risks — (Continued)

 

Currency Risk   The Alternative Strategies Fund may invest in foreign currencies for investment and hedging purposes. All of the Funds may invest in foreign currencies for hedging purchases. Investing in foreign currencies exposes the fund to fluctuations in currency exchange rates. Fluctuations in the exchange rates between different currencies may negatively affect an investment. The Alternative Strategies Fund may be subject to currency risk because it may invest a significant portion of its assets in currency-related instruments, such as forward currency exchange contracts, foreign currency futures contracts, options on foreign currencies and foreign currency futures, cross-currency instruments (such as swaps) and direct investments in foreign currencies. The Alternative Strategies Fund also is subject to currency risk because it may invest in securities or other instruments denominated in, or receive revenues in, foreign currencies. The sub-advisors may elect not to hedge currency risk, which may cause the Alternative Strategies Fund to incur losses that would not have been incurred had the risk been hedged.
Cybersecurity Risk   Information and technology systems relied upon by the Funds, Litman Gregory, the sub-advisors, the Funds’ service providers (including, but not limited to, Fund accountants, custodians, transfer agents, administrators, distributors and other financial intermediaries) and/or the issuers of securities in which a Fund invests may be vulnerable to damage or interruption from computer viruses, network failures, computer and telecommunication failures, infiltration by unauthorized persons, security breaches, usage errors, power outages and catastrophic events such as fires, tornadoes, floods, hurricanes and earthquakes. Although Litman Gregory has implemented measures to manage risks relating to these types of events, if these systems are compromised, become inoperable for extended periods of time or cease to function properly, significant investment may be required to fix or replace them. The failure of these systems and/or of disaster recovery plans could cause significant interruptions in the operations of the Funds, Litman Gregory, the sub-advisors, the Funds’ service providers and/or issuers of securities in which a Fund invests and may result in a failure to maintain the security, confidentiality or privacy of sensitive data, including personal information relating to investors (and the beneficial owners of investors). Such a failure could also harm the reputation of the Funds, Litman Gregory, the sub-advisors, the Funds’ service providers and/or issuers of securities in which a Fund invests, subject such entities and their respective affiliates to legal claims or otherwise affect their business and financial performance.
Debt Securities Risk   The value and liquidity of debt securities may be reduced under certain circumstances. The value of debt securities can fluctuate, sometimes rapidly, in response to issuer activity and changes in general economic and credit market conditions, including changes in interest rates. The prices of debt securities can be volatile, and there can be severe limitations in the ability to value or sell certain debt securities, including those that are of higher credit quality, during periods of reduced credit market liquidity such as the one that the market experienced in 2008 and 2009.
Derivatives Risk   Some of the instruments in which the Alternative Strategies Fund may invest may be referred to as “derivatives,” because their value “derives” from the value of an underlying asset, reference rate or index. These instruments include, without limitation, options, futures contracts, credit default swaps, P-Notes and total return swaps. The market value of derivative instruments and securities sometimes is more volatile than that of other instruments, and each type of derivative instrument may have its own special risks. Some OTC derivative instruments may expose the Alternative Strategies Fund to the credit risk of its counterparty. In the event the counterparty to such a derivative instrument becomes insolvent, the Alternative Strategies Fund may lose all or substantially all of its investment in the derivative instrument, as well as the benefits derived therefrom. Investing for hedging purposes or to increase the Alternative Strategies Fund’s return may result in certain additional transaction costs that may reduce the Alternative Strategies Fund’s performance. In addition, when used for hedging purposes, no assurance can be given that each derivative position will achieve a close correlation with the security or currency against which it is being hedged, or that a particular derivative position will be available when sought by the sub-advisors. While hedging strategies involving derivatives can reduce the risk of loss, they can also reduce the opportunity for gain or even result in losses by offsetting favorable price movements in other investments of the Alternative Strategies Fund. Derivatives may create a risk of loss greater than the amount invested.

 

 
20       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents
    Derivatives are subject to regulation under the U.S. Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the “Dodd-Frank Act”) and other laws or regulations in Europe and other foreign jurisdictions. Under the Dodd-Frank Act, certain derivatives may become subject to new or increased margin requirements when regulations are finalized and become effective. Implementation of Dodd-Frank Act regulations relating to clearing, margin and other requirements for derivatives may increase the costs to the Alternative Strategies Fund of trading derivatives and may reduce returns to shareholders in the Fund. In December 2015, the SEC proposed a new rule to regulate the use of derivatives by registered investment companies, such as the Alternative Strategies Fund. If that rule becomes effective, it could limit the ability of the Alternative Strategies Fund to invest in derivatives.
    Options Risk. The Alternative Strategies Fund may invest in options. Options trading entails risks in addition to those resulting from trading in traditional securities. Options may be more volatile than the underlying instruments, and therefore, on a percentage basis, an investment in options may be subject to greater fluctuation than an investment in the underlying instruments themselves. An investment in options is subject to the risk of a complete loss of the amounts paid as premiums to purchase the options.
    Futures Contracts Risk . The Alternative Strategies Fund may invest in futures contracts. The loss that may be incurred by entering into futures contracts could exceed the amount of the premiums paid and may be potentially unlimited. Futures markets are highly volatile, and the use of futures may increase the volatility of the Fund’s net asset value (“NAV”). Additionally, as a result of the low collateral deposits normally involved in futures trading, a relatively small movement in the price or value of a futures contract increases the risk of losing more than the amount initially invested by the Fund. Furthermore, exchanges may limit fluctuations in futures contract prices during a trading session by imposing a maximum permissible price movement on each futures contract. The Fund may be disadvantaged if it is prohibited from executing a trade outside the daily permissible price movement. Futures contracts executed on foreign exchanges may not be provided the same protections as provided by U.S. exchanges.
    P-Notes Risk . P-Notes are a type of equity-linked derivative generally issued by banks or broker-dealers and are designed to replicate the performance of the underlying equity securities. P-Notes are typically utilized to obtain exposure in certain non-U.S. markets where direct investment in a company’s equity is not permitted or otherwise feasible. Even though a P-Note is intended to reflect the performance of the underlying equity securities on a one-to-one basis so that investors will not normally gain or lose more in absolute terms than they would have made or lost had they invested in the underlying securities directly, the performance results of P-Notes will not replicate exactly the performance of the issuers or markets that the P-Notes seek to replicate due to transaction costs and other expenses. P-Notes represent unsecured, unsubordinated contractual rights of the issuer and do not confer any right, title or interest in respect to the underlying equity securities or provide rights against the issuer of the underlying securities. For this reason, in addition to the risks normally associated with a direct investment in the underlying securities, P-Notes are subject to counterparty risk if the issuer of the P-Note is unable or refuses to perform under the terms of the P-Note and must rely on the creditworthiness of the counterparty for its investment returns on the P-Notes. While the holder of a P-Note is entitled to receive from the bank or broker-dealer any dividends or other distributions paid on the underlying securities, the holder is not entitled to the same rights as an owner of the underlying securities, such as voting rights. P-Notes are also not traded on exchanges, are privately issued, and may be illiquid. There can be no assurance that the trading price or value of P-Notes will equal the value of the underlying value of the equity securities they seek to replicate.

 

 
Description of Principal Investment Risks         21


Table of Contents

Description of Principal Investment Risks — (Continued)

 

    Credit Default Swaps Risk . The Alternative Strategies Fund may enter into credit default swap agreements. The “buyer” in a credit default swap contract is obligated to pay the “seller” a periodic stream of payments over the term of the contract, provided no event of default has occurred. In the event of default, the seller must pay the buyer the “par value” (full notional value) of the reference obligation in exchange for the reference obligation. The Fund may be either the buyer or seller in the transaction. If the Fund is a buyer and no event of default occurs, the Fund loses its investment and recovers nothing. However, if an event of default occurs, the buyer receives full notional value for a reference obligation that may have little or no value. As a seller, the Fund receives a fixed rate of income throughout the term of the contract, provided there is no default event. If an event of default occurs, the seller is normally obligated to pay the notional value of the reference obligation. The value of the reference obligation received by the seller, coupled with the periodic payments previously received may be less than the full notional value it pays to the buyer, resulting in a loss of value to the Fund. Credit default swaps involve greater risks than if the Fund had invested in the reference obligation directly. In addition to general market risks, credit default swaps are subject to illiquidity risk, counterparty risk and credit risks. If the Fund writes a credit default swap, it would normally be required to segregate liquid assets equal in value to the notional value of the reference obligation.
    Total Return Swaps Risk . The Alternative Strategies Fund may enter into total return swap agreements. Total return swap is the generic name for any non-traditional swap where one party agrees to pay the other the “total return” of a defined underlying asset, usually in return for receiving a stream of London Interbank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”) based cash flows. A total return swap may be applied to any underlying asset but is most commonly used with equity indices, single stocks, bonds and defined portfolios of loans and mortgages. Total return swap is a mechanism for the user to accept the economic benefits of asset ownership without utilizing the balance sheet. The other leg of the swap, usually LIBOR, is spread to reflect the non-balance sheet nature of the product. No notional amounts are exchanged with total return swaps. The total return receiver assumes the entire economic exposure – that is, both market and credit exposure – to the reference asset. The total return payer – often the owner of the reference obligation – gives up economic exposure to the performance of the reference asset and in return takes on counterparty credit exposure to the total return receiver in the event of a default or fall in value of the reference asset.
Distressed Companies Risk  

Investments in distressed companies typically involve the purchase of high-yield bonds, or comparable unrated debt securities, or the purchase of direct indebtedness (or participations in the indebtedness) of such companies. Indebtedness generally represents a specific commercial loan or portion of a loan made to a company by a financial institution such as a bank or insurance company. Loan participations represent fractional interests in a company’s indebtedness and are generally made available by banks or insurance companies. By purchasing all or a part of a company’s direct indebtedness, a Fund, in effect, steps into the shoes of the lender. If the loan is secured, the Fund will have a priority claim to the assets of the company ahead of unsecured creditors and stockholders. A Fund also may purchase trade claims and other similar direct obligations or claims against companies in bankruptcy. Trade claims are generally purchased from creditors of the bankrupt company and typically represent money due to a supplier of goods or services to the company.

 

The purchase of indebtedness or loan participations of a troubled company always involves the risk as to the creditworthiness of the issuer and the possibility that principal invested may be lost. Purchasers of participations, such as a Fund, must rely on the financial institution issuing the participation to assert any rights against the borrower with respect to the underlying indebtedness. In addition, a Fund takes on the risk as to the creditworthiness of the bank or other financial intermediary issuing the participation, as well as that of the company issuing the underlying indebtedness. When a Fund purchases a trade claim, there is no guarantee that the debtor will ever be able to satisfy the obligation on the trade claim.

 

 
22       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents
Emerging Markets Risk   Emerging market countries are those with immature economic and political structures, and investing in emerging markets entails greater risk than in developed markets. Emerging markets may be under-capitalized, have less developed legal and financial systems or have less stable currencies than markets in the developed world. Emerging market securities are securities that are issued by companies with their principal place of business or principal office in an emerging market country; or securities issued by companies for which the principal securities trading market is an emerging market country. Emerging market securities typically present even greater exposure to the risks described under “Foreign Investment and Emerging Markets Risk” and may be particularly sensitive to certain economic changes. For example, emerging market countries are more often dependent on international trade and are therefore often vulnerable to recessions in other countries. Emerging markets may have obsolete financial systems and volatile currencies, and may be more sensitive than more mature markets to a variety of economic factors. Emerging market securities also may be less liquid than securities of more developed countries and could be difficult to sell, particularly during a market downturn.
Event-Driven Risk   Event-driven strategies seek to profit from the market inefficiencies surrounding market events, such as mergers, acquisitions, asset sales, restructurings, refinancings, recapitalizations, reorganizations or other special situations. Event-driven investing involves attempting to predict the outcome of a particular transaction as well as the optimal time at which to commit capital to it. Event-driven opportunities involve difficult legal as well as financial analysis, as some of the principal impediments to the consummation of major corporate events are often legal or regulatory rather than economic. In addition, certain of the securities issued in the context of major corporate events include complex call, put and other features, and it is difficult to precisely evaluate the terms and embedded option characteristics of these securities. A Fund may take both long and short positions in a wide range of securities, derivatives and other instruments in implementing its event-driven strategies.
Equity Securities Risk   The value of equity securities may fluctuate, sometimes rapidly and unexpectedly, due to various factors, including factors affecting the general market, such as adverse changes in economic conditions, the general outlook for corporate earnings, interest rates or investor sentiment. Equity securities may also lose value because of factors affecting an entire industry or sector, such as increases in production costs, and factors directly related to a specific company, such as significant decisions made by its management. Certain equity securities may decline in value even during periods when the prices of equity securities in general are rising, or may not perform as well as the market in general. The prices of equity securities may also experience greater volatility during periods of challenging market conditions such as the one that the market recently experienced. This risk is greater for small- and medium-sized companies, which tend to be more vulnerable to adverse developments than larger companies.
Foreign Investment and Emerging Markets Risk   Investing in foreign (non-U.S) securities may expose the Funds to risks not typically associated with U.S. investments. These risks include, among others, adverse fluctuations in currency conversion rate, currency blockages, and adverse political, social and economic developments affecting a foreign country. In addition, foreign securities may have less publicly available information and may be more volatile and/or less liquid. Investments in foreign securities could also be affected by factors such as differences in financial reporting, accounting and auditing standards, nationalization, expropriation or confiscatory taxation, smaller and less-strict regulation of securities markets, restrictions on receiving investment proceeds from a foreign country, and potential difficulties in enforcing contractual obligations. These risks are greater in the emerging markets. There is no limit to the Alternative Strategies Fund’s ability to invest in emerging market securities; however, under normal market conditions, it does not expect to invest more than 50% of its total assets in emerging market securities. Additional information about the risks of emerging markets is described under “Emerging Markets Risk.”
Interest Rate Risk   Changes in interest rates may cause the value of debt securities to decline. Generally, the value of debt securities rise when prevailing interest rates fall, and fall when prevailing interest rates rise. A fund with a longer average portfolio duration will be more sensitive to changes in interest rates than a fund with a shorter average portfolio duration.

 

 
Description of Principal Investment Risks         23


Table of Contents

Description of Principal Investment Risks — (Continued)

 

Leverage Risk   Leverage may result from certain transactions, including the use of derivatives and borrowing. Although leverage creates an opportunity for increased income and gain, it also creates certain risks. For example, the use of leverage may cause the effect of an increase or decrease in the value of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s portfolio securities to be magnified and the Alternative Strategies Fund to be more volatile than if leverage was not used. Under normal circumstances, the Alternative Strategies Fund may borrow amounts up to one third of the value of its total assets except that it may exceed this limit to satisfy redemption requests or for other temporary purposes.
Market Risk   The market prices of securities owned by a Fund may go up or down, sometimes rapidly or unpredictably. Securities may decline in value or become illiquid due to factors affecting securities markets generally or particular industries represented in the securities markets. The value or liquidity of a security may decline due to general market conditions that are not specifically related to a particular company, such as real or perceived adverse economic conditions, changes in the general outlook for corporate earnings, changes in interest or currency rates or adverse investor sentiment generally. Securities may also decline or become illiquid due to factors that affect a particular industry or industries, such as labor shortages or increased production costs and competitive conditions within an industry. During a general downturn in the securities markets, multiple asset classes may decline or become illiquid in value simultaneously.
Merger Arbitrage Risk   Merger arbitrage seeks to profit from the successful completion of mergers, takeovers, tender offers, leveraged buyouts, spin offs, liquidations and other corporate reorganizations (each, a “deal”). The success of merger arbitrage depends on the discount between the deal price and the price of the target company’s stock after the deal is announced but before it is closed. If a proposed reorganization in which the Alternative Strategies Fund invests is renegotiated or terminated, the Alternative Strategies Fund may suffer a loss.
Mortgage-Backed Securities Risk   Mortgage-backed securities represent participation interests in pools of residential mortgage loans purchased from individual lenders by a federal agency or originated and issued by private lenders. The values of some mortgage-backed securities may expose the Alternative Strategies Fund to a lower rate of return upon reinvestment of principal. When interest rates rise, the value of mortgage-related securities generally will decline; however, when interest rates are declining, the value of mortgage related-securities with prepayment features may not increase as much as other fixed income securities. The rate of prepayments on underlying mortgages will affect the price and volatility of a mortgage-related security, and may shorten or extend the effective maturity of the security beyond what was anticipated at the time of purchase. If unanticipated rates of prepayment on underlying mortgages increase the effective maturity of a mortgage-related security, the volatility of the security can be expected to increase. The value of these securities may fluctuate in response to the market’s perception of the creditworthiness of the issuers. Additionally, although mortgages and mortgage-related securities are generally supported by some form of government or private guarantee and/or insurance, there is no assurance that private guarantors or insurers will meet their obligations. Mortgage-backed securities that are collateralized by a portfolio of mortgages or mortgage-related securities depend on the payments of principal and interest made by or through the underlying assets, which may not be sufficient to meet the payment obligations of the mortgage-backed securities.
Multi-Style Management Risk   Because portions of a Fund’s assets are managed by different portfolio managers using different styles/strategies, a Fund could experience overlapping security transactions. Certain portfolio managers may be purchasing securities at the same time that other portfolio managers may be selling those same securities, which may lead to higher transaction expenses compared to a Fund using a single investment management style. Litman Gregory’s and the sub-advisors’ judgments about the attractiveness, value and potential appreciation of a particular asset class or individual security in which a Fund invests may prove to be incorrect, and there is no guarantee that Litman Gregory’s judgment will produce the desired results. In addition, a Fund may allocate its assets so as to under- or over-emphasize certain strategies or investments under market conditions that are not optimal, in which case the Fund’s value may be adversely affected.

 

 
24       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents
Portfolio Turnover Risk   High portfolio turnover involves correspondingly greater expenses, including brokerage commissions or dealer mark-ups and other transaction costs on the sale of securities and reinvestments in other securities, which may result in adverse tax consequences to a Fund’s shareholders. Certain of a Fund’s investment strategies may result in it having higher portfolio turnover rates. Higher portfolio turnover may cause a Fund to experience increased transaction costs, dealer markups, brokerage expenses and other acquisition costs, and may cause shareholders to incur increased taxes on their investment in a Fund as compared to shareholders in investment companies that hold investments for longer periods. The portfolio managers do not consider portfolio turnover rate a limiting factor in making investment decisions on behalf of a Fund consistent with its investment objective and policies. Variations in portfolio turnover rates may be due to fluctuations in shareholder purchase, exchange and redemption transactions, market conditions or changes in the portfolio manager’s outlook.
Short Sale Risk   The Alternative Strategies Fund may suffer a loss if it sells a security short and the value of the security does not go down as expected. The risk of loss is theoretically unlimited if the value of the security sold short continues to increase. Short sales expose the Alternative Strategies Fund to the risk that it may be compelled to buy the security sold short (also known as “covering” the short position) at a time when the security has appreciated in value, thus resulting in a loss to the Alternative Strategies Fund. The Alternative Strategies Fund’s investment performance may also suffer if it is required to close out a short position earlier than it had intended. In addition, the Alternative Strategies Fund may be subject to expenses related to short sales that are not typically associated with investing in securities directly, such as costs of borrowing. These expenses may negatively impact the performance of the Alternative Strategies Fund. To meet current margin requirements, the Alternative Strategies Fund is required to deposit with the broker additional cash or securities so that the total deposit with the broker is maintained daily at 150% of the current market value of the securities sold short.
Smaller Companies Risk   Securities of companies with smaller market capitalizations are generally more volatile and less liquid than the securities of large-capitalization companies. Small- and mid-sized companies may be more reliant on a few products, services or key personnel, which can make it riskier than investing in larger companies with more diverse product lines and structured management. Smaller companies may have no or relatively short operating histories or may be newer public companies. Some of these companies have aggressive capital structures, including high debt levels, or are involved in rapidly growing or changing industries and/or new technologies, which pose additional risks.
Technology Investment Risk   The technology sector is a very volatile segment of the market. The nature of technology is that it is rapidly changing. Therefore, products or services that may initially look promising may subsequently fail or become obsolete. In addition, many technology companies are younger, smaller and unseasoned companies which may not have established products, an experienced management team, or earnings history.
Unfavorable Tax Treatment Risk   Various types of investments in which the Alternative Strategies Fund may invest, including derivatives, mortgage related securities, and REITs, may cause the Alternative Strategies Fund’s returns to be in the form of net investment income or short-term capital gains, some of which may be distributed to shareholders and taxed at ordinary income tax rates. Therefore, shareholders may have a greater need to pay regular taxes than compared to other investment strategies that hold investments longer. Due to this investment strategy, it may be preferable for certain shareholders to invest in the Fund through pre-tax or tax-deferred accounts as compared to investment through currently taxable accounts. Potential shareholders are encouraged to consult their tax advisors in this regard.

 

 
Description of Principal Investment Risks         25


Table of Contents

Fund Management and Investment Styles

 

The Advisor

 

The Funds are managed by Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC (“Litman Gregory”), 1676 N. California Blvd., Suite 500, Walnut Creek, California 94596. Litman Gregory has overall responsibility for assets under management, recommends the selection of managers as sub-advisors of the Funds (each, a “manager” or “sub-advisor”) to the Board of Trustees (the “Board”) of the Litman Gregory Funds Trust (the “Trust”), evaluates the performance of the managers, monitors changes at the managers’ organizations that may impact their abilities to deliver superior future performance, determines when to rebalance the managers’ assets and the amount of cash equivalents (if any) that may be held in addition to cash in each of the managers’ sub-portfolios, coordinates with the managers with respect to diversification and tax issues and oversees the operational aspects of the Funds.

Jeremy DeGroot is Chairman of the Board of Trustees and President of the Trust, the Portfolio Manager of the Alternative Strategies Fund, and a Co-Portfolio Manager of the Equity Fund, International Fund, and Smaller Companies Fund. He is also a Principal and Member of Litman Gregory Asset Management, LLC (“LGAM”), a research-oriented money management firm that wholly owns and provides research to Litman Gregory, and serves as its Chief Investment Officer. Prior to joining LGAM in 1999, DeGroot was a Manager in KPMG Peat Marwick’s Economic Consulting Services practice in 1998. From 1989 to 1997, he was a Senior Economist with the Law & Economics Consulting Group, Inc., providing economics and financial analysis to Fortune 500 clients. He has a Master’s degree in Economics from the University of California Berkeley.

Jack Chee is an Assistant Secretary of the Trust and the Co-Portfolio Manager of the Equity Fund and the Smaller Companies Fund. He is also a Principal and Member of LGAM and serves as a Senior Research Analyst at the Advisor. Prior to joining LGAM in 2000, Chee was a Mutual Fund Analyst with Value Line Mutual Fund Survey. He has a BS degree in Mechanical Engineering from Drexel University.

Rajat Jain is an Assistant Secretary of the Trust and the Co-Portfolio Manager of the Equity Fund and the International Fund. He is also a Principal and Member of LGAM and serves as a Senior Research Analyst at the Advisor. Prior to joining LGAM in 2003, Jain was a Vice President with Montgomery Asset Management and was an Associate Director with BARRA Rogers Casey. He has a BS degree in Physics from St. Stephens College and an MBA degree from University of South Carolina.

DeGroot, Chee and Jain are the individuals at Litman Gregory primarily responsible for monitoring the day-to-day activities of the portfolio managers at the sub-advisors and for overseeing all aspects of Litman Gregory’s responsibilities with respect to the Funds.

Asset Level Limitations

 

Litman Gregory believes that high levels of assets under management can be detrimental to certain investment strategies. Litman Gregory also believes that relatively low levels

of assets under management can provide flexibility to skilled stock pickers that under certain circumstances may contribute positively to returns. It is Litman Gregory’s belief that asset levels are particularly relevant to the Funds given their concentrated investment strategy. Because of this belief, each of the Funds may be closed to new shareholders, with certain exceptions approved by the Board, at asset levels that Litman Gregory and the sub-advisors believe to be optimal in allowing for a high degree of flexibility on a per-sub-advisor basis. Alternatively, additional sub-advisors may be added to the Funds to expand capacity in order to avoid closing to new shareholders or to avoid “hard closing” to existing shareholders. Litman Gregory will add a new sub-advisor only if, in its opinion, the sub-advisor has the exceptional stock-picking skill and other traits Litman Gregory requires of the existing managers.

Sub-Advisor Evaluation and Selection

 

Litman Gregory is responsible for hiring and replacing sub-advisors. Before hiring a sub-advisor, Litman Gregory performs extensive due diligence. This includes quantitative and qualitative analysis, including (but not limited to) an evaluation of: the investment process, the consistency of its execution and discipline; individual holdings; strategies employed, past mistakes, risk controls, team depth and quality; operations and compliance; and business focus and vision. Litman Gregory’s evaluation process includes review of literature and documents, quantitative historical performance evaluation, extensive discussions with members of the investment team and firm management and background checks through industry contacts. Each of the sub-advisor’s management fee is also an important consideration. It is Litman Gregory’s objective to hire sub-advisors who it believes are skilled and can deliver strong market cycle returns when taking risk into account. Litman Gregory defines a “market cycle” as the movement from a period of increasing prices and strong performance, or bull market, through a period of weak performance and falling prices, or bear market, and back again to new strength. A full market cycle is usually three to five years, but can vary considerably. The top of a cycle is called a peak and the bottom a trough. Litman Gregory generally assesses the long-term growth of an investment by considering the increase in the value of the investment over a period greater than five years. For the Alternative Strategies Fund, Litman Gregory will favor managers who it believes focus on markets or investment strategies that are inherently low risk on an absolute basis or relative to their return potential; and managers who have a clearly risk-sensitive mindset in executing their portfolio strategy. Generally, Litman Gregory prefers managers who it believes will be able to add value through security selection and from tactical allocations to securities, markets or strategies at times when it believes such allocations are compelling from a risk/return perspective. Litman Gregory is responsible for the general overall supervision of the sub-advisors along with allocating the portfolio’s assets for their investment decisions as well as rebalancing the portfolio as necessary from time to time.

 

 

 
26       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Multi-Manager Issues

 

More on Multi-Style Management: The investment methods used by the managers in selecting securities for the Funds vary. The segment of each Fund’s portfolio managed by a manager will, under normal circumstances, differ from the segments managed by the other managers with respect to portfolio composition, turnover, issuer capitalization and issuer financial condition. Because selections are made independently by each manager, it is possible that a security held by one portfolio segment may also be held by other portfolio segments of the Funds or that several managers may simultaneously favor the same industry segment. Litman Gregory monitors the overall portfolio on an ongoing basis to ensure that such overlaps do not create an unintended industry concentration or result in lack of diversification.

Litman Gregory is responsible for establishing the target allocation of Fund assets to each manager and may adjust the target allocations at its discretion. Market performance may result in allocation drift among the managers of a Fund. Litman Gregory is responsible for periodically rebalancing the portfolios, the timing and degree of which will be determined by Litman Gregory. Each manager independently selects the brokers and dealers to execute transactions for the segment of a Fund being managed by that manager. Litman Gregory may at its discretion allow a manager to hold fewer or more than the specified number of holdings in its portfolio. The number of holdings may be the result of a manager’s investment decision, an involuntary spin-off by one of the companies held in the portfolio, the payment of a stock dividend or split in a separate class of stock, or a timing mismatch when buying or selling a portfolio security while selling or establishing a position in an existing security.

At times, allocation adjustments in the Alternative Strategies Fund may be considered tactical with over- or under-allocations to certain managers based on Litman Gregory’s assessment of the risk and return potential of each manager’s strategy at that point in time. Manager allocations are also influenced by each manager’s historical returns and volatility, which are assessed by examining the performance of strategies run by the managers in their private (hedge) funds or other accounts that Litman Gregory believes to be similar to those that will be used for the Alternative Strategies Fund. Litman Gregory has analyzed the individual and combined performance of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s managers in a variety of investment environments, including the 2008 financial crisis as well as other types of positive and negative market environments.

In the event a manager ceases to manage a segment of a Fund’s portfolio, Litman Gregory will select a replacement manager or allocate the assets among the remaining managers. The securities that were held in the departing manager’s segment of the Fund’s portfolio may be allocated to and retained by another manager of the Fund or will be liquidated in an orderly manner, taking into account various factors, which may include but are not limited to the market for the security and the potential tax consequences. Litman Gregory may also add additional managers in order to increase Fund diversification or capacity.

The SAI provides additional information about the compensation of each portfolio manager at each sub-advisor, other accounts managed by each portfolio manager, and each such portfolio manager’s ownership of securities of the Funds.

Temporary Defensive Positions: Under unusual market conditions or for temporary defensive purposes, a substantial part of each Fund’s total assets may be invested in cash or short-term, high-quality debt securities. To the extent that a Fund assumes a temporary defensive position, it may not achieve its investment objective during that time. Defensive positions may be initiated by the individual portfolio managers or by Litman Gregory.

Multi-Manager Exemptive Order: The Trust and Litman Gregory have obtained an exemptive order from the SEC that permits Litman Gregory, subject to certain conditions, to hire, terminate and replace managers with the approval of the Board only and without shareholder approval. Within 60 days of the hiring of any new manager or the implementation of any proposed material change in a sub-advisory agreement with an existing manager, shareholders will be furnished information about the new manager or sub-advisory agreement that would be included in a proxy statement. The order also permits a Fund to disclose sub-advisory fees only in the aggregate in its registration statement. Pursuant to the order, shareholder approval is required before Litman Gregory enters into any sub-advisory agreement with a manager that is affiliated with the Funds or Litman Gregory.

Portfolio Holdings Information

 

A description of the Funds’ policies and procedures regarding disclosure of the Funds’ portfolio holdings can be found in the SAI, which can be obtained free of charge by contacting the Funds’ transfer agent (the “Transfer Agent”) at 1-800-960-0188.

Advisory Fees

 

Each Fund pays a monthly investment advisory fee to Litman Gregory based on that Fund’s average daily net assets. The table below illustrates the base fee rates payable to Litman Gregory and the reduced fee rates payable on assets in excess of certain levels (breakpoints).

 

Fund  

Advisory Fee

(as a percentage of net assets)

Equity Fund

  First $750 million        1.10%
    Over $750 million        1.00%

International Fund

  First $1 billion        1.10%
    Over $1 billion        1.00%

Smaller Companies Fund

  First $450 million        1.14%
    Over $450 million        1.04%

Alternative Strategies Fund

  Up to $2 billion        1.40%
  Between $2 and $3 billion        1.30%
  Between $3 and $4 billion        1.25%
    Over $4 billion        1.20%
 

 

 
Fund Management and Investment Styles         27


Table of Contents

Fund Management and Investment Styles — (Continued)

 

Litman Gregory, not the Funds, is responsible for payment of the sub-advisory fees to the managers, each of whom is compensated monthly on the basis of the assets committed to its individual discretion. As of March 31, 2017, based on the assets of each Fund and the asset allocation targets, Litman Gregory pays fees to the sub-advisors as follows, which may change in the future because assets and allocations will fluctuate:

 

Fund    Aggregate Annual Fee Rates
Litman Gregory Pays to  Sub-Advisors
 

Equity Fund

     0.587%  

International Fund

     0.467%  

Smaller Companies Fund

     0.468%  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     0.814%  

Through April 30, 2018, pursuant to a Restated Contractual Advisory Fee Waiver Agreement, most recently amended effective as of January 1, 2017 (the “Fee Waiver Agreement”), Litman Gregory has agreed to waive a portion of its advisory fees for each Fund as follows: for the Equity Fund, Litman Gregory has agreed to waive a portion of its advisory fees so that after paying all of the sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee as a percentage of the Equity Fund’s daily net assets retained by Litman Gregory is 0.40%; for the International Fund, Litman Gregory has agreed to waive a portion of its advisory fees so that after paying all of the sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee as a percentage of the International Fund’s daily net assets retained by Litman Gregory is 0.40% on the first $1 billion of the International Fund’s assets and 0.30% for assets over $1 billion; for the Smaller Companies Fund, Litman Gregory has agreed to waive a portion of its advisory fees so that after paying all of the sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee as a percentage of the Smaller Companies Fund’s daily net assets retained by Litman Gregory is 0.26%; and for the Alternative Strategies Fund, Litman Gregory has agreed to waive a portion of its advisory fees so that after paying all of the sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee as a percentage of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s daily net assets retained by Litman Gregory is 0.50% on the first $2 billion of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets, 0.40% of the next $1 billion of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets, 0.35% of the next $1 billion of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets and 0.30% on assets over $4 billion. Litman Gregory has agreed not to seek recoupment of any advisory fee waived with respect to prior periods pursuant to the Fee Waiver Agreement.

Pursuant to a separate Operating Expenses Limitation Agreement (the “Expenses Limitation Agreement”), Litman Gregory has also agreed to limit the operating expenses of the Alternative Strategies Fund, through April 30, 2018 (unless otherwise sooner terminated), to an annual rate of 1.49% for the Institutional Class and 1.74% for the Investor Class. Such annual rates are expressed as a percentage of the daily net assets of the Alternative Strategies Fund attributable to the applicable class. Any fee waiver or expense reimbursement made by Litman Gregory pursuant to the Expenses Limitation Agreement is subject to the repayment by the Alternative Strategies Fund within three (3) years following the fiscal year in which the fee waiver or

expense reimbursement occurred but only if the Alternative Strategies Fund is able to make the repayment without exceeding its current expense limitation and the repayment is approved by the Board. Operating expenses referred to in this paragraph includes management fees payable to Litman Gregory but exclude any taxes, interest, brokerage commissions, expenses incurred in connection with any merger or reorganization, borrowing costs (including commitment fees), dividend expenses, acquired fund fees and expenses and extraordinary expenses such as but not limited to litigation costs.

In 2016, the advisory fees paid and net fees retained by Litman Gregory with respect to the Funds, after fee waivers, expense reimbursements and breakpoint adjustments (collectively, “Fee Adjustments”), were as follows:

 

Fund  

2016 Advisory

Fees Paid by the

Fund after Fee

Adjustments

   

2016 Aggregate
Sub-Advisory
Fees Paid by

Litman Gregory
to Sub-
Advisors

    2016 Net Advisory Fees
Retained by
Litman Gregory
after Fee Adjustments
and  Payments to
Sub-Advisors
 

Equity Fund

    1.001%       0.608%       0.399%  

International Fund

    0.814%       0.465%       0.349%  

Smaller Companies Fund

    0.722%       0.464%       0.258%  

Alternative Strategies Fund

    1.319%       0.820%       0.499%  

A discussion regarding the Board’s basis for approving the Funds’ investment advisory agreements with Litman Gregory and each sub-advisor (except the investment sub-advisory agreements with Pictet Asset Management, LTD and Evermore Global Advisors, LLC) is included in the Funds’ Annual Report to Shareholders for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2016. A discussion regarding the Board’s basis for approving the International Fund’s investment sub-advisory agreement with Pictet Asset Management, LTD is included in the Funds’ Semi-Annual Report to Shareholders for the period ended June 30, 2016. A discussion regarding the Board’s basis for approving the International Fund’s investment sub-advisory agreement with Evermore Global Advisors, LLC will be included in the Funds’ Semi-Annual Report to Shareholders for the period ending June 30, 2017.

 

 

 
28       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund – Sub-Advisors

 

The Equity Fund’s six sub-advisors (seven portfolio segments) emphasize different stock-picking styles and invest in stocks spanning a range of market capitalizations. Litman Gregory believes that during any given year certain stock-picking styles will generate higher returns than comparable market indexes, while others will lag. By including a variety of stock-picking styles in this single mutual fund, Litman Gregory believes that the variability and volatility of returns can be lessened.

Litman Gregory’s strategy is to allocate the portfolio’s assets among the managers who, based on Litman Gregory’s research, are judged to be among the best in their respective style groups. There is no minimum or maximum allocation of the Fund’s portfolio assets to each portfolio segment. The portfolio managers manage their individual portfolio segments by building a focused portfolio representing their highest-confidence stocks. Under normal market conditions, the Equity Fund invests at least 80% of the Equity Fund’s net assets, plus the amount of any borrowings for investment purposes, in equity securities. This investment policy may be changed by the Board

without shareholder approval, but shareholders would be given at least 60 days’ notice if any change occurs. Under normal conditions, each portfolio segment typically includes a minimum of 5 and a maximum of 15 securities. A portfolio segment may occasionally hold more than 15 securities. Though the total number of securities the Equity Fund may hold at any point in time will vary, it is generally expected that the Equity Fund will hold between 60 and 100 securities. The target allocation of assets to the portfolio segments was designed with the specific objective of maintaining significant exposure to stocks of large- and mid-sized companies with a greater emphasis on U.S. domiciled companies.

The following table provides a description of the Equity Fund’s six sub-advisors (seven portfolio segments) and their target levels of assets. Asset levels will fluctuate and it is at the discretion of Litman Gregory to re-balance the asset allocations. A detailed discussion of the management structure of the Equity Fund follows the table.

 

 

PORTFOLIO MANAGER(S)/SUB-ADVISOR  

TARGET
ASSET

ALLOCATION

   MARKET CAPITALIZATION OF
COMPANIES IN PORTFOLIO
   STOCK-PICKING
STYLE

Christopher C. Davis

Danton Goei

Davis Selected Advisers, L.P.

  15%    Mostly large companies    Blend

Patrick J. English, CFA

Andy P. Ramer, CFA

Jonathan T. Bloom, CFA

Fiduciary Management, Inc.

  15%    All sizes    Blend

Clyde S. McGregor, CFA

Harris Associates L.P.

  15%    All sizes, but mostly large- and mid-sized companies    Value

William C. Nygren, CFA

Harris Associates L.P.

  15%    Mostly large and mid-sized companies    Value

Scott Moore, CFA

Nuance Investments, LLC

  10%    All sizes    Value

Frank M. Sands, CFA

A. Michael Sramek, CFA

Sands Capital

Management, LLC

  17%    All sizes, but mostly large- and mid-size companies    Growth

Richard T. Weiss, CFA

Wells Capital Management, Inc.

  13%    All sizes, but mostly small- and mid-sized companies    Blend

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund – Sub-Advisors         29


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund – Sub-Advisors — (Continued)

 

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund Portfolio Managers

 

Christopher C. Davis

Danton Goei

Davis Selected Advisers, L.P.

2949 East Elvira Road, Suite 101

Tucson, AZ 85756

Christopher C. Davis and Danton Goei are the portfolio managers for the segment of the Equity Fund’s assets managed by Davis Selected Advisers, L.P. (“Davis Advisors”). Davis has served as a Portfolio Manager of Davis New York Venture Fund since October 1995, and also manages other equity funds advised by Davis Advisors. Davis served as Assistant Portfolio Manager and Research Analyst working with Shelby M.C. Davis from September 1989 through September 1995 . Goei has served as a Portfolio Manager of Davis New York Venture Fund since January 2014 and also manages other equity funds advised by Davis Advisors. Goei started with Davis Advisors as a Research Analyst in 1998.  Davis Advisors has been a sub-advisor to the Equity Fund since 1996.

Approximately 15% of the Equity Fund’s assets are managed by Davis Advisors. Davis Advisors manages equity funds using the “Davis Investment Discipline.” Davis Advisors conducts extensive research to try to identify businesses that possess characteristics it believes foster the creation of long-term value, such as proven management, a durable franchise and business model, and sustainable competitive advantages. Davis Advisors aims to invest in such businesses when they are trading at a discount to their intrinsic worth. Davis Advisors emphasizes individual stock selection and believes that the ability to evaluate management is critical. Davis Advisors routinely visits management teams at their places of business in order to gain insight into the relative value of different businesses. Such research, however rigorous, involves predictions and forecasts that are inherently uncertain.

Over the years, Davis Advisors has developed a list of characteristics that it believes help companies to create shareholder value over the long term and manage risk. While few companies possess all of these characteristics at any given time, Davis Advisors searches for companies that demonstrate a majority or an appropriate mix of the following characteristics:

Competitive Advantages

 

  Non-obsolescent products

 

  Dominant or growing market share

 

  Global presence and powerful brands

First-Class Management

 

  Proven track record

 

  Significant alignment of interests in business

 

  Intelligent allocation of capital

Financial Strength

 

  Strong balance sheet
  Low cost structure

 

  High returns on invested capital

After determining which companies it wishes to invest in, Davis Advisors then turns its analysis to determining the intrinsic value of those companies’ common stocks. Davis Advisors seeks common stocks that can be purchased at attractive valuations relative to their intrinsic value. Davis Advisors’ goal is to invest in companies for the long term. Davis Advisors considers selling a company if it believes the stock’s market price exceeds Davis Advisors’ estimates of intrinsic value, or if the ratio of the risks and rewards of continuing to invest in the company is no longer attractive.

 

 

Patrick J. English, CFA

Andy P. Ramer, CFA

Jonathan T. Bloom, CFA

Fiduciary Management, Inc.

100 E. Wisconsin Avenue

Milwaukee, WI 53202

Patrick J. English, Andy P. Ramer and Jonathan Bloom are co-portfolio managers for the segment of the Equity Fund’s assets managed by Fiduciary Management, Inc. (“Fiduciary” or “FMI”). English joined Fiduciary in 1986. He is the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Investment Officer and a partner of Fiduciary and is a member of the Portfolio Management Committee. English, along with Ramer and Bloom, serve as the co-heads of equity research, and they work with Fiduciary’s analysts in vetting new research ideas. Prior to joining Fiduciary, English was a research analyst with Dodge & Cox from 1985 to 1986. Ramer joined Fiduciary in 2002. He is the Director of Research –Domestic Equities and a partner of Fiduciary and is a member of Fiduciary’s Portfolio Management Committee. Ramer is also an analyst and covers a number of portfolio companies across a variety of industries. Prior to joining Fiduciary, Ramer was a research analyst with Bufka & Rodgers, LLC from 1998 to 2002. Bloom joined Fiduciary in 2010. He is the Director of Research – International Equities and a partner of Fiduciary and is a member of Fiduciary’s Portfolio Management Committee. Bloom is also an analyst and covers a number of portfolio companies across a variety of industries. Prior to joining Fiduciary, Bloom was in the Applied Value Investing Program at Columbia Business School from 2008 to 2009. Fiduciary has been a sub-advisor to the Equity Fund since 2013.

Approximately 15% of the Equity Fund’s assets are managed by Fiduciary. Fiduciary seeks to buy companies that have durable franchises ( i.e. , franchises that can survive difficult times) and whose common stock is trading below FMI’s estimated intrinsic value of the company. FMI’s investment process has always focused on evaluating three attributes of a company: the quality of the business model, the valuation, and the quality of management.

Assessing the quality of a business is a primary research focus. Fiduciary defines a good business model as one that has a defensible niche and that can survive the ups and downs of a

 

 

 
30       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

business cycle. In a defensible niche, FMI looks for companies with a high degree of recurring revenue, a well-established customer base, and/or sustainable competitive advantage. Typically, businesses that meet these characteristics are well-established with modest growth profiles. The FMI investment team will review historical SEC filings and shareholder reports to understand a company’s business model, and, where necessary, adjust a company’s investment capital base for illegitimate write-offs (due to bad acquisitions, for example) to get a reliable picture of a company’s historical return on invested capital (“ROIC”). Then the team will conduct a deeper analysis of the drivers of a company’s ROIC such as revenue growth, margins, capital expenditure etc., going back at least 20 quarters. In addition, they will meet with and/or have conference calls with management of the company, as well as its suppliers, competitors, and customers.

FMI’s work on a company’s business model and quality helps identify which valuation metrics (such as Price/Earnings (“P/E”), Enterprise Value (EV) to Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization (EBITDA), Price/Sales (P/S), etc.) should be utilized for estimating a company’s intrinsic value. This work is also valuable in assessing whether or not the business model has changed significantly over time, making historical comparisons irrelevant. If that is the case, FMI will analyze the trading of a stock based on various valuation metrics over a 10- to 20-year time period, relative to the broad market and its peers, across different economic cycles, and with different underlying company fundamentals such as margins, top-line growth, competitive positioning, capital intensity of the business, etc.

This historical valuation analysis may be supplemented by other valuation techniques, such as sum-of-the-parts analysis ( i.e. , valuing different pieces of a business separately) and valuation based on private- and public-market transaction data (for example, valuation multiples used in an acquisition), which may assume greater importance when historical comparisons are less relevant, such as where business models have changed or management strategy has shifted. FMI is not looking for a specific discount to its estimate of intrinsic value, but if its valuation analysis suggests that a stock is undervalued, in absolute terms and/or in relation to its future profitability (ROIC in this case), and downside risks are limited, then the stock is a strong candidate for purchase. In general, FMI does not aim to be precise (just approximately correct) with its valuation analysis and will come up with price-target ranges over three to five years. These price targets are generally within a narrow range, and they guide FMI on when to trim or sell a stock.

FMI also focuses on areas that company management can control. Therefore, FMI will look at the backgrounds of management teams. This may involve: assessing their experience and track record; reviewing proxy statements to assess whether management compensation and incentives are in line with shareholder interests; evaluating past management decisions to assess whether or not those decisions enhanced shareholder value; and discussing with management their strategy and execution plan to assess the likelihood of meeting their stated goals and objectives.

 

Clyde S. McGregor, CFA

Harris Associates L.P.

111 S. Wacker Drive

Suite 4600

Chicago, IL 60606

Clyde S. McGregor is the portfolio manager for one of the segments of the Equity Fund’s assets managed by Harris Associates L.P. (“Harris”). McGregor is a Vice President and portfolio manager at Harris and currently manages the Oakmark Equity and Income Fund and the Oakmark Global Fund. He earned a B.A. degree from Oberlin College and an M.B.A. from the University of Wisconsin-Madison. McGregor joined Harris in 1981 as an analyst with broad industry coverage across the market capitalization spectrum. He has been in the investment business since 1983. McGregor became a portfolio manager at Harris in 1986. Harris has been a sub-advisor to the Equity Fund since 2008.

Approximately 15% of the Equity Fund’s assets are managed by McGregor. McGregor and Harris’ portfolio management team employ Harris’ value investment philosophy and process. This investment philosophy is based upon the belief that, over time, a company’s stock price converges with Harris’ estimate of its intrinsic or true business value. By “true business value,” Harris means an estimate of the price a knowledgeable buyer would pay to acquire the entire business. In making its investment decisions, Harris uses a “bottom-up” approach focused on individual companies, rather than focusing on specific economic factors or specific industries.

The chief consideration in the selection of stocks is the size of the discount of a company’s stock price compared to the company’s perceived true business value. In addition, Harris looks for companies with the following characteristics, although not all companies will have all of these attributes: free cash flows and intelligent investment of excess cash, earnings that are growing and are reasonably predictable, and a high level of management ownership in the company. Once Harris determines that a stock is selling at a significant discount and that the company has some of the aforementioned attributes, Harris generally will consider buying that stock for a strategy. Harris usually sells a stock when the price approaches its estimated worth. This means Harris has “buy” and “sell” targets for each stock held in its clients’ discretionary accounts. Harris also monitors each holding and adjusts those price targets as warranted to reflect changes in a company’s fundamentals. Harris attempts to manage some of the risks of investing in stocks of companies by purchasing stocks whose prices it considers low relative to Harris’ estimate of the companies’ intrinsic value. In addition, Harris seeks companies with solid finances and proven records and continuously monitors each portfolio holding.

 

 

William C. Nygren, CFA

Harris Associates L.P.

111 S. Wacker Drive

Suite 4600

Chicago, IL 60606

 

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund – Sub-Advisors         31


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund – Sub-Advisors — (Continued)

 

William C. Nygren is the portfolio manager for one of the segments of the Equity Fund’s assets managed by Harris. Nygren is a Vice President, Chief Investment Officer, U.S. Equity, portfolio manager and analyst at Harris and has managed the Oakmark Select Fund since its inception in 1996, the Oakmark Fund since April 2000 and the Oakmark Global Select Fund since its inception in 2006. He earned a B.S. degree in Accounting from the University of Minnesota and an M.S. degree in Finance from the University of Wisconsin-Madison. He has been in the investment business since 1981. Nygren joined Harris in 1983 as an Investment Analyst and later served as Harris’ Director of Research from 1990 through 1998. Harris has been a sub-advisor to the Equity Fund since 2008.

Approximately 15% of the Equity Fund’s assets are managed by Nygren. Nygren and Harris’ portfolio management team employ Harris’ value investment philosophy and process. This investment philosophy is based upon the belief that, over time, a company’s stock price converges with Harris’ estimate of its intrinsic or true business value. By “true business value,” Harris means an estimate of the price a knowledgeable buyer would pay to acquire the entire business. In making its investment decisions, Harris uses a “bottom-up” approach focused on individual companies, rather than focusing on specific economic factors or specific industries.

The chief consideration in the selection of stocks is the size of the discount of a company’s stock price compared to the company’s perceived true business value. In addition, Harris looks for companies with the following characteristics, although not all companies will have all of these attributes: free cash flows and intelligent investment of excess cash, earnings that are growing and are reasonably predictable, and a high level of management ownership in the company. Once Harris determines that a stock is selling at a significant discount and that the company has some of the aforementioned attributes, Harris generally will consider buying that stock for a strategy. Harris usually sells a stock when the price approaches its estimated worth. This means Harris has “buy” and “sell” targets for each stock held in its clients’ discretionary accounts. Harris also monitors each holding and adjusts those price targets as warranted to reflect changes in a company’s fundamentals. Harris attempts to manage some of the risks of investing in stocks of companies by purchasing stocks whose prices it considers low relative to Harris’ estimate of the companies’ intrinsic values. In addition, Harris seeks companies with solid finances and proven records and continuously monitors each portfolio holding.

 

 

Scott Moore, CFA

Nuance Investments, LLC

4900 Main Street, Suite 220

Kansas City, MO 64112

Scott Moore is the lead portfolio manager for the segment of the Equity Fund’s assets managed by Nuance Investments, LLC (“Nuance”). Moore is the President and Chief Investment officer of Nuance. He is also the Lead Portfolio Manager for all products within Nuance. Moore has more than 25 years of value investment experience.

For the decade before co-founding Nuance, Moore managed more than $10 billion in institutional, intermediary and mutual fund assets for American Century Investments (“ACI”). Prior to becoming a Portfolio Manager at ACI, he spent three years as an Investment Analyst at ACI, specializing in the telecommunications, utility and industrial sectors. He also worked as a Fixed Income Investment Analyst at ACI and as an Investment Analyst at Boatmen’s Trust Company in St. Louis, Missouri.

Moore holds a BS degree in finance from Southern Illinois University, and an MBA with an emphasis in finance from the University of Missouri.

Approximately 10% of the Equity Fund’s assets are managed by Nuance. Nuance’s investment philosophy was formed on the belief that the ability to outperform the broad stock market is predicated on a consistent and disciplined value investing approach. The Nuance investment team’s sole focus is generating investment returns for clients by diligently reviewing one company at a time on its own investment merits. Through long-term study of each company and thorough analysis of financial statements, management strategy and competitive position, the Nuance investment team becomes familiar with each company bought and sold in the portfolios over time. This familiarity allows for consistent and prompt execution with the sole focus being the generation of excess returns over the long-term. Further, Nuance is intensely focused on ensuring that it manages the appropriate amount of assets to allow future performance the opportunity to mirror that of the historical performance.

The Nuance investment team employs a consistent investment process when narrowing its selections for investment. The team initially goes through a quantitative screening process designed to identify potential leading business franchises by grouping all domestic and developed country companies into 68 sub-industries and reviewing returns on capital, balance sheet strength and capital spending habits. Leading business franchises with distinct traits are identified through this process, which allows the Nuance investment team to narrow the universe to those companies that statistically appear to fit Nuance’s criteria. Nuance is ultimately looking for best-in-class businesses with high and sustainable returns on capital, above-average financial strength and reasonable capital spending habits.

A major focus of Nuance’s fundamental analysis is on identifying competitive shifts, or transitions, within an industry that create significant threats to leading businesses. Nuance accepts subtle, transitory market-share shifts that occur between the number one and number two industry players, but Nuance does not invest in companies or industries that are undergoing secular competitive transitions, because Nuance is unwilling to accept the level of uncertainty that results from such transitions. The Nuance investment team is intentional about keeping an eye out for threats to its universe of leading businesses, including technology advancements that can lead to product obsolescence or to secular shifts in how business is conducted. Threats can also include secular shifts in the consumer mindset. Nuance’s focus on competitive position typically leads to minimal, if any, exposure to industries if

 

 

 
32       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Nuance does not believe companies in such industries can achieve long-term competitive advantages.

With respect to valuation, Nuance believes good companies are periodically undervalued in the marketplace for transitory reasons. These opportunities are created by investors’ short-term focus on a period of under-earning that is not unusual in the context of the industry’s typical cycles or the specific company’s approach to the competitive landscape. Because these companies are out of favor, the periods of meaningful undervaluation often do not last much longer than a few years, providing Nuance with the opportunity to capitalize on the discount relatively quickly. The goal of this valuation work is to establish estimates of a company’s fair value and trough value, resulting in fair value and downside price targets used for portfolio construction. At the heart of Nuance’s valuation work is a focus on the normalized earnings power of a business based on the company’s current level of tangible assets.

Nuance believes it is important to know who is running the business. The focus is on whether management is going to stick with the core business and how it plans to execute over the long-term. These broader strategy-type discussions with management teams include capital-allocation plans, research and development budgets, thoughts on normal earnings and peaks and troughs (usually discussed in the context of margins) to help evaluate the sustainability of leading businesses. Nuance believes that management going outside of its core business speaks volumes about its sustainability and triggers a review of the business and an evaluation of whether the company continues to qualify as an investment candidate. The focus is on the dynamics of the business/industry, and the certainty around the competitive position of that business.

Nuance sells investments when the stock has surpassed the team’s estimate of intrinsic value, when a more attractive investment opportunity becomes available, when the team identifies a legitimate threat to the sustainability of a leading business, or when the team believes they made a misjudgment in their original analysis.

 

 

Frank M. Sands, CFA

A. Michael Sramek, CFA

Sands Capital Management, LLC

1000 Wilson Boulevard

Suite 3000

Arlington, VA 22209

Frank M. Sands is the lead portfolio manager, and A. Michael Sramek is the portfolio manager, for the segment of the Equity Fund’s assets managed by Sands Capital Management, LLC (“Sands Capital”). Sands is the Chief Investment Officer and Chief Executive Officer at Sands Capital. Prior to joining Sands Capital, he was a portfolio manager and research analyst for Fayez, Sarofim and Company. Sramek is a Senior Research Analyst, Senior Portfolio Manager and Managing Director at Sands Capital. He began his investment career as a research analyst at Mastrapasqua & Associates in 2000 prior to joining Sands Capital in 2001. Sands and Sramek are supported by a

larger team of research analysts and associates. Sands Capital is independent and 100% staff owned. Sands Capital has been a sub-advisor to the Equity Fund since 2008.

Approximately 17% of the Equity Fund’s assets are managed by Sands Capital. The Sands Capital team believes that over time stock price appreciation follows earnings growth. The investment objective is to identify companies that can sustain above-average earnings growth relative to the broader market, typically over the next three to five years. The team believes great investment ideas are rare and runs a concentrated portfolio of high-quality, seasoned, growing businesses across an array of attractive and growing business spaces. Independent research – bottom-up and company focused – is the cornerstone of the team’s investment process. All research analyses and conclusions are internally generated using a variety of fundamental techniques and external data sources.

The team seeks to identify leading growth businesses that can withstand the continual scrutiny of following six investment criteria:

 

(1) Sustainable above-average earnings growth.

 

(2) Leadership position in a promising business space.

 

(3) Significant competitive advantage/unique business franchise.

 

(4) Clear mission and value-added focus.

 

(5) Financial strength.

 

(6) Rational valuation relative to market and business prospects.

In collaboration with the whole Sands Capital investment team, Sands and Sramek seek to identify and own the companies that appear to be the strongest fits with the above criteria by doing the following: monitoring status/activity in other portfolios ( e.g. , absolute weights and weight trends); meeting regularly with the various Sands Capital portfolio manager teams, sector teams, and individual analysts/ associates; reading internal and external research and participating in research activities (management meetings, field trips, etc.); holding regular team meetings and soliciting/encouraging recommendations from all Sands Capital team members.

The strongest fits are determined by de-composing each of the six criteria into its sub-components and then evaluating the universe of Sands Capital holdings versus those characteristics. For instance, “leadership in an attractive business space” can be broken into characteristics such as: large/growing market share; innovation; pricing power; strategic position in value chain; and attractive business model (high margins, high/rising ROIC, etc.). Companies are evaluated against these characteristics in a consensus-building process between the portfolio manager team and the rest of the investment team. The companies whose investment cases exhibit in great depth the qualities that Sands Capital values are regarded as the strongest fits and thus included in the Equity Fund.

 

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund – Sub-Advisors         33


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund – Sub-Advisors — (Continued)

 

 

 

Richard T. Weiss, CFA

Wells Capital Management, Inc.

100 Heritage Reserve

Menomonee Falls, WI 53051

Richard T. Weiss is the portfolio manager for the segment of the Equity Fund’s assets managed by Wells Capital Management, Inc. (“WellsCap”). Weiss has been in the investment business for over 30 years and is currently Managing Director and Senior Portfolio Manager of the Select Equity portfolio for WellsCap. Previously, he had been the manager or co-manager of the Wells Fargo Advantage Common Stock Fund and the Wells Fargo Advantage Opportunity Fund (previously known as the Strong Common Stock Fund and Strong Opportunity Fund) from March 1991 until March 2008. Prior to this, Weiss was a partner/portfolio manager at Stein Roe & Farnham in Chicago where he began his career, starting as a research analyst, in 1975. Weiss continues an informal relationship with the Wells Capital Management Core Equity team, which manages the Wells Fargo Advantage Common Stock Fund and Wells Fargo Advantage Opportunity Fund. WellsCap has been a sub-advisor to the Equity Fund since the Equity Fund’s inception in 1996.

Approximately 13% of the Equity Fund’s assets are managed by Weiss. He invests in stocks of small- and mid-sized companies that are undervalued either because they are not broadly recognized, are in transition, or are out of favor based on short-

term factors. Weiss also has the flexibility to invest in the stocks of larger companies if in his opinion they offer the potential for better returns. In seeking attractively valued companies, Weiss focuses on companies with above-average growth potential that also exhibit some or all of the following:

 

  Low institutional investor ownership and low analyst coverage

 

  High-quality management

 

  Sustainable competitive advantage

Weiss evaluates the degree of under-valuation relative to his estimate of each company’s private market value. This private market value approach is based on an assessment of what a private buyer would be willing to pay for the future cash flow stream of the target company. Based on his experience, Weiss believes that, except for technology and other high-growth stocks, most stocks trade at between 50% and 80% of the private market value. When trading at the low end of this range, companies take steps to prevent takeover, or they are taken over. The private market value estimate is applied flexibly, based on the outlook for the industry and the company’s fundamentals.

The SAI provides additional information about each sub-advisor’s method of compensation for its portfolio managers, other accounts managed by the portfolio managers, and the portfolio managers’ ownership of securities in the Funds.

 

 

 
34       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund – Sub-Advisors

 

The International Fund’s six sub-advisors pursue the International Fund’s objective primarily through investments in common stocks of issuers located outside of the United States. Under normal market conditions, the International Fund will invest at least 80% of its net assets, plus the amount of any borrowings for investment purposes, in the securities of companies organized or located outside of the United States, including large-, mid-, and small-cap companies and companies located in emerging markets. This investment policy may be changed by the Board without shareholder approval, but shareholders would be given at least 60 days’ notice if any change occurs. Each manager may invest in securities traded in both developed and emerging markets. Though there is no limit on emerging market exposure, it is not expected to be a primary focus, and the majority of the International Fund’s assets is expected to be invested in stocks of companies listed and domiciled in foreign developed countries. There are no limits on the International Fund’s geographic asset distribution but, to provide adequate diversification, the International Fund ordinarily invests in the securities markets of at least five countries outside of the United States. In most periods it is expected that the International Fund will hold securities in more than five countries. Although the International Fund intends to invest substantially all of its assets in issuers located outside of the United States, it may invest in U.S. issues on a limited basis, and at times of abnormal market conditions it may invest all of its assets in fewer than five countries.

The International Fund’s managers emphasize different stock-picking styles and invest in stocks spanning a range of market capitalization. Litman Gregory believes that during any given year certain stock-picking styles will generate higher returns than comparable market indexes, while others will lag. By including a variety of stock-picking styles in this single mutual fund, Litman Gregory believes that the variability and volatility of returns can be lessened. Although each manager has the flexibility to invest on a worldwide basis in non-U.S. companies with market capitalization of any size, it is expected that the International Fund will have significant exposure to large- and mid-sized foreign companies under normal market conditions.

Litman Gregory’s strategy is to allocate the portfolio’s assets among the managers who, based on Litman Gregory’s research, are judged to be among the best relative to their respective peer groups. There is no minimum or maximum allocation of the Fund’s portfolio assets to each sub-advisor. With respect to managers for the International Fund, Litman Gregory has focused exclusively on stock pickers who emphasize bottom-up stock-picking rather than macro-driven, top-down country picking.

Litman Gregory believes that bottom-up stock pickers have an advantage in foreign markets because:

 

  It is Litman Gregory’s opinion that the dynamics that influence individual countries’ markets, including currencies, inflation, economic growth, political factors, regulation and the like, are much more difficult to assess than the prospects and valuation characteristics of individual companies.
  Litman Gregory believes that some individual stocks in foreign markets are less closely analyzed (the markets are less “efficient”) than those in the United States. Litman Gregory believes that this will result in greater opportunities for skilled stock pickers to add value through pure stock selection.

 

  Based on Litman Gregory’s observations, bottom-up stock pickers in foreign markets, on average, seem to perform better than top-down-oriented managers.

Though bottom-up stock picking is emphasized, each manager also monitors specific macro-factors that it believes are relevant in specific countries.

The sub-advisors manage their individual portfolio segments by building a focused portfolio representing their highest-confidence stocks. Under normal conditions, each manager’s portfolio segment typically includes a minimum of 8 and a maximum of 15 securities. A manager may occasionally hold more than 15 securities. Though the total number of securities the International Fund may hold at any point in time will vary, it is generally expected that the International Fund will hold between 48 and 90 securities.

 

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters International Fund – Sub-Advisors         35


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund – Sub-Advisors — (Continued)

 

The following table provides a description of the International Fund’s six sub-advisors and their target levels of assets. Asset levels will fluctuate and it is at the discretion of Litman Gregory to re-balance the asset allocations. A detailed discussion of the management structure of the International Fund follows the table.

 

PORTFOLIO MANAGER(S)/SUB-ADVISOR   TARGET
ASSET
ALLOCATION
   MARKET CAPITALIZATION OF
COMPANIES IN PORTFOLIO
   STOCK-PICKING STYLE

David E. Marcus

Evermore Global Advisors, LLC

  16.67%    All sizes    Value

David G. Herro, CFA

Harris Associates L.P.

  16.67%    All sizes, but mostly large- and
mid-sized companies
   Value

Mark Little

Lazard Asset Management LLC

  16.67%    All sizes    Blend

Howard Appleby, CFA

Jean-Francois Ducrest

James LaTorre, CFA

Northern Cross, LLC

  16.67%    Mostly large- and
mid-sized companies
   Blend

Fabio Palolini, CFA

Benjamin (Ben) Beneche, CFA

Pictet Asset Management, LTD

  16.67%    All sizes    Blend

W. Vinson Walden, CFA

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc.

  16.67%    All sizes    Eclectic, may invest in traditional value stocks or growth stocks

 

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund Portfolio Managers

 

David E. Marcus

Evermore Global Advisors, LLC

89 Summit Avenue

Summit, NJ 07901

David E. Marcus is the lead portfolio manager for the segment of the International Fund’s assets managed by Evermore Global Advisors, LLC (“Evermore”). Marcus is Co-Founder, Chief Executive Officer and Chief Investment Officer and a portfolio manager at Evermore. He has managed the Evermore Global Value Fund since its inception in 2010. Marcus has over 24 years of experience in investment management, including management of registered investment companies. For a majority of this time, Marcus has focused on investing in European and other foreign companies. Marcus graduated from Northeastern University in 1988. From 1988 to 2000, Marcus held a series of positions at Mutual Series Fund, including junior research analyst, research analyst, co-portfolio manager and portfolio manager. From November 1998 to January 2000, Marcus was portfolio manager of the Mutual European Fund and co-portfolio manager of the Mutual Shares Fund and Mutual Discovery Fund. During this time, Marcus also served as Senior Vice President and Director of European Investments for Franklin Mutual Advisers, LLC. After leaving Franklin Mutual in early 2000, Marcus founded Marcstone Capital Management, L.P., a long/short European-focused equity manager, largely funded by Jan Stenbeck, the Swedish financier. After Mr. Stenbeck’s death in late 2002, Marcus closed Marcstone

and returned capital to its investors. In early 2003, Marcus co-founded Stonebrook Partners, LLC, the Stenbeck family office, and became an adviser to the Stenbeck family, in which capacity he helped restructure a number of the public and private companies that the family controlled. In June 2004, Marcus founded and served as managing partner of MarCap Investors, L.P., the investment manager of a European small-cap special situations fund, which he actively managed through the end of 2008 and wound down in 2009. Over the past thirteen years, Marcus has served on the board of directors of numerous companies, including: Novestra AB, a Swedish publicly-traded private equity firm with holdings in the U.S. and Europe; Pergo AB, a Swedish publicly-traded flooring company for which Marcus was instrumental in helping negotiate the sale of the company to the German company Pfleiderer AG; Scribona AB, a Swedish publicly-traded distributor of office products with sales in excess of $1 billion, for which Marcus, as Chairman of the Board, led the complete restructuring of the company and the negotiation to sell its operating assets; Miltope, Inc., a U.S. publicly-traded and subsequently acquired maker of ruggedized electronics for the U.S. military; and Modern Times Group AB, a Swedish publicly-traded pan-European media conglomerate. Marcus has gained significant operating experience through his active involvement on the above mentioned boards, as well as his involvement with the restructuring of a number of companies controlled by the Stenbeck family. Evermore has been a sub-advisor to the International Fund since 2017.

 

 

 
36       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Approximately 16.67% of the International Fund’s assets are managed by Marcus. Evermore employs a research and catalyst driven, fundamental value investment strategy. With an emphasis on undervalued companies undergoing change (“special situations”), Evermore focuses on investments in areas where the most compelling opportunities exist and on situations that, in Evermore’s opinion, have the potential for growth of capital. In selecting equity investments, Evermore focuses on the market price of a company’s securities relative to Evermore’s own evaluation of the company’s asset value, including an analysis of book value, cash flow potential, long-term earnings, and multiples of earnings. Evermore also focuses on the strength of the management teams of the companies for which Evermore is evaluating an investment. Similarly, debt securities and other indebtedness, including loan participations, are generally selected based on Evermore’s own analysis of the security’s intrinsic value rather than the coupon rate or rating of the security. Evermore examines each investment separately and there are no set criteria as to specific value parameters, asset size, earnings or industry type.

A special situation arises when the securities of a company are expected to appreciate due to company-specific developments (“catalysts”) rather than general business conditions or movements of the market as a whole. Catalysts may include management changes, shareholder activism, and operational and financial restructurings ( e.g., cost-cutting, asset sales, breakups, spinoffs, mergers, acquisitions, liquidations, share buybacks, recapitalizations, etc.). Investments in special situations may include equity securities or fixed-income securities, such as corporate debt, which may be in a stressed or distressed position. Special situation investments may include high yield fixed-income securities or “junk bonds” (i.e., securities that are rated below investment grade by S&P or by another Nationally Recognized Statistical Rating Organization or similar unrated securities).

 

 

David G. Herro, CFA

Harris Associates L.P.

111 S. Wacker Drive

Suite 4600

Chicago, IL 60606

David G. Herro is the portfolio manager for the segment of the International Fund’s assets managed by Harris Associates L.P. (“Harris”). Herro is Deputy Chairman, Chief Investment Officer International Equity and a portfolio manager at Harris. He has managed the Oakmark International Fund, the Oakmark International Small Cap Fund and the Oakmark Global Select Fund since their inception in 1992, 1995 and 2006, respectively. Herro earned a B.S. degree in Accounting from the University of Wisconsin-Platteville and an M.A. degree from the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee. He has been in the investment business since 1986. Harris has been a sub-advisor to the International Fund since the International Fund’s inception in 1997.

Approximately 16.67% of the International Fund’s assets are managed by Herro. Herro and Harris’ portfolio management team employ Harris’ value investment philosophy and process

to manage his portion of the International Fund’s assets. This investment philosophy is based upon the belief that, over time, a company’s stock price converges with Harris’ estimate of its intrinsic or true business value. By “true business value,” Harris means an estimate of the price a knowledgeable buyer would pay to acquire the entire business. In making its investment decisions, Harris uses a “bottom-up” approach focused on individual companies, rather than focusing on specific economic factors or specific industries.

The chief consideration in the selection of stocks is the size of the discount of a company’s stock price compared to the company’s perceived true business value. In addition, Harris looks for companies with the following characteristics, although not all companies will have all of these attributes: free cash flows and intelligent investment of excess cash, earnings that are growing and are reasonably predictable, and a high level of management ownership in the company. Once Harris determines that a stock is selling at a significant discount and that the company has some of the aforementioned attributes, Harris generally will consider buying that stock for a strategy. Harris usually sells a stock when the price approaches its estimated worth. This means Harris has “buy” and “sell” targets for each stock held in its clients’ discretionary accounts. Harris also monitors each holding and adjusts those price targets as warranted to reflect changes in a company’s fundamentals. Harris attempts to manage some of the risks of investing in stocks of companies by purchasing stocks whose prices it considers low relative to Harris’ estimate of the companies’ intrinsic values. In addition, Harris seeks companies with solid finances and proven records and continuously monitors each portfolio holding. Harris attempts to manage some of the risks of investing in foreign securities by considering the relative political and economic stability of a company’s home country, the company’s ownership structure, and the company’s accounting practices.

 

 

Mark Little

Lazard Asset Management LLC

30 Rockefeller Plaza

New York, NY 10112

Mark Little is the lead portfolio manager for the segment of the International Fund’s assets managed by Lazard Asset Management LLC (“Lazard”). Little is a managing director, portfolio manager/analyst on the International Strategic Equity portfolio-management team at Lazard. He has been a portfolio manager of the Lazard International Strategic Equity Portfolio since that fund’s inception in October 2005. He began working in the investment field in 1992. Prior to joining Lazard in 1997, he was a manager in the corporate finance practice of Coopers & Lybrand and earned his Associated Chartered Accountant (ACA) qualification with Rees Pollock Chartered Accountants. Little has an MA in Economics from Clare College, Cambridge University. Lazard has been a sub-advisor to the International Fund since 2013.

 

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters International Fund – Sub-Advisors         37


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund – Sub-Advisors — (Continued)

 

Approximately 16.67% of the International Fund’s assets are managed by Little. Little and the portfolio management team at Lazard believe that a company with the ability to improve and/or sustain its profitability at a relatively high level can compound returns at an attractive rate. At the same time, they believe in buying such companies that are trading at discounts relative to their profitability prospects.

Generally, Lazard categorizes any purchased stock into one or more of the following three categories:

 

  Compounders: These are companies that Little and the team think can sustain relatively high levels of profitability and companies whose management may enhance shareholder returns through share buybacks and dividend payments. Lazard will purchase these companies if Little and the team believe they can compound total return ( i.e. , earnings growth, dividends, and share buybacks) at a relatively high rate over the long term and are reasonably priced in relation to their profitability prospects.

 

  Mispriced Situations: These are companies that are trading inexpensively relative to what Little and the team think their assets and cash flows should be worth longer term. They may or may not be compounders.

 

  Restructuring: These are companies whose profitability is depressed relative to their history and companies who are taking steps – such as cutting costs, investing in an underinvested area, selling non-core businesses, etc. – to return to higher profitability. They may or may not become compounders.

Lazard’s analysts are largely responsible for generating ideas. They do so by running valuation screens in their sectors and monitoring developments at companies that fall under their coverage. They do most of the fundamental analysis, though Little and the other portfolio managers at Lazard are also involved. Little and the portfolio management team review and debate the assumptions analysts use in their financial modeling, meet with company management, and lead analysis on some small-cap companies. The goal of the team’s fundamental company analysis is to identify Lazard’s research edge and estimate how much return can be generated from this edge. Lazard’s research edge is generally a function of its analysts having a differentiated view than the market on the profitability a company can generate, the duration of its profitability, and/or what the company should be worth.

Little and the team use several valuation metrics to gauge a company’s worth and set price targets. A company has to be priced in a way that Lazard believes is reasonably valued for the profitability it can generate. This assessment is based upon free-cash-flow yield, valuation relative to peers or relative to businesses with similar profitability and growth characteristics, discounted-cash-flow modeling, and sum of the parts (valuing different segments of a company separately). There is a fair amount of judgment involved in balancing these different approaches to assess a company’s worth and set price targets.

 

Howard Appleby, CFA

Jean-Francois Ducrest

James LaTorre, CFA

Northern Cross, LLC

125 Summer Street, Suite 1410

Boston, MA 02110

Howard Appleby, Jean-Francois Ducrest and James LaTorre are the co-portfolio managers for the segment of the International Fund’s assets managed by Northern Cross, LLC (“Northern Cross”). Appleby, Ducrest and LaTorre are the co-founders and principal owners of Northern Cross. Appleby, a British citizen, has been in the investment business since 1982, when he began his career as an equity analyst specializing in basic materials and energy for W. Greenwell & Co. In 1985, he moved to the U.S. and started a 16-year sell-side career, advising U.S. portfolio managers on non-U.S. equities in various research, sales, and management roles. Appleby went on to have an 8-year tenure at ABN AMRO and in 2002 became part of the Northern Cross group as an analyst. In 2003, he became a founding partner and portfolio manager for Northern Cross. He is a graduate of the University of Exeter, Exeter, England and is a CFA charterholder. Ducrest, a French citizen, has been engaged in the business of international equities since 1988. He started his career on the sell side as an equity analyst at Paris-based European broker Cheuvreux, covering multiple sectors during his tenure there, including industrials, consumer goods, and utilities. From 1995 to 2001, he was a Senior Vice President and Principal of Cheuvreux’ U.S. operations, serving institutions investing in European equities. In 2002, Ducrest became part of the Northern Cross group as an analyst. In 2003, he became a founding partner and portfolio manager for Northern Cross. He is a graduate of the Institut d’Etudes Politiques de Paris, France and a Trustee of the French Cultural Center of Boston and the U.S. based Sciences-Po Foundation. LaTorre began his career in the investment industry over thirty years ago when he started within the Investment Banking area of Merrill Lynch in New York. He moved on to Boston to become VP of Investments and Portfolio Manager with the Ivy Funds. LaTorre has been a member of the Northern Cross team since 1992, initially as Director of Research and subsequently as a Portfolio Manager in the mid 1990’s. LaTorre received his BA in Economics from Fairfield University and his MS in Finance from Boston College where he was a recipient of the Dean and Faculty Award given to the highest ranking student. LaTorre is also a recipient of the Distinguished Alumni Achievement Award from the Carroll School of Management at Boston College. LaTorre spends his free time with family and on interests that include music and outdoor activities. He is a Trustee of the Dana-Farber Cancer Institute. Northern Cross has been a sub-advisor to the International Fund since 2007.

Approximately 16.67% of the International Fund’s assets are managed by Northern Cross. The Northern Cross team’s investment philosophy and process are characterized by:

 

  An in-depth understanding of a company and its industry, which leads to a long investment time horizon (3-5+ years) and results in low portfolio turnover
 

 

 
38       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents
  Analysis of the attractiveness of countries and industries from a top-down perspective, though stocks are selected on a bottom-up basis

 

  Stock selection, not top-down views, which determines industry and country weightings

 

  Low portfolio turnover, which minimizes transaction and market-impact costs

 

  An emphasis on quality “blue chip” companies with long-term catalysts that will lead to expanding profit margins

 

  A willingness to think independently and deviate significantly from benchmark industry and country weightings

 

  Concentration in its best ideas with the most attractive risk/reward potential

The investment process encompasses a top-down, thematic approach coupled with intensive, fundamental, bottom-up industry and company analysis. It is not uncommon for an idea to be monitored for years before a position is taken. Research is focused on identifying secular trends (rather than shorter-term cycles) that will drive margin expansion. Patient due diligence of companies, countries and regions are critical to the investment process. Northern Cross believes this due diligence, in combination with a top-down investment theme, provides the best opportunity to invest in truly undervalued companies. Before qualifying a country for investment, Northern Cross analyzes the stability of its currency, political, social, and economic environment and its legal infrastructure. Consequently, the team focuses on companies located in Europe, the Pacific Basin and emerging industrialized countries whose economic and political regimes appear stable and are believed to provide adequate protection to foreign shareholders.

Among the long-term drivers of stock price appreciation the team looks for are the following:

 

  Margin expansion

 

  Pricing power driven by industry consolidation

 

  Franchise value

 

  Restructuring

 

  Asset plays

On-site company meetings play an important role in the portfolio construction process, with each company held in the portfolio typically visited at least twice per year. Contact with company management and other key people serve to help the team gain insight and understanding of the business’s operations and judge the strength of company management. The team utilizes a worldwide network of brokers/traders and local contacts for additional insight and trade execution.

Rigid buy/sell price targets are avoided, and the relative attractiveness of a stock or group of similar stocks is continuously evaluated. No single set of metrics is used to value all companies. Typically, the team looks for companies with strong and sustainable market positions that are selling at low P/E multiples relative to other stocks in the same country and industry. In addition to assessing a company’s relative P/E ratio, other valuation metrics considered include the potential for

long-term margin expansion compared to the enterprise value/sales multiple, the long-term sustainable free cash flow yield, and the absolute P/E ratio looking many years out.

Positions are commonly sold when:

 

  A new idea presents better risk/reward characteristics

 

  The stock’s price reaches the underlying business value

 

  There is an adverse change in the economic, political or regulatory environment

 

  Management fails to execute their business plan

 

  There is an overwhelming change in the company’s policy of shareholder rights

The team does not plan to hedge currencies. However, in a market where the local currency is expected to be weak, investments are often made in companies with assets or earning streams denominated in U.S. dollars.

 

 

Fabio Palolini, CFA

Benjamin (Ben) Beneche, CFA

Pictet Asset Management, LTD

120 London Wall

Moor House – Level 11

London, United Kingdom

EC2Y 5ET

Fabio Palolini and Benjamin (Ben) Beneche are the co-portfolio managers to the segment of the International Fund’s assets managed by Pictet Asset Management, LTD (“Pictet”). Pictet has been a sub-advisor to the International Fund since 2016.

Paolini joined Pictet in 1997 and is Head of EAFE Equities in the Developed Equities team, with a focus on European Equities. Palolini began his career in Pictet & Cie’s Financial Research Department in 1994, initially in the Economics team and then in the European equities research team. Palolini graduated with a degree in Economics from the University of Siena in Italy. He obtained a CFPI/AZEK in 1996 and is a Chartered Financial Analyst (CFA) charterholder.

Beneche joined Pictet in 2008 and is a Senior Investment Manager in the EAFE Equities team with a specific focus on Japanese Equities. Beneche began his career as a graduate within PAM Equities then as a Junior Investment Manager on the Global Equities fund with an emphasis on the energy sector. Beneche graduated with a first class honors degree in Economics and Economic History from the University of York. He is also Chartered Financial Analyst (CFA) charterholder.

Approximately 16.67% of the International Fund’s assets are managed by Pictet.

Paolini wants companies to be able to generate free cash flow in the future. (Free cash is cash a business has at hand and broadly speaking is calculated by adding depreciation and amortization to net income and subtracting capital expenditures.) In addition, Paolini wants a company to have good opportunities to reinvest this free cash and do so in a profitable manner, i.e., generate high returns on capital, in order

 

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters International Fund – Sub-Advisors         39


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund – Sub-Advisors — (Continued)

 

to compound investment returns for shareholders. When looking at free cash flow (FCF), Paolini and team focus on what free cash a company can generate on a normalized basis. The period over which the team may expect normalization to happen varies by business model and is also dependent on the stage of the business and economic cycle a company may be operating in at any point in time. For example, in the event the team expects a business model to attain normal sales growth, margin, and capital expenditures over the next three years, the team’s task would be to estimate those free cash flows three years from now and discount them back to the present to assess what “normalized” FCF yield (FCF/stock price) the company’s stock is offering (we will discuss the relevance of FCF yield in buy and sell decisions further below). The discount rate used is the company’s cost of equity.

Assessing whether a company has good reinvestment opportunities in front of it is typically a function of what sales growth it can achieve and its pricing power. So the team assesses what organic and inorganic growth opportunities are available to the company and whether the company has a competitive advantage versus its peers. The combination of higher sales growth and superior pricing power helps generate higher profitability and, therefore, high returns on capital. How company management will allocate capital is also important in understanding whether a company can generate high returns on capital.

The consistency of generating high returns on capital is also important. Typically, a company that is relatively less cyclical ( i.e., less impacted by economic cycles), has good reinvestment opportunities, and is run by capable management has a higher likelihood of consistently generating high returns. These companies Paolini calls compounders and they are most attractive to him in terms of their business-model attributes because these companies compound shareholder value at a faster rate than cyclical companies. To assess valuation for compounders, in addition to normalized FCF yield assessment, Paolini and team will also look at discounted cash flow modeling as that incorporates the cash flows a company is likely to generate beyond what the team considers to be a normalized or forecastable time frame. Paolini says for compounders it’s essential to look at DCF-type metrics to capture the long-term compounding effects of their superior growth and return-on-capital profile relative to more cyclical business models.

In the case of more cyclical business models, there is greater variability in free-cash generation, so balance-sheet quality assumes greater importance in the team’s overall analysis. In addition, for cyclical business models the valuation hurdle prior to purchase is typically higher than in the case of compounders. For example, the target normalized FCF yield ( i.e., the sell target yield) for a relatively high-growth and high return-on-capital compounding business could be as low as around 5%, while for a riskier, cyclical business model with lower growth and return on capital this target yield could be 10%, or higher in some cases (such as in the case of oil- or commodity-related business models). Ultimately, the target yield at which a company’s stock would be sold is a function of Paolini and

Beneche’s assessment of its business model. The difference between this target yield and the current yield (based on current price) indicates the potential upside there might be in a stock.

When constructing portfolios, their stock weightings are a function of the amount of upside in a stock, conviction in the business model and in the investment case, the downside risk in the business model, and liquidity. In addition, Paolini and Beneche aim to diversify “investment drivers” or common risk factors. For example, they do not want the portfolio to be overly exposed to external factors, such as oil, economic growth in a country or region, or rising or falling interest rates. Stocks are sold when they reach their price targets or target yield, or when there are better opportunities, or when the investment pillars on which the initial purchase was based are no longer valid. In the case of the International Fund, all of these portfolio-management considerations will apply.

 

 

W. Vinson Walden, CFA

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc.

2300 North Ridgetop Road

Santa Fe, NM 87506

W. Vinson Walden is the portfolio manager for the segment of the International Fund’s assets managed by Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. (“Thornburg”). Walden joined Thornburg in 2002 and is portfolio manager and a managing director at Thornburg. He is portfolio manager of Thornburg’s Global Opportunities and Global Equity Income Strategies. Prior to joining Thornburg, Walden served as an associate for Lehman Brothers in New York City. Thornburg has been a sub-advisor to the International Fund since 2003.

Approximately 16.67% of the International Fund’s assets are managed by Thornburg. Walden and his team believe that a bottom-up approach to investing in undervalued securities will generate above-average returns with below market risk. Walden’s idea of value centers on his assessment of the intrinsic worth of an investment. The goal is to uncover promising companies with sound business fundamentals at a time when their intrinsic value is not fully recognized by the marketplace.

Walden and his team’s initial search for investment ideas involves the use of quantitative screens as well as other sources. Starting with the international equity universe, he screens Thornburg’s databases for companies that appear attractive across a number of value parameters. He looks for securities that have low price-to earnings, low price-to-cash flow and low price-to-book ratios. Companies ranging from small-cap to large-cap are considered. Additionally, screens are employed in order to identify stocks where business prospects may be improving. The typical screen generates a list exceeding 50 stocks from which only a few may be selected for further research.

Walden will not purchase a security simply because it is priced cheaply relative to the market. He spends the majority of its time on bottom-up research in its efforts to understand the fundamental merit of each stock that has been identified as promising. These efforts include financial statement analysis,

 

 

 
40       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

discussions with senior management of the companies, as well as consideration of the company’s competitors, suppliers and clientele. Walden seeks to uncover companies with promising prospects that are not yet reflected in the price of the stock. Many of the investments made may be contrary to the popular consensus at the time of purchase. Ultimately, Walden attempts to estimate the business value of each company. In addition to estimating the business value for each stock, the analysis also seeks to identify where potential weaknesses may lie in an attempt to minimize downside risk. Each of the researched stocks is classified into a category of value:

 

  Basic Value – Stocks of financially sound companies with established businesses that are selling at low valuations relative to the company’s net assets or potential earning power

 

  Consistent Earners – Companies with steady earnings and dividend growth that are selling at attractive values and are priced below historical norms

 

  Emerging Franchises – Companies in the process of establishing a leading position in a product, service or market that is expected to grow at an above-average rate

The dynamics of the companies in those categories differ and, therefore, merit specific consideration within the context of that category. For example, Basic Value companies are generally more cyclically oriented than Emerging Franchises and require analysis of the companies’ product cycles and the historical and prospective impact of the economy on their business. Within the context of each value category, Walden evaluates the most attractive prospects. Generally, the segment of the International Fund’s portfolio allocated to Walden is expected to include stocks from each category. Because of the diversification across these categories, the segment of the International Fund’s portfolio managed by Walden will typically be eclectic and cannot be easily labeled as “growth” or “value.”

The SAI provides additional information about each sub-advisor’s method of compensation for its portfolio managers, other accounts managed by the portfolio managers, and the portfolio managers’ ownership of securities in the Funds.

 

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters International Fund – Sub-Advisors         41


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund – Sub-Advisors

 

Litman Gregory’s strategy is to allocate the portfolio’s assets among the Smaller Companies Fund’s three sub-advisors who, based on Litman Gregory’s research, are judged to be among the best in their respective style groups. There is no minimum or maximum allocation of the Fund’s portfolio assets to each sub-advisor. The sub-advisors manage their individual portfolio segments by building a focused portfolio representing their highest-confidence stocks. Under normal market conditions, the Smaller Companies Fund invests at least 80% of the Smaller Companies Fund’s net assets, plus the amount of any borrowings for investment purposes, in securities of small- and mid-sized U.S. companies. This investment policy may be changed by the Board without shareholder approval, but shareholders would be given at least 60 days’ notice if any change occurs. Under normal conditions, each manager’s portfolio segment typically includes a minimum of 8 and a maximum of 15 securities. A manager may occasionally hold more than 15 securities. Though the total number of securities the Smaller Companies Fund may hold at any point in time will vary, it is generally expected that the Smaller Companies Fund will hold between 24 and 45 securities.

As used in this Prospectus, Litman Gregory defines a “Smaller Company” as one whose market capitalization falls within the range of market capitalizations of any company in the Russell 2500 ® Index, as of the most recent reconstitution. Though the

primary capitalization focus of the Smaller Companies Fund is in the small-cap sector, Litman Gregory does not believe that small-cap investors should be forced to sell a stock that appreciates beyond the upper thresholds of the small-cap range if the stock picker continues to maintain a high level of conviction with respect to the holding. This has been a problem with many small-cap funds, as they have, at times, been forced to sell some of their most compelling holdings. Moreover, occasionally companies in the mid-cap range will be extraordinarily attractive to the Smaller Companies Fund’s portfolio managers. Overall, Litman Gregory expects the majority of the Smaller Companies Fund’s holdings at any point in time to meet the definition of a Smaller Company, but the Smaller Companies Fund has the flexibility to hold mid-sized companies if the managers believe that holding these companies will lead to higher overall returns. The managers have the flexibility to invest up to 50% (measured at the time of original investment) of their respective portfolios in mid-cap companies if these stocks qualify as their “highest conviction” holdings.

The following table provides a description of the Smaller Companies Fund’s three sub-advisors and their target levels of assets. Asset levels will fluctuate and it is at the discretion of Litman Gregory to re-balance the asset allocations. A detailed discussion of the management structure of the Smaller Companies Fund follows the table.

 

 

PORTFOLIO MANAGER(S)/SUB-ADVISOR  

TARGET
ASSET

ALLOCATION

   MARKET CAPITALIZATION OF
COMPANIES IN PORTFOLIO
   STOCK-PICKING STYLE

Jeffrey Bronchick, CFA

Cove Street Capital, LLC

  33-1/3%    Small- and mid-sized companies    Value

Dennis Bryan

Arik Ahitov

First Pacific Advisors, LLC

  33-1/3%    Small- and mid-sized companies    Value

Richard T. Weiss, CFA

Wells Capital Management, Inc.

  33-1/3%    Small- and mid-sized companies    Blend

 

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund Portfolio Managers

 

Jeffrey Bronchick, CFA

Cove Street Capital, LLC

2101 East El Segundo, Suite 302

El Segundo, CA 90245

Jeffrey Bronchick is the portfolio manager for the segment of the Smaller Companies Fund’s assets managed by Cove Street Capital, LLC (“Cove Street”). Bronchick is the principal owner of Cove Street, which he founded in 2011, and the portfolio manager for the Cove Street Capital Small Cap Value Fund. Prior to founding Cove Street, Bronchick was a partner at Reed Conner and Birdwell (“RCB”), which he joined in 1989 as a research analyst. He was later promoted to Chief Investment Officer, portfolio manager and equity analyst, and co-portfolio manager for the CNI Charter RCB Small Cap Value Fund and managed RCB’s small-cap value investment strategy. Prior to joining RCB, Bronchick did equity research and trading at

Neuberger Berman, Bankers Trust and First Boston. RCB was a sub-advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund from June 2007 through June 2011, and Bronchick was the co-manager of that segment of the Smaller Companies Fund during RCB’s tenure. Cove Street has been a sub-advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund since 2011.

Approximately 33-1/3% of the Smaller Companies Fund’s assets are managed by Bronchick. The objective of Bronchick’s fundamental research is to identify the best combination of attractive businesses, valuation, and shareholder-oriented management. His small-cap universe consists of companies between $100 million and $3 billion.

Idea generation is driven by both quantitative and qualitative processes. As a value-based, bottom-up manager, Cove Street consistently screens markets for securities that appear statistically inexpensive and allows that pool of ideas to drive its efforts and work rather than begin the day with a preconceived notion of securities it would like to buy. Cove Street also screens

 

 

 
42       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

for “good businesses” as defined by classic characteristics like consistency of growth and profitability, high returns on invested capital and sustainable competitive advantages and makes the determination whether the valuation is cheap enough to provide a proper margin of safety. Lastly, Cove Street screens on corporate and executive behavior such as share repurchase and insider buying and selling. On a qualitative basis, ideas are produced from the team’s collective experience, Cove Street’s deep contact network, out of office experiences and obvious headline issues.

Once the team has determined that an idea has promise, they begin stage II, which consists of the data download of all relevant company financial information into the Cove Street analytical spreadsheet and the digestion of all public company information. They then ask the question: whether a company appears to be a great business at a reasonable price or an exceedingly cheap security that provides a deeper margin of safety to compensate for potential business issues.

Stage III is the team tackle and deep dive. The research team performs intensive analysis on valuation and business characteristics, with a couple of analysts focused on the stock as a “purchase” and one analyst focused on the stock as a “short-sale,” a version of the so-called Socratic method of reasoning. Key pivot points include:

 

  What is a reasonable estimate of intrinsic value? We incorporate a multivariate approach that utilizes a discounted cashflow analysis, private market values, and a historical calculation of enterprise value to normalized earnings, cashflow and revenue.

 

  Classic Porter value chain analysis of competitors, suppliers, potential entrants, customers and substitutes.

 

  Is there a competitive advantage that can generate sustainably strong returns on invested capital?

 

  Management: friend, neutral or foe?

 

  PEST Control: political, economic, social, technological issues.

 

  What is the team thinking that others are not?

 

  What will it cost Cove Street if things go very wrong?

Stage IV is portfolio consideration. Key considerations include whether there is sufficient risk adjusted upside – on an absolute basis and as compared to other stocks that Cove Street owns and how it fits with the portfolio’s industry concentration.

The final decision is made by Bronchick.

Less is more in regard to portfolio turnover, as experience has proven that the quality of decision-making decreases with frequency. That said, mistakes are inevitable and Cove Street’s concentrated research assists in identifying errors relatively early.

Cove Street’s sell discipline is also based upon a blend of qualitative and quantitative measures:

Business:

 

  Cove Street is incorrect in its expectations about long-term economic margins and earnings power
  Actual or likely prospects of balance sheet deterioration

 

  Perceived cyclical industry problems reveal themselves as secular

Value:

 

  A good business is excessively valued or a reasonable business is fairly valued

 

  A better idea is found that materially improves risk/reward

People:

 

  Unexpected/poor decisions are made allocating shareholder capital

 

  Lose confidence that management and the board are best representing shareholders and the cost and effort to influence this process are deemed prohibitive

 

 

Arik Ahitov

Dennis Bryan

First Pacific Advisors, LLC

11601 Wilshire Blvd., Suite 1200

Los Angeles, CA 90025

Arik Ahitov and Dennis Bryan are the portfolio managers for the segment of the Smaller Companies Fund’s assets managed by First Pacific Advisors, LLC (“First Pacific”). Bryan joined First Pacific in 1993 and has been a partner in First Pacific since 2006. Ahitov joined First Pacific in 2010 and has been a partner in First Pacific since 2015. He was a Managing Director of First Pacific from 2013 to 2015. Bryan and Ahitov manage equity separate accounts and the FPA Capital Fund in First Pacific’s small-mid cap absolute value style. First Pacific has been a sub-advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund since the Smaller Companies Fund’s inception in 2003.

Approximately 33-1/3% of the Smaller Companies Fund’s assets are managed by Bryan and Ahitov. The general objective of Bryan’s and Ahitov’s stock research is to identify stocks from a variety of sources that are cheap relative to their peer group and are characterized by strong balance sheets, solid or improving fundamentals and strong competitive positions in their industry. In addition, they focus on companies that exhibit strong free cash flow, quality management and understandable business strategies. Bryan and Ahitov also emphasize above-average return-on-capital though they tend not to focus on rapidly growing companies that generate very high returns on assets because these companies rarely meet their valuation criteria.

Statistical screens that generate research ideas include “new low” lists and various value-oriented measures. In addition to quantitative screens, the team also looks at insider transactions, management changes and spin-offs. Big-picture trends or developments may also lead Bryan and Ahitov to look at certain stocks or industries.

Specific company research is intensive and involves finding as much information as possible from as many sources as possible. The first step is an in-depth look at the financials to gain an understanding of the operating history, trends and the

 

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund – Sub-Advisors         43


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund – Sub-Advisors — (Continued)

 

financial health of a company. Following that, research focuses on gaining an understanding of the company’s business model, management quality, growth potential, strengths and weaknesses and competitive position. Because there is a preference for out-of-favor companies there is a particular focus on assessing whether profits are down because of issues that are transitory or permanent. As part of the research process, there is usually contact with management (to assess the quality of the people), competitors, customers and others who are potential sources of information.

The overall assessment of fundamentals is not measured against a standard set of criteria; rather, each is relative to the specific type of business or industry. In general, Bryan and Ahitov are looking for situations where certainty is high; thus, a business that has strong long-term fundamentals but is temporarily out of favor is typical of a new buy. Since there is a preference for companies with strong free cash flow, it is also important to have confidence in management’s ability to add value through the deployment of excess cash.

Valuation is critical to the assessment of each stock-picking opportunity. Valuation assessments usually involve looking at a variety of valuation measures including price-to-earnings, price-to-cash flow, price-to-book value, price-to-sales and enterprise value and market capitalization to total revenue. The valuation measures that are applicable to any particular stock depend on company-specific facts and circumstances as well as broader valuation trends in the industry. In assessing valuations, Bryan and Ahitov are cognizant of factoring in where the company is in its earnings cycle, its normalized earnings, and how the cycle has played out in the past. In assessing multiples the team studies what multiple levels were in past cycles and considers whether this information is relevant to assessing the potential for future multiples. The valuation assessment then often becomes a function of the expected profitability recovery and multiple expansion from current levels.

Bryan and Ahitov usually sell stocks for one of four reasons: (1) the stock reaches full valuation; (2) there has been a full profit recovery; (3) a superior alternative value appears; or (4) the company does not perform as expected.

 

 

Richard T. Weiss, CFA

Wells Capital Management, Inc.

100 Heritage Reserve

Menomonee Falls, WI 53051

Richard T. Weiss is the portfolio manager for the segment of the Smaller Companies Fund’s assets managed by WellsCap. Weiss has been in the investment business for over 30 years and is currently Managing Director and Senior Portfolio Manager of the Select Equity portfolio for WellsCap. Previously, he had been the manager or co-manager of the Wells Fargo Advantage Common Stock Fund and the Wells Fargo Advantage Opportunity Fund (previously known as the Strong Common Stock Fund and Strong Opportunity Fund) from March 1991 until March 2008. Prior to this, Weiss was a partner/portfolio manager at Stein Roe & Farnham in Chicago where he began

his career, starting as a research analyst, in 1975. Weiss continues an informal relationship with the Wells Capital Management Core Equity team, which manages the Wells Fargo Advantage Common Stock Fund and Wells Fargo Advantage Opportunity Fund. WellsCap has been a sub-advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund since the Smaller Companies Fund’s inception in 2003.

Approximately 33-1/3% of the Smaller Companies Fund’s assets are managed by Weiss. He invests in stocks of small- and mid-sized companies that are undervalued either because they are not broadly recognized, are in transition, or are out of favor based on short-term factors. Weiss also has the flexibility to invest in the stocks of larger companies if in his opinion they offer the potential for better returns. In seeking attractively valued companies, Weiss focuses on companies with above-average growth potential that also exhibit some or all of the following:

 

  Low institutional investor ownership and low analyst coverage

 

  High-quality management

 

  Sustainable competitive advantage

Weiss evaluates the degree of under-valuation relative to his estimate of each company’s private market value. This private market value approach is based on an assessment of what a private buyer would be willing to pay for the future cash flow stream of the target company. Based on his experience, Weiss believes that, except for technology and other high-growth stocks, most stocks trade at between 50% and 80% of the private market value. When trading at the low end of this range, companies take steps to prevent takeover, or they are taken over. The private market value estimate is applied flexibly, based on the outlook for the industry and the company’s fundamentals.

The SAI provides additional information about each sub-advisor’s method of compensation for its portfolio managers, other accounts managed by the portfolio managers, and the portfolio managers’ ownership of securities in the Funds.

 

 

 
44       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund – Sub-Advisors

 

Litman Gregory’s strategy is to allocate the portfolio’s assets among the Alternative Strategies Fund’s five sub-advisors to provide investors a mix of strategies that Litman Gregory believes offer risk-return characteristics that are attractive individually and even more compelling collectively. Allocations among sub-advisors are based on a number of factors, including Litman Gregory’s expectation for the risk-adjusted return potential of each sub-advisor’s strategy and the impact on overall portfolio risk, with the objective of maximizing return subject to the goals of low volatility and relatively low correlation with broad financial markets, especially the stock market. Litman Gregory may at times adjust the allocations of capital to sub-advisors if it believes there is a highly compelling tactical opportunity in a particular sub-advisor’s strategy. Portfolio assets will be tactically allocated to the sub-advisors in accordance with the target allocation range for each sub-advisor specified in the table below, as measured at the time of allocation.

Sub-advisor strategies may seek to benefit from: opportunities to combine securities with differing risk characteristics; market inefficiencies; arbitrage opportunities; opportunities to provide liquidity; tactical opportunities in asset classes or securities; special situations such as spin offs; as well as other opportunities in areas such as real estate or managed futures. In the aggregate, the managers can invest globally in stocks of companies of any size, domicile or market capitalization, government and corporate bonds and other fixed income securities and currencies, including short positions of any of the foregoing, within their respective segments of the Alternative Strategies Fund. They may also invest in derivatives, including, without limitation, options, futures contracts, and swaps, to manage risk or enhance return and can also borrow amounts up to one third of the value of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s total

assets (except that the Alternative Strategies Fund may exceed this limit to satisfy redemption requests or for other temporary purposes). Each of the managers may invest in illiquid securities; however, the Alternative Strategies Fund as a whole may not hold more than 15% of its net assets in illiquid securities. In some cases, the sub-advisors may seek to replicate strategies they employ in their private (hedge) funds. In other cases, the sub-advisors may seek to enhance strategies they run in other public funds by focusing on their highest conviction ideas to a greater extent or by pursuing certain aspects of their strategies with greater flexibility. However, the Alternative Strategies Fund will only invest directly in portfolio securities selected by the sub-advisors and will not invest in any pooled investment vehicles or accounts managed by the sub-advisors.

Each sub-advisor will have an investment approach that generally focuses on a particular asset class or specific strategies. Currently, the strategies the sub-advisors focus on are as follows: (1) an arbitrage oriented strategy, (2) an opportunistic income strategy which will often focus on mortgage related securities, (3) a contrarian opportunity strategy that allows tactical investments throughout the capital structure (stocks and bonds), asset classes, market capitalization, industries and geographies, (4) a liquid long/short equity strategy, and (5) an strategic alpha strategy that focuses on the tactical allocation of long and short global fixed income opportunities and currencies.

The following table provides a description of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s five sub-advisors and their current target levels of assets. Asset levels will fluctuate, and it is at the discretion of Litman Gregory to re-balance the asset allocations. A detailed discussion of the management structure of the Alternative Strategies Fund follows the table.

 

 

PORTFOLIO
MANAGER(S)/SUB-ADVISOR
  CURRENT TARGET ALLOCATION AND
TARGET ASSET ALLOCATION RANGE
   STRATEGY

Jeffrey Gundlach

Jeffrey Sherman, CFA

DoubleLine Capital LP

 

25%

12.5%-32.5%

   Opportunistic Income

Steven Romick, CFA

Brian Selmo, CFA

Mark Landecker, CFA

First Pacific Advisors, LLC

 

20%

12.5%-32.5%

   Contrarian Opportunity

Matthew Eagan, CFA

Kevin Kearns

Todd Vandam, CFA

Loomis, Sayles & Company, L.P.

 

25%

12.5%-32.5%

   Strategic Alpha Fixed Income

John Burbank

Passport Capital, LLC

 

10%

5%-15%

   Long/Short Equity

John Orrico, CFA

Todd Munn

Roger Foltynowicz, CAIA

Gregg Loprete

Water Island Capital, LLC

 

20%

12.5%-32.5%

   Arbitrage

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund – Sub-Advisors         45


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund – Sub-Advisors — (Continued)

 

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund Portfolio Managers

 

Opportunistic Income Strategy

 

Jeffrey Gundlach

Jeffrey Sherman, CFA

DoubleLine Capital LP

333 South Grand Avenue, Suite 1800

Los Angeles, CA 90071

Jeffrey Gundlach and Jeffrey Sherman are the co-portfolio managers responsible for the opportunistic income strategy (the “Opportunistic Income Strategy”), which is the segment of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets managed by DoubleLine Capital LP (“DoubleLine”). Gundlach is Chief Executive Officer and Chief Investment Officer of DoubleLine, which he co-founded in 2009. Sherman is Deputy Chief Executive Officer and is a member of DoubleLine’s Executive Management and Fixed Income Asset Allocation Committees. Prior to joining DoubleLine, Sherman was a Senior Vice President at TCW where he worked as a portfolio manager and quantitative analyst focused on fixed income and real-asset portfolios. Prior to TCW, Sherman was a statistics and mathematics instructor at both the University of the Pacific and Florida State University. DoubleLine has been a sub-advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund since the Alternative Strategies Fund’s inception in 2011.

The team at DoubleLine operates under the cardinal mandate of delivering superior risk-adjusted fixed income returns. They seek to deliver positive absolute returns in excess of an appropriate aggregate fixed income index with portfolio volatility that is similar to U.S. long-term treasury securities. Investment ideas employed by the team must offer an asymmetric, positively skewed risk-reward profile. As a result, a great deal of their analysis seeks to identify fixed income securities that they believe offer greater potential payoff than potential loss under multiple scenarios. Ultimately, a combination of risk management, asset allocation and security selection forms the team’s investment process. There can be no assurance that the Fund will achieve its investment objective.

Portfolios are constructed with the intent to outperform under a range of future outcomes. DoubleLine’s risk integration process seeks to combine assets that will perform differently in different scenarios so that the overall portfolio generates acceptable performance. This process includes balancing the strength of cash flows from certain asset classes against various potential economic or market risks.

When considering a specific investment in any sector, the team’s primary focus is on the predictability of the cash flow generated during an entire interest rate or credit cycle. When volatility is low, the team emphasizes securities they expect to generate the best overall return over a cycle rather than simply buying the highest yield at a given point in time.

In implementing the Opportunistic Income Strategy, the team allocates investments to fixed income instruments and other investments with no limit on the duration of the portfolio. The

team may invest in, without limitation, asset-backed securities; domestic and foreign corporate bonds, including high-yield bonds; municipal bonds; bonds or other obligations issued by domestic or foreign governments, including emerging markets countries; REIT debt securities; and mortgage related securities. The team’s investments in mortgage related securities may at times represent a substantial portion (including up to 100%) of the segment allocated to him when certain market conditions exist that the team believes offer potentially attractive risk adjusted returns. The team may, to a limited extent, employ leverage within the Opportunistic Income Strategy, which also is being used for other accounts managed by DoubleLine.

When investing in mortgage related securities, the team may invest in obligations issued or guaranteed by agencies or instrumentalities of the U.S. Government such as the Government National Mortgage Association, the Federal National Mortgage Association and the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation; CMOs, including real estate mortgage investment conduits (REMICS) issued by domestic or foreign private issuers that represent an interest in or are collateralized by mortgage related securities issued by agencies or instrumentalities of the U.S. Government; CMBS; obligations issued by private issuers that represent an interest in or are collateralized by whole mortgage loans or mortgage related securities without a government guarantee but typically with some form of private credit enhancement; “interest only” and “principal only” stripped mortgage securities; inverse floating rate securities; and debt or equity tranches of collateralized debt obligations collateralized by mortgage related securities. The team compares opportunities in other sectors of the global fixed income market to opportunities available in the mortgage sector with the aim of attempting to construct a portfolio with the most attractive return potential given his risk management objectives.

Contrarian Opportunity Strategy

 

Steven Romick, CFA

Brian Selmo, CFA

Mark Landecker, CFA

First Pacific Advisors, LLC

11601 Wilshire Blvd, Suite 1200

Los Angeles, CA 90025

Steven Romick, Brian Selmo and Mark Landecker are the co-portfolio managers responsible for the contrarian opportunity strategy (the “Contrarian Opportunity Strategy”), which is the segment of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets managed by First Pacific. Romick joined First Pacific in 1996 and is currently a Managing Partner of the firm. Selmo joined First Pacific in 2008 and has been a Partner since 2013. He was a Managing Director of First Pacific from January 2013 to December 2013, and a Vice President of First Pacific from 2008 to 2012. Landecker joined First Pacific in 2009 and has been a Partner since 2013. He was a Managing Director of First Pacific from January 2013 to December 2013, and a Vice President of First Pacific from 2009 to 2012. Romick, Selmo and Landecker manage the FPA Crescent Fund (Romick has been a portfolio manager since its inception in 1993) and separate accounts,

 

 

 
46       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

including unregistered funds managed by First Pacific (commonly known as hedge funds), in First Pacific’s Contrarian Value style. First Pacific has been a sub-advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund since the Alternative Strategies Fund’s inception in 2011.

This segment is managed, to the degree practical, with the intent to replicate elements of private funds and separate accounts also run by First Pacific. The elements replicated include investment strategies such as hedging, highly concentrated positions, illiquid and restricted securities, international investments, coupled with the potential for maintaining high levels of liquidity. First Pacific implements these strategies through investing opportunistically in a wide variety of securities as discussed below.

The Contrarian Opportunity Strategy leads to investments that offer absolute rather than relative value with an objective of strong risk-adjusted returns. As absolute return investors, the First Pacific team seeks genuine bargains rather than relatively attractive securities. The goal is to provide equity-like returns over longer periods ( i.e. , five to seven years) while protecting against the permanent loss of capital. Attention is directed toward those companies offering the best combination of such quality criteria as strong market share, good management, and high normalized return on capital. A company purchased might not look inexpensive, considering current earnings and return on capital; however, its valuation may reflect such conditions as a weak economy, an increase in raw material costs, a management misstep, or any number of other temporary conditions. The First Pacific team believes that price drops caused by such developments can, and often do, provide buying opportunities. There can be no assurance that the Fund will achieve its investment objective.

The First Pacific team employs the broad mandate of the First Pacific contrarian strategy to invest across the capital structure, asset classes, market capitalization, industries and geographies using a wide variety of instruments. The First Pacific team invests in an opportunistic manner, based on its view of the world and the businesses/situations that it understands. It looks for what is out of favor, taking into account the current landscape and how it might change over time, both organically and through exogenous events. The First Pacific team emphasizes independent research and spends little time with Wall Street analysts because it prefers to focus its research on interactions with business operators and industry leaders.

The First Pacific team narrows the universe of potential investments by establishing five categories: Long Equity, Short Equity, Credit, Cash and Equivalents and a smaller “Other” category.

Long Equity: The First Pacific team may invest in companies with solid balance sheets and unquestionable competitive strength and shareholder-centric management; companies of lesser quality but with strong long-term upside potential; companies with shorter term upside potential driven by identified catalysts that are expected to have a positive impact on the value of the underlying business such as balance sheet

optimization, operational turnarounds or corporate actions; and companies whose disparate parts have greater aggregate value than the current stock price and may engage in intra-company arbitrage of such companies by either holding long positions in one share class of such a company and shorting another share class of the same company or longing a parent or holding company and shorting one or several of its underlying companies to create a stub equity position that is valued at a deep discount to intrinsic value.

Short Equity: The First Pacific team will seek opportunities in deteriorating companies with declining business metrics that are not reflected in the stock price; companies with balance sheet issues such as overstated asset accounts that may result in operational cash flows that fall significantly short of net income; paired trades that involve shorting a company in the same industry as one of the long position the First Pacific team holds to serve as a partial hedge against industry specific risk; and intra-company arbitrage as discussed above.

Credit: The First Pacific team will consider performing credits that have a yield to maturity reasonably in excess of U.S. Treasuries of comparable maturity and that the holder has a high likelihood of receiving principal and interest payments. The First Pacific team will also consider the bonds of corporations that it believes have some chance but a low likelihood of needing to restructure their debt. These bonds may have higher yields than those of performing credits. The First Pacific team may also purchase distressed debt, which it defines as corporate debt that has either defaulted or which has a high likelihood of being restructured, either voluntarily or by default.

Other: Investments will typically include illiquid securities that the First Pacific team believes allow it to take advantage of situations that are not available in the public markets. These could include private equity, debt and real estate investments. Investment in illiquid securities is typically limited to no more than 15% of the First Pacific team’s portfolio.

Cash and Equivalents: Investments in cash and cash equivalents are a residual of the First Pacific team’s investment process rather than a macro-driven rationale. The First Pacific team believes that liquidity is an important risk management tool and also believes that it provides the ability to take advantage of future opportunities.

The goal of gaining comfort with a given investment is based on determining what it needs to know in order to prove – or disprove – the original thesis that drew its interest and triggered further research. This research process is supported by reading current and historic SEC filings and conference call transcripts, reviewing pertinent periodicals, studying the competition, and establishing a valuation model. The First Pacific team works to gain a knowledge edge and an understanding of the business or industry that may not be universal. Such due diligence may take the form of conversations with ex-employees, vendors, suppliers, competitors and industry consultants. As a result of the process, the First Pacific team invests only in positions that it believes offer a compelling economic risk/reward proposition. If prospective investments do not meet that requirement, then

 

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund – Sub-Advisors         47


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund – Sub-Advisors — (Continued)

 

the First Pacific team waits until it can purchase a security at a substantial discount to that company’s worth or intrinsic value. The First Pacific team also factors a macro-economic view into its security analysis and portfolio construction, which may cause it to be over-weighted in certain asset classes or sectors at times while completely avoiding others. There can be no assurance that the Fund will achieve its investment objective.

The First Pacific team distinguishes between the risk of permanent loss of capital and volatility, and seeks to distinguish their strategy by using volatility to its advantage rather than its detriment. Instead of composing a portfolio designed to mimic the performance of a benchmark or index, the First Pacific team utilizes the deeply-held contrarian philosophy oriented toward pushing back on a rising market by reducing exposure (thus allowing cash to increase), and conversely, leaning into a falling market and spending that cash to opportunistically buy inexpensive securities. The goal is to invest in securities that have what they believe to be advantageous upside/downside characteristics; that is, the First Pacific team seeks to make sure that it could potentially make a multiple of what it could potentially lose.

Strategic Alpha Fixed Income Strategy

 

Matthew Eagan, CFA

Kevin Kearns

Todd Vandam, CFA

Loomis, Sayles & Company, L.P.

One Financial Center

Boston, MA 02111

Matthew Eagan, Kevin Kearns and Todd Vandam are the co-portfolio managers responsible for the strategic alpha strategy (the “Strategic Alpha Strategy”), which is the segment of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets managed by Loomis, Sayles & Company, L.P. (“Loomis”). Eagan joined Loomis in 1997 as a fixed income analyst and is currently Vice President and the lead portfolio manager of the Loomis Sayles Strategic Alpha Fund, as well as co-portfolio manager for the Loomis Sayles Bond Fund, the Loomis Sayles Strategic Income Fund and other fixed income funds managed by Loomis. Prior to joining Loomis, he was a senior fixed income analyst at the Liberty Mutual Life Insurance Company and a senior credit analyst for BancBoston Financial Company. Kearns joined Loomis in 2007 and is a vice president, portfolio manager and senior derivatives strategist in the absolute return and credit opportunity areas within the fixed income group. He co-manages credit and absolute return institutional portfolios, including the Loomis Sayles Credit Long/Short Fund, the Loomis Sayles Strategic Alpha Fund and the Loomis Sayles Multi-Asset Real Return Fund. Vandam joined Loomis in 1994 and is a vice president of Loomis and co-portfolio manager of the Loomis Sayles Strategic Alpha Fund and US High Yield portfolios. He is also senior credit strategist for Loomis, where he works with the fixed income high yield and investment grade teams. Loomis has been a sub-advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund since the Alternative Strategies Fund’s inception in 2011.

The Strategic Alpha Strategy has an absolute return investment objective, which means that it is not managed relative to an index and that it attempts to achieve positive total returns over a full market cycle with relatively low volatility. The Loomis team intends to pursue its objective by utilizing a flexible investment approach that allocates investments across a global range of investment opportunities related to credit, currencies and interest rates, while employing risk management strategies designed to mitigate downside risk. There can be no assurance that the Strategic Alpha Strategy will achieve its investment objective.

The Loomis team may invest up to 75% of the total assets of the segment allocated to it in below investment-grade fixed income securities (also known as “junk bonds”) and derivatives that have returns related to the returns on below investment-grade fixed income securities. Under normal market conditions, the Loomis team also may invest up to 75% of the total assets of the segment allocated to it in investments denominated in non-U.S. currencies and related derivatives, including up to 50% in investments denominated in emerging market currencies and related derivatives. Under normal conditions, the Loomis team may invest up to 20% of the total assets of the segment allocated to it in equity-related securities and derivatives. There is no limit on the amount of preferred securities. A “related derivative” of a financial instrument means any derivative whose value is based upon or derived from that financial instrument or a related derivative of that financial instrument. The Loomis team expects that exposure to these asset classes will often be obtained substantially through the use of derivative instruments. Currency positions that are intended to hedge the Loomis team’s non-U.S. currency exposure ( i.e. , currency positions that are not made for investment purposes) will offset positions in the same currency that are made for investment purposes when calculating the limitation on investments in non-U.S. and emerging market currency investments because the Loomis team believes that hedging a currency position is likely to negate some or all of the currency risk associated with the original currency position. Restrictions will apply at the time of purchase.

The Loomis team’s investment process employs both top-down (macro themes) and bottom-up (security selection) components and uses the resources of the entire Loomis Sayles infrastructure. The Loomis team identifies key macro themes over a 3- and 12-month horizon and assesses top-down risk/return opportunities across the interest rate curve, credit markets and currencies. The Loomis team draws on the strength and depth of the entire Loomis research team as it evaluates these themes. Fourteen Macro and Market Sector teams support the Loomis team by sharing their sector’s risk/return characteristics and uncovering specific credits that they believe may offer the best return potential.

In selecting investments for the Strategic Alpha Strategy, the Loomis team develops long-term portfolio themes driven by macro-economic indicators. These include secular global economic trends, demographic trends and labor supply, analysis of global capital flows and assessments of geopolitical factors. The Loomis team then develops shorter-term portfolio

 

 

 
48       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

strategies based on factors including, but not limited to, economic, credit and Federal Reserve cycles, top-down sector valuations and bottom-up security valuations. The Loomis team employs active risk management, with a focus on credit, interest rate and currency risks. Additionally, the Loomis team will use risk management tools in constructing and optimizing the portfolio and seek to manage risk on an ongoing basis. The Loomis team expects to actively evaluate each investment idea based upon its return potential, its level of risk and its fit within the team’s overall macro strategy when deciding whether to buy or sell investments, with the goal of continually optimizing the portfolio.

The Loomis team seeks to gain a performance edge by integrating the global macro themes with Loomis’ best bottom-up security selection, risk analysis and trading capabilities to create the best expected risk/return portfolio. The Loomis team will pursue its investment goal by obtaining long investment exposures through direct cash investments and derivatives and short investment exposures substantially through derivatives. A “long” investment exposure is an investment that rises in value with a rise in the value of an asset, asset class or index and declines in value with a decline in the value of that asset, asset class or index. A “short” investment exposure is an investment that rises in value with a decline in the value of an asset, asset class or index and declines in value with a rise in the value of that asset, asset class or index. The Loomis team’s long and short investment exposures may, at times, each reach 150% of the assets invested in this segment of the Alternative Strategies Fund (excluding instruments primarily used for duration management and short-term investments (such as cash and money market instruments)), although these exposures may be higher or lower at any given time.

Investments: In connection with its principal investment strategies, the Loomis team may invest in a broad range of U.S. and non-U.S. fixed income securities, including, but not limited to, corporate bonds, municipal securities, U.S. and non-U.S. government securities (including their agencies, instrumentalities and sponsored entities), securities of supranational entities, emerging market securities, commercial and residential mortgage-backed securities, CMOs, other mortgage-related securities (such as adjustable rate mortgage securities), asset backed securities, bank loans, collateralized loan obligations (“CLOs”), convertible bonds, Rule 144A securities, REITs, zero-coupon securities, step coupon securities, pay-in-kind securities, inflation-linked bonds, variable and floating rate securities, private placements and commercial paper and preferred securities. Additionally, the Strategic Alpha Strategy involves limited investments in equities and exchange–traded funds.

Non-U.S. Currency Investments: Under normal market conditions, the Loomis team may engage in a broad range of transactions involving non-U.S. and emerging market currencies, including, but not limited to, purchasing and selling forward currency exchange contracts in non-U.S. or emerging market currencies, investing in non-U.S. currency futures contracts, investing in options on non-U.S. currencies and

non-U.S. currency futures, investing in cross currency instruments (such as swaps), investing directly in non-U.S. currencies and investing in securities denominated in non-U.S. currencies. The Loomis team may also engage in non-U.S. currency transactions for investment or for hedging purposes.

Derivative Investments: For investment and hedging purposes, the Loomis team may invest substantially in a broad range of derivatives instruments, particularly credit default swaps and futures contracts, and sometimes the majority of its investment returns will derive from its derivative investments. These derivative instruments include, but are not limited to, futures contracts (such as treasury futures and index futures), forward contracts, options (such as options on futures contracts, options on securities, interest rate/bond options, currency options, options on swaps and OTC options), warrants (such as non-U.S. currency warrants) and swap transactions (such as interest rate swaps, total return swaps and index swaps). In addition, the Loomis team may invest in credit derivative products that may be used to manage default risk and credit exposure. Examples of such products include, but are not limited to, credit default swap index products (such as LCDX, CMBX and ABX index products), single name credit default swaps, loan credit default swaps and asset-backed credit default swaps. Derivative instruments (such as those listed above) can be used to acquire or to transfer the risk and returns of a security without buying or selling the security. The Loomis team’s strategy may be highly dependent on the use of derivatives, and to the extent that they become unavailable or unattractive the Loomis team may be unable to fully implement its investment strategy. For a detailed discussion of various types of derivatives in which the Alternative Strategies Fund may invest, including the risks of investing in such derivatives, please refer to the Description of Principal Investment Risks section in the Prospectus and the SAI.

The Loomis team is not limited as to the duration of its portfolio, which will change over time but is likely to be within a range of -5 years to +10 years.

Long/Short Equity Strategy

 

John Burbank

Passport Capital, LLC

One Market Street

Stuart Tower Suite 2200

San Francisco, CA 94105

John Burbank is the portfolio manager responsible for the long/short equity strategy (the “Long/Short Equity Strategy”), which is the segment of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets managed by Passport Capital, LLC (“Passport”). Burbank is the Founder, Managing Member and Chief Investment Officer of Passport, which he founded in 2000. Prior to founding Passport, Burbank worked at JMG Triton, an arbitrage fund, and at ValueVest Management, an emerging markets fund. Passport has been a sub-advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund since 2014.

 

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund – Sub-Advisors         49


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund – Sub-Advisors — (Continued)

 

Passport seeks to achieve superior risk-adjusted returns through a combination of macroeconomic analysis, fundamental research and quantitative tools. Passport believes that global markets generally do a poor job of identifying or valuing large, secular changes that may have far-reaching consequences. By focusing on identifying these changes on a global basis, Passport seeks to find compelling investment opportunities (both long and short). Passport tries to identify durable and investable macroeconomic (and industry-specific) themes that can drive returns over a longer timeframe than that on which the general market is usually focused. Thematic research can include analysis of global economic and financial data, trade and industry publications, travel, the investment team’s networks, and non-financial reading and analysis. Based on Passport’s prioritization of investment themes, analysts may do research projects with respect to sectors/industries and companies to try to identify the most efficient and asymmetric way to exploit each theme.

Within that construct, the sector teams look from the bottom-up as well as top-down to determine whether they have company-specific indications tending to confirm or question Passport’s macro views, in addition to trying to find companies that will be most affected by the themes Passport has identified. Investment ideas do not necessarily need to be part of a theme, and in fact some of the biggest positions taken by Passport for the Alternative Strategies Fund may be idiosyncratic and company-specific.

In terms of fundamental analysis, Passport generally looks for companies (on the long side) that operate in industries with high barriers to entry, have few competitors, have above-average growth prospects, and/or trade at discounts to the investment team’s estimate of fair value. Passport may invest in other types of companies as well.

Passport’s ideas for short positions are typically generated via the same process (identifying and analyzing unrecognized/undiscounted thematic change) with the investment theses resulting in short positions being taken in the expected losers from the change rather than the winners. There are also event-driven shorts that are more binary in nature. The mix of structural shorts and event-driven shorts varies according to the opportunities the investment team identifies. There can be no assurance that the Long/Short Equity Strategy will achieve its investment objective.

Arbitrage Strategy

 

John Orrico, CFA

Todd Munn

Roger Foltynowicz, CAIA

Gregg Loprete

Water Island Capital LLC

41 Madison Avenue, 42 nd Floor

New York, NY 10010

John Orrico, Todd Munn, Roger Foltynowicz, and Gregg Loprete are the co-portfolio managers responsible for the arbitrage strategy (the “Arbitrage Strategy”), which is the

segment of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s assets managed by Water Island Capital, LLC (“Water Island”). Orrico founded Water Island in 2000 and serves as its President, Chief Investment Officer and Portfolio Manager. He is the co-portfolio manager of The Arbitrage Fund. Prior to founding Water Island, Orrico worked at Gruss & Co., focusing on merger arbitrage and special situations. He has worked in the financial services industry since 1982, when he started his career in the Corporate Finance group at Morgan Stanley & Co. Munn joined Water Island in 2003 and is a portfolio manager on the firm’s merger arbitrage strategy. He serves a co-portfolio manager of The Arbitrage Fund and co-portfolio manager of The Arbitrage Event-Driven Fund. Foltynowicz joined Water Island in 2003 and is currently a portfolio manager on the firm’s merger arbitrage strategy. He serves as co-portfolio manager of The Arbitrage Fund and co-portfolio manager of The Arbitrage Event-Driven Fund. Loprete joined Water Island in 2009 and is a portfolio manager on the firm’s credit opportunities strategy. He serves as co-portfolio manager of The Arbitrage Event-Driven Fund and co-portfolio manager of The Arbitrage Credit Opportunities Fund. Water Island has been a sub-advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund since the Alternative Strategies Fund’s inception in 2011.

Investment Strategy: The Water Island team seeks to generate long-term returns of at least mid-single-digits with low correlation to the equity and bond markets. This objective is pursued by investing in equity and debt securities of companies that are impacted by corporate events such as mergers, acquisitions, restructurings, refinancings, recapitalizations, reorganizations or other special situations. More specifically, the Water Island team executes three strategies: merger arbitrage, equity special situations, and opportunistic credit. The Water Island team may invest in both U.S. and non-U.S. securities. The Water Island team intends to focus the portfolio in only their highest conviction risk-adjusted ideas across these strategies, and will, to a limited extent, employ leverage within the Arbitrage Strategy. There can be no assurance that the Arbitrage Strategy will achieve its investment objective.

Merger Arbitrage: Merger arbitrage is a highly specialized investment approach designed to profit from the successful completion of mergers, takeovers, tender offers, leveraged buyouts, spin offs, liquidations and other corporate reorganizations. When a merger or acquisition deal is announced, the target’s stock price typically appreciates because the acquirer typically pays a premium relative to the current market price. Until the deal closes, however, the target’s stock price generally trades at a discount to the deal price. This discount is called “the spread.” The spread typically exists because investors demand compensation for the risk that the deal may fail to close and for the time value of money for the time it takes the deal to close. The most common arbitrage activity, and the approach the Water Island team generally will use, involves purchasing the shares of an announced acquisition target company at a discount to their expected value upon completion of the acquisition. The Water Island team may engage in selling securities short when the terms of a proposed acquisition call for the exchange of common stock and/or other

 

 

 
50       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

securities. In such a case, the common stock of the company to be acquired may be purchased and, at approximately the same time, an equivalent amount of the acquiring company’s common stock and/or other securities may be sold short. The Water Island team may also execute the merger arbitrage strategy by using a company’s debt.

Credit Opportunities: Opportunistic credit investing is a highly specialized strategy that seeks to profit from investments in debt securities where the likely return will be more correlated with the outcome of specific catalysts or events rather than overall market direction. These catalysts and events include mergers, acquisitions, debt maturities, refinancings, regulatory changes, recapitalizations, reorganizations, restructurings and other special situations. Water Island also uses a relative value approach and may express positive views on specific issuers by taking long positions in cash bonds and/or derivatives and negative views on specific issuers by taking short positions in cash bonds and/or derivatives. Water Island uses fundamental research to identify mispricings or inefficiencies in these situations and assesses their potential impact on security prices. The opportunistic credit strategy may utilize investment strategies such as convertible arbitrage and capital structure arbitrage to achieve its goals. Convertible arbitrage is a specialized strategy that seeks to profit from mispricing between a firm’s convertible securities and its underlying equity. The most common convertible arbitrage approach, and the strategy the Water Island team generally will use, matches a long position in the convertible security with a short position in the underlying common stock. The Water Island team seeks to purchase convertible securities at discounts to their expected future values and sell short shares of the underlying common stock in order to mitigate equity market movements. As stock prices rise and the convertible security becomes more equity sensitive, the Water Island team will sell short additional common shares in order to maintain the relationship between the convertible and the underlying common stock. As stock prices fall, the Water Island team will typically buy back a portion of shares it had sold short. Positions are typically designed to earn income from coupon or dividend payments and from the short sale of common stock.

Capital structure arbitrage seeks to profit from relative pricing discrepancies between related debt and/or equity securities. For example, the Water Island team may purchase a senior secured security of an issuer and sell short an unsecured security of the same issuer. In this example the trade would be profitable if credit quality spreads widened or if the issuer went bankrupt and the recovery rate for the senior debt was higher.

Equity Special Situations: Equity special situations investing is a specialized strategy that seeks to profit from equity investments when news and events create misperception of a company’s correct stock price. Examples of such news and events, which Water Island refers to as “investment opportunities,” include, but are not limited to: changes in industry or sector fundamentals, announcements or potential announcements of restructurings (bankruptcies, spinoffs, and asset sales), mergers and acquisitions, earnings results and outlook, regulatory changes

and litigation. The Water Island team’s investment approach is to identify these differences and to tactically purchase or sell short such securities in order to achieve the Fund’s objective.

Among these strategies, merger arbitrage is typically a core allocation within the portfolio. The Water Island team will typically be long the target’s shares and short the acquirer’s stock (to hedge the market risk where the acquirer is using stock and not cash to fund the acquisition). The Water Island team will also use options in an attempt to hedge deal-specific and market risks, especially in the case of cash-only deals where the team will only long the target’s stock.

To answer the fundamental questions, the Water Island team reviews SEC filings, engages with sell-side and buy-side analysts, participates in company conference calls where management explains the rationale behind the merger, talks to key shareholders to assess how they will vote on the deal, assesses competitors, suppliers, and customers to evaluate, for example, overlaps in products and services that might not pass regulatory scrutiny, and, in some cases, consults with regulatory experts on antitrust matters, and discusses with lawyers to get a legal opinion, especially if the deal involves regulators in multiple jurisdictions. The Water Island team builds pro-forma balance-sheet, income, and cash-flow statements, typically looking out 12 months, to see where the synergies of the combined entity may lie.

A key area of emphasis for the Water Island team is assessing the downside risk associated with deal failure. Either a decrease in the share price of the target or an increase in the share price of the acquirer would have negative implications, so the Water Island team performs valuation analysis to assess downside from a deal break. This analysis involves looking at how the companies have traded relative to their own history and peers. There are other considerations as well, including whether or not the target’s share price prior to the deal announcement had an embedded “acquisition premium,” which may lead the team to adjust their downside risk assessment.

The Water Island team will have exposure to foreign deals on a limited basis because deals outside of the U.S. often involve additional complexities and risks, including different laws and regulations than the U.S., along with currency risks. Given a similar risk/reward in a foreign deal and a U.S. deal, the Water Island team will generally lean toward the latter.

The SAI provides additional information about each sub-advisor’s method of compensation for its portfolio managers, other accounts managed by the portfolio managers, and the portfolio managers’ ownership of securities in the Funds.

 

 

 
Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund – Sub-Advisors         51


Table of Contents

Shareholder Services

 

Each Fund is a no-load fund, which means that you pay no sales commissions of any kind. Each business day that the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) is open, each Fund calculates its share price, which is also called the Fund’s NAV per share. Shares are purchased at the next share price calculated after your accepted investment is received. Share price is calculated as of the close of the NYSE, normally 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time.

Eligibility

The Funds are not registered for sale outside of the United States and are available for purchase only by residents of the United States of America, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, Guam and the U.S. Virgin Islands.

Description of Classes

The Trust has adopted a multiple class plan. The Smaller Companies Fund offers a single class of shares – Institutional Class shares – in this Prospectus. The Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund each offer two classes of shares – Institutional Class shares and Investor Class shares – in this Prospectus. The two different classes of shares represent investments in the same portfolio of securities, but the classes are subject to different expenses and may have different share prices as outlined below:

 

  Institutional Class shares are not charged a Rule 12b-1 distribution and servicing fee, and are sold with no sales load.

 

  Investor Class shares are charged a 0.25% Rule 12b-1 distribution and servicing fee, and are sold with no sales load.

How to Buy Shares

 

Step 1

 

The first step is to determine the type of account you wish to open. The following types of accounts are available to investors:

Individual or Joint Accounts

For your general investment needs:

Individual accounts are owned by one person. Joint accounts can have two or more owners (tenants).

Retirement Accounts

Retirement accounts allow individuals to shelter investment income and capital gains from current taxes. In addition, contributions to these accounts may be tax deductible. Retirement accounts (such as individual retirement accounts (“IRAs”), rollover IRAs, Simplified Employee Pension (SEP) plans and Roth IRAs) require specific applications and typically have lower minimums.

Other retirement plans, such as Keogh or corporate profit-sharing plans, 403(b) plans and 401(k) plans, may invest in the Funds. All of these accounts need to be established by the plan’s trustee. The Funds do not offer versions of these plans.

If you are investing through a tax-sheltered retirement plan, such as an IRA, for the first time, you will need an IRA Application and Adoption Agreement. Retirement investing also involves separate investment procedures.

Gifts or Transfers to Minors (UGMA and UTMA)

To invest for a child’s education or other future needs:

These custodial accounts provide a way to give money to a child and obtain tax benefits. An individual can give up to a statutorily-defined amount per year per child without paying a federal gift tax. Such amount is subject to change each year. For 2017, the amount is $14,000. Depending on state laws, you can set up a custodial account under the Uniform Gifts to Minors Act (“UGMA”) or the Uniform Transfers to Minors Act (“UTMA”).

Trust

For money being invested by a trust:

The trust must be established before an account can be opened. The Funds may require additional documentation regarding the formation of the trust prior to establishing an account.

Business or Organization

For investment needs of corporations, associations, partnerships or other groups:

The Funds do not require a special application. However, the Funds may require additional information prior to establishing an account.

Step 2

 

How to Choose a Share Class

Before you buy shares in any Fund, you need to decide which class of shares best suits your needs. The Smaller Companies Fund offers a single class of shares – Institutional Class shares – in this Prospectus. The Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund each offer two classes of shares – Institutional Class shares and Investor Class shares – in this Prospectus. Each class is essentially identical in legal rights and invests in the same portfolio of securities. The difference in the fee structures between the classes for a Fund is primarily the result of their separate arrangements for shareholder and distribution services and is not the result of any difference in the amounts charged by Litman Gregory for investment advisory services. Accordingly, the investment advisory expenses do not vary by class for a Fund.

Conversion Feature

Subject to Litman Gregory’s approval and based on current Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) guidance, if investors currently holding Investor Class shares meet the criteria for eligible investors and would like to convert to Institutional Class shares, there should be no tax consequences to the converting investor and investors are not subject to the redemption/exchange fees. To inquire about converting your Investor Class shares to Institutional Class shares, please call 1-800-960-0188.

 

 

 
52       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Investor Class Shares

Investor Class shares may be appropriate if you intend to retain the services of a financial adviser, mutual fund supermarket, retirement plan or other financial intermediary. Investor Class shares cannot be purchased directly from the Funds that offer such class. Investor Class shares have adopted a Distribution and Shareholder Servicing Plan (the “Distribution Plan”), pursuant to which each Investor Class may pay up to 0.25% of its average annual net assets to financial planners, mutual fund supermarkets, or any other persons that render assistance in distributing or promoting the sale of shares or that provide certain shareholder services.

Institutional Class Shares

Institutional Class shares may be appropriate if you intend to make your own investment decisions and will invest directly with the Funds. The Distribution Plan does not apply to the Institutional Class shares, and as a result, the Institutional Class of a Fund has a lower expense ratio than the Investor Class of the same Fund, which will result in higher investment returns for the Institutional Class over time.

Step 3

 

The third step involves determining the amount of your investment. The Funds have established the following minimum investment levels for your initial investment, additional investments and ongoing account balances for Institutional Class shares (all Funds) and Investor Class shares (Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund only):

 

Smaller Companies Fund

 

Type of Account  

Minimum
Initial

Investment

   

Minimum
Additional

Investment

   

Minimum

Account
Balance

 
Regular      

- Institutional Class

  $ 10,000     $ 250     $ 2,500  
Retirement Account      

- Institutional Class

  $ 1,000     $ 100     $ 250  
Automatic Investment Account      

- Institutional Class

  $ 2,500     $ 250     $ 2,500  

Equity Fund, International Fund, and

Alternative Strategies Fund

 

 

Regular      

- Institutional Class

  $ 100,000     $ 250     $ 2,500  

- Investor Class

  $ 1,000     $ 100     $ 250  
Retirement Account      

- Institutional Class

  $ 5,000     $ 100     $ 250  

- Investor Class

  $ 500     $ 100     $ 250  
Automatic Investment Account      

- Institutional Class

  $ 2,500     $ 250     $ 2,500  

- Investor Class

  $ 2,500     $ 250     $ 2,500  

Litman Gregory may waive the minimum investment from time to time in its discretion.

Step 4

 

The fourth step involves completing your application to open your account. All shareholders must complete and sign an application in order to establish their account. The type of application depends on the type of account you chose to open. Regular investment accounts, including individual, joint tenant, UGMA, UTMA, business, or trust accounts, must complete the Funds’ standard account application. Shareholders who wish to establish retirement accounts must complete the IRA application and adoption agreement. Shareholders who wish to transfer retirement holdings from another custodian must also complete the IRA Transfer of Assets Form. Be sure to complete the section of the account application indicating the amount you are investing in each Fund.

Step 5

 

The final step in opening your account is to mail the completed account application, along with your check payable to the Litman Gregory Masters Funds. The Funds do not accept third-party checks, money orders, cashiers checks, starter checks, official bank checks, credit cards, cash or checks or wires from foreign financial institutions. If you send any of these instruments, your purchase order will be rejected, and your investment in the Funds will be delayed.

The mailing addresses for the Funds are:

 

For Regular Delivery:

Litman Gregory Funds Trust

c/o Boston Financial Data Services

P.O. Box 219922

Kansas City, MO 64121-9922

For Overnight Delivery:

Litman Gregory Funds Trust

c/o Boston Financial Data Services

330 West Ninth Street

Kansas City, MO 64105

 

 

In compliance with the USA PATRIOT Act of 2001, please note that the Transfer Agent will verify certain information on your account application as part of the Funds’ Anti-Money Laundering Compliance Program. Until such verification is made, the Funds may temporarily limit share purchases. As requested on the application, you should supply your full name, date of birth, social security number and permanent street address. Mailing addresses containing only a P.O. Box will not be accepted. Your information will be handled by us as discussed in our privacy notice. Please contact the Transfer Agent at 1-800-960-0188 if you need additional assistance when completing your application.

If you wish to open or add to your account by wire, please call 1-800-960-0188 for instructions.

After your account is open, you may increase the amount of your investment by:

 

  Mailing a check to the above addresses along with a letter or the form at the bottom of your account statement. Be sure to put your account number on your check and in your letter, and please refer to Step 4 above for a list of instruments that will not be accepted for investment.
 

 

 
Shareholder Services         53


Table of Contents

Shareholder Services — (Continued)

 

 

  Wiring money from your bank. Call 1-800-960-0188 for instructions.

 

  Making automatic investments if you signed up for the Automatic Investment Plan when you opened your account.

How to Sell Shares

 

You can arrange to take money out of your account at any time by selling (redeeming) some or all of your shares. Your shares will be sold at the next NAV per share (share price) calculated after your order is received.

To sell shares in a non-retirement account, you may use any of the methods described in this section. To sell shares in a retirement account, your request must be made in writing.

Certain requests must include a medallion guarantee. This is designed to protect you and each Fund from fraud. Your request must be made in writing and include a medallion guarantee if any of the following situations apply:

 

  You wish to redeem more than $25,000 worth of shares.

 

  Your account registration information has changed within the past 30 days.

 

  The redemption check is being mailed to a different address from the one on your account (address of record).

 

  The check is being made payable to someone other than the account owner.

Please note that there may be other special cases in which a Medallion Guarantee may be required. Each signature must be guaranteed by an eligible signature guarantor, which must participate in the Securities Transfer Agents Medallion Program (STAMP), the leading signature guarantee program recognized by all major financial service associations throughout the United States and Canada. You should be able to obtain a medallion guarantee from a bank, broker-dealer, credit union (if authorized under state law), securities exchange or association, clearing agency or savings association. A notary public cannot provide a medallion guarantee.

Selling Shares by Letter

Write and sign a “letter of instruction” with:

Your Name

Your Fund’s account number

The dollar amount or number of shares to be redeemed

Please note the following special requirements for redeeming shares for different types of accounts:

 

  Individual, Joint Tenant, Sole Proprietorship, UGMA or UTMA Accounts: The letter of instruction must be signed by all persons required to sign for transactions, exactly as their names appear on the account.

 

  Retirement Account: The account owner should complete a Retirement Distribution Form. Call 1-800-960-0188 to request one.

 

  Trust Account: The trustee must sign the letter indicating capacity as trustee. If a trustee’s name is not in the account registration, provide a copy of the trust document certified within the past 60 days.
  Business or Organization: At least one person authorized by corporate resolutions to act on the account must sign the letter. Include a corporate resolution (certified within the past 6 months) with corporate seal or medallion guarantee.

 

  Executor, Administrator, Conservator or Guardian: Call 1-800-960-0188 for instructions.

Unless otherwise instructed, the Funds will send a check to the address of record.

Mail your letter to:

 

For Regular Delivery:

Litman Gregory Funds Trust

c/o Boston Financial Data Services

P.O. Box 219922

Kansas City, MO 64121-9922

For Overnight Delivery:

Litman Gregory Funds Trust

c/o Boston Financial Data Services

330 West Ninth Street

Kansas City, MO 64105

 

 

Selling Shares by Telephone

You must select this option on your account application if you wish to use telephone redemption; it is not automatically available. If you selected the telephone redemption option on your account application, you can sell shares simply by calling 1-800-960-0188. If you wish to add this feature to your account, you must do so in writing at least 30 days in advance of any telephonic redemption. The amount you wish to redeem (up to $25,000) will be sent by check to the address of record. This option is not available for retirement accounts.

Selling Shares by Wire

You must sign up for the wire feature before using it. To verify that it is in place, please call 1-800-960-0188. Wire redemptions may be processed for amounts between $5,000 and $25,000. Your wire redemption request must be received by the Funds before 4:00 p.m., Eastern time for money to be wired the next business day. This option is not available for retirement accounts.

Shareholder and Account Policies

 

Statements, Reports, and Inquiries

Statements and reports that each Fund sends you include the following:

 

  Confirmation statements (after every transaction that affects your account balance or your account registration)

 

  Financial reports (every six months)

 

  Account statements (every six months)

Boston Financial Data Services, the Funds’ transfer agent, is located at 330 West Ninth Street, Kansas City, Missouri, 64105. You may call the Transfer Agent at 1-800-960-0188 if you have questions about your account.

ALPS Distributors, Inc., the Funds’ principal underwriter, is located at 1290 Broadway, Suite 1100, Denver, Colorado 80203.

 

 

 
54       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Exchange Privilege

Exchanges of shares between classes are permitted only as follows: (i) a class of shares of a Fund may be exchanged for the same class of shares of another Fund; and (ii) the Investor Class shares of a Fund may be exchanged for the Institutional Class shares of the same Fund, if the investor is eligible to invest in the Institutional Class shares of that Fund. Shareholders may exchange shares by mailing or delivering written instructions to the Transfer Agent. Such exchange will be treated as a sale of shares and may result in taxable gains. Please specify the names and class of the applicable Fund(s), the number of shares or dollar amount to be exchanged, and your name and account number. You may not utilize an exchange to establish an account into a closed fund.

Exchanging Shares by Telephone

You must select this option on your account application if you wish to use telephone exchange; it is not automatically available. If you selected the telephone exchange option on your account application, you may also exchange shares (maximum $25,000 worth) by calling the Transfer Agent at 1-800-960-0188 between 9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. Eastern time on a day that the NYSE is open for normal trading. A Fund will suspend, without notice, the exchange privilege on any accounts it reasonably believes are being used by “market timers.”

Automatic Investment/Withdrawal Plans

One easy way to pursue your financial goals is to invest money regularly. The Funds offer a convenient service that lets you transfer money into your Fund account automatically. Although Automatic Investment Plans do not guarantee a profit and will not protect you against loss in a declining market, they can be an excellent way to invest for retirement, a home, educational expenses and other long-term financial goals. The investment will automatically be processed through the Automated Clearing House (ACH) system. Shares will be issued at the NAV per share after the Fund accepts your order, which will typically be the day after you provide proper instructions to the Transfer Agent (assuming you do so prior to the close of the NYSE).

A systematic withdrawal plan permits you to receive a fixed sum on a monthly, quarterly or annual basis from accounts with a value of $5,000 or more. Payments may be sent electronically to your bank of record or to you in check form. Certain restrictions apply for retirement accounts. Call 1-800-960-0188 for more information.

Share Price

Each Fund is open for business each day the NYSE is open. Each Fund calculates its NAV per share as of the close of business of the NYSE, normally 4:00 p.m., Eastern time.

Each Fund’s NAV per share is the value of a single share. The NAV per share is computed by adding the value of each Fund’s investments, cash and other assets, subtracting its liabilities and then dividing the result by the number of shares outstanding. The NAV per share is also the redemption price (price to sell one share).

Each Fund’s assets are valued primarily on the basis of market quotations. Securities and other assets for which reliable market quotations are not readily available will be valued at their fair value as determined under the guidelines established by, and under the general supervision and responsibility of, the Board. Fair value pricing is intended to be used as necessary in order to accurately value the Funds’ portfolio securities and their respective NAVs. The SAI further describes the Funds’ valuation procedures. Since securities that are primarily listed on foreign exchanges may trade on weekends or other days when a Fund does not price its shares, the value of a Fund’s securities (and thereby its NAV) may change on days when shareholders will not be able to purchase or redeem the Fund’s shares.

General Purchase Information

 

  All of your purchases must be made in U.S. dollars, and checks must be drawn on U.S. banks.

 

  The Funds do not accept cash, money orders, cashiers checks, starter checks, official bank checks, credit cards or third-party checks. If you send any of these instruments, your purchase order will be rejected, and your investment in the Funds will be delayed.

 

  If your check does not clear, your purchase will be canceled and you will be liable for any losses or fees the Funds or the Transfer Agent incur.

 

  Your ability to make automatic investments may be immediately terminated if any item is unpaid by your financial institution.

 

  Each Fund reserves the right to reject any purchase order. For example, a purchase order may be refused if, in Litman Gregory’s opinion, it is so large that it would disrupt management of the Funds. Orders will also be rejected from persons believed by the Fund to be “market timers.”

12b-1 Plan

The Trust has adopted the “Distribution Plan” under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, on behalf of the Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund. Under the Distribution Plan, the Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund are authorized to pay the Funds’ distributor a fee for the sale and distribution of the Investor Class shares of the Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund and for related services the Funds’ distributor provides to shareholders of the Investor Class shares. The maximum amount of the fee authorized under the Distribution Plan is 0.25% of average daily net assets attributable to Investor Class shares for the Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund. Because this fee is paid out of the assets of the Investor Class of the Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund on an on-going basis, over time these fees will increase the cost of your investment in the Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund shares and may cost you more than paying other types of sales charges. Institutional Class shares are not subject to the Distribution Plan.

 

 

 
Shareholder Services         55


Table of Contents

Shareholder Services — (Continued)

 

Buying and Selling Shares through Financial Intermediaries

You may buy and sell shares of the Funds through certain financial intermediaries (and their agents) that have made arrangements with the Funds to sell their shares. When you place your order with such a financial intermediary or its authorized agent, your order is treated as if you had placed it directly with the Transfer Agent, and you will pay or receive the next price calculated by the Funds. The financial intermediary (or agent) may hold your shares in an omnibus account in the financial intermediary’s (or agent’s) name, and the financial intermediary (or agent) maintains your individual ownership records. The Funds may pay the financial intermediary (or agent) a fee for performing this account maintenance service. The financial intermediary (or agent) may charge you a fee for handling your order. The financial intermediary (or agent) is responsible for processing your order correctly and promptly, keeping you advised regarding the status of your individual account, confirming your transactions and ensuring that you receive copies of the Funds’ Prospectus.

Redemptions

 

  Normally, redemption proceeds will be mailed to you on the next business day, but if making immediate payment could adversely affect the Funds, it may take up to seven days to pay you. The Funds may also delay payment if there have been changes in your mailing address or account registration within 30 days of the date of the redemption.

 

  Redemptions may be suspended or payment dates postponed when the NYSE is closed (other than weekends or holidays), when trading on the NYSE is restricted or as permitted by the SEC.

 

  If the amount you are redeeming from a Fund exceeds 1% of the Fund’s net assets or $250,000 during any 90-day period, each Fund reserves the right to honor your redemption request by distributing to you readily marketable securities instead of cash. You may incur brokerage and other costs in converting to cash any securities distributed.

Policy Regarding Excessive Trading and Market Timing

The Board has adopted policies and procedures with respect to frequent purchases and redemptions of Fund shares by Fund shareholders. These policies are summarized below.

Purchases and exchanges of shares of the Funds should be made for long-term investment purposes only. The Funds, as a matter of policy, actively discourage market timing and excessive short term trading and may block accounts or take other action to prevent this type of activity.

Investors seeking to engage in excessive trading or market timing practices may deploy a variety of strategies to avoid detection and, despite the efforts of the Funds to prevent such trading, there is no guarantee that the Funds or their agents will be able to identify such investors or curtail their practices. The ability of the Funds and their agents to detect and curtail excessive trading or short term trading practices may also be limited by operational systems and technological limitations. In

addition, the Funds receive purchase, exchange and redemption orders through financial intermediaries and cannot always know or reasonably detect excessive trading that may be facilitated by these intermediaries or by the use of omnibus account arrangements. Omnibus accounts are common forms of holding Fund shares. Entities utilizing omnibus account arrangements may not identify customers’ trading activity in shares of a Fund on an individual basis (although in order for financial intermediaries to purchase Fund shares in nominee name on behalf of other persons, the Funds are required to enter into shareholder information agreements with the financial intermediaries, which may result in the disclosure of certain identifying information about shareholders to the Funds). Consequently, the Funds may not be able to detect frequent or excessive trading in Fund shares attributable to a particular investor who effects purchase and/or exchange activity in Fund shares through a broker, dealer or other financial intermediary acting in an omnibus capacity. Also, there may be multiple tiers of these entities, each utilizing an omnibus account arrangement, which may further compound the difficulty to the Funds of detecting excessive or short duration trading activity in Fund shares. In seeking to prevent disruptive trading practices in the Funds, the Funds and their agents consider the information actually available to them at the time.

Each Fund reserves the right in its discretion to reject any purchase, in whole or in part (including, without limitation, purchases by persons whose trading activity in Fund shares Litman Gregory believes could be harmful to a Fund). The Funds may decide to restrict purchase and sale activity in its shares based on various factors, including whether frequent purchase and sale activity will disrupt portfolio management strategies and adversely affect Fund performance.

Frequent purchases and redemptions of a Fund’s shares may present certain risks for the Fund and its shareholders. These risks may include, among other things, dilution in the value of Fund shares held by long-term shareholders, interference with the efficient management of the Fund’s portfolios and increased brokerage and administrative costs. A Fund may have difficulty implementing long-term investment strategies if it is unable to anticipate what portion of its assets it should retain in cash to provide liquidity to its shareholders. The Funds may, and the International Fund will, invest in non-U.S. securities; accordingly, there is an additional risk of undetected frequent trading in Fund shares by investors who attempt to engage in time zone arbitrage. There can be no assurance that the Funds or Litman Gregory will identify all frequent purchase and sale activity affecting a Fund.

Each Fund May Close Small Accounts. Due to the relatively high cost of maintaining smaller accounts, the shares in your account (unless it is a retirement plan or custodial account) may be redeemed by a Fund if, due to redemptions you have made, the total value of your account is reduced to less than $2,500 (unless you invest in Investor Class shares only, in which case less than $250). If a Fund decides to make such an involuntary redemption, you will first be notified that the value of your account is less than $2,500 (or $250, as applicable), and you

 

 

 
56       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

will be allowed 30 days to make an additional investment to bring the value of your account to at least $2,500 (or $250, as applicable) before a Fund takes any action.

Unclaimed Property. Your mutual fund account may be transferred to your state of residence if no activity occurs within your account during the “inactivity period” specified in your state’s abandoned property laws.

Dividends, Capital Gains and Taxes

 

The Funds generally distribute substantially all of their net income and capital gains, if any, to shareholders each year. Normally, dividends and capital gains are distributed annually in November or December.

Distribution Options

When you open an account, specify on your application how you want to receive your distributions. If the option you prefer is not listed on the application, call 1-800-960-0188 for instructions. The Funds offer three options:

 

  Reinvestment Option . Your dividend and capital gains distributions will be reinvested automatically in additional shares of the Funds. If you do not indicate a choice on your application, you will be assigned this option.

 

  Income-Earned Option . Your capital gains distributions will be reinvested automatically, but you will be sent a check for each dividend distribution.

 

  Cash Option . You will be sent a check for your dividend and capital gains distributions ($10 minimum check amount). The Funds will automatically reinvest all distributions under $10 in additional shares of the Funds, even if you have elected the cash option. If the U.S. Postal Service cannot deliver your check or if your check remains uncashed for six months, the Fund reserves the right to reinvest the distribution check in your account at the Fund’s then current NAV and to reinvest all subsequent distributions.

For retirement accounts, all distributions are automatically reinvested. When you are over 59  1 2 years old, you can receive distributions in cash.

When a Fund deducts a distribution from its NAV, the reinvestment price is the Fund’s NAV per share at the close of business that day. Cash distribution checks will be mailed within seven days.

Understanding Distributions

As a Fund shareholder, you are entitled to your share of the Fund’s net income and gains on its investments. The Funds pass their earnings along to investors as distributions. Each Fund earns dividends from stocks and interest from short-term investments. These are passed along as dividend distributions. Each Fund realizes capital gains whenever it sells securities for a higher price than it paid for them. These are passed along as capital gains distributions.

Taxes

As with any investment, you should consider how your investment in each Fund will be taxed. If your account is not a tax-deferred retirement account, you should be aware of these tax implications.

Taxes on Distributions . Distributions are subject to federal income tax and may also be subject to state and local taxes. If you live outside of the United States, your distributions could also be taxed by the country in which you reside, as well as potentially subject to U.S. withholding taxes. Your distributions are taxable when they are paid, whether you take them in cash or reinvest them. Distributions declared in December and paid in January, however, are taxable as if they were paid on December 31.

For federal income tax purposes, each Fund’s income and short-term capital gains distributions are taxed as regular or “qualified” dividends; long-term capital gains distributions are taxed as long-term capital gains. Every January, each Fund will send you and the IRS a statement showing the taxable distributions.

Taxes on Transactions . Your redemptions, including transfers between Funds, are subject to capital gains tax. A capital gain or loss is the difference between the cost of your shares and the price you receive when you sell them. Whenever you sell shares of a Fund, the Fund will send you a confirmation statement showing how many shares you sold and at what price. You will also receive a consolidated transaction statement every January. It is up to you or your tax preparer, however, to determine whether the sales resulted in a capital gain and, if so, the amount of the tax to be paid. Be sure to keep your regular account statements; the information they contain will be essential in calculating the amount of your capital gains.

“Buying a Dividend.” If you buy shares just before a Fund deducts a distribution from its NAV, you will pay the full price for the shares and then receive a portion of the price back in the form of a taxable distribution.

There are tax requirements that all funds must follow in order to avoid federal income taxation. In their efforts to adhere to these requirements, the Funds may have to limit their investment activity in some types of instruments.

When you sign your account application, you will be asked to certify that your Social Security or Taxpayer Identification number is correct and that you are not subject to 28% withholding for failing to report income to the IRS. If you violate IRS regulations, the IRS can require a Fund to withhold 28% of your taxable distributions and redemptions.

 

 

 
Shareholder Services         57


Table of Contents

Index Descriptions

 

The 3-Month LIBOR represents the average interest rate at which a selection of banks in London are prepared to lend to one another in American dollars with a maturity of 3 months.

The Bloomberg Barclays U.S. Aggregate Bond Index is an unmanaged index consisting of U.S. dollar-denominated, fixed-rate, taxable bonds.

The HFRX Global Hedge Fund Index is designed to be representative of the overall composition of the hedge fund universe. It is comprised of all eligible hedge fund strategies; including but not limited to convertible arbitrage, distressed securities, equity hedge, equity market neutral, event driven, macro, merger arbitrage, and relative value arbitrage. The strategies are asset weighted based on the distribution of assets in the hedge fund industry.

The Morningstar Foreign Large Blend Category measures the performance of foreign large-blend funds which invest in a variety of big international stocks. Most of these funds divide their assets among a dozen or more developed markets, including Japan, Britain, France, and Germany. They tend to invest the rest in emerging markets such as Hong Kong, Brazil, Mexico and Thailand. These funds typically will have less than 20% of assets invested in U.S. stocks.

The Morningstar Large Blend Category measures the performance of large-blend funds which have portfolios that are fairly representative of the overall stock market in size, growth rates, and price. They tend to invest across the spectrum of U.S. industries and owing to their broad exposure, the funds returns are often similar to those of the S&P 500 Index.

The Morningstar Small Blend Category measures the performance of small-blend funds which favor firms at the smaller end of the market-capitalization range, and are flexible in the types of small caps they buy. Some aim to own an array of value and growth stocks while others employ a discipline that leads to holdings with valuations and growth rates close to the small-cap averages.

The Morningstar Multialternative Category measures the performance of funds that use a combination of alternative strategies such as taking long and short positions in equity and debt, trading futures, or using convertible arbitrage, among others. Funds in this category have a majority of their assets exposed to alternative strategies and include both funds with static allocations to alternative strategies and funds tactically allocating among alternative strategies and asset classes.

The MSCI ACWI ex-U.S. Index is a free float-adjusted market capitalization weighted index that is designed to measure the equity market performance of developed and emerging markets, excluding the United States.

The MSCI EAFE Index comprises the MSCI country indices that represent developed markets outside of North America: Europe, Australasia and the Far East and is used to measure international equity performance.

The Russell 1000 ® Index measures the performance of the 1,000 largest U.S. companies of the Russell 3000 ® Index.

The Russell 2000 ® Index measures the performance of the 2,000 smallest U.S. companies of the Russell 3000 ® Index.

The Russell 3000 ® Index is a broad-based index that measures the performance of the 3,000 largest U.S. companies as measured by market capitalization, and represents about 98% of the U.S. stock market.

The Russell Global Ex U.S. Large Cap Index measures the performance of the global equity market based on all investable equity securities, excluding companies assigned to the United States. The Russell Global Ex U.S. Large Cap Index is constructed to provide a comprehensive and unbiased barometer for the global large cap segment and is completely reconstituted annually to accurately reflect the changes in the market over time.

Direct investment in an index is not possible.

Neither MSCI nor any other party involved in or related to compiling, computing, or creating the MSCI data makes any express or implied warranties or representations with respect to such data (or the results to be obtained by the use thereof), and all such parties hereby expressly disclaim all warranties of originality, accuracy, completeness, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose with respect to any of such data. Without limiting any of the foregoing, in no event shall MSCI, any of its affiliates, or any third party involved in or related to compiling, computing, or creating the data have any liability for any direct, indirect, special, punitive, consequential, or any other damages (including lost profits) even if notified of the possibility of such damages. No further distribution or dissemination of the MSCI data is permitted without MSCI s express written consent.

 

 

 
58       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

Financial Highlights

 

The financial highlights tables are intended to help you understand the Funds’ financial performance for the past five-years. Certain information reflects financial results for a single Fund share. The total returns in the tables represent the rate that an investor would have earned or lost on an investment in a Fund (assuming reinvestment of all dividends and distributions). This financial information has been audited by Cohen & Company, Ltd., the Funds’ independent registered public accounting firm, whose report, along with the Funds’ financial statements, is included in the Funds’ Annual Report to Shareholders, which is available upon request.

For a capital share outstanding throughout each year

 

    LITMAN GREGORY MASTERS EQUITY FUND  
    Institutional Class  
    Year Ended December 31,  
     2016      2015      2014      2013      2012  

Net asset value, beginning of year

  $ 16.08      $ 18.01      $ 17.98      $ 13.88      $ 12.43  
 

 

 

 
             

Income from investment operations:

             

Net investment income (loss)

    0.13 1        0.07 1        (0.01 ) 1        (0.04      0.01  

Net realized gain (loss) and net change in unrealized appreciation/depreciation on investments and foreign currency

    1.81        (0.41 )      2.02        4.88        1.70  
 

 

 

 

Total income (loss) from investment operations

    1.94        (0.34 )      2.01        4.84        1.71  
 

 

 

 
             

Less distributions:

             

From net investment income

    (0.14      (0.06 )                    (0.01

From net realized gains

    (0.86      (1.53 )      (1.98      (0.74      (0.25
 

 

 

 

Total distributions

    (1.00      (1.59 )      (1.98      (0.74      (0.26
 

 

 

 
             

Redemption fee proceeds

                            ^  
 

 

 

 

Net asset value, end of year

  $ 17.02      $ 16.08      $ 18.01      $ 17.98      $ 13.88  
 

 

 

 

Total return

    11.98      (1.87 )%      11.07      35.14      13.78
 

 

 

 
             

Ratios/supplemental data:

             

Net assets, end of year (millions)

  $ 313.5      $ 321.2      $ 419.6      $ 420.2      $ 274.4  
 

 

 

 

Ratios of total expenses to average net assets:

             

Before fees waived

    1.27 % 2        1.28 % 2        1.27      1.30      1.30
 

 

 

 

After fees waived

    1.17 % 2        1.18 % 2        1.17      1.23      1.28 % 3  
 

 

 

 

Ratio of net investment income (loss) to average net assets

    0.78 % 2        0.37 % 2        (0.03 )%       (0.27 )%       0.09
 

 

 

 

Portfolio turnover rate

    26.98 % 4        33.94 % 4        52.70 % 4        113.28 % 4        74.03 % 4  
 

 

 

 

 

^   Amount represents less than $0.01 per share.
1     Calculated based on the average shares outstanding methodology.
2     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.00% of average net assets.
3     Ratio excludes $4,621 of fees paid indirectly or 0.00% impact on the ratio of total expenses to average net assets.
4     Portfolio turnover is calculated on the basis of the Fund as a whole without distinguishing between classes of shares issued.

 

 
Financial Highlights         59


Table of Contents

Financial Highlights — (Continued)

 

For a capital share outstanding throughout each year

 

    LITMAN GREGORY MASTERS EQUITY FUND  
    Investor Class  
    Year Ended December 31,  
     2016      2015      2014      2013      2012  

Net asset value, beginning of year

  $ 15.90      $ 17.83      $ 17.87      $ 13.79      $ 12.37  
 

 

 

 
             

Income from investment operations:

             

Net investment income (loss)

    0.08 1        0.02 1        (0.05 ) 1        (0.11      (0.16 )  

Net realized gain (loss) and net change in unrealized appreciation/depreciation on investments and foreign currency

    1.80        (0.39 )      1.99        4.93        1.83  
 

 

 

 

Total income (loss) from investment operations

    1.88        (0.37 )      1.94        4.82        1.67  
 

 

 

 
             

Less distributions:

             

From net investment income

    (0.10      (0.03 )                     

From net realized gains

    (0.86      (1.53 )      (1.98      (0.74      (0.25
 

 

 

 

Total distributions

    (0.96      (1.56 )      (1.98      (0.74      (0.25
 

 

 

 
             

Redemption fee proceeds

                         
 

 

 

 

Net asset value, end of year

  $ 16.82      $ 15.90      $ 17.83      $ 17.87      $ 13.79  
 

 

 

 

Total return

    11.72      (2.08 )%      10.75      35.22      13.51
 

 

 

 
             

Ratios/supplemental data:

             

Net assets, end of year (thousands)

  $ 99.5      $ 122.5      $ 76.7      $ 91.7      $ 86.0  
 

 

 

 

Ratios of total expenses to average net assets:

             

Before fees waived

    1.51 % 2        1.53 % 2        1.52      1.55      1.55
 

 

 

 

After fees waived

    1.42 % 2        1.43 % 2        1.42      1.48      1.53 % 3  
 

 

 

 

Ratio of net investment income (loss) to average net assets

    0.48 % 2        0.09 % 2        (0.28 )%       (0.52 )%       (0.34 )% 
 

 

 

 

Portfolio turnover rate

    26.98 % 4        33.94 % 4        52.70 % 4        113.28 % 4        74.03 % 4  
 

 

 

 

 

1     Calculated based on the average shares outstanding methodology.
2     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.00% of average net assets.
3     Ratio excludes $3 of fees paid indirectly or 0.00% impact on the ratio of total expenses to average net assets.
4     Portfolio turnover is calculated on the basis of the Fund as a whole without distinguishing between classes of shares issued.

 

 
60       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

For a capital share outstanding throughout each year

 

    LITMAN GREGORY MASTERS INTERNATIONAL FUND  
    Institutional Class  
    Year Ended December 31,  
     2016      2015      2014      2013      2012  

Net asset value, beginning of year

  $ 16.13      $ 17.36      $ 18.06      $ 15.02      $ 12.58  
 

 

 

 
             

Income from investment operations:

             

Net investment income

    0.23 1        0.22 1        0.17 1        0.18        0.16  

Net realized gain (loss) and net change in unrealized appreciation/depreciation on investments and foreign currency

    (0.98      (1.18 )      (0.66      3.04        2.35  
 

 

 

 

Total income (loss) from investment operations

    (0.75      (0.96 )      (0.49      3.22        2.51  
 

 

 

 
             

Less distributions:

             

From net investment income

    (0.61      (0.27 )      (0.21      (0.18      (0.07

From net realized gains

                           
 

 

 

 

Total distributions

    (0.61      (0.27 )      (0.21      (0.18      (0.07
 

 

 

 
             

Redemption fee proceeds

    ^      ^      ^      ^      ^  
 

 

 

 

Net asset value, end of year

  $ 14.77      $ 16.13      $ 17.36      $ 18.06      $ 15.02  
 

 

 

 

Total return

    (4.61 )%       (5.52 )%      (2.72 )%       21.47      19.96
 

 

 

 
             

Ratios/supplemental data:

             

Net assets, end of year (millions)

  $ 621.3      $ 1,021.1      $ 1,175.7      $ 1,328.2      $ 1,175.5  
 

 

 

 

Ratios of total expenses to average net assets:

             

Before fees waived

    1.28 % 2        1.24 % 3        1.24      1.30      1.30
 

 

 

 

After fees waived

    1.00 % 2        0.99 % 3        1.03      1.11      1.15 % 4  
 

 

 

 

Ratio of net investment income to average net assets

    1.51 % 2        1.22 % 3        0.94      1.02      1.05 %  
 

 

 

 

Portfolio turnover rate

    43.84 % 5        51.68 % 5        70.08 % 5        112.35 % 5        107.28 % 5  
 

 

 

 

 

^   Amount represents less than $0.01 per share.
1     Calculated based on the average shares outstanding methodology.
2     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.01% of average net assets.
3     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.00% of average net assets.
4     Ratio excludes $98 of fees paid indirectly or 0.00% impact on the ratio of total expenses to average net assets.
5     Portfolio turnover is calculated on the basis of the Fund as a whole without distinguishing between classes of shares issued.

 

 
Financial Highlights         61


Table of Contents

Financial Highlights — (Continued)

 

For a capital share outstanding throughout each year

 

    LITMAN GREGORY MASTERS INTERNATIONAL FUND  
    Investor Class  
    Year Ended December 31,  
     2016      2015      2014      2013      2012  

Net asset value, beginning of year

  $ 16.02      $ 17.22      $ 17.92      $ 14.92      $ 12.53  
 

 

 

 
             

Income from investment operations:

             

Net investment income

    0.21 1        0.17 1        0.12 1        0.12        0.11  

Net realized gain (loss) and net change in unrealized appreciation/depreciation on investments and foreign currency

    (1.00      (1.15 )      (0.65      3.03        2.35  
 

 

 

 

Total income (loss) from investment operations

    (0.79      (0.98 )      (0.53      3.15        2.46  
 

 

 

 
             

Less distributions:

             

From net investment income

    (0.55      (0.22 )      (0.17      (0.15      (0.07

From net realized gains

                                 
 

 

 

 

Total distributions

    (0.55      (0.22 )      (0.17      (0.15      (0.07
 

 

 

 
             

Redemption fee proceeds

                              ^  
 

 

 

 

Net asset value, end of year

  $ 14.68      $ 16.02      $ 17.22      $ 17.92      $ 14.92  
 

 

 

 

Total return

    (4.93 )%       (5.69 )%      (2.98 )%       21.12      19.64
 

 

 

 
             

Ratios/supplemental data:

             

Net assets, end of year (millions)

  $ 84.9      $ 245.2      $ 342.3      $ 345.4      $ 274.6  
 

 

 

 

Ratios of total expenses to average net assets:

             

Before fees waived

    1.53 % 2        1.49 % 3        1.49      1.55      1.55
 

 

 

 

After fees waived

    1.25 % 2        1.23 % 3        1.28      1.36      1.40 % 4  
 

 

 

 

Ratio of net investment income to average net assets

    1.40 % 2        0.94 % 3        0.66      0.76      0.80
 

 

 

 

Portfolio turnover rate

    43.84 % 5        51.68 % 5        70.08 % 5        112.35 % 5        107.28 % 5  
 

 

 

 

 

^   Amount represents less than $0.01 per share.
1     Calculated based on the average shares outstanding methodology.
2     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.01% of average net assets.
3     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.00% of average net assets.
4     Ratio excludes $21 of fees paid indirectly or 0.00% impact on the ratio of total expenses to average net assets.
5     Portfolio turnover is calculated on the basis of the Fund as a whole without distinguishing between classes of shares issued.

 

 
62       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

For a capital share outstanding throughout each year

 

    LITMAN GREGORY MASTERS SMALLER COMPANIES FUND  
    Institutional Class  
    Year Ended December 31,  
     2016      2015      2014      2013      2012  

Net asset value, beginning of year

  $ 17.43      $ 20.09      $ 20.94      $ 15.30      $ 12.91  
 

 

 

 
             

Income from investment operations:

             

Net investment loss

    (0.01 ) 1        (0.15 ) 1        (0.13 ) 1        (0.16      (0.09

Net realized gain (loss) and net change in unrealized appreciation/depreciation on investments

    3.29        (2.51 )      (0.72      5.80        2.48  
 

 

 

 

Total income (loss) from investment operations

    3.28        (2.66 )      (0.85      5.64        2.39  
 

 

 

 
             

Less distributions:

             

From net investment income

                                 

From net realized gains

                                 
 

 

 

 

Total distributions

                                 
 

 

 

 
             

Redemption fee proceeds

                         ^        ^  
 

 

 

 

Net asset value, end of year

  $ 20.71      $ 17.43      $ 20.09      $ 20.94      $ 15.30  
 

 

 

 

Total return

    18.82      (13.24 )%      (4.06 )%       36.86      18.51
 

 

 

 
             

Ratios/supplemental data:

             

Net assets, end of year (millions)

  $ 37.2      $ 41.0      $ 73.2      $ 84.4      $ 71.3  
 

 

 

 

Ratios of total expenses to average net assets:

             

Before fees waived

    1.66 % 2        1.69 % 2        1.54      1.54      1.58
 

 

 

 

After fees waived

    1.24 % 2        1.59 % 2        1.44      1.47      1.57 % 3  
 

 

 

 

Ratio of net investment loss to average net assets

    (0.06 )% 2        (0.75 )% 2        (0.62 )%       (0.83 )%       (0.56 )% 
 

 

 

 

Portfolio turnover rate

    51.32      60.73 %      104.22      153.56      142.07
 

 

 

 

 

^   Amount represents less than $0.01 per share.
1     Calculated based on the average shares outstanding methodology.
2     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.00% of average net assets.
3     Ratio excludes $4,032 of fees paid indirectly or 0.01% impact on the ratio of total expenses to average net assets.

 

 
Financial Highlights         63


Table of Contents

Financial Highlights — (Continued)

 

For a capital share outstanding throughout each year

 

    LITMAN GREGORY MASTERS ALTERNATIVE
STRATEGIES FUND
 
    Institutional Class  
    Year Ended December 31,  
     2016      2015      2014      2013      2012  

Net asset value, beginning of year

  $ 10.99      $ 11.44      $ 11.42      $ 11.01      $ 10.32  
 

 

 

 
             

Income from investment operations:

             

Net investment income

    0.31 1        0.30 1        0.27 1        0.26        0.30  

Net realized gain (loss) and net change in unrealized appreciation/depreciation on investments, foreign currency, short sales, options, futures and swap contracts

    0.44        (0.40 )      0.14        0.43        0.67  
 

 

 

 

Total income (loss) from investment operations

    0.75        (0.10 )      0.41        0.69        0.97  
 

 

 

 
             

Less distributions:

             

From net investment income

    (0.29      (0.32 )      (0.31      (0.28      (0.27

From net realized gains

           (0.03 )      (0.08             (0.01 )  
 

 

 

 

Total distributions

    (0.29      (0.35 )      (0.39      (0.28      (0.28
 

 

 

 
             

Redemption fee proceeds

                ^      ^      ^  
 

 

 

 

Net asset value, end of year

  $ 11.45      $ 10.99      $ 11.44      $ 11.42      $ 11.01  
 

 

 

 

Total return

    6.87      (0.77 )%      3.58      6.32      9.41 %  
 

 

 

 
             

Ratios/supplemental data:

             

Net assets, end of year (millions)

  $ 1,368.9      $ 1,176.9      $ 855.2      $ 600.9      $ 349.2  
 

 

 

 

Ratios of total expenses to average net assets:

             

Before fees waived

    1.83 % 7        1.94 % 6        1.87 % 5        1.82 % 4        1.91 % 2, 3  
 

 

 

 

After fees waived

    1.75 % 7        1.85 % 6        1.74 % 5        1.66 % 4        1.64 % 3 ,8  
 

 

 

 

Ratio of net investment income to average net assets

    2.78 % 7        2.62 % 6        2.32 % 5        2.53 % 4        3.22 % 3  
 

 

 

 

Portfolio turnover rate

    142.24 % 9        145.97 % 9        156.88 % 9        179.19 % 9        160.54 % 9  
 

 

 

 

 

^   Amount represents less than $0.01 per share.
1     Calculated based on the average shares outstanding methodology.
2     Does not include the impact of approximately $131,223 for the year ended December 31, 2012 of custody and accounting fees from the Fund’s period end that were not charged by the service provider. Had such amounts been included, the annualized ratio of total expenses to average net assets before fees waived and expenses paid indirectly would have been 1.96% for the year ended December 31, 2012.
3     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.15% of average net assets.
4     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.17% of average net assets.
5     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.25% of average net assets.
6     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.36% of average net assets.
7     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.28% of average net assets.
8     Ratio excludes $465 of fees paid indirectly or 0.00% impact on the ratio of total expenses to average net assets.
9     Portfolio turnover is calculated on the basis of the Fund as a whole without distinguishing between classes of shares issued.

 

 
64       Litman Gregory Funds Trust


Table of Contents

For a capital share outstanding throughout each year

 

    LITMAN GREGORY MASTERS ALTERNATIVE
STRATEGIES FUND
 
    Investor Class  
    Year Ended December 31,  
     2016      2015      2014      2013      2012  

Net asset value, beginning of year

  $ 11.00      $ 11.45      $ 11.43      $ 11.02      $ 10.32  
 

 

 

 
             

Income from investment operations:

             

Net investment income

    0.28 1        0.28 1        0.24 1        0.24        0.26  

Net realized gain (loss) and net change in unrealized appreciation/depreciation on investments, foreign currency, short sales, options, futures and swap contracts

    0.44        (0.40 )      0.14        0.43        0.68  
 

 

 

 

Total income (loss) from investment operations

    0.72        (0.12 )      0.38        0.67        0.94  
 

 

 

 
             

Less distributions:

             

From net investment income

    (0.26      (0.30 )      (0.28      (0.26      (0.23

From net realized gains

           (0.03 )      (0.08             (0.01 )  
 

 

 

 

Total distributions

    (0.26      (0.33 )      (0.36      (0.26      (0.24
 

 

 

 
             

Redemption fee proceeds

                ^      ^      ^  
 

 

 

 

Net asset value, end of year

  $ 11.46      $ 11.00      $ 11.45      $ 11.43      $ 11.02  
 

 

 

 

Total return

    6.67      (0.95 )%      3.33      6.07      9.16 %  
 

 

 

 
             

Ratios/supplemental data:

             

Net assets, end of year (millions)

  $ 179.8      $ 190.6      $ 166.7      $ 108.3      $ 58.5  
 

 

 

 

Ratios of total expenses to average net assets:

             

Before fees waived

    2.08 % 7        2.18 % 6        2.12 % 5        2.07 % 4        2.16 % 2,3
 

 

 

 

After fees waived

    2.00 % 7        2.03 % 6        1.99 % 5        1.91 % 4        1.89 % 3 ,8  
 

 

 

 

Ratio of net investment income to average net assets

    2.54 % 7        2.44 % 6        2.07 % 5        2.27 % 4        2.98 % 3
 

 

 

 

Portfolio turnover rate

    142.24 % 9        145.97 % 9        156.88 % 9        179.19 % 9        160.54 % 9  
 

 

 

 

 

^   Amount represents less than $0.01 per share.
1     Calculated based on the average shares outstanding methodology.
2     Does not include the impact of approximately $20,109 for the year ended December 31, 2012 of custody and accounting fees from the Fund’s period end that were not charged by the service provider. Had such amounts been included, the annualized ratio of total expenses to average net assets before fees waived and expenses paid indirectly would have been 2.21% for the year ended December 31, 2012.
3     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.15% of average net assets.
4     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.17% of average net assets.
5     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.25% of average net assets.
6     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.36% of average net assets.
7     Includes Interest & Dividend expense of 0.28% of average net assets.
8     Ratio excludes $71 of fees paid indirectly or 0.00% impact on the ratio of total expenses to average net assets.
9     Portfolio turnover is calculated on the basis of the Fund as a whole without distinguishing between classes of shares issued.

 

 
Financial Highlights         65


Table of Contents

Privacy Notice

 

The Funds may collect non-public personal information about you from the following sources:

 

    Information we receive about you on applications or other forms;

 

    Information you give us orally; and

 

    Information about your transactions with us.

We do not disclose any non-public personal information about our shareholders or former shareholders without the shareholder’s authorization, except as required by law or in response to inquiries from governmental authorities. We restrict access to your personal and account information to those employees who need to know that information to provide products and services to you. We also may disclose that information to non-affiliated third parties (such as to brokers or custodians) only as permitted by law and only as needed for us to provide agreed services to you. We maintain physical, electronic and procedural safeguards to guard your non-public personal information.

If you hold shares of the Funds through a financial intermediary, such as a broker-dealer, bank, or trust company, the privacy policy of your financial intermediary would govern how your non-public personal information would be shared with non-affiliated third parties.

 

Not Part of Prospectus

Privacy Notice


Table of Contents

For More Information

Statement of Additional Information:

 

The SAI contains additional information about the Funds.

Annual and Semi-Annual Reports:

 

Additional information about the Funds’ investments is available in the Funds’ Annual and Semi-Annual Reports to Shareholders. In the Funds’ Annual Report, you will find a discussion of the market conditions and investment strategies that significantly affected the Funds’ performance during the last fiscal year.

The SAI and the Funds’ Annual and Semi-Annual Reports to Shareholders are available, without charge, upon request. To request an SAI or the Funds’ Annual or Semi-Annual Reports to Shareholders, or to make shareholder inquiries or to obtain other information about the Funds, please call 1-800-960-0188. You may also obtain a copy of the SAI or Annual or Semi-Annual Reports, free of charge, by accessing the Funds’ website (http://www.mastersfunds.com), or by writing to the Funds.

SEC Contact Information:

 

If you have access to the Internet, you can view the SAI, the Funds’ Annual or Semi-Annual Reports to Shareholders and other information about the Funds on the EDGAR Database at the Securities and Exchange Commission’s (“SEC”) internet site at www.sec.gov. You may also visit the SEC’s Public Reference Room in Washington, D.C. to review and copy information about the Funds (including the SAI). Information on the operation of the Public Reference Room can be obtained by calling the SEC at (202) 551-8090. You may request copies of information available on the EDGAR Database by writing to the SEC’s Public Reference Section, Washington, D.C. 20549-1520 or by an electronic request at the following E-mail address: publicinfo@sec.gov. The SEC charges a duplicating fee for this service.

Fund Information:

 

 

Fund   Abbreviation   Symbol   CUSIP     Fund Number  

Equity Fund

  Equity      

Institutional Class

    MSEFX     53700T108       305  

Investor Class

      MSENX     53700T504       475  

International Fund

  Intl      

Institutional Class

    MSILX     53700T207       306  

Investor Class

      MNILX     53700T603       476  

Smaller Companies Fund

  Smaller      

Institutional Class

      MSSFX     53700T306       308  

Alternative Strategies Fund

  Alternative      

Institutional Class

    MASFX     53700T801       421  

Investor Class

      MASNX     53700T884       447  

Website:

 

www.mastersfunds.com

Litman Gregory Funds Trust

P.O. Box 219922

Kansas City, MO 64121-9922

1-800-960-0188

    

ALPS Distributors, Inc. Denver, Colorado 80203

©2017 Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC. All rights reserved.

 

Investment Company Act File No: 811-07763


Table of Contents

LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund - Institutional Class – MSEFX

                     Investor Class – MSENX

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund - Institutional Class – MSILX

                     Investor Class – MNILX

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund - Institutional Class – MSSFX

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund - Institutional Class – MASFX

                     Investor Class – MASNX

STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Dated April 30, 2017

This Statement of Additional Information (“SAI”) is not a prospectus, and it should be read in conjunction with the prospectus dated April 30, 2017, as it may be amended from time to time, of Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund (the “Equity Fund”), Litman Gregory Masters International Fund (the “International Fund”), Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund (the “Smaller Companies Fund”), and Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund (the “Alternative Strategies Fund,” and collectively with the Equity Fund, the International Fund, and the Smaller Companies Fund, the “Funds”), each a series of the Litman Gregory Funds Trust (the “Trust”), formerly known as the Masters’ Select Funds Trust until August 2011 and the Masters’ Select Investment Trust until December 1997. Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC (the “Advisor” or “Litman Gregory”) is the investment advisor of the Funds. The Advisor has retained certain investment managers as sub-advisors (each, a “Sub-Advisor,” and collectively, the “Sub-Advisors”), each responsible for portfolio management of a segment of a Fund’s total assets. A copy of the Funds’ prospectus and most recent annual report may be obtained from the Trust without charge at 1676 N. California Blvd., Suite 500, Walnut Creek, California 94596, telephone 1-800-960-0188.

The Funds’ audited financial statements for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2016 are incorporated by reference to the Funds’ Annual Report for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2016 .

 

1


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

FUND HISTORY

     3  

INVESTMENT OBJECTIVES, POLICIES AND RISKS

     3  

BOARD OF TRUSTEES

     36  

PORTFOLIO HOLDINGS DISCLOSURE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

     46  

THE ADVISOR AND THE SUB-ADVISORS

     47  

ADDITIONAL PORTFOLIO MANAGER INFORMATION

     50  

PROXY VOTING POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

     71  

ADMINISTRATOR

     92  

PORTFOLIO TRANSACTIONS AND BROKERAGE

     93  

PORTFOLIO TURNOVER

     97  

NET ASSET VALUE

     97  

TAXATION

     99  

DIVIDENDS AND DISTRIBUTIONS

     102  

ANTI-MONEY LAUNDERING PROGRAM

     103  

GENERAL INFORMATION

     103  

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     105  

APPENDIX

     106  

 

2


Table of Contents

FUND HISTORY

The Trust was organized as a Delaware statutory trust on August 1, 1996 and is registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”), as an open-end management investment company. The Trust consists of four separate series: the Equity Fund, the International Fund, the Smaller Companies Fund, and the Alternative Strategies Fund.

The Equity Fund commenced operations on December 31, 1996. On April 30, 2009, the existing unnamed class of shares was redesignated as the Institutional Class, and the Investor Class commenced operations.

The International Fund commenced operations on December 1, 1997. On April 30, 2009, the existing unnamed class of shares was redesignated as the Institutional Class, and the Investor Class commenced operations.

The Smaller Companies Fund commenced operations on June 30, 2003. On April 30, 2009, the existing unnamed class of shares was redesignated as the Institutional Class.

The Alternative Strategies Fund commenced operations on September 30, 2011. Both the Institutional Class and the Investor Class commenced operations on that date.

INVESTMENT OBJECTIVES, POLICIES AND RISKS

The investment objective of each Fund is fundamental and therefore may be changed only with the favorable vote of the holders of a majority of the outstanding voting securities (as defined in the 1940 Act) of such Fund. Each Fund’s investment objective is set forth in the Funds’ prospectus. There is no assurance that each Fund will achieve its investment objective. The discussion below supplements information contained in the prospectus as to the investment policies of each Fund.

Investment policies or descriptions that are described as percentages of “the Fund’s net assets” are measured as percentages of the Fund’s net assets plus borrowings for investment purposes. The investment policies of the Equity Fund, International Fund, and Smaller Companies Fund with respect to “80% of the Fund’s net assets” may be changed by the Board of Trustees of the Trust (the “Board”) without shareholder approval, but shareholders would be given at least 60 days’ notice if any change occurs.

Cash Position

When a Fund’s Sub-Advisor believes that market conditions are unfavorable for profitable investing, or when the Sub-Advisor is otherwise unable to locate attractive investment opportunities, a Fund’s cash or similar investments may increase. In other words, the Funds do not always stay fully invested in stocks and bonds. Cash or similar investments generally are a residual—they represent the assets that remain after a portfolio manager has committed available assets to desirable investment opportunities. However, the Advisor or a Fund’s Sub-Advisor may also temporarily increase a Fund’s cash position to protect its assets or maintain liquidity. Partly because the Sub-Advisors act independently of each other, the cash positions of the Funds may vary significantly.

When a Fund’s investments in cash or similar investments increase, it may not participate in market advances or declines to the same extent that it would if the Fund remained more fully invested in stocks or bonds.

Equity Securities

The Funds may invest in equity securities consistent with its investment objective and strategies. Common stocks, preferred stocks and convertible securities are examples of equity securities.

 

3


Table of Contents

All investments in equity securities are subject to market risks that may cause their prices to fluctuate over time. Historically, the equity markets have moved in cycles and the value of the securities in a Fund’s portfolio may fluctuate substantially from day to day. Owning an equity security can also subject a Fund to the risk that the issuer may discontinue paying dividends.

To the extent a Fund invests in the equity securities of small- or medium-size companies, it will be exposed to the risks of small- and medium-size companies. Such companies often have limited product lines or services, have narrower markets for their goods and/or services, and more limited managerial and financial resources than larger, more established companies. In addition, because these companies are not well-known to the investing public, they may not have significant institutional ownership and may be followed by relatively few security analysts, and there will normally be less publicly available information when compared to larger companies. Adverse publicity and investor perceptions, whether or not based on fundamental analysis, can decrease the price and liquidity of securities held by the Fund. As a result, as compared to larger-sized companies, the performance of smaller-sized companies can be more volatile and they face greater risk of business failure, which could increase the volatility of the Fund’s portfolio.

Common Stock.  A common stock represents a proportionate share of the ownership of a company and its value is based on the success of the company’s business, the cash a company generates, and the value of a company’s assets. However, over short periods of time, the price of any company, whether successful or not, may increase or decrease in price by a meaningful percentage. In addition to the general risks set forth above, investments in common stocks are subject to the risk that in the event a company in which a Fund invests is liquidated, the holders of preferred stock and creditors of that company will be paid in full before any payments are made to the Fund as a holder of that company’s common stock. It is possible that all assets of that company will be exhausted before any payments are made to the Fund.

Preferred Stock . Preferred stocks are equity securities that often pay dividends at a specific rate and have a preference over common stocks in dividend payments and liquidation of assets. A preferred stock has a blend of the characteristics of a bond and common stock. It can offer the higher yield of a bond and has priority over common stock in equity ownership, but does not have the seniority of a bond and, unlike common stock, its participation in the issuer’s growth may be limited. Although the dividend is set at a fixed annual rate, in some circumstances it can be changed or omitted by the issuer.

Convertible Securities and Warrants

Each Fund may invest in convertible securities and warrants. A convertible security is a fixed-income security (a debt instrument or a preferred stock) which may be converted at a stated price within a specified period of time into a certain quantity of the common stock of the same or a different issuer. Convertible securities are senior to common stock in an issuer’s capital structure, but are usually subordinated to similar non-convertible securities. While providing a fixed-income stream (generally higher in yield than the income derivable from common stock but lower than that afforded by a similar non-convertible security), a convertible security also affords an investor the opportunity, through its conversion feature, to participate in the capital appreciation upon a market price advance in the convertible security’s underlying common stock.

A warrant gives the holder the right to purchase at any time during a specified period a predetermined number of shares of common stock at a fixed price. Unlike convertible debt securities or preferred stock, warrants do not pay a fixed dividend. Investments in warrants involve certain risks, including the possible lack of a liquid market for resale of the warrants, potential price fluctuations as a result of speculation or other factors, and failure of the price of the underlying security to reach or have reasonable prospects of reaching a level at which the warrant can be prudently exercised (in which event the warrant may expire without being exercised, resulting in a loss of a Fund’s entire investment therein).

 

4


Table of Contents

Other Corporate Debt Securities

Each Fund may invest in non-convertible debt securities of foreign and domestic companies over a cross-section of industries. The debt securities in which each Fund may invest will be of varying maturities and may include corporate bonds, debentures, notes and other similar corporate debt instruments. The value of a longer-term debt security fluctuates more widely in response to changes in interest rates than do shorter-term debt securities.

Risks of Investing in Debt Securities

There are a number of risks generally associated with an investment in debt securities (including convertible securities). Yields on short-, intermediate-, and long-term securities depend on a variety of factors, including the general condition of the money and bond markets, the size of a particular offering, the maturity of the obligation, and the rating of the issue.

Debt securities with longer maturities tend to produce higher yields and are generally subject to potentially greater capital appreciation and depreciation than obligations with short maturities and lower yields. The market prices of debt securities usually vary, depending upon available yields. An increase in interest rates will generally reduce the value of such portfolio investments, and a decline in interest rates will generally increase the value of such portfolio investments. The ability of each Fund to achieve its investment objective also depends on the continuing ability of the issuers of the debt securities in which each Fund invests to meet their obligations for the payment of interest and principal when due.

Risks of Investing in Lower-Rated Debt Securities

Each Fund may invest a portion of its net assets in debt securities rated below “Ba1” by Moody’s, below “BB+” by Standard & Poor’s (“S&P”) or below investment grade by other recognized rating agencies, or in unrated securities of comparable quality under certain circumstances. Securities with ratings below “Baa” by Moody’s and/or “BBB” by S&P are commonly referred to as “junk bonds.” Such bonds are subject to greater market fluctuations and risk of loss of income and principal than higher rated bonds for a variety of reasons, including the following:

Sensitivity to Interest Rate and Economic Changes. The economy and interest rates affect high yield securities differently from other securities. For example, the prices of high yield bonds have been found to be less sensitive to interest rate changes than higher-rated investments, but more sensitive to adverse economic changes or individual corporate developments. Also, during an economic downturn or substantial period of rising interest rates, highly leveraged issuers may experience financial stress which would adversely affect their ability to service their principal and interest obligations, to meet projected business goals, and to obtain additional financing. If the issuer of a bond defaults, each Fund may incur additional expenses to seek recovery. In addition, periods of economic uncertainty and changes can be expected to result in increased volatility of market prices of high yield bonds and a Fund’s asset values.

Payment Expectations. High yield bonds present certain risks based on payment expectations. For example, high yield bonds may contain redemption and call provisions. If an issuer exercises these provisions in a declining interest rate market, a Fund would have to replace the security with a lower yielding security, resulting in a decreased return for investors. Conversely, a high yield bond’s value will decrease in a rising interest rate market, as will the value of a Fund’s assets. If a Fund experiences unexpected net redemptions, it may be forced to sell its high yield bonds without regard to their investment merits, thereby decreasing the asset base upon which a Fund’s expenses can be spread and possibly reducing a Fund’s rate of return.

 

5


Table of Contents

Liquidity and Valuation. To the extent that there is no established retail secondary market, there may be thin trading of high yield bonds, and this may impact a Sub-Advisor’s ability to accurately value high yield bonds and a Fund’s assets and hinder a Fund’s ability to dispose of the bonds. Adverse publicity and investor perceptions, whether or not based on fundamental analysis, may decrease the values and liquidity of high yield bonds, especially in a thinly traded market.

Credit Ratings. Credit ratings evaluate the safety of principal and interest payments, not the market value risk of high yield bonds. Also, since credit rating agencies may fail to timely change the credit ratings to reflect subsequent events, a Sub-Advisor must monitor the issuers of high yield bonds in a Fund’s portfolio to determine if the issuers will have sufficient cash flow and profits to meet required principal and interest payments, and to assure the bonds’ liquidity so a Fund can meet redemption requests. A Fund will not necessarily dispose of a portfolio security when its rating has been changed.

Exchange-Traded Notes

The Funds may invest in exchange-traded notes (“ETNs”). ETNs are senior, unsecured, unsubordinated debt securities whose returns are linked to the performance of a particular market benchmark or strategy minus applicable fees. ETNs are traded on an exchange ( e.g., the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”)) during normal trading hours. However, investors can also hold the ETN until maturity. At maturity, the issuer pays to the investor a cash amount equal to the principal amount, subject to the day’s market benchmark or strategy factor.

ETNs do not make periodic coupon payments or provide principal protection. ETNs are subject to credit risk and the value of the ETN may drop due to a downgrade in the issuer’s credit rating, despite the underlying market benchmark or strategy remaining unchanged. The value of an ETN may also be influenced by time to maturity, level of supply and demand for the ETN, volatility and lack of liquidity in underlying assets, changes in the applicable interest rates, changes in the issuer’s credit rating, and economic, legal, political, or geographic events that affect the referenced underlying asset. When a Fund invests in ETNs, it will bear its proportionate share of any fees and expenses borne by the ETN. A Fund’s decision to sell its ETN holdings may be limited by the availability of a secondary market. In addition, although an ETN may be listed on an exchange, the issuer may not be required to maintain the listing and there can be no assurance that a secondary market will exist for an ETN.

ETNs are also subject to tax risk. The tax treatment of ETNs is unclear. No statutory, juridical or administrative authority directly discusses how ETNs should be treated in this context for U.S. federal income tax purposes. No assurance can be given that the Internal Revenue Service (the “IRS”) will accept, or a court will uphold, how the Fund characterizes and treats ETNs for tax purposes. Further, the IRS and Congress are considering proposals that would change the timing and character of income and gains from ETNs.

An ETN that is tied to a specific market benchmark or strategy may not be able to replicate and maintain exactly the composition and relative weighting of securities, commodities or other components in the applicable market benchmark or strategy. Some ETNs that use leverage can, at times, be relatively illiquid and, thus, they may be difficult to purchase or sell at a fair price. Leveraged ETNs are subject to the same risk as other instruments that use leverage in any form.

The market value of ETN shares may differ from their market benchmark or strategy. This difference in price may be due to the fact that the supply and demand in the market for ETN shares at any point in time is not always identical to the supply and demand in the market for the securities, commodities or other components underlying the market benchmark or strategy that the ETN seeks to track. As a result, there may be times when an ETN share trades at a premium or discount to its market benchmark or strategy.

Short-Term Investments

Each Fund may invest in any of the following short-term securities and instruments:

 

6


Table of Contents

Bank Certificates or Deposits, Bankers’ Acceptances and Time Deposits. Each Fund may acquire certificates of deposit, bankers’ acceptances and time deposits. Certificates of deposit are negotiable certificates issued against funds deposited in a commercial bank for a definite period of time and earning a specified return. Bankers’ acceptances are negotiable drafts or bills of exchange, normally drawn by an importer or exporter to pay for specific merchandise, which are “accepted” by a bank, meaning in effect that the bank unconditionally agrees to pay the face value of the instrument on maturity. Certificates of deposit and bankers’ acceptances acquired by a Fund will be dollar-denominated obligations of domestic or foreign banks or financial institutions which at the time of purchase have capital, surplus and undivided profits in excess of $100 million (including assets of both domestic and foreign branches), based on latest published reports, or less than $100 million if the principal amount of such bank obligations are fully insured by the U.S. Government. If a Fund holds instruments of foreign banks or financial institutions, it may be subject to additional investment risks that are different in some respects from those incurred by a fund that invests only in debt obligations of U.S. domestic issuers. See “Foreign Investments” below. Such risks include those related to future political and economic developments, the possible imposition of withholding taxes by the particular country in which the issuer is located on interest income payable on the securities, the possible seizure or nationalization of foreign deposits, the possible establishment of exchange controls and the possible adoption of other foreign governmental restrictions that might adversely affect the payment of principal and interest on these securities.

Domestic banks and foreign banks are subject to different governmental regulations with respect to the amount and types of loans that may be made and interest rates that may be charged. In addition, the profitability of the banking industry depends largely upon the availability and cost of funds for the purpose of financing lending operations under prevailing money market conditions. General economic conditions as well as exposure to credit losses arising from possible financial difficulties of borrowers play an important part in the operations of the banking industry.

As a result of federal and state laws and regulations, domestic banks are, among other things, required to maintain specified levels of reserves, limited in the amount they can loan to a single borrower, and subject to other regulations designed to promote financial soundness. However, such laws and regulations do not necessarily apply to foreign bank obligations that a Fund may acquire.

In addition to purchasing certificates of deposit and bankers’ acceptances, to the extent permitted under its investment objectives and policies stated above and in its prospectus, a Fund may make interest-bearing time or other interest-bearing deposits in commercial or savings banks. Time deposits are non-negotiable deposits maintained at a banking institution for a specified period of time at a specified interest rate.

Savings Association Obligations. Each Fund may invest in certificates of deposit (interest-bearing time deposits) issued by savings banks or savings and loan associations that have capital, surplus and undivided profits in excess of $100 million, based on latest published reports, or less than $100 million if the principal amount of such obligations is fully insured by the U.S. Government.

Commercial Paper, Short-Term Notes and Other Corporate Obligations.  Each Fund may invest a portion of its assets in commercial paper and short-term notes. Commercial paper consists of unsecured promissory notes issued by corporations. Issues of commercial paper and short-term notes will normally have maturities of less than nine months and fixed rates of return, although such instruments may have maturities of up to one year.

Commercial paper and short-term notes in which a Fund may invest will consist of issues rated at the time of purchase “AA-2” or higher by S&P, “Prime-1” or “Prime-2” by Moody’s, or similarly rated by another nationally recognized statistical rating organization or, if unrated, will be determined by a Sub-Advisor to be of comparable quality. These rating symbols are described in Appendix A.

 

7


Table of Contents

Corporate obligations include bonds and notes issued by corporations to finance longer-term credit needs than supported by commercial paper. While such obligations generally have maturities of ten years or more, a Fund may purchase corporate obligations that have remaining maturities of one year or less from the date of purchase and that are rated “AA” or higher by S&P or “Aa” or higher by Moody’s.

Loan Participations and Assignments (Bank Debt) (Alternative Strategies Fund)

The Alternative Strategies Fund may invest in bank debt, which includes interests in loans to companies or their affiliates undertaken to finance a capital restructuring or in connection with recapitalizations, acquisitions, leveraged buyouts, refinancings or other financially leveraged transactions and may include loans which are designed to provide temporary or bridge financing to a borrower pending the sale of identified assets, the arrangement of longer-term loans or the issuance and sale of debt obligations. These loans, which may bear fixed or floating rates, have generally been arranged through private negotiations between a corporate borrower and one or more financial institutions (“Lenders”), including banks. The Fund’s investment may be in the form of participations in loans (“Participations”) or of assignments of all or a portion of loans from third parties (“Assignments”).

The Fund has the right to receive payments of principal, interest and any fees to which it is entitled only from the Lender selling a Participation and only upon receipt by the Lender of the payments from the borrower. In connection with purchasing Participations, the Fund generally will have no right to enforce compliance by the borrower with the terms of the loan agreement relating to the loan, nor any rights of set-off against the borrower, and the Fund may not benefit directly from any collateral supporting the loan in which it has purchased the Participation. Thus, the Fund assumes the credit risk of both the borrower and the Lender that is selling the Participation. In addition, in connection with purchasing Participations, the Fund generally will have no role in terms of negotiating or effecting amendments, waivers and consents with respect to the loans underlying the Participations. In the event of the insolvency of the Lender, the Fund may be treated as a general creditor of the Lender and may not benefit from any set-off between the Lender and the borrower.

In certain cases, the rights and obligations acquired by the Fund through the purchase of an Assignment may differ from, and be more limited than, those held by the assigning selling institution. Assignments are sold strictly without recourse to the selling institutions, and the selling institutions will generally make no representations or warranties to the Fund about the underlying loan, the borrowers, the documentation of the loans or any collateral securing the loans.

Investments in Participations and Assignments involve additional risks, including the risk of nonpayment of principal and interest by the borrower, the risk that any loan collateral may become impaired and that the Fund may obtain less than the full value for the loan interests sold because they may be illiquid. Purchasers of loans depend primarily upon the creditworthiness of the borrower for payment of interest and repayment of principal. If scheduled interest or principal payments are not made, the value of the instrument may be adversely affected.

Investments in loans through direct assignment of a financial institution’s interests with respect to a loan may involve additional risks. For example, if a loan is foreclosed, the Fund could become part owner of any collateral, and would bear the costs and liabilities associated with owning and disposing of the collateral.

A loan is often administered by a bank or other financial institution that acts as agent for all holders. The agent administers the terms of the loan, as specified in the loan agreement. Unless, under the terms of the loan or other indebtedness, the Fund has direct recourse against the borrower, the Fund may have to rely on the agent to apply appropriate credit remedies against a borrower. If assets held by the agent for the benefit of the Fund were determined to be subject to the claims of the agent’s general creditors, the Fund might incur certain costs and delays in realizing payment on the loan or loan participation and could suffer a loss of principal or interest.

 

8


Table of Contents

Interests in loans are also subject to additional liquidity risks. Loans are generally subject to legal or contractual restrictions on resale. Loans are not currently listed on any securities exchange or automatic quotation system, but are traded by banks and other institutional investors engaged in loan syndication. As a result, no active market may exist for some loans, and to the extent a secondary market exists for other loans, such market may be subject to irregular trading activity, wide bid/ask spreads and extended trade settlement periods. Consequently, the Fund may have difficulty disposing of Assignments or Participations in response to a specific economic event such as deterioration in the creditworthiness of the borrower, which can result in a loss. In such market situations, it may be more difficult for the Fund to assign a value to Assignments or Participations when valuing the Fund’s securities and calculating its net asset value (“NAV”).

The Alternative Strategies Fund limits the amount of its assets that it will invest in any one issuer or in issuers within the same industry (see “Investment Restrictions” below). For purposes of these limits, the Fund will generally treat the corporate borrower as the “issuer” of indebtedness held by the Fund. In the case of Participations where a bank or other lending institution serves as a financial intermediary between the Fund and the corporate borrower, if the Participation does not shift to the Fund the direct debtor-creditor relationship with the corporate borrower, Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) interpretations require the Fund, in appropriate circumstances, to treat both the lending bank or other lending institution and the corporate borrower as “issuers” for the purpose of determining whether the Fund has invested more than 5% of its total assets in a single issuer. Treating a financial intermediary as an issuer of indebtedness may restrict the Fund’s ability to invest in indebtedness related to a single financial intermediary, or a group of intermediaries engaged in the same industry, even if the underlying borrowers represent many different companies and industries.

Money Market Funds

Each Fund may under certain circumstances invest a portion of its assets in money market funds. The 1940 Act generally prohibits a Fund from investing more than 5% of the value of its total assets in any one investment company or more than 10% of the value of its total assets in investment companies as a group, and also restricts its investment in any investment company to 3% of the voting securities of such investment company. There are some exceptions, however, to these limitations pursuant to various rules promulgated by the SEC. The Advisor and the Sub-Advisors will not impose advisory fees on assets of a Fund invested in a money market mutual fund. However, an investment in a money market mutual fund will involve payment by a Fund of its pro rata share of advisory and administrative fees charged by such fund.

Municipal Securities (Alternative Strategies Fund)

The Alternative Strategies Fund may invest in municipal securities. Municipal securities are issued by the states, territories and possessions of the United States, their political subdivisions (such as cities, counties and towns) and various authorities (such as public housing or redevelopment authorities), instrumentalities, public corporations and special districts (such as water, sewer or sanitary districts) of the states, territories, and possessions of the United States or their political subdivisions. In addition, municipal securities include securities issued by or on behalf of public authorities to finance various privately operated facilities, such as industrial development bonds, that are backed only by the assets and revenues of the non-governmental user (such as hospitals and airports).

Municipal securities are issued to obtain funds for a variety of public purposes, including general financing for state and local governments, or financing for specific projects or public facilities. Municipal securities are classified as general obligation or revenue bonds or notes. General obligation securities are secured by the issuer’s

 

9


Table of Contents

pledge of its full faith, credit and taxing power for the payment of principal and interest. Revenue securities are payable from revenue derived from a particular facility, class of facilities, or the proceeds of a special excise tax or other specific revenue source, but not from the issuer’s general taxing power. The Fund will not invest more than 25% of its total assets in a single type of revenue bond. Private activity bonds and industrial revenue bonds do not carry the pledge of the credit of the issuing municipality, but generally are guaranteed by the corporate entity on whose behalf they are issued.

Shareholders of the Alternative Strategies Fund should be aware that certain deductions and exemptions may be designated “tax preference items,” which must be added back to taxable income for purposes of calculating a shareholder’s federal alternative minimum tax (“AMT”), if applicable to such shareholder. Tax preference items may include tax-exempt interest on private activity bonds. To the extent that the Alternative Strategies Fund invests in private activity bonds, its shareholders may be required to report that portion of the Fund’s distributions attributable to income from the bonds as a tax preference item in determining their federal AMT, if any. Shareholders are encouraged to consult their tax advisors in this regard.

Municipal leases are entered into by state and local governments and authorities to acquire equipment and facilities such as fire and sanitation vehicles, telecommunications equipment, and other assets. Municipal leases (which normally provide for title to the leased assets to pass eventually to the government issuer) have evolved as a means for governmental issuers to acquire property and equipment without meeting the constitutional and statutory requirements for the issuance of debt. The debt-issuance limitations of many state constitutions and statutes are deemed to be inapplicable because of the inclusion in many leases or contracts of “non-appropriation” clauses that provide that the governmental issuer has no obligation to make future payments under the lease or contract unless money is appropriated for such purpose by the appropriate legislative body on a yearly or other periodic basis.

Government Obligations

Each Fund may make short-term investments in U.S. Government obligations. Such obligations include Treasury bills, certificates of indebtedness, notes and bonds, and issues of such entities as the Government National Mortgage Association (“GNMA”), Export-Import Bank of the United States, Tennessee Valley Authority, Resolution Funding Corporation, Farmers Home Administration, Federal Home Loan Banks, Federal Intermediate Credit Banks, Federal Farm Credit Banks, Federal Land Banks, Federal Housing Administration, Federal National Mortgage Association (“FNMA”), Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (“FHLMC”), and the Student Loan Marketing Association (“SLMA”).

Some of these obligations, such as those of the GNMA, are supported by the full faith and credit of the U.S. Treasury; others, such as those of the Export-Import Bank of United States, are supported by the right of the issuer to borrow from the Treasury; others, such as those of the FNMA, are supported by the discretionary authority of the U.S. Government to purchase the agency’s obligations; still others, such as those of the SLMA, are supported only by the credit of the instrumentality. No assurance can be given that the U.S. Government would provide financial support to U.S. Government-sponsored instrumentalities if it is not obligated to do so by law.

Each Fund may invest in sovereign debt obligations of foreign countries. A sovereign debtor’s willingness or ability to repay principal and interest in a timely manner may be affected by a number of factors, including its cash flow situation, the extent of its foreign reserves, the availability of sufficient foreign exchange on the date a payment is due, the relative size of the debt service burden to the economy as a whole, the sovereign debtor’s policy toward principal international lenders and the political constraints to which it may be subject. Emerging market governments could default on their sovereign debt. Such sovereign debtors also may be dependent on expected disbursements from foreign governments, multilateral agencies and other entities abroad to reduce principal and interest arrearages on their debt. The commitments on the part of these governments, agencies and others to make such disbursements may be conditioned on a sovereign debtor’s implementation of economic reforms and/or economic performance and the timely service of such debtor’s obligations. Failure to meet such conditions could result in the cancellation of such third parties’ commitments to lend funds to the sovereign debtor, which may further impair such debtor’s ability or willingness to service its debt in a timely manner.

 

10


Table of Contents

Zero Coupon Securities

Each Fund may invest up to 35% of its net assets in zero coupon securities issued by the U.S. Treasury. Zero coupon Treasury securities are U.S. Treasury notes and bonds that have been stripped of their unmatured interest coupons and receipts, or certificates representing interests in such stripped debt obligations or coupons. Because a zero coupon security pays no interest to its holder during its life or for a substantial period of time, it usually trades at a deep discount from its face or par value and will be subject to greater fluctuations of market value in response to changing interest rates than debt obligations of comparable maturities that make current distributions of interest.

Variable and Floating Rate Instruments

Each Fund may acquire variable and floating rate instruments. Such instruments are frequently not rated by credit rating agencies; however, unrated variable and floating rate instruments purchased by a Fund will be determined by a Sub-Advisor under guidelines established by the Board to be of comparable quality at the time of the purchase to rated instruments eligible for purchase by a Fund. In making such determinations, a Sub-Advisor will consider the earning power, cash flow and other liquidity ratios of the issuers of such instruments (such issuers include financial, merchandising, bank holding and other companies) and will monitor their financial condition. An active secondary market may not exist with respect to particular variable or floating rate instruments purchased by a Fund. The absence of such an active secondary market could make it difficult for a Fund to dispose of the variable or floating rate instrument involved in the event that the issuer of the instrument defaults on its payment obligation or during periods in which a Fund is not entitled to exercise its demand rights, and a Fund could, for these or other reasons, suffer a loss to the extent of the default. Variable and floating rate instruments may be secured by bank letters of credit.

Asset-Backed Securities (Alternative Strategies Fund)

The Alternative Strategies Fund may invest in asset-backed securities. Asset-backed securities are securities issued by trusts and special purpose entities that are backed by pools of assets, such as automobile and credit-card receivables and home equity loans, which pass through the payments on the underlying obligations to the security holders (less servicing fees paid to the originator or fees for any credit enhancement). Typically, the originator of the loan or accounts receivable paper transfers it to a specially created trust, which repackages it as securities with a minimum denomination and a specific term. The securities are then privately placed or publicly offered. For example, the Fund may invest in collateralized debt obligations (“CDOs”), which include collateralized bond obligations (“CBOs”), collateralized loan obligations (“CLOs”), and other similarly structured entities. CBOs and CLOs are types of asset-backed securities. A CBO is a trust, which is backed by a diversified pool of high-risk, below investment grade fixed-income securities. A CLO is a trust typically collateralized by a pool of loans, which may include, among others, domestic and foreign senior secured loans, senior unsecured loans, and subordinate corporate loans, including loans that may be rated below investment grade or equivalent unrated loans.

The value of an asset-backed security is affected by, among other things, changes in the market’s perception of the asset backing the security, the creditworthiness of the servicing agent for the loan pool, the originator of the loans and the financial institution providing any credit enhancement. Payments of principal and interest passed through to holders of asset-backed securities are frequently supported by some form of credit enhancement, such as a letter of credit, surety bond, limited guarantee by another entity or by having a priority to certain of the borrower’s other assets. The degree of credit enhancement varies, and generally applies to only a portion of the asset-backed security’s par value. Value is also affected if any credit enhancement has been exhausted.

 

11


Table of Contents

Mortgage-Related Securities

Each Fund may invest in mortgage-related securities. Mortgage-related securities are derivative interests in pools of mortgage loans made to U.S. residential home buyers, including mortgage loans made by savings and loan institutions, mortgage bankers, commercial banks and others. Pools of mortgage loans are assembled as securities for sale to investors by various governmental, government-related and private organizations. Each Fund may also invest in debt securities which are secured with collateral consisting of U.S. mortgage-related securities, and in other types of U.S. mortgage-related securities.

The effects of the sub-prime mortgage crisis that began to unfold in 2007 continue to manifest in nearly all sub-divisions of the financial services industry. Sub-prime mortgage-related losses and write downs among investment banks and similar institutions reached significant levels in 2008. The impact of these losses among traditional banks, investment banks, broker-dealers and insurers has forced a number of such institutions into either liquidation or combination, while also drastically increasing the volatility of their stock prices. In some cases, the U.S. government has acted to bail out select institutions, such as insurers; however the risks associated with investment in stocks of such insurers has nonetheless increased substantially.

While the U.S. Department of the Treasury, Federal Reserve Board and Congress have taken steps to address problems in the financial markets and with financial institutions, there can be no assurance that the risks associated with investments in financial services company issuers will decrease as a result of these steps.

U.S. Mortgage Pass-Through Securities. Interests in pools of mortgage-related securities differ from other forms of debt securities, which normally provide for periodic payment of interest in fixed amounts with principal payments at maturity or specified call dates. Instead, these securities provide a monthly payment that consists of both interest and principal payments. In effect, these payments are a “pass-through” of the monthly payments made by the individual borrowers on their residential mortgage loans, net of any fees paid to the issuer or guarantor of such securities. Additional payments are caused by repayments of principal resulting from the sale of the underlying residential property, refinancing or foreclosure, net of fees or costs which may be incurred. Some mortgage-related securities (such as securities issued by GNMA) are described as “modified pass-throughs.” These securities entitle the holder to receive all interest and principal payments owed on the mortgage pool, net of certain fees, at the scheduled payment dates regardless of whether or not the mortgagor actually makes the payment.

The principal governmental guarantor of U.S. mortgage-related securities is GNMA, a wholly-owned United States Government corporation within the Department of Housing and Urban Development. GNMA is authorized to guarantee, with the full faith and credit of the United States Government, the timely payment of principal and interest on securities issued by institutions approved by GNMA (such as savings and loan institutions, commercial banks and mortgage bankers) and backed by pools of mortgages insured by the Federal Housing Agency or guaranteed by the Veterans Administration.

Government-related guarantors include FNMA and FHLMC. FNMA is a government-sponsored corporation owned entirely by private stockholders and subject to general regulation by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development. FNMA purchases conventional residential mortgages not insured or guaranteed by any government agency from a list of approved seller/services which include state and federally chartered savings and loan associations, mutual savings banks, commercial banks and credit unions and mortgage bankers. FHLMC is a government-sponsored corporation created to increase availability of mortgage credit for residential housing and owned entirely by private stockholders. FHLMC issues participation certificates which represent interests in conventional mortgages from FHLMC’s national portfolio. Pass-through securities issued by FNMA and participation certificates issued by FHLMC are guaranteed as to timely payment of principal and interest by FNMA and FHLMC, respectively, but are not backed by the full faith and credit of the United States Government.

 

12


Table of Contents

Although the underlying mortgage loans in a pool may have maturities of up to 30 years, the actual average life of the pool certificates typically will be substantially less because the mortgages will be subject to normal principal amortization and may be prepaid prior to maturity. Prepayment rates vary widely and may be affected by changes in market interest rates. In periods of falling interest rates, the rate of prepayment tends to increase, thereby shortening the actual average life of the pool certificates. Conversely, when interest rates are rising, the rate of prepayments tends to decrease, thereby lengthening the actual average life of the certificates. Accordingly, it is not possible to predict accurately the average life of a particular pool.

Collateralized Mortgage Obligations (“CMOs”). A domestic or foreign CMO in which a Fund may invest is a hybrid between a mortgage-backed bond and a mortgage pass-through security. Like a bond, interest is paid, in most cases, semiannually. CMOs may be collateralized by whole mortgage loans, but are more typically collateralized by portfolios of mortgage pass-through securities guaranteed by GNMA, FHLMC, FNMA or equivalent foreign entities.

CMOs are structured into multiple classes, each bearing a different stated maturity. Actual maturity and average life depend upon the prepayment experience of the collateral. CMOs provide for a modified form of call protection through a de facto breakdown of the underlying pool of mortgages according to how quickly the loans are repaid. Monthly payment of principal and interest received from the pool of underlying mortgages, including prepayments, is first returned to the class having the earliest maturity date or highest maturity. Classes that have longer maturity dates and lower seniority will receive principal only after the higher class has been retired.

Real Estate Investment Trusts (Alternative Strategies Fund)

The Alternative Strategies Fund may invest in real estate investment trusts (“REITs”). REITs are pooled investment vehicles that invest primarily in either real estate or real estate-related loans. REITs involve certain unique risks in addition to those risks associated with investing in the real estate industry in general (such as possible declines in the value of real estate, lack of availability of mortgage funds, or extended vacancies of property). Equity REITs may be affected by changes in the value of the underlying property owned by the REITs, while mortgage REITs may be affected by the quality of any credit extended and changes in interest rates. REITs whose underlying assets are concentrated in properties used by a particular industry, such as health care, are also subject to risks associated with such industry. REITs are dependent upon management skills, are not diversified, and are subject to heavy cash flow dependency, risks of default by borrowers, and self-liquidation. REITs are also subject to the possibilities of failing to qualify for preferential tax treatment under the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), and failing to maintain their exemptions from registration under the 1940 Act.

REITs (especially mortgage REITs) are also subject to interest rate risks, including prepayment risk. When interest rates decline, the value of a REIT’s investment in fixed rate obligations can be expected to rise. Conversely, when interest rates rise, the value of a REIT’s investment in fixed rate obligations can be expected to decline. If the REIT invests in adjustable rate mortgage loans the interest rates on which are reset periodically, yields on a REIT’s investments in such loans will gradually align themselves to reflect changes in market interest rates. This causes the value of such investments to fluctuate less dramatically in response to interest rate fluctuations than would investments in fixed rate obligations. REITs may have limited financial resources, may trade less frequently and in a limited volume, and may be subject to more abrupt or erratic price movements than more widely held securities. The Fund’s investment in a REIT may require the Fund to accrue and distribute income not yet received or may result in the Fund making distributions that constitute a return of capital to Fund shareholders for federal income tax purposes. In addition, distributions by the Fund from REITs will not qualify for the corporate dividends-received deduction, or, generally, for treatment as qualified dividend income.

Investments in REITs by the Alternative Strategies Fund may subject its shareholders to multiple levels of fees and expenses as Fund shareholders will directly bear the fees and expenses of the Fund and will also indirectly bear a portion of the fees and expenses of the REITs in which the Fund invests.

 

13


Table of Contents

Foreign Investments and Currencies

Each Fund may invest in securities of foreign issuers that are not publicly traded in the United States (the International Fund will invest substantially all of its assets in securities of foreign issuers). Each Fund may also invest in depositary receipts and in foreign currency futures contracts and may purchase and sell foreign currency on a spot basis.

Depositary Receipts. Depositary Receipts (“DRs”) include American Depositary Receipts (“ADRs”), European Depositary Receipts (“EDRs”), Global Depositary Receipts (“GDRs”) or other forms of depositary receipts. DRs are receipts typically issued in connection with a U.S. or foreign bank or trust company which evidence ownership of underlying securities issued by a foreign corporation.

Forward Foreign Currency Exchange Contracts (Alternative Strategies Fund).  The Alternative Strategies Fund may use forward foreign currency exchange contracts for hedging purposes as well as investment purposes. A forward foreign currency contract involves an obligation to purchase or sell a specific amount of currency at a future date or date range at a specific price. In the case of a cancelable forward contract, the holder has the unilateral right to cancel the contract at maturity by paying a specified fee. Forward foreign currency exchange contracts differ from foreign currency futures contracts in certain respects. Unlike futures contracts, forward contracts:

 

    Do not have standard maturity dates or amounts ( i.e. , the parties to the contract may fix the maturity date and the amount).

 

    Are traded in the inter-bank markets conducted directly between currency traders (usually large commercial banks) and their customers, as opposed to futures contracts which are traded only on exchanges regulated by the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (“CFTC”).

 

    Do not require an initial margin deposit.

 

    May be closed by entering into a closing transaction with the currency trader who is a party to the original forward contract, as opposed to a commodities exchange.

Foreign Currency Hedging Strategies (Alternative Strategies Fund).  A “settlement hedge” or “transaction hedge” is designed to protect the Fund against an adverse change in foreign currency values between the date a security is purchased or sold and the date on which payment is made or received. Entering into a forward contract for the purchase or sale of the amount of foreign currency involved in an underlying security transaction for a fixed amount of U.S. dollars “locks in” the U.S. dollar price of the security. The Fund may also use forward contracts to purchase or sell a foreign currency when it anticipates purchasing or selling securities denominated in foreign currency, even if it has not yet selected the specific investments.

The Fund may use forward contracts to hedge against a decline in the value of existing investments denominated in foreign currency. Such a hedge, sometimes referred to as a “position hedge,” would tend to offset both positive and negative currency fluctuations, but would not offset changes in security values caused by other factors. The Fund could also hedge the position by selling another currency expected to perform similarly to the currency in which the Fund’s investment is denominated. This type of hedge, sometimes referred to as a “proxy hedge,” could offer advantages in terms of cost, yield, or efficiency, but generally would not hedge currency exposure as effectively as a direct hedge into U.S. dollars. Proxy hedges may result in losses if the currency used to hedge does not perform similarly to the currency in which the hedged securities are denominated.

 

14


Table of Contents

Transaction and position hedging do not eliminate fluctuations in the underlying prices of the securities that the Fund owns or intends to purchase or sell. They simply establish a rate of exchange that one can achieve at some future point in time. Additionally, these techniques tend to minimize the risk of loss due to a decline in the value of the hedged currency and to limit any potential gain that might result from the increase in value of such currency.

The Fund may enter into forward contracts to shift its investment exposure from one currency into another. Such transactions may call for the delivery of one foreign currency in exchange for another foreign currency, including currencies in which its securities are not then denominated. This may include shifting exposure from U.S. dollars to a foreign currency, or from one foreign currency to another foreign currency. This type of strategy, sometimes known as a “cross-hedge,” will tend to reduce or eliminate exposure to the currency that is sold, and increase exposure to the currency that is purchased. Cross-hedges protect against losses resulting from a decline in the hedged currency, but will cause the Fund to assume the risk of fluctuations in the value of the currency it purchases. Cross hedging transactions also involve the risk of imperfect correlation between changes in the values of the currencies involved.

It is difficult to forecast with precision the market value of portfolio securities at the expiration or maturity of a forward or futures contract. Accordingly, the Fund may have to purchase additional foreign currency on the spot market if the market value of a security it is hedging is less than the amount of foreign currency it is obligated to deliver. Conversely, the Fund may have to sell on the spot market some of the foreign currency it received upon the sale of a security if the market value of such security exceeds the amount of foreign currency it is obligated to deliver.

Risks of Investing in Foreign Securities. Investments in foreign securities involve certain inherent risks, including the following:

Political and Economic Factors. Individual foreign economies of certain countries may differ favorably or unfavorably from the United States’ economy in such respects as growth of gross national product, rate of inflation, capital reinvestment, resource self-sufficiency, diversification and balance of payments position. The internal politics of certain foreign countries may not be as stable as those of the United States. Governments in certain foreign countries also continue to participate to a significant degree, through ownership interest or regulation, in their respective economies. Action by these governments could include restrictions on foreign investment, nationalization, expropriation of goods or imposition of taxes, and could have a significant effect on market prices of securities and payment of interest. The economies of many foreign countries are heavily dependent upon international trade and are accordingly affected by the trade policies and economic conditions of their trading partners. Enactment by these trading partners of protectionist trade legislation could have a significant adverse effect upon the securities markets of such countries.

The European financial markets have continued to experience volatility because of concerns about economic downturns and about high and rising government debt levels of several countries in the European Union and Europe generally. These events have adversely affected the exchange rate of the Euro and the European securities markets, and may spread to other countries in Europe, including countries that do not use the Euro. These events may affect the value and liquidity of certain of the Funds’ investments. Responses to the financial problems by European Union governments, central banks and others, including austerity measures and reforms, may not work, may result in social unrest and may limit future growth and economic recovery or have other unintended consequences. Further defaults or restructurings by governments and others of their debt could have additional adverse effects on economies, financial markets and asset valuations around the world.

In a public referendum in June 2016, the United Kingdom voted to leave the European Union (a process now commonly referred to as “Brexit”). As a result of and based on the pronouncements of the United Kingdom government, it is probable that negotiations will take place to determine the terms of the United Kingdom’s departure from, and of its new political and economic relationship with, the European Union. This could lead to a period of significant uncertainty and increased volatility in both U.S. and global securities and currency markets. In addition to concerns related to the effect of Brexit, that referendum may inspire similar initiatives in other European Union member countries, producing further risks for global financial markets.

 

15


Table of Contents

Currency Fluctuations. Each Fund may invest in securities denominated in foreign currencies. Accordingly, a change in the value of any such currency against the U.S. dollar will result in a corresponding change in the U.S. dollar value of a Fund’s assets denominated in that currency. Such changes will also affect a Fund’s income. The value of a Fund’s assets may also be affected significantly by currency restrictions and exchange control regulations enacted from time to time.

Market Characteristics. The Sub-Advisors expect that many foreign securities in which a Fund invests will be purchased in over-the-counter markets or on exchanges located in the countries in which the principal offices of the issuers of the various securities are located, if that is the best available market. Foreign exchanges and markets may be more volatile than those in the United States. While growing in volume, they usually have substantially less volume than U.S. markets, and a Fund’s portfolio securities may be less liquid and more volatile than U.S. Government securities. Moreover, settlement practices for transactions in foreign markets may differ from those in United States markets, and may include delays beyond periods customary in the United States. Foreign security trading practices, including those involving securities settlement where Fund assets may be released prior to receipt of payment or securities, may expose a Fund to increased risk in the event of a failed trade or the insolvency of a foreign broker-dealer.

Transactions in options on securities, futures contracts, futures options and currency contracts may not be regulated as effectively on foreign exchanges as similar transactions in the United States, and may not involve clearing mechanisms and related guarantees. The value of such positions also could be adversely affected by the imposition of different exercise terms and procedures and margin requirements than in the United States. The value of a Fund’s positions may also be adversely impacted by delays in its ability to act upon economic events occurring in foreign markets during non-business hours in the United States.

Legal and Regulatory Matters. Certain foreign countries may have less supervision of securities markets, brokers and issuers of securities, and less financial information available to issuers, than is available in the United States.

Taxes. The interest payable on certain of a Fund’s foreign portfolio securities may be subject to foreign withholding or other taxes, thus reducing the net amount of income available for distribution to a Fund’s shareholders.

Costs. To the extent that each Fund invests in foreign securities, its expense ratio is likely to be higher than those of investment companies investing only in domestic securities, since the cost of maintaining the custody of foreign securities is higher.

Emerging markets. Some of the securities in which each Fund may invest may be located in developing or emerging markets, which entail additional risks, including less social, political and economic stability; smaller securities markets and lower trading volume, which may result in a less liquidity and greater price volatility; national policies that may restrict a Fund’s investment opportunities, including restrictions on investment in issuers or industries, or expropriation or confiscation of assets or property; and less developed legal structures governing private or foreign investment.

In considering whether to invest in the securities of a foreign company, a Sub-Advisor considers such factors as the characteristics of the particular company, differences between economic trends and the performance of securities markets within the U.S. and those within other countries, and also factors relating to the general economic, governmental and social conditions of the country or countries where the company is located. The extent to which a Fund will be invested in foreign companies and countries and depository receipts will fluctuate from time to time within the limitations described in the prospectus, depending on a Sub-Advisor’s assessment of prevailing market, economic and other conditions.

 

16


Table of Contents

Options on Securities and Securities Indices

Purchasing Put and Call Options. Each Fund may purchase covered “put” and “call” options with respect to securities which are otherwise eligible for purchase by a Fund and with respect to various stock indices subject to certain restrictions. Each Fund will engage in trading of such derivative securities primarily for hedging purposes.

If a Fund purchases a put option, a Fund acquires the right to sell the underlying security at a specified price at any time during the term of the option (for “American-style” options) or on the option expiration date (for “European-style” options). Purchasing put options may be used as a portfolio investment strategy when a Sub-Advisor perceives significant short-term risk but substantial long-term appreciation for the underlying security. The put option acts as an insurance policy, as it protects against significant downward price movement while it allows full participation in any upward movement. If a Fund is holding a stock which it feels has strong fundamentals, but for some reason may be weak in the near term, a Fund may purchase a put option on such security, thereby giving itself the right to sell such security at a certain strike price throughout the term of the option. Consequently, a Fund will exercise the put only if the price of such security falls below the strike price of the put. The difference between the put’s strike price and the market price of the underlying security on the date a Fund exercises the put, less transaction costs, will be the amount by which a Fund will be able to hedge against a decline in the underlying security. If during the period of the option the market price for the underlying security remains at or above the put’s strike price, the put will expire worthless, representing a loss of the price a Fund paid for the put, plus transaction costs. If the price of the underlying security increases, the profit a Fund realizes on the sale of the security will be reduced by the premium paid for the put option less any amount for which the put may be sold.

If a Fund purchases a call option, it acquires the right to purchase the underlying security at a specified price at any time during the term of the option. The purchase of a call option is a type of insurance policy to hedge against losses that could occur if a Fund has a short position in the underlying security and the security thereafter increases in price. Each Fund will exercise a call option only if the price of the underlying security is above the strike price at the time of exercise. If during the option period the market price for the underlying security remains at or below the strike price of the call option, the option will expire worthless, representing a loss of the price paid for the option, plus transaction costs. If the call option has been purchased to hedge a short position of a Fund in the underlying security and the price of the underlying security thereafter falls, the profit a Fund realizes on the cover of the short position in the security will be reduced by the premium paid for the call option less any amount for which such option may be sold.

Prior to exercise or expiration, an option may be sold when it has remaining value by a purchaser through a “closing sale transaction,” which is accomplished by selling an option of the same series as the option previously purchased. Each Fund generally will purchase only those options for which a Sub-Advisor believes there is an active secondary market to facilitate closing transactions.

Writing Call Options. Each Fund may write covered call options. A call option is “covered” if a Fund owns the security underlying the call or has an absolute right to acquire the security without additional cash consideration (or, if additional cash consideration is required, cash or cash equivalents in such amount as are held in a segregated account by the Custodian). The writer of a call option receives a premium and gives the purchaser the right to buy the security underlying the option at the exercise price. The writer has the obligation upon exercise of the option to deliver the underlying security against payment of the exercise price during the option period. If the writer of an exchange-traded option wishes to terminate his obligation, he may effect a “closing purchase transaction.” This is accomplished by buying an option of the same series as the option previously written. A writer may not effect a closing purchase transaction after it has been notified of the exercise of an option.

 

17


Table of Contents

Effecting a closing transaction in the case of a written call option will permit a Fund to write another call option on the underlying security with either a different exercise price, expiration date or both. Also, effecting a closing transaction will permit the cash or proceeds from the concurrent sale of any securities subject to the option to be used for other investments of a Fund. If a Fund desires to sell a particular security from its portfolio on which it has written a call option, it will effect a closing transaction prior to or concurrent with the sale of the security.

Each Fund will realize a gain from a closing transaction if the cost of the closing transaction is less than the premium received from writing the option or if the proceeds from the closing transaction are more than the premium paid to purchase the option. Each Fund will realize a loss from a closing transaction if the cost of the closing transaction is more than the premium received from writing the option or if the proceeds from the closing transaction are less than the premium paid to purchase the option. However, because increases in the market price of a call option will generally reflect increases in the market price of the underlying security, any loss to a Fund resulting from the repurchase of a call option is likely to be offset in whole or in part by appreciation of the underlying security owned by a Fund.

Stock Index Options. Each Fund may also purchase put and call options with respect to the S&P 500 and other stock indices. Such options may be purchased as a hedge against changes resulting from market conditions in the values of securities which are held in a Fund’s portfolio or which it intends to purchase or sell, or when they are economically appropriate for the reduction of risks inherent in the ongoing management of a Fund.

The distinctive characteristics of options on stock indices create certain risks that are not present with stock options generally. Because the value of an index option depends upon movements in the level of the index rather than the price of a particular stock, whether a Fund will realize a gain or loss on the purchase or sale of an option on an index depends upon movements in the level of stock prices in the stock market generally rather than movements in the price of a particular stock. Accordingly, successful use by a Fund of options on a stock index would be subject to a Sub-Advisor’s ability to predict correctly movements in the direction of the stock market generally. This requires different skills and techniques than predicting changes in the price of individual stocks.

Index prices may be distorted if trading of certain stocks included in the index is interrupted. Trading of index options also may be interrupted in certain circumstances, such as if trading were halted in a substantial number of stocks included in the index. If this were to occur, a Fund would not be able to close out options which it had purchased, and if restrictions on exercise were imposed, a Fund might be unable to exercise an option it holds, which could result in substantial losses to a Fund. It is the policy of each Fund to purchase put or call options only with respect to an index which a Sub-Advisor believes includes a sufficient number of stocks to minimize the likelihood of a trading halt in the index.

Risks of Investing in Options. There are several risks associated with transactions in options on securities and indices. Options may be more volatile than the underlying instruments and, therefore, on a percentage basis, an investment in options may be subject to greater fluctuation than an investment in the underlying instruments themselves. There are also significant differences between the securities and options markets that could result in an imperfect correlation between these markets, causing a given transaction not to achieve its objective. In addition, a liquid secondary market for particular options may be absent for reasons which include the following: there may be insufficient trading interest in certain options; restrictions may be imposed by an exchange on opening transactions or closing transactions or both; trading halts, suspensions or other restrictions may be imposed with respect to particular classes or series of option of underlying securities; unusual or unforeseen circumstances may interrupt normal operations on an exchange; the facilities of an exchange or clearing corporation may not at all times be adequate to handle current trading volume; or one or more exchanges could, for economic or other reasons, decide or be compelled at some future date to discontinue the trading of options (or a particular class or series of options), in which event the secondary market on that exchange (or in that class or series of options) would cease to exist, although outstanding options that had been issued by a clearing corporation as a result of trades on that exchange would continue to be exercisable in accordance with their terms.

 

18


Table of Contents

A decision as to whether, when and how to use options involves the exercise of skill and judgment, and even a well-conceived transaction may be unsuccessful to some degree because of market behavior or unexpected events. The extent to which a Fund may enter into options transactions may be limited by the requirements of the Code with respect to qualification of a Fund as a regulated investment company. See “Dividends and Distributions” and “Taxation.”

In addition, when trading options on foreign exchanges, many of the protections afforded to participants in United States option exchanges will not be available. For example, there may be no daily price fluctuation limits in such exchanges or markets, and adverse market movements could therefore continue to an unlimited extent over a period of time. Although the purchaser of an option cannot lose more than the amount of the premium plus related transaction costs, this entire amount could be lost. Moreover, a Fund as an option writer could lose amounts substantially in excess of its initial investment, due to the margin and collateral requirements typically associated with such option writing. See “Dealer Options” below.

Dealer Options. Each Fund may engage in transactions involving dealer options as well as exchange-traded options. Certain risks are specific to dealer options. While a Fund might look to a clearing corporation to exercise exchange-traded options, if a Fund were to purchase a dealer option it would need to rely on the dealer from which it purchased the option to perform if the option were exercised. Failure by the dealer to do so would result in the loss of the premium paid by a Fund as well as loss of the expected benefit of the transaction.

Exchange-traded options generally have a continuous liquid market while dealer options may not. Consequently, a Fund may generally be able to realize the value of a dealer option it has purchased only by exercising or reselling the option to the dealer who issued it. Similarly, when a Fund writes a dealer option, a Fund may generally be able to close out the option prior to its expiration only by entering into a closing purchase transaction with the dealer to whom a Fund originally wrote the option. While a Fund will seek to enter into dealer options only with dealers who will agree to and which are expected to be capable of entering into closing transactions with a Fund, there can be no assurance that a Fund will at any time be able to liquidate a dealer option at a favorable price at any time prior to expiration. Unless a Fund, as a covered dealer call option writer, is able to effect a closing purchase transaction, it will not be able to liquidate securities (or other assets) used as cover until the option expires or is exercised. In the event of insolvency of the other party, a Fund may be unable to liquidate a dealer option. With respect to options written by a Fund, the inability to enter into a closing transaction may result in material losses to a Fund. For example, because a Fund must maintain a secured position with respect to any call option on a security it writes, a Fund may not sell the assets which it has segregated to secure the position while it is obligated under the option. This requirement may impair a Fund’s ability to sell portfolio securities at a time when such sale might be advantageous.

The Staff of the SEC has taken the position that purchased dealer options are illiquid securities. A Fund may treat the cover used for written dealer options as liquid if the dealer agrees that a Fund may repurchase the dealer option it has written for a maximum price to be calculated by a predetermined formula. In such cases, the dealer option would be considered illiquid only to the extent the maximum purchase price under the formula exceeds the intrinsic value of the option. Accordingly, each Fund will treat dealer options as subject to a Fund’s limitation on illiquid securities. If the SEC changes its position on the liquidity of dealer options, each Fund will change its treatment of such instruments accordingly.

Foreign Currency Options . Each Fund may buy or sell put and call options on foreign currencies. A put or call option on a foreign currency gives the purchaser of the option the right to sell or purchase a foreign currency at the exercise price until the option expires. Each Fund will use foreign currency options separately or in combination to control currency volatility. Among the strategies employed to control currency volatility is an option collar. An option collar involves the purchase of a put option and the simultaneous sale of call option on the same

 

19


Table of Contents

currency with the same expiration date but with different exercise (or “strike”) prices. Generally, the put option will have an out-of-the-money strike price, while the call option will have either an at-the-money strike price or an in-the-money strike price. Foreign currency options are derivative securities. Currency options traded on U.S. or other exchanges may be subject to position limits that may limit the ability of a Fund to reduce foreign currency risk using such options.

As with other kinds of option transactions, the writing of an option on foreign currency will constitute only a partial hedge, up to the amount of the premium received. Each Fund could be required to purchase or sell foreign currencies at disadvantageous exchange rates, thereby incurring losses. The purchase of an option on foreign currency may constitute an effective hedge against exchange rate fluctuations; however, in the event of exchange rate movements adverse to a Fund’s position, a Fund may forfeit the entire amount of the premium plus related transaction costs.

Spread Transactions. Each Fund may purchase covered spread options from securities dealers. These covered spread options are not presently exchange-listed or exchange-traded. The purchase of a spread option gives a Fund the right to put a security that it owns at a fixed dollar spread or fixed yield spread in relationship to another security that a Fund does not own, but which is used as a benchmark. The risk to a Fund, in addition to the risks of dealer options described above, is the cost of the premium paid as well as any transaction costs. The purchase of spread options will be used to protect a Fund against adverse changes in prevailing credit quality spreads, i.e., the yield spread between high quality and lower quality securities. This protection is provided only during the life of the spread options.

Forward Currency Contracts

Each Fund may enter into forward currency contracts in anticipation of changes in currency exchange rates. A forward currency contract is an obligation to purchase or sell a specific currency at a future date, which may be any fixed number of days from the date of the contract agreed upon by the parties, at a price set at the time of the contract. For example, a Fund might purchase a particular currency or enter into a forward currency contract to preserve the U.S. dollar price of securities it intends to or has contracted to purchase. Alternatively, it might sell a particular currency on either a spot or forward basis to hedge against an anticipated decline in the dollar value of securities it intends to or has contracted to sell. Although this strategy could minimize the risk of loss due to a decline in the value of the hedged currency, it could also limit any potential gain from an increase in the value of the currency.

Credit Default Swap Agreements (Alternative Strategies Fund)

The Alternative Strategies Fund may enter into credit default swap agreements. The “buyer” in a credit default swap contract is obligated to pay the “seller” a periodic stream of payments over the term of the contract in return for a contingent payment upon the occurrence of a credit event with respect to an underlying reference obligation. Generally, a credit event means bankruptcy, failure to pay, obligation acceleration or modified restructuring. The Fund may be either the buyer or the seller in the transaction. As a seller, the Fund receives a fixed rate of income throughout the term of the contract, which typically is between one month and five years, provided that no credit event occurs. If a credit event occurs, the Fund typically must pay the contingent payment to the buyer, which is typically the “par value” (full notional value) of the reference obligation. If the Fund writes a credit default swap, it would normally be required to segregate liquid assets equal in value to the notional value of the contract. The contingent payment may be a cash settlement or by physical delivery of the reference obligation in return for payment of the face amount of the obligation. The value of the reference obligation received by the Fund as a seller if a credit event occurs, coupled with the periodic payments previously received, may be less than the full notional value it pays to the buyer, resulting in a loss of value to the Fund. If the reference obligation is a

 

20


Table of Contents

defaulted security, physical delivery of the security will cause the Fund to hold a defaulted security. If the Fund is a buyer and no credit event occurs, the Fund will lose its periodic stream of payments over the term of the contract. However, if a credit event occurs, the buyer typically receives full notional value for a reference obligation that may have little or no value.

In a single name credit default swap the underlying asset or reference obligation is a bond of one particular issuer or reference entity. There are generally two sides to the swap trade: a buyer of protection and a seller of protection. If the reference entity of a credit default swap experiences what is known as a credit event (such as a bankruptcy, downgrade, etc.), then the buyer of protection (who pays a premium for that protection) can receive payment from the seller of protection. This is desirable because the price of those bonds will experience a decrease in value due to the negative credit event. There is also the option of physical, rather than cash, trade settlement in which the underlying bond or reference obligation actually changes hands, from buyer of protection to seller of protection.

The major tradable indexes for credit default swaps are: CDX, ABX, CMBX and LCDX. The CDX indexes are broken out between investment grade, high yield, high volatility, crossover and emerging market. For example, the CDX.NA.HY is an index based on a basket of North American (NA) single-name high yield credit default swaps. The crossover index includes names that are split rated, meaning they are rated “investment grade” by one agency, and “below investment grade” by another.

The CDX index rolls over every six months, and its 125 names enter and leave the index as appropriate. For example, if one of the names is upgraded from below investment grade to investment grade, it will move from the high yield index to the investment grade index when the rebalance occurs.

The ABX and CMBX are baskets of credit default swaps on two securitized products: asset-backed securities and commercial mortgage-backed securities. The ABX is based on asset-backed securities home equity loans and the CMBX on commercial mortgage-backed securities. There are five separate ABX indexes for ratings ranging from ‘AAA’ to ‘BBB-’. The CMBX also has the same breakdown of five indexes by ratings, but is based on a basket of 25 credit default swaps, which reference commercial mortgage-backed securities.

The LCDX is a credit derivative index with a basket made up of single-name, loan-only credit default swaps. The loans referred to are leveraged loans. The basket is made up of 100 names. Although a bank loan is considered secured debt, the names that usually trade in the leveraged loan market are lower quality credits (if they could issue in the normal investment grade markets, they would). Therefore, the LCDX index is used mostly by those looking for exposure to high-yield debt.

All of the aforementioned indexes are issued by the Credit Default Swaps Index Company and administered by Markit. For these indexes to work, they must have sufficient liquidity. Therefore, the issuer has commitments from the largest dealers (large investment banks) to provide liquidity in the market.

Total Return Swap Agreements (Alternative Strategies Fund)

The Alternative Strategies Fund may enter into total return swap agreements. Total return swap agreements are contracts in which one party agrees to make periodic payments to another party based on the change in market value of the assets underlying the contract, which may include a specified security, basket of securities or securities indices during the specified period, in return for periodic payments based on a fixed or variable interest rate or the total return from other underlying assets. Total return swap agreements may be used to obtain exposure to a security or market without owning or taking physical custody of such security or investing directly in such market. Total return swap agreements may effectively add leverage to the Fund’s portfolio because, in addition to its total net assets, the Fund would be subject to investment exposure on the notional amount of the swap.

 

21


Table of Contents

Total return swap agreements are subject to the risk that a counterparty will default on its payment obligations to the Fund thereunder. Swap agreements also bear the risk that the Fund will not be able to meet its obligation to the counterparty. Generally, the Fund will enter into total return swaps on a net basis ( i.e. , the two payment streams are netted against one another with the Fund receiving or paying, as the case may be, only the net amount of the two payments). The net amount of the excess, if any, of the Fund’s obligations over its entitlements with respect to each total return swap will be accrued on a daily basis, and an amount of liquid assets having an aggregate NAV at least equal to the accrued excess will be segregated by the Fund. If the total return swap transaction is entered into on other than a net basis, the full amount of the Fund’s obligations will be accrued on a daily basis, and the full amount of the Fund’s obligations will be segregated by the Fund in an amount equal to or greater than the market value of the liabilities under the total return swap agreement or the amount it would have cost the Fund initially to make an equivalent direct investment, plus or minus any amount the Fund is obligated to pay or is to receive under the total return swap agreement.

Futures Contracts and Related Options

Each Fund may invest in futures contracts and options on futures contracts as a hedge against changes in market conditions or interest rates. A Fund may trade in such derivative securities for bona fide hedging purposes and otherwise in accordance with the rules of the CFTC. A Fund will segregate liquid assets in a separate account with its custodian when required to do so by CFTC guidelines in order to cover its obligation in connection with futures and options transactions.

No price is paid or received by a Fund upon the purchase or sale of a futures contract. When it enters into a domestic futures contract, a Fund will be required to deposit in a segregated account with its custodian an amount of cash or U.S. Treasury bills equal to approximately 5% of the contract amount. This amount is known as initial margin. The margin requirements for foreign futures contracts may be different.

The nature of initial margin in futures transactions is different from that of margin in securities transactions. Futures contract margin does not involve the borrowing of funds by the customer to finance the transactions. Rather, the initial margin is in the nature of a performance bond or good faith deposit on the contract which is returned to a Fund upon termination of the futures contract, assuming all contractual obligations have been satisfied. Subsequent payments (called variation margin) to and from the broker will be made on a daily basis as the price of the underlying stock index fluctuates, to reflect movements in the price of the contract making the long and short positions in the futures contract more or less valuable. For example, when a Fund has purchased a stock index futures contract and the price of the underlying stock index has risen, that position will have increased in value and a Fund will receive from the broker a variation margin payment equal to that increase in value. Conversely, when a Fund has purchased a stock index futures contract and the price of the underlying stock index has declined, the position will be less valuable and a Fund will be required to make a variation margin payment to the broker.

At any time prior to expiration of a futures contract, a Fund may elect to close the position by taking an opposite position, which will operate to terminate a Fund’s position in the futures contract. A final determination of variation margin is made on closing the position. Additional cash is paid by or released to a Fund, which realizes a loss or a gain.

In addition to amounts segregated or paid as initial and variation margin, a Fund must segregate liquid assets with its custodian equal to the market value of the futures contracts, in order to comply with SEC requirements intended to ensure that a Fund’s use of futures is unleveraged. The requirements for margin payments and segregated accounts apply to both domestic and foreign futures contracts.

 

22


Table of Contents

Stock Index Futures Contracts. Each Fund may invest in futures contracts on stock indices. Currently, stock index futures contracts can be purchased or sold with respect to the S&P 500 Stock Price Index on the Chicago Mercantile Exchange, the Major Market Index on the Chicago Board of Trade, the New York Stock Exchange Composite Index on the New York Futures Exchange and the Value Line Stock Index on the Kansas City Board of Trade. Foreign financial and stock index futures are traded on foreign exchanges including the London International Financial Futures Exchange, the Singapore International Monetary Exchange, the Sydney Futures Exchange Limited and the Tokyo Stock Exchange.

Interest Rate or Financial Futures Contracts. Each Fund may invest in interest rate or financial futures contracts. Bond prices are established in both the cash market and the futures market. In the cash market, bonds are purchased and sold with payment for the full purchase price of the bond being made in cash, generally within five business days after the trade. In the futures market, a contract is made to purchase or sell a bond in the future for a set price on a certain date. Historically, the prices for bonds established in the futures markets have generally tended to move in the aggregate in concert with cash market prices, and the prices have maintained fairly predictable relationships.

The sale of an interest rate or financial futures contract by a Fund would create an obligation by a Fund, as seller, to deliver the specific type of financial instrument called for in the contract at a specific future time for a specified price. A futures contract purchased by a Fund would create an obligation by a Fund, as purchaser, to take delivery of the specific type of financial instrument at a specific future time at a specific price. The specific securities delivered or taken, respectively, at settlement date, would not be determined until at or near that date. The determination would be in accordance with the rules of the exchange on which the futures contract sale or purchase was made.

Although interest rate or financial futures contracts by their terms call for actual delivery or acceptance of securities, in most cases the contracts are closed out before the settlement date without delivery of securities. Closing out of a futures contract sale is effected by a Fund’s entering into a futures contract purchase for the same aggregate amount of the specific type of financial instrument and the same delivery date. If the price in the sale exceeds the price in the offsetting purchase, a Fund is paid the difference and thus realizes a gain. If the offsetting purchase price exceeds the sale price, a Fund pays the difference and realizes a loss. Similarly, the closing out of a futures contract purchase is effected by a Fund’s entering into a futures contract sale. If the offsetting sale price exceeds the purchase price, a Fund realizes a gain, and if the purchase price exceeds the offsetting sale price, a Fund realizes a loss.

Each Fund will deal only in standardized contracts on recognized exchanges. Each exchange guarantees performance under contract provisions through a clearing corporation, a nonprofit organization managed by the exchange membership. Domestic interest rate futures contracts are traded in an auction environment on the floors of several exchanges – principally, the Chicago Board of Trade and the Chicago Mercantile Exchange. A public market now exists in domestic futures contracts covering various financial instruments including long-term United States Treasury bonds and notes, GNMA modified pass-through mortgage-backed securities, three-month United States Treasury bills, and 90-day commercial paper. Each Fund may trade in any futures contract for which there exists a public market, including, without limitation, the foregoing instruments. International interest rate futures contracts are traded on the London International Financial Futures Exchange, the Singapore International Monetary Exchange, the Sydney Futures Exchange Limited and the Tokyo Stock Exchange.

Interest Rate Caps, Floors and Collars (Alternative Strategies Fund). The Alternative Strategies Fund may use interest rate caps, floors and collars for the same purposes or similar purposes as for which it uses interest rate futures contracts and related options. Interest rate caps, floors and collars are similar to interest rate swap contracts because the payment obligations are measured by changes in interest rates as applied to a notional amount and because they are generally individually negotiated with a specific counterparty. The purchase of an interest rate cap entitles the purchaser, to the extent that a specific index exceeds a specified interest rate, to receive payments of interest on a notional principal amount from the party selling the interest rate cap. The purchase of an interest rate

 

23


Table of Contents

floor entitles the purchaser, to the extent that a specified index falls below specified interest rates, to receive payments of interest on a notional principal amount from the party selling the interest rate floor. The purchase of an interest rate collar entitles the purchaser, to the extent that a specified index exceeds or falls below a specified interest rate, to receive payments of interest on a notional principal amount from the party selling the interest rate collar.

Foreign Currency Futures Contracts. Each Fund may use foreign currency future contracts for hedging purposes. A foreign currency futures contract provides for the future sale by one party and purchase by another party of a specified quantity of a foreign currency at a specified price and time. A public market exists in futures contracts covering several foreign currencies, including the Australian dollar, the Canadian dollar, the British pound, the Japanese yen, the Swiss franc, and certain multinational currencies such as the European Currency Unit (“ECU”). Other foreign currency futures contracts are likely to be developed and traded in the future. Each Fund will only enter into futures contracts and futures options which are standardized and traded on a U.S. or foreign exchange, board of trade, or similar entity, or quoted on an automated quotation system.

Risks of Transactions in Futures Contracts. There are several risks related to the use of futures as a hedging device. One risk arises because of the imperfect correlation between movements in the price of the futures contract and movements in the price of the securities which are the subject of the hedge. The price of the future may move more or less than the price of the securities being hedged. If the price of the future moves less than the price of the securities which are the subject of the hedge, the hedge will not be fully effective, but if the price of the securities being hedged has moved in an unfavorable direction, a Fund would be in a better position than if it had not hedged at all. If the price of the securities being hedged has moved in a favorable direction, this advantage will be partially offset by the loss on the future. If the price of the future moves more than the price of the hedged securities, a Fund will experience either a loss or a gain on the future which will not be completely offset by movements in the price of the securities which are subject to the hedge.

To compensate for the imperfect correlation of movements in the price of securities being hedged and movements in the price of the futures contract, a Fund may buy or sell futures contracts in a greater dollar amount than the dollar amount of securities being hedged if the historical volatility of the prices of such securities has been greater than the historical volatility over such time period of the future. Conversely, a Fund may buy or sell fewer futures contracts if the historical volatility of the price of the securities being hedged is less than the historical volatility of the futures contract being used. It is possible that, when a Fund has sold futures to hedge its portfolio against a decline in the market, the market may advance while the value of securities held in a Fund’s portfolio may decline. If this occurs, a Fund will lose money on the future and also experience a decline in value in its portfolio securities. However, the Advisor believes that over time the value of a diversified portfolio will tend to move in the same direction as the market indices upon which the futures are based.

Where futures are purchased to hedge against a possible increase in the price of securities before a Fund is able to invest its cash (or cash equivalents) in securities (or options) in an orderly fashion, it is possible that the market may decline instead. If a Fund then decides not to invest in securities or options at that time because of concern as to possible further market decline or for other reasons, it will realize a loss on the futures contract that is not offset by a reduction in the price of securities purchased.

In addition to the possibility that there may be an imperfect correlation, or no correlation at all, between movements in the futures and the securities being hedged, the price of futures may not correlate perfectly with movement in the stock index or cash market due to certain market distortions. All participants in the futures market are subject to margin deposit and maintenance requirements. Rather than meeting additional margin deposit requirements, investors may close futures contracts through offsetting transactions, which could distort the normal relationship between the index or cash market and futures markets. In addition, the deposit requirements in the

 

24


Table of Contents

futures market are less onerous than margin requirements in the securities market. Therefore, increased participation by speculators in the futures market may also cause temporary price distortions. As a result of price distortions in the futures market and the imperfect correlation between movements in the cash market and the price of securities and movements in the price of futures, a correct forecast of general trends by a Sub-Advisor may still not result in a successful hedging transaction over a very short time frame.

Positions in futures may be closed out only on an exchange or board of trade which provides a secondary market for such futures. Although a Fund may intend to purchase or sell futures only on exchanges or boards of trade where there appears to be an active secondary market, there is no assurance that a liquid secondary market on an exchange or board of trade will exist for any particular contract or at any particular time. In such event, it may not be possible to close a futures position, and in the event of adverse price movements, a Fund would continue to be required to make daily cash payments of variation margin. When futures contracts have been used to hedge portfolio securities, such securities will not be sold until the futures contract can be terminated. In such circumstances, an increase in the price of the securities, if any, may partially or completely offset losses on the futures contract. However, as described above, there is no guarantee that the price of the securities will in fact correlate with the price movements in the futures contract and thus provide an offset to losses on a futures contract.

Most United States futures exchanges limit the amount of fluctuation permitted in futures contract prices during a single trading day. The daily limit establishes the maximum amount that the price of a futures contract may vary either up or down from the previous day’s settlement price at the end of a trading session. Once the daily limit has been reached in a particular type of futures contract, no trades may be made on that day at a price beyond that limit. The daily limit governs only price movement during a particular trading day and therefore does not limit potential losses, because the limit may prevent the liquidation of unfavorable positions. Futures contract prices have occasionally moved to the daily limit for several consecutive trading days with little or no trading, thereby preventing prompt liquidation of futures positions and subjecting some futures traders to substantial losses.

Successful use of futures by a Fund is also subject to a Sub-Advisor’s ability to predict correctly movements in the direction of the market. For example, if a Fund has hedged against the possibility of a decline in the market adversely affecting stocks held in its portfolio and stock prices increase instead, a Fund will lose part or all of the benefit of the increased value of the stocks which it has hedged because it will have offsetting losses in its futures positions. In addition, in such situations, if a Fund has insufficient cash, it may have to sell securities to meet daily variation margin requirements. Such sales of securities may be, but will not necessarily be, at increased prices which reflect the rising market. Each Fund may have to sell securities at a time when it may be disadvantageous to do so.

In the event of the bankruptcy of a broker through which a Fund engages in transactions in futures contracts or options, a Fund could experience delays and losses in liquidating open positions purchased or sold through the broker, and incur a loss of all or part of its margin deposits with the broker.

Options on Futures Contracts. As described above, each Fund may purchase options on the futures contracts they can purchase or sell. A futures option gives the holder, in return for the premium paid, the right to buy (call) from or sell (put) to the writer of the option a futures contract at a specified price at any time during the period of the option. Upon exercise, the writer of the option is obligated to pay the difference between the cash value of the futures contract and the exercise price. Like the buyer or seller of a futures contract, the holder or writer of an option has the right to terminate its position prior to the scheduled expiration of the option by selling, or purchasing an option of the same series, at which time the person entering into the closing transaction will realize a gain or loss. There is no guarantee that such closing transactions can be effected.

Investments in futures options involve some of the same considerations as investments in futures contracts (for example, the existence of a liquid secondary market). In addition, the purchase of an option also entails the risk that changes in the value of the underlying futures contract will not be fully reflected in the value of the option. Depending on the pricing of the option compared to either the futures contract upon which it is based, or upon the

 

25


Table of Contents

price of the securities being hedged, an option may or may not be less risky than ownership of the futures contract or such securities. In general, the market prices of options can be expected to be more volatile than the market prices on the underlying futures contracts. Compared to the purchase or sale of futures contracts, however, the purchase of call or put options on futures contracts may frequently involve less potential risk to a Fund because the maximum amount at risk is limited to the premium paid for the options (plus transaction costs).

Restrictions on the Use of Futures Contracts and Related Options. Each Fund may engage in transactions in futures contracts or related options primarily as a hedge against changes resulting from market conditions in the values of securities held in a Fund’s portfolio or which it intends to purchase and where the transactions are economically appropriate to the reduction of risks inherent in the ongoing management of each Fund. A Fund may not purchase or sell futures or purchase related options for purposes other than bona fide hedging if, immediately thereafter, more than 25% of its total assets would be hedged. A Fund also may not purchase or sell futures or purchase related options if, immediately thereafter, the sum of the amount of margin deposits on a Fund’s existing futures positions and premiums paid for such options would exceed 5% of the market value of a Fund’s total assets.

These restrictions, which are derived from current federal regulations regarding the use of options and futures by mutual funds, are not “fundamental restrictions” and may be changed by the Trustees of the Trust if applicable law permits such a change and the change is consistent with the overall investment objective and policies of each Fund.

The extent to which a Fund may enter into futures and options transactions may be limited by the Code requirements for qualification of a Fund as a regulated investment company. See “Taxation.”

Exclusion from Definition of Commodity Pool Operator

The Funds are operated by a person who has claimed an exclusion from the definition of the term “commodity pool operator” under the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936, as amended (“CEA”), pursuant to Rule 4.5 under the CEA promulgated by the CFTC. Therefore, neither the Funds nor the Advisor is subject to registrations or regulation as a commodity pool operator under the CEA. Effective December 31, 2012, in order to claim the Rule 4.5 exclusion, each Fund is limited in its ability to invest in certain financial instruments regulated under the CEA (“commodity interests”), including futures, options and certain swaps (including securities futures, broad-based stock index futures and financial futures contracts). In the event that the Funds’ investments in commodity interests are not within the thresholds set forth in the Rule 4.5 exclusion, the Advisor may be required to register as a “commodity pool operator” and/or “commodity trading advisor” with the CFTC with respect to the Funds, which may increase the Funds’ expenses and adversely affect the Funds’ total returns. The Advisor’s eligibility to claim the 4.5 exclusion with respect to the Funds will be based upon, among other things, the level and scope of the Funds’ investments in commodity interests, the purposes of such investments and the manner in which the Funds hold out their use of commodity interests. As a result, in the future, the Funds will be more limited in their ability to invest in commodity interests than in the past, which may negatively impact on the ability of the Advisor to manage the Funds and the Funds’ performance.

Repurchase Agreements

Each Fund may enter into repurchase agreements with respect to its portfolio securities. Pursuant to such agreements, a Fund acquires securities from financial institutions such as banks and broker-dealers as are deemed to be creditworthy by the Advisor or a Sub-Advisor, subject to the seller’s agreement to repurchase and a Fund’s agreement to resell such securities at a mutually agreed upon date and price. The repurchase price generally equals the price paid by a Fund plus interest negotiated on the basis of current short-term rates (which may be more or less

 

26


Table of Contents

than the rate on the underlying portfolio security). Securities subject to repurchase agreements will be held by the Custodian or in the Federal Reserve/Treasury Book-Entry System or an equivalent foreign system. The seller under a repurchase agreement will be required to maintain the value of the underlying securities at not less than 102% of the repurchase price under the agreement. If the seller defaults on its repurchase obligation, a Fund holding the repurchase agreement will suffer a loss to the extent that the proceeds from a sale of the underlying securities are less than the repurchase price under the agreement. Bankruptcy or insolvency of such a defaulting seller may cause a Fund’s rights with respect to such securities to be delayed or limited. Repurchase agreements are considered to be loans under the 1940 Act, and the total repurchase agreements of a Fund are limited to 33-1/3% of its total assets.

 

27


Table of Contents

Reverse Repurchase Agreements

Each Fund may enter into reverse repurchase agreements. A Fund typically will invest the proceeds of a reverse repurchase agreement in money market instruments or repurchase agreements maturing not later than the expiration of the reverse repurchase agreement. A Fund may use the proceeds of reverse repurchase agreements to provide liquidity to meet redemption requests when sale of a Fund’s securities is disadvantageous.

Each Fund causes its custodian to segregate liquid assets, such as cash, U.S. Government securities or other high-grade liquid debt securities equal in value to its obligations (including accrued interest) with respect to reverse repurchase agreements. In segregating such assets, the custodian either places such securities in a segregated account or separately identifies such assets and renders them unavailable for investment. Such assets are marked to market daily to ensure full collateralization is maintained.

Dollar Roll Transactions

Each Fund may enter into dollar roll transactions. A dollar roll transaction involves a sale by a Fund of a security to a financial institution concurrently with an agreement by a Fund to purchase a similar security from the institution at a later date at an agreed-upon price. The securities that are repurchased will bear the same interest rate as those sold, but generally will be collateralized by different pools of mortgages with different prepayment histories than those sold. During the period between the sale and repurchase, a Fund will not be entitled to receive interest and principal payments on the securities sold. Proceeds of the sale will be invested in additional portfolio securities of a Fund, and the income from these investments, together with any additional fee income received on the sale, may or may not generate income for a Fund exceeding the yield on the securities sold.

At the time a Fund enters into a dollar roll transaction, it causes its custodian to segregate liquid assets such as cash, U.S. Government securities or other high-grade liquid debt securities having a value equal to the purchase price for the similar security (including accrued interest) and subsequently marks the assets to market daily to ensure that full collateralization is maintained.

When-Issued Securities, Forward Commitments and Delayed Settlements

Each Fund may purchase securities on a “when-issued,” forward commitment or delayed settlement basis. In this event, the Custodian will set aside, and the Fund will identify on its books, cash or liquid portfolio securities equal to the amount of the commitment in a separate account. Normally, the Custodian will set aside portfolio securities to satisfy a purchase commitment. In such a case, a Fund may be required subsequently to place additional assets in the separate account in order to assure that the value of the account remains equal to the amount of a Fund’s commitment. It may be expected that a Fund’s net assets will fluctuate to a greater degree when it sets aside portfolio securities to cover such purchase commitments than when it sets aside cash.

Each Fund does not intend to engage in these transactions for speculative purposes but only in furtherance of its investment objectives. Because a Fund will set aside cash or liquid portfolio securities to satisfy its purchase commitments in the manner described, a Fund’s liquidity and the ability of a Sub-Advisor to manage it may be affected in the event a Fund’s forward commitments, commitments to purchase when-issued securities and delayed settlements ever exceeded 15% of the value of its net assets.

Each Fund will purchase securities on a when-issued, forward commitment or delayed settlement basis only with the intention of completing the transaction. If deemed advisable as a matter of investment strategy, however, a Fund may dispose of or renegotiate a commitment after it is entered into, and may sell securities it has committed to purchase before those securities are delivered to a Fund on the settlement date. In these cases a Fund may realize a

 

28


Table of Contents

taxable capital gain or loss. When a Fund engages in when-issued, forward commitment and delayed settlement transactions, it relies on the other party to consummate the trade. Failure of such party to do so may result in a Fund’s incurring a loss or missing an opportunity to obtain a price credited to be advantageous.

The market value of the securities underlying a when-issued purchase, forward commitment to purchase securities, or a delayed settlement and any subsequent fluctuations in their market value is taken into account when determining the market value of a Fund starting on the day a Fund agrees to purchase the securities. A Fund does not earn interest on the securities it has committed to purchase until they are paid for and delivered on the settlement date.

Zero-Coupon, Step-Coupon and Pay-in-Kind Securities

Each Fund may invest in zero-coupon, step-coupon and pay-in-kind securities. These securities are debt securities that do not make regular cash interest payments. Zero-coupon and step-coupon securities are sold at a deep discount to their face value. Pay-in-kind securities pay interest through the issuance of additional securities. Because these securities do not pay current cash income, the price of these securities can be volatile when interest rates fluctuate. While these securities do not pay current cash income, the Code requires the holders of these securities to include in income each year the portion of the original issue discount (or deemed discount) and other non-cash income on the securities accruing that year. A Fund may be required to distribute a portion of that discount and income and may be required to dispose of other portfolio securities, which may occur in periods of adverse market prices, in order to generate cash to meet these distribution requirements.

Inflation-Linked and Inflation-Indexed Securities

The Alternative Strategies Fund may invest in inflation-linked bonds. The principal amount of these bonds increases with increases in the price index used as a reference value for the bonds. In addition, the amounts payable as coupon interest payments increase when the price index increases because the interest amount is calculated by multiplying the principal amount (as adjusted) by a fixed coupon rate.

Although inflation-indexed securities protect their holders from long-term inflationary trends, short-term increases in inflation may result in a decline in value. The values of inflation-linked securities generally fluctuate in response to changes to real interest rates, which are in turn tied to the relationship between nominal interest rates and the rate of inflation. If inflation were to rise at a rate faster than nominal interest rates, real interest rates might decline, leading to an increase in value of the inflation-linked securities. In contrast, if nominal interest rates increased at a faster rate than inflation, real interest rates might rise, leading to a decrease in the value of inflation-linked securities. If inflation is lower than expected during a period the Fund holds inflation-linked securities, the Fund may earn less on such bonds than on a conventional bond. If interest rates rise due to reasons other than inflation (for example, due to changes in currency exchange rates), investors in inflation-linked securities may not be protected to the extent that the increase is not reflected in the price index used as a reference for the securities. There can be no assurance that the price index used for an inflation-linked security will accurately measure the real rate of inflation in the prices of goods and services. Inflation-linked and inflation-indexed securities include Treasury Inflation-Protected Securities issued by the U.S. government (see the section “U.S. Government Securities” for additional information), but also may include securities issued by state, local and non-U.S. governments and corporations and supranational entities.

Borrowing

Each of the Equity Fund, International Fund and Smaller Companies Fund is authorized to borrow money from banks from time to time for temporary, extraordinary or emergency purposes or for clearance of transactions in amounts up to 20% of the value of its total assets at the time of such borrowing. The Alternative Strategies Fund is authorized to borrow money from banks in amounts up to 33-1/3% of its total assets. Each Fund is authorized to borrow money in amounts up to 5% of the value of its total assets at the time of such borrowing s for temporary

 

29


Table of Contents

purposes and is authorized to borrow money in excess of the 5% limit as permitted by the 1940 Act. The 1940 Act requires a Fund to maintain continuous asset coverage ( i.e. , total assets including borrowings less liabilities exclusive of borrowings) of at least 300% of the amount borrowed. If the 300% asset coverage declines as a result of market fluctuations or other reasons, a Fund may be required to sell some of its portfolio holdings within three days to reduce the debt and restore the 300% asset coverage, even though it may be disadvantageous from an investment standpoint to sell securities at that time. The use of borrowing by the Fund involves special risk considerations that may not be associated with other funds having similar objectives and policies. Since substantially all of the Fund’s assets fluctuate in value, whereas the interest obligation resulting from a borrowing will be fixed by the terms of the Fund’s agreement with its lender, the asset value per share of the Fund will tend to increase more when its portfolio securities increase in value and to decrease more when its portfolio assets decrease in value than would otherwise be the case if the Fund did not borrow funds. In addition, interest costs on borrowings may fluctuate with changing market rates of interest and may partially offset or exceed the return earned on borrowed funds. Under adverse market conditions, the Fund might have to sell portfolio securities to meet interest or principal payments at a time when fundamental investment considerations would not favor such sales.

Lending Portfolio Securities

Each Fund may lend its investment securities to approved institutional borrowers who need to borrow securities in order to complete certain transactions, such as covering short sales, avoiding failures to deliver securities or completing arbitrage operations. By lending its investment securities, a Fund attempts to increase its net investment income through the receipt of interest on the loan. Any gain or loss in the market price of the securities loaned that might occur during the term of the loan would belong to the Fund. Each Fund may lend its investment securities so long as the terms, structure and the aggregate amount of such loans are not inconsistent with the 1940 Act or the rules and regulations or interpretations of the SEC thereunder, which currently require that (i) the loan collateral must be equal to at least 100% of the value of the loaned securities , and the borrower must increase such collateral such that it remains equal to 100% of the value of the loaned securities whenever the price of the loaned securities increases ( i.e., mark to market on a daily basis); (ii) the Fund must be able to terminate the loan at any time; (iii) the Fund must receive reasonable interest on the loan, as well as any dividends, interest or other distributions payable on the loaned securities, and any increase in market value; (iv) the Fund may pay reasonable custodial fees in connection with the lending of portfolio securities, which fees must be negotiated by the Fund and the custodian and be approved by the Board; and (v) although the voting rights may pass with the lending of securities, the Board must be obligated to call the loan in time to vote the securities if a material event affecting the investment on loan is to occur.

The primary risk in securities lending is default by the borrower as the value of the borrowed security rises, resulting in a deficiency in the collateral posted by the borrower. The Funds seek to minimize this risk by computing the value of the security loaned on a daily basis and requiring additional collateral if necessary.

The Board has appointed State Street Bank and Trust Company, the Funds’ custodian, as securities lending agent for the Funds’ securities lending activity. The securities lending agent maintains a list of broker-dealers, banks or other institutions that it has determined to be creditworthy. The Funds will only enter into loan arrangements with borrowers on this list and will not lend its securities to be sold short.

Short Sales

Each Fund is authorized to make short sales of securities which it does not own or have the right to acquire. In a short sale, a Fund sells a security that it does not own, in anticipation of a decline in the market value of the security. To complete the sale, a Fund must borrow the security (generally from the broker through which the short sale is made) in order to make delivery to the buyer. Each Fund is then obligated to replace the security borrowed

 

30


Table of Contents

by purchasing it at the market price at the time of replacement. Each Fund is said to have a “short position” in the securities sold until it delivers them to the broker. The period during which a Fund has a short position can range from one day to more than a year. Until the security is replaced, the proceeds of the short sale are retained by the broker, and a Fund is required to pay to the broker a negotiated portion of any dividends or interest that accrue during the period of the loan. To meet current margin requirements, a Fund is also required to deposit with the broker additional cash or securities so that the total deposit with the broker is maintained daily at 150% of the current market value of the securities sold short (100% of the current market value if a security is held in the account that is convertible or exchangeable into the security sold short within 90 days without restriction other than the payment of money).

Short sales by a Fund create opportunities to increase a Fund’s return but, at the same time, involve specific risk considerations and may be considered a speculative technique. Since each Fund in effect profits from a decline in the price of the securities sold short without the need to invest the full purchase price of the securities on the date of the short sale, a Fund’s NAV per share will tend to increase more when the securities it has sold short decrease in value, and to decrease more when the securities it has sold short increase in value, than would otherwise be the case if it had not engaged in such short sales. The amount of any gain will be decreased, and the amount of any loss increased, by the amount of any premium, dividends or interest a Fund may be required to pay in connection with the short sale. Furthermore, under adverse market conditions a Fund might have difficulty purchasing securities to meet its short sale delivery obligations, and might have to sell portfolio securities to raise the capital necessary to meet its short sale obligations at a time when fundamental investment considerations would not favor such sales.

Illiquid Securities

Each Fund may not invest more than 15% of the value of its net assets in illiquid securities, including restricted securities that are not deemed to be liquid by the Sub-Advisor. The Advisor and the Sub-Advisors will monitor the amount of illiquid securities in a Fund’s portfolio, under the supervision of the Board, to ensure compliance with a Fund’s investment restrictions. In accordance with procedures approved by the Board, these securities may be valued using techniques other than market quotations, and the values established for these securities may be different than what would be produced through the use of another methodology or if they had been priced using market quotations. Illiquid securities and other portfolio securities that are valued using techniques other than market quotations, including “fair valued” securities, may be subject to greater fluctuation in their value from one day to the next than would be the case if market quotations were used. In addition, there is no assurance that a Fund could sell a portfolio security for the value established for it at any time, and it is possible that a Fund would incur a loss because a portfolio security is sold at a discount to its established value.

Historically, illiquid securities have included securities subject to contractual or legal restrictions on resale because they have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), securities which are otherwise not readily marketable and repurchase agreements having a maturity of longer than seven days. Securities which have not been registered under the Securities Act are referred to as private placement or restricted securities and are purchased directly from the issuer or in the secondary market. Mutual funds do not typically hold a significant amount of these restricted or other illiquid securities because of the potential for delays on resale and uncertainty in valuation. Limitations on resale may have an adverse effect on the marketability of portfolio securities and a Fund might be unable to dispose of restricted or other illiquid securities promptly or at reasonable prices and might thereby experience difficulty satisfying redemption within seven days. A Fund might also have to register such restricted securities in order to dispose of them, resulting in additional expense and delay. Adverse market conditions could impede such a public offering of securities.

In recent years, however, a large institutional market has developed for certain securities that are not registered under the Securities Act, including repurchase agreements, commercial paper, foreign securities, municipal securities and corporate bonds and notes. Institutional investors depend on an efficient institutional market in which the unregistered security can be readily resold or on an issuer’s ability to honor a demand for repayment. The fact that there are contractual or legal restrictions on resale to the general public or to certain

 

31


Table of Contents

institutions may not be indicative of the liquidity of such investments. If such securities are subject to purchase by institutional buyers in accordance with Rule 144A promulgated by the SEC under the Securities Act, the Sub-Advisor, pursuant to procedures adopted by the Board, may determine that such securities are not illiquid securities notwithstanding their legal or contractual restrictions on resale. In all other cases, however, securities subject to restrictions on resale will be deemed illiquid.

Exchange-Traded Funds

The Funds may invest in exchange-traded funds (“ETFs”), which are a type of index fund bought and sold on a securities exchange. An ETF trades like common stock and represents a fixed portfolio of securities designed to track a particular market index. A Fund could purchase an ETF to temporarily gain exposure to a portion of the U.S. or a foreign market while awaiting purchase of underlying securities. The risks of owning an ETF generally reflect the risks of owning the underlying securities they are designed to track, although lack of liquidity in an ETF could result in it being more volatile and ETFs have management fees that increase their costs. ETFs are also subject to other risks, including the risk that their prices may not correlate perfectly with changes in the underlying index and the risk of possible trading halts due to market conditions or other reasons that, in the view of the exchange upon which an ETF trades, would make trading in the ETF inadvisable. An exchange-traded sector fund may also be adversely affected by the performance of that specific sector or group of industries on which it is based. Investments in ETFs are generally subject to limits in the 1940 Act on investments in other investment companies.

Merger Arbitrage (Alternative Strategies Fund)

The Alternative Strategies Fund may utilize merger arbitrage as an investment strategy. Merger arbitrage is a highly specialized investment approach designed to profit from the successful completion of mergers, takeovers, tender offers, leveraged buyouts, spin-offs, liquidations and other corporate reorganizations. The most common arbitrage activity, and the approach the Fund generally will use, involves purchasing the shares of an announced acquisition target company at a discount to their expected value upon completion of the acquisition. The Sub-Advisors may sell securities short when the terms of a proposed acquisition call for the exchange of common stock and/or other securities. In such a case, the common stock of the company to be acquired may be purchased and, at approximately the same time, an equivalent amount of the acquiring company’s common stock and/or other securities may be sold short. The Fund generally engages in active and frequent trading of portfolio securities to achieve its principal investment strategies.

Convertible Arbitrage (Alternative Strategies Fund)

The Alternative Strategies Fund may utilize convertible arbitrage as an investment strategy. Convertible Arbitrage is a specialized strategy that seeks to profit from mispricings between a firm’s convertible securities and its underlying equity. The most common convertible arbitrage approach matches a long position in the convertible security with a short position in the underlying common stock. The Fund seeks to purchase convertible securities at discounts to their expected future values and sell short shares of the underlying common stock in order to mitigate equity market movements. As stock prices rise and the convertible security becomes more equity sensitive, the Fund will sell short additional common shares in order to maintain the relationship between the convertible security and the underlying common stock. As stock prices fall, the Fund will typically buy back a portion of shares which it had sold short. Positions are typically designed to earn income from coupon or dividend payments, and from the short sale of common stock.

 

32


Table of Contents

Capital Structure Arbitrage (Alternative Strategies Fund)

The Alternative Strategies Fund may utilize capital structure arbitrage as an investment strategy. This strategy attempts to take advantage of relative pricing discrepancies between related debt and/or equity securities. For example, the Fund may purchase a senior secured security of an issuer and sell short an unsecured security of the same issuer. In this example the trade would be profitable if credit quality spreads widened or if the issuer went bankrupt and the recovery rate for the senior debt was higher. Another example might involve the Fund purchasing one class of common stock while selling short a different class of common stock of the same issuer. It is expected that, over time, the relative mispricing of the securities will disappear, at which point the position will be liquidated.

Initial Public Offerings

The Funds may purchase securities of companies in initial public offerings (“IPOs”). By definition, IPOs have not traded publicly until the time of their offerings. Special risks associated with IPOs may include a limited number of shares available for trading, unseasoned trading, lack of investor knowledge of the company, and limited operating history, all of which may contribute to price volatility. Many IPOs are issued by undercapitalized companies of small or micro cap size. The effect of IPOs on a Fund’s performance depends on a variety of factors, including the number of IPOs the Fund invests in relative to the size of the Fund and whether and to what extent a security purchased in an IPO appreciates or depreciates in value. As a Fund’s asset base increases, IPOs often have a diminished effect on such Fund’s performance.

Risks of Investing in Small Companies

Each Fund may, and the Smaller Companies Fund will, invest in securities of small companies. Additional risks of such investments include the markets on which such securities are frequently traded. In many instances the securities of smaller companies are traded only over-the-counter or on a regional securities exchange, and the frequency and volume of their trading is substantially less than is typical of larger companies. Therefore, the securities of smaller companies may be subject to greater and more abrupt price fluctuations. When making large sales, a Fund may have to sell portfolio holdings at discounts from quoted prices or may have to make a series of small sales over an extended period of time due to the trading volume of smaller company securities. Investors should be aware that, based on the foregoing factors, an investment in the Funds may be subject to greater price fluctuations than an investment in a fund that invests exclusively in larger, more established companies. A Sub-Advisor’s research efforts may also play a greater role in selecting securities for a Fund than in a fund that invests in larger, more established companies.

Investment Restrictions

The Trust (on behalf of each Fund) has adopted the following restrictions as fundamental policies, which may not be changed without the favorable vote of the holders of a “majority of the outstanding voting securities,” as defined in the 1940 Act, of a Fund. Under the 1940 Act, the “vote of the holders of a majority of the outstanding voting securities” means the vote of the holders of the lesser of (i) 67% of the shares of a Fund represented at a meeting at which the holders of more than 50% of its outstanding shares are represented or (ii) more than 50% of the outstanding shares of a Fund.

As a matter of fundamental policy, each Fund is diversified; i.e. , as to 75% of the value of its total assets: (i) no more than 5% of the value of its total assets may be invested in the securities of any one issuer (other than U.S. Government securities); and (ii) a Fund may not purchase more than 10% of the outstanding voting securities of an issuer. Each Fund’s investment objective is also fundamental.

The following fundamental investment restrictions pertain to the Equity Fund, International Fund, and Smaller Companies Fund.

 

33


Table of Contents

Each Fund may not:

1. Issue senior securities, borrow money or pledge its assets, except that (i) a Fund may borrow on an unsecured basis from banks for temporary or emergency purposes or for the clearance of transactions in amounts not exceeding 20% of its total assets (not including the amount borrowed), provided that it will not make investments while borrowings in excess of 5% of the value of its total assets are outstanding; and (ii) this restriction shall not prohibit a Fund from engaging in options, futures and foreign currency transactions or short sales.

2. Purchase securities on margin, except such short-term credits as may be necessary for the clearance of transactions.

3. Act as underwriter (except to the extent a Fund may be deemed to be an underwriter in connection with the sale of securities in its investment portfolio).

4. Invest 25% or more of its net assets, calculated at the time of purchase and taken at market value, in any one industry (other than U.S. Government securities).

5. Purchase or sell real estate or interests in real estate or real estate limited partnerships (although a Fund may purchase and sell securities which are secured by real estate and securities of companies which invest or deal in real estate).

6. Purchase or sell commodities or commodity futures contracts, except that a Fund may purchase and sell stock index futures contracts and currency and financial futures contracts and related options in accordance with any rules of the CFTC.

7. Invest in oil and gas limited partnerships or oil, gas or mineral leases.

8. Make loans of money (except for purchases of debt securities consistent with the investment policies of a Fund and except for repurchase agreements).

9. Make investments for the purpose of exercising control or management.

With respect to the restriction on investments in oil and gas limited partnerships specified in restriction 7, only direct investment in oil and gas limited partnerships are prohibited. Therefore, the Funds may invest in publicly traded master limited partnerships, public limited partnerships or other investment vehicles that invest in oil and gas limited partnerships.

Each of the Equity Fund, International Fund, and Smaller Companies Fund observes the following non-fundamental restrictions, which may be changed by a vote of the Board at any time:

Each Fund may not:

1. Invest in the securities of other investment companies or purchase any other investment company’s voting securities or make any other investment in other investment companies except to the extent permitted by federal law. (Generally, the 1940 Act prohibits a Fund from investing more than 5% of the value of its total assets in any one investment company or more than 10% of the value of its total assets in investment companies as a group, and also restricts its investment in any investment company to 3% of the voting securities of such investment company. There are some exceptions, however, to these limitations pursuant to various rules promulgated by the SEC.)

 

34


Table of Contents

2. Invest more than 15% of its net assets in securities that are restricted as to disposition or otherwise are illiquid or have no readily available market (except for securities that are determined by the Sub-Advisor, pursuant to procedures adopted by the Board, to be liquid).

The following fundamental investment restrictions pertain to the Alternative Strategies Fund.

The Alternative Strategies Fund may not:

1. Issue senior securities, except as otherwise permitted by its fundamental policy on borrowing.

2. Borrow money, except that it may (a) borrow from banks (as defined in the 1940 Act) in amounts up to 33-1/3% of its total assets (including the amount borrowed), (b) borrow amounts equal to an additional 5% of its total assets for temporary purposes, (c) engage in transactions in mortgage dollar rolls and reverse repurchase agreements, make leveraged investments, and engage in other transactions that may entail the use of leverage, where, if necessary to comply with Section 18(f) of the 1940 Act, the Fund sets aside in a segregated account, and marks to market daily, liquid securities, such as cash, U.S. government securities, or high-grade debt obligations, equal to the Fund’s potential obligation or economic exposure under these transactions and instruments.

3. Purchase securities on margin, except such short-term credits as may be necessary for the clearance of transactions.

4. Act as underwriter (except to the extent the Fund may be deemed to be an underwriter in connection with the sale of securities in its investment portfolio).

5. Invest 25% or more of its net assets, calculated at the time of purchase and taken at market value, in any one industry (other than U.S. Government securities).

6. Purchase or sell real estate or interests in real estate, except that (i) the Fund may purchase securities backed by real estate or interests therein, or issued by companies, including real estate investment trusts, which invest in real estate or interests therein; and (ii) the Fund may acquire and dispose of real estate or interests in real estate acquired through the exercise of its rights as a holder of debt obligations secured by real estate or interests therein. (For purposes of this restriction, investments by a Fund in mortgage-backed securities and other securities representing interests in mortgage pools shall not constitute the purchase or sale of real estate or interests in real estate or real estate mortgage loans).

7. Purchase or sell commodities or commodity futures contracts, except that the Fund may purchase and sell stock index futures contracts and currency and financial futures contracts and related options in accordance with any rules of the CFTC.

8. Make loans of money (except for purchases of debt securities consistent with the investment policies of the Fund and except for repurchase agreements).

9. Make investments for the purpose of exercising control or management.

The Alternative Strategies Fund observes the following non-fundamental restrictions, which may be changed by a vote of the Board at any time:

 

35


Table of Contents

The Alternative Strategies Fund may not:

1. Invest in the securities of other investment companies or purchase any other investment company’s voting securities or make any other investment in other investment companies except to the extent permitted by federal law. (Generally, the 1940 Act prohibits the Fund from investing more than 5% of the value of its total assets in any one investment company or more than 10% of the value of its total assets in investment companies as a group, and also restricts its investment in any investment company to 3% of the voting securities of such investment company. There are some exceptions, however, to these limitations pursuant to various rules promulgated by the SEC.)

2. Invest more than 15% of its net assets in securities that are restricted as to disposition or otherwise are illiquid or have no readily available market (except for securities that are determined by a Sub-Advisor, pursuant to procedures adopted by the Board, to be liquid).

BOARD OF TRUSTEES

The overall management of the business and affairs of the Trust is vested with its Board, which is responsible for protecting the interests of shareholders. The Trustees are experienced executives who meet throughout the year to oversee the activities of the Funds, review the compensation arrangements between the Advisor and the Sub-Advisors, review contractual arrangements with companies that provide services to the Funds, including the Advisor, Sub-Advisors, and the Funds’ administrator, custodian and transfer agent, and review the Funds’ performance. The day-to-day operations of the Trust are delegated to its officers, subject to a Fund’s investment objectives and policies and to general supervision by the Board. A majority of the Trustees are not otherwise affiliated with the Advisor or any of the Sub-Advisors.

Independent Trustees*

 

Name, Address and

Year Born

  

Position(s)
Held with the
Trust

  

Term of Office
and Length of
Time Served

  

Principal Occupation(s)
During Past Five Years

  

# of
Portfolios
in Fund
Complex
Overseen
by
Trustee

  

Other
Directorships
Held by
Trustee

During
Past Five
Years

Julie Allecta

1676 N. California Blvd.,

Suite 500

Walnut Creek, CA 94596

(born 1946)

   Independent Trustee    Open-ended term; served since June 2013    Member of Governing Council, Independent Directors Council (education for investment company independent directors) since 2014; Director, Northern California Society of Botanical Artists (botanical art) since 2014; Director, WildCare Bay Area (wildlife rehabilitation) since 2007; and Retired Partner, Paul Hastings LLP (law firm) from 1999 to 2009.    4   

Forward Funds

(17 portfolios)

Salient MS Trust (4 portfolios)

 

36


Table of Contents

Name, Address and

Year Born

  

Position(s)
Held with the
Trust

  

Term of Office
and Length of
Time Served

  

Principal Occupation(s)
During Past Five Years

  

# of
Portfolios
in Fund
Complex
Overseen
by
Trustee

  

Other
Directorships
Held by
Trustee

During
Past Five
Years

Frederick A. Eigenbrod, Jr., Ph.D.

1676 N. California Blvd., Suite 500

Walnut Creek, CA 94596

(born 1941)

   Independent Trustee   

Open-ended term;

served since inception

   Vice President, RoutSource Consulting Services (organizational planning and development) since 2002.    4    None

Harold M. Shefrin, Ph.D.

1676 N. California Blvd., Suite 500

Walnut Creek, CA 94596

(born 1948)

   Independent Trustee   

Open-ended term;

served since February 2005

   Professor, Department of Finance, Santa Clara University since 1979.    4    SA Funds – Investment Trust (10 portfolios)

Taylor M. Welz

1676 N. California Blvd., Suite 500

Walnut Creek, CA 94596

(born 1959)

   Independent Trustee   

Open-ended term;

served since inception

   CPA/PFS, CFP; President, Chief Compliance Officer & Sole Owner, Welz Financial Services, Inc. (investment advisory services and retirement planning), since 2007; and Partner and Chief Compliance Officer, Bowman & Company LLP (certified public accountants) from 1987 to 2007.    4    None

Interested Trustees & Officers

 

Name, Address and

Year Born

  

Position(s)
Held with
the
Trust

  

Term of Office
and Length of
Time Served

  

Principal Occupation(s)
During Past Five Years

  

# of
Portfolios
in Fund
Complex
Overseen
by
Trustee

  

Other
Directorships
Held by
Trustee/

Officer During
Past Five
Years

Jeremy DeGroot**

1676 N. California Blvd., Suite 500

Walnut Creek, CA 94596

(born 1963)

   Chairman of the Board, Trustee and President   

Open-ended term;

served as a Chairman since March 2017, Trustee since December 2008 and President since 2014

  

Chief Investment Officer of Litman Gregory Asset Management, LLC since 2008; and Co-Chief Investment Officer of Litman Gregory Asset Management, LLC from 2003 to

2008.

   4    None

 

37


Table of Contents

Name, Address and

Year Born

  

Position(s)
Held with the
Trust

  

Term of Office
and Length of
Time Served

  

Principal Occupation(s)
During Past Five Years

  

# of
Portfolios
in Fund
Complex
Overseen
by
Trustee

  

Other
Directorships
Held by
Trustee/

Officer During
Past Five
Years

Steven Savage

1676 N. California Blvd., Suite 500

Walnut Creek, CA 94596

(born 1961)

   Secretary   

Open-ended term;

served since 2014

   Managing Partner of the Advisor since 2010; Partner of the Advisor from 2003 to 2010.    N/A    None

John Coughlan

1676 N. California Blvd., Suite 500

Walnut Creek, CA 94596

(born 1956)

   Treasurer and Chief Compliance Officer    Open-ended term; served as Treasurer since inception, and as Chief Compliance Officer since September 2004    Chief Operating Officer and Chief Compliance Officer of the Advisor since 2004.    N/A    None

 

* Denotes Trustees who are not “interested persons” of the Trust, as such term is defined under the 1940 Act (the “Independent Trustees”).
** Denotes Trustees who are “interested persons” of the Trust, as such term is defined under the 1940 Act, because of their relationship with the Advisor (the “Interested Trustees”).

In addition, Jack Chee and Rajat Jain, each a Senior Research Analyst at the Advisor, are each an Assistant Secretary of the Trust.

Additional Information Concerning Our Board of Trustees

The Role of the Board

The Board oversees the management and operations of the Trust. Like most mutual funds, the day-to-day management and operation of the Trust is performed by various service providers to the Trust, such as the Advisor, the Sub-Advisors, and the Funds’ distributor, administrator, custodian, and transfer agent, each of which is discussed in greater detail in this SAI. The Board has appointed senior employees of certain of these service providers as officers of the Trust, with the responsibility to monitor and report to the Board on the Trust’s operations. In conducting this oversight, the Board receives regular reports from these officers and service providers regarding the Trust’s operations. For example, investment officers report on the performance of the Funds. The Board has appointed a Chief Compliance Officer who administers the Trust’s compliance program and regularly reports to the Board as to compliance matters. Some of these reports are provided as part of formal “Board Meetings,” which are typically held quarterly, in person, and involve the Board’s review of recent Trust operations. From time to time, one or more members of the Board may also meet with management in less formal settings, between formal “Board Meetings,” to discuss various topics. In all cases, however, the role of the Board and of any individual Trustee is one of oversight and not of management of the day-to-day affairs of the Trust and its oversight role does not make the Board a guarantor of the Trust’s investments, portfolio pricing, operations or activities.

 

38


Table of Contents

Board Structure , Leadership

The Board has structured itself in a manner that it believes allows it to perform its oversight function effectively. It has established three standing committees, an Audit Committee, a Nominating Committee and a Qualified Legal Compliance Committee, which are discussed in greater detail under “ Board of Trustees – Board Committees” below. Each of the three standing committees of the Board is comprised entirely of Independent Trustees. The Board does not currently have a designated lead Independent Trustee. The Independent Trustees have engaged their own independent counsel to advise them on matters relating to their responsibilities in connection with the Trust. The Board reviews its leadership structure periodically as part of its annual self-assessment process and believes that its structure is appropriate to enable the Board to exercise its oversight of the Trust.

Presently, Mr. DeGroot serves as the Chairman of the Board and President of the Trust and Chief Investment Officer of the Advisor. Mr. DeGroot is an “interested person” of the Trust, as defined in the 1940 Act, by virtue of his employment relationship with the Advisor. In developing the Board’s structure, the Board has determined that Mr. DeGroot’s history with the Trust, familiarity with the Funds’ investment objectives and extensive experience in the field of investments qualifies him to serve as the Chairman of the Board. The Board has also determined that the function and composition of the Audit Committee and Nominating Committees are appropriate means to address any potential conflicts of interest that may arise from the Chairman’s status as an Interested Trustee.

Board Oversight of Risk Management

As part of its oversight function, the Board receives and reviews various risk management reports and assessments and discusses these matters with appropriate management and other personnel. Risk management is a broad concept comprised of many disparate elements (such as, for example, investment risk, issuer and counterparty risk, compliance risk, operational risk, valuation risk and business continuity risk). Consequently, Board oversight of different types of risks is handled in different ways. In the course of providing oversight, the Board and its committees receive reports on the Trust’s activities regarding the Trust’s investment portfolios and its financial accounting and reporting. The Board also receives periodic reports as to how the Advisor conducts service provider oversight and how it monitors for other risks, such as derivatives risk, business continuity risks and risks that might be present with individual Sub-Advisors or specific investment strategies. The Audit Committee meets regularly with the Chief Compliance Officer to discuss compliance and operational risks. The Audit Committee’s meetings with the Treasurer and the Trust’s independent registered public accounting firm also contribute to its oversight of certain internal control risks. The full Board receives reports from the Advisor as to investment risks as well as other risks that may be also discussed in the Audit Committee.

The Board receives regular reports from a “Valuation Committee,” composed of the following senior employees of the Advisor: John Coughlan, Jeremy DeGroot, Jack Chee and Rajat Jain. The Valuation Committee operates pursuant to the Trust’s Valuation Procedures, as approved by the Board. The Valuation Committee reports to the Board on the valuation of the Funds’ portfolio securities, reviews the performance of each approved pricing service, and recommends to the Board for approval pricing agents for the valuation of Fund holdings.

The Trust believes that the Board’s role in risk oversight must be evaluated on a case-by-case basis and that its existing role in risk oversight is appropriate. However, not all risks that may affect the Trust can be identified or processes and controls developed to eliminate or mitigate their occurrence or effects, and some risks are beyond any control of the Trust, the Advisor or its affiliates or other service providers.

Information about Each Trustee’s Qualification, Experience, Attributes or Skills

The Board believes that each of the Trustees has the qualifications, experience, attributes and skills (“Trustee Attributes”) appropriate to their continued service as Trustees of the Trust in light of the Trust’s business and structure. Each of the Trustees has a demonstrated record of business and professional accomplishment that indicates that they have the ability to critically review, evaluate and assess information provided to them. Certain of

 

39


Table of Contents

these business and professional experiences are set forth in detail in the charts above. In addition, certain of the Trustees have served on boards for organizations other than the Trust, and each of the Trustees has served on the Board of the Trust for a number of years. They therefore have substantial boardroom experience and, in their service to the Trust, have gained substantial insight as to the operation of the Trust and have demonstrated a commitment to discharging oversight duties as Trustees in the interest of shareholders.

In addition to the information provided in the charts above, certain additional information concerning each particular Trustee and certain of their Trustee Attributes is provided below. The information provided below, and in the charts above, is not all-inclusive. Many Trustee Attributes involve intangible elements, such as intelligence, work ethic, and the ability to work together, to communicate effectively, to exercise judgment, to ask incisive questions, to manage people and problems, and to develop solutions. The Board annually conducts a self-assessment wherein the effectiveness of the Board and individual Trustees is reviewed. In conducting its annual self-assessment, the Board has determined that the Trustees have the appropriate attributes and experience to continue to serve effectively as Trustees of the Trust.

The summaries set forth below as to the qualifications, attributes, and skills of the Trustees are furnished in response to disclosure requirements imposed by the SEC, do not constitute any representation or guarantee that the Board or any Trustee has any special expertise or experience, and do not impose any greater or additional responsibility or obligation on, or change any standard of care applicable to, any such person or the Board as a whole than otherwise would be the case.

Mr. DeGroot’s Trustee Attributes include his position as principal and Chief Investment Officer of Litman Gregory Asset Management, LLC (“LGAM”). In this position, Mr. DeGroot is responsible for overseeing Sub-Advisor due diligence, asset class research and portfolio tactical allocation decisions. Mr. DeGroot is also Portfolio Manager of the Alternative Strategies Fund and Co-Portfolio Manager of the Equity Fund, the International Fund and the Smaller Companies Fund. He is frequently quoted in the national media in the areas of asset allocation and manager selection. He holds the Chartered Financial Analyst ® (CFA ® ) designation. Mr. DeGroot also has prior experience as an economics consultant and economist.

Ms. Allecta’s Trustee Attributes include her significant professional experience in the legal field as counsel to various mutual funds and private funds. Ms. Allecta also has mutual fund board experience, having served on the board of trustees of Forward Funds since 2012, the advisory board of Forward Funds since 2010, and the board of trustees of the Salient MS Trust since 2015. Ms. Allecta has also been a member of the Governing Council of the Independent Directors Council since 2014.

Mr. Eigenbrod’s Trustee Attributes include his significant business advisory experience serving on the Board of Directors for Right Management Consultants providing management and organizational development consulting service as an independent consultant and executive coach.

Mr. Shefrin’s Trustee Attributes include his distinguished academic career as a Professor at Santa Clara University, where he teaches finance. Mr. Shefrin also has a number of years of mutual fund board experience, having served on the board of trustees of SA Funds - Investment Trust since 1999.

Mr. Welz’s Trustee Attributes include many years of financial reporting, auditing and investment advisory experience. Mr. Welz is a Certified Public Accountant and also serves as the President, Chief Compliance Officer and Sole Owner of Welz Financial Services, Inc., an investment advisory services and retirement planning firm.

 

40


Table of Contents

Board Committees

The Board has three standing committees as described below:

Audit Committee

 

Members    Description    Committee Meetings
During Fiscal Year Ended
December 31, 2016

Julie Allecta

Frederick A. Eigenbrod, Jr., Ph.D.

Harold M. Shefrin, Ph.D. (Chairman)

Taylor M. Welz

   Responsible for advising the full Board with respect to accounting, auditing and financial matters affecting the Trust.    3

Qualified Legal Compliance Committee

 

Members    Description    Committee Meetings
During Fiscal Year Ended
December 31, 2016

Julie Allecta

Frederick A. Eigenbrod, Jr., Ph.D.

Harold M. Shefrin, Ph.D.

Taylor M. Welz

   Responsible for the receipt, review and consideration of any report made or referred to it by an attorney of evidence of a material violation of applicable U.S. federal or state securities law, material breach of a fiduciary duty under U.S. federal or state law or a similar material violation by the Trust or by any officer, Trustee, employee or agent of the Trust    0

Nominating Committee

 

Members    Description    Committee Meetings
During Fiscal Year Ended
December 31, 2016

Julie Allecta

Frederick A. Eigenbrod, Jr., Ph.D. (Chairman)

Harold M. Shefrin, Ph.D.

Taylor M. Welz

   Responsible for evaluating the size and compensation of the Board and seeking and reviewing candidates for consideration as nominees for Trustees.    0

 

41


Table of Contents

Trustee Ownership of Fund Shares

As of December 31, 2016, the Trustees owned the following dollar range of shares of the Funds (1) :

 

Name of Trustee

   Equity
Fund
   International
Fund
   Smaller
Companies
Fund
   Alternative
Strategies
Fund
   Aggregate Dollar Range
of Equity Securities in all
Registered Investment
Companies Overseen by
Trustee in Family of
Investment Companies  (2)

Independent Trustees

              

Julie Allecta

   D    D    A    A    E

Frederick A. Eigenbrod, Jr., Ph.D.

   E    D    A    E    E

Harold M. Shefrin, Ph.D.

   A    D    A    A    D

Taylor M. Welz

   E    D    D    E    E

Interested Trustees

              

Kenneth E. Gregory (3)

   E    E    E    E    E

Jeremy DeGroot

   E    E    C    E    E

 

(1) Dollar Range of Equity Securities in the Fund:

A=None

B=$1-$10,000

C=$10,001-$50,000

D=$50,001-$100,000

E= Over $100,000

(2) As of December 31, 2016, the Trustees each oversaw four registered investment companies in the fund complex.
(3) Effective March 2, 2017, Mr. Gregory resigned as Chairman of the Board of Trustees.

Trustee Interest in Investment Advisor, Distributor or Affiliates

As of December 31, 2016, the Independent Trustees, and their respective immediate family members, did not own any securities beneficially or of record in the Advisor, the Sub-Advisors, U.S. Bancorp, Quasar Distributors LLC (the “Prior Distributor”), ALPS Distributors, Inc. (the “Distributor) or any of their respective affiliates. Further, the Independent Trustees and their respective immediate family members did not have a direct or indirect interest, the value of which exceeds $120,000, in the Advisor, the Sub-Advisors, U.S. Bancorp, the Prior Distributor, the Distributor, or any of their respective affiliates during the two most recently completed calendar years.

Compensation

For the year ended December 31, 2016, each Independent Trustee received an annual fee of $90,000, allocated $9,000 per Fund with the remaining balance pro-rated quarterly based on each Fund’s assets, plus expenses incurred by the Trustees in connection with attendance at meetings of the Board and its committees.

As of March 31, 2017, to the best of the knowledge of the Trust, the Board and the officers of the Funds, as a group, owned of record less than 1% of the outstanding shares of the Equity Fund, the International Fund, the Smaller Companies Fund, and the Alternative Strategies Fund.

The table below illustrates the annual compensation paid to each Trustee of the Trust during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2016:

 

     Aggregate Compensation from                       

Name of Person,

Position

   Equity
Fund
     International
Fund
     Smaller
Companies
Fund
     Alternative
Strategies
Fund
     Pension or
Retirement
Benefits
Accrued as Part
of Fund
Expenses
     Estimated
Annual
Benefits
Upon
Retirement
     Total
Compensation
from Trust
Paid to
Trustees
 

Independent Trustees

 

                 

Julie Allecta, Trustee

   $ 17,637      $ 26,659      $ 13,992      $ 31,711        None        None      $ 90,000  

Frederick A. Eigenbrod, Jr., Ph.D.

Trustee

   $ 17,637      $ 26,659      $ 13,992      $ 31,711        None        None      $ 90,000  

 

42


Table of Contents
     Aggregate Compensation from                   

Name of Person,

Position

   Equity
Fund
     International
Fund
     Smaller
Companies
Fund
     Alternative
Strategies
Fund
     Pension or
Retirement
Benefits
Accrued as Part
of Fund
Expenses
   Estimated
Annual
Benefits
Upon
Retirement
   Total
Compensation
from Trust
Paid to
Trustees
 

Harold M. Shefrin, Ph.D.

Trustee

   $ 17,637      $ 26,659      $ 13,992      $ 31,711      None    None    $ 90,000  

Taylor M. Welz,

Trustee

   $ 17,637      $ 26,659      $ 13,992      $ 31,711      None    None    $ 90,000  

Interested Trustees

 

                 

Jeremy DeGroot,

President and Trustee*

     None        None        None        None      None    None      None  

Kenneth E. Gregory, Trustee*

     None        None        None        None      None    None      None  

 

* As of December 31, 2016, Messrs. DeGroot and Gregory were Interested Trustees because of their relationship with the Advisor and accordingly served on the Board without compensation. As of March 2, 2017, Mr. Gregory resigned as Chairman of the Board of Trustees.

Control Persons and Principal Shareholders

A principal shareholder is any person who owns (either of record or beneficially) 5% or more of the outstanding shares of any class of any of the Funds. A control person is one who owns, either directly or indirectly, more than 25% of the voting securities of a Fund or acknowledges the existence of such control. A control person can have a significant impact on the outcome of a shareholder vote. As of March 31, 2017, the shareholders indicated below were considered to be either a control person or principal shareholder of the Funds.

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund – Institutional Class

 

Name and Address

   Shares      % Ownership     Type of Ownership

Charles Schwab & Co., Inc.

101 Montgomery Street

San Francisco, CA 94104-4151

     8,648,436.338        48.26   Record

National Financial Services, Corp.

499 Washington Blvd.

Jersey City, NJ 07310-2010

     2,610,264.232        14.56   Record

Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund – Investor Class

 

Name and Address

   Shares      % Ownership     Type of Ownership

National Financial Services, Corp.

499 Washington Blvd.

Jersey City, NJ 07310-2010

     2,859.010        59.12   Record

TD Ameritrade, Inc.

P.O. Box 226

Omaha, NE 68103-2226

     1,298.373        26.85   Record

 

43


Table of Contents

Name and Address

   Shares    % Ownership     Type of Ownership

Lea M. Stevens Family Trust

177 Brett Rd.

Fairfield, CT 06824-1718

   422.531      8.74   Record

Charles Schwab & Co., Inc.

101 Montgomery Street

San Francisco, CA 94104-4151

   256.040      5.29   Record

 

44


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund – Institutional Class

 

Name and Address

   Shares      % Ownership     Type of Ownership

Charles Schwab & Co., Inc.

101 Montgomery Street

San Francisco, CA 94104-4151

     12,617,164.750        31.67   Record

National Financial Services, Corp.

499 Washington Blvd.

Jersey City, NJ 07310-2010

     4,179,038.760        10.49   Record

Mac & Co.

500 Grant Street, Room 151-1010

Pittsburgh, PA 15219-2502

     5,743,093.722        14.41   Record

Litman Gregory Masters International Fund – Investor Class

 

Name and Address

   Shares      % Ownership     Type of Ownership

National Financial Services, Corp.

499 Washington Blvd.

Jersey City, NH 07310-2010

     1,623,833.209        93.33   Record

Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund – Institutional Class

 

Name and Address

   Shares      % Ownership     Type of Ownership

Charles Schwab & Co., Inc.

101 Montgomery Street

San Francisco, CA 94104-4151

     589,627.148        36.00   Record

National Financial Services, Corp.

499 Washington Blvd.

Jersey City, NJ 07310-2010

     279,202.730        17.05   Record

TD Ameritrade, Inc.

P.O. Box 2226

Omaha, NE 68103-2226

     134,302.376        8.20   Record

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund – Institutional Class

 

Name and Address

   Shares      % Ownership     Type of Ownership

Charles Schwab & Co., Inc.

101 Montgomery Street

San Francisco, CA 94104-4151

     47,086,724.137        35.15   Record

National Financial Services, Corp.

499 Washington Blvd.

Jersey City, NJ 07310-2010

     27,341,162.551        20.41   Record

TD Ameritrade Inc.

P.O. Box 2226

Omaha, NE 68103-2226

     10,226,604.988        7.63   Record

 

45


Table of Contents

Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund – Investor Class

 

Name and Address

   Shares      % Ownership     Type of Ownership

Charles Schwab & Co., Inc.

101 Montgomery Street

San Francisco, CA 94104-4151

     7,561,699.650        46.85   Record

National Financial Services, Corp.

499 Washington Blvd.

Jersey City, NJ 07310-2010

     5,364,412.257        33.24   Record

TD Ameritrade Inc.

P.O. Box 2226

Omaha, NE 68103-2226

     1,669,459.581        10.34   Record

PORTFOLIO HOLDINGS DISCLOSURE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

The Board has adopted policies to ensure that any disclosure of information about the Funds’ portfolio holdings is in the best interest of Fund shareholders; and to make clear that information about the Funds’ portfolio holdings should not be distributed to any person unless:

 

    The disclosure is required to respond to a regulatory request, court order or other legal proceedings;

 

    The disclosure is to a mutual fund rating or statistical agency or person performing similar functions who has signed a confidentiality agreement with the Trust;

 

    The disclosure is made to internal parties involved in the investment process, administration or custody of the Funds, including but not limited to the Advisor, the Sub-Advisors and the Board;

 

    The disclosure is (a) in connection with a quarterly, semi-annual or annual report that is available to the public or (b) relates to information that is otherwise available to the public ( e.g., portfolio information that is available on a Fund’s website); or

 

    The disclosure is made pursuant to prior written approval of the Chief Compliance Officer of the Advisor or the Funds, or the President of the Trust.

The Funds make their portfolio holdings publicly available on the Funds’ website 15 days after the end of each calendar quarter.

The Funds do not have any individualized ongoing arrangements to make available information about the Funds’ portfolio securities to any person other than the disclosures made, as described above, to internal parties involved in the Funds’ investment process, administration or custody of the Funds. To the extent required to perform services for the Funds or the Advisor, the Funds’ or the Advisor’s legal counsel or the Funds’ auditors may obtain portfolio holdings information. Such information is provided subject to confidentiality requirements.

 

46


Table of Contents

THE ADVISOR AND THE SUB-ADVISORS

The Advisor is a registered investment advisor with the SEC under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, as amended (the “Advisers Act”). The Advisor is wholly owned by LGAM. Craig Litman, Kenneth Gregory and certain other senior employees of LGAM own approximately 85% of LGAM, and the remainder of LGAM is owned by a private equity firm.

Subject to the supervision of the Board, investment management and related services are provided by the Advisor to each of the Funds, pursuant to an investment advisory agreement (the “Advisory Agreement”). The Trust, on behalf of the Funds, and the Advisor are parties to the Advisory Agreement. Shareholders are not parties to, or intended (or “third party”) beneficiaries of, the Advisory Agreement. Rather, the Trust and its respective investment series are the sole intended beneficiaries of the Advisory Agreement. Neither this SAI nor the Prospectus is intended to give rise to any contract rights or other rights in any shareholder, other than any rights conferred by federal or state securities laws that may not be waived.

In addition, the assets of each Fund are divided into segments by the Advisor, and individual selection of securities in each segment is provided by a Sub-Advisor approved by the Board pursuant, in each case, to an investment sub-advisory agreement (each, a “Management Agreement”). Under the Advisory Agreement, the Advisor has agreed to (i) furnish each Fund with advice and recommendations with respect to the selection and continued employment of Sub-Advisors to manage the actual investment of each Fund’s assets; (ii) direct the allocation of each Fund’s assets among such Sub-Advisors; (iii) oversee the investments made by such Sub-Advisors on behalf of each Fund, subject to the ultimate supervision and direction of the Board; (iv) oversee the actions of the Sub-Advisors with respect to voting proxies for each Fund, filing Section 13 ownership reports with the SEC for each Fund, and taking other actions on behalf of each Fund; (v) maintain the books and records required to be maintained by each Fund except to the extent arrangements have been made for such books and records to be maintained by the administrator, another agent of each Fund or a Sub-Advisor; (vi) furnish reports, statements and other data on securities, economic conditions and other matters related to the investment of each Fund’s assets that each Fund’s administrator or distributor or the officers of the Trust may reasonably request; and (vii) render to the Board such periodic and special reports with respect to each Fund’s investment activities as the Board may reasonably request, including at least one in-person appearance annually before the Board.

The Advisor has agreed, at its own expense, to maintain such staff and employ or retain such personnel and consult with such other persons as it shall from time to time determine to be necessary to the performance of its obligations under the Advisory Agreement. Personnel of the Advisor may serve as officers of the Trust provided they do so without compensation from the Trust. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the staff and personnel of the Advisor shall be deemed to include persons employed or retained by the Advisor to furnish statistical information, research, and other factual information, advice regarding economic factors and trends, information with respect to technical and scientific developments, and such other information, advice and assistance as the Advisor or the Board may desire and reasonably request. With respect to the operation of each Fund, the Advisor has agreed to be responsible for (i) providing the personnel, office space and equipment reasonably necessary for the operation of the Trust and each Fund including the provision of persons qualified to serve as officers of the Trust; (ii) compensating the Sub-Advisors selected to invest the assets of each Fund; (iii) the expenses of printing and distributing extra copies of each Fund’s prospectus, statement of additional information, and sales and advertising materials (but not the legal, auditing or accounting fees incurred thereto) to prospective investors (but not to existing shareholders); and (iv) the costs of any special Board meetings or shareholder meetings convened for the primary benefit of the Advisor or any Sub-Advisor.

Under each Management Agreement, each Sub-Advisor agrees to invest its allocated portion of the assets of each Fund in accordance with the investment objectives, policies and restrictions of each Fund as set forth in the Trust’s and each Fund’s governing documents, including, without limitation, the Trust’s Agreement and Declaration of Trust and By-Laws; each Fund’s prospectus, statement of additional information, and undertakings; and such other limitations, policies and procedures as the Advisor or the Trustees of the Trust may impose from time to time in writing to the Sub-Advisor. In providing such services, each Sub-Advisor shall at all times adhere to the provisions and restrictions contained in the federal securities laws, applicable state securities laws, the Code, and other applicable law.

 

47


Table of Contents

Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, each Sub-Advisor has agreed to (i) furnish each Fund with advice and recommendations with respect to the investment of the Sub-Advisor’s allocated portion of each Fund’s assets; (ii) effect the purchase and sale of portfolio securities for the Sub-Advisor’s allocated portion or determine that a portion of such allocated portion will remain uninvested; (iii) manage and oversee the investments of the Sub-Advisor’s allocated portion, subject to the ultimate supervision and direction of the Board; (iv) vote proxies and take other actions with respect to the securities in the Sub-Advisor’s allocated portion; (v) maintain the books and records required to be maintained with respect to the securities in the Sub-Advisor’s allocated portion; (vi) furnish reports, statements and other data on securities, economic conditions and other matters related to the investment of each Fund’s assets which the Advisor, Trustees or the officers of the Trust may reasonably request; and (vii) render to the Board such periodic and special reports with respect to Sub-Advisor’s allocated portion as the Board may reasonably request.

As compensation for the Advisor’s services (including payment of the Sub-Advisors’ fees), each Fund pays the Advisor an advisory fee at the rate specified in the prospectus. In addition to the fees payable to the Advisor and the Funds’ administrator, the Trust is responsible for its operating expenses, including: fees and expenses incurred in connection with the issuance, registration and transfer of its shares; brokerage and commission expenses; all expenses of transfer, receipt, safekeeping, servicing and accounting for the cash, securities and other property of the Trust for the benefit of each Fund including all fees and expenses of its custodian, shareholder services agent and accounting services agent; interest charges on any borrowings; costs and expenses of pricing and calculating its daily NAV and of maintaining its books of account required under the 1940 Act; taxes, if any; a pro rata portion of expenditures in connection with meetings of each Fund’s shareholders and the Board that are properly payable by each Fund; salaries and expenses of officers and fees and expenses of members of the Board or members of any advisory board or committee who are not members of, affiliated with or interested persons of the Advisor; insurance premiums on property or personnel of each Fund that inure to its benefit, including liability and fidelity bond insurance; the cost of preparing and printing reports, proxy statements, prospectuses and statements of additional information of each Fund or other communications for distribution to existing shareholders; legal, auditing and accounting fees; trade association dues; fees and expenses (including legal fees) of registering and maintaining registration of its shares for sale under federal and applicable state and foreign securities laws; all expenses of maintaining and servicing shareholder accounts, including all charges for transfer, shareholder recordkeeping, dividend disbursing, redemption, and other agents for the benefit of each Fund, if any; and all other charges and costs of its operation plus any extraordinary and non-recurring expenses, except as otherwise prescribed in the Advisory Agreement.

Pursuant to a Restated Contractual Advisory Fee Waiver Agreement effective as of January 1, 2006, for one year and renewable annually for additional one-year terms thereafter (the “Fee Waiver Agreement”), the Advisor has agreed to waive a portion of its advisory fees for each Fund to reflect reductions in the Sub-Advisors’ fees. Reductions in Sub-Advisors’ fees can occur due to changes in Sub-Advisors, the negotiation of different Sub-Advisor fee schedules, the reallocation of assets among Sub-Advisors or for other reasons. The Board may terminate the Fee Waiver Agreement upon 60 days’ notice to the Advisor, and the Advisor has reserved the right to decline renewal by written notice to the Trust at least 30 days before the Fee Waiver Agreement’s annual expiration date. The current term of the Fee Waiver Agreement expires on April 30, 2018. The Advisor’s intent in making such waivers is to pass through to the shareholders the benefits of reductions in the fees the Advisor is required to pay to the Sub-Advisors. The Advisor has agreed to waive its right to recoupment of any fees waived pursuant to the Fee Waiver Agreement.

Pursuant to a separate Operating Expenses Limitation Agreement (the “Expenses Limitation Agreement”), the Advisor has also agreed to limit the ordinary operating expenses of the Alternative Strategies Fund, through April 30, 2018 (unless otherwise sooner terminated), to an annual rate of 1.49% for the Institutional Class and 1.74% for the Investor Class. Such annual rates are expressed as a percentage of the daily net assets of the

 

48


Table of Contents

Alternative Strategies Fund attributable to the applicable class. Any fee waiver or expense reimbursement made by the Advisor pursuant to the Expenses Limitation Agreement is subject to the repayment by the Alternative Strategies Fund within three (3) years following the fiscal year in which the fee waiver or expense reimbursement occurred but only if the Alternative Strategies Fund is able to make the repayment without exceeding its current expense limitation and the repayment is approved by the Board. The Advisor has waived its right to receive reimbursement of the portion of its advisory fees waived with respect to prior periods pursuant to this agreement. Operating expenses referred to in this paragraph includes management fees payable to the Advisor but exclude any taxes, interest, brokerage commissions, expenses incurred in connection with any merger or reorganization, borrowing costs (including commitment fees), dividend expenses, acquired fund fees and expenses and extraordinary expenses such as but not limited to litigation costs.

Under the Advisory Agreement and each Management Agreement, the Advisor and the Sub-Advisors will not be liable to the Trust for any error of judgment by the Advisor or the Sub-Advisors or any loss sustained by the Trust except in the case of a breach of fiduciary duty with respect to the receipt of compensation for services (in which case any award of damages will be limited as provided in the 1940 Act) or of willful misfeasance, bad faith or gross negligence by reason of reckless disregard of its obligations and duties under the applicable agreement.

The Advisory Agreement and the Management Agreements remain in effect for an initial period not to exceed two years. Thereafter, if not terminated, the Advisory Agreement and each Management Agreement will continue automatically for successive annual periods, provided that such continuance is specifically approved at least annually (i) by a majority vote of the Independent Trustees cast in person at a meeting called for the purpose of voting on such approval, and (ii) by the Board or by vote of a majority of the outstanding voting securities of a Fund.

The Advisory Agreement and Management Agreements are terminable by vote of the Board or by the holders of a majority of the outstanding voting securities of a Fund at any time without penalty, upon 60 days’ written notice to the Advisor or a Sub-Advisor, as applicable. The Advisory Agreement and the Management Agreements also may be terminated by the Advisor or a Sub-Advisor, as applicable, upon 60 days’ written notice to the applicable Fund. The Advisory Agreement and the Management Agreements terminate automatically upon their assignment (as defined in the 1940 Act).

In determining whether to renew the Advisory Agreement and the Management Agreements each year, the Board requests and evaluates information provided by the Advisor and the Sub-Advisors, in accordance with Section 15(c) of the 1940 Act. A discussion regarding the Board’s basis for approving the Funds’ Advisory Agreement with the Advisor and each Management Agreement (except the Management Agreements with Pictet Asset Management, LTD and Evermore Global Advisors, LLC) is included in the Funds’ Annual Report to Shareholders for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2016. A discussion regarding the Board’s basis for approving the International Fund’s Management Agreement with Pictet Asset Management, LTD is included in the Funds’ Semi-Annual Report to Shareholders for the period ended June 30, 2016. A discussion regarding the Board’s basis for approving the International Fund’s Management Agreement with Evermore Global Advisors, LLC will be included in the Funds’ Semi-Annual Report to Shareholders for the period ending June 30, 2017.

Advisory fees net of waivers each of the Funds paid to the Advisor and the amounts waived by the Advisor for the last three fiscal years are specified below. Additional investment advisory fees payable under the Advisory Agreement may have, instead, been reduced by the Advisor and in some circumstances may be subject to reimbursement by the respective Fund, as discussed previously.

 

49


Table of Contents

Advisor Fees Paid to Advisor, Net of Waivers

 

Year

   Equity
Fund
     International
Fund
     Smaller Companies
Fund
     Alternative Strategies
Fund
 

2016

   $ 3,131,803      $ 7,803,389      $ 266,869      $ 18,058,739  

2015

   $ 3,745,271      $ 12,255,084      $ 631,384      $ 15,654,862  

2014

   $ 4,253,547      $ 13,947,510      $ 845,509      $ 11,008,496  

Amounts Waived by Advisor

 

Year

   Equity
Fund
     International
Fund
     Smaller Companies
Fund
     Alternative Strategies
Fund
 

2016

   $ 290,729      $ 2,733,951      $ 154,623      $ 1,105,732  

2015

   $ 365,493      $ 3,825,355      $ 61,486      $ 1,075,856  

2014

   $ 441,362      $ 3,334,784      $ 85,935      $ 1,079,415  

ADDITIONAL PORTFOLIO MANAGER INFORMATION

The following section provides information regarding each portfolio manager’s compensation, other accounts managed, material conflicts of interests, and any ownership of securities in the Funds for which they sub-advise. Each portfolio manager or team member is referred to as a portfolio manager below. The portfolio managers are shown together in this section only for ease in presenting the information and should not be viewed for purposes of comparing the portfolio managers or their firms against one another. Each firm is a separate entity that may employ different compensation structures and may have different management requirements, and each portfolio manager may be affected by different conflicts of interest.

Other Accounts Managed by Portfolio Managers

The table below identifies, for each portfolio manager of each Fund, the number of accounts managed (excluding the Funds) and the total assets in such accounts, within each of the following categories: registered investment companies, other pooled investment vehicles, and other accounts. To the extent that any of these accounts are based on account performance, this information is reflected in separate tables below. Information in all tables is shown as of the Funds’ fiscal year-end, December 31, 2016. Asset amounts are approximate and have been rounded.

 

    

Registered

Investment Companies
(excluding the Funds)

    

Other Pooled

Investment Vehicles

     Other Accounts  

Fund and Portfolio Manager (Firm)

   Number of
Accounts
     Total
Assets
in the
Accounts
     Number of
Accounts
     Total
Assets
in the
Accounts
     Number of
Accounts
     Total
Assets
in the
Accounts
 

All Funds

                 

Jeremy DeGroot (Litman Gregory)

     0      $ 0        0      $ 0        0      $ 0  

Equity Fund

                 

Jack Chee (Litman Gregory)

     0      $ 0        0      $ 0        0      $ 0  

Rajat Jain (Litman Gregory)

     0      $ 0        0      $ 0        0      $ 0  

Christopher C. Davis (Davis Advisors)

     12      $ 18.1 billion        8      $ 697 million        48      $ 7.2 billion  

Danton Goei (Davis Advisors)

     8      $ 16.5 billion        8      $ 697 million        44      $ 6.4 billion  

Patrick J. English (FMI)

     4      $ 13.6 billion        8      $ 713 million        1,281      $ 8.9 billion  

Andy P. Ramer (FMI)

     4      $ 13.6 billion        8      $ 713 million        1,281      $ 8.9 billion  

Jonathan T. Bloom* (FMI)

     4      $ 13.6 billion        8      $ 713 million        1,281      $ 8.9 billion  

Clyde S. McGregor (Harris)

     2      $ 18.6 billion        8      $ 3.8 billion        106      $ 4.8 billion  

 

50


Table of Contents
    

Registered

Investment Companies
(excluding the Funds)

    

Other Pooled

Investment Vehicles

     Other Accounts  

Fund and Portfolio Manager (Firm)

   Number of
Accounts
     Total
Assets
in the
Accounts
     Number of
Accounts
     Total
Assets
in the
Accounts
     Number of
Accounts
     Total
Assets
in the
Accounts
 

William C. Nygren (Harris)

     6      $ 24.5 billion        2      $ 36.9 million        3      $ 397.2 million  

Scott Moore (Nuance)

     3      $ 889 million        0      $ 0        829      $ 546.7 million  

Frank M. Sands (Sands Capital)

     4      $ 5.3 billion        9      $ 861 million        430      $ 13.6 billion  

A. Michael Sramek (Sands Capital)

     4      $ 5.3 billion        9      $ 861 million        430      $ 13.6 billion  

Richard T. Weiss (WellsCap)

     1      $ 12 million        2      $ 356 million        12      $ 198 million  

International Fund

                 

Rajat Jain (Litman Gregory)

     0      $ 0        0      $ 0        0      $ 0  

David E. Marcus* (Evermore)

     1      $ 445.8 million        0      $ 0        3      $ 203.8 million  

David G. Herro (Harris)

     12      $ 37.3 billion        29      $ 8.1 billion        5      $ 12.4 billion  

Mark Little (Lazard)

     3      $ 6.9 billion        7      $ 656.2 million        49      $ 6.7 billion  

Howard Appleby (Northern Cross)

     5      $ 35.2 billion        0      $ 0        8      $ 1.3 billion  

Jean-Francois Ducrest (Northern Cross)

     5      $ 35.2 billion        0      $ 0        8      $ 1.3 billion  

James LaTorre (Northern Cross)

     5      $ 35.2 billion        0      $ 0        8      $ 1.3 billion  

Fabio Paolini (Pictet)

     2      $ 1.3 billion        5      $ 252 million        10      $ 2.1 billion  

Benjamin (Ben) Beneche (Pictet)

     2      $ 1.3 billion        5      $ 252 million        10      $ 2.1 billion  

W. Vinson Walden (Thornburg)

     2      $ 1.9 billion        5      $ 201.6 million        10      $ 748 million  

Smaller Companies Fund

                 

Jack Chee (Litman Gregory)

     0      $ 0        0      $ 0        0      $ 0  

Jeffrey Bronchick (Cove Street)

     1      $ 33 million        1      $ 97 million        70      $ 784.5 million  

Dennis Bryan (First Pacific)

     1      $ 857.8 million        1      $ 49.5 million        3      $ 692.3 million  

Arik Ahitov (First Pacific)

     1      $ 857.8 million        1      $ 49.5 million        3      $ 692.3 million  

Richard T. Weiss (WellsCap)

     1      $ 40 million        1      $ 356 million        12      $ 198million  

Alternative Strategies Fund

                 

Jeffrey Gundlach (DoubleLine)

     28      $ 80.7billion        19      $ 7.1 billion        59      $ 8.7 billion  

Jeffrey Sherman (DoubleLine)*

     6      $ 11.2 billion        1      $ 14.8 million        1      $ 80.3 million  

Steven Romick (First Pacific)

     3      $ 16.7 billion        9      $ 2.3 billion        2      $ 207.8 million  

Brian Selmo (First Pacific)

     3      $ 16.7 billion        9      $ 2.3 billion        2      $ 207.8 million  

Mark Landecker (First Pacific)

     3      $ 16.7 billion        9      $ 2.3 billion        2      $ 207.8 million  

Mark Little (Lazard)

     0      $ 0        0      $ 0        1      $ 266.4  

Matthew Eagan (Loomis Sayles)

     16      $ 38.6 billion        25      $ 12.4 billion        144      $ 22.6 billion  

Kevin Kearns (Loomis Sayles)

     5      $ 1.7 billion        10      $ 2.9 billion        11      $ 1.7 billion  

Todd Vandam (Loomis Sayles)

     3      $ 1.5 billion        11      $ 1.7 billion        21      $ 2.9 billion  

John Burbank (Passport)

     7      $ 187.6 million        11      $ 2.5 billion        3      $ 98.8 million  

John Orrico (Water Island)

     1      $ 1.76 billion        1      $ 12 million        0      $ 0  

Todd Munn (Water Island)

     3      $ 2.21 billion        0      $ 0        0      $ 0  

Roger Foltynowicz (Water Island)

     3      $ 2.21 billion        0      $ 0        0      $ 0  

Gregg Loprete (Water Island)

     3      $ 509 million        0      $ 0        0      $ 0  

 

* Information is as of March 17, 2017.

The following table reflects information regarding accounts for which the portfolio manager has day-to-day management responsibilities and with respect to which the advisory fee is based on account performance. The Funds’ portfolio managers not listed below reported that they do not provide day-to-day management of accounts with performance-based advisory fees. Information is shown as of the Funds’ fiscal year-end, December 31, 2016. Asset amounts are approximate and have been rounded.

 

51


Table of Contents

Other Accounts That Pay Performance-Based Advisory Fees Managed by Portfolio Managers

 

    

Registered

Investment Companies

    

Other Pooled

Investment Vehicles

     Other Accounts  

Fund and Portfolio Manager (Firm)

   Number of
Accounts
     Total
Assets
in the
Accounts
     Number of
Accounts
     Total
Assets
in the
Accounts
     Number of
Accounts
     Total
Assets
in the
Accounts
 

Equity Fund

                 

Frank M. Sands (Sands Capital)

     1      $ 2.4 billion        0      $ 0        9      $ 1.2 billion  

A. Michael Sramek (Sands Capital)

     1      $ 2.4 billion        0      $ 0        9      $ 1.2 billion  

International Fund

                 

David E. Marcus* (Evermore)

     0      $ 0        0      $ 0        1      $ 9.5 million  

David G. Herro (Harris)

     0      $ 0        0      $ 0        1      $ 166.3 million  

Mark Little (Lazard)

     0      $ 0        0      $ 0        1      $ 288.7 million  

Alternative Strategies Fund

                 

Jeffrey Gundlach (DoubleLine)

     0      $ 0        4      $ 3.2 billion        1      $ 848.3 million  

Steven Romick (First Pacific)

     0      $ 0        6      $ 847.6 million        0      $ 0  

Brian Selmo (First Pacific)

     0      $ 0        1      $ 46.5 million        0      $ 0  

Mark Landecker (First Pacific)

     0      $ 0        1      $ 335.3 million        0      $ 0  

Brian Selmo, Mark Landecker (First Pacific)

     0      $ 0        2      $ 306.9 million        0      $ 0  

Matthew Eagan (Loomis Sayles)

     0      $ 0        0      $ 0        4      $ 630 million  

Kevin Kearns (Loomis Sayles)

     0      $ 0        2      $ 508.8 million        0      $ 0  

John Burbank (Passport)

     0      $ 0        11      $ 2.5 billion        1      $ 86.1 million  

John Orrico (Water Island)

     0      $ 0        1      $ 10 million        0      $ 0  

 

* Information is as of March 17, 2017

Material Conflicts of Interest

Actual or apparent material conflicts of interest may arise when a portfolio manager has day-to-day management responsibilities with respect to more than one investment account or in other circumstances. Portfolio managers of each of the following Sub-Advisors who manage other investment accounts in addition to one or more of the Funds may be presented with the potential conflicts described below.

COVE STREET CAPITAL, LLC (“Cove Street”)

Sub-Advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund

Cove Street’s management of “other accounts” may give rise to potential conflicts of interest in connection with the management of the Smaller Companies Fund’s investments, on the one hand, and the investments of the other accounts on the other. The other accounts may have the same investment objective as the Smaller Companies Fund. Therefore, a potential conflict of interest may arise as a result of the identical investment objectives, whereby Cove Street could favor one account over another. Another potential conflict could include Cove Street’s knowledge about the size, timing and possible market impact of Fund trades, whereby Cove Street could use this information to the advantage of other accounts and to the disadvantage of the Smaller Companies Fund. However, Cove Street has established policies and procedures to ensure that the purchase and sale of securities among all accounts it manages are fairly and equitably allocated.

 

52


Table of Contents

Employees of Cove Street may own securities that are also owned by clients of Cove Street. As such, Cove Street has adopted a code of ethics to address these rules on personal trading and insider trading.

DAVIS SELECTED ADVISERS, L.P. (“Davis Advisors”)

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

Actual or apparent conflicts of interest may arise when a portfolio manager has day-to-day management responsibilities with respect to more than one portfolio or other account. More specifically, portfolio managers who manage multiple portfolios and/or other accounts are presented with the following potential conflicts: the management of multiple portfolios and/or other accounts may result in a portfolio manager devoting unequal time and attention to the management of each portfolio and/or other account. Davis Advisors seeks to manage such competing interests for the time and attention of portfolio managers by having portfolio managers focus on a particular investment discipline. Most other accounts managed by a portfolio manager are managed using the same investment weightings that are used in connection with the management of the portfolios.

If a portfolio manager identifies a limited investment opportunity which may be suitable for more than one portfolio or other account, a portfolio may not be able to take full advantage of that opportunity due to an allocation of filled purchase or sale orders across all eligible portfolios and other accounts. To deal with these situations, Davis Advisors has adopted procedures for allocating portfolio transactions across multiple accounts.

With respect to securities transactions for the portfolios, Davis Advisors determines which broker to use to execute each order, consistent with its duty to seek best execution of the transaction. However, with respect to certain other accounts (such as mutual funds, other pooled investment vehicles that are not registered mutual funds, and other accounts managed for organizations and individuals), Davis Advisors may be limited by the client with respect to the selection of brokers or may be instructed to direct trades through a particular broker. In these cases, Davis Advisors may place separate, non-simultaneous, transactions for a portfolio and another account which may temporarily affect the market price of the security or the execution of the transaction, or both, to the detriment of the portfolio or the other account.

Finally, substantial investment of assets of Davis Advisors or of the Davis family members in certain mutual funds may lead to conflicts of interest. To mitigate these potential conflicts of interest, Davis Advisors has adopted policies and procedures intended to ensure that all clients are treated fairly over time. Davis Advisors does not receive an incentive-based fee on any account.

DOUBLELINE CAPITAL LP (“DoubleLine”)

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

From time to time, potential and actual conflicts of interest may arise between a portfolio manager’s management of the investments of the Alternative Strategies Fund, on the one hand, and the management of other accounts, on the other. Potential and actual conflicts of interest also may result because of DoubleLine’s other business activities. Other accounts managed by a portfolio manager might have similar investment objectives or strategies as the Alternative Strategies Fund, be managed (benchmarked) against the same index the Alternative Strategies Fund tracks, or otherwise hold, purchase, or sell securities that are eligible to be held, purchased or sold by the Alternative Strategies Fund. The other accounts might also have different investment objectives or strategies than the Alternative Strategies Fund.

Knowledge and Timing of Fund Trades . A potential conflict of interest may arise as a result of the portfolio managers’ management of the Alternative Strategies Fund. Because of their positions with the Alternative Strategies Fund, the portfolio managers know the size, timing and possible market impact of the Alternative Strategies Fund’s trades. It is theoretically possible that a portfolio manager could use this information to the advantage of other accounts under management, and also theoretically possible that actions could be taken (or not taken) to the detriment of the Alternative Strategies Fund.

 

53


Table of Contents

Investment Opportunities . A potential conflict of interest may arise as a result of a portfolio manager’s management of a number of accounts with varying investment guidelines. Often, an investment opportunity may be suitable for both the Alternative Strategies Fund and other accounts managed by the portfolio manager, but securities may not be available in sufficient quantities for both the Alternative Strategies Fund and the other accounts to participate fully. Similarly, there may be limited opportunity to sell an investment held by the Alternative Strategies Fund and another account. DoubleLine has adopted policies and procedures reasonably designed to allocate investment opportunities on a fair and equitable basis over time.

Under DoubleLine’s allocation procedures, investment opportunities are allocated among various investment strategies based on individual account investment guidelines, DoubleLine’s investment outlook, cash availability and a series of other factors. DoubleLine has also adopted additional internal practices to complement the general trade allocation policy that are designed to address potential conflicts of interest due to the side-by-side management of the Alternative Strategies Fund and certain pooled investment vehicles, including investment opportunity allocation issues.

Conflicts potentially limiting the Alternative Strategies Fund’s investment opportunities may also arise when the Alternative Strategies Fund and other clients of DoubleLine invest in, or even conduct research relating to, different parts of an issuer’s capital structure, such as when the Alternative Strategies Fund owns senior debt obligations of an issuer and other clients own junior tranches of the same issuer. In such circumstances, decisions over whether to trigger an event of default, over the terms of any workout, or how to exit an investment may result in conflicts of interest. In order to minimize such conflicts, a portfolio manager may avoid certain investment opportunities that would potentially give rise to conflicts with other clients of DoubleLine or result in DoubleLine receiving material, non-public information, or DoubleLine may enact internal procedures designed to minimize such conflicts, which could have the effect of limiting the Alternative Strategies Fund’s investment opportunities. Additionally, if DoubleLine acquires material non-public confidential information in connection with its business activities for other clients, a portfolio manager or other investment personnel may be restricted from purchasing securities or selling certain securities for the Alternative Strategies Fund or other clients. When making investment decisions where a conflict of interest may arise, DoubleLine will endeavor to act in a fair and equitable manner between the Alternative Strategies Fund and other clients; however, in certain instances the resolution of the conflict may result in DoubleLine acting on behalf of another client in a manner that may not be in the best interest, or may be opposed to the best interest, of the Alternative Strategies Fund.

Investors in the Alternative Strategies Fund may also be advisory clients of DoubleLine. Accordingly, DoubleLine may in the course of its business provide advice to advisory clients whose interests may conflict with those of the Alternative Strategies Fund, may render advice to the Alternative Strategies Fund that provides a direct or indirect benefit to DoubleLine or a related party or may manage or advise a product in which the Alternative Strategies Fund is invested in such a way that would not be beneficial to the Fund. For example, DoubleLine may advise a client who has invested in the Alternative Strategies Fund to redeem its investment in the Alternative Strategies Fund, which may cause the Alternative Strategies Fund to incur transaction costs and/or have to sell assets at a time when it would not otherwise do so. DoubleLine could also, for example, make decisions with respect to a structured product managed or sponsored by DoubleLine in a manner that could have adverse effects on investors in the product, including, potentially, the Alternative Strategies Fund. DoubleLine currently provides asset allocation investment advice, including recommending the purchase and/or sale of shares of the Alternative Strategies Fund, to a large number of investors.

Broad and Wide-Ranging Activities . The portfolio managers, DoubleLine and its related parties engage in a broad spectrum of activities. In the ordinary course of their business activities, the portfolio managers, DoubleLine and its related parties may engage in activities where the interests of certain divisions of DoubleLine and its related parties or the interests of their clients may conflict with the interests of the shareholders of the Alternative Strategies Fund.

 

54


Table of Contents

Possible Future Activities. DoubleLine and its related parties may expand the range of services that they provide over time. Except as provided herein, DoubleLine and its related parties will not be restricted in the scope of its business or in the performance of any such services (whether now offered or undertaken in the future) even if such activities could give rise to conflicts of interest, and whether or not such conflicts are described herein. DoubleLine and its related parties have, and will continue to develop, relationships with a significant number of companies, financial sponsors and their senior managers, including relationships with clients who may hold or may have held investments similar to those intended to be made by the Alternative Strategies Fund. These clients may themselves represent appropriate investment opportunities for the Alternative Strategies Fund or may compete with a Fund for investment opportunities.

Performance Fees and Personal Investments. A portfolio manager may advise certain accounts with respect to which the advisory fee is based entirely or partially on performance or in respect of which the portfolio manager may have made a significant personal investment. Such circumstances may create a conflict of interest for the portfolio manager in that the portfolio manager may have an incentive to allocate the investment opportunities that he or she believes might be the most profitable to such other accounts instead of allocating them to the Alternative Strategies Fund. DoubleLine has adopted policies and procedures reasonably designed to allocate investment opportunities between the Alternative Strategies Fund and performance fee based accounts on a fair and equitable basis over time.

EVERMORE GLOBAL ADVISORS, LLC (“Evermore”)

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

Potential conflicts of interest may arise when the International Fund’s portfolio manager has day-to-day management responsibilities with respect to one or more other funds or other accounts.

Evermore has adopted compliance policies and procedures that are designed to address various conflicts of interest that may arise for Evermore and the individuals that it employs. For example, Evermore has adopted a side-by-side management of mutual funds and private accounts policy and trade allocation procedures that are designed to facilitate the fair allocation of limited investment opportunities among multiple funds and accounts. There is no guarantee, however, that the policies and procedures adopted by Evermore will be able to detect and/or prevent every situation in which an actual or potential conflict may appear.

These potential conflicts include:

Allocation of Limited Time and Attention. A portfolio manager who is responsible for managing multiple funds and/or accounts may devote unequal time and attention to the management of those funds and/or accounts. As a result, the portfolio manager may not be able to formulate as complete a strategy or identify equally attractive investment opportunities for each of those accounts as might be the case if he or she were to devote substantially more attention to the management of a single fund. The effects of this potential conflict may be more pronounced where funds and/or accounts overseen by a particular portfolio manager have different investment strategies.

Allocation of Limited Investment Opportunities. If the portfolio manager identifies a limited investment opportunity that may be suitable for multiple funds and/or accounts, the opportunity may be allocated among these several funds or accounts, which may limit a fund’s and/or account’s ability to take full advantage of the investment opportunity.

Pursuit of Differing Strategies. At times, the portfolio manager may determine that an investment opportunity may be appropriate for only some of the funds and/or accounts for which he or she exercises investment responsibility, or may decide that certain of the funds and/or accounts should take differing positions with respect to a particular security. In these cases, the portfolio manager may place separate transactions for one or more funds or accounts which may affect the market price of the security or the execution of the transaction, or both, to the detriment or benefit of one or more other funds and/or accounts.

 

55


Table of Contents

Selection of Brokers/Dealers. The portfolio manager may be able to select or influence the selection of the brokers and dealers that are used to execute securities transactions for the funds and/or accounts that they supervise. In addition to executing trades, some brokers and dealers provide portfolio managers with brokerage and research services (as those terms are defined in Section 28(e) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “1934 Act”)), which may result in the payment of higher brokerage fees than might have otherwise been available. These services may be more beneficial to certain funds or accounts than to others. Although the payment of brokerage commissions is subject to the requirement that the portfolio manager determine in good faith that the commissions are reasonable in relation to the value of the brokerage and research services provided to the fund, the portfolio manager’s decision as to the selection of brokers and dealers could yield disproportionate costs and benefits among the funds and/or accounts that he or she manages.

Variation in Compensation. A conflict of interest may arise where the financial or other benefits available to the portfolio manager differ among the funds and/or accounts that he or she manages. If the structure of Evermore’s management fee and/or the portfolio manager’s compensation differs among funds and/or accounts (such as where certain funds or accounts pay higher management fees or performance-based management fees), the portfolio manager might be motivated to help certain funds and/or accounts over others. The portfolio manager might be motivated to favor funds and/or accounts in which he or she has an interest or in which Evermore and/or its affiliates have interests. Similarly, the desire to maintain or raise assets under management or to enhance the portfolio manager’s performance record or to derive other rewards, financial or otherwise, could influence the portfolio manager to lend preferential treatment to those funds and/or accounts that could most significantly benefit the portfolio manager.

Related Business Opportunities. Evermore or its affiliates may provide more services (such as distribution or recordkeeping) for some types of funds or accounts than for others. In such cases, a portfolio manager may benefit, either directly or indirectly, by devoting disproportionate attention to the management of funds and/or accounts that provide greater overall returns to Evermore and its affiliates.

FIDUCIARY MANAGEMENT, INC. (“FMI”)

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

The portfolio managers at FMI are often responsible for managing other accounts. FMI typically assigns accounts with similar investment strategies to the portfolio managers to mitigate the potentially conflicting investment strategies, the side-by-side management of the Equity Fund and other accounts may raise potential conflicts of interest due to the interest held by the portfolio managers (for example, cross trades between the Equity Fund and another account and allocation of aggregated trades). FMI has developed policies and procedures reasonably designed to mitigate those conflicts. In particular, FMI has adopted policies designed to ensure the fair allocation of securities purchased on an aggregated basis.

FIRST PACIFIC ADVISORS, LLC (“First Pacific”)

Sub-Advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund and the Alternative Strategies Fund

First Pacific has potential conflicts of interest in connection with its investment activities. For example, First Pacific manages multiple client accounts with different investment objectives and guidelines, and with different fee structures. First Pacific receives both asset-based fees and performance-based fees as compensation for its investment advisory services. Performance-based fees create an incentive for First Pacific to favor those accounts

 

56


Table of Contents

over asset-based fee accounts or make investments that are riskier or more speculative than would be the case in the absence of performance-based fee clients. To mitigate potential conflicts of interest when managing performance-based fee clients side-by-side with asset-based fee clients, First Pacific has developed a policy in which portfolio managers attempt to allocate investment opportunities among eligible accounts on a pro rata basis if that is practical; or, if a pro rata allocation is not practical, to allocate the investment opportunities among First Pacific advisory clients on a basis that over time is fair and equitable to each advisory client relative to other clients.

First Pacific has also implemented other policies and procedures ( e.g. , a code of ethics) that seek to address other potential conflicts of interest that may arise in connection with First Pacific’s business and that are designed to ensure that all client accounts are treated fairly and equitably over time.

HARRIS ASSOCIATES L.P. (“Harris”)

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund and the International Fund

Conflicts of interest may arise in the allocation of investment opportunities and the allocation of aggregated orders among the Equity Fund, International Fund and the other accounts managed by the portfolio managers. A portfolio manager potentially could give favorable treatment to some accounts for a variety of reasons, including favoring larger accounts, accounts that have a different advisory fee arrangement (including any accounts that pay performance-based fees), accounts of affiliated companies, or accounts in which the portfolio manager has a personal investment. With respect to the allocation of investment opportunities, Harris makes decisions to recommend, purchase, sell or hold securities for all of its client accounts, including the Equity Fund and International Fund, based on the specific investment objectives, guidelines, restrictions and circumstances of each account. It is Harris’ policy to allocate investment opportunities to each account, including the Equity Fund and International Fund, over a period of time on a fair and equitable basis relative to its other accounts. With respect to the allocation of aggregated orders, each account that participates in the aggregated order will participate at the average share price, and where the order has not been completely filled, each institutional account, including the Equity Fund and International Fund, will generally participate on a pro rata basis.

Harris has compliance policies and procedures in place that it believes are reasonably designed to mitigate these conflicts. However, there is no guarantee that such procedures will detect each and every situation in which an actual or potential conflict may arise.

LAZARD ASSET MANAGEMENT LLC (“LAZARD”)

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

As an investment adviser, Lazard serves as a fiduciary to its clients. As such, Lazard is obligated to place its clients’ interests before its own. Due to the nature of the investment advisory business, conflicts of interests do arise. For example, conflicts may arise with regard to personal securities transactions, the use of clients’ commissions to obtain research and brokerage services, errors, trade allocations, performance fee accounts, and the use of solicitors.

In recognition of these potential conflicts of interest, Lazard has established written policies and procedures so that it can operate its business within applicable regulatory guidelines.

LITMAN GREGORY

Advisor to the Funds

Litman Gregory has overall responsibility for assets under management and conducts oversight and evaluation of the Funds’ investment managers and other duties. Litman Gregory generally does not make day-to-day decisions with respect to the purchase and sale of portfolio securities by the Funds. Accordingly, no material conflicts of interest are expected to arise between the Funds and other accounts managed by the portfolio managers. Litman Gregory has adopted compliance policies, including allocation policies and a code of ethics, which are intended to prevent or mitigate conflicts of interest, if any, that may arise.

 

57


Table of Contents

LOOMIS, SAYLES & COMPANY, L.P. (“Loomis Sayles”)

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

Conflicts of interest may arise in the allocation of investment opportunities and the allocation of aggregated orders among the Alternative Strategies Fund and other accounts managed by the portfolio managers. A portfolio manager potentially could give favorable treatment to some accounts for a variety of reasons, including favoring larger accounts, accounts that pay higher fees, accounts that pay performance-based fees, accounts of affiliated companies and accounts in which the portfolio manager has an interest. Such favorable treatment could lead to more favorable investment opportunities or allocations for some accounts. Loomis Sayles makes investment decisions for all accounts (including institutional accounts, mutual funds, hedge funds and affiliated accounts) based on each account’s availability of other comparable investment opportunities and Loomis Sayles’ desire to treat all accounts fairly and equitably over time. Loomis Sayles maintains trade allocation and aggregation policies and procedures to address these potential conflicts. Conflicts of interest also may arise to the extend a portfolio manager short sells a stock in one client account but holds that stock long in other accounts, including the Alternative Strategies Fund, or sells a stock for some accounts while buying the stock for others, and through the use of “soft dollar arrangements,” which are addressed in Loomis Sayles’ Brokerage Allocation Policies and Procedures and Loomis Sayles’ Trade Aggregation and Allocation Policies and Procedures.

NORTHERN CROSS, LLC (“Northern Cross”)

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

From time to time, potential conflicts of interest may arise between the portfolio managers’ management of the investments of the International Fund and the management of other client accounts. The other accounts might have similar investment objectives or strategies as the International Fund, track the same index the International Fund tracks or otherwise hold, purchase, or sell securities that are eligible to be held, purchased or sold by the International Fund. The other accounts might also have different investment objectives or strategies than the International Fund. Northern Cross has adopted policies and procedures reasonably designed to treat all accounts fairly and equitably and to address the potentially adverse effect of any conflicts of interest.

A potential conflict of interest may arise as a result of the portfolio managers’ day-to-day management of the International Fund. Because of the portfolio managers’ positions with the International Fund, each portfolio manager knows the size, timing and possible market impact of the International Fund’s trades. It is theoretically possible that a portfolio manager could use this information to the advantage of other accounts he manages and to the possible detriment of the International Fund. Northern Cross has designed and implemented policies and procedures intended to mitigate these conflicts and fairly allocate investments across all client accounts. Trades are blocked and executed at a common price. Allocations of the block trade are then made pro rata to all eligible accounts within the same strategy.

Portfolio managers with Northern Cross may purchase, hold, and sell securities, for their own benefit, that could be owned by or considered potential investment opportunities for Northern Cross’s clients. Personal securities trading by “supervised persons” creates a conflict of interest. Northern Cross has put in place policies and procedures to mitigate this conflict. Personal securities transactions are addressed in Northern Cross’s Code of Ethics and monitored regularly by Northern Cross’s Compliance Team. Controls applied to personal securities trading include pre-clearance of all personal trades in reportable securities and restrictions on securities owned by or being considered for clients of Northern Cross.

 

58


Table of Contents

When evaluating broker-dealers, Northern Cross may not always select the broker-dealer with the lowest commission rate. The primary criteria considered in selecting a broker-dealer is the ability of the broker-dealer, in Northern Cross’s opinion, to secure execution at the best security price available with respect to each transaction, in light of the overall quality of brokerage and research services provided to Northern Cross on behalf of their clients.

A potential conflict of interest may arise as a result of a portfolio manager’s management of a number of accounts with varying investment guidelines. Often, an investment opportunity may be suitable for both the International Fund and other accounts but may not be available in sufficient quantities for both the International Fund and the other accounts to participate fully. Similarly, there may be limited opportunity to sell an investment held by the International Fund and another account. Northern Cross has adopted policies and procedures designed to allocate investment opportunities on a fair and equitable basis over time. Under Northern Cross’s allocation procedures, investment opportunities are allocated among various investment strategies.

NUANCE INVESTMENTS, LLC (“Nuance”)

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

Nuance’s management of other accounts may give rise to potential conflicts of interest in connection with the management of the Equity Fund’s investments, on the one hand, and the investments of the other accounts, on the other. The other accounts may have the same investment objective as the Equity Fund. Therefore, a potential conflict of interest may arise as a result of the identical investment objectives, whereby Nuance could favor one account over another. Another potential conflict could include Nuance’s knowledge about the size, timing and possible market impact of Equity Fund trades, whereby Nuance could use this information to the advantage of other accounts and to the disadvantage of the Equity Fund. However, Nuance has established policies and procedures to ensure that the purchase and sale of securities among all accounts it manages are fairly and equitably allocated.

PASSPORT CAPITAL, LLC (“Passport”)

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

From time to time, potential and actual conflicts of interest may arise between the portfolio manager’s management of the investments of the Alternative Strategies Fund on the one hand, and the management of other accounts and investment funds, on the other. For example, such other accounts and investment funds compete with the Alternative Strategies Fund for the time and attention of the portfolio manager and for the allocation of limited investment opportunities.

Passport and its affiliates may organize or become involved in other business ventures, including sponsoring one or more additional investment funds or accounts that implement investment strategies substantially similar to, or different from, that of the Alternative Strategies Fund as part of their overall strategies. Such other ventures could result in similar conflicts of interest as those described above and could potentially create additional conflicts of interest. Passport has adopted policies and procedures it believes are reasonably designed to mitigate conflicts of interest and to allocate securities on a fair and equitable basis. However, there is no guarantee that the Alternative Strategies Fund will participate in every investment opportunity identified by Passport.

PICTET ASSET MANAGEMENT LIMITED (“Pictet”)

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

Pictet is governed by The Financial Conduct Authority (FCA). The FCA is a financial regulatory body in the United Kingdom, but operates independently of the UK government, and is financed by charging fees to members of the financial services industry. Pictet is required under FCA rules (a) to take all reasonable steps to identify conflicts of interest between (i) Pictet (including its staff or any person directly, or indirectly linked to us by control) and a client, or (ii) one client and another; (b) maintain and operate effective organizational and administrative arrangements with a view to taking all reasonable steps to prevent conflicts of interest from constituting or giving

 

59


Table of Contents

rise to a material risk of damage to the interests of our clients; and (c) establish, implement and maintain an effective written conflicts of interest policy (“the Conflicts of Interest Policy”) which identifies those conflicts of interest which constitute or may give rise to a conflict of interest entailing a material risk of damage to the interests of one or more clients and the procedures which are followed to manage such conflicts.

Pictet is also registered with the SEC which has similar requirements for the identification and management of conflicts of interest. This includes the requirement to make full and fair disclosure to clients of all material facts about the advisory relationship, particularly regarding conflicts of interest.

SANDS CAPITAL MANAGEMENT, LLC (“Sands Capital”)

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

Sands Capital is an investment adviser to a variety of clients. As a result, there may be actual or potential conflicts of interest. For example, conflicts of interest could result from portfolio managers’ management of multiple accounts for multiple clients, the execution and allocation of investment opportunities, the use of brokerage commissions to obtain research and personal trading by employees. Sands Capital has addressed these conflicts by developing policies and procedures reasonably designed to treat all clients in a fair and equitable manner over time. These policies and procedures address such issues as execution of portfolio transactions, aggregation and allocation of trades, directed brokerage, and the use of brokerage commissions. Additionally, Sands Capital maintains a Code of Ethics and Insider Trading Policy and Procedures that address rules on personal trading and insider information.

THORNBURG INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT, INC. (“Thornburg”)

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

Most investment advisors and their portfolio managers manage investments for multiple clients, which may include mutual funds, private accounts and retirement plans. In any case where a portfolio manager manages the investments of two or more accounts, there is a possibility that conflicts of interest could arise between the portfolio manager’s management of the fund’s investments and the portfolio manager’s management of other accounts. These conflicts could include any of the following:

 

    Allocating a favorable investment opportunity to one account but not another;

 

    Directing one account to buy a security before purchases through other accounts increase the price of the security in the marketplace;

 

    Giving substantially inconsistent investment directions at the same time to similar accounts, so as to benefit one account over another; and

 

    Obtaining services from brokers conducting trades for one account, which are used to benefit another account.

As a sub-advisor to the International Fund, Thornburg has informed the International Fund that it has considered the likelihood that any material conflicts of interest could arise between a portfolio manager’s management of the International Fund’s investments and the portfolio manager’s management of other accounts. As of December 31, 2016, Thornburg has also informed the International Fund that it has not identified any such conflicts that may arise, and has concluded that it has implemented policies and procedures to identify and resolve any such conflict if it did arise.

 

60


Table of Contents

WATER ISLAND CAPITAL, LLC (“Water Island”)

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

Water Island does not believe that the overlapping responsibilities of the portfolio managers or the various elements of their compensation present any material conflict of interest for the following reasons because (1) the Alternative Strategies Fund and the other accounts they manage are similar; (2) Water Island follows strict and detailed written allocation procedures designed to allocate securities purchases and sales between the Alternative Strategies Fund and the other account in a fair and equitable manner; (3) Water Island has adopted policies limiting the ability of the portfolio managers to cross trade securities between the Alternative Strategies Fund and the other accounts; and (4) allocations are subject to review by Water Island’s Chief Compliance Officer.

WELLS CAPITAL MANAGEMENT, INC. (“WellsCap”)

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund and the Smaller Companies Fund

WellsCap’s portfolio managers often provide investment management for separate accounts advised in the same or similar investment style as that provided to mutual funds. While management of multiple accounts could potentially lead to conflicts of interest over various issues such as trade allocation, fee disparities and research acquisition, WellsCap has implemented policies and procedures for the express purpose of ensuring that clients are treated fairly and that potential conflicts of interest are minimized.

Compensation Structure and Methods

The following section describes the structure of, and the methods used to determine the different types of compensation ( e.g. , salary, bonus, deferred compensation, retirement plans and arrangements) for each of the Funds’ portfolio managers as of the fiscal year ended December 31, 2016.

COVE STREET

Sub-Advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund

As a member of Cove Street, Jeffrey Bronchick receives a salary and his pro-rata share of Cove Street’s profits.

DAVIS ADVISORS

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

Christopher C. Davis’ annual compensation as an employee and general partner of Davis Advisors consists of a base salary.

Davis’ and Goei’s compensation for portfolio management services provided to the Advisor consists of: (i) a base salary; (ii) an annual discretionary bonus; (iii) awards of equity (“Units”) in Davis Advisors including Units, options on Units and/or phantom Units; and (iv) an incentive plan whereby Davis Advisors purchases shares in selected mutual funds managed by Davis Advisors. At the end of specified periods, generally five-years following the date of purchase, some, all, or none of the Fund shares will be registered in the employee’s name based on Fund performance, after expenses on a pre-tax basis, versus the Fund’s benchmark index, as described in the Fund’s prospectus or, in limited cases, based on performance ranking among established peer groups. Davis Advisors does not purchase incentive shares in every fund that a portfolio manager manages or assists on. In limited cases, such incentive compensation is tied to the performance of the portion of the Fund (“sleeve”) managed by the analyst versus the Fund’s benchmark. Davis Advisors’ portfolio managers are provided benefits packages including life insurance, health insurance, and participation in Davis Advisors’ 401(k) plan comparable to that received by other company employees.

 

61


Table of Contents

DOUBLELINE

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

The overall objective of the compensation program for portfolio managers is for the Sub-Advisor to attract competent and expert investment professionals and to retain them over the long-term. Compensation is comprised of several components which, in the aggregate are designed to achieve these objectives and to reward the portfolio managers for their contribution to the success of their clients and the Sub-Advisor. Portfolio managers are generally compensated through a combination of base salary, discretionary bonus and equity participation in the Sub-Advisor. Bonuses and equity generally represent most of the portfolio managers’ compensation. However, in some cases, portfolio managers may have a profit sharing interest in the revenue or income related to the areas for which the portfolio managers are responsible. Such profit sharing arrangements can comprise a significant portion of a portfolio manager’s overall compensation.

Salary.  Salary is agreed to with managers at time of employment and is reviewed from time to time. It does not change significantly and often does not constitute a significant part of a portfolio manager’s compensation.

Discretionary Bonus/Guaranteed Minimums.  Portfolio managers receive discretionary bonuses. However, in some cases, pursuant to contractual arrangements, some portfolio managers may be entitled to a mandatory minimum bonus if the sum of their salary and profit sharing does not reach certain levels.

Equity Incentives.  Portfolio managers participate in equity incentives based on overall firm performance of the Sub-Advisor, through direct ownership interests in the Sub-Advisor or participation in stock option or stock appreciation plans of the Sub-Advisor. These ownership interests or participation interests provide eligible portfolio managers the opportunity to participate in the financial performance of the Sub-Advisor as a whole. Participation is generally determined in the discretion of the Sub-Advisor, taking into account factors relevant to the portfolio manager’s contribution to the success of the Sub-Advisor.

Other Plans and Compensation Vehicles.  Portfolio managers may elect to participate in the DoubleLine 401(k) plan, to which they may contribute a portion of their pre- and post-tax compensation to the plan for investment on a tax-deferred basis. The Sub-Advisor may also choose, from time to time, to offer certain other compensation plans and vehicles, such as a deferred compensation plan, to portfolio managers.

Summary.  As described above, an investment professional’s total compensation is determined through a subjective process that evaluates numerous quantitative and qualitative factors, including the contribution made to the overall investment process. Not all factors apply to each investment professional and there is no particular weighting or formula for considering certain factors. Among the factors considered are: relative investment performance of portfolios (although there are no specific benchmarks or periods of time used in measuring performance); complexity of investment strategies; participation in the investment team’s dialogue; contribution to business results and overall business strategy; success of marketing/business development efforts and client servicing; seniority/length of service with the firm; management and supervisory responsibilities; and fulfillment of each of the Sub-Advisor’s leadership criteria.

 

62


Table of Contents

EVERMORE

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

Because Mr. Marcus may manage other accounts, including accounts that may pay higher fees or accounts that may pay performance-based fees, potential conflicts of interest could exist, including potential conflicts between the investment strategy of the International Fund and the investment strategy of the other accounts managed by the portfolio manager and potential conflicts in the allocation of investment opportunities between the International Fund and the other accounts.

Mr. Marcus is a member of Evermore. His compensation consists of a fixed based salary and a membership interest in the firm’s profits. Mr. Marcus may also participate in Evermore’s matching 401(k) retirement plan. He may receive bonuses based on the performance of his duties and his contribution to Evermore. The compensation program does not disproportionately reward outperformance by higher fee/performance fee products. Evermore’s profits interest is the primary incentive for persons to maintain employment with Evermore. Evermore believes this is the best incentive to maintain stability of portfolio management personnel.

FMI

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

Patrick J. English . Mr. English’s salary is based upon revenues of FMI. The type of account and source of the revenues has no bearing upon the salary except insofar as they affect the revenues of the company.

Andy P. Ramer . Mr. Ramer’s salary and bonus are based upon the management fees of FMI. The type of account has no bearing upon the salary and bonus except insofar as they affect the revenues of the company.

 

63


Table of Contents

FIRST PACIFIC

Sub-Advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund and the Alternative Strategies Fund

Compensation of the portfolio managers consists of: (i) a base salary; (ii) an annual bonus; and (iii) since the portfolio managers are equity owners of the firm, participation in residual profits of the firm.

The bonus calculation has both variable and fixed components and is primarily based on the revenues received on the assets managed by the portfolio managers, including the relevant fund’s assets. The most significant portion of the variable component is based upon the firm’s assessment of the portfolio managers’ performance in three key areas: long-term performance, team building, and succession planning. The firm assesses long-term performance over a full market cycle, which generally lasts between five and ten years. Other considerations include portfolio manager and strategy recognition, client engagement and retention, and business development. The portfolio managers can receive 100% of their variable participation even if the strategy is closed to investors. In addition, the value of a portfolio manager’s equity ownership interest in the firm is dependent upon his ability to effectively manage the business over the long term, which includes the three main components discussed above: long-term performance, team-building and succession planning.

First Pacific believes this compensation structure aligns the interests of the portfolio managers with those of investors by reducing conflicts such as disparate compensation structures, establishing appropriate fee rates for accounts in the strategy and keeping the portfolio managers incentivized in areas such as long-term performance, team building and succession.

If the Portfolio Manager is an equity owner of the firm, then the value of the Portfolio Manager’s ownership interest is dependent upon his ability to effectively manage the business over the long term.

Analysts receive a base compensation and a discretionary bonus, which is determined by the leaders of the product/strategy in which they participate, with oversight from the management committee.

HARRIS

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund and the International Fund

Compensation

Harris receives fees based on the assets under management of the Equity Fund and International Fund, respectively, as set forth in the Investment Sub-Advisory Agreements between Harris and Litman Gregory.

Harris is solely responsible for compensating its portfolio managers. Compensation for each of its portfolio managers is based on Harris’ assessment of the individual’s long-term contribution to the investment success of the firm. Each portfolio manager receives a base salary and participates in a discretionary bonus pool. In addition, most of the portfolio managers also participate in a long-term compensation plan that provides current compensation to certain key employees of Harris and deferred compensation to both current and former key employees. The compensation plan consists of bonus units awarded to participants that vest and are paid out over a period of time.

The determination of the amount of such portfolio manager’s base salary and discretionary bonus participation and, where applicable, participation in the long-term compensation plan is based on a variety of qualitative and quantitative factors. The factor given the most significant weight is the subjective assessment of the individual’s contribution to the overall investment results of Harris’ domestic or international investment group, whether as a portfolio manager, a research analyst or both.

 

64


Table of Contents

The quantitative factors considered in evaluating the contribution of a portfolio manager include the performance of the portfolios managed by that individual relative to benchmarks, peers and other portfolio managers, as well as the assets under management in the accounts managed by the portfolio manager. The portfolio managers’ compensation is not based solely on an evaluation of the performance of the accounts or the amount of assets under management. Performance is measured in a number of ways, including by funds, accounts and by strategy, and is compared to one or more of the following benchmarks: S&P 500 ® Index, Russell Mid-Cap ® Value Index, Russell 1000 ® Value Index, Lipper Balanced Funds Index (60% S&P 500 ® Index and 40% Barclays Bond Index), MSCI World Index, MSCI World ex U.S. Index, MSCI World ex-U.S. Small Cap Index and Harris’ approved lists of stocks, depending on whether the portfolio manager manages accounts in the particular strategy to which these benchmarks would be applicable. Performance is measured over shorter- and longer-term periods, including one year, three years, five years, ten years, since a fund’s inception or since a portfolio manager has been managing a fund, as applicable. Performance is measured on a pre-tax and after-tax basis to the extent such information is available.

If a portfolio manager also serves as a research analyst, then his compensation is also based on the contribution made to Harris in that role. The specific quantitative and qualitative factors considered in evaluating a research analyst’s contributions include, among other things, new investment ideas, the performance of investment ideas covered by the analyst during the current year as well as over longer-term periods, the portfolio impact of the analyst’s investment ideas, other contributions to the research process, and an assessment of the quality of analytical work. In addition, an individual’s other contributions to Harris, such as a role in investment thought leadership and management, are taken into account in the overall compensation process.

LAZARD

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

Lazard compensates key investment personnel by a competitive salary and bonus structure, which is determined both quantitatively and qualitatively.

Salary and bonus are paid in cash, stock and restricted interests in funds managed by Lazard or its affiliates. Portfolio managers are compensated on the performance of the aggregate group of portfolios managed by them rather than for a specific fund or account. Various factors are considered in the determination of a portfolio manager’s compensation. All of the portfolios managed by a portfolio manager are comprehensively evaluated to determine his or her positive and consistent performance contribution over time. Further factors include the amount of assets in the portfolios as well as qualitative aspects that reinforce Lazard’s investment philosophy.

Total compensation is generally not fixed, but rather is based on the following factors: (i) leadership, teamwork and commitment; (ii) maintenance of current knowledge and opinions on companies owned in the portfolio; (iii) generation and development of new investment ideas, including the quality of security analysis and identification of appreciation catalysts; (iv) ability and willingness to develop and share ideas on a team basis; and (v) the performance results of the portfolios managed by the investment teams of which the portfolio manager is a member.

A variable bonus is based on the portfolio manager’s quantitative performance as measured by his or her ability to make investment decisions that contribute to the pre-tax absolute and relative returns of the accounts managed by the teams of which the portfolio manager is a member, by comparison of each account to a predetermined benchmark (as set forth in the prospectus or other governing document) over the current fiscal year and the longer-term performance (3-, 5- or 10-year, if applicable) of such account, as well as performance of the account relative to peers. In addition, the portfolio manager’s bonus can be influenced by subjective measurement of the manager’s ability to help others make investment decisions. A portion of a portfolio manager’s variable bonus is awarded under a deferred compensation arrangement pursuant to which the portfolio manager may allocate certain amounts awarded among certain accounts in shares that vest in two to three years.

 

65


Table of Contents

LITMAN GREGORY

Advisor to the Funds

Litman Gregory’s portfolio managers are compensated based on a fixed salary and a distribution of Litman Gregory’s profits commensurate with the portfolio managers’ respective ownership percentages in the parent company of the Advisor.

LOOMIS SAYLES

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

Loomis Sayles believes that portfolio manager compensation should be driven primarily by the delivery of consistent and superior long-term performance for its clients. Portfolio manager compensation is made up primarily of three main components: base salary, variable compensation and a long-term incentive program. Although portfolio manager compensation is not directly tied to assets under management, a portfolio manager’s base salary and/or variable compensation potential may reflect the amount of assets for which the manager is responsible relative to other portfolio managers. Loomis Sayles also offers a profit sharing plan.

Base salary is a fixed amount based on a combination of factors, including industry experience, firm experience, job performance and market considerations.

Variable compensation is an incentive-based component and generally represents a significant multiple of base salary. Variable compensation is based on four factors: investment performance, profit growth of the firm, profit growth of the manager’s business unit and team commitment. Investment performance is the primary component of total variable compensation and generally represents at least 60% of the total for fixed income managers. The other three factors are used to determine the remainder of variable compensation, subject to the discretion of the Chief Investment Officer and senior management. The Chief Investment Officer and senior management evaluate these other factors annually.

While mutual fund performance and asset size do not directly contribute to the compensation calculation, investment performance for fixed income managers is measured by comparing the performance of Loomis Sayles’ institutional composite (pre-tax and net of fees) in the manager’s style to the performance of an external benchmark and a customized peer group. The benchmark used for the investment style utilized for the Alternative Strategies Fund is the 3-Month LIBOR. The customized peer group is created by Loomis Sayles and is made up of institutional managers in the particular investment style. A portfolio manager’s relative performance for the past five years, or seven years for some products, is used to calculate the amount of variable compensation payable due to performance. To ensure consistency, Loomis Sayles analyzes the five- or seven-year performance on a rolling three-year basis. If a manager is responsible for more than one product, the rankings of each product are weighted based on relative revenue size of accounts represented in each product.

Loomis Sayles uses both an external benchmark and a customized peer group as a point of comparison for fixed income manager performance because Loomis Sayles believes they represent an appropriate combination of the competitive fixed-income product universe and the investment styles offered by Loomis Sayles.

Mr. Kearns also serves as a portfolio manager to certain private investment funds managed by Loomis Sayles, and may receive additional compensation based on his investment activities for each of those funds.

In addition to the compensation described above, portfolio managers may receive additional compensation based on the overall growth of their strategies.

 

66


Table of Contents

General

Most mutual funds are not included in the Loomis Sayles institutional strategy composites, so unlike managed accounts, fund performance and asset size in those cases would not directly contribute to this calculation. However, each fund managed by Loomis Sayles employs strategies endorsed by Loomis Sayles and fits into the product category for the relevant investment style. Loomis Sayles may adjust compensation if there is significant dispersion among the returns of the composite and accounts not included in the composite.

Loomis Sayles has developed and implemented two distinct long-term incentive plans to attract and retain investment talent. These plans supplement existing compensation. The first plan has several important components distinguishing it from traditional equity ownership plans:

 

    The plan grants units that entitle participants to an annual payment based on a percentage of company earnings above an established threshold;

 

    Upon retirement a participant will receive a multi-year payout for his or her vested units;

 

    Participation is contingent upon signing an award agreement, which includes a non-compete covenant.

The second plan is similarly constructed although the participant’s annual participation in company earnings is deferred for two years from the time of award and is only payable if the portfolio manager remains at Loomis Sayles. In this plan, there are no post-retirement payments or non-compete covenants.

Senior management expects that the variable compensation portion of overall compensation will continue to remain the largest source of income for those investment professionals included in the plan. The plan is initially offered to portfolio managers and over time the scope of eligibility is likely to widen. Management has full discretion over what units are issued and to whom.

Portfolio managers also participate in the Loomis Sayles profit sharing plan, in which Loomis Sayles makes a contribution to the retirement plan of each employee based on a percentage of base salary (up to a maximum amount). The portfolio managers also participate in the Loomis Sayles defined benefit pension plan, which applies to all Loomis Sayles employees who joined the firm prior to May 3, 2003. The defined benefit is based on years of service and base compensation (up to a maximum amount).

NORTHERN CROSS

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

Northern Cross is owned 100% by the six principals, Howard Appleby, Jean-Francois Ducrest, James LaTorre, Scott Babka, Adam Feldman and David Lerner. The compensation of the portfolio managers, Messrs. Appleby, Ducrest and LaTorre, consists of a share in the firm’s overall profits.

NUANCE

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

The Nuance team is compensated in three ways: salary, bonus and profit sharing. The profit sharing component of the compensation is motivation to stay loyal to the firm and participate in its growth.

Scott Moore, President, Chief Investment Officer, and portfolio manager, owns 36.48% of Nuance. As such, his performance is tied to the profits of the firm. He firmly believes that the profits of the firm will coincide directly with the success of the investment products he manages with his team. The vast majority of his compensation has a direct correlation with the success of his clients and their experience as clients with Nuance.

 

67


Table of Contents

PASSPORT

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

John Burbank’s compensation is based on the residual profits and revenues of the firm. His compensation also includes a 401(k) plan that includes a firm contribution as well as participation in a defined benefit pension plan.

PICTET

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

Pictet’s remuneration policy aligns individuals’ pay with the interests of Pictet’s clients and the long-term performance of the business.

Pictet’s Managing Partners, as part of the responsibilities of the Partners’ Committee, oversee all remuneration policies and provide independent oversight for remuneration decisions. The Partners’ attention to a sound risk management approach protects investors, the Pictet Group, Pictet, and employees. Pictet’s remuneration policy complies with regulatory requirements and external best practices.

An individual’s total compensation typically comprises a fixed salary; a performance related bonus; Pictet Parts (linking pay to Group results); and, for key senior executives, Long-Term Incentive Plan Units (linking pay to the long-term growth and continued success of Pictet). The variable elements of pay create a direct link between pay and performance, aligning Pictet’s staff’s incentives with the best interests of Pictet’s clients. The appropriate mix of different pay elements and deferrals ensures that an individual’s compensation is appropriately stable over time and encourages responsible risk-taking and sustainable performance for Pictet’s clients.

SANDS CAPITAL

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

Investment professionals benefit from a salary competitive in the industry, an annual qualitative bonus based on subjective review of the employees’ overall contribution, and a standard profit sharing plan and 401(k) plan. Additional incentives include equity participation. The investment professionals also participate in an investment results bonus. The investment results bonus is calculated from the performance variance of the Sands Capital composite returns and their respective benchmarks over 1-, 3- and 5-year periods, weighted towards the 3- and 5-year results.

 

68


Table of Contents

THORNBURG

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

The compensation of the portfolio manager includes an annual salary, annual bonus and company-wide profit sharing. The portfolio manager also owns equity shares in Thornburg. Both the salary and bonus are reviewed approximately annually for comparability with salaries of other portfolio managers in the industry, using survey data obtained from compensation consultants. The annual bonus is subjective. Criteria that are considered in formulating the bonus, include, but are not limited to, the following: revenues available to pay compensation of the portfolio manager and all other expenses related to supporting the accounts managed by the manager, multiple year historical total return of accounts managed by the portfolio manager, relative to market performance and similar investment companies; the degree of sensitivity of the portfolio manager to potential tax liabilities created for account holders in generating returns, relative to overall return. To the extent that the portfolio manager realizes benefits from capital appreciation and dividends paid to shareholders of Thornburg, such benefits accrue from the overall financial performance of Thornburg.

WATER ISLAND

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

Investment professionals are compensated with salary and a bonus based on individual performance, both relative and absolute fund performance, and profitability of Water Island. Profit sharing in Water Island may also be included as potential compensation. In addition, Water Island believes employee ownership and the opportunity for all employees to hold ownership interests in Water Island fosters teamwork and encourages longevity in tenure. Ownership shares may be issued to employees based on tenure, position, and contribution to Water Island. Water Island’s policies help ensure that the financial interests of its key investment personnel are aligned with its clients’ financial interests. Water Island also expends efforts to help ensure it attracts and retains key investment talent. Its goal is to focus its employees on long-term rather than short-term performance and to encourage employee retention.

WELLSCAP

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund and the Smaller Companies Fund

The compensation structure for WellsCap’s portfolio managers includes a competitive fixed base salary plus variable incentives, payable annually and/or over longer term periods. Participating in third party investment management compensation surveys provides market-based compensation information to help support individual pay decisions. In addition to investment management compensations surveys, compensation consideration includes prior professional experience, tenure, seniority, and a portfolio manager’s team size, scope, and assets under management when determining their fixed base salary. Incentive bonuses are typically tied to relative, pre-tax investment performance of the Funds or other accounts under his or her management within acceptable risk parameters. Relative investment performance is generally evaluated for 1, 3, and 5 year performance results, with a predominant weighting on the 3- and 5- year time periods, versus the relevant benchmarks and/or peer groups consistent with the investment style. In the case of the Equity Fund and the Smaller Companies Fund, the benchmarks against which the performance of the Equity Fund’s and the Smaller Companies Fund’s portfolios may be compared for these purposes generally are indicated in the “Performance” sections of the prospectus of the Equity Fund and the Smaller Companies Fund.. In addition, portfolio managers, who meet the eligibility requirements, may participate in Wells Fargo’s 401(k) plan that features a limited matching contribution. Eligibility for and participation in this plan is on the same basis for all employees.

Portfolio Manager Securities Ownership

The table below identifies the dollar range of Fund shares beneficially owned by each portfolio manager of such Fund, as of December 31, 2016.

 

69


Table of Contents

Portfolio Manager/

Fund(s) Managed

   Dollar Range of
Securities Owned
 

Arik Ahitov/

  

Smaller Companies Fund

     A  

Howard Appleby/

  

International Fund

     E  

Benjamin (Ben) Beneche/

  

International Fund

     A  

Jonathan T. Bloom*/

  

Equity Fund

     A  

Jeffrey Bronchick/

  

Smaller Companies Fund

     A  

Dennis Bryan/

  

Smaller Companies Fund

     A  

John Burbank/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     A  

Jack Chee/

  

Equity Fund

     D  

Smaller Companies Fund

     A  

Christopher C. Davis/

  

Equity Fund

     A  

Jeremy DeGroot/

  

Equity Fund

     E  

International Fund

     E  

Smaller Companies Fund

     D  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     E  

Roger Foltynowicz/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     E  

Jean-Francois Ducrest/

  

International Fund

     D  

Matthew Eagan/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     A  

Patrick J. English/

  

Equity Fund

     A  

Danton Goei/

  

Equity Fund

     A  

Jeffrey Gundlach/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     A  

David G. Herro/

  

International Fund

     G  

Rajat Jain/

  

Equity Fund

     D  

International Fund

     C  

Smaller Companies Fund

     A  

Kevin Kearns/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     A  

Mark Landecker/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     A  

James LaTorre/

  

International Fund

     A  

 

70


Table of Contents

Portfolio Manager/

Fund(s) Managed

   Dollar Range of
Securities Owned
 

Mark Little/

  

International Fund

     A  

Gregg Loprete/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     E  

David E. Marcus*/

  

International Fund

     A  

Clyde S. McGregor /

  

Equity Fund

     A  

Scott Moore/

  

Equity Fund

     A  

Todd Munn/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     C  

William C. Nygren/

  

Equity Fund

     A  

John Orrico/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     A  

Fabio Paolini/

  

International Fund

     A  

Andy P. Ramer/

  

Equity Fund

     A  

Steven Romick/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     A  

Frank M. Sands/

  

Equity Fund

     A  

Brian Selmo/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     A  

Jeffrey Sherman*/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     A  

A. Michael Sramek/

  

Equity Fund

     A  

Todd Vandam/

  

Alternative Strategies Fund

     A  

W. Vinson Walden/

  

International Fund

     A  

Richard T. Weiss/

  

Equity Fund

     G  

Smaller Companies Fund

     G  

* Information is as of March 17, 2017.

Key of Dollar Ranges for Table: A - None; B - $1 to $10,000; C - $10,001 to $50,000; D - $50,001 to $100,000; E - $100,001 - $500,000; F - $500,001 - $1,000,000; G - Over $1,000,000.

PROXY VOTING POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

The Board has delegated the responsibility for voting proxies relating to portfolio securities held by the Funds to the Advisor as a part of the Advisor’s general management of the Funds, subject to the Board’s continuing oversight. The policy of the Trust is also to adopt the policies and procedures used by the Advisor to vote proxies relating to portfolio securities held by its clients.

 

71


Table of Contents

The following information is a summary of the proxy voting policies and procedures of the Advisor and the Sub-Advisors.

LITMAN GREGORY

Advisor to the Funds

It is the Advisor’s policy to vote all proxies received by the Funds in a timely manner. In general, the Advisor will vote in accordance with its pre-determined voting guidelines (the “Guidelines”). However, the Advisor reserves the right to depart from any of the Guidelines and make a voting decision on a case-by-case basis. Although many proxy proposals will be covered by the Guidelines, the Advisor recognizes that some proposals require special consideration, and the Advisor will make a decision on a case-by-case basis in these situations. Where such a case-by-case determination is required, the Advisor’s proxy voting coordinator may, but is not required to, consult with other personnel of the Advisor to determine the appropriate action on the matter.

Unless otherwise instructed by the Funds, the Advisor may, and generally will, delegate the responsibility for voting proxies relating to the Funds’ portfolio securities to one or more of the Sub-Advisors. To the extent such responsibility is delegated to a Sub-Advisor, the Sub-Advisor shall assume the fiduciary duty and reporting responsibilities of the Advisor. Unless otherwise instructed by the Funds or the Advisor, the Sub-Advisor shall apply its own proxy voting policies and procedures.

The Advisor’s duty is to vote in the best interests of the Funds’ shareholders. In situations where the Advisor determines that a proxy proposal raises a material conflict of interest between the interests of the Advisor, the Funds’ principal underwriter, or an affiliated person of the Advisor or the principal underwriter and that of one or more Funds, the conflict shall be resolved by voting in accordance with a predetermined voting policy. However, to the extent that (1) no pre-determined voting policy applies to the specific proposal or (2) there is an applicable pre-determined voting policy, but the Advisor has discretion to deviate from such policy, the Advisor shall disclose the conflict to the Board and seek the Board’s direction or consent to the proposed vote prior to voting on such proposal.

COVE STREET

Sub-Advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund

Cove Street will vote proxies on behalf of the Smaller Companies Fund in a manner that it believes is consistent with the best interests of the Smaller Companies Fund and its shareholders. Absent special circumstances, all proxies will be voted consistent with guidelines established and described in Cove Street’s Proxy Voting Policies and Procedures. A summary of Cove Street’s Proxy Voting Policies and Procedures is as follows:

 

    Cove Street generally votes against issues that seek to entrench a board and management of a company through anti-takeover measures, staggered board terms, super majority requirements and poison pill provisions;

 

    Cove Street is highly sensitive to any measures that potentially may dilute shareholder interests ( i.e. , new issues or excessive management compensation through equity gifting);

 

    Cove Street will not vote shares in favor of social issues unless it believes it will advance shareholder value; and

 

72


Table of Contents
    Cove Street generally votes in favor of measures that provide shareholders with greater ability to nominate directors, hold directors and management accountable for performance, and allow shareholders to directly vote on takeover proposals by third parties.

DAVIS ADVISORS

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

Davis Advisors votes on behalf of its clients in matters of corporate governance through the proxy voting process. Davis Advisors takes its ownership responsibilities very seriously and believes the right to vote proxies for its clients’ holdings is a significant asset of the clients. Davis Advisors exercises its voting responsibilities as a fiduciary, solely with the goal of maximizing the value of its clients’ investments.

Davis Advisors votes proxies with a focus on the investment implications of each issue. For each proxy vote, Davis Advisors takes into consideration its duty to clients and all other relevant facts known to Davis Advisors at the time of the vote. Therefore, while these guidelines provide a framework for voting, votes are ultimately cast on a case-by-case basis.

Davis Advisors has adopted written Proxy Voting Policies and Procedures and established a Proxy Oversight Group to oversee voting policies and deal with potential conflicts of interest. In evaluating issues, the Proxy Oversight Group may consider information from many sources, including the portfolio manager for each client account, management of a company presenting a proposal, shareholder groups, and independent proxy research services.

The most important factors that Davis Advisors considers in evaluating proxy issues are: (i) the company’s or management’s long-term track record of creating value for shareholders, with the recommendations of management with a good record of creating value for shareholders given more weight than those of managements with a poor record; (ii) whether, in Davis Advisors’ estimation, the current proposal being considered will significantly enhance or detract from long-term value for existing shareholders; and (iii) whether a poor record of long-term performance resulted from poor management or from factors outside of managements control.

Other factors that Davis Advisors considers may include:

(a) Shareholder oriented management . One of the factors that Davis Advisors considers in selecting stocks for investment is the presence of shareholder-oriented management. In general, such managements will have a large ownership stake in the company. They also will have a record of taking actions and supporting policies designed to increase the value of the company’s shares and thereby enhance shareholder wealth. Davis Advisors’ research analysts are active in meeting with top management of portfolio companies and in discussing their views on policies or actions that could enhance shareholder value. Whether management shows evidence of responding to reasonable shareholder suggestions, and otherwise improving general corporate governance, is a factor that may be taken into consideration in proxy voting.

(b) Allowing responsible management teams to run the business . Because Davis Advisors generally tries to invest with “owner oriented” managements (see above), Davis Advisors votes with the recommendation of management on most routine matters, unless circumstances such as long-standing poor performance or a change from Davis Advisors’ initial assessment indicate otherwise. Examples include the election of directors and ratification of auditors. Davis Advisors supports policies, plans and structures that give management teams appropriate latitude to run the business in the way that is most likely to maximize value for owners. Conversely, Davis Advisors opposes proposals that limit management’s ability to do this. Davis Advisors will generally vote with management on shareholder social and environmental proposals on the basis that their impact on share value is difficult to judge and is therefore best done by management.

 

73


Table of Contents

(c) Preserve and expand the power of shareholders in areas of corporate governance . Equity shareholders are owners of the business, and company boards and management teams are ultimately accountable to them. Davis Advisors supports policies, plans and structures that promote accountability of the board and management to owners, and align the interests of the board and management with owners. Examples include: annual election of all board members, cumulative voting, and incentive plans that are contingent on delivering value to shareholders. Davis Advisors generally opposes proposals that reduce accountability or misalign interests, including but not limited to classified boards, poison pills, excessive option plans, and repricing of options.

(d) Support compensation policies that reward management teams appropriately for performance . Davis Advisors believes that well-thought out incentives are critical to driving long-term shareholder value creation. Management incentives ought to be aligned with the goals of long-term owners. In Davis Advisors’ view, the basic problem of skyrocketing executive compensation is not high pay for high performance, but high pay for mediocrity or worse. In situations where Davis Advisors feels that the compensation practices at companies it owns are not acceptable, Davis Advisors will exercise its discretion to vote against compensation committee members and specific compensation proposals.

Davis Advisors exercises its professional judgment in applying these principles to specific proxy votes. Davis Advisors’ Proxy Procedures and Policies provide additional explanation of the analysis Davis Advisors may conduct when applying these guiding principles to specific proxy votes.

A potential conflict of interest arises when Davis Advisors has business interests that may not be consistent with the best interests of its client. Davis Advisors’ Proxy Oversight Group is charged with resolving material potential conflicts of interest it becomes aware of. It is charged with resolving conflicts in a manner that is consistent with the best interests of clients. There are many acceptable methods of resolving potential conflicts, and the Proxy Oversight Group exercises its judgment and discretion to determine an appropriate means of resolving a potential conflict in any given situation including by the following means: (1) Votes consistent with the “General Proxy Voting Policies,” are to be consistent with the best interests of clients; (2) Davis Advisors may disclose the conflict to the client and obtain the client’s consent prior to voting the proxy; (3) Davis Advisors may obtain guidance from an independent third party; (4) the potential conflict may be immaterial; or (5) other reasonable means of resolving potential conflicts of interest to effectively insulate the decision on how to vote client proxies from the conflict.

DOUBLELINE

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

DoubleLine determines how to vote proxies relating to portfolio securities pursuant to its written proxy voting policies and procedures, which have been adopted pursuant to Rule 206(4)-6 under the Advisers Act (the “DoubleLine Proxy Policy”). The DoubleLine Proxy Policy also applies to any voting rights and/or consent rights on behalf of the portfolio securities, with respect to debt securities, including but not limited to, plans of reorganization, and waivers and consents under applicable indentures.

The DoubleLine Proxy Policy is designed and implemented in a manner reasonably expected to ensure that voting and consent rights are exercised in the best interests of the funds managed by DoubleLine and their shareholders. Under the DoubleLine Proxy Policy, DoubleLine will review each proxy to determine whether there may be a material conflict between DoubleLine and the fund. If no conflict exists, DoubleLine will vote the proxy on a case-by-case basis in the best interest of each client under the circumstances, taking into account, but not necessarily being bound by, any recommendation made by any third party vendor that has been engaged by DoubleLine to provide recommendations on the voting of proxies.

 

74


Table of Contents

If a material conflict does exist, DoubleLine will seek to resolve any such conflict in accordance with the DoubleLine Proxy Policy, which seeks to resolve such conflict in the relevant fund’s best interest by pursuing any one of the following courses of action: (i) convening a committee to assess and resolve the conflict; (ii) voting in accordance with the recommendation of an independent third-party service provider; (iii) voting in accordance with the instructions of the relevant fund’s board, or any committee thereof; or (iv) not voting the proxy. In voting proxies, including those in which a material conflict may be determined to exist, DoubleLine may also consider the factors and guidelines included in the DoubleLine Proxy Policy.

In certain limited circumstances, particularly in the area of structured finance, DoubleLine may enter into voting agreements or other contractual obligations that govern the voting of shares and, in such cases, will vote any proxy in accordance with such agreement or obligation.

In addition, where DoubleLine determines that there are unusual costs and/or difficulties associated with voting a proxy, which more typically might be the case with respect to proxies of non-U.S. issuers, DoubleLine reserves the right to not vote a proxy unless it determines that the potential benefits of voting the proxy exceed the expected cost to the relevant fund.

DoubleLine supervises and periodically reviews its proxy voting activities and implementation of the DoubleLine Proxy Policy.

EVERMORE

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

Evermore has adopted a set of proxy voting policies and procedures (the “Policies”) to ensure that Evermore votes proxies relating to equity securities in the best interest of clients.

In voting proxies, Evermore is guided by general fiduciary principles and seeks to act prudently and solely in the best interest of clients. Evermore attempts to consider all factors that could affect the value of the investment and will vote proxies in the manner that it believes will be consistent with efforts to maximize shareholder values. Evermore may utilize an external service provider to provide it with information and/or a recommendation with regard to proxy votes. However, such recommendations do not relieve Evermore of its responsibility for the proxy vote.

In the case of a proxy issue for which there is a stated position in the Policies, Evermore generally votes in accordance with such stated position. In the case of a proxy issue for which there is a list of factors set forth in the Policies that Evermore considers in voting on such issue, Evermore votes on a case-by-case basis in accordance with the general principles set forth above and considering such enumerated factors. In the case of a proxy issue for which there is no stated position or list of factors that Evermore considers in voting on such issue, Evermore votes on a case-by-case basis in accordance with the general principles set forth above. Issues for which there is a stated position set forth in the Policies or for which there is a list of factors set forth in the Policies that Evermore considers in voting on such issues fall into a variety of categories, including election of trustees, ratification of auditors, proxy and tender offer defenses, capital structure issues, executive and trustee compensation, mergers and corporate restructurings, and social and environmental issues. The stated position on an issue set forth in the Policies can always be superseded, subject to the duty to act solely in the best interest of the beneficial owners of accounts, by the investment management professionals responsible for the account whose shares are being voted. Issues applicable to a particular industry may cause Evermore to abandon a policy that would have otherwise applied to issuers generally. Evermore’s policy is to vote all proxies from a specific issuer in the same way for each client absent qualifying restrictions from the client.

In furtherance of Evermore’s goal to vote proxies in the best interest of clients, Evermore follows procedures designed to identify and address material conflicts that may arise between Evermore’s interests and those of its clients before voting proxies on behalf of such clients. To seek to identify conflicts of interest, Evermore

 

75


Table of Contents

reviews its relationship with the issuer of each security to determine if Evermore or any of its employees has any financial, business or personal relationship with the issuer. Evermore is also sensitive to the fact that a significant, publicized relationship between an issuer and a non- affiliate might appear to the public to influence the manner in which Evermore decides to vote a proxy with respect to such issuer.

Evermore’s CCO reviews and addresses conflicts of interest brought to his or her attention. A proxy issue that will be voted in accordance with a stated position on an issue is not brought to the attention of the CCO for a conflict of interest review because Evermore’s position is that to the extent a conflict of interest issue exists, it is resolved by voting in accordance with a pre-determined policy. With respect to a conflict of interest brought to its attention, the CCO first determines whether such conflict of interest is material. A conflict of interest is considered material to the extent that it is determined that such conflict is likely to influence, or appear to influence, Evermore’s decision-making in voting proxies.

If it is determined by the CCO that a conflict of interest is not material, Evermore may vote proxies notwithstanding the existence of the conflict. If it is determined by the CCO that a conflict of interest is material, the CCO is responsible for determining an appropriate method to resolve such conflict of interest before the proxy affected by the conflict of interest is voted. Such determination is based on the particular facts and circumstances, including the importance of the proxy issue and the nature of the conflict of interest. Methods of resolving a material conflict of interest may include, but are not limited to, disclosing the conflict to clients and obtaining their consent before voting, or suggesting to clients that they engage another party to vote the proxy on their behalf.

Evermore’s Proxy Voting Policies and Principles

Evermore’s proxy voting positions have been developed based on years of experience with proxy voting and corporate governance issues. These principles have been reviewed by various members of Evermore’s organization, including the investment team, chief operating officer, chief financial officer, chief compliance officer, operations personnel, and outside legal counsel. The Board of Trustees of the Trust will approve the proxy voting policies and procedures annually.

The following guidelines reflect what Evermore believes to be good corporate governance and behavior:

Board of Directors. The election of directors and an independent board are key to good corporate governance. Directors are expected to be competent individuals and they should be accountable and responsive to shareholders. Evermore supports an independent board of directors, and prefers that key committees such as audit, nominating, and compensation committees be comprised of independent directors. Evermore will generally vote against management efforts to classify a board and will generally support proposals to declassify the board of directors. Evermore will consider withholding votes from directors who have attended less than 75% of meetings without a valid reason. While generally in favor of separating Chairman and CEO positions, Evermore will review this issue on a case-by-case basis taking into consideration other factors including the company’s corporate governance guidelines and performance. Evermore evaluates proposals to restore or provide for cumulative voting on a case-by-case basis and considers such factors as corporate governance provisions as well as relative performance. Evermore generally will support non-binding shareholder proposals to require a majority vote standard for the election of directors; however, if these proposals are binding, Evermore will give careful review on a case-by-case basis of the potential ramifications of such implementation.

Ratification of Auditors. Evermore will closely scrutinize the independence, role, and performance of auditors. On a case-by-case basis, Evermore will examine proposals relating to non-audit relationships and non-audit fees. Evermore will also consider, on a case-by-case basis, proposals to rotate auditors, and will vote against the ratification of auditors when there is clear and compelling evidence of a lack of independence, accounting irregularities or negligence attributable to the auditors.

 

76


Table of Contents

Management  & Director Compensation. A company’s equity-based compensation plan should be in alignment with the shareholders’ long-term interests. Evermore believes that executive compensation should be directly linked to the performance of the company. Evermore evaluates plans on a case-by-case basis by considering several factors to determine whether the plan is fair and reasonable. Evermore will generally oppose plans that have the potential to be excessively dilutive, and will almost always oppose plans that are structured to allow the repricing of underwater options, or plans that have an automatic share replenishment “evergreen” feature. Evermore will generally support employee stock option plans in which the purchase price is at least 85% of fair market value, and when potential dilution is 10% or less. Severance compensation arrangements will be reviewed on a case-by-case basis, although Evermore will generally oppose “golden parachutes” that are considered excessive. Evermore will normally support proposals that require that a percentage of directors’ compensation be in the form of common stock, as it aligns their interests with those of the shareholders. Evermore will review non-binding say-on-pay proposals on a case-by-case basis, and will generally vote in favor of such proposals unless compensation is misaligned with performance and/or shareholders’ interests, the company has not provided reasonably clear disclosure regarding its compensation practices, or there are concerns with the company’s remuneration practices.

Anti-Takeover Mechanisms and Related Issues . Evermore generally opposes anti-takeover measures since they tend to reduce shareholder rights. However, as with all proxy issues, Evermore conducts an independent review of each anti-takeover proposal. On occasion, Evermore may vote with management when the investment team has concluded that the proposals are not onerous and would not harm Advisory Clients’ interests as stockholders. Evermore generally supports proposals that require shareholder rights plans (“poison pills”) to be subject to a shareholder vote. Evermore will closely evaluate shareholder rights plans on a case-by-case basis to determine whether or not they warrant support. Evermore will generally vote against any proposal to issue stock that has unequal or subordinate voting rights. In addition, Evermore generally opposes any supermajority voting requirements as well as the payment of “greenmail.” Evermore usually supports “fair price” provisions and confidential voting.

Changes to Capital Structure. Evermore realizes that a company’s financing decisions have a significant impact on its shareholders, particularly when they involve the issuance of additional shares of common or preferred stock or the assumption of additional debt. Evermore will carefully review, on a case-by-case basis, proposals by companies to increase authorized shares and the purpose for the increase. Evermore will generally not vote in favor of dual-class capital structures to increase the number of authorized shares where that class of stock would have superior voting rights. Evermore will generally vote in favor of the issuance of preferred stock in cases where the company specifies the voting, dividend, conversion and other rights of such stock and the terms of the preferred stock issuance are deemed reasonable. Evermore will review proposals seeking preemptive rights on a case-by-case basis.

Mergers and Corporate Restructuring. Mergers and acquisitions will be subject to careful review by Evermore to determine whether they would be beneficial to shareholders. Evermore will analyze various economic and strategic factors in making the final decision on a merger or acquisition. Corporate restructuring proposals are also subject to a thorough examination on a case-by-case basis.

Environmental, Social and Governance Issues. As a fiduciary, Evermore is primarily concerned about the financial interests of its advisory clients. Evermore will generally give management discretion with regard to social, environmental and ethical issues although Evermore may vote in favor of those issues that are believed to have significant economic benefits or implications. Evermore generally supports the right of shareholders to call special meetings and act by written consent. However, Evermore will review such shareholder proposals on a case-by-case basis in an effort to ensure that such proposals do not disrupt the course of business or waste company resources for the benefit of a small minority of shareholders.

 

77


Table of Contents

Global Corporate Governance. Evermore manages investments in countries worldwide. Many of the tenets discussed above are applied to Evermore’s proxy voting decisions for international investments. However, Evermore must be flexible in these worldwide markets. Principles of good corporate governance may vary by country, given the constraints of a country’s laws and acceptable practices in the markets. As a result, it is on occasion difficult to apply a consistent set of governance practices to all issuers. As experienced money managers, Evermore’s analysts are skilled in understanding the complexities of the regions in which they specialize and are trained to analyze proxy issues germane to their regions.

Proxy Voting Procedures

Evermore relies upon the clients’ custodians to notify Evermore of any upcoming proxy events. When proxy materials are received by Evermore’s operations personnel, the materials are provided to one or more members of Evermore’s Investment Team who review the materials and determine the vote on each proposal contained within the proxy material. The proxy votes are then provided to Evermore’s operations personnel who will transmit the vote electronically by (1) fax to the custodian; (2) email to the custodian; or (3) electronically through a third party Proxy Service Provider at the request of the custodian. All proxy votes submitted are tracked and recorded by Evermore’s operations department.

FMI

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

Policies

FMI will vote proxies in a manner that it feels best protects the interests of the common shareholder. FMI will look critically upon any issue or vote that will limit or reduce the prerogatives and/or influence of the common shareholders. The following statement of policies is couched in terms of FMI’s general posture on various issues, recognizing that there are always exceptions.

Administrative Issues

FMI will generally vote in favor of the re-election of directors and the appointment of actuaries, auditors, and similar professionals. FMI will also vote in favor of programs of indemnification of directors, which are consistent with common practice. The changing of auditors raises a yellow flag, and FMI will try to determine the reasons for any change. If the change results from a dispute between the company and the auditors, and FMI feels the auditor’s position is correct, FMI will vote against making a change.

Management Entrenchment Issues

FMI will generally vote against any proposal or policy that seeks to prevent the takeover of a company that is in receipt of a bona fide offer, whether friendly or otherwise. Such anti-takeover policies may include, but are not limited to poison pill, super-majority voting, golden parachute arrangements, and staggered board arrangements, where that represents a change from a standard board. FMI will generally vote in favor of maintaining preemptive rights for shareholders, one share/one vote, and cumulative voting rights. Generally, FMI will support proposals calling for majority vote for directors and separation of the Chairman and CEO roles.

FMI will tend to vote against creation of classes of stock with superior voting rights, which protect management’s voting control despite reduced financial commitment of management to the company. FMI will evaluate proposals, such as changing state of incorporation, fiscal year, or corporate charter, in light of specific circumstances prompting the proposal, to determine whether the proposed change would reduce shareholders’ rights.

 

78


Table of Contents

Mergers and Acquisitions

Voting on mergers, acquisitions, or spin-offs requires an evaluation of the impact of those transactions upon the company, and FMI will vote based upon its assessment of what is best for the company and therefore the shareholders. With respect to a proposed takeover of the company, FMI will initially evaluate an offer for the company in terms of the fairness of the price. FMI does this in the context of a two- to three-year time horizon to avoid selling at a premium over a temporarily depressed stock price. FMI will generally vote in favor of offers that represent a fair price, paid either in cash or in exchange for liquid securities of strong acquiring firms. FMI will oppose offers that FMI feels represent an unfair price, and FMI will oppose offers where shareholders are asked to finance a takeover by taking back debt or preferred stocks of questionable quality. FMI tends to be skeptical of management-led leveraged buyouts, as FMI feels it is very difficult for them to be objective as to the value of the company when they are the purchaser.

Management Incentives

FMI strongly favors programs that encourage outright stock ownership as opposed to conventional option plans. In limited cases, when the options are earmarked for lower level employees and the absolute amount is modest, FMI will vote affirmatively. FMI now generally votes against traditional stock option plans. Typical option plans result in a misalignment of management and shareholder interests, due to the asymmetrical risk profile of an option. Since there is no downside risk, managements have an incentive to take excessive risk. In short, executives tend to cease thinking like true owners. FMI likes to see senior and executive level managers own stock in multiples of their annual salary.

Ideally FMI prefers to see bonuses and incentive awards paid in stock (with a vesting period), rather than cash or options. FMI looks for stock award plans that are based on tangible operating performance metrics, such as return-an-invested capital or profit margin.

Additionally, when FMI deems a management as excessively compensated, FMI will likely vote against any kind of additional reward plan, even if the plan by itself looks reasonable.

Social Issues

It is FMI’s belief that socially responsible companies have, over time, provided superior investment returns for long-term investors. Fair hiring and inclusiveness with respect to women and minorities create a positive corporate culture that offers greater opportunities for growth for all employees, with concomitant rewards for shareholders of the company. A responsible corporate policy with respect to environmental issues is critical to all of us.

FMI’s general posture with respect to social issues is to support management so long as they are complying with the spirit of the laws and regulations of the United States of America. Shareholder proposals must be considered on a case-by-case basis. The number of specific issues that FMI has seen raised on proxy votes with respect to social and labor issues are increasing. Since there is much “gray” and little “black and white” with respect to the level of corporate commitment to many of the social issues, and since FMI is generally supportive of the goals and policies of the companies that it owns, FMI would tend to vote in favor of management on these issues absent evidence that the company is abusing FMI’s trust or absent direction from FMI’s clients to the contrary. If it is the desire of a client to provide input and direction on the voting of proxies with respect to certain issues, FMI would be more than happy to advise them when such issues arise and to defer to their wishes in voting on those issues.

Conflicts of Interest

When there is an apparent conflict of interest, or the appearance of a conflict of interest, e.g. , where FMI may receive fees from a company for advisory or other services at the same time that FMI has investments in the stock of that company, FMI will vote with management on those issues on which brokerage firms are allowed to vote without customer approval under NYSE rules, e.g. , directors and auditors. On other issues, FMI will advise its clients of the conflict, and FMI will vote as the client directs. If FMI receives no direction from a client, it will abstain.

 

79


Table of Contents

Procedures

FMI has the responsibility and authority to vote proxies with respect to the securities under its management unless the right to vote proxies is expressly reserved for the client, plan trustees or other plan fiduciary. FMI will advise the appropriate parties to forward all proxy materials to their offices and will take reasonable steps to ensure that they are received. FMI will review the issues to be voted upon and vote the proxies in accordance with the policies stated above, unless directed otherwise by the client. FMI will maintain and monitor all meeting, ballot, account and vote information, and make this information available to clients upon request.

In situations where securities held in a portfolio are not generally owned “across the board” in all client accounts with the same investment style, i.e. , small holdings, FMI will vote those proxies based upon the management’s recommendations.

Proxies cannot be voted on any securities that have been loaned out by the client. Where securities have been loaned out and a vote is required regarding a material event, FMI will attempt to recall the loaned security in order to vote the proxy. This does not apply to “small holdings” as defined above.

FIRST PACIFIC

Sub-Advisor to the Smaller Companies Fund and the Alternative Strategies Fund

First Pacific has implemented Proxy Voting Policies and Procedures, which underscore First Pacific’s concern that all proxy voting decisions be made in the best interests of the funds it manages and that First Pacific act in a prudent and diligent manner intended to enhance the economic value of the assets of such funds. First Pacific has delegated to Institutional Shareholder Services (“ISS”), an independent service provider, the administration of proxy voting for the portfolio securities held in the accounts managed by First Pacific, including the Smaller Companies Fund and the Alternative Strategies Fund, subject to First Pacific’s continuing oversight. ISS, a Delaware corporation, provides proxy voting services to many investment advisers on a global basis. Certain of First Pacific’s proxy voting guidelines include the following: First Pacific votes for uncontested director nominees recommended by management. First Pacific votes against a management proposal to adopt a poison pill and votes for a management proposal to redeem a poison pill or limit the payment of greenmail. First Pacific votes against a management proposal to eliminate or limit shareholders’ rights to call a special meeting. Although many proxy proposals can be voted in accordance with First Pacific’s proxy voting guidelines, some proposals will require special consideration, and First Pacific will make a decision on a case-by-case basis in these situations.

Where a proxy proposal raises a material conflict between First Pacific’s interests and a fund’s interests, First Pacific will resolve the conflict as follows: to the extent the matter is specifically covered by First Pacific’s proxy voting guidelines, the proxies generally will be voted in accordance with the guidelines. To the extent First Pacific is making a case-by-case determination under its proxy voting guidelines, First Pacific will disclose the conflict to the Board or the Advisor and obtain the Board’s or Advisor’s consent to vote or direct the matter to an independent third party, selected by the Board or the Advisor, for a vote determination. If the Board’s or the Advisor’s consent or the independent third party’s determination is not received in a timely manner, First Pacific will abstain from voting the proxy.

First Pacific, through ISS, shall attempt to process every vote for all domestic and foreign proxies that they receive; however, there may be cases in which First Pacific will not process a proxy because it is impractical to do so. For example, First Pacific generally will not seek to recall securities that are out on loan for the purpose of voting the securities unless it is in the best interests of the applicable managed account to do so.

 

80


Table of Contents

HARRIS

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund and International Fund

Harris as part of its management responsibilities is generally responsible for exercising voting rights with respect to client accounts in accordance with its Proxy Voting Policies and Procedures. Harris exercises voting rights solely with the goal of serving the best interests of our clients in their capacity as shareholders of a company. In determining the vote on any proposal, the Proxy Voting Committee will consider the proposal’s expected impact on shareholder value and does not consider any benefit to Harris, its employees, its affiliates or any other person, other than benefits to the owners of the securities to be voted, as shareholders.

Harris considers the reputation, experience and competence of a company’s management when it evaluates the merits of investing in a particular company, and invests in companies in which Harris believes management goals and shareholder goals are aligned. Therefore, on most issues, Harris casts votes in accordance with management’s recommendations. However, when Harris believes that management’s position on a particular issue is not in the best interests of its clients, Harris will vote contrary to management’s recommendation.

Harris’ Proxy Voting Committee has established a number of proxy voting guidelines on various issues of concern to investors. The Proxy Voting Committee normally votes proxies in accordance with those guidelines unless it determines that it is in the best economic interests of a client and its shareholders to vote contrary to the guidelines.

 

    With respect to a company’s board of directors, Harris believes that there should be a majority of independent directors and that audit, compensation and nominating committees should consist solely of independent directors, and it usually will vote in favor of proposals that ensure such independence.

 

    With respect to auditors, Harris believes that the relationship between a public company and its auditors should be limited primarily to the audit engagement, and it usually will vote in favor of proposals to prohibit or limit fees paid to auditors for any services other than auditing and closely-related activities that do not raise any appearance of impaired independence.

 

    With respect to equity based compensation plans, Harris believes that appropriately designed plans approved by a company’s shareholders can be an effective way to align the interests of long-term shareholders and the interests of management, employees and directors. However, Harris will normally vote against plans that substantially dilute its clients’ ownership interest in the company or provide participants with excessive awards. Harris usually also will vote in favor of proposals to require the expensing of options, in favor of proposals for an annual shareholder advisory vote on executive compensation and in favor of advisory votes to ratify named executive officer compensation. Harris will normally vote against proposals that prohibit the automatic vesting of equity awards upon a change of control.

 

    With respect to corporate structure and shareholder rights, Harris believes that all shareholders of a company should have an equal voice and that barriers that limit the ability of shareholders to effect corporate change and to realize the full value of their investment are not desirable. Therefore, Harris usually will vote against proposals for supermajority voting rights, against the adoption of anti-takeover measures, and against proposals for different classes of stock with different voting rights.

 

    With respect to social responsibility issues, Harris believes that matters related to a company’s day-to-day business operations are primarily the responsibility of management. Harris is focused on maximizing long-term shareholder value and usually will vote against shareholder proposals requesting that a company disclose or change certain business practices unless it believes the proposal would have a substantial positive economic impact on the company.

 

81


Table of Contents

Harris may determine not to vote a proxy if it has concluded that the costs of or disadvantages resulting from voting outweigh the economic benefits of voting. For example, in some non-U.S. jurisdictions, the sale of securities voted may be prohibited for some period of time, usually between the record and meeting dates (“share blocking”), and Harris may determine that the loss of investment flexibility resulting from share blocking outweighs the benefit to be gained by voting.

The Proxy Voting Committee, in consultation with the Legal and Compliance Departments, will monitor and resolve any potential material conflicts of interest with respect to proxy voting. A conflict of interest might exist, for example, when an issuer who is soliciting proxy votes also has a client relationship with Harris, when a client of Harris is involved in a proxy contest (such as a corporate director), or when one of Harris’s employees has a personal interest in a proxy matter. When a conflict of interest arises, in order to ensure that proxies are voted solely in our clients’ collective best interest, Harris will vote in accordance with either its written guidelines or the recommendation of an independent voting service. If Harris believes that voting in accordance with the guidelines or the recommendation of the voting service would not be in the collective best interests of shareholders, the Proxy voting Conflicts Committee will determine how shares should be voted.

LAZARD

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

Policy:

As a fiduciary, Lazard is obligated to vote proxies in the best interests of its clients. Lazard has adopted a written policy (the “Policy”) that is designed to ensure that it satisfies its fiduciary obligation. Lazard has developed a structure to attempt to ensure that proxy voting is conducted in an appropriate manner, consistent with clients’ best interests, and within the framework of the Policy.

Lazard manages assets for a variety of clients worldwide, including institutions, financial intermediaries, sovereign wealth funds, and private clients. Absent specific guidelines provided by a client, Lazard’s policy is to vote proxies on a given issue the same for all of its clients. The Policy is based on the view that, in its role as investment adviser, Lazard must vote proxies based on what it believes will maximize shareholder value as a long-term investor, and that the votes it casts on behalf of all its clients are intended to accomplish that objective.

Procedures:

Administration and Implementation of Proxy Voting Process . Lazard’s proxy-voting process is administered by its Proxy Operations Department (“ProxyOps”), which reports to Lazard’s Chief Operating Officer. Oversight of the process is provided by Lazard’s Legal/Compliance Department and by a Proxy Committee currently consisting of Managing Directors, Lazard’s General Counsel and Chief Compliance Officer, portfolio managers and other investment personnel of Lazard. Lazard currently subscribes to advisory and other proxy voting services provided by Institutional Shareholder Services and by Glass, Lewis & Co. These proxy advisory services provide independent analysis and recommendations regarding various companies’ proxy proposals. While this research serves to help improve Lazard’s understanding of the issues surrounding a company’s proxy proposals, Lazard’s portfolio managers are responsible for providing the vote recommendation for a given proposal.

Lazard’s Proxy Committee has approved specific proxy voting guidelines regarding the most common proxy proposals (the “Approved Guidelines”). These Approved Guidelines provide that Lazard should vote for or against the proposal, or that the proposal should be considered on a case-by-case basis. ProxyOps provides Lazard’s Portfolio Manager/Analysts and Research Analysts (collectively, “Portfolio Management”) with the shareholder

 

82


Table of Contents

meeting agenda of proposals to be voted, the Lazard Approved Guidelines, as well as both Glass Lewis’ and ISS’ independent vote recommendations and supporting analyses for each proposal. Unless Portfolio Management disagrees with the Approved Guideline for a specific proposal, ProxyOps will generally vote the proposal according to the Approved Guideline, absent a compelling reason for not doing so, and subject to situations where there may be the appearance of a material conflict of interest or certain strategy-specific situations; in which case an alternative approach may be followed.

Types of Proposals . Shareholders receive proxies involving many different proposals. Many proposals are routine in nature, such as a non-controversial election of Directors or a change in a company’s name. Other proposals are more complicated, such as items regarding corporate governance and shareholder rights, changes to capital structure, stock option plans and other executive compensation issues, mergers and other significant transactions and social or political issues. The Policy lists the Approved Guidelines for the most common proposals. New or unusual proposals may be presented from time to time. Such proposals will be presented to Portfolio Management and discussed with the Proxy Committee to determine how they should be voted, and an Approved Guideline will be adopted if appropriate.

Conflicts of Interest . The Policy recognizes that there may be times when meeting agendas or proposals create the appearance of a material conflict of interest for Lazard. Should the appearance of such a conflict exist, Lazard will seek to alleviate the conflict by voting consistent with an Approved Guideline (to vote for or against), or, in situations where the Approved Guideline is to vote case-by-case, with the majority recommendation of the independent proxy services to which Lazard subscribes.

LOOMIS SAYLES

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

Loomis Sayles uses the services of third parties (“Proxy Voting Services”) to research and administer the vote on proxies for those accounts and funds for which Loomis Sayles has voting authority. Each Proxy Voting Service provides vote recommendations and/or analysis to Loomis Sayles based on the Proxy Voting Services’ own research. Loomis Sayles will generally follow its express policy with input from the Proxy Voting Services unless Loomis Sayles’ Proxy Committee determines that the client’s best interests are served by voting otherwise. All issues presented for shareholder vote will be considered under the oversight of the Proxy Committee. All nonroutine issues will be directly considered by the Proxy Committee and, when necessary, the equity analyst following the company or the portfolio manager of the funds holding the security, and will be voted in the best investment interests of the funds. All routine issues will be voted according to Loomis Sayles’ policy approved by the Proxy Committee unless special factors require that they be considered by the Proxy Committee and, when necessary, the equity analyst following the company or the portfolio manager of the funds holding the security. Loomis Sayles’ Proxy Committee has established these routine policies in what it believes are the best investment interests of Loomis Sayles’ clients.

The specific responsibilities of the Proxy Committee include (1) the development, authorization, implementation and updating of the Loomis Sayles’ Proxy Voting Policies and Procedures (“Procedures”), including an annual review of the Procedures, existing voting guidelines and the proxy voting process in general, (2) oversight of the proxy voting process including oversight of the vote on proposals according to the predetermined policies in the voting guidelines, directing the vote on proposals where there is reason not to vote according to the predetermined policies in the voting guidelines or where proposals require special consideration, and consultation with the portfolio managers and analysts for the funds holding the security when necessary or appropriate and, (3) engagement and oversight of third-party vendors, including Proxy Voting Services.

Loomis Sayles has established several policies to ensure that proxies are voted in its clients’ best interest and are not affected by any possible conflicts of interest. First, except in certain limited instances, Loomis Sayles votes in accordance with its pre-determined policies set forth in the Procedures. Second, where these Procedures allow for discretion, Loomis Sayles will generally consider the recommendations of the Proxy Voting Services in

 

83


Table of Contents

making its voting decisions. However, if the Proxy Committee determines that the Proxy Voting Services’ recommendation is not in the best interest of its clients, then the Proxy Committee may use its discretion to vote against the Proxy Voting Services’ recommendation, but only after taking the following steps: (1) conducting a review for any material conflict of interest Loomis Sayles may have; and, (2) if any material conflict is found to exist, excluding anyone at Loomis Sayles who is subject to that conflict of interest from participating in the voting decision in any way. However, if deemed necessary or appropriate by the Proxy Committee after full prior disclosure of any conflict, that person may provide information, opinions or recommendations on any proposal to the Proxy Committee. In such event the Proxy Committee will make reasonable efforts to obtain and consider, prior to directing any vote information, opinions or recommendations from or about the opposing position on any proposal.

NORTHERN CROSS

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

Northern Cross’s policy regarding the voting of proxies consists of (1) the statement of the law and policy, (2) identification of the person(s) responsible for implementing this policy, and (3) the procedures adopted by Northern Cross to implement the policy.

Northern Cross will vote all proxies delivered to it by the fund’s custodian. The vote will be cast in such a manner, which, in Northern Cross’s judgment, will be in the best interests of shareholders. Northern Cross contracts with Boston Investor Services, Inc. for the processing of proxies.

Northern Cross will generally comply with the following guidelines:

Routine Corporate Governance Issues

Northern Cross will vote in favor of management. Routine issues may include, but not be limited to, election of directors, appointment of auditors, changes in state of incorporation or capital structure. In certain cases Northern Cross will vote in accordance with the guidelines of specific clients.

Non-routine Corporate Governance Issues

Northern Cross will vote in favor of management unless voting with management would limit shareholder rights or have a negative impact on shareholder value. Non-routine issues may include, but not be limited to, corporate restructuring/mergers and acquisitions, proposals affecting shareholder rights, anti-takeover issues, executive compensation, and social and political issues. In cases where the number of shares in all stock option plans exceeds 10% of basic shares outstanding, Northern Cross generally votes against proposals that will increase shareholder dilution. In general Northern Cross will vote against management regarding any proposal that allows management to issue shares during a hostile takeover.

Non Voting of Proxies

Northern Cross may not vote proxies if voting may be burdensome or expensive, or otherwise not in the best interest of clients.

Conflicts of Interest

Should Northern Cross have a conflict of interest with regard to voting a proxy, Northern Cross will disclose such conflict to the client and obtain client direction as to how to vote the proxy.

 

84


Table of Contents

Record Keeping

The following records will be kept for each client: copies of Northern Cross’s proxy voting policies and procedures; copies of all proxy statements received; a record of each vote Northern Cross casts on behalf of the client along with any notes or documents that were material to making a decision on how to vote a proxy including an abstention on behalf of a client, including the resolution of any conflict; a copy of each written client request for information on how Northern Cross voted proxies on behalf of the client and a copy of any written response by the advisor.

This proxy policy will be distributed to all clients of Northern Cross and added to Northern Cross’s Part 2 of Form ADV. A hard copy of the policy will be included in the Compliance Program and is available on request.

The Compliance Officer is responsible for implementing, monitoring and updating this policy, including reviewing decisions made on non-routine issues and potential conflicts of interest. The Compliance Officer is also responsible for maintaining copies of all records and backup documentation in accordance with applicable record keeping requirements. The Compliance Officer can delegate in writing any of his or her responsibilities under this policy to another person.

Conflicts of Interest

From time to time, proxy voting proposals may raise conflicts between the interests of Northern Cross’s clients and the interests of Northern Cross, its employees, or its affiliates. Northern Cross must take certain steps designed to ensure, and must be able to demonstrate that those steps resulted in, a decision to vote the proxies that was based on the clients’ best interest and was not the product of the conflict.

The Compliance Officer is responsible for identifying proxy voting proposals that present a conflict of interest. If Northern Cross receives a proxy relating to an issuer that raises a conflict of interest, the Compliance Officer shall determine whether the conflict is “material” to any specific proposal included within the proxy. The Compliance Officer will record in writing the basis for any such determination.

NUANCE

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

It is Nuance’s policy, where it has accepted responsibility to vote proxies on behalf a particular client, to vote such proxies in the best interest of its clients and ensure that the vote is not the product of an actual or potential conflict of interest. For client’s that are subject to the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended (“ERISA”), it is Nuance’s policy to follow the provisions of any ERISA plan’s governing documents in the voting of plan securities, unless it determines that to do so would breach its fiduciary duties under ERISA.

Responsibility

Where Nuance has accepted responsibility to vote proxies on behalf a particular client, the Chief Investment Officer is responsible for ensuring that proxies are voted in a manner consistent with the proxy voting guidelines adopted by Nuance (the “Proxy Voting Guidelines”) and Nuance’s policies and procedures.

Procedures

Nuance may vote client proxies where a client requests and Nuance accepts such responsibility, or in the case of an employee benefit plan, as defined by ERISA, where such responsibility has been properly delegated to, and assumed by, Nuance. In such circumstances Nuance will only cast proxy votes in a manner consistent with the best interest of its clients or, to the extent applicable, their beneficiaries. Nuance shall, in its Form ADV, generally disclose to clients information about these policies and procedures and how clients may obtain information on how Nuance voted their proxies when applicable. At any time, a client may contact Nuance to request information about how it voted proxies for their securities. It is generally Nuance’s policy not to disclose its proxy voting records to unaffiliated third parties or special interest groups.

Nuance’s Client Services and Operations Departments will be responsible for monitoring corporate actions and ensuring that proxies are submitted in a timely manner. Nuance may delegate the responsibility to vote client proxies to one or more persons affiliated with Nuance (such person(s) are hereafter collectively referred to as

 

85


Table of Contents

“Responsible Voting Parties”) consistent with the Proxy Voting Guidelines. Specifically, when Nuance receives proxy proposals where the Proxy Voting Guidelines outline its general position as voting either “for” or “against,” the proxy will be voted by one of the Responsible Voting Parties in accordance with Nuance’s Proxy Voting Guidelines. When Nuance receives proxy proposals where the Proxy Voting Guidelines do not contemplate the issue or otherwise outline its general position as voting on a case-by-case basis, the proxy will be forwarded to the Proxy Voting Committee, which will review the proposal and either vote the proxy or instruct one of the Responsible Voting Parties on how to vote the proxy.

It is intended that the Proxy Voting Guidelines will be applied with a measure of flexibility. Accordingly, except as otherwise provided in these policies and procedures, the Responsible Voting Parties may vote a proxy contrary to the Proxy Voting Guidelines if, in the sole determination of the Proxy Voting Committee, it is determined that such action is in the best interest of Nuance’s clients. In the exercise of such discretion, the Proxy Voting Committee may take into account a wide array of factors relating to the matter under consideration, the nature of the proposal, and the company involved. Similarly, poor past performance, uncertainties about management and future directions, and other factors may lead to a conclusion that particular proposals by an issuer present unacceptable investment risks and should not be supported. In addition, the proposals should be evaluated in context. For example, a particular proposal may be acceptable standing alone, but objectionable when part of an existing or proposed package, such as where the effect may be to entrench management. Special circumstances or instructions from clients may also justify casting different votes for different clients with respect to the same proxy vote.

The Responsible Voting Parties will document the rationale for all proxies voted contrary to the Proxy Voting Guidelines. Such information will be maintained as part of Nuance’s recordkeeping process. In performing its responsibilities the Proxy Voting Committee may consider information from one or more sources including, but not limited to, management of the company presenting the proposal, shareholder groups, legal counsel, and independent proxy research services. In all cases, however, the ultimate decisions on how to vote proxies are made by the Proxy Voting Committee.

Conflicts of Interest

Nuance may occasionally be subject to conflicts of interest in the voting of proxies due to business or personal relationships it maintains with persons having an interest in the outcome of certain votes. For example, Nuance may provide services to accounts owned or controlled by companies whose management is soliciting proxies. Nuance, along with any affiliates and/or employees, may also occasionally have business or personal relationships with other proponents of proxy proposals, participants in proxy contests, corporate directors, or candidates for directorships.

If the Responsible Voting Parties become aware of any potential or actual conflict of interest relating to a particular proxy proposal, they will promptly report such conflict to the Proxy Voting Committee. Conflicts of interest will be handled in various ways depending on their type and materiality of the conflict. Nuance will take the following steps to ensure that its proxy voting decisions are made in the best interest of its clients and are not the product of such conflict:

Where the Proxy Voting Guidelines outline Nuance’s voting position, as either “for” or “against” such proxy proposal, voting will be in accordance with the its Proxy Voting Guidelines.

Where the Proxy Voting Guidelines outline Nuance’s voting position to be determined on a “case-by-case” basis for such proxy proposal, or such proposal is not contemplated in the Proxy Voting Guidelines, then one of the two following methods will be selected by the Proxy Voting Committee depending upon the facts and circumstances of each situation and the requirements of applicable law:

 

86


Table of Contents
    Vote the proxy in accordance with the voting recommendation of a non-affiliated third party vendor; or

 

    Provide the client with sufficient information regarding the proxy proposal and obtain the client’s consent or direction before voting.

Third Party Delegation

Nuance may delegate, to a non-affiliated third party vendor, the responsibility to review proxy proposals and make voting recommendations to Nuance. The Chief Compliance Officer will ensure that any third party recommendations followed will be consistent with the Proxy Voting Guidelines. In all cases, however, the ultimate decisions on how to vote proxies are made by the Proxy Voting Committee.

Special Circumstances

Nuance may choose not to vote proxies in certain situations or for certain accounts, such as: (i) where a client has informed Nuance that they wish to retain the right to vote the proxy; (ii) where Nuance deems the cost of voting the proxy would exceed any anticipated benefit to the client; (iii) where a proxy is received for a client that has terminated Nuance’s services; (iv) where a proxy is received for a security that Nuance no longer manages ( i.e. , Nuance had previously sold the entire position); and/or (v) where the exercise of voting rights could restrict the ability of an account’s portfolio manager to freely trade the security in question (as is the case, for example, in certain foreign jurisdictions known as “blocking markets”).

In addition, certain accounts over which Nuance has proxy-voting discretion may participate in securities lending programs administered by the custodian or a third party. Because the title to loaned securities passes to the borrower, Nuance will be unable to vote any security that is out on loan to a borrower on a proxy record date.

PASSPORT

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

Passport determines how to vote proxies relating to portfolio securities pursuant to its written proxy voting policies and procedures, which have been adopted pursuant to Rule 206(4)-6 under the Advisers Act (the “Passport Proxy Policy”).

The Passport Proxy Policy is intended to ensure that proxies are voted in accordance with the best interests of the fund managed by Passport that holds the subject security. In order to ensure that proxies are voted in the best interests of such fund, the portfolio manager or analyst for the security sector of the soliciting issuer will work with other Passport personnel to:

 

    Monitor corporate actions by reviewing, prior to voting, all proxy statements received on behalf of clients that have delegated voting authority.

 

    Vote proxies received on behalf of clients that have delegated voting authority unless it is determined that abstaining would best serve client interests.

 

    Disclose potential conflicts of interest that exist between Passport (or its principals or employees) and such fund’s best interests and either obtain client consent to vote the proxy or delegate voting authority back to the client or a qualified third party.

In the absence of a conflict of interest, Passport will vote proxies regarding the following types of corporate matters:

 

    Changes in corporate governance structures

 

    Adoption of or amendments to compensation plans (including stock options)

 

    Matters involving social issues or corporate responsibility

 

    Approval of advisory contracts

 

87


Table of Contents
    Approval of distribution plans ( i.e. , Rule 12b-1 plans)

 

    Approval of mergers or acquisitions

 

    Other matters, as solicited

Prior to voting, the portfolio manager or analyst will evaluate the following documents and information, as available:

 

    Proxy statements and other solicitation materials

 

    Published reports of the financial condition and current market position of the issuer

 

    Market conditions and social issues as publicly debated and discussed by reputable sources

Prior to voting, the portfolio manager or analyst will evaluate the proxy statement on the basis of one or more of the following factors:

 

    The possible impact on the value of the security

 

    The possible impact on shareholder rights and privileges

 

    The reasonableness of the proposal

 

    The possible impact of any proposed mergers, acquisitions and/or corporate restructuring

 

    The possible impact of other issues particular to the proxy statement

If a conflict of interest does exist, Passport will seek to resolve any such conflict in accordance with the Passport Proxy Policy, which seeks to resolve such conflict in the relevant fund’s best interest, such as in some circumstances, by delegating the voting decision to the client or an independent third party.

PICTET

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

Pictet will accept the authority to vote client securities, and outsources the administration of all voting activities to ISS, a firm specializing in the provision of corporate governance services. ISS will perform the voting activities based on the proxy voting policy issued by Pictet. Pictet’s proxy voting policy can be obtained upon request from Pictet. Pictet’s proxy voting policy is reasonably designed to assist Pictet in voting proxies in the best interests of its clients. Pictet’s proxy voting policy addresses matters that are commonly submitted to shareholders of a company for voting, including but not limited to, issues relating to the board of directors, capital structure, auditors, mergers and corporate restructuring. ISS provides Pictet with a monthly report that includes the details of all resolutions and their respective votes, and various statistical analyses.

SANDS CAPITAL

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund

Sands Capital’s policies and procedures are designed to ensure that Sands Capital is administering proxy voting matters in a manner consistent with the best interests of client and with the firm’s fiduciary duties under applicable law. Sands Capital seeks to discharge the firm’s fiduciary duty to clients for whom Sands Capital has proxy voting authority by monitoring corporate events and voting proxies solely in the best interests of clients. In voting proxies, Sands Capital is neither an activist in corporate governance nor an automatic supporter of management. However, because Sands Capital believes that the management teams of most companies it invests in generally seek to serve shareholder interests, Sands Capital believes that voting proxy proposals in the client’s best

economic interests usually means voting with the recommendations of these management teams. Accordingly, Sands Capital believes that the recommendation of management on any issue should be given substantial weight in determining how proxy issues are resolved. As a matter of practice, Sands Capital will vote on most issues presented

 

88


Table of Contents

in accordance with the company’s management, unless Sands Capital determines that voting in accordance with the company’s management recommendation would adversely affect the investment merits of owning the stock. However, Sands Capital will consider each issue on its own merits and will not support the position of the company’s management in any situation where, in Sands Capital’s judgment, the recommendation would not be in the best interests of the client to do so.

Sands Capital has established a Proxy Committee that is responsible for (i) the oversight and administration of proxy voting on behalf of Sands Capital’s clients, including developing, authorizing, implementing and updating Sands Capital’s proxy voting policies and procedures; (ii) overseeing the proxy voting process; and (iii) engaging and overseeing any third party service provider as voting agent to receive proxy statements and/or to provide information, research and other services intended to facilitate the proxy voting decisions made by Sands Capital. The Proxy Committee has established guidelines that are applied generally and not absolutely, such that Sands Capital’s evaluation of each proposal will be performed in the context of the guidelines giving appropriate consideration to the circumstances of the company whose proxy is being voted. In evaluating a proxy proposal, a research team member may consider information from many sources, including management of the company, shareholder groups and independent proxy research services.

Generally, Sands Capital will vote against proposals to eliminate cumulative voting. Sands Capital will vote on a case-by-case basis on mergers, acquisitions, corporate restructurings, spin-offs, proposals to increase the number of shares of common stock authorized for issue, executive and director compensation plans (including stock option plans) and social issues with a view toward promoting good corporate citizenship.

When a Sands Capital client participates in a securities lending program, Sands Capital will not be able to vote the proxy of the shares out on loan. Sands Capital will generally not seek to recall for voting the client shares on loan. However, under rare circumstances, for voting issues that may have a particularly significant impact on the investment, Sands Capital may request a client to recall securities that are on loan if it is determined that the benefit of voting outweighs the costs and lost revenue to the client and the administrative burden of retrieving the securities. The research team member who is responsible for voting the proxy will notify the Proxy Committee in the event he/she believes a recall of loaned securities is necessary. In determining whether a recall of a security is warranted (“Significant Event”), Sands Capital will take into consideration whether the benefit of the vote would be in the client’s best interest despite the costs and the lost revenue to the client and the administrative burden of retrieving the securities. Sands Capital may utilize third-party service providers to assist it in identifying and evaluating whether an event constitutes a Significant Event. The Proxy Committee will review the proxy proposals that have been determined to be Significant Events from time to time and will adjust the foregoing standard as it deems necessary.

For purposes of identifying conflicts, the Proxy Committee will rely on publicly available information about a company and its affiliates, information about the company and its affiliates that is generally known by Sands Capital’s employees and other information known by a member of the Proxy Committee. The Proxy Voting Committee may determine that Sands Capital has a conflict of interest as a result of the following: (1) a significant business relationship which may create an incentive for Sands Capital to vote in favor of management; (2) significant personal or family relationships, meaning those that would be reasonably likely to influence how Sands Capital votes the proxy; and (3) contact with Proxy Committee members for the purpose of influencing how a proxy is to be voted.

In the event that the Proxy Committee determines that Sands Capital has a conflict of interest with respect to a proxy proposal, the Proxy Committee shall also determine whether the conflict is “material” to that proposal. The Proxy Committee may determine on a case-by-case basis that a particular proposal does not involve a material conflict of interest. To make this determination, the Proxy Committee must conclude that the proposal is not directly related to Sands Capital’s conflict with the issuer. If the Proxy Committee determines that a conflict is not material, then Sands Capital may vote the proxy in accordance with the recommendation of the research team member. In the event that the Proxy Committee determines that Sands Capital has a material conflict of interest with respect to a

 

89


Table of Contents

proxy proposal, Sands Capital will vote on the proposal in accordance with the determination of the Proxy Committee. Alternatively, prior to voting on the proposal, Sands Capital may (i) contact an independent third party to recommend how to vote on the proposal and vote in accordance with the recommendation of such third party; or (ii) with respect to client accounts that are not subject to ERISA, fully disclose the nature of the conflict to the client and obtain the client’s consent as to how Sands Capital will vote on the proposal. Sands Capital may not address a material conflict of interest by abstaining from voting, unless the Proxy Committee has determined that abstaining from voting on the proposal is in the best interests of clients.

THORNBURG

Sub-Advisor to the International Fund

The following summarizes Thornburg’s procedures for voting securities in each account managed by Thornburg, for the benefit of and in the best interest of the client. The policy provides procedures for assembling voting information and applying the informed expertise and judgment of Thornburg’s personnel on a timely basis in pursuit of the above-stated voting objectives.

A further element of Thornburg’s policy is that while voting on all issues presented should be considered, voting on all issues is not required. Some issues presented for a vote of security holders are not relevant to the policy’s voting objectives, or it is not reasonably possible to ascertain what effect, if any, a vote on a given issue may have on the value of an investment. Accordingly, Thornburg may abstain from voting or decline a vote in those cases where there is no relationship between the issue and the enhancement or preservation of an investment’s value.

It is also important to the pursuit of the policy’s voting objectives that Thornburg be able to substitute its judgment in any specific situation for a presumption in the policy where strict adherence to the presumption could reasonably be expected by Thornburg, based upon the information then available (including, but not limited, to media and expert commentary and outside professional advice and recommendations sought by Thornburg on the issue), to be inconsistent with the objectives of the policy. Accordingly, Thornburg may substitute its judgment in a specific voting situation described in the preceding sentence, except where explicitly prohibited by a client or the policy.

The key functions of Thornburg’s Proxy Voting Coordinator include:

(a) Collecting and assembling proxy statements and other communications pertaining to proxy voting, together with proxies or other means of voting or giving voting instructions, and providing those materials to the appropriate portfolio managers to permit timely voting of proxies;

(b) Collecting recommendations, analyses, commentary and other information respecting subjects of proxy votes, from service providers engaged by Thornburg and other services specified by portfolio managers, and providing this information to the appropriate portfolio managers to permit evaluation of proxy voting issues;

(c) Providing to appropriate portfolio managers any specific voting instructions from clients;

(d) Collecting proxy votes or instructions from portfolio managers and transmitting the votes or instructions to the appropriate custodians, brokers, nominees or other persons (which may include proxy voting services or agents engaged by Thornburg);

(e) Accumulating voting results as set forth in Thornburg’s policy and transmitting that information to Thornburg’s Compliance Officer; and

 

90


Table of Contents

(f) Participating in the annual review of Thornburg’s policy.

The Proxy Voting Coordinator may, with the approval of the President of Thornburg, delegate any portion or all of any one or more of these functions to one or more other individuals employed by Thornburg. Any portion or all of any one or more of these functions also may be performed by service providers engaged by Thornburg.

The Proxy Voting Coordinator shall obtain proxy statements and other communications pertaining to proxy voting, together with proxies or other means of voting or giving voting instructions to custodians, brokers, nominees, tabulators or others in a manner to permit voting on relevant issues in a timely manner. Thornburg may engage service providers and other third parties to assemble this information, digest or abstract the information where necessary or desirable, and deliver it to the individuals assigned by Thornburg to evaluate proxy voting issues.

The portfolio manager responsible for management of a specific account is responsible for timely voting (or determining not to vote in appropriate cases) proxies relating to securities in the account in accordance with the policy. The portfolio manager may delegate voting responsibilities to one or more other portfolio managers or other individuals. Portfolio managers are authorized to consider voting recommendations and other information and analysis from service providers (including proxy voting services) engaged by Thornburg.

In any case where a portfolio manager determines that a proxy vote involves an actual conflict of interest, and the proxy vote relates to the election of a director in a uncontested election or ratification of selection of independent accountants, the portfolio manager shall vote the proxy in accordance with the recommendation of any proxy voting service previously engaged by Thornburg. If no such recommendation is available, or if the proxy vote involves any other matters, the portfolio manager shall immediately refer the vote to the client for direction on the voting of the proxy or consent to vote in accordance with the portfolio manager’s recommendation. In all cases where such a vote is referred to the client, Thornburg shall disclose the conflict of interest to the client.

WATER ISLAND

Sub-Advisor to the Alternative Strategies Fund

Water Island intends to exercise a voice on behalf of its shareholders and clients in matters of corporate governance through the proxy voting process. Water Island takes its fiduciary responsibilities very seriously and believes the right to vote proxies is a significant asset of shareholders and clients. Water Island exercises its voting responsibilities as a fiduciary, solely with the goal of maximizing the value of its shareholders’ and clients’ investments.

Water Island votes proxies solely in the interests of its clients and believes that any conflict of interest must be resolved in the way that will most benefit its clients. Since the quality and depth of management is a primary factor considered when investing in a company, Water Island gives substantial weight to the recommendation of management on any issue. However, Water Island will consider each issue on its own merits, and the position of a company’s management will not be supported in any situation where it is found not to be in the best interests of Water Island’s clients.

Water Island recognizes that under certain circumstances it may have a conflict of interest in voting proxies on behalf of its clients. Such circumstances may include, but are not limited to, situations where Water Island or one or more of its affiliates, including officers, directors and employees, has or is seeking a client relationship with the issuer of the security that is the subject of the proxy vote. Water Island shall periodically inform its employees that they are under an obligation to be aware of the potential for conflicts of interest on the part of Water Island with respect to voting proxies on behalf of clients, both as a result of the employee’s personal relationships and due to circumstances that may arise during the conduct of Water Island’s business, and to bring conflicts of interest of which they become aware to the attention of Water Island. Water Island shall not vote proxies relating to such issuers on behalf of its client accounts until it has determined that the conflict of interest is not material or a method

 

91


Table of Contents

of resolving such conflict of interest has been agreed upon by the Board. A conflict of interest will be considered material to the extent that it is determined that such conflict has the potential to influence Water Island’s decision-making in voting a proxy. Materiality determinations will be based upon an assessment of the particular facts and circumstances. If Water Island determines that a conflict of interest is not material, Water Island may vote proxies notwithstanding the existence of a conflict.

WELLSCAP

Sub-Advisor to the Equity Fund and the Smaller Companies Fund

Pursuant to Rule 206(4)-6 under the Advisers Act, WellsCap has adopted Proxy Voting Policies and Procedures that it believes are reasonably designed to ensure that proxies are voted in the best interest of its clients. WellsCap exercises its voting responsibility, as a fiduciary, with the goal of maximizing value to shareholders consistent with the governing laws and investment policies of each portfolio. While securities are not purchased to exercise control or to seek to effect corporate change through share ownership, WellsCap supports sound corporate governance practices within companies in which they invest.

WellsCap utilizes an independent third-party (“Third-Party”), currently ISS, for voting proxies and proxy voting analysis and research. The Third-Party votes proxies in accordance with ISS’s published Proxy Guidelines. In addition, clients may elect to have WellsCap vote proxies in accordance with guidelines established pursuant to platforms, e.g., Taft-Hartley, to meet their specific business requirements.

To fulfill its fiduciary duties with respect to proxy voting, WellsCap has designated an officer to administer and oversee the proxy voting process and to monitor the Third-Party to ensure its compliance with the Proxy Guidelines.

WellsCap believes that, in most instances, material conflicts of interest can be minimized through a strict and objective application by the Third-Party of the Proxy Guidelines. In cases where WellsCap is aware of a material conflict of interest regarding a matter that would otherwise require its vote, it generally will defer to the Third-Party as to how to vote on such matter in accordance with ISS’ guidelines.

MORE INFORMATION ABOUT PROXY VOTING

The actual voting records relating to portfolio securities during the most recent 12-month period ended June 30, are available without charge, upon request, by calling toll-free, 1-800-960-0188 or by accessing the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. In addition, a copy of the Funds’ proxy voting policies and procedures are also available without charge, upon request, by calling 1-800-960-0188.

ADMINISTRATOR

State Street Bank and Trust Company (“State Street” or the “Administrator”) serves as the Trust’s administrator pursuant to an Administration Agreement dated September 10, 2014 (the “Administration Agreement”). State Street is a wholly owned subsidiary of State Street Corporation, a publicly held bank holding company. State Street is located at One Lincoln Street, Boston, MA 02111. Pursuant to the Administration Agreement with the Trust, the Administrator has agreed to furnish statistical and research data, clerical services, and stationery and office supplies; prepare various reports for filing with the appropriate regulatory agencies; and prepare various materials required by the SEC or any state securities commission having jurisdiction over the Trust. The Administration Agreement provides that the Administrator performing services thereunder shall not be liable under the Administration Agreement except for the negligence or willful misconduct of the Administrator, its officers or employees. As compensation for these services, each Fund pays State Street an annual administration fee based upon a percentage of the average net assets of such Fund.

 

92


Table of Contents

Prior to September 10, 2014, US Bancorp Fund Services, LLC (“US Bancorp”) served as administrator to the Trust and provided substantially similar services as the Administrator.

The following table shows administrative fees paid to the Funds’ administrator during the fiscal years ended December 31:

 

Year

   Equity
Fund
     International
Fund
     Smaller Companies
Fund
     Alternative Strategies
Fund
 

2016

   $ 61,667      $ 212,867      $ 4,776      $ 242,659  

2015

   $ 74,955      $ 283,741      $ 19,153      $ 211,773  

2014*

   $ 87,236      $ 318,655      $ 18,330      $ 170,865  

 

* Consists of administrative fees paid to US Bancorp through September 10, 2014 and to State Street following September 10, 2014.

PORTFOLIO TRANSACTIONS AND BROKERAGE

Each Management Agreement states that, with respect to the segment of each Fund’s portfolio allocated to the applicable Sub-Advisor, the Sub-Advisor shall be responsible for broker-dealer selection and for negotiation of brokerage commission rates, provided that the Sub-Advisor shall not direct orders to an affiliated person of the Sub-Advisor without general prior authorization to use such affiliated broker or dealer by the Board. In general, a Sub-Advisor’s primary consideration in effecting a securities transaction will be execution at the most favorable cost or proceeds under the circumstances. In selecting a broker-dealer to execute each particular transaction, a Sub-Advisor may take the following into consideration: the best net price available; the reliability, integrity and financial condition of the broker-dealer; the size of and difficulty in executing the order; and the value of the expected contribution of the broker-dealer to the investment performance of each Fund on a continuing basis. The price to each Fund in any transaction may be less favorable than that available from another broker-dealer if the difference is reasonably justified by other aspects of the portfolio execution services offered.

The aggregate dollar amounts of brokerage commissions paid by the Funds during the last three fiscal years are as follows:

 

Year

   Equity
Fund
     International
Fund
     Smaller Companies
Fund
     Alternative Strategies
Fund
 

2016

   $ 135,878      $ 869,728      $ 63,954      $ 997,387  

2015

   $ 223,137      $ 1,317,155      $ 124,445      $ 982,771  

2014

   $ 255,876      $ 2,376,233      $ 149,756      $ 847,842  

Of these amounts, the dollar amount of brokerage commissions paid to the brokers who furnished research services during the last three fiscal years are as follows:

 

Year

   Equity
Fund
     International
Fund
     Smaller Companies
Fund
     Alternative Strategies
Fund
 

2016

   $ 26,215      $ 103,943      $ 24,173      $ 207,406  

2015

   $ 53,000      $ 171,469      $ 37,064      $ 200,479  

2014

   $ 50,465      $ 608,162      $ 48,915      $ 565,645  

For the fiscal years ended December 31, 2016, 2015 and 2014, the Funds paid no commissions to broker-dealers affiliated with the Advisor or any of the Sub-Advisors.

 

93


Table of Contents

Subject to such policies as the Advisor and the Board may determine, a Sub-Advisor shall not be deemed to have acted unlawfully or to have breached any duty created by its Management Agreement with a Fund or otherwise solely by reason of its having caused any Fund to pay a broker or dealer that provides (directly or indirectly) brokerage or research services to the Sub-Advisor a commission for effecting a portfolio transaction in excess of the amount of commission another broker or dealer would have charged for effecting that transaction, if the Sub-Advisor determines in good faith that such amount of commission was reasonable in relation to the value of the brokerage and research services provided by such broker or dealer, viewed in terms of either that particular transaction or the Sub-Advisor’s or Advisor’s overall responsibilities with respect to each Fund or other advisory clients. Each Sub-Advisor is further authorized to allocate the orders placed by it on behalf of each Fund to such brokers or dealers who also provide research or statistical material, or other services, to the Trust, the Advisor or any affiliate of either. Such allocation shall be in such amounts and proportions as the Sub-Advisor shall determine. Each Sub-Advisor shall report on such allocations regularly to the Advisor and the Trust, indicating the broker-dealers to whom such allocations have been made and the basis for such allocations.

On occasions when a Sub-Advisor deems the purchase or sale of a security to be in the best interest of a Fund as well as other clients of the Sub-Advisor, the Sub-Advisor, to the extent permitted by applicable laws and regulations, may aggregate the securities to be so purchased or sold in order to obtain the most favorable price or lower brokerage commissions and the most efficient execution. In such event, allocation of the securities so purchased or sold, as well as the expenses incurred in the transaction, will be made by the Sub-Advisor in the manner it considers to be the most equitable and consistent with its fiduciary obligations to each Fund and to such other clients.

The following Funds acquired securities of their regular brokers or dealers (as defined in Rule 10b-1 under the 1940 Act) during the most recent fiscal year.

 

Fund

  

Broker

   Amount  

Equity Fund

  

Bank of America Corp.

   $ 3,138,200  
  

Citigroup Global Markets, Inc.

   $ 3,476,655  
  

J.P. Morgan Chase & Co.

   $ 4,044,412  
  

Wells Fargo Bank

   $ 7,110,843  

International Fund

  

Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC

   $ 10,982,038  

Alternative Strategies Fund

  

Bank of America Securities LLC

   $ 8,457,891  
  

Bank of America Securities LLC

   $ 499,760  
  

Citigroup Global Markets, Inc.

   $ 9,378,648  
  

Citigroup Global Markets, Inc.

   $ 1,262,802  
  

Wells Fargo Securities LLC

   $ 6,530,976  
  

Wells Fargo Securities LLC

   $ 360,163  
  

J.P. Morgan Chase & Co.

   $ 794,903  
  

J.P. Morgan Chase & Co.

   $ 1,666,896  
  

Goldman Sachs & Co.

   $ 1,602,651  

Distribution of Fund Shares

Effective October 1, 2014, the Funds’ principal underwriter is ALPS Distributors, Inc., 1290 Broadway, Suite 1100, Denver, Colorado 80203. The Distributor is engaged on a non-exclusive basis to assist in the distribution of shares in various jurisdictions. The Distributor is compensated for performing this service by the Advisor and is not paid by the Funds.

 

94


Table of Contents

Distribution Plan

As noted in the prospectus, the Trust has adopted a Distribution and Shareholder Servicing Plan pursuant to Rule 12b-1 under the 1940 Act (the “Distribution Plan”) on behalf of the Investor Class of the Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund.

Under the Distribution Plan, the Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund are authorized to pay the Distributor for distribution services related to Investor Class shares (the “Distribution Fee”) at an annual rate of 0.25% of such Funds’ average daily net assets attributable to Investor Class shares. The Distribution Plan provides that the Distributor may use all or any portion of such Distribution Fee to finance any activity that is principally intended to result in the sale of such Funds’ Investor Class shares, subject to the terms of the Distribution Plan, or to provide certain shareholder services.

The Distribution Fee is payable to the Distributor regardless of the distribution-related expenses actually incurred. Because the Distribution Fee is not directly tied to expenses, the amount of distribution fees paid by the Investor Class of the Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund during any year may be more or less than actual expenses incurred pursuant to the Distribution Plan. For this reason, this type of distribution fee arrangement is characterized by the staff of the SEC as a “compensation” plan.

The Distributor may use the Distribution Fee to pay for services covered by the Distribution Plan including, but not limited to, advertising, compensating underwriters, dealers and selling personnel engaged in the distribution of Fund shares, the printing and mailing of prospectuses, statements of additional information and reports to prospective shareholders, the printing and mailing of sales literature, and obtaining whatever information, analyses and reports with respect to marketing and promotional activities that the Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund may, from time to time, deem advisable.

The tables below show the amount of the Distribution Fee for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2016.

 

Fund

   Distribution Fee incurred
by Investor Class Shares
 

Equity Fund

   $ 259  

International Fund

   $ 410,651  

Alternative Strategies Fund

   $ 433,613  

 

95


Table of Contents

Fund

   Advertising
and
Marketing
     Printing
and
Postage
     Payment
to
Distributor
     Payment
to
Dealers
     Compensation
to Sales
Personnel
     Other
Expenses
 

Equity Fund

   $ 0      $ 0      $ 259      $ 0      $ 0      $ 0  

International Fund

   $ 0      $ 0      $ 410,651      $ 0      $ 0      $ 0  

Alternative Strategies Fund

   $ 0      $ 0      $ 433,613      $ 0      $ 0      $ 0  

Other Shareholder Servicing Expenses Paid by the Funds

The Funds make payments to financial intermediaries for certain sub-recordkeeping, sub-transfer agent or similar services provided by financial intermediaries in amounts determined by the Funds’ Board of Trustees to represent reasonable amounts for those services. These expenses paid by a Fund would remain subject to any overall expense limitation applicable to that Fund. These expenses are in addition to any supplemental amounts the Advisor pays out of its own resources and are in addition to a Fund’s payment of any amounts through the Distribution Plan.

The prospect of receiving, or the receipt of additional payments or other compensation as described above by financial intermediaries may provide financial intermediaries and/or their salespersons with an incentive to favor sales of shares of the Funds, and other mutual funds whose affiliates make similar compensation available, over sale of shares of mutual funds (or non-mutual fund investments) not making such payments. You may wish to take these payment arrangements into account when considering and evaluating any recommendations relating to the Funds’ shares.

The table below identifies the financial intermediaries who received compensation from the Funds for providing sub-recordkeeping, sub-transfer agency or similar services during the calendar year ended December 31, 2016:

 

Firm

Charles Schwab

Fidelity Investments

Financial Data Services, Inc.

Great-West Financial

LPL Financial

Merrill Lynch

MSCS Financial Services Operating

National Financial Services, LLC (Fidelity Brokerage)

Pershing

Raymond James

TD – Ameritrade

Vanguard

  

Payments by the Advisor

Set forth below is a list of the member firms of FINRA to which the Advisor, or its affiliates, made payments out of their revenues in connection with the sale and distribution of the Funds’ shares or for services to the Funds and their shareholders for the year ended December 31, 2016. Such payments are in addition to any Distribution Plan amounts paid to such FINRA member firms. Any additions, modifications, or deletions to the FINRA member firms identified in this list since December 31, 2016 are not reflected:

 

96


Table of Contents

FINRA member firms

Raymond James

The Advisor or its affiliates may also make payments to selling and shareholder servicing agents that are not FINRA member firms and that sell shares of or provide services to the Funds and their shareholders, such as banks, insurance companies and plan administrators. These firms are not included on the list above, although they may be affiliated with companies on the above list.

PORTFOLIO TURNOVER

Although the Funds generally will not invest for short-term trading purposes, portfolio securities may be sold without regard to the length of time they have been held when, in the opinion of a Sub-Advisor, investment considerations warrant such action. Portfolio turnover rate is calculated by dividing (1) the lesser of purchases or sales of portfolio securities for the fiscal year by (2) the monthly average of the value of portfolio securities owned during the fiscal year. A 100% turnover rate would occur if all the securities in a Fund’s portfolio, with the exception of securities whose maturities at the time of acquisition were one year or less, were sold and either repurchased or replaced within one year. A high rate of portfolio turnover (100% or more) generally leads to higher transaction costs and may result in a greater number of taxable transactions as compared to the costs and taxable transactions of an investment company that holds investments for a longer period. The Advisor does not expect each Fund’s portfolio turnover rate to exceed 150% in most years.

Portfolio turnover rates for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2016 and 2015 were as follows:

 

Fund

   2016     2015  

Equity Fund

     26.98     33.94

International Fund

     43.84     51.68

Smaller Companies Fund

     51.32     60.73

Alternative Strategies Fund

     142.24     145.97

NET ASSET VALUE

The NAV of a Fund’s shares will fluctuate and is determined as of the close of trading on the NYSE (currently, 4:00 p.m., Eastern time) each business day that the NYSE is open for trading. The NYSE annually announces the days on which it will not be open for trading. The most recent announcement indicates that the NYSE will not be open on the following days: New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King’s Birthday, Presidents’ Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. However, the NYSE may close on days not included in that announcement.

The NAV per share is computed by dividing the value of the securities held by a Fund plus any cash or other assets (including interest and dividends accrued but not yet received) minus all liabilities (including accrued expenses) by the total number of shares in a Fund outstanding at such time.

Generally, trading in and valuation of foreign securities is substantially completed each day at various times prior to the close of the NYSE. In addition, trading in and valuation of foreign securities may not take place on every day in which the NYSE is open for trading. In that case, the price used to determine a Fund’s NAV on the last day on which such exchange was open will be used, unless the Board determines that a different price should be used. Furthermore, trading takes place in various foreign markets on days in which the NYSE is not open for

 

97


Table of Contents

trading and on which a Fund’s NAV is not calculated. Occasionally, events affecting the values of such securities in U.S. dollars on a day on which a Fund calculates its NAV may occur between the times when such securities are valued and the close of the NYSE which will not be reflected in the computation of a Fund’s NAV unless the Board or its delegates deem that such events would materially affect the NAV, in which case an adjustment would be made.

Generally, a Fund’s investments are valued on the basis of market quotations. Securities or assets for which market quotations are not available, or for which the pricing service approved by the Board does not provide a valuation or provides a valuation that in the judgment of the relevant Sub-Advisor, with the concurrence of the Advisor, is stale or does not represent the fair value of such securities or assets, shall be valued by the Valuation Committee in consultation with the Advisor, the relevant Sub-Advisor, and the Administrator pursuant to procedures approved by the Board.

Each Fund’s securities, including ADRs, EDRs and GDRs, which are traded on securities exchanges, are generally determined on the basis of the last reported sale price on the exchange on which such securities are traded (or the NASDAQ official closing price for NASDAQ-reported securities, if such price is provided by the Funds’ accountant), as of the close of business on the day the securities are being valued or, lacking any reported sales, at the mean between the last available bid and asked price. Securities that are traded on more than one exchange are valued on the exchange determined by the Sub-Advisors to be the primary market. Securities traded in the over-the-counter market are valued at the mean between the last available bid and asked price prior to the time of valuation. Securities and assets for which market quotations are not readily available (including restricted securities, which are subject to limitations as to their sale) are valued at fair value as determined in good faith by or under the direction of the Board.

Short-term debt obligations with remaining maturities in excess of 60 days are valued at current market prices, as discussed above. Short-term securities with 60 days or less remaining to maturity are, unless conditions indicate otherwise, amortized to maturity based on their cost to a Fund if acquired within 60 days of maturity or, if already held by a Fund on the 60th day, based on the value determined on the 61st day.

Corporate debt securities, mortgage-related securities and asset-backed securities held by a Fund are valued on the basis of valuations provided by dealers in those instruments, by an independent pricing service and approved by the Board, or at fair value as determined in good faith by procedures approved by the Board. Any such pricing service, in determining value, will use information with respect to transactions in the securities being valued, quotations from dealers, market transactions in comparable securities, analyses and evaluations of various relationships between securities and yield to maturity information.

An option that is written by a Fund is generally valued at the last sale price or, in the absence of the last sale price, the last offer price. An option that is purchased by a Fund is generally valued at the last sale price or, in the absence of the last sale price, the last bid price. The value of a futures contract is the last sale or settlement price on the exchange or board of trade on which the future is traded or, if no sales are reported, at the mean between the last bid and asked price. When a settlement price cannot be used, futures contracts will be valued at their fair market value as determined by or under the direction of the Board. If an options or futures exchange closes after the time at which a Fund’s NAV is calculated, the last sale or last bid and asked prices as of that time will be used to calculate the NAV.

Any assets or liabilities initially expressed in terms of foreign currencies are translated into U.S. dollars at the official exchange rate or, alternatively, at the mean of the current bid and asked prices of such currencies against the U.S. dollar last quoted by a major bank that is a regular participant in the foreign exchange market or on the basis of a pricing service that takes into account the quotes provided by a number of such major banks. If neither of these alternatives is available or both are deemed not to provide a suitable methodology for converting a foreign currency into U.S. dollars, the Board in good faith will establish a conversion rate for such currency.

 

98


Table of Contents

All other assets of a Fund are valued in such manner as the Board in good faith deems appropriate to reflect their fair value.

TAXATION

The following is a summary of certain material U.S. federal income tax consequences of acquiring, holding and disposing of the interests in the Funds. It is based upon the Code, the U.S. Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder, published rulings and court decisions, all as in effect on the date hereof and all of which are subject to change or differing interpretations at any time (possibly with retroactive effect). This summary does not purport to deal with all of the U.S. federal income tax consequences applicable to a Fund or to all categories of investors, some of whom may be subject to special rules (including, without limitation, dealers in securities or currencies, financial institutions, life insurance companies, holders of Fund interests held as part of a “straddle,” “hedge” or “conversion transaction” with other investments, persons whose “functional currency” is not the U.S. dollar or persons for whom the Fund interests are not capital assets). This discussion also does not address U.S. federal tax consequences other than income taxes (such as estate and gift tax consequences). In addition, the following discussion generally applies only to “U.S. persons,” as defined for U.S. federal income tax purposes) who are beneficial owners of Fund interests. A “U.S. person” is generally defined as (i) a citizen or resident of the United States, (ii) a corporation (or an entity treated as a corporation for federal income tax purposes) or partnership (or an entity or arrangement treated as a partnership for federal income tax purposes) created or organized in or under the law of the United States or any political subdivision thereof, (iii) an estate whose income is subject to U.S. federal income tax regardless of its source or (iv) a trust if (a) it is subject to the primary supervision of a court within the United States and one or more U.S. persons have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust or (b) it has a valid election in effect under applicable U.S. Treasury Regulations to be treated as a U.S. person.

If a partnership (or other entity or arrangement treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes) is an investor in the Funds, the U.S. federal income tax treatment of a partner in that partnership will generally depend on the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership.

The tax consequences of an investment in the Funds will depend not only on the nature of the Funds’ operations and the then applicable U.S. federal tax principles, but also on certain factual determinations that cannot be made at this time, and upon a particular investor’s individual circumstances. No advance rulings have been sought from the Internal Revenue Service (the “IRS”).

IN VIEW OF THE FOREGOING, EACH PROSPECTIVE INVESTOR SHOULD CONSULT ITS OWN TAX ADVISOR REGARDING ALL THE U.S. FEDERAL, STATE, LOCAL AND FOREIGN INCOME AND OTHER TAX CONSEQUENCES OF AN INVESTMENT IN THE FUNDS WITH SPECIFIC REFERENCE TO SUCH INVESTOR’S OWN PARTICULAR TAX SITUATION AND RECENT CHANGES IN APPLICABLE LAW.

Each Fund will be taxed, under the Code, as a separate entity from any other series of the Trust, and each Fund has elected to qualify for treatment as a regulated investment company (“RIC”) under Subchapter M of the Code. In each taxable year that a Fund qualifies, a Fund (but not its shareholders) will be relieved of federal income tax on that part of its investment company taxable income (consisting generally of interest and dividend income, net short term capital gain and net realized gains from currency transactions) and net capital gain that is distributed to shareholders.

 

99


Table of Contents

In order to qualify for treatment as a RIC, a Fund must distribute annually to shareholders at least 90% of its investment company taxable income and must meet several additional requirements. Among these requirements are the following: (1) at least 90% of a Fund’s gross income each taxable year must be derived from dividends, interest, payments with respect to securities loans and gains from the sale or other disposition of securities or foreign currencies, or other income derived with respect to its business of investing in securities or currencies; (2) at the close of each quarter of a Fund’s taxable year, at least 50% of the value of its total assets must be represented by cash and cash items (including receivables), U.S. Government securities, securities of other RICs and other securities, limited in respect of any one issuer, to an amount that does not exceed 5% of the value of a Fund and that does not represent more than 10% of the outstanding voting securities of such issuer; and (3) at the close of each quarter of a Fund’s taxable year, not more than 25% of the value of its assets may be invested in (i) securities (other than U.S. Government securities or the securities of other RICs) of any one issuer, (ii) securities (other than the securities of other RICs) of two or more issuers which the Fund controls and which are engaged in the same or similar trades or businesses or related trades or businesses, or (iii) securities of one or more of certain publicly traded partnerships, as such term is defined under the Code.

Distributions of net investment income and net realized capital gains by a Fund will be taxable to shareholders whether made in cash or reinvested in shares. In determining amounts of net realized capital gains to be distributed, any capital loss carryovers from prior years will be applied against capital gains to the extent permitted under the Code. Shareholders receiving distributions in the form of additional shares will have a cost basis for federal income tax purposes in each share so received equal to the NAV of a share of a Fund on the reinvestment date. Fund distributions also will be included in individual and corporate shareholders’ income on which the alternative minimum tax may be imposed. A Fund may make taxable distributions to shareholders even during periods in which share prices have declined. Tax consequences are not the primary consideration of a Fund in implementing its investment strategy.

Each Fund or any securities dealer effecting a redemption of a Fund’s shares by a shareholder will be required to file information reports with the IRS with respect to distributions and payments made to the shareholder. In addition, a Fund will be required to withhold federal income tax at the rate of 28% on taxable dividends, redemptions and other payments made to accounts of individual or other non-exempt shareholders who have not furnished their correct taxpayer identification numbers and made certain required certifications on the account application or with respect to which a Fund or the securities dealer has been notified by the IRS that the number furnished is incorrect or that the account is otherwise subject to backup withholding.

Each Fund intends to declare and pay dividends and other distributions, as stated in the prospectus. In order to avoid the payment of a 4% non-deductible federal excise tax based on net income, a Fund must declare on or before December 31 of each year, and pay on or before January 31 of the following year, distributions at least equal to 98% of its ordinary income for that calendar year and at least 98.2% of the excess of any capital gains over any capital losses realized in the one-year period ending October 31 of that year, together with any undistributed amounts of ordinary income and capital gains (in excess of capital losses) from the previous calendar year.

Certain U.S. shareholders, including individuals and estates and trusts, in the higher income brackets will be subject to an additional 3.8% federal tax on all or a portion of their “net investment income,” which should include dividends from the Funds and net gain from the disposition of shares of the Funds. U.S. shareholders are urged to consult their tax advisors regarding the implications of the additional net investment income tax resulting from an investment in the Funds.

Each Fund may receive dividend distributions from U.S. corporations. To the extent that a Fund receives such dividends and distributes them to its shareholders, and meets certain other requirements of the Code, corporate shareholders of a Fund may be entitled to the dividends received deduction, and individual shareholders may, depending on the Fund’s underlying sources of income, have “qualified dividend income,” which would be subject to tax at the shareholder’s maximum capital gains tax rate. Availability of the deduction and/or taxation at the maximum capital gains tax rate is subject to certain holding period and debt-financing limitations.

 

100


Table of Contents

The use of hedging strategies, such as entering into futures contracts and forward contracts and purchasing options, involves complex rules that will determine the character and timing of recognition of the income received in connection therewith by a Fund. Income from foreign currencies (except certain gains therefrom that may be excluded by future regulations) and income from transactions in options, futures contracts and forward contracts derived by a Fund with respect to its business of investing in securities or foreign currencies should qualify as permissible income under Subchapter M of the Code.

For accounting purposes, premiums paid by a Fund are recorded as an asset and are subsequently adjusted to the current market value of the option. Any gain or loss realized by the Fund upon the expiration or sale of such options held by the Fund generally will be capital gain or loss.

Any security, option or other position entered into or held by a Fund that substantially diminishes the Fund’s risk of loss from any other position held by that Fund may constitute a “straddle” for federal income tax purposes. In general, straddles are subject to certain rules that may affect the amount, character and timing of the Fund’s gains and losses with respect to straddle positions by requiring, among other things, that the loss realized on disposition of one position of a straddle be deferred until gain is realized on disposition of the offsetting position; that the Fund’s holding period in certain straddle positions not begin until the straddle is terminated (possibly resulting in the gain being treated as short-term capital gain rather than long-term capital gain); and that losses recognized with respect to certain straddle positions, which would otherwise constitute short-term capital losses, be treated as long-term capital losses. Different elections are available to the Fund that may mitigate the effects of the straddle rules.

Certain options, futures contracts and forward contracts that are subject to Section 1256 of the Code (“Section 1256 Contracts”) and that are held by a Fund at the end of its taxable year generally will be required to be “marked to market” for federal income tax purposes, that is, deemed to have been sold at market value. Sixty percent of any net gain or loss recognized on these deemed sales and 60% of any net gain or loss realized from any actual sales of Section 1256 Contracts will be treated as long-term capital gain or loss, and the balance will be treated as short-term capital gain or loss.

Section 988 of the Code contains special tax rules applicable to certain foreign currency transactions that may affect the amount, timing and character of income, gain or loss recognized by a Fund. Under these rules, foreign exchange gain or loss realized with respect to foreign currency-denominated debt instruments, foreign currency forward contracts, foreign currency-denominated payables and receivables and foreign currency options and futures contracts (other than options and futures contracts that are governed by the mark-to-market and 60/40 rules of Section 1256 of the Code and for which no election is made) is treated as ordinary income or loss. Some part of the Fund’s gain or loss on the sale or other disposition of shares of a foreign corporation may, because of changes in foreign currency exchange rates, be treated as ordinary income or loss under Section 988 of the Code, rather than as capital gain or loss.

Redemptions and exchanges of shares of a Fund will result in gains or losses for federal income tax purposes to the extent of the difference between the proceeds and the shareholder’s adjusted tax basis for the shares. Any loss realized (to the extent it is allowed) upon the redemption or exchange of shares within six months from their date of purchase will be treated as a long-term capital loss to the extent of distributions of long-term capital gain dividends with respect to such shares during such six-month period. All or a portion of a loss realized upon the redemption of shares of the Fund may be disallowed to the extent shares of the same Fund are purchased (including shares acquired by means of reinvested dividends) within 30 days before or after such redemption.

 

101


Table of Contents

During the year ended December 31, 2016, the Funds utilized the following amounts of capital loss carry forwards:

 

Fund

   Capital Loss
Carryover Utilized
 

Equity Fund

   $ —    

International Fund

   $ —    

Smaller Companies Fund

   $ —    

Alternative Strategies Fund

   $ —    

The capital loss carryforwards for each Fund were as follows:

 

     Equity
Fund
     International Fund      Smaller
Companies
Fund
     Alternative Strategies
Fund
 

Capital Loss Carryover

           

Expires12/31/17

   $ —        $ 89,568,027      $ 19,978,541      $ —    

Short-Term

     —        $ 89,037,986      $ 1,279,005      $ 19,581,806  

Long-Term

     —        $ 53,636,871      $ 720,193      $ 13,411,849  

Distributions and redemptions may be subject to state and local taxes, and the treatment thereof may differ from the federal income tax treatment. Foreign taxes may apply to non-U.S. investors.

Nonresident aliens and foreign persons are subject to different tax rules, and may be subject to withholding of up to 30% on certain payments received from a Fund. Under the Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act (“FATCA”), a 30% withholding tax on each Fund’s distributions, including capital gains distributions, and on gross proceeds from the sale or other disposition of shares of a Fund, generally applies if paid to a foreign entity unless: (i) if the foreign entity is a “foreign financial institution,” it undertakes certain due diligence, reporting, withholding and certification obligations, (ii) if the foreign entity is not a “foreign financial institution,” it identifies certain of its U.S. investors or (iii) the foreign entity is otherwise excepted under FATCA. If applicable, and subject to any applicable intergovernmental agreements, withholding under FATCA is required: (i) generally with respect to distributions from each Fund; and (ii) with respect to certain capital gains distributions and gross proceeds from a sale or disposition of Fund shares that occur on or after January 1, 2019. If withholding is required under FATCA on a payment related to your shares, investors that otherwise would not be subject to withholding (or that otherwise would be entitled to a reduced rate of withholding) on such payment generally will be required to seek a refund or credit from the IRS to obtain the benefits of such exemption or reduction. The Funds will not pay any additional amounts in respect to amounts withheld under FATCA. You should consult your tax advisor regarding the effect of FATCA based on your individual circumstances.

The above discussion and the related discussion in each prospectus are not intended to be complete discussions of all applicable tax consequences of an investment in the Funds. Paul Hastings LLP, counsel to the Trust, has expressed no opinion in respect thereof. Shareholders are advised to consult with their own tax advisers concerning the application of foreign, federal, state and local taxes to an investment in a Fund.

DIVIDENDS AND DISTRIBUTIONS

Dividends from a Fund’s investment company taxable income (whether paid in cash or invested in additional shares) will be taxable to shareholders as ordinary income to the extent of the Fund’s earnings and profits. Tax consequences are not the primary consideration of the Funds in implementing their investment strategies. Distributions of a Fund’s net capital gain (whether paid in cash or invested in additional shares) will be taxable to shareholders as long-term capital gain, regardless of how long they have held their Fund shares. A Fund may make taxable distributions to shareholders even during periods in which the share price has declined.

 

102


Table of Contents

Dividends declared by a Fund in October, November or December of any year and payable to shareholders of record on a date in one of such months will be deemed to have been paid by the Fund and received by the shareholders on the record date if the dividends are paid by the Fund during the following January. Accordingly, such dividends will be taxed to shareholders for the year in which the record date falls.

The Funds are required to withhold 28% of all dividends, capital gain distributions and redemption proceeds payable to any individuals and certain other non-corporate shareholders who do not provide the Fund with a correct taxpayer identification number. The Funds also are required to withhold 28% of all dividends and capital gain distributions paid to such shareholders who otherwise are subject to backup withholding.

ANTI-MONEY LAUNDERING PROGRAM

The Trust has established an Anti-Money Laundering Compliance Program (the “Program”) as required by the Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001 (“USA PATRIOT Act”). To ensure compliance with this law, the Trust’s Program provides for the development of internal practices, procedures and controls, designation of anti-money laundering compliance officers, an ongoing training program and an independent audit function to determine the effectiveness of the Program.

Procedures to implement the Program include, but are not limited to, determining that the Distributor and the Funds’ transfer agent have established proper anti-money laundering procedures, reporting suspicious and/or fraudulent activity and conducting a complete and thorough review of all new opening account applications. The Fund will not transact business with any person or entity whose identity cannot be adequately verified under the provisions of the USA PATRIOT Act.

As a result of the Program, the Trust may be required to “freeze” the account of a shareholder if the shareholder appears to be involved in suspicious activity or if certain account information matches information on government lists of known terrorists or other suspicious persons, or the Trust may be required to transfer the account or proceeds of the account to a governmental agency.

GENERAL INFORMATION

The Trust is a Delaware statutory trust organized on August 1, 1996. The Equity Fund commenced operations on December 31, 1996. The International Fund commenced operations on December 1, 1997. The Smaller Companies Fund commenced operations on June 30, 2003. The Alternative Strategies Fund commenced operations on September 30, 2011. The Agreement and Declaration of Trust permits the Trust to issue an unlimited number of full and fractional shares of beneficial interest and to divide or combine the shares into a greater or lesser number of shares without thereby changing the proportionate beneficial interest in a Fund. Each share represents an interest in a Fund proportionately equal to the interest of each other share. Upon the Trust’s liquidation, all shareholders would share pro rata in the net assets of a Fund available for distribution to shareholders. The Board has created four series of shares, and may create additional series in the future, which have separate assets and liabilities. Income and operating expenses not specifically attributable to a particular Fund will be allocated fairly among the Funds by the Trustees, generally on the basis of the relative net assets of each Fund.

The Trust has adopted a Multiple Class Plan pursuant to Rule 18f-3 under the 1940 Act on behalf of the Funds. Currently, the Equity Fund, International Fund and Alternative Strategies Fund are each authorized to issue two classes of shares: Institutional Class shares and Investor Class shares. The Smaller Companies Fund is authorized to issue one class of shares: Institutional Class shares.

 

103


Table of Contents

Rule 18f-2 under the 1940 Act provides that as to any investment company which has two or more series outstanding and as to any matter required to be submitted to shareholder vote, such matter is not deemed to have been effectively acted upon unless approved by the holders of a “majority” (as defined in the Rule) of the voting securities of each series affected by the matter. Such separate voting requirements do not apply to the election of Trustees or the ratification of the selection of accountants. Rule 18f-2 contains special provisions for cases in which an advisory contract is approved by one or more, but not all, series. A change in investment policy may go into effect as to one or more series whose holders so approve the change even though the required vote is not obtained as to the holders of other affected series.

Each Fund may hold special meetings and mail proxy materials. These meetings may be called to elect or remove Trustees, change fundamental policies, approve an investment advisory contract or for other purposes. Shareholders not attending these meetings are encouraged to vote by proxy. Each Fund will mail proxy materials in advance, including a voting card and information about the proposals to be voted on. The number of votes each shareholder is entitled to is based on the number of shares he or she owns. Shareholders are entitled to one vote for each full share held (and fractional votes for fractional shares) and may vote in the election of Trustees and on other matters submitted to meetings of shareholders. It is not contemplated that regular annual meetings of shareholders will be held.

The Equity Fund, the International Fund, the Smaller Companies Fund, and the Alternative Strategies Fund are the only operating series of shares of the Trust. The Board may, at its own discretion, create additional series of shares. The Agreement and Declaration of Trust contains an express disclaimer of shareholder liability for the Trust’s acts or obligations and provides for indemnification and reimbursement of expenses out of the Trust’s property for any shareholder held personally liable for its obligations.

The Agreement and Declaration of Trust provides that the shareholders have the right to remove a Trustee. Upon the written request of the record holders of 10% of the Trust’s shares, the Trustees will call a meeting of shareholders to vote on the removal of a Trustee. No amendment may be made to the Agreement and Declaration of Trust that would have a material adverse effect on shareholders without the approval of the holders of more than 50% of the Trust’s shares. Shareholders have no preemptive or conversion rights. Shares when issued are fully paid and non-assessable by the Trust, except as set forth above.

The Trust and Litman Gregory have obtained an exemptive order from the SEC, which permits Litman Gregory, subject to certain conditions, to hire, terminate and replace managers with the approval of the Board only and without shareholder approval. Within 60 days of the hiring of any new manager or the implementation of any proposed material change in a sub-advisory agreement with an existing manager, shareholders will be furnished information about the new manager or sub-advisory agreement that would be included in a proxy statement. The order also permits a Fund to disclose sub-advisory fees only in the aggregate in its registration statement. Pursuant to the order, shareholder approval is required before Litman Gregory enters into any sub-advisory agreement with a manager that is affiliated with the Funds or Litman Gregory.

The Trust, the Advisor, the Sub-Advisors and the Distributor have adopted codes of ethics pursuant to Rule 17j-1 under the 1940 Act. These codes of ethics permit, subject to certain conditions, personnel of the Advisor, the Sub-Advisors and the Distributor, to invest in securities that may be purchased or held by the Funds.

The Trust’s custodian, State Street Bank and Trust Company, One Lincoln Street, Boston, Massachusetts 02111 is responsible for holding the Funds’ assets and acting as the Trust’s accounting services agent. The Trust’s transfer agent, Boston Financial Data Services, an affiliate of State Street Bank and Trust Company, is located at 330 West Ninth Street, Kansas City, Missouri, 64105. You may call Boston Financial Data Services at 1-800-960-0188 if you have questions about your account. The Trust’s independent registered public accounting firm, Cohen & Company, Ltd., 1350 Euclid Avenue, Suite 800, Cleveland, Ohio 44115, also assists with the Funds’ tax returns. The Trust’s legal counsel is Paul Hastings LLP, 101 California Street, 48th Floor, San Francisco, California 94111.

 

104


Table of Contents

The Funds reserve the right, if conditions exist that make cash payments undesirable, to honor any request for redemption or repurchase order by making payment in whole or in part in readily marketable securities chosen by the Fund and valued as they are for purposes of computing the Fund’s NAV (a redemption in kind). If payment is made in securities, a shareholder may incur transaction expenses in converting these securities into cash.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The audited financial statements, including the Financial Highlights of the Funds for the year ended December 31, 2016, and Cohen & Company, Ltd.’s report thereon are incorporated by reference. The report of Cohen & Company, Ltd., the independent registered public accounting firm of the Funds, with respect to the audited financial statements, is incorporated herein in its entirety in reliance upon such report of Cohen & Company, Ltd. and on the authority of such firm as experts in auditing and accounting. Shareholders will receive a copy of the audited and unaudited financial statements at no additional charge when requesting a copy of the SAI.

 

105


Table of Contents

APPENDIX

Description of Ratings

The following terms are generally used to describe the credit quality of debt securities:

Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.: Corporate Bond Ratings

Aaa—Bonds which are rated Aaa are judged to be of the best quality and carry the smallest degree of investment risk. Interest payments are protected by a large or by an exceptionally stable margin, and principal is secure. While the various protective elements are likely to change, such changes as can be visualized are most unlikely to impair the fundamentally strong position of such issues.

Aa—Bonds which are rated Aa are judged to be of high quality and are subject to very low credit risk. Together with the Aaa group they comprise what are generally known as high grade bonds. They are rated lower than the best bonds because margins of protection may not be as large as in Aaa securities or fluctuation of protective elements may be of greater amplitude or there may be other elements present which make the long term risks appear somewhat larger than in Aaa securities.

Moody’s appends numerical modifiers “1”, “2” and “3” to each generic rating classification from Aa through Caa. Both the Aaa and Aa rating classifications. The modifier “1” indicates that the security ranks in the higher end of its generic rating category; the modifier “2” indicates a mid-range ranking; and the modifier “3” indicates that the issue ranks in the lower end of its generic rating category. Additionally a “(hyb)” indicator is appended to all ratings of hybrid securities issued by banks, insurers, finance companies, and securities firms.

A—Bonds which are rated A possess many favorable investment attributes and are to be considered as upper medium grade obligations and subject to low credit risk. Factors giving security to principal and interest are considered adequate but elements may be present which suggest a susceptibility to impairment sometime in the future.

Baa—Bonds which are rated Baa are considered as medium grade obligations, subject to moderate credit risk, i.e. , they are neither highly protected nor poorly secured. Interest payments and principal security appear adequate for the present but certain protective elements may be lacking or may be characteristically unreliable over any great period of time. Such bonds lack outstanding investment characteristics and in fact have speculative characteristics as well.

Standard & Poor’s Corporation: Corporate Bond Ratings

AAA—This is the highest rating assigned by Standard & Poor’s to a debt obligation and indicates an extremely strong capacity to pay principal and interest.

AA—Bonds rated AA also qualify as high-quality debt obligations. Capacity to pay principal and interest is very strong, and in the majority of instances they differ from AAA issues only in small degree.

A—Bonds rated A have a strong capacity to pay principal and interest, although they are somewhat more susceptible to the adverse effects of changes in circumstances and economic conditions.

BBB—Bonds rated BBB are regarded as having an adequate capacity to pay principal and interest. Whereas they normally exhibit adequate protection parameters, adverse economic conditions or changing circumstances are more likely to lead to a weakened capacity to pay principal and interest for bonds in this category than for bonds in the A category.

 

106


Table of Contents

Commercial Paper Ratings

Moody’s commercial paper ratings are assessments of the issuer’s ability to repay punctually promissory obligations. Moody’s employs the following three designations, all judged to be investment grade, to indicate the relative repayment capacity of rated issuers: Prime 1—highest quality; Prime 2—higher quality; Prime 3—high quality.

A Standard & Poor’s commercial paper rating is a current assessment of the likelihood of timely payment. Ratings are graded into four categories, ranging from “A” for the highest quality obligations to “D” for the lowest.

Issues assigned the highest rating, A, are regarded as having the greatest capacity for timely payment. Issues in this category are delineated with the numbers “1”, “2” and “3” to indicate the relative degree of safety. The designation A-1 indicates that the degree of safety regarding timely payment is either overwhelming or very strong. A “+” designation is applied to those issues rated “A-1” which possess extremely strong safety characteristics. Capacity for timely payment on issues with the designation “A-2” is strong. However, the relative degree of safety is not as high as for issues designated A-1. Issues carrying the designation “A-3” have a satisfactory capacity for timely payment. They are, however, somewhat more vulnerable to the adverse effect of changes in circumstances than obligations carrying the higher designations.

 

107


Table of Contents

LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST

PART C

OTHER INFORMATION

Item 28. Exhibits

 

(a)       Articles of Incorporation.
   (1)    Agreement and Declaration of Trust (1)
      (A)    Amendment to Agreement and Declaration of Trust (2)
      (B)    Amendment to Agreement and Declaration of Trust dated December 4, 2008 (8)
      (C)    Amendment to Agreement and Declaration of Trust dated August 31, 2011 (8)
(b)       By-laws (12)
(c)       Instruments Defining Rights of Security Holders – See Articles III and V of Agreement and Declaration of Trust and Article II of Third Amended and Restated By-Laws
(d)       Investment Advisory Contracts
   (1)    Unified Investment Advisory Agreement between Litman Gregory Funds Trust and Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC dated April 1, 2013 (10)
   (2)    Sub-Advisory Agreements
      (A)    Equity Fund
         1.    Investment Management Agreement with Davis Selected Advisers L.P. (13)
         2.    Investment Management Agreement with Wells Capital Management, Inc. (13)
         3.    Investment Management Agreement with Sands Capital Management, LLC (13)
         4.    Investment Management Agreement with Harris Associates L.P. (7)
         5.    Investment Management Agreement with Nuance Investments, LLC (13)
         6.    Investment Management Agreement with Fiduciary Management, Inc. (13)
      (B)    International Fund
         1.    Investment Management Agreement with Harris Associates L.P. (13)
         2.    Investment Management Agreement with Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. (5)
         3.    Investment Management Agreement with Northern Cross, LLC (13)
         4.    Investment Management Agreement with Lazard Asset Management LLC (13)
         5.    Investment Management Agreement with Pictet Asset Management Limited – filed herewith
         6.    Investment Management Agreement with Evermore Global Advisors, LLC – filed herewith
      (C)    Smaller Companies Fund
         1.    Investment Management Agreement with First Pacific Advisors, LLC (13)
         2.    Investment Management Agreement with Wells Capital Management, Inc. (13)
         3.    Investment Management Agreement with Cove Street Capital, LLC (13)
      (D)    Alternative Strategies Fund
         1.    Investment Management Agreement with DoubleLine Capital LP (13)
         2.    Investment Management Agreement with First Pacific Advisors, LLC (13)
         3.    Investment Management Agreement with Loomis, Sayles & Company, LP (13)
         4.    Investment Management Agreement with Water Island Capital LLC (13)
         5.    Investment Management Agreement with Passport Capital, LLC (13)
(e)       Underwriting Contracts
   (1)    Distribution Agreement with ALPS Distributors, Inc. dated September 17, 2014 (13)
(f)       Bonus or Profit Sharing Contracts – None
(g)       Custodian Agreements
   (1)    Custody Agreement with State Street Bank and Trust Company (13)

 

1


Table of Contents
      (A) Amendment dated August 31, 2011 to the Custody Agreement (8)
(h)       Other Material Contracts   
   (1)    Administration Agreement with State Street Bank and Trust Company dated September 10, 2014 (13)
   (2)    Powers of Attorney dated April 30, 2014 (13)
   (3)    Restated Contractual Advisory Fee Waiver Agreement (13)
      (A) Amendment dated August 31, 2011 to the Restated Contractual Advisory Fee Waiver Agreement (13)
      (B) Amendment dated May 20, 2013 to the Restated Contractual Advisory Fee Waiver Agreement (11)
      (C) Amendment dated January 1, 2017 to the Restated Contractual Advisory Fee Waiver Agreement – filed herewith
   (4)    Operating Expenses Limitation Agreement   
      (A) Operating Expenses Limitation Agreement dated August 31, 2011 for Alternative Strategies Fund (13)
(i)       Legal Opinion   
   (1)    Consent of Counsel dated April 28, 2017 – filed herewith
(j)       Other Opinions
   (1)    Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm filed herewith
(k)       Omitted Financial Statements – None   
(l)       Initial Capital Agreements   
   (1)    Subscription Agreement (initial seed capital only) (3)   
(m)       Rule 12b-1 Plan   
   (1)    Distribution and Shareholder Servicing Plan (12b-1 Plan) (13)   
(n)       Rule 18f-3 Plan   
   (1)    Multiple Class Plan (12)   
(o)       Reserved   
(p)       Codes of Ethics   
   (1)    Code of Ethics for Litman Gregory Funds Trust (13)   
   (2)    Code of Ethics for Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC (13)   
   (3)    Code of Ethics for ALPS Distributors, Inc. – filed herewith   
   (4)    Codes of Ethics for the Sub-Advisors   
      (A) Davis Selected Advisers, L.P. (4)
      (B) First Pacific Advisors, LLC (14)
      (C) Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. – filed herewith
      (D) Wells Capital Management, Inc. – filed herewith
      (E) Northern Cross, LLC – filed herewith
      (F) Nuance Investments, LLC (12)
      (G) Cove Street Capital, LLC (9)
      (H) Harris Associates L.P. filed herewith
      (I) Sands Capital Management, LLC – filed herewith
      (J) DoubleLine Capital LP (14)
      (K) Loomis, Sayles & Company, LP (14)

 

2


Table of Contents

(L)   Water Island Capital, LLC – filed herewith

(M)  Lazard Asset Management LLC – filed herewith

(N)   Fiduciary Management, Inc. (12)

(O)   Passport Capital, LLC (13)

(P)    Pictet Asset Management Limited – filed herewith

(Q)   Evermore Global Advisors, LLC – filed herewith

 

(1)   Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s initial Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) on August 12, 1996, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(2) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on November 15, 1996, and is hereby incorporated by reference.
(3) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Pre-Effective Amendment No. 2 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on December 17, 1996, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(4) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Post-Effective Amendment No. 14 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on April 20, 2000, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(5) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Post-Effective Amendment No. 25 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on February 25, 2004, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(6) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Post-Effective Amendment No. 40 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on April 30, 2008, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(7) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Post-Effective Amendment No. 46 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on April 30, 2010, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(8) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Post-Effective Amendment No. 50 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on September 2, 2011, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(9) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Post-Effective Amendment No. 52 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on April 30, 2012, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(10) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Post-Effective Amendment No. 54 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on May 1, 2013, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(11) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Post-Effective Amendment No. 56 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on February 26, 2014, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(12) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Post-Effective Amendment No. 57 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on April 30, 2014, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(13) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Post-Effective Amendment No. 59 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on April 30, 2015, and is herein incorporated by reference.
(14) Previously filed as an exhibit to the Registrant’s Post-Effective Amendment No. 61 to the Registration Statement on Form N-1A, filed with the SEC on April 29, 2016, and is herein incorporated by reference.

Item 29. Persons Controlled by or Under Common Control with the Fund

No person is directly or indirectly controlled by or under common control with the Registrant.

 

3


Table of Contents

Item 30. Indemnification

Article VI of Registrant’s By-Laws states as follows:

Section 1. AGENTS, PROCEEDINGS AND EXPENSES. For the purpose of this Article, “agent” means any person who is or was a Trustee, officer, employee or other agent of this Trust or is or was serving at the request of this Trust as a Trustee, director, officer, employee or agent of another foreign or domestic corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise or was a Trustee, director, officer, employee or agent of a foreign or domestic corporation which was a predecessor of another enterprise at the request of such predecessor entity; “proceeding” means any threatened, pending or completed action or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative; and “expenses” includes without limitation attorney’s fees and any expenses of establishing a right to indemnification under this Article.

Section 2. ACTIONS OTHER THAN BY TRUST. This Trust shall indemnify any person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any proceeding (other than an action by or in the right of this Trust) by reason of the fact that such person is or was an agent of this Trust, against expenses, judgments, fines, settlements and other amounts actually and reasonably incurred in connection with such proceeding, if it is determined that person acted in good faith and reasonably believed:

(a) in the case of conduct in his official capacity as a Trustee of the Trust, that his conduct was in the Trust’s best interests, and

(b) in all other cases, that his conduct was at least not opposed to the Trust’s best interests, and

(c) in the case of a criminal proceeding, that he had no reasonable cause to believe the conduct of that person was unlawful.

The termination of any proceeding by judgment, order, settlement, conviction or upon a plea of nolo contendere or its equivalent shall not of itself create a presumption that the person did not act in good faith and in a manner which the person reasonably believed to be in the best interests of this Trust or that the person had reasonable cause to believe that the person’s conduct was unlawful.

Section 3. ACTIONS BY THE TRUST. This Trust shall indemnify any person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action by or in the right of this Trust to procure a judgment in its favor by reason of the fact that that person is or was an agent of this Trust, against expenses actually and reasonably incurred by that person in connection with the defense or settlement of that action if that person acted in good faith, in a manner that person believed to be in the best interests of this Trust and with such care, including reasonable inquiry, as an ordinarily prudent person in a like position would use under similar circumstances.

Section 4. EXCLUSION OF INDEMNIFICATION. Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary contained herein, there shall be no right to indemnification for any liability arising by reason of willful misfeasance, bad faith, gross negligence, or the reckless disregard of the duties involved in the conduct of the agent’s office with this Trust.

No indemnification shall be made under Sections 2 or 3 of this Article:

(a) In respect of any claim, issue, or matter as to which that person shall have been adjudged to be liable on the basis that personal benefit was improperly received by him, whether or not the benefit resulted from an action taken in the person’s official capacity; or

(b) In respect of any claim, issue or matter as to which that person shall have been adjudged to be liable in the performance of that person’s duty to this Trust, unless and only to the extent that the court in which that action was brought shall determine upon application that in view of all the circumstances of the case, that person was not liable by reason of the disabling conduct set forth in the preceding paragraph and is fairly and reasonably entitled to indemnity for the expenses which the court shall determine; or

 

4


Table of Contents

(c) Of amounts paid in settling or otherwise disposing of a threatened or pending action, with or without court approval, or of expenses incurred in defending a threatened or pending action which is settled or otherwise disposed of without court approval, unless the required approval set forth in Section 6 of this Article is obtained.

Section 5. SUCCESSFUL DEFENSE BY AGENT. To the extent that an agent of this Trust has been successful on the merits in defense of any proceeding referred to in Sections 2 or 3 of this Article or in defense of any claim, issue or matter therein, before the court or other body before whom the proceeding was brought, the agent shall be indemnified against expenses actually and reasonably incurred by the agent in connection therewith, provided that the Board of Trustees, including a majority who are disinterested, non-party Trustees, also determines that based upon a review of the facts, the agent was not liable by reason of the disabling conduct referred to in Section 4 of this Article.

Section 6. REQUIRED APPROVAL. Except as provided in Section 5 of this Article, any indemnification under this Article shall be made by this Trust only if authorized in the specific case on a determination that indemnification of the agent is proper in the circumstances because the agent has met the applicable standard of conduct set forth in Sections 2 or 3 of this Article and is not prohibited from indemnification because of the disabling conduct set forth in Section 4 of this Article, by:

(a) A majority vote of a quorum consisting of Trustees who are not parties to the proceeding and are not interested persons of the Trust (as defined in the Investment Company Act of 1940); or

(b) A written opinion by an independent legal counsel.

Section 7. ADVANCE OF EXPENSES. Expenses incurred in defending any proceeding may be advanced by this Trust before the final disposition of the proceeding upon a written undertaking by or on behalf of the agent, to repay the amount of the advance if it is ultimately determined that he or she is not entitled to indemnification, together with at least one of the following as a condition to the advance: (i) security for the undertaking; or (ii) the existence of insurance protecting the Trust against losses arising by reason of any lawful advances; or (iii) a determination by a majority of a quorum of Trustees who are not parties to the proceeding and are not interested persons of the Trust, or by an independent legal counsel in a written opinion, based on a review of readily available facts that there is reason to believe that the agent ultimately will be found entitled to indemnification. Determinations and authorizations of payments under this Section must be made in the manner specified in Section 6 of this Article for determining that the indemnification is permissible.

Section 8. OTHER CONTRACTUAL RIGHTS. Nothing contained in this Article shall affect any right to indemnification to which persons other than Trustees and officers of this Trust or any subsidiary hereof may be entitled by contract or otherwise.

Section 9. LIMITATIONS. No indemnification or advance shall be made under this Article, except as provided in Sections 5 or 6 in any circumstances where it appears:

(a) that it would be inconsistent with a provision of the Agreement and Declaration of Trust of the Trust, a resolution of the shareholders, or an agreement in effect at the time of accrual of the alleged cause of action asserted in the proceeding in which the expenses were incurred or other amounts were paid which prohibits or otherwise limits indemnification; or

(b) that it would be inconsistent with any condition expressly imposed by a court in approving a settlement.

 

5


Table of Contents

Section 10. INSURANCE. Upon and in the event of a determination by the Board of Trustees of this Trust to purchase such insurance, this Trust shall purchase and maintain insurance on behalf of any agent of this Trust against any liability asserted against or incurred by the agent in such capacity or arising out of the agent’s status as such, but only to the extent that this Trust would have the power to indemnify the agent against that liability under the provisions of this Article and the Agreement and Declaration of Trust of the Trust.

Section 11. FIDUCIARIES OF EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLAN. This Article does not apply to any proceeding against any Trustee, investment manager or other fiduciary of an employee benefit plan in that person’s capacity as such, even though that person may also be an agent of this Trust as defined in Section 1 of this Article. Nothing contained in this Article shall limit any right to indemnification to which such a Trustee, investment manager, or other fiduciary may be entitled by contract or otherwise which shall be enforceable to the extent permitted by applicable law other than this Article.

In addition to the indemnification provisions provided for in the Registrant’s By-Laws, the Registrant has also entered into indemnification agreements (the “Indemnification Agreements”) with each of the Trustees and with its Chief Compliance Officer (collectively, the “Indemnitees”). The Indemnification Agreements set forth the procedure by which Indemnitees are to request and receive advancement of expenses and indemnification. The Indemnification Agreements provide that, in any determination for advancement of expenses or indemnification, the Indemnitees are entitled to a rebuttable presumption that they did not engage in conduct that would disqualify them from eligibility to receive advancement of expenses or for indemnification. The Indemnification Agreements also set forth the procedure by which an independent counsel may be chosen if independent counsel is to make a determination of any Indemnitee’s qualification for advancement of expenses or indemnification.

Item 31. Business and Other Connections of the Investment Adviser

The information required by this item is contained in the Form ADVs of the following entities and is incorporated herein by reference:

 

Name of Investment Adviser

  

File No.

Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC

   801-52710

Name of Sub-Advisors

    

Cove Street Capital, LLC

   801-72231

Davis Selected Advisors, L.P.

   801-31648

DoubleLine Capital LP

   801-70942

Evermore Global Advisors, LLC

   801-70645

Fiduciary Management, Inc.

   801-15164

First Pacific Advisors, LLC

   801-67160

Harris Associates L.P.

   801-50333

Lazard Asset Management LLC

   801-61701

Loomis, Sayles & Company, L.P.

   801-170    

Northern Cross, LLC

   801-62668

Nuance Investments, LLC

   801-69682

Passport Capital, LLC

   801-65488

Pictet Asset Management Limited

   801-15143

Sands Capital Management, LLC

   801-64820

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc.

   801-17853

Water Island Capital, LLC

   801-57341

Wells Capital Management, Inc.

   801-21122

 

6


Table of Contents

Item 32. Principal Underwriters [To be updated]

(a) ALPS Distributors, Inc., the Registrant’s principal underwriter, acts as principal underwriter for the following investment companies:

1290 Funds

13D Activist Fund

ALPS Series Trust

Arbitrage Funds

AQR Funds

Barings Funds Trust

BBH Trust

Brandes Investment Trust

Broadview Funds Trust

Brown Capital Management Funds

Centre Funds

Century Capital Management Trust

CION Ares Diversified Credit Fund

Columbia ETF Trust

Columbia ETF Trust I

Columbia ETF Trust II

Cortina Funds, Inc.

CRM Mutual Fund Trust

CSOP ETF Trust

Cullen Funds

DBX ETF Trust

Elevation ETF Trust

Elkhorn ETF Trust

ETFS Trust

Financial Investors Trust

Firsthand Funds

FS Energy Total Return Fund

FS Series Trust

Goehring & Rozencwajg Investment Funds

Goldman Sachs ETF Trust

Griffin Institutional Access Real Estate Fund

Griffin Institutional Access Credit Fund

Hartford Funds Exchange-Traded Trust

Hartford Funds NextShares Trust

Heartland Group Inc.

Henssler Funds, Inc.

Holland Series Fund, Inc.

Index Funds

IndexIQ Active ETF Trust

IndexIQ ETF Trust

Ivy NextShares Trust

James Advantage Funds

Janus Detroit Street Trust

Lattice Strategies Trust

Laudus Funds

Litman Gregory Funds Trust

Longleaf Partners Funds Trust

M3Sixty Funds Trust

Mairs & Power Funds Trust

Meridian Fund, Inc.

Natixis ETF Trust

Natixis ETF Trust

NorthStar Real Estate Capital Income Fund-T

NorthStar/Townsend Institutional Real Estate Fund

Oak Associates Funds

OWLshares ETF Trust

 

7


Table of Contents

PAX World Series Trust I

PAX World Funds Trust III

Principal Exchange-Traded Funds

Reality Shares ETF Trust

Resource Credit Income Funds

Resource Real Estate Diversified Income Fund

RiverNorth Funds

Sierra Total Return Fund

Smead Funds Trust

SPDR S&P 500 ETF Trust

SPDR Dow Jones Industrial Average ETF Trust

SPDR S&P MidCap 400 ETF Trust

Stadion Investment Trust

Stone Harbor Investment Funds

Total Return US Treasury Fund

USCF ETF Trust

USCF Mutual Funds Trust

Wasatch Funds

WesMark Funds

Westcore Funds

Wilmington Funds

(b) To the best of Registrant’s knowledge, the directors and executive officers of ALPS Distributors, Inc. are as follows:

 

Name and Principal

Business Address*

  

Positions and Offices with

ALPS Distributors, Inc.

   Positions and Offices
with Registrant
Jeremy O. May    President, Director    None
Edmund J. Burke    Director    None
Thomas A. Carter    Executive Vice President, Director    None
Aisha J. Hunt    Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Assistant Secretary    None
Bradley J. Swenson    Senior Vice President, Chief Operating Officer    None
Robert J. Szydlowski    Senior Vice President, Chief Technology Officer    None
Eric T. Parsons    Vice President, Controller and Assistant Treasurer    None
Randall D. Young**    Secretary    None
Gregg Wm. Givens**    Vice President, Treasurer and Assistant Secretary    None
Douglas W. Fleming **    Assistant Treasurer    None
Steven Price    Senior Vice President, Chief Compliance Officer    None
Liza Orr    Vice President, Senior Counsel    None
Jed Stahl    Vice President, Senior Counsel    None
Troy A. Duran    Senior Vice President, Chief Financial Officer    None
James Stegall    Vice President    None
Gary Ross    Senior Vice President    None
Kevin Ireland    Senior Vice President    None
Mark Kiniry    Senior Vice President    None
Tison Cory    Vice President, Intermediary Operations    None
Hilary Quinn    Vice President    None
Jennifer Craig    Assistant Vice President    None

 

* Except as otherwise noted, the principal business address for each of the above directors and executive officers is 1290 Broadway, Suite 1100, Denver, Colorado 80203.
** The principal business address for Messrs. Young, Givens and Fleming is 333 W. 11 th Street, 5 th Floor, Kansas City, Missouri 64105.

 

8


Table of Contents
(c) Not applicable.

Item 33. Location of Accounts and Records

All accounts, books and other documents required to be maintained by Section 31(a) of the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”), and the rules thereunder are maintained at the following locations:

 

Records Relating to:

  

Are located at:

Registrant’s Investment Adviser   

Litman Gregory Fund Advisors, LLC

1676 No. California Blvd., Suite 500

Walnut Creek, CA 94596

Registrant’s Fund Administrator   

State Street Bank and Trust Company

One Lincoln Street

Boston, MA 02116

Registrant’s Custodian/Fund Accountant   

State Street Bank and Trust Company

1776 Heritage Drive

Quincy, MA 02171

Registrant’s Distributor   

ALPS Distributors, Inc.

1290 Broadway, Suite 1100

Denver Colorado 80203

Registrant’s Transfer Agent   

Boston Financial Data Services, Inc.

330 West 9 th Street

Kansas City, MO 64105

The documents required to be maintained by paragraphs (5), (6), (10) and (11) of Rule 31a-1(b) under the 1940 Act will be maintained by the Registrant’s respective Sub-Advisors:

 

Cove Street Capital, LLC

2101 East El Segundo, Suite 302

El Segundo, CA 90245

 

Davis Selected Advisers, L.P.

2949 E. Elvira Rd. Suite 101

Tucson, AZ, 85756

DoubleLine Capital LP

333 South Grand Avenue, Suite 1800

Los Angeles, CA 90071

Evermore Global Advisors, LLC

89 Summit Avenue

Summit, NJ 07901

Fiduciary Management, Inc.

100 East Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 2200

Milwaukee, WI 53202

First Pacific Advisors, LLC

11601 Wilshire Boulevard, Suite 1200

Los Angeles, CA 90025

Harris Associates L.P.

111 S. Wacker Drive, Suite 4600

Chicago, IL 60606

Lazard Asset Management LLC

30 Rockefeller Plaza

New York, NY 10112

Loomis, Sayles & Company, L.P.

One Financial Center

Boston, MA 02111

 

9


Table of Contents

Northern Cross, LLC

125 Summer Street, Suite 1410

Boston, MA 02110

Nuance Investments, LLC

4900 Main Street, Suite 220

Kansas City, MO 64112

Passport Capital, LLC

One Market Street

Steuart Tower, Suite 2200

San Francisco, CA 94105

Pictet Asset Management Limited

Moor House, 120 London Wall

London EC2Y 5ET – United Kingdom

Sands Capital Management, LLC

1000 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 3000

Arlington, VA 22209

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc.

2300 North Ridgetop Road

Santa Fe, NM 87506

Water Island Capital, LLC

41 Madison Avenue, 42 nd Floor

New York, NY 10010

Wells Capital Management, Inc.

100 Heritage Reserve

Menomonee Falls, WI 53051

Item 34. Management Services

The Registrant has disclosed all management-related service contracts in Parts A and B.

Item 35. Undertakings

Registrant hereby undertakes to:

 

(1) Furnish each person to whom a Prospectus is delivered a copy of Registrant’s latest annual report to shareholders, upon request and without charge.

 

(2) If requested to do so by the holders of at least 10% of the Trust’s outstanding shares, call a meeting of shareholders for the purposes of voting upon the question of removal of a trustee and assist in communications with other shareholders.

 

10


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), and the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, the Registrant certifies that it meets all of the requirements for effectiveness of this Registration Statement under Rule 485(b) under the Securities Act and has duly caused this Post-Effective Amendment No. 64 to its Registration Statement on Form N-1A to be signed below on its behalf by the undersigned, duly authorized, in the City of Walnut Creek and State of California, on the 28th day of April, 2017.

 

LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST
  By:  

/s/ Jeremy DeGroot

    Jeremy DeGroot
    President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act, this Post-Effective Amendment No. 64 to its Registration Statement has been signed below by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

Signature

  

Title

   Date

/s/ Julie Allecta*

   Trustee    April 28, 2017
Julie Allecta      

/s/ Jeremy DeGroot

Jeremy DeGroot

  

Trustee and President

(Principal Executive Officer)

   April 28, 2017

/s/ Frederick A. Eigenbrod, Jr.*

   Trustee    April 28, 2017
Frederick A. Eigenbrod, Jr.      

/s/ Harold M. Shefrin*

   Trustee    April 28, 2017
Harold M. Shefrin      

/s/ Taylor M. Welz*

   Trustee    April 28, 2017
Taylor M. Welz      

/s/ John Coughlan

John Coughlan

  

Treasurer

(Principal Financial Officer)

   April 28, 2017

* By: /s/ John Coughlan

     
John Coughlan, Attorney-in-Fact      


Table of Contents

INDEX TO EXHIBITS

 

Exhibit

Number

        Description
(d)    (2)    (B)(5)    Investment Management Agreement with Pictet Asset Management Limited
(d)    (2)    (B)(6)    Investment Management Agreement with Evermore Global Advisors, LLC
(h)    (3)    (C)    Amendment dated January 1, 2017 to the Restated Contractual Advisory Fee Waiver Agreement
(i)    (1)       Consent of Counsel dated April 28, 2017
(j)    (1)       Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
(p)    (3)       Code of Ethics – ALPS Distributors, Inc.
(p)    (4)    (C)    Code of Ethics – Thornburg Investment Management, Inc.
(p)    (4)    (D)    Code of Ethics – Wells Capital Management, Inc.
(p)    (4)    (E)    Code of Ethics – Northern Cross, LLC
(p)    (4)    (H)    Code of Ethics – Harris Associates L.P.
(p)    (4)    (I)    Code of Ethics – Sands Capital Management, LLC
(p)    (4)    (L)    Code of Ethics – Water Island Capital, LLC
(p)    (4)    (M)    Code of Ethics – Lazard Asset Management LLC
(p)    (4)    (P)    Code of Ethics – Pictet Asset Management Limited
(p)    (4)    (Q)    Code of Ethics – Evermore Global Advisors, LLC

 

12

LITMAN GREGORY MASTERS INTERNATIONAL FUND

LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST

INVESTMENT SUB-ADVISORY AGREEMENT

THIS INVESTMENT SUB-ADVISORY AGREEMENT is made as of the 28 th day of June 2016 by and between LITMAN GREGORY FUND ADVISORS, LLC (the “Advisor”) and PICTET ASSET MANAGEMENT, LTD (the “Sub-Advisor”).

WITNESSETH:

WHEREAS, the Advisor has been retained as the investment adviser to the Litman Gregory Masters International Fund (the “Fund”), a series of the Litman Gregory Funds Trust (the “Trust”), an open-end management investment company, registered as such under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “Investment Company Act”); and

WHEREAS, the Sub-Advisor is authorized and regulated by the UK Financial Conduct

Authority (“FCA”) in the conduct of its designated investment business (the FCA’s address is: 25 North Colonnade, Canary Wharf, London E14 5HS and its website can be accessed at: www.fca.gov.uk ). The Sub-Advisor has categorised the Trust and Advisor as a Professional Client as defined under the FCA Rules; and

WHEREAS, the Advisor has been authorized by the Trust to retain one or more investment advisers (each an “investment manager”) to serve as portfolio managers for a specified portion of the Fund’s assets (the “Allocated Portion”); and

WHEREAS, the Sub-Advisor is registered as an investment adviser under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, as amended (the “Investment Advisers Act”), and is engaged in the business of supplying investment advisory services as an independent contractor; and

WHEREAS, the Fund and the Advisor desire to retain the Sub-Advisor as an investment manager to render portfolio advice and services to the Fund pursuant to the terms and provisions of this Agreement, and the Sub-Advisor desires to furnish said advice and services; and

WHEREAS, the Trust and the Fund are third party beneficiaries of such arrangements;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the covenants and the mutual promises hereinafter set forth, the parties to this Agreement, which shall include the Trust on behalf of the Fund for purposes of the indemnification provisions of section 11 hereof, intending to be legally bound hereby, mutually agree as follows:

1. Appointment of Sub-Advisor .

(a) The Advisor hereby appoints the Sub-Advisor, and the Sub-Advisor hereby accepts such appointment, to render investment advice and related services with respect to the Allocated Portion of the assets of the Fund for the period and on the terms set forth in this Agreement, subject to the supervision and direction of the Advisor and the Trust’s Board of Trustees.

(b) The Sub-Advisor’s appointment shall be solely with respect to an Allocated Portion of the Fund’s assets, such Allocated Portion to be specified by the Advisor and subject to periodic increases or decreases at the Advisor’s sole discretion.

 

1


(c) Nature of Fund . The Sub-Advisor and the Advisor both acknowledge that the Fund is a mutual fund that operates as a series of an open-end series investment company under the plenary authority of the Trust’s Board of Trustees. In managing the Allocated Portion, the Sub-Advisor shall do so subject always to the plenary authority of the Board of Trustees.

2. Duties of Sub-Advisor .

(a) General Duties . The Sub-Advisor shall act as one of several investment managers to the Fund and shall invest the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion of the assets of the Fund in accordance with the investment objectives, policies and restrictions of the Fund as set forth in the Fund’s and the Trust’s governing documents, including, without limitation, the Trust’s Agreement and Declaration of Trust and By-Laws; the Fund’s prospectus, statement of additional information and undertakings; and such other limitations, policies and procedures as the Advisor or the Trustees of the Trust may impose from time to time in writing to the Sub-Advisor. In providing such services, the Sub-Advisor shall at all times adhere to the provisions and restrictions contained in the federal securities laws, applicable state securities laws, the Internal Revenue Code, and other applicable law. Advisor shall provide to the Sub-Advisor such information with respect to the Fund such that the Sub-Advisor will be able to maintain compliance with applicable regulations, laws, policies and restrictions with respect to the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion.

Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Sub-Advisor shall: (i) furnish the Fund with advice and recommendations with respect to the investment of the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion of the Fund’s assets; (ii) effect the purchase and sale of portfolio securities for the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion; (iii) determine that portion of the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion that will remain uninvested, if any; (iv) manage and oversee the investments of the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion, subject to the ultimate supervision and direction of the Trust’s Board of Trustees; (v) vote proxies, file required ownership reports and take other actions with respect to the securities in the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion; (vi) maintain the books and records required to be maintained with respect to the securities in the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion; (vii) furnish reports, statements and other data on securities, economic conditions and other matters related to the investment of the Fund’s assets which the Advisor, the Trustees, or the officers of the Trust may reasonably request; and (viii) render to the Trust’s Board of Trustees such periodic and special reports with respect to the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion as the Board may reasonably request.

(b) Brokerage . With respect to the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion, the Sub-Advisor shall be responsible for broker-dealer selection and for negotiation of brokerage commission rates. The Sub-Advisor may direct orders to an affiliated person of the Sub-Advisor or to any other broker-dealer who has been identified by the Advisor to the Sub-Advisor as an affiliate of any other investment manager for the Fund without prior authorization to use such affiliated broker or dealer by the Trust’s Board of Trustees, provided that the Sub-Advisor does so in a manner consistent with Sections 17(a) and 17(e) of the Investment Company Act, Rule 17e-1 thereunder and the Rule 17e-1 procedures adopted by the Trust (a copy of which shall be provided by the Advisor). The Sub-Advisor’s primary consideration in effecting a securities transaction will be best execution. In selecting a broker-dealer to execute each particular transaction, the Sub-Advisor may take the following into consideration: the best net price available; the reliability, integrity and financial condition of the broker-dealer; the size of and difficulty in executing the order; and the value of the expected contribution of the broker-dealer to the investment performance of the Fund on a continuing basis. The price to the Fund in any transaction may be less favorable than that available from another broker-dealer if the difference is reasonably justified by other aspects of the portfolio execution, other brokerage or research services offered.

 

2


Subject to such policies as the Advisor and the Board of Trustees of the Trust may determine, the Sub-Advisor shall not be deemed to have acted unlawfully or to have breached any duty created by this Agreement or otherwise solely by reason of its having caused the Fund to pay a broker or dealer that provides (directly or indirectly) brokerage or research services to the Sub-Advisor an amount of commission for effecting a portfolio transaction in excess of the amount of commission another broker or dealer would have charged for effecting that transaction, if the Sub-Advisor determines in good faith that such amount of commission was reasonable in relation to the value of the brokerage and research services provided by such broker or dealer, viewed in terms of either that particular transaction or the Sub-Advisor’s or the Advisor’s overall responsibilities with respect to the Fund. The Sub-Advisor is further authorized to allocate the orders placed by it on behalf of the Fund to such brokers or dealers who also provide research or statistical material, or other services, to the Trust, the Advisor, any affiliate of either, or the Sub-Advisor. Such allocation shall be in such amounts and proportions as the Sub-Advisor shall determine, and the Sub-Advisor shall report on such allocations regularly to the Advisor and the Trust, indicating the broker-dealers to whom such allocations have been made and the basis therefor.

On occasions when the Sub-Advisor deems the purchase or sale of a security to be in the best interest of the Fund as well as other clients of the Sub-Advisor, the Sub-Advisor, to the extent permitted by applicable laws and regulations, may aggregate the securities to be so purchased or sold in order to obtain the most favorable price or lower brokerage commissions and the most efficient execution. In such event, allocation of the securities so purchased or sold, as well as the expenses incurred in the transaction, will be made by the Sub-Advisor in the manner it considers to be the most equitable and consistent with its fiduciary obligations to the Fund and to such other clients.

(c) Proxy Voting . The Advisor hereby delegates to the Sub-Advisor, the Advisor’s discretionary authority to exercise voting rights with respect to the securities and other investments in the Allocated Portion. The Sub-Advisor’s proxy voting policies shall comply with any rules or regulations promulgated by the SEC. The Sub-Advisor shall maintain and preserve a record, in an easily-accessible place for a period of not less than three (3) years (or longer, if required by law), of the Sub-Advisor’s voting procedures, of the Sub-Advisor’s actual votes, and such other information required for the Fund to comply with any rules or regulations promulgated by the SEC. The Sub-Advisor shall supply updates of this record to the Advisor or any authorized representative of the Advisor, or to the Fund on a quarterly basis (or more frequently, if required by law). The Sub-Advisor shall provide the Advisor and the Fund with information regarding the policies and procedures that the Sub-Advisor uses to determine how to vote proxies relating to the Allocated Portion. The Fund may request that the Sub-Advisor vote proxies for the Allocated Portion in accordance with the Fund’s proxy voting policies.

(d) Books and Records . In compliance with the requirements of Rule 31a-3 under the Investment Company Act, the Sub-Advisor hereby agrees that all records which it maintains for the Fund are the property of the Fund and further agrees to surrender promptly to the Fund copies of any of such records upon the Fund’s request. The Sub-Advisor further agrees to preserve for the periods prescribed by Rule 31a-2 under the Investment Company Act the records required to be maintained by Rule 31a-1 under the Investment Company Act with respect to the Fund and to preserve the records required and Rule 204-2 under the Advisers Act with respect to the Fund for the period specified in the Rule.

(e) Custody . Title to all investments shall be made in the name of the Fund, provided that for convenience in buying, selling, and exchanging securities (stocks, bonds, commercial paper, etc.), title to such securities may be held in the name of the Fund’s custodian bank, or its nominee or as otherwise provided in the Fund’s custody agreement. The Fund shall notify the Sub-Advisor of the identity of its custodian bank and shall give the Sub-Advisor thirty (30) days’ written notice of any changes in such custody arrangements. Neither the Sub-Advisor, nor any parent, subsidiary or related firm, shall take possession of or handle any cash or securities, mortgages or deeds of trust, or other indicia

 

3


of ownership of the Fund’s investments, or otherwise act as custodian of such investments. All cash and the indicia of ownership of all other investments shall be held by the Fund’s custodian bank. The Fund shall instruct its custodian bank to (a) carry out all investment instructions as may be directed by the Sub-Advisor with respect thereto (which may be orally given if confirmed in writing); and (b) provide the Sub-Advisor with all operational information necessary for the Sub-Advisor to trade on behalf of the Fund.

(f) (1) Consulting with Certain Affiliated Sub-Advisors . With respect to any transaction the Fund enters into with an affiliated sub-advisor (or an affiliated person of such sub-advisor) in reliance on Rule 10f-3, Rule 17a-10 or Rule 12d3-1 under the Investment Company Act, the Sub-Advisor agrees that it will not consult with the affiliated sub-advisor concerning such transaction, except to the extent necessary to comply with the percentage limits of paragraphs (a) and (b) of Rule 12d3-1.

(2) Transactions Among Sub-Advisors of the Fund . In any case in which there are two or more sub-advisors responsible for providing investment advice to the Fund, the Sub-Advisor may enter into a transaction on behalf of the Fund with another sub-advisor of the Fund (or an affiliated person of such sub-advisor) in reliance on Rule 10f-3, Rule 17a-10 or Rule 12d3-1 under the Investment Company Act, only if (i) the Sub-Advisor, under the terms of this Agreement, is responsible for providing investment advice with respect to its Allocated Portion, and (ii) the other sub-advisor is responsible for providing investment advice with respect to a separate portion of the portfolio of the Fund.

3. Representations and Covenants of Sub-Advisor, Advisor and Trust .

(a) Sub-Advisor shall use its best judgment and efforts in rendering the advice and services to the Fund as contemplated by this Agreement.

(b) Sub-Advisor shall maintain all licenses and registrations necessary to perform its duties hereunder in good order.

(c) Sub-Advisor shall conduct its operations at all times in conformance with the Investment Advisers Act, the Investment Company Act and any other applicable state and/or self-regulatory organization regulations.

(d) Sub-Advisor shall be covered by errors and omissions insurance. The company self-retention or deductible shall not exceed reasonable and customary standards, and Sub-Advisor agrees to notify Advisor in the event the aggregate coverage of such insurance in any annual period is reduced below $10,000,000.

(e) The Sub-Advisor represents and warrants to the Advisor and the Fund that (i) the retention of the Sub-Advisor as contemplated by this Agreement is authorized by the Sub-Advisor’s governing documents; (ii) the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement does not violate any obligation by which the Sub-Advisor or its property is bound, whether arising by contract, operation of law or otherwise; and (iii) this Agreement has been duly authorized by appropriate action of the Sub-Advisor and when executed and delivered by the Sub-Advisor will be the legal, valid and binding obligation of the Sub-Advisor, enforceable against the Sub-Advisor in accordance with its terms hereof, subject, as to enforcement, to applicable bankruptcy, insolvency and similar laws affecting creditors’ rights generally and to general equitable principles (regardless of whether enforcement is sought in a proceeding in equity or law).

 

4


(f)The Advisor acknowledges that compliance with FATCA Regimes shall be the sole responsibility of the Trust and the Advisor. The Advisor further agrees that is shall deliver to the Sub-Advisor, government, taxing authority or such other parties as the Sub-Advisor reasonably directs any information, forms, documents or certificates relating to taxation or tax status of the Fund or the Trust as reasonably requested by the Sub-Advisor, with any such form or document to be accurate and completed in a manner reasonably satisfactory to the Sub-Advisor.

For purposes of this paragraph “FACTA Regimes” means:

(i) Sections 1471 to 1474 to the U.S. Internal Revenue code and any associated legislation, regulations or guidance, or similar legislation, regulations or guidance enacted in any jurisdiction (including, without limitation, the United Kingdom) including tax reporting and/or withholding tax regimes; and

(ii) Any intergovernmental agreement, treaty, regulation, guidance or any other agreement any other jurisdictions (including any government bodies in such jurisdiction), entered into in order to comply with, facilitate, supplement or implement the legislation, regulations or guidance described in paragraph (i).

4. Independent Contractor . The Sub-Advisor shall, for all purposes herein, be deemed to be an independent contractor, and shall, unless otherwise expressly provided and authorized to do so, have no authority to act for or represent the Trust, the Fund, or the Advisor in any way, or in any way be deemed an agent for the Trust, the Fund, or the Advisor. It is expressly understood and agreed that the services to be rendered by the Sub-Advisor to the Fund under the provisions of this Agreement are not to be deemed exclusive, and the Sub-Advisor shall be free to render similar or different services to others so long as ability to render the services provided for in this Agreement shall not be impaired thereby.

5. Sub-Advisor’s Personnel . The Sub-Advisor shall, at its own expense, maintain such staff and employ or retain such personnel and consult with such other persons as it shall from time to time determine to be necessary to the performance of its obligations under this Agreement. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the staff and personnel of the Sub-Advisor shall be deemed to include persons employed or retained by the Sub-Advisor to furnish statistical information, research, and other factual information, advice regarding economic factors and trends, information with respect to technical and scientific developments, and such other information, advice, and assistance as the Sub-Advisor, the Advisor or the Trust’s Board of Trustees may desire and reasonably request. The Advisor authorizes the Sub-Advisor to utilize third party agents where necessary in order to facilitate the provision of its services under this Agreement but only in relation services other than portfolio management. The Sub-Advisor agrees to be responsible for the costs and expenses of those agents to the extent the Sub-Advisor would be responsible for those costs and expenses if the services were provided directly by the Sub-Advisor.

6. Expenses .

(a) The Sub-Advisor shall be responsible for (i) providing the personnel, office space, and equipment reasonably necessary to fulfill its obligations under this Agreement.

(b) In the event this Agreement is terminated by an assignment in the nature of a change of control as contemplated by Section 14(b) hereof, and the parties agree to enter into a new agreement, the Sub-Advisor shall be responsible for (i) the costs of any special notifications to the Fund’s shareholders and any special meetings of the Trust’s Board of Trustees convened for the primary benefit of the Sub-Advisor, or (ii) its fair share of the costs of any special meetings required for the benefit of the Sub-Advisor as well as for other purposes.

 

5


(c) The Sub-Advisor may voluntarily absorb certain Fund expenses or waive some or all of the Sub-Advisor’s own fee.

(d) To the extent the Sub-Advisor incurs any costs by assuming expenses which are an obligation of the Advisor or the Fund, the Advisor or the Fund shall promptly reimburse the Sub-Advisor for such costs and expenses. To the extent the Sub-Advisor performs services for which the Fund or the Advisor is obligated to pay, the Sub-Advisor shall be entitled to prompt reimbursement in such amount as shall be negotiated between the Sub-Advisor and the Advisor but shall, under no circumstances, exceed the Sub-Advisor’s actual costs for providing such services.

7. Investment Sub-Advisory Fee .

(a) The Advisor shall pay to the Sub-Advisor, and the Sub-Advisor agrees to accept, as full compensation for all investment advisory services furnished or provided to the Fund pursuant to this Agreement, an annual sub-advisory fee based on the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion, as such Allocated Portion may be adjusted from time to time. The blended annual fee rate applied to the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion will be calculated based on the net assets of the Fund as follows: [    ] all computed on the value of such net assets as of the close of business each day.

For the purposes of the foregoing, the net assets value of the Fund shall be calculated in accordance with the methodology as set out in the Fund’s offering document and as published by the Fund’s custodian on a daily basis. The Sub-advisory fee is exclusive of any value added tax which shall be added to the amount payable where applicable. The fee is payable in USD.

(b) The sub-advisory fee shall be paid by the Advisor to Sub-Advisor monthly in arrears on the tenth business day of each month.

(c) The initial fee under this Agreement shall be payable on the tenth business day of the first month following the effective date of this Agreement and shall be prorated as set forth below. If this Agreement is terminated prior to the end of any month, the fee to the Sub-Advisor shall be prorated for the portion of any month in which this Agreement is in effect which is not a complete month according to the proportion which the number of calendar days in the month during which the Agreement is in effect bears to the number of calendar days in the month, and shall be payable within ten (10) days after the date of termination.

(d) The fee payable to the Sub-Advisor under this Agreement will be reduced to the extent of any receivable owed by the Sub-Advisor to the Advisor or the Fund.

(e) The Sub-Advisor voluntarily may reduce any portion of the compensation or reimbursement of expenses due to it pursuant to this Agreement and may agree to make payments to limit the expenses which are the responsibility of the Advisor of the Fund under this Agreement. Any such reduction or payment shall be applicable only to such specific reduction or payment and shall not constitute an agreement to reduce any future compensation or reimbursement due to the Sub-Advisor hereunder or to continue future payments. Any such reduction will be agreed to prior to accrual of the related expense or fee and will be estimated daily and reconciled and paid on a monthly basis.

(f) The Sub-Advisor may agree not to require payment of any portion of the compensation or reimbursement of expenses otherwise due to it pursuant to this Agreement. Any such agreement shall be applicable only with respect to the specific items covered thereby and shall not constitute an agreement not to require payment of any future compensation or reimbursement due to the Sub-Advisor hereunder.

 

6


8. No Shorting; No Borrowing . The Sub-Advisor agrees that neither it nor any of    its officers or employees shall take any short position in the units of the Fund. This prohibition shall not prevent the purchase of such units by any of the officers or employees of the Sub-Advisor or any trust, pension, profit-sharing or other benefit plan for such persons or affiliates thereof, at a price not less than the net asset value thereof at the time of purchase, as allowed pursuant to rules promulgated under the Investment Company Act. The Sub-Advisor agrees that neither it nor any of its officers or employees shall borrow from the Fund or pledge or use the Fund’s assets in connection with any borrowing not directly for the Fund’s benefit.

9. Conflicts with Trust’s Governing Documents and Applicable Laws . Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to require the Trust or the Fund to take any action contrary to the Trust’s Agreement and Declaration of Trust, By-Laws, or any applicable statute or regulation, or to relieve or deprive the Board of Trustees of the Trust of its responsibility for and control of the conduct of the affairs of the Trust and the Fund. In this connection, the Sub-Advisor acknowledges that the Advisor and the Trust’s Board of Trustees retain ultimate plenary authority over the Fund, including the Allocated Portion, and may take any and all actions necessary and reasonable to protect the interests of shareholders.

10. Reports and Access . The Sub-Advisor agrees to supply such information to the Advisor and to permit such compliance inspections by the Advisor or the Fund as shall be reasonably necessary to permit the administrator to satisfy its obligations and respond to the reasonable requests of the Trustees.

11. Standard of Care, Liability and Indemnification .

(a) The Sub-Advisor shall exercise reasonable care and prudence in fulfilling its obligations under this Agreement.

(b) The Sub-Advisor shall have responsibility for the accuracy and completeness (and liability for lack thereof) of the statements furnished by the Sub-Advisor for use by the Advisor in the Fund’s offering materials (including the prospectus, the statement of additional information, advertising and sales materials) that pertain to the Sub-Advisor and the investment of the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion of the Fund. The Sub-Advisor shall have no responsibility or liability with respect to other disclosures.

(c) The Sub-Advisor shall be liable to the Fund for any loss (including brokerage charges) incurred by the Fund as a result of any investment made by the Sub-Advisor in violation of Section 2 hereof.

(d) Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, in the absence of willful misfeasance, bad faith, gross negligence, or reckless disregard of the obligations or duties hereunder on the part of the Sub-Advisor, the Sub-Advisor shall not be subject to liability to the Advisor, the Trust, or the Fund or to any shareholder of the Fund for any act or omission in the course of, or connected with, rendering services hereunder or for any losses that may be sustained in the purchase, holding or sale of any security by the Fund.

(e) Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, including without limitation paragraphs (c) and (d) above, each, party to this Agreement (as an “Indemnifying Party”), including the Trust on behalf of the Fund, shall indemnify and hold harmless the other party and the shareholders, directors, officers, and employees of the other party (any such person, an “Indemnified Party”) against

 

7


any loss, liability, claim, damage, or expense (including the reasonable cost of investigating and defending any alleged loss, liability, claim, damage, or expense and reasonable external counsel fees incurred in connection therewith) arising out of the Indemnifying Party’s performance or non-performance of any duties under this Agreement provided, however, that nothing herein shall be deemed to protect any Indemnified Party against any liability to which such Indemnified Party would otherwise be subject by reason of its willful misfeasance, bad faith, or negligence in the performance of its duties hereunder or by reason of reckless disregard of obligations and duties under this Agreement.

If indemnification is to be sought hereunder, then the Indemnified Party shall promptly notify the Indemnifying Party of the assertion of any claim or the commencement of any action or proceeding in respect thereof; provided, however , that the failure so to notify the Indemnifying Party shall not relieve the Indemnifying Party from any liability that it may otherwise have to the Indemnified Party provided such failure shall not affect in a material adverse manner the position of the Indemnifying Party or the Indemnified Party with respect to such claim. Following such notification, the Indemnifying Party may elect in writing to assume the defense of such action or proceeding and, upon such election, it shall not be liable for any legal costs incurred by the Indemnified Party (other than reasonable costs previously incurred) in connection therewith, unless (i) the Indemnifying Party has failed to provide counsel reasonably satisfactory to the Indemnified Party in a timely manner or (ii) counsel which has been provided by the Indemnifying Party reasonably determines that its representation of the Indemnified Party would present it with a conflict of interest.

The provisions of this paragraph 11(e) shall not apply in any action where the Indemnified Party is the party adverse, or one of the parties adverse, to the other party.

(f) No provision of this Agreement shall be construed to protect any Trustee or officer of the Trust, or officer of the Advisor or the Sub-Advisor, from liability in violation of Sections 17(h) and (i) of the Investment Company Act.

(g) Neither party will be liable for loss of profit, loss of use, loss of revenue, loss of contracts, increased costs and expenses (other than actual costs and expenses directly resulting from conduct covered by this Section 11), wasted expenditure and all special, indirect and consequential losses.

12. Non-Exclusivity; Trading for Sub-Advisor’s Own Account; Code of Ethics . The Advisor’s employment of the Sub-Advisor is not an exclusive arrangement. The Advisor anticipates that it will employ other individuals or entities to furnish it with the services provided for herein. Likewise, the Sub-Advisor may act as investment adviser for any other person, and shall not in any way be limited or restricted from buying, selling, or trading any securities for its or their own accounts or the accounts of others for whom it or they may be acting, provided, however, that the Sub-Advisor expressly represents that it will undertake no activities which will adversely affect the performance of its obligations to the Fund under this Agreement; and provided further that the Sub-Advisor will adhere to a code of ethics governing employee trading and trading for proprietary accounts that conforms to the requirements of the Investment Company Act and the Investment Advisers Act, a copy of which has been provided to the Board of Trustees of the Trust.

The Sub-Advisor will make such reports to the Advisor and the Fund as it is required to make under Rule 17j-1 and Rule 38a-1 under the Investment Company Act. The Sub-Advisor agrees to provide the Advisor and the Fund with any information required for the Fund to satisfy the compliance program, code of ethics reporting or disclosure requirements of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and any rules or regulations promulgated thereunder by the SEC. To the extent the Sub-Advisor adopts or has adopted a separate code of ethics or amends or has amended its code of ethics to comply with such rules or regulations, the Sub-Advisor shall provide the Advisor with a copy of such code of ethics and any amendments thereto.

 

8


13. Term .

(a) This Agreement shall become effective upon approval by the Board of Trustees of the Trust and shall remain in effect for a period of two (2) years, unless sooner terminated as hereinafter provided. This Agreement shall continue in effect thereafter for additional periods not exceeding one (1) year so long as such continuation is approved for the Fund at least annually by (i) the Board of Trustees of the Trust or by the vote of a majority of the outstanding voting securities of the Fund and (ii) the vote of a majority of the Trustees of the Trust who are not parties to this Agreement nor interested persons thereof, cast in person at a meeting called for the purpose of voting on such approval, and (iii) the Advisor. The terms “majority of the outstanding voting securities” and “interested persons” shall have the meanings as set forth in the Investment Company Act.

(b)The Fund and its distributor may use the Sub-Advisor’s trade name or any name derived from the Sub-Advisor’s trade name only in a manner consistent with the nature of this Agreement and only for so long as this Agreement or any extension, renewal, or amendment hereof remains in effect. Within sixty (60) days from such time as this Agreement shall no longer be in effect, the Fund shall cease to use such a name or any other name connected with Sub-Advisor.

14. Termination; No Assignment .

(a) This Agreement may be terminated at any time without payment of any penalty, by: the Board of Trustees of the Trust or by vote of a majority of the outstanding voting securities of the Fund, upon written notice to the Sub-Advisor and the Advisor. This Agreement also may be terminated at any time, without the payment of any penalty, by the Advisor or the Sub-Advisor upon written notice to the Trust and the other party. In the event of a termination, Sub-Advisor shall cooperate in the orderly transfer of the Fund’s affairs and, at the request of the Board of Trustees, transfer any and all books and records of the Allocated Portion of the Fund maintained by Sub-Advisor on behalf of the Fund.

(b) This Agreement shall terminate automatically in the event of any transfer or assignment thereof, as defined in the Investment Company Act.

15. Severability . If any provision of this Agreement shall be held or made invalid by a court decision, statute or rule, or shall be otherwise rendered invalid, the remainder of this Agreement shall not be affected thereby.

16. Captions . The captions in this Agreement are included for convenience of reference only and in no way define or limit any of the provisions hereof or otherwise affect their construction or effect.

17. Governing Law . This Agreement shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of California without giving effect to the conflict of laws principles thereof; provided that nothing herein shall be construed to preempt, or to be inconsistent with, any federal law, regulation or rule, including the Investment Company Act and the Investment Advisers Act and any rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.

18. Nonpublic Personal Information . Notwithstanding any provision herein to the contrary, the Sub-Advisor hereto agrees on behalf of itself and its directors, trustees, shareholders, officers, and employees (1) to treat confidentially and as proprietary information of the Advisor (on behalf of itself and the Fund) and the Trust (a) all records and other information relative to the Fund’s prior, present, or

 

9


potential shareholders (and clients of said shareholders) and (b) any Nonpublic Personal Information of Fund shareholders, as defined under Section 248.3(t) of Regulation S-P (“Regulation S-P”), promulgated under the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act (the “G-L-B Act”), and (2) except after prior notification to and approval in writing by the Advisor or the Trust, not to use such records and information for any purpose other than the performance of its responsibilities and duties hereunder, or as otherwise permitted by Regulation S-P or the G-L-B Act, and if in compliance therewith, the privacy policies adopted by the Advisor and the Fund and communicated in writing to the Sub-Advisor. Such written approval shall not be unreasonably withheld by the Advisor or the Trust and may not be withheld where the Sub-Advisor may be exposed to civil or criminal contempt or other proceedings for failure to comply after being requested to divulge such information by duly constituted authorities.

19. Anti-Money Laundering Compliance . The Sub-Advisor acknowledges that, in compliance with the Bank Secrecy Act, as amended, the USA PATRIOT Act, and any respective implementing regulations (together, “AML Laws”), the Fund has adopted an Anti-Money Laundering Policy. The Sub-Advisor agrees to comply with the Fund’s Anti-Money Laundering Policy and the AML Laws, as the same may apply to the Sub-Advisor, now and in the future. The Sub-Advisor further agrees to provide to the Fund and/or the Advisor such reports, certifications and contractual assurances as may be requested by the Fund or the Advisor in connection with the Fund or the Advisor. The Advisor may disclose information respecting the Sub-Advisor to governmental and/or regulatory or self-regulatory authorities to the extent required by applicable law or regulation and may file reports with such authorities as may be required by applicable law or regulation.

20. Certifications; Disclosure Controls and Procedures . The Sub-Advisor acknowledges that, in compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and the implementing regulations promulgated thereunder, the Fund is required to make certain certifications and has adopted disclosure controls and procedures. To the extent reasonably requested by the Advisor, the Sub-Advisor agrees to use its best efforts to assist the Advisor and the Fund in complying with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and implementing the Fund’s disclosure controls and procedures. The Sub-Advisor agrees to inform the Fund of any material development related to the Allocated Portion that the Sub-Advisor reasonably believes is relevant to the Fund’s certification obligations under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

21. Provision of Certain Information by the Sub-Advisor . The Sub-Advisor will promptly notify the Advisor in writing of the occurrence of any of the following events:

(a) the Sub-Advisor fails to be registered as investment adviser under the Advisers Act or under the laws of any jurisdiction in which the Sub-Advisor is required to be registered as investment adviser in order to perform its obligations under this Agreement;

(b) the Sub-Advisor is served or otherwise receives notice of any action, suit, proceeding, inquiry, or investigation, at law or in equity, before or by any court, public board, or body, involving the affairs of the Advisor or the Fund;

(c) the Sub-Advisor suffers financial impairment which materially interferes with its ability to manage the Allocated Portion or otherwise fulfill its duties under this Agreement;

(d) the Sub-Advisor, its principal officers or its controlling stockholders are the subject of a government investigation or inquiry, administrative proceeding or any other type of legal action which, under the Investment Company Act, would make it ineligible to serve as an investment adviser to an investment company;

 

10


(e)    a change in the Sub-Advisor’s personnel materially involved in the management of the Allocated Portion; or

(f)    a change in control or management of the Sub-Advisor.

22.     Confidentiality . The parties to this Agreement shall not, directly or indirectly, permit their respective affiliates, directors, trustees, officers, members, employees, or agents to, in any form or by any means, use, disclose, or furnish to any person or entity, records or information concerning the business of any of the other parties except as necessary for the performance of duties under this Agreement or as required by law or is so requested by a regulatory or fiscal authorities or a court of tribunal of a competent jurisdiction, without prior written notice to and approval of the relevant other parties, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld by such other parties.

23.      Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in counterparts and by the different parties hereto on separate counterparts, each of which when so executed and delivered, shall be deemed an original and all of which counterparts shall constitute but one and the same agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be duly executed by their duly authorized officers, all on the day and year first above written.

 

LITMAN/GREGORY FUND ADVISORS, LLC      

PICTET ASSET MANAGEMENT, Ltd

By:   

/s/ John M. Coughlan

      By:   

/s/ Nian Lala

   By:   

/s/ Nigel Burnhan

Name:    John M. Coughlan       Name:    Nian Lala    Name:    Nigel Burnhan
Title:    Chief Operating Officer       Title:    Head of Legal    Title:    Director

As a Third Party Beneficiary,

LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST

on behalf of

LITMAN GREGORY MASTERS INTERNATIONAL FUND

 

By:  

/s/ Jeremy DeGroot

Name:   Jeremy DeGroot
Title:   President

 

11

LITMAN GREGORY MASTERS INTERNATIONAL FUND

LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST

INVESTMENT SUB-ADVISORY AGREEMENT

THIS INVESTMENT SUB-ADVISORY AGREEMENT is made as of the 13 th day of March 2017 by and between LITMAN/GREGORY FUND ADVISORS, LLC (the “Advisor”) and EVERMORE GLOBAL ADVISORS, LLC (the “Sub-Advisor”).

WITNESSETH:

WHEREAS, the Advisor has been retained as the investment adviser to the Litman Gregory Masters International Fund (the “Fund”), a series of the Litman Gregory Funds Trust (the “Trust”), an open-end management investment company, registered as such under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “Investment Company Act”); and

WHEREAS, the Advisor has been authorized by the Trust to retain one or more investment advisers (each an “investment manager”) to serve as portfolio managers for a specified portion of the Fund’s assets (the “Allocated Portion”); and

WHEREAS, the Sub-Advisor is registered as an investment adviser under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, as amended (the “Investment Advisers Act”), and is engaged in the business of supplying investment advisory services as an independent contractor; and

WHEREAS, the Fund and the Advisor desire to retain the Sub-Advisor as an investment manager to render portfolio advice and services to the Fund pursuant to the terms and provisions of this Agreement, and the Sub-Advisor desires to furnish said advice and services; and

WHEREAS, the Trust and the Fund are third party beneficiaries of such arrangements;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the covenants and the mutual promises hereinafter set forth, the parties to this Agreement, which shall include the Trust on behalf of the Fund for purposes of the indemnification provisions of section 11 hereof, intending to be legally bound hereby, mutually agree as follows:

1. Appointment of Sub-Advisor .

(a) The Advisor hereby employs the Sub-Advisor, and the Sub-Advisor hereby accepts such employment, to render investment advice and related services with respect to the Allocated Portion of the assets of the Fund for the period and on the terms set forth in this Agreement, subject to the supervision and direction of the Advisor and the Trust’s Board of Trustees.

(b) The Sub-Advisor’s employment shall be solely with respect to the Allocated Portion of the Fund’s assets, such Allocated Portion to be specified by the Advisor and subject to periodic increases or decreases at the Advisor’s sole discretion.


(c) Nature of Fund . The Sub-Advisor and the Advisor both acknowledge that the Fund is a mutual fund that operates as a series of an open-end series investment company under the plenary authority of the Trust’s Board of Trustees. In managing the Allocated Portion, the Sub-Advisor shall do so subject always to the plenary authority of the Board of Trustees.

2. Duties of Sub-Advisor .

(a) General Duties . The Sub-Advisor shall act as one of several investment managers to the Fund and shall invest the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion of the assets of the Fund in accordance with the investment objectives, policies and restrictions of the Fund as set forth in the Fund’s and the Trust’s governing documents, including, without limitation, the Trust’s Agreement and Declaration of Trust and By-Laws; the Fund’s prospectus, statement of additional information and undertakings; and such other limitations, policies and procedures as the Advisor or the Trustees of the Trust may impose from time to time in writing to the Sub- Advisor. The Advisor represents that the foregoing documents, as they may be amended from time to time, are consistent with the provisions of law, regulatory policies and organizational documents applicable to the Fund and the Advisor, and the Advisor will notify the Sub-Advisor in the event amendments to the foregoing are needed to conform to any changes in such provisions of law, regulatory policies or organizational documents. The Advisor will furnish to the Sub-Advisor current and complete copies of the Declaration of Trust and By-Laws of the Trust, and the Fund’s current Prospectus and Statement of Additional Information as those documents may be amended from time to time, and will provide the Sub-Advisor with any limitations, policies and procedures applicable to the Allocated Portion reasonably in advance of their adoption. In providing such services, the Sub-Advisor shall at all times adhere to the provisions and restrictions contained in the federal securities laws, applicable state securities laws, the Internal Revenue Code, and other applicable law. Advisor shall provide to the Sub-Advisor such information with respect to the Fund such that the Sub-Advisor will be able to maintain compliance with applicable regulations, laws, policies, and restrictions with respect to the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion.

Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Sub-Advisor shall: (i) furnish the Fund with advice and recommendations with respect to the investment of the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion of the Fund’s assets; (ii) effect the purchase and sale of portfolio securities for the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion; (iii) determine that portion of the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion that will remain uninvested, if any; (iv) manage and oversee the investments of the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion, subject to the ultimate supervision and direction of the Trust’s Board of Trustees; (v) vote proxies, file required ownership reports, and take other actions with respect to the securities in the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion; (vi) maintain the books and records required to be maintained with respect to the securities in the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion; (vii) furnish reports, statements and other data on securities, economic conditions and other matters related to the investment of the Allocated Portion of the Fund’s assets which the Advisor, the Trustees, or the officers of the Trust may reasonably request; and (viii) render to the Trust’s Board of Trustees such periodic and special reports with respect to the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion as the Board may reasonably request.

 

-2-


(b) Brokerage . With respect to the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion, the Sub-Advisor shall be responsible for broker-dealer selection and for negotiation of brokerage commission rates. For purposes hereof, references to ‘‘broker-dealer,” “broker” or “dealer” shall be understood to include other financial intermediaries and counterparties. The Sub-Advisor may direct orders to an affiliated person of the Sub-Advisor or to any other broker-dealer who has been identified by the Advisor to the Sub-Advisor as an affiliate of any other investment manager without prior authorization to use such affiliated broker or dealer by the Trust’s Board of Trustees, provided that the Sub-Advisor does so in a manner consistent with Sections 17(a) and 17(e) of the Investment Company Act, Rule 17e-1 thereunder and the Rule 17e-1 procedures adopted by the Trust (a copy of which shall by provided by the Advisor). The Sub-Advisor’s primary consideration in effecting a securities transaction will be best execution. In selecting a broker-dealer to execute each particular transaction, the Sub-Advisor may take the following, without limitation, into consideration: the best net price available; the reliability, integrity and financial condition of the broker-dealer; the size of and difficulty in executing the order; and the value of the expected contribution of the broker-dealer to the investment performance of the Fund on a continuing basis. The price to the Fund in any transaction may be less favorable than that available from another broker-dealer if the difference is reasonably justified by other aspects of the portfolio execution services offered.

Subject to such policies as the Advisor and the Board of Trustees of the Trust may determine, the Sub-Advisor shall not be deemed to have acted unlawfully or to have breached any duty created by this Agreement or otherwise solely by reason of its having caused the Fund to pay a broker or dealer that provides (directly or indirectly) brokerage or research services to the Sub-Advisor an amount of commission for effecting a portfolio transaction in excess of the amount of commission another broker or dealer would have charged for effecting that transaction, if the Sub-Advisor determines in good faith that such amount of commission was reasonable in relation to the value of the brokerage and research services provided by such broker or dealer, viewed in terms of either that particular transaction or the Sub-Advisor’s or the Advisor’s overall responsibilities with respect to the Fund. The Sub-Advisor is further authorized to allocate the orders placed by it on behalf of the Fund to such brokers or dealers who also provide research or statistical material, or other services, to the Trust, the Advisor, any affiliate of either, or the Sub-Advisor. Such allocation shall be in such amounts and proportions as the Sub-Advisor shall determine, and the Sub-Advisor shall report on such allocations regularly to the Advisor and the Trust, indicating the broker-dealers to whom such allocations have been made and the basis therefor.

On occasions when the Sub-Advisor deems the purchase or sale of a security to be in the best interest of the Fund as well as other clients of the Sub-Advisor, the Sub-Advisor, to the extent permitted by applicable laws and regulations, may aggregate the securities to be so purchased or sold in order to obtain the most favorable price or lower brokerage commissions and the most efficient execution. In such event, allocation of the securities so purchased or sold, as well as the expenses incurred in the transaction, will be made by the Sub-Advisor in the manner it considers to be the most equitable and consistent with its fiduciary obligations to the Fund and to such other clients.

 

-3-


For the avoidance of doubt, neither the Sub-Advisor nor any of its affiliates will be liable for the performance of the obligations, or acts or omissions of, any broker-dealer with respect to any transaction placed on behalf of the Fund.

(c) Proxy Voting . The Advisor hereby delegates to the Sub-Advisor, the Advisor’s discretionary authority to exercise voting rights with respect to the securities and other investments in the Allocated Portion. The Sub-Advisor’s proxy voting policies shall comply with any rules or regulations promulgated by the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”). The Sub-Advisor shall maintain and preserve a record, in an easily-accessible place for a period of not less than three (3) years (or longer, if required by law), of the Sub-Advisor’s voting procedures, of the Sub-Advisor’s actual votes, and such other information required for the Fund to comply with any rules or regulations promulgated by the SEC. The Sub-Advisor shall supply updates of this record to the Advisor or any authorized representative of the Advisor, or to the Fund on a quarterly basis (or more frequently, if required by law). The Sub-Advisor shall provide the Advisor and the Fund with information regarding the policies and procedures that the Sub-Advisor uses to determine how to vote proxies relating to the Allocated Portion. The Fund may request that the Sub-Advisor vote proxies for the Allocated Portion in accordance with the Fund’s proxy voting policies.

(d) Books and Records . In compliance with the requirements of Rule 31a-3 under the Investment Company Act, the Sub-Advisor hereby agrees that all records which it maintains for the Fund are the property of the Fund and further agrees to surrender reasonably promptly to the Fund copies of any of such records upon the Fund’s request. The Sub-Advisor further agrees to preserve for the periods prescribed by Rule 3la-2 under the Investment Company Act the records required to be maintained by Rule 31a-1 under the Investment Company Act with respect to the Fund and to preserve the records required by Rule 204-2 under the Advisers Act with respect to the Fund for the period specified in the Rule.

(e) Custody . Title to all investments shall be made in the name of the Fund, provided that for convenience in buying, selling, and exchanging securities (stocks, bonds, commercial paper, etc.) and other instruments, title to such securities and other instruments may be held in the name of the Fund’s custodian bank, or its nominee or as otherwise provided in the Fund’s custody agreement. The Fund shall notify the Sub-Advisor of the identity of its custodian bank and shall give the Sub-Advisor thirty (30) days’ written notice of any changes in such custody arrangements. Neither the Sub-Advisor, nor any parent, subsidiary or related firm, shall take possession of or handle any cash or securities, mortgages or deeds of trust, or other indicia of ownership of the Fund’s investments, or otherwise act as custodian of such investments. All cash and the indicia of ownership of all other investments shall be held by the Fund’s custodian bank. The Fund shall instruct its custodian bank to (a) carry out all investment instructions as may be directed by the Sub-Advisor with respect thereto (which may be orally given if confirmed in writing); and (b) provide the Sub-Advisor with all operational information necessary for the Sub-Advisor to trade on behalf of the Fund.

 

-4-


(f) (1) Consulting with Certain Affiliated Sub-Advisors . With respect to any transaction the Fund enters into with an affiliated sub-advisor (or an affiliated person of such sub-advisor) in reliance on Rule 10f-3, Rule 17a-10 or Rule 12d3-l under the Investment Company Act, the Sub-Advisor agrees that it will not consult with the affiliated sub-advisor concerning such transaction, except to the extent necessary to comply with the percentage limits of paragraphs (a) and (b) of Rule 12d3-1.

(2) Transactions Among Sub-Advisors of the Fund . In any case in which there are two or more sub-advisors responsible for providing investment advice to the Fund, the Sub-Advisor may enter into a transaction on behalf of the Fund with another sub-advisor of the Fund (or an affiliated person of such sub-advisor) in reliance on Rule 10f-3, Rule 17a-10 or Rule 12d3-l under the Investment Company Act, only if (i) the Sub-Advisor, under the terms of this Agreement, is responsible for providing investment advice with respect to its Allocated Portion, and (ii) the other sub-advisor is responsible for providing investment advice with respect to a separate portion of the portfolio of the Fund.

3. Representations of the Parties .

(a) Sub-Advisor shall use its best judgment and efforts in rendering the advice and services to the Fund as contemplated by this Agreement.

(b) Sub-Advisor shall maintain all licenses and registrations necessary to perform its duties hereunder in good order.

(c) Sub-Advisor shall conduct its operations at all times in conformance with the Investment Advisers Act, the Investment Company Act and any other applicable state and/or self-regulatory organization regulations.

(d) Sub-Advisor shall be covered by errors and omissions insurance. The company self-retention or deductible shall not exceed reasonable and customary standards, and Sub-Advisor agrees to notify Advisor in the event the aggregate coverage of such insurance in any annual period is reduced below $5,000,000, except for the reduction due to claims.

(e) The Sub-Advisor represents and warrants to the Advisor and the Fund that (i) the retention of the Sub-Advisor as contemplated by this Agreement is authorized by the Sub-Advisor’s governing documents; (ii) the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement does not violate any obligation by which the Sub-Advisor or its property is bound, whether arising by contract, operation of law or otherwise; and (iii) this Agreement has been duly authorized by appropriate action of the Sub-Advisor and when executed and delivered by the Sub-Advisor will be the legal, valid and binding obligation of the Sub-Advisor, enforceable against the Sub-Advisor in accordance with its terms hereof, subject, as to enforcement, to applicable bankruptcy, insolvency and similar laws affecting creditors’ rights generally and to general equitable principles (regardless of whether enforcement is sought in a proceeding in equity or law).

 

-5-


(f) By execution of the Agreement, the Advisor represents that: (i) the terms hereof do not violate any law or other obligation by which the Advisor or the Fund is bound, whether arising by contract, operation of law or otherwise; (ii) the Agreement has been duly authorized by appropriate action and when so executed and delivered will be binding upon the Advisor in accordance with its terms; (iii) the Advisor has received a copy of Part 2 of the Sub-Advisor’s Form ADV; and (iv) the Advisor will deliver to the Sub-Advisor evidence of such authority as the Sub-Advisor may reasonably request, whether by way of a certified resolution or otherwise.

4. Independent Contractor . The Sub-Advisor shall, for all purposes herein, be deemed to be an independent contractor, and shall, unless otherwise expressly provided and authorized to do so, have no authority to act for or represent the Trust, the Fund, or the Advisor in any way, or in any way be deemed an agent for the Trust, the Fund, or the Advisor. It is expressly understood and agreed that the services to be rendered by the Sub-Advisor to the Fund under the provisions of this Agreement are not to be deemed exclusive, and the Sub-Advisor shall be free to render similar or different services to others so long as its ability to render the services provided for in this Agreement shall not be impaired thereby.

5. Sub-Advisor’s Personnel . The Sub-Advisor shall, at its own expense, maintain such staff and employ or retain such personnel and consult with such other persons as it shall from time to time determine to be necessary to the performance of its obligations under this Agreement. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the staff and personnel of the Sub- Advisor shall be deemed to include persons employed or retained by the Sub-Advisor to furnish statistical information, research, and other factual information, advice regarding economic factors and trends, information with respect to technical and scientific developments, and such other information, advice, and assistance as the Sub-Advisor, the Advisor or the Trust’s Board of Trustees may desire and reasonably request.

6. Expenses .

(a) The Sub-Advisor shall be responsible for providing the personnel, office space, and equipment reasonably necessary to fulfill its obligations under this Agreement. The Sub-Advisor will not, however, pay for the cost of securities, commodities, and other investments (including brokerage commissions and other transaction charges, if any) purchased or sold for the Fund.

(b) The Sub-Advisor may voluntarily absorb certain Fund expenses or waive some or all of the Sub-Advisor’s own fee.

(c) To the extent the Sub-Advisor incurs any costs by assuming expenses which are an obligation of the Advisor or the Fund, the Advisor or the Fund shall promptly reimburse the Sub-Advisor for such costs and expenses. To the extent the Sub-Advisor performs services for which the Fund or the Advisor is obligated to pay, the Sub-Advisor shall be entitled to prompt reimbursement in such amount as shall be negotiated between the Sub-Advisor and the Advisor but shall, under no circumstances, exceed the Sub-Advisor’s actual costs for providing such services.

 

-6-


7. Investment Sub-Advisory Fee .

(a) The Advisor shall pay to the Sub-Advisor, and the Sub-Advisor agrees to accept, as full compensation for all investment advisory services furnished or provided to the Fund pursuant to this Agreement, an annual sub-advisory fee based on the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion, as such Allocated Portion may be adjusted from time to time. Such fee shall be paid at the annual rate specified in Exhibit A attached hereto of the net assets of the Fund attributable to the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion, computed on the value of such net assets as of the close of business each day.

(b) The sub-advisory fee shall be paid by the Advisor to Sub-Advisor monthly in arrears on the tenth business day of each month.

(c) The initial fee under this Agreement shall be payable on the tenth business day of the first month following the effective date of this Agreement and shall be prorated as set forth below. If this Agreement is terminated prior to the end of any month, the fee to the Sub- Advisor shall be prorated for the portion of any month in which this Agreement is in effect which is not a complete month according to the proportion which the number of calendar days in the month during which the Agreement is in effect bears to the number of calendar days in the month, and shall be payable within ten (10) days after the date of termination.

(d) The fee payable to the Sub-Advisor under this Agreement will be reduced to the extent of any receivable owed by the Sub-Advisor to the Advisor or the Fund.

(e) The Sub-Advisor voluntarily may reduce any portion of the compensation or reimbursement of expenses due to it pursuant to this Agreement and may agree to make payments to limit the expenses which are the responsibility of the Advisor of the Fund under this Agreement. Any such reduction or payment shall be applicable only to such specific reduction or payment and shall not constitute an agreement to reduce any future compensation or reimbursement due to the Sub-Advisor hereunder or to continue future payments. Any such reduction will be agreed to prior to accrual of the related expense or fee and will be estimated daily and reconciled and paid on a monthly basis.

(f) The Sub-Advisor may agree not to require payment of any portion of the compensation or reimbursement of expenses otherwise due to it pursuant to this Agreement. Any such agreement shall be applicable only with respect to the specific items covered thereby and shall not constitute an agreement not to require payment of any future compensation or reimbursement due to the Sub-Advisor hereunder.

8. No Shorting; No Borrowing . The Sub-Advisor agrees that neither it nor any of its officers or employees shall take any short position in the shares of the Fund. This prohibition shall not prevent the purchase of such shares by any of the officers or employees of the Sub-

 

-7-


Advisor or any trust, pension, profit-sharing or other benefit plan for such persons or affiliates thereof, at a price not less than the net asset value thereof at the time of purchase, as allowed pursuant to rules promulgated under the Investment Company Act. The Sub-Advisor agrees that neither it nor any of its officers or employees shall borrow from the Fund or pledge or use the Funds assets in connection with any borrowing not directly for the Fund’s benefit.

9. Conflicts with Trust’s Governing Documents and Applicable Laws . Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to require the Trust or the Fund to take any action contrary to the Trust’s Agreement and Declaration of Trust, By-Laws, or any applicable statute or regulation, or to relieve or deprive the Board of Trustees of the Trust of its responsibility for and control of the conduct of the affairs of the Trust and the Fund and the Advisor represents and warrants that nothing herein contained is inconsistent with any such documents or requirements. In this connection, the Sub-Advisor acknowledges that the Advisor and the Trust’s Board of Trustees retain ultimate plenary authority over the Fund, including the Allocated Portion, and may take any and all actions necessary and reasonable to protect the interests of shareholders.

10. Reports and Access . The Sub-Advisor agrees to supply such information to the Advisor and to permit such compliance inspections by the Advisor or the Fund as shall be reasonably necessary to permit the administrator to satisfy its obligations and respond to the reasonable requests of the Trustees.

11. Standard of Care, Liability and Indemnification .

(a) The Sub-Advisor shall exercise reasonable care and prudence in fulfilling its obligations under this Agreement.

(b) The Sub-Advisor shall have responsibility for the accuracy and completeness (and liability for the lack thereof) of the statements furnished by the Sub-Advisor for use by the Advisor in the Fund’s offering materials (including the prospectus, the statement of additional information, advertising and sales materials) that pertain to the Sub-Advisor and the investment of the Sub-Advisor’s Allocated Portion of the Fund. The Sub-Advisor shall have no responsibility or liability with respect to other disclosures.

(c) Subject to the following paragraph, the Sub-Advisor shall be liable to the Fund for any loss (including brokerage charges) incurred by the Fund as a result of any investment made by the Sub-Advisor in violation of Section 2 hereof.

(d) Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, in the absence of willful misfeasance, bad faith, gross negligence, or reckless disregard of the obligations or duties hereunder on the part of the Sub-Advisor, the Sub-Advisor shall not be subject to liability to the Advisor, the Trust, or the Fund or to any shareholder of the Fund for any act or omission in the course of, or connected with, rendering services hereunder or for any losses that may be sustained in the purchase, holding or sale of any security by the Fund.

 

-8-


(e) Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, including without limitation paragraphs (c) and (d) above, each, party to this Agreement (as an “Indemnifying Party”), including the Trust on behalf of the Fund, shall indemnify and hold harmless the other party and the shareholders, directors, officers, and employees of the other party (any such person, an “Indemnified Party”) against any loss, liability, claim, damage, or expense (including the reasonable cost of investigating and defending any alleged loss, liability, claim, damage, or expense and reasonable counsel fees incurred in connection therewith) arising out of the Indemnifying Party’s performance or non-performance of any duties under this Agreement provided, however, that nothing herein shall be deemed to protect any Indemnified Party against any liability to which such Indemnified Party would otherwise be subject by reason of willful misfeasance, bad faith, or negligence in the performance of duties hereunder or by reason of reckless disregard of obligations and duties under this Agreement.

If indemnification is to be sought hereunder, then the Indemnified Party shall promptly notify the Indemnifying Party of the assertion of any claim or the commencement of any action or proceeding in respect thereof; provided, however, that the failure so to notify the Indemnifying Party shall not relieve the Indemnifying Party from any liability that it may otherwise have to the Indemnified Party provided such failure shall not affect in a material adverse manner the position of the Indemnifying Party or the Indemnified Party with respect to such claim. Following such notification, the Indemnifying Party may elect in writing to assume the defense of such action or proceeding and, upon such election, it shall not be liable for any legal costs incurred by the Indemnified Party (other than reasonable costs of investigation previously incurred) in connection therewith, unless (i) the Indemnifying Party has failed to provide counsel reasonably satisfactory to the Indemnified Party in a timely manner or (ii) counsel which has been provided by the Indemnifying Party reasonably determines that its representation of the Indemnified Party would present it with a conflict of interest.

The provisions of this paragraph 11(e) shall not apply in any action where the Indemnified Party is the party adverse, or one of the parties adverse, to the other party.

(f) No provision of this Agreement shall be construed to protect any Trustee or officer of the Trust, or officer of the Advisor or the Sub-Advisor, from liability in violation of Sections 17(h) and (i) of the Investment Company Act.

12. Non-Exclusivity; Trading for Sub-Advisor’s Own Account: Code of Ethics . The Advisor’s employment of the Sub-Advisor is not an exclusive arrangement. The Advisor anticipates that it will employ other individuals or entities to furnish it with the services provided for herein. Likewise, the Sub-Advisor may act as investment adviser for any other person, and shall not in any way be limited or restricted from buying, selling, or trading any securities or other instruments for its or their own accounts or the accounts of others for whom it or they may be acting, provided, however, that the Sub-Advisor will adhere to a code of ethics governing employee trading and trading for proprietary accounts that conforms to the requirements of the Investment Company Act and the Investment Advisers Act, a copy of which has been provided to the Board of Trustees of the Trust. It is understood that the Sub-Advisor or its affiliates may take investment action or give advice on behalf of such other clients that differs from investment action taken on behalf of the Allocated Portion.

 

-9-


The Sub-Advisor will make such reports to the Advisor and the Fund as are required by Rule 17j-l and Rule 38a-l under the Investment Company Act. The Sub-Advisor agrees to provide the Advisor and the Fund with any information reasonably required to satisfy the compliance program, code of ethics reporting or disclosure requirements of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and any rules or regulations promulgated by the SEC. To the extent the Sub-Advisor adopts or has adopted a separate code of ethics or amends or has amended its code of ethics to comply with such rules or regulations, the Sub-Advisor shall provide the Advisor with a copy of such code of ethics and any amendments thereto.

13. Term . This Agreement shall become effective upon approval by the Board of Trustees of the Trust and shall remain in effect for a period of two (2) years, unless sooner terminated as hereinafter provided. This Agreement shall continue in effect thereafter for additional periods not exceeding one (1) year so long as such continuation is approved for the Fund at least annually by (i) the Board of Trustees of the Trust or by the vote of a majority of the outstanding voting securities of the Fund and (ii) the vote of a majority of the Trustees of the Trust who are not parties to this Agreement nor interested persons thereof, cast in person at a meeting called for the purpose of voting on such approval, and (iii) the Advisor. The terms “majority of the outstanding voting securities” and “interested persons” shall have the meanings as set forth in the Investment Company Act.

14. Termination; No Assignment .

(a) This Agreement may be terminated at any time without payment of any penalty, by: the Board of Trustees of the Trust or by vote of a majority of the outstanding voting securities of the Fund, upon sixty (60) days’ written notice to the Sub-Advisor and the Advisor. This Agreement also may be terminated at any time, without the payment of any penalty, by the Advisor or the Sub-Advisor upon sixty (60) days’ written notice to the Trust and the other party. In the event of a termination, Sub-Advisor shall cooperate in the orderly transfer of the Fund’s affairs and, at the request of the Board of Trustees, transfer any and all books and records of the Fund maintained by Sub-Advisor on behalf of the Fund.

(b) This Agreement shall terminate automatically in the event of any assignment thereof, as defined in the Investment Company Act.

15. Severability . If any provision of this Agreement shall be held or made invalid by a court decision, statute or rule, or shall be otherwise rendered invalid, the remainder of this Agreement shall not be affected thereby.

16. Captions . The captions in this Agreement are included for convenience of reference only and in no way define or limit any of the provisions hereof or otherwise affect their construction or effect.

 

-10-


17. Governing Law . This Agreement shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of California without giving effect to the conflict of laws principles thereof; provided that nothing herein shall be construed to preempt, or to be inconsistent with, any federal law, regulation or rule, including the Investment Company Act and the Investment Advisers Act and any rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.

18. Nonpublic Personal Information . Notwithstanding any provision herein to the contrary, the Sub-Advisor hereto agrees on behalf of itself and its directors, trustees, shareholders, officers, and employees (1) to treat confidentially and as proprietary information of the Advisor (on behalf of itself and the Fund) and the Trust (a) all records and other information relative to the Fund’s prior, present, or potential shareholders (and clients of said shareholders) and (b) any Nonpublic Personal Information, as defined under Section 248.3 (t) of Regulation S-P (“Regulation S-P”), promulgated under the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act (the “G-L-B Act”), and (2) except after prior notification to and approval in writing by the Advisor or the Trust, not to use such records and information for any purpose other than the performance of its responsibilities and duties hereunder, or as otherwise permitted by Regulation S-P or the G-L-B Act, and if in compliance therewith, the privacy policies adopted by the Advisor and the Fund and communicated in writing to the Sub-Advisor. Such written approval shall not be unreasonably withheld by the Advisor or the Trust and may not be withheld where the Sub-Advisor may be exposed to civil or criminal contempt or other proceedings for failure to comply after being requested to divulge such information by duly constituted authorities.

19. Certifications; Disclosure Controls and Procedures . The Sub-Advisor acknowledges that, in compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and the implementing regulations promulgated thereunder, the Fund is required to make certain certifications and has adopted disclosure controls and procedures. To the extent reasonably requested by the Advisor, the Sub-Advisor agrees to use its best efforts to assist the Advisor and the Fund in complying with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and implementing the Fund’s disclosure controls and procedures. The Sub-Advisor agrees to inform the Fund of any material development related to the Allocated Portion that the Advisor notifies the Sub-Advisor is relevant to the Fund’s certification obligations under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

20. Provision of Certain Information by the Sub-Advisor . The Sub-Advisor will promptly notify the Advisor in writing of the occurrence of any of the following events:

(a) the Sub-Advisor fails to be registered as investment adviser under the Advisers Act or under the laws of any jurisdiction in which the Sub-Advisor is required to be registered as investment adviser in order to perform its obligations under this Agreement;

(b) the Sub-Advisor is served or otherwise receives notice of any action, suit, proceeding, inquiry, or investigation, at law or in equity, before or by any court, public board, or body, involving the affairs of the Advisor or the Fund;

(c) the Sub-Advisor suffers financial impairment which materially interferes with its ability to manage the Allocated Portion or otherwise fulfill its duties under this Agreement;

 

-11-


(d) the Sub-Advisor, its principal officers or its controlling stockholders are the subject of a government investigation or inquiry, administrative proceeding or any other type of legal action which, under the Investment Company Act, would make it ineligible to serve as an investment adviser to an investment company;

(e) a change in the Sub-Advisor’s personnel materially involved in the management of the Allocated Portion; or

(f) a change in control or management of the Sub-Advisor.

21. Confidentiality . The parties to this Agreement shall not, directly or indirectly, permit their respective affiliates, directors, trustees, officers, members, employees, or agents to, in any form or by any means, use, disclose, or furnish to any person or entity, records or information concerning the business of any of the other parties except as necessary for the performance of duties under this Agreement or as required by law, without prior written notice to and approval of the relevant other parties, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld by such other parties. The Advisor agrees not to make use of the investment recommendations of the Sub-Advisor with regard to other investment portfolios, products, clients or prospective clients without the written consent of the Sub-Advisor.

22. Use of Sub-Advisor’s Name and Logo . Neither the Fund nor the Advisor will use the Sub-Advisor’s name or make any statements relating to the Sub-Advisor or its affiliates in any promotional or disclosure materials relating to the Fund until the Sub-Advisor has reviewed and approved the materials prior to their first use. Such approval will not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. Neither the Advisor nor the Fund may use the logo of the Sub-Advisor or any affiliate in any promotional materials without the prior approval of the Sub-Advisor, which the Sub-Advisor may grant or withhold in its sole discretion. Within fifteen (15) days from such time as this Agreement shall no longer be in effect, the Fund shall cease to use such a name or any other name connected with Sub-Advisor.

23. Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in counterparts and by the different parties hereto on separate counterparts, each of which when so executed and delivered, shall be deemed an original and all of which counterparts shall constitute but one and the same agreement.

 

-12-


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be duly executed by their duly authorized officers, all on the day and year first above written.

 

LITMAN/GREGORY FUND ADVISORS, LLC      EVERMORE GLOBAL ADVISORS LLC
BY:  

/s/ John M. Coughlan

     BY:   

/s/ Eric LeGoff

Name:   John M. Coughlan      Name:    Eric LeGoff
Title:   Chief Operating Officer      Title:    President

As a Third Party Beneficiary,

LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST

on behalf of

LITMAN GREGORY MASTERS INTERNATIONAL FUND

 

By:

 

/s/ Jeremy DeGroot

Name:

  Jeremy DeGroot

Title:

  President

 

 

-13-

LITMAN GREGORY F UNDS T RUST

Second Amendment to Restated Contractual Advisory Fee Waiver Agreement

THIS SECOND AMENDMENT TO RESTATED CONTRACTUAL ADVISORY FEE WAIVER AGREEMENT (this “Amendment”), effective as of January 1, 2017, is entered into by and between LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST (the “Trust”), a Delaware statutory trust, and LITMAN GREGORY FUND ADVISORS, LLC, a California limited liability company (the “Advisor,” together with the Trust, the “Parties”).

RECITALS

WHEREAS, the Trust has retained the Advisor to provide investment management advice and services to each series of the Trust (each, a “Fund,” and collectively, the “Funds”) pursuant to the Unified Investment Advisory Agreement, dated as of April 1, 2013, as amended, by and between the Trust and the Advisor (the “Investment Advisory Agreement”);    

WHEREAS, the Parties have entered into the Restated Contractual Advisory Fee Waiver Agreement, dated as of January 1, 2006, as amended (the “Agreement”), pursuant to which the Adviser waives a portion of the advisory fees it is entitled to receive under the Investment Advisory Agreement with respect to certain Funds; and

WHEREAS, the Parties wish to amend the fee waiver rates with respect to the Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund, Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund and Litman Gregory Masters International Fund and the Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund as set forth in Appendix A of the Agreement;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual agreements herein set forth, and for other good and valuable consideration, the adequacy and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the Parties agree as follows:

 

  1. Appendix A to the Agreement is hereby suspended and replaced in its entirety with Appendix A attached to this Amendment.

 

  2. Except as expressly amended by this Second Amendment, the Agreement shall remain unchanged and in full force and effect.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF , the Parties have caused this Second Amendment to be duly executed by their duly authorized officers on one or more counterparts, all on the date and year first above written.

 

LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST

on behalf of its series listed on Appendix A

   LITMAN GREGORY FUND ADVISORS, LLC
By:   

/s/ John M. Coughlan

   By:   

/s/ John M. Coughlan

Name:    John M. Coughlan    Name:    John M. Coughlan
Title:    Chief Operating Officer    Title:    Chief Operating Officer


Appendix A

FUND AND WAIVER SCHEDULE – LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST

(updated January 1, 2017)

 

Fund

  

Fee Waiver Rate

•       Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund

   Such percentage rate of the daily net assets of the Fund so that after payment of all sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee retained by the Advisor is 0.40% of the daily net assets of the Fund

•       Litman Gregory Masters International Fund

   Such percentage rate of the daily net assets of the Fund so that after payment of all sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee retained by the Advisor is 0.40% of the daily net assets of the Fund on the first $1 billion of daily net assets and 0.30% of Fund assets in excess of $1 billion (1).

•       Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund

   Such percentage rate of the daily net assets of the Fund so that after payment of all sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee retained by the Advisor is 0.26% of the daily net assets of the Fund

•       Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund

   Such percentage rate of the daily net assets of the Fund so that after payment of all sub-advisory fees, the net advisory fee retained by the Advisor is 0.50% of the first $2 billion of daily net assets, 0.40% of the next $1 billion of daily net assets, 0.35% of the next $1 billion of daily net assets and 0.30% of Fund assets in excess of $4 billion.

 

(1) For example: The Fund’s advisory fee is 1.10% of the Fund’s daily net assets. Assuming payment of sub-advisory fees of 0.56% of the Fund’s daily net assets, on the first $1 billion of the Fund’s daily net assets, the Advisor will waive a portion of its fee equal to 0.14% of the Fund’s daily net assets and retain a net advisory fee equal to 0.40% of the Fund’s daily net assets. Assuming payment of sub-advisory fees of 0.56% of the Fund’s daily net assets, on assets in excess of $1 billion, the Advisor will waive a portion of its fee equal to 0.24% of the Fund’s daily net assets and retain a net advisory fee equal to 0.30% of the Fund’s daily net assets.


LITMAN GREGORY FUNDS TRUST

on behalf of its series listed above

   LITMAN GREGORY FUND ADVISORS, LLC
By:   

/s/ John M. Coughlan

   By:   

/s/ John M. Coughlan

Name:    John M. Coughlan    Name:    John M. Coughlan
Title:    Chief Operating Officer    Title:    Chief Operating Officer

LOGO

1(415) 856-7007

davidhearth@paulhastings.com

April 28, 2017

VIA EDGAR

Litman Gregory Funds Trust

1676 N. California Blvd., Suite 500

Walnut Creek, California 94596

Re:    Litman Gregory Funds Trust—File Nos. 333-10015 and 811-07763

Ladies and Gentlemen:

We hereby consent to the inclusion of our law firm’s name as counsel to the Litman Gregory Funds Trust (the “Registrant”), as shown in Post-Effective Amendment No. 64 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form N-1A.

Very truly yours,

/s/ David A. Hearth

David A. Hearth

for PAUL HASTINGS LLP

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We hereby consent to the incorporation by reference in this Registration Statement on Form N-1A of our report dated February 27, 2017, relating to the financial statements and financial highlights of Litman Gregory Funds Trust comprising Litman Gregory Masters Equity Fund, Litman Gregory Masters International Fund, Litman Gregory Masters Smaller Companies Fund, and Litman Gregory Masters Alternative Strategies Fund, for the year ended December 31, 2016, and to the references to our firm under the headings “Financial Highlights” in the Prospectus and “General Information” and “Financial Statements” in the Statement of Additional Information.

 

/s/ Cohen & Company, Ltd.

Cleveland, Ohio

April 24, 2017

LOGO

ALPS Code of Ethics

Dated: May 1, 2010

Amended Last: September 30, 2016*

 

* September 30, 2016 amendments are deemed non-material amendments to the Code


LOGO

 

Table of Contents

 

Introduction

     3  

Applicability

     4  

General Standards of Business Conduct

     8  

Conflicts of Interest

     8  

Protecting Confidential Information

     8  

Insider Trading and Tipping

     9  

Limitation on Trading Activities

     9  

Excess Trading

     10  

Front Running

     10  

Gifts and Entertainment

     10  

Improper Payments or Rebates

     11  

Service on a Board of Directors/Outside Business Activities

     11  

Political Contributions

     12  

Personal Securities Transactions – Restrictions & Reporting Requirements

     13  

Access Persons

     13  

Investment Persons

     16  

Sanctions

     21  

Reporting Forms

     25  

Appendix A – Broker/Dealers with Electronic Feeds (updated June 30, 2016)

     25  

Appendix B – Sub-Advisers to ALPS Advisors, Inc. (updated June 30, 2016)

     26  

 

2


LOGO

 

Introduction

This Code of Ethics (“Code”) has been adopted by ALPS Holdings, Inc. and applies to its subsidiaries and affiliates (collectively referred to herein as “ALPS”). The Code is designed to comply with Rule 204A-1 under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 (“Advisers Act”) and Rule 17j-1 under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “1940 Act”). By adopting and adhering to a code that meets the applicable requirements under the Advisers Act and 1940 Act, it is intended that ALPS employees who are deemed to be Access Persons and/or Investment Persons, will not also be subject to duplicative reporting requirements under various other codes for Fund Companies for which they may serve as an officer or are otherwise deemed to be an Access Person. However, all such persons should check with each company’s Compliance or Legal representatives to confirm their status.

ALPS and its employees are subject to certain laws and regulations governing personal securities trading. This Code also sets forth procedures and limitations which govern personal securities transactions. Employees who are also registered with the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”) as a Registered Representative may have additional requirements and/or restrictions in addition to those described herein. Those Registered Representatives should consult their Written Supervisory Procedures for additional requirements.

ALPS and its employees are prohibited from engaging in fraudulent, deceptive or manipulative conduct. The Code is designed to reinforce ALPS’ reputation for integrity by avoiding even the appearance of impropriety in the conduct of our business. This Code was developed to promote the highest standards of behavior and ensure compliance with applicable laws.

Employees are required to report any known violations of the Code to the Chief Compliance Officer of ALPS Fund Services, Inc. (“AFS CCO”). This includes violations that come to your attention that may have been inadvertent and/or violations that other employees may have committed. The AFS CCO (or his designee) will promptly investigate the matter and take action if needed. There will be no retribution against any employee for making such a report, and every effort will be made to protect the identity of the reporting employee. There may be additional provisions for reporting violations that are covered under the firm’s Whistle Blower Policy and employees should make themselves familiar with this policy or consult with AFS’ CCO.

Employees should be aware that they may be held personally liable for any improper or illegal acts committed during their course of employment, and that “ignorance of the law” is not a defense. All ALPS employees are expected to read the Code carefully and observe and adhere to its guidance at all times. Failure to comply with the provisions of the Code may result in serious sanctions including, but not limited to: disgorgement of profits, dismissal, substantial personal liability and referral to law enforcement agencies or other regulatory agencies. Employees should also understand that a material breach of the provisions of the Code may constitute grounds for disciplinary action, including termination of employment with ALPS.

The provisions of the Code are not all-inclusive. Rather, they are intended as a guide for employees of ALPS in their conduct. In those situations where an employee may be uncertain as to the intent or purpose of the Code, he/she is advised to consult with the AFS CCO. The AFS CCO may grant exceptions to certain provisions contained in the Code, only in those situations when it is clear beyond dispute that the interests of our Clients will not be adversely affected or compromised. All questions arising in connection with personal securities trading should be resolved in favor of the Client, even at the expense of the interests of employees.

The AFS CCO will periodically report to senior management/board of directors of ALPS and the respective fund boards where ALPS serves in the capacity of investment adviser and/or distributor to document compliance or non-compliance with this Code. Each employee is responsible for knowing their responsibilities under the Code. Employees should retain a copy of the Code in their records for future reference. Any questions regarding the Code should be directed to the AFS CCO.

 

3


LOGO

 

Applicability

ALPS Employees

This Code is applicable to all ALPS employees. This includes full-time, part-time, benefited and non-benefited, officers, directors, exempt and non-exempt personnel. Additionally, each new employee’s offer letter will include a copy of the Code of Ethics and a statement advising the individual that he/she will be subject to the Code of Ethics if he/she accepts the offer of employment. Employees with access to certain information (as determined by their job position or as so designated by the AFS CCO) may also be deemed to be “Access Persons” or “Investment Persons.” Each such distinction has specific restrictions, limitations, reporting requirements and other policies and procedures that apply to persons defined as such. All ALPS employees have an obligation to promptly notify the Compliance Department if there is a change to their duties, responsibilities or title which affects their reporting status under the code.

Family Members and Related Parties

The Code applies to the accounts of applicable employees, his/her spouse or domestic partner, his/her minor children, his/her immediate family members residing in the same household as the employee (e.g. adult children or parents living at home), and any relative, person or entity for whom the employee directs the investments. Joint account holders will also be included if an ALPS employee is one of the joint account holders (Please refer to the definition of an “account”).

Contractors and Consultants

ALPS contractor/consultant/temporary employee contracts may include the Code as an addendum, and each contractor/consultant/temporary employee may be required to sign an acknowledgement that he/she has read the Code and will abide by it. Certain sections, such as those pertaining to the pre-clearance and reporting provisions, may be excepted.

 

4


LOGO

 

Definitions

Access Person - “Access Person” shall mean any Director, Trustee, Officer, Partner, Investment Person, or Employee of ALPS Holdings Inc. or its affiliates, who:

 

    has access to non-public information regarding any Clients’ Securities Transactions, or non-public information regarding the portfolio holdings of any fund(s) of a Client or any ALPS fund(s) or fund(s) of an affiliate;

 

    is involved in making Securities Transactions recommendations to Clients, or has access to such recommendations that are non-public;

 

    in connection with his or her regular functions or duties, makes, participates in or obtains information regarding a Fund’s Securities Transactions or whose functions relate to the making of any recommendations with respect to a Fund Securities Transactions;

 

    obtains information regarding a Fund’s Securities Transactions or whose functions relate to the making of any recommendations with respect to a Fund’s Securities Transactions; or

 

    any other person designated by the AFS CCO or the Ethics Committee has having access to non-public information.

Account - “Account” shall mean any accounts of any employee which includes accounts of the employee’s immediate family members (any relative by blood or marriage) living in the employee’s household, and any account in which he or she has a direct or indirect beneficial interest, such as trusts and custodial accounts or other accounts in which the employee has a beneficial interest or exercises investment discretion. Some accounts may be subject to restrictions, please refer to Restricted Accounts definition below.

Automatic Investment Plan - “Automatic Investment Plan” means a program in which regular periodic purchases (or withdrawals) are made automatically in (or from) investment accounts in accordance with a predetermined scheduled and allocation. An Automatic Investment Plan includes a dividend reinvestment plan.

Beneficial Ownership - For purposes of the Code, “Beneficial Ownership” shall be interpreted in the same manner as it would be in Rule 16a-1(a)(2) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (“Exchange Act”) in determining whether a person is subject to the provisions of Section 16 under the Exchange Act and the rules and regulations there under. Generally speaking, beneficial ownership encompasses those situations where the beneficial owner has the right to enjoy some economic benefits which are substantially equivalent to ownership regardless of who is the registered owner. This would include, but is not limited to:

 

    securities which a person holds for his or her own benefit either in bearer form, registered in his or her own name or otherwise, regardless of whether the securities are owned individually or jointly;

 

    securities held in the name of a member of his or her immediate family sharing the same household;

 

    securities held by a trustee, executor, administrator, custodian or broker;

 

    securities owned by a general partnership of which the person is a member or a limited partnership of which such person is a general partner;

 

    securities held by a corporation which can be regarded as a personal holding company of a person; and

 

    securities recently purchased by a person and awaiting transfer into his or her name.

Chief Compliance Officer (“CCO”) - The CCO referred to herein as the AFS CCO is Cory Gossard, so designated by ALPS Fund Services, Inc. The CCO referred to herein as the AAI CCO is Erin Nelson, so designated by ALPS Advisors, Inc.

 

5


LOGO

 

Client – The term “Client” shall include any investment company or any unregistered fund (e.g. hedge fund, limited partnership) who has a business relationship with ALPS and/or for whom ALPS performs a business service. Please refer to the Compliance Department Intranet Web Page for a current listing of Clients.

Client Funds – The term “Client Funds” as used within this Code, refers to any funds (open-end, closed-end, Exchange-Traded Funds, Unit Investment Trusts) of ALPS’ Clients. Please refer to the Compliance Department Intranet Web Page for a current listing of Client Funds.

Covered Associate – “Covered Associate” shall mean any employee that is required to comply with the provisions under Rule 206(4)-5 of the Advisers Act as well as the Political Contributions Policy within ALPS Advisors, Inc.’s Compliance Program. A person is generally considered to be a covered associate for these purposes:

 

    if he or she is a President, managing director, VP in charge of a business unit and any other employee who performs a policy-making function of ALPS Advisors, Inc. (“AAI”);

 

    if he or she is an employee who solicits a government entity for AAI and such employee’s direct or indirect supervisor;

 

    a political action committee controlled by AAI or by any of AAI’s covered associates; or

 

    any other AAI employee so designated by the CCO of AAI. (“AAI CCO”).

Covered Securities – For purposes of the Code, “Covered Securities” will include all Securities (as defined below). In addition, “Covered Securities” will also include all Client Funds (as defined above) or any equivalents in local non-US jurisdictions, single stock futures and both the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”), and Commodity Futures Trading Commission (“CFTC”) regulated futures.

Employee “Employee” shall include all employees of ALPS Holdings, Inc. and its affiliates, including directors, officers, partners of AAI (or other persons occupying similar status), any temporary worker, contractor, or independent contractor if so designated by the AFS CCO or the Ethics Committee.

Financial Institution – For purposes of the Code, “Financial Institution” refers to: broker, dealer, trust company, record keeper, bank, transfer agent or other financial firm holding and/or allowing securities transactions in Covered Securities.

Foreign Official – the term “Foreign Official” includes:

 

    government officials;

 

    political party leaders;

 

    candidates for office;

 

    employees of state-owned enterprises (such as state-owned banks or pension plans); and

 

    relatives or agents of a Foreign Official if a payment is made to such relative or agent of a Foreign Official with the knowledge or intent that it ultimately would benefit the Foreign Official.

Fund Transactions – For purposes of the Code, “Fund Transactions” refers to any transactions of the Fund itself. It does not include “Securities Transactions” of an employee (Securities Transactions are defined below).

Investment Persons – “Investment Person” shall mean any Access Person (within ALPS) who makes investment decisions for AAI or Clients, who provides investment related information or advice to portfolio managers, or helps to execute and/or implement a portfolio manager’s decisions. This typically includes for example, portfolio managers, portfolio assistants, traders, and securities analysts.

 

6


LOGO

 

Registered Representative – The term “Registered Representative” as used within this Code, refers to an employee who holds a securities license, and is actively registered, with FINRA.

Restricted Accounts – Employees are restricted from establishing external managed accounts (also referred to as a discretionary account) with any adviser that conducts business with ALPS Advisors, Inc. A managed account is defined as an investment account that is owned by an individual investor but is managed by a hired professional money manager. Investment in a hedge fund is not deemed to be managed account. See Appendix B for a list of advisers that work with AAI.

Securities – For purposes of the Code, “Security” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 2(a)(36) of the 1940 Act. This definition of “Security” includes, but is not limited to: any note, stock, treasury stock, bond, debenture, evidence of indebtedness, certificates of interest or participation in any profit-sharing agreement, any put, call, straddle, option or privilege on any Security or on any group or index of Securities, or any put, call, straddle, option or privilege entered into on a national securities exchange relating to foreign currency, any exchange-traded vehicle (including, but not limited to, closed-end mutual funds, exchange-traded notes and exchange-traded funds). Further, for the purpose of the Code, “Security” shall include any commodity contracts as defined in Section 2(a)(1)(A) of the Commodity Exchange Act. This definition includes but is not limited to futures contracts on equity indices. For purposes of the Code, any derivative of a “Security” shall also be considered a Security.

“Security” shall not include direct obligations of the government of the United States or any other sovereign country or supra-national agency, bankers’ acceptances, bank certificates of deposit, commercial paper and high quality short-term debt instruments, including repurchase agreements, variable and fixed insurance products.

Securities Transactions – The term “Securities Transactions” as used within this Code typically refers to the purchase and/or sale of Securities, (as defined herein), by an employee. Securities Transactions shall include any gift of Covered Securities that is given or received by the employee, including any inheritance received that includes Covered Securities.

 

7


LOGO

 

General Standards of Business Conduct

All employees are subject to, and expected to abide by the Code, including, but not limited to the General Standards of Business Conduct and all reporting requirements outlined herein. The following activities are prohibited. Persons who violate any reporting requirement or prohibition may be required to pay a monetary fine and/or disgorge any profits realized in connection with such violation to a charitable organization selected by the Ethics Committee and may be subject to other sanctions imposed by the Ethics Committee, as outlined in the Sanctions section of the Code.

No employee may cause ALPS or a Client to take action, or to fail to take action, for personal benefit, rather than to benefit ALPS or such Client. For example, a person would violate this Code by causing a Client to purchase securities owned by the Access Person for the purpose of supporting or increasing the price of that security or by causing a Client to refrain from selling securities in an attempt to protect a personal investment, such as an option on that security.

Employees may not use knowledge of Fund Transactions or Securities Transactions made or contemplated by ALPS or Clients to profit, or cause others to profit, by the market effect of such transactions.

Employees have an obligation to safeguard material non-public information regarding ALPS and its Clients. Accordingly, employees may not disclose current Fund Transactions or Securities Transactions made or contemplated or any other non-public information to anyone outside of ALPS, without approval from the AFS CCO or the Ethics Committee.

Employees may not engage in fraudulent conduct in connection with the purchase or sale of securities, including without limitation:

 

    Employing any device, scheme or artifice to defraud;

 

    Making any untrue statement of material fact or omitting to state to a material fact necessary in order to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which they are made, misleading;

 

    Engaging in any act, practice or course of business which operates or would operate as a fraud or deceit;

 

    Engaging in any manipulative practice; and

 

    Investing in derivatives to evade the restrictions of this Code. Accordingly, individuals may not use derivatives to take positions in securities that would be otherwise prohibited by the Code if the positions were taken directly.

Conflicts of Interest

Employees may not act on behalf of ALPS in any transaction involving other persons or organizations with whom they may have any financial or any other connection without prior approval from the AFS CCO. It is the responsibility of each employee to avoid participation in such situations or, if avoidance is not possible, to deal with any conflicts in a fair and ethical manner. If personal interest might affect an employee’s ability to represent ALPS as they would in an unbiased “arms length” transaction, the employee should remove them self from the transaction.

Protecting Confidential Information

Employees may receive information about ALPS, its Clients and other parties that, for various reasons, should be treated as confidential. All employees are expected to strictly comply with measures necessary to preserve the confidentiality of the information. Refer to ALPS Corporate Security Policy, Technology Resources Acceptable Use Policy, and Identity Theft Prevention Program for additional information.

 

8


LOGO

 

Insider Trading and Tipping

The misuse of material nonpublic information, or inside information, constitutes a fraud under the securities laws of the United States and many other countries. Fraudulent misuse of inside information includes buying or selling securities while in possession of material nonpublic information for an employee or employee-related account, a proprietary account or for the account of any Client. Fraudulent misuse of inside information also includes disclosing or tipping such information to someone else who then trades on it, or using such information as a basis for recommending the purchase or sale of a security. Information is material when it has market significance and there is a likelihood that a reasonable investor would consider the information important in deciding whether to buy or sell the securities of the company involved. It is nonpublic if it has not been broadly disseminated.

In no event, may any employee who receives inside information use that information to trade or recommend securities affected by such information for personal benefit, the benefit of ALPS or any affiliate or the benefit of a third party. More specifically:

 

    No employee may, while in possession of inside information affecting a security, purchase or sell such security for the account of such employee, a Client or any other person or entity;

 

    No employee may disclose inside information to any person outside of ALPS. However, discussions with legal counsel and disclosures authorized by ALPS or the Client in furtherance of a related project or transaction are permitted; and

 

    No employee may recommend or direct the purchase from or sale of a security to anyone while in the possession of inside information, however obtained.

Limitation on Trading Activities

In certain situations, rules regarding trading activities are more complex. Some DST stock transactions are prohibited altogether.

Transactions that are prohibited by this Policy

Short sales

Employees may never engage in a short sale of DST’s securities. A short sale is a sale of securities the seller does not own or, if owned, is not delivered against the sale within 20 days (a short sale against the box) . Short sales of DST’s securities show the seller’s expectation that the securities will decline in value. Therefore, these sales signal to the market that the seller has no confidence in DST or its short-term prospects. In addition, short sales may reduce the seller’s incentive to improve DST’s performance. For these reasons, short sales of DST securities are not permitted.

Option trades

Employees may not take part in certain option trades that become more profitable as stock declines in value. Employees may not:

 

    Purchase a put option on DST securities

 

    Write a call option on DST securities

Hedging transactions

Employees must not enter into hedging transactions, as these transactions may permit the employee to continue to own DST securities without the full risks and rewards of ownership. When that occurs, the employee may no longer have the same objectives as other DST stockholders. For that reason, employees must not enter into prepaid variable forward contracts, equity swaps, collars and exchange funds or other similar hedging or monetization transactions involving DST stock.

 

9


LOGO

 

Margin accounts and pledges

Holding DST securities as collateral in margin accounts and pledges of DST securities are not permitted.

Excess Trading

While active personal trading may not in and of itself raise issues under applicable laws and regulations, we believe that a very high volume of personal trading can be time consuming and can increase the possibility of actual or apparent conflicts with portfolio transactions. Accordingly, an unusually high level of personal trading activity is strongly discouraged and may be monitored by the Compliance Department to the extent appropriate for the category of person, and a pattern of excessive trading may lead to the taking of appropriate action under the Code.

Front Running

Employees may not engage in “front running,” that is, the purchase or sale of securities for their own accounts on the basis of their knowledge of a Fund’s trading positions or plans. Trading activity will be monitored by Compliance Department to the extent appropriate for the category of person.

Gifts and Entertainment

All employees are required to follow the standards below regarding the receipt of or the giving of gifts and entertainment with respect to Clients and Vendors:

 

    Employees should avoid any excessive or disreputable entertainment that would reflect unfavorably on ALPS or its Clients;

 

    Employees may not offer or accept cash or its equivalent as a gift;

 

    Employees may recognize that promotional gifts such as those that bear the logo of a company’s name or that routinely are made available to the general public are generally acceptable business gifts (and are not required to be reported unless the estimated value exceeds $250);

 

    Employees may not accept any gift or bequest under a will or trust from a Client of ALPS; and

 

    Employees who are also registered with FINRA as a Registered Representative may have additional requirements and/or restrictions that are different than these policies. These polices do not override any requirements of FINRA.

For purposes of the Code, the gifts and entertainment limit will be $250.00/ person in any 12-month period (the “Gifts and Entertainment Limit”) or the local equivalent. Meals and beverages associated with legitimate business purposes for all employees, including Investment Persons, are excluded from the Gifts and Entertainment Limit, provided that they are reasonable and are not repetitive in nature. Except as noted below for Investment Persons, employees will be required on a quarterly basis to disclose via ALPS’ electronic Code of Ethics monitoring portal, Schwab Compliance Technologies, all gifts and entertainment received, regardless of whether it falls under the Gifts and Entertainment Limit.

Except as noted below for Investment Persons, in order for an employee to accept or give a gift or entertainment above the Gifts and Entertainment Limit, he/she must obtain pre-approval from the AFS CCO, or designee, via Schwab Compliance Technologies.    

 

10


LOGO

 

Section 17(e)(1) of the 1940 Act states that “[i]t shall be unlawful for any affiliated person of a registered investment company, or any affiliated person of such person . . . acting as agent, to accept from any source any compensation (other than a regular salary or wages from such registered company) for the purchase or sale of any property to or for such registered company or any controlled company thereof, except in the course of such person’s business as an underwriter or broker.” Under section 2(a)(3)(E) of the 1940 Act, a fund’s investment adviser is an affiliated person of the fund. Under section 2(a)(3)(D), the investment adviser’s officers, directors and employees, among others, are affiliated persons of the investment adviser and are second-tier affiliates of the fund. The prohibition in section 17(e)(1) generally applies whenever fund advisory personnel, acting as agent, accept from any source any compensation (other than regular salary or wages from the fund) for the purchase or sale of any property to or for the fund.

In order to comply with Section 17(e)(1) of the 1940 Act, Investment Persons must pre-clear with their immediate supervisor and the AAI CCO or designee all gifts and entertainment received from a broker-dealer, including those that fall within the Gifts and Entertainment Limit but excluding meals and beverages associated with a legitimate business purpose, via Schwab Compliance Technologies.

Improper Payments or Rebates

Associates must not offer or receive gratuities, bribes, kickbacks, or improper rebates from public officials, officials of foreign governments, competitors or suppliers.

Pursuant to the Foreign Corruption Practices Act (“FCPA”), employees are prohibited from making or offering to make any payment to or for the benefit of any Foreign Official if the purpose of such payment is to improperly influence or induce that Foreign Official to obtain or retain business for the company (a so-called bribe or kickback). All payments, whether large or small, are prohibited if they are, in essence, bribes or kickbacks, including:

 

    cash payments;

 

    gifts;

 

    entertainment;

 

    services; and

 

    amenities.

If an employee is unsure about whether he/she are being asked to make an improper payment, he/she should not make the payment. Employees must promptly report to the AFS CCO any request made by a Foreign Official for a payment that would be prohibited under the guidelines set above and any other actions taken to induce such a payment. If you have any questions or need any guidance, please contact the AFS CCO.

Service on a Board of Directors/Outside Business Activities

All employees are required to comply with the following provisions:

 

    Employees are to avoid any business activity, outside employment or professional service that competes with ALPS or conflicts with the interests of ALPS or its Clients.

 

    An employee is required to obtain the approval from the AFS CCO before becoming a director, officer, partner or sole proprietor of a “for profit” organization. The request for approval should disclose the name of the organization, the nature of the business, whether any conflicts of interest could reasonably result from the association, whether fees, income or other compensation will be earned and whether there are any relationships between the organization and ALPS.

 

11


LOGO

 

    Employees may not accept any personal fiduciary appointments such as administrator, executor or trustee other than those arising from family or other close personal relationships.

 

    Employees may not use ALPS resources, including computers, software, proprietary information, letterhead and other property in connection with any employment or other activity outside ALPS.

 

    Employees must disclose to the Compliance Department a conflict of interest or the appearance of a conflict with ALPS or Clients and discuss how to control the risk.

When completing the Annual Certification acknowledging receipt and understanding of the Code of Ethics, employees may be asked to disclose all outside affiliations. Any director/trustee positions with public companies or companies likely to become public are prohibited without prior written approval of the AFS CCO.

Political Contributions

All political activities of employees must be kept separate from employment and expenses may not be charged to ALPS. Employees may not use ALPS facilities for political campaign purposes.

All employees who are deemed Covered Associates are required to comply with the provisions under Rule 206(4)-5 of the Advisers Act as well as the Political Contributions Policy within AAI’s Compliance Program. A person is generally considered to be a Covered Associate for these purposes:

 

    if he or she is a President, managing director, VP in charge of a business unit and any other employee who performs a policy-making function of AAI;

 

    if he or she is an employee who solicits a government entity for AAI and such employee’s direct or indirect supervisor;

 

    a political action committee controlled by AAI or by any of AAI’s Covered Associates; or • any other AAI employee so designated by the AAI CCO.

Spouses and household family members of each Covered Associate are also subject to the provisions under Rule 206(4)-5 and this Political Contribution Policy, including pre-approval and reporting requirements.

Covered Associates are prohibited from making political contributions on behalf of AAI or individually in their capacity as a covered associate unless their contribution is within the de minimis exception. The de minimis exception permits contributions according to the following guidelines:

 

    Up to $350 per candidate per election cycle, to incumbents or candidates for whom they are eligible to vote

 

    Up to $150 per candidate per election cycle, to other incumbents or candidates

Covered Associates will be required to obtain a pre-approval for all political contributions, including but not limited to those noted above.

On a quarterly basis, the AAI CCO or designee will request a reporting of political contributions during the previous quarter by all Covered Associates. The reporting should include contributions by spouses, household family members and all contributions by other parties (lawyers, affiliated companies, acquaintances, etc.) directed by the Covered Associate. The report should include the individual or election committee receiving the contribution, the office for which the individual is running, the current elected office held, if any, the dollar amount of the contribution or value of the donated item and whether or not the Covered Associate is eligible to vote for the candidate. The Covered Associate report must be completed within 30 days of each quarter end so that if an inadvertent political contribution (of $350.00 or less) has been made to an official for whom the Covered Associate is not entitled to vote, the contributor may be required to request the return of the contribution in order to avoid the two year compensation ban against AAI.

 

12


LOGO

 

Personal Securities Transactions – Restrictions & Reporting Requirements

Access Persons

Trading Restrictions

Initial Public Offering (“IPO”) - Access Persons are prohibited from acquiring securities through an allocation by the underwriter of an initial public offering (“IPO”). Exceptions may be made with prior written disclosure to and written approval from the AFS CCO, whereby an Access Person could acquire shares in an IPO of his/her employer.

Limited or Private Offerings - Access Persons are prohibited from purchasing securities in a private offering unless the purchase is approved in writing by the AFS CCO. Private placements include certain co-operative investments in real estate, commingled investment vehicles such as hedge funds, and investments in family owned businesses. Time-shares and cooperative investments in real estate used as a primary or secondary residence are not considered to be private placements.

Investment Clubs - Access Persons are prohibited from participating in investment clubs unless such membership is approved in writing by the AFS CCO.

Short-Term Trading - Access Persons investing in any “Client Funds” are subject to a sixty (60) calendar day holding period. The following funds are exempt from these requirements: money market funds; short-term income funds; and any non-proprietary ETFs (non-proprietary means ALPS is not the investment adviser for the ETF).

Excess Trading - While active personal trading may not in and of itself raise issues under applicable laws and regulations, a very high volume of personal trading can be time consuming and can increase the possibility of actual or apparent conflicts with portfolio transactions. Accordingly, an unusually high level of personal trading activity is strongly discouraged and may be monitored by the Compliance Department to the extent appropriate for the category of person, and a pattern of excessive trading may lead to the taking of appropriate action under the Code.

Front Running - Access Persons may not engage in “front running,” that is, the purchase or sale of securities for their own accounts on the basis of their knowledge of a Fund’s trading positions or plans.

Material Nonpublic Information - Access Persons possessing material nonpublic information regarding any issuer of securities must refrain from purchasing or selling securities of that issuer until the information becomes public or is no longer considered material.

Account Restrictions

Managed Accounts – Access Persons are restricted from establishing an external managed account (also referred to as a discretionary account) with any adviser that conducts business with ALPS Advisors, Inc. See Appendix B for a list of advisers that work with AAI.

 

13


LOGO

 

Reporting Requirements

Access Persons are subject to the following Initial, Quarterly and Annual Reporting requirements unless specifically exempted by Rule 204A-1 or 17j-1.

All Covered Securities are subject to the reporting requirements of the Code. The following securities are exempt from the reporting requirements:

 

    Transactions made in an account where the employee, pursuant to a valid legal instrument, has given full investment discretion to an unaffiliated/unrelated third party

 

    Direct Obligations of any sovereign government or supra-national agency;

 

    Bankers’ acceptances, bank certificates of deposit, commercial paper and high quality short-term debt instruments, including repurchase agreements;

 

    Investments in dividend reinvestment plans;

 

    Variable and fixed insurance products;

 

    Non-Client open-end mutual funds; and

 

    Employee Retirement Income Security Act (ERISA) Plans, except if held in a self-directed brokerage account or if any Covered Securities are held in the Plan.

 

  a. Initial Holdings Reports for Access Persons

Within ten (10) calendar days of being designated as, or determined to be, an Access Person (which may be upon hire), each such person must provide the Compliance Department with a statement of all Covered Securities holdings and financial accounts. More specifically, each such person must provide the following information:

 

    The title, number of shares and principal amount of each Covered Security in which the employee had any direct or indirect Beneficial Ownership when the person became an employee;

 

    The name of any financial institution with whom the employee maintained an account in which any securities were held for the direct or indirect benefit of the employee as of the date the person became an employee; and

 

    The date the report is submitted by the employee.

 

  b. Duplicate Statements/Electronic Feeds

All new employees and any new account(s) opened by existing employees after April 1, 2015 shall be limited to the financial institutions listed in Appendix A – Broker/Dealers with Electronic Feeds of the Code.

If an account is held with a financial institution that does not supply electronic feeds to ALPS, new employees who are deemed an Access Person will have 30 calendar days to close the existing account and are asked to only open an account with a firm listed in Appendix A of the Code.

Existing employees hired prior to April 1, 2015, who are deemed an Access Person, with existing accounts can maintain those accounts and continue satisfying their quarterly reporting requirements in the system as they have in the past. However, existing employees will only be allowed to open any new accounts with financial institutions listed in Appendix A of the Code.

 

14


LOGO

 

  c. Quarterly Transaction Reports

Each Access Person is required to submit quarterly his/her Quarterly Securities Report within thirty (30) calendar days of each calendar quarter end to the Compliance Department. If no transactions were executed or if transactions were exempt from reporting, this should be noted on the quarterly report.

Specific information to be provided includes:

1. With respect to any Securities Transaction* during the quarter in a Covered Security in which any employee had any direct or indirect beneficial ownership:

 

    The date of the transaction, the title, the interest rate and maturity date (if applicable), the number of shares and the principal amount of each Security involved;

 

    The nature of the transaction, (i.e., purchase, sale, or other type of acquisition or disposition);

 

    The price of the Security at which the transaction was effected;

 

    The name of the financial institution with or through which transaction was effected; and

 

    The date that the report is submitted by the employee.

 

* Transactions effected pursuant to an Automatic Investment Plan need not be reported in the Quarterly Securities Report but holdings in Covered Securities are subject to the annual holdings reporting requirement discussed below.

2. With respect to any account established by the Access Person in which any securities were held during the quarter for the direct or indirect benefit of the Access Person:

 

    The name of the financial institution with whom the employee established the account;

 

    The date the account was established; and

 

    The date the report is submitted by the employee.

 

  d. Annual Holdings Reports

Each Access Person is required to submit annually (i.e., once each and every calendar year) a list of applicable holdings, which is current as of a date no more than forty five (45) calendar days before the report is submitted. In addition, each employee is required to certify annually that he/she has reviewed and understands the provisions of the Code.

Specific information to be provided includes:

 

    The title, number of shares and principal amount of each Covered Security in which the employee had any direct or indirect beneficial ownership;

 

    The name of any financial institution with whom the employee maintains an account in which any securities are held for the direct or indirect benefit of the employee; and

 

    The date that the report is submitted by the employee.

 

15


LOGO

 

Investment Persons

Trading Restrictions

Initial Public Offering (“IPO”) - Investment Persons are prohibited from acquiring securities through an allocation by the underwriter of an initial public offering (“IPO”). Exceptions may be made with prior written disclosure to and written approval from the AFS CCO, whereby an Investment Person could acquire shares in an IPO of his/her employer.

Limited or Private Offerings - Investment Persons are prohibited from purchasing securities in a private offering unless the purchase is approved in writing by the AFS CCO. Private placements include certain co-operative investments in real estate, commingled investment vehicles such as hedge funds, and investments in family owned businesses. Time-shares and cooperative investments in real estate used as a primary or secondary residence are not considered to be private placements.

Investment Clubs - Investment Persons are prohibited from participating in investment clubs unless such membership is approved in writing by the AFS CCO.

Options - Investment Persons are not prohibited from buying or selling options on Covered Securities, however all other trading restrictions such as limitations on short-term and excess trading and pre-clearance apply to Investment Persons buying, selling or exercising options.

Short-Term Trading - Investment Persons are prohibited from the purchase and sale or sale and purchase of the same Covered Securities within thirty (30) calendar days. In addition, Client Funds are subject to a sixty (60) calendar day holding period. The following funds are exempt from these requirements: money market funds; short-term income funds; and any non-proprietary ETFs (non-proprietary means ALPS is not the investment adviser for the ETF).

Blackout Period – Blackout periods may be determined and established by the AFS CCO. Any such periods will be communicated to all affected persons as necessary.

Excess Trading - While active personal trading may not in and of itself raise issues under applicable laws and regulations, a very high volume of personal trading can be time consuming and can increase the possibility of actual or apparent conflicts with portfolio transactions. Accordingly, an unusually high level of personal trading activity is strongly discouraged and may be monitored by the Compliance Department to the extent appropriate for the category of person, and a pattern of excessive trading may lead to the taking of appropriate action under the Code.

Front Running - Investment Persons may not engage in “front running,” that is, the purchase or sale of securities for their own accounts on the basis of their knowledge of a Fund’s trading positions or plans.

Material Nonpublic Information – Investment Persons possessing material nonpublic information regarding any issuer of securities must refrain from purchasing or selling securities of that issuer until the information becomes public or is no longer considered material.

Shorting of Securities - Investment Persons are not prohibited from the practice of short selling securities, however all other trading restrictions such as limitations on short-term and excess trading and pre-clearance apply to Investment Persons shorting of securities.

Restricted List - Investment Persons of Red Rocks Capital, LLC (“Red Rocks”) may not purchase or sell any security that Red Rocks holds or is being considered for purchase or sale by the Red Rocks Research Department for any account in which he/she has any beneficial interest. The list of Restricted Securities (the “Restricted List”) includes the Red Rocks Listed Private EquitySM Universe of securities and their subsidiaries.

 

16


LOGO

 

Account Restrictions

Managed Accounts – Investment Persons are restricted from establishing an external managed account (also referred to as a discretionary account) with any adviser that conducts business with ALPS Advisors, Inc. See Appendix B for a list of advisers that work with AAI. See Appendix B for a list of advisers that work with AAI.

Pre-Clearance

Unless the investment transaction is exempted from pre-clearance requirements all Investment Persons must request and receive pre-clearance prior to engaging in the purchase or sale of a Covered Security.

Pre-clearance approval is only good until midnight local time of the day after approval is obtained. “Good-till-Cancelled” orders are not permitted. “Limit” orders must receive pre-clearance every day the order is open.

As there could be many reasons for pre-clearance being granted or denied, Investment Persons should not infer from the pre-clearance response anything regarding the security for which pre-clearance was requested.

Exempted Securities/Transactions

Pre-clearance by Investment Persons is not required for the following transactions:

 

    Transactions that meet the de minimis exception (defined below);

 

    Transactions made in an account where the employee, pursuant to a valid legal instrument, has given full investment discretion to an unaffiliated/unrelated third party;

 

    Purchases or sales of direct obligations of the government of the United States or other sovereign government or supra-national agency, high quality short-term debt instruments, bankers acceptances, certificates of deposit (“CDs”), commercial paper, repurchase agreements.

 

    Automatic investments in programs where the investment decisions are non-discretionary after the initial selections by the account owner (although the initial selection requires pre-clearance);

 

    Investments in dividend reinvestment plans;

 

    Exercised rights, warrants or tender offers;

 

    General obligation municipal bonds;

 

    Transactions in Employee Stock Ownership Programs (“ESOPs”);

 

    Securities received via a gift or inheritance; and

 

    Non-Client open-end mutual funds.

De Minimis Exception

A “de minimis transaction” is a personal trade that meets the following conditions: (a) less than $25,000; and (b) is made with no knowledge that a Client Fund have purchased or sold the Covered Security, or the Client Fund or its investment adviser considered purchasing or selling the Covered Security. Notwithstanding the foregoing, transactions that fall under the de minimus exception should not be so frequent and repetitive in nature that in totality the transactions appear to be improperly avoiding the intent of the de minimus exception. The AAI CCO may require an Investment Person to pre-clear transactions regardless of if the transaction falls under the de minimus exception should the AAI CCO deem reasonable and appropriate. Further, transactions effected pursuant to the de minimis exception remain subject to reporting requirements of the Code.

 

17


LOGO

 

Serving on a Board of Directors

Investment Personnel may not serve on the board of directors of a publicly traded company without prior written authorization from the Ethics Committee. No such service shall be approved without a finding by the Ethics Committee that the board service would be consistent with the interests of Clients. If board service is authorized by the Ethics Committee, in some instances, it may be required that the Investment Personnel serving as a Director may be isolated from making investment decisions with respect to the company involved through the use of “Chinese Walls” or other procedures.

Reporting Requirements

Investment Persons are subject to the following Initial, Quarterly and Annual Reporting requirements unless specifically exempted by Rule 204A-1 or 17j-1.

All Covered Securities are subject to the reporting requirements of the Code. The following securities are exempt from the reporting requirements:

 

    Transactions made in an account where the employee, pursuant to a valid legal instrument, has given full investment discretion to an unaffiliated/unrelated third party

 

    Direct Obligations of any sovereign government or supra-national agency;

 

    Bankers’ acceptances, bank certificates of deposit, commercial paper and high quality short-term debt instruments, including repurchase agreements;

 

    Investments in dividend reinvestment plans;

 

    Variable and fixed insurance products;

 

    Non-Client open-end mutual funds; and

 

    Employee Retirement Income Security Act (ERISA) Plans except if held in a self-directed brokerage account or if any Covered Securities are held in the Plan. Examples of ERISA Plans include 401(k) Plans, Employee Stock Ownership Plans, 403(b) Plans.

 

  a. Initial Holdings Reports for Investment

Within ten (10) calendar days of being designated as, or determined to be, an Investment Person (which may be upon hire), each such person must provide the Compliance Department with a statement of all Covered Securities holdings and brokerage accounts. More specifically, each such person must provide the following information:

 

    The title, number of shares and principal amount of each Covered Security in which the employee had any direct or indirect Beneficial Ownership when the person became an employee;

 

    The name of any financial institution with whom the employee maintained an account in which any securities were held for the direct or indirect benefit of the employee as of the date the person became an employee; and

 

    The date the report is submitted by the employee.

 

18


LOGO

 

  b. Duplicate Statements/ Electronic Feeds

All new employees and any new account(s) opened by existing employees after April 1, 2015 shall be limited to the financial institutions listed in Appendix A – Broker/Dealers with Electronic Feeds of the Code.

If an account is held with a financial institution that does not supply electronic feeds to ALPS, new employees who are deemed an Investment Person will have 30 calendar days to close the existing account and are asked to only open an account with a firm listed in Appendix A of the Code.

Existing employees hired prior to April 1, 2015, who are deemed an Investment Person, with existing accounts can maintain those accounts and continue satisfying their quarterly reporting requirements in the system as they have in the past. However, existing employees will only be allowed to open any new accounts with financial institutions listed in Appendix A of the Code.

 

  c. Quarterly Transaction Reports

Each Investment Person is required to submit quarterly his/her Quarterly Securities Report within thirty (30) calendar days of each calendar quarter end to the Compliance Department. If no transactions were executed or if transactions were exempt from reporting, this should be noted on the quarterly report.

Specific information to be provided includes:

1. With respect to any Securities Transaction* during the quarter in a Covered Security in which any employee had any direct or indirect beneficial ownership:

 

    The date of the transaction, the title, the interest rate and maturity date (if applicable), the number of shares and the principal amount of each Security involved;

 

    The nature of the transaction, (i.e., purchase, sale, or other type of acquisition or disposition);

 

    The price of the Security at which the transaction was effected;

 

    The name of the financial institution with or through which transaction was effected; and

 

    The date that the report is submitted by the employee.

 

* Transactions effected pursuant to an Automatic Investment Plan need not be reported in the Quarterly Securities Report but holdings in Covered Securities are subject to the annual holdings reporting requirement discussed below.

2. With respect to any account established by the employee in which any securities were held during the quarter for the direct or indirect benefit of the employee:

 

    The name of the financial institution with whom the employee established the account;

 

    The date the account was established; and

 

    The date the report is submitted by the employee.

 

19


LOGO

 

  d. Annual Holdings Reports

Each Investment Person is required to submit annually (i.e., once each and every calendar year) a list of applicable holdings, which is current as of a date no more than forty five (45) calendar days before the report is submitted. In addition, each employee is required to certify annually that he/she has reviewed and understands the provisions of the Code.

Specific information to be provided includes:

 

    The title, number of shares and principal amount of each Covered Security in which the employee had any direct or indirect beneficial ownership;

 

    The name of any financial institution with whom the employee maintains an account in which any securities are held for the direct or indirect benefit of the employee; and

 

    The date that the report is submitted by the employee.

 

20


LOGO

 

Sanctions

Upon discovering a violation of this Code by an employee or his/her family member or related party, the AFS CCO may impose such sanctions as he/she deems appropriate, including, among other things, the following:

 

    A letter of censure to the violator;

 

    A monetary fine levied on the violator;

 

    Suspension of the employment of the violator;

 

    Termination of the employment of the violator;

 

    Civil referral to the SEC or other civil regulatory authorities determined by ALPS; or

 

    Criminal referral – determined by ALPS.

Examples of possible sanctions include, but are not limited to:

 

    A verbal warning, warning letter, with a copy to the employee’s direct report, for a first time pre-clearance or reporting violation;

 

    Monetary fines and disgorgement of profits when an employee profits on the purchase of a security he/she should not have purchased or redeemed; and

 

    Recommendation for suspension or termination if an employee is a serial violator of the Code.

Violations and proposed sanctions will be documented by the Compliance Department and will be submitted to the AFS CCO (or his designee) for review and approval. In some cases, the Code of Ethics Committee may assist in determining the materiality of the violation and appropriate sanctions. Records of all reviews are the responsibility of and will be maintained by the Compliance Department.

In determining the materiality of the violation, reviewers may consider:

 

    Indications of fraud, neglect or indifference to Code of Ethics provisions;

 

    Evidence of violation of law, policy or guideline;

 

    Frequency of repeat violations;

 

    Level of influence of the violator;

 

    Any mitigating circumstances that may exist.

In assessing the appropriate penalties, other factors considered may include:

 

    The extent of harm (actual or potential) to client interests;

 

    The extent of personal benefit or profit;

 

    Prior record of the violator;

 

    The degree to which there is a personal benefit or perceived benefit from unique knowledge obtained through employment with ALPS;

 

    The level of accurate, honest and timely cooperation from the violator; and

 

    Any mitigating circumstances that may exist.

Appeals Process

If an employee decides to appeal a sanction, he/she should contact the AFS CCO who will refer the issue to the Ethics Committee for their review and consideration.

 

21


LOGO

 

Compliance and Supervisory Procedures

The AFS CCO or his designee is responsible for implementing supervisory and compliance review procedures. Supervisory procedures can be divided into two classifications: prevention of violations and detection of violations. Compliance review procedures include preparation of special and annual reports, record maintenance and review and confidentiality preservation.

Prevention of Violations

To prevent violations of the Rules, the AFS CCO or his/her designee should, in addition to enforcing the procedures outlined in the Rules:

 

  1. Review and update the procedures as necessary, at least once annually, including but not limited to a review of the Code by the AFS CCO, the Ethics Committee and/or counsel;

 

  2. Answer questions regarding the Code;

 

  3. Request from all persons upon commencement of services, and annually thereafter, any applicable forms and reports as required by the procedures;

 

  4. Identify all Access Persons and Investment Persons, and notify them of their responsibilities and reporting requirements;

 

  5. With such assistance from the Human Resources Department as may be appropriate, maintain a continuing education program consisting of the following:

 

    Orienting employees who are new to ALPS and the Rules; and

 

    Further educating employees by distributing memos or other materials that maybe issued by outside organizations such as the Investment Company Institute which discuss the issue of insider trading and other issues raised by the Rules.

Detection of Violations

To detect violations of these procedures, the AFS CCO, or designee, should, in addition to enforcing the policies, implement procedures to review holding and transaction reports, forms and statements relative to applicable restrictions, as provided under the Code.

Compliance Procedures

Reports of Potential Deviations or Violations

Upon learning of a potential deviation from or violation of the policies, the AFS CCO shall either present the information at the next regular meeting of the Ethics Committee or conduct a special meeting. The Ethics Committee shall thereafter take such action as it deems appropriate (see Penalty Guidelines).

Annual Reports

The AFS CCO shall prepare a written report to the Ethics Committee and Senior Management at least annually. The written report shall include any certification required by Rule 17j-1. This report shall set forth the following information:

 

    Copies of the Code, as revised, including a summary of any changes made since the last report;

 

22


LOGO

 

    Identification of any material issues including material violations requiring significant remedial action since the last report;

 

    Identification of any material conflicts arising since the last report; and

 

    Recommendations, if any, regarding changes in existing restrictions or procedures based upon experience under these Rules, evolving industry practices, or developments in applicable laws or regulations.

Records

Compliance Department shall maintain the following records:

 

    A copy of this Code and any amendment thereof which is or at any time within the past five years has been in effect;

 

    A record of any violation of this Code, or any amendment thereof, and any action taken as a result of such violation;

 

    Files for personal securities account statements, all reports and other forms submitted by employees pursuant to these Rules and any other pertinent information;

 

    A list of all persons who are, or have been, required to submit reports pursuant to this Code;

 

    A list of persons who are, or within the last five years have been responsible for, reviewing transaction and holdings reports; and

 

    A copy of each report produced pursuant to this Code.

Inspection

The records and reports maintained by the Compliance Department pursuant to the Rules shall at all times be available for inspection, without prior notice, by any member of the Ethics Committee.

Confidentiality

All procedures, reports and records monitored, prepared or maintained pursuant to this Code shall be considered confidential and proprietary to ALPS and shall be maintained and protected accordingly. Except as otherwise required by law or this Code, such matters shall not be disclosed to anyone other than to members of the Ethics Committee or the Compliance Department, as requested.

The Ethics Committee

The purpose of this section is to describe the Ethics Committee. The Ethics Committee was created to provide an effective mechanism for monitoring compliance with the standards and procedures contained in the Rules and to take appropriate action at such times as violations or potential violations are discovered.

Membership of the Ethics Committee

The Committee consists of the Chief Compliance Officer(s) of ALPS Portfolio Solutions Distributor, Inc., ALPS Distributors, Inc., ALPS Advisors, Inc., and ALPS Fund Services, Inc., the Human Resources Director of ALPS Fund Services, Inc., the President(s) of ALPS Fund Services, Inc., ALPS Advisors, Inc., ALPS Portfolio Solutions Distributor, Inc. and ALPS Distributors, Inc., and the Chief Operating Officer of ALPS Fund Services, Inc.

 

23


LOGO

 

The AFS CCO. currently serves as the Chairman of the Committee. The composition of the Committee may be changed from time-to-time and the Committee may seek input of other employees concerning matters related to this Code as they deem appropriate.

Committee Meetings

The Committee shall meet approximately every six months, or as often as necessary, to review operation of this Code and to consider technical deviations from operational procedures, inadvertent oversights or any other potential violation of the Rules. Deviations alternatively may be addressed by including them in the employee’s personnel records maintained by ALPS. Committee meetings are primarily intended for consideration of the general operation of the compliance procedures as well as for substantive or serious departures from the standards and procedures in the Rules.

Other persons may attend a Committee meeting, at the discretion of the Committee, as the Committee shall deem appropriate. Any individual whose conduct has given rise to the meeting may also be called upon, but shall not have the right, to appear before the Committee. It is not required that minutes of Committee meetings be maintained; in lieu of minutes the Committee may issue a report describing any action taken. The report shall be included in the confidential file maintained by the AFS CCO with respect to the particular employee whose conduct has been the subject of the meeting.

If a Committee member has committed, or is the subject of, a violation, he or she shall not be considered a voting member of the Committee or be involved in the review or decisions of the Committee with respect to his or her activities, or sanctions.

Special Discretion

The Committee shall have the authority by unanimous action to exempt any person or class of persons or transaction or class of transactions from all or a portion of the Rules provided that:

 

    The Committee determines, on advice of counsel, that the particular application of all or a portion of the Code is not legally required;

 

    The Committee determines that the likelihood of any abuse of the Code by such exempted person(s) or as a result of such exempted transaction is remote;

 

    The terms or conditions upon which any such exemption is granted is evidenced in writing; and

 

    The exempted person(s) agrees to execute and deliver to the AFS CCO, at least annually, a signed Acknowledgment Form, which Acknowledgment shall, by operation of this provision, describe such exemptions and the terms and conditions upon which it was granted.

The Committee shall also have the authority by unanimous action to impose such additional requirements or restrictions as it, in its sole discretion, determines appropriate or necessary, as outlined in the Penalty Guidelines.

Any exemption, and any additional requirement or restriction, may be withdrawn by the Committee at any time (such withdrawal action is not required to be unanimous).

 

24


LOGO

 

Reporting Forms

Appendix A – Broker/Dealers with Electronic Feeds (updated June 30, 2016)

 

  Charles Schwab

 

  Edward Jones

 

  E-Trade

 

  Fidelity

 

  Internactive Brokers

 

  Merrill Lynch

 

  Morgan Stanley

 

  OptionsXpress

 

  RBC Capital Markets

 

  Scottrade

 

  TD Ameritrade

 

  UBS

 

  Vanguard

 

  Wells Fargo

 

25


LOGO

 

Appendix B – Sub-Advisers to ALPS Advisors, Inc.(updated June 30, 2016)

 

  Amundi Smith Breeden, LLC

 

  Aristotle Capital Management, LLC

 

  Clough Capital Partners, LP

 

  Concise Capital Management, LP

 

  CoreCommodity Management, LLC

 

  Congress Asset Management Company

 

  Delaware Investment Fund Advisers

 

  Kotak Mahindra (UK) Limited

 

  Morningstar Investment Management LLC

 

  Principal Real Estate Investors, LLC

 

  Pzena Investment Management, LLC

 

  Red Rocks Capital, LLC

 

  RiverFront Investment Group, LLC

 

  RiverNorth Capital Management, LLC

 

  Sound Point Capital Management, LP

 

  Stadion Money Management, LLC

 

  Sterling Global Strategies, LLC

 

  Sustainable Growth Advisers, LP

 

  TCW Investment Management Company

 

  Weatherbie Capital, LLC

 

  Wellington Management Company, LLP

 

  Westport Resources Management, Inc.

Revised as of July 1, 2016

 

26

LOGO

MODIFIED TO REMOVE THE CONTENT RELATED EXCLUSIVELY TO THORNBURG INVESTMENT TRUST

March 2017

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL

Pursuant to Rules 206(4)-7 and 38(a)-1

THORNBURG INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT, INC.


THORNBURG INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT

Code of Business Conduct and Ethics

March 2016

Policy Objectives

Honesty and integrity are hallmarks of Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. (“TIM”). TIM has a fiduciary obligation to its Investment Clients, and seeks the highest standards of ethics and conduct in all of its business relationships.

This Code has been adopted by TIM pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1), (2), (4) and (5) of Rule 204A-1 under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 with the objectives of deterring wrongdoing and promoting (1) honest and ethical conduct, including the ethical handling of actual or apparent conflicts of interest between personal and professional relationships, (2) full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosure in reports and documents which TIM files with the Securities and Exchange Commission and in other public communications made by TIM, (3) compliance with applicable governmental laws, rules and regulations, (4) prompt internal reporting of violations of this Code, and (5) accountability for adherence to this Code.

This Code, together with the separately adopted Personal Securities Transactions Policy, is intended to comprise TIM’s code of ethics described in Rule 204A-1 under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940.

All records and reports created or maintained pursuant to this Code are intended solely for the internal use of TIM, are confidential, and in no event constitute an admission by any person as to any fact, circumstance or legal conclusion.

This Code is intended to function and harmonize with the Thornburg Investment Trust Code of Business Conduct and Ethics. Where appropriate or necessary, specific sections of this Code include a coordinating provision referencing the appropriate section of the Thornburg Investment Trust Code of Business Conduct and Ethics.

Please see the Glossary of Terms for definitions of terms used in this Code.

Compliance with Laws, Rules and Regulations

As a registered investment adviser, TIM is subject to regulation by the Securities and Exchange Commission, and compliance with federal, state and local laws. TIM insists on strict compliance with the spirit and the letter of these laws and regulations. TIM expects its Supervised Persons to comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to its operation and business. Supervised Persons should seek guidance whenever they are in doubt as to the applicability of any law, rule or regulation regarding any contemplated course of action. TIM holds information and training sessions to promote compliance with laws, rules and regulations, including insider trading laws. Please consult the various guidelines and policies which TIM has prepared in accordance with specific laws and regulations. A good guideline, if in doubt on a course of action, is to always ask first, act later – if you are unsure of what to do in any situation, seek guidance before you act.

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. / Thornburg Investment Trust

Policies and Procedures Manual

 

2


Whistleblowing/Reporting Fraudulent, Illegal or Unethical Activity

All Supervised Persons are required to report suspected fraudulent, illegal, or other unethical activity (including violations of this Code) to his or her supervisor immediately. Supervisors who are notified of any such activity must immediately report it to TIM’s Chief Compliance Officer. Anyone who does not feel comfortable reporting this activity to the relevant supervisor may instead contact TIM’s Chief Compliance Officer. No TIM employee shall take any disciplinary or retaliatory action against any individual for acting in good faith, reporting, or causing to be reported, violations of this Code or fraudulent, illegal, or unethical activity occurring at TIM, Thornburg Investment Trust or Thornburg Securities Corporation (or for assisting in an authorized investigation of such activity), whether such reporting is internal or involves any federal government agency, as described below. This prohibition against disciplinary action does not extend to disciplinary action for self-reported violations.

TIM has established an anonymous Contact Compliance form on the Thornburg intranet: https://www.gothornburg.com/compliance/contact . An employee may also send a hard copy report anonymously to the Chief Compliance Officer via inter office mail.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this Code or any employment agreement with TIM prohibits any Supervised Person from reporting possible violations of federal law or regulation to any government agency or entity, including but not limited to the Department of Justice, the SEC at the Office of the Whistleblower, or any agency Inspector General, or making other disclosures protected under the whistleblower provisions of federal law or regulation. Supervised Persons do not need the prior authorization of TIM to make such reports or disclosures and are not required to notify TIM if he or she makes such reports or disclosures.

SEC Office of the Whistleblower Telephone: 202.551.4790

Conflicts of Interest

Each Supervised Person shall be scrupulous in avoiding any conflict of interest with regard to TIM’s interest. A conflict of interest occurs when an individual’s private interest interferes with the interests of TIM or its Investment Clients. A conflict situation can arise when a Supervised Person pursues interests that prevent the individual from performing his or her duties for TIM or an Investment Client objectively and effectively. Conflicts of interest also arise when a Supervised Person or member of the individual’s family receives undisclosed, improper benefits as a result of the individual’s positions with TIM. Any conflict of interest that arises in a specific situation or transaction, including Reportable Outside Business Activities as discussed below, must be disclosed by the individual and approved in writing by the Compliance Department before taking any action.

Matters involving a conflict of interest are prohibited as a matter of policy, except when approved by TIM’s president or Chief Compliance Officer. Conflicts of interest may not always be evident, and individuals should consult with higher levels of management or legal counsel if they are uncertain about any situation. In no event, however, shall investment in any security made in accordance with TIM’s Policy on Personal Securities Transactions (or comparable policy or code then in effect) be considered a conflict of interest with TIM.

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. / Thornburg Investment Trust

Policies and Procedures Manual

 

3


Comment: This section relating to conflicts of interest is substantially similar to the comparable section in the Thornburg Investment Trust Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, but Supervised Persons should recognize that (i) the Trust’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics governs conflicts with interest of the Trust, rather than TIM and its Clients, and (ii) the procedures for reporting and resolving conflict under the Trust’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics is different from the Procedure under this Code. If an interest of the Supervised Person appears to conflict with an interest of the Trust and TIM), the Supervised Person should make a disclosure and seek any approval under the Trust’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics.

Obtaining Prior Approval for Outside Business Activities . Prior to engaging in any Reportable Outside Business Activity, a Supervised Person must complete and submit an “Outside Business Activity Disclosure Form” (obtained from Compliance or TIM’s intranet) to the Compliance Department, and receive written approval from the Compliance Department. Failure to obtain such written approval may result in disciplinary action up to and including termination. On an annual basis, all Supervised Persons will be required to certify their Reportable Outside Business Activities.

Family Member Serving as a Director of a Public Company . Supervised Persons must disclose to Compliance any immediate family member (a child, stepchild, grandchild, parent, stepparent, grandparent, spouse, sibling, mother-in-law, father-in-law, son-in-law, daughter-in-law, brother-in-law, or sister-in-law, and shall include adoptive relationships) sharing the same household who serves as a director of a public company.

Corporate Opportunities

Supervised Persons shall not take for themselves personally opportunities that are discovered through the use of their position with TIM, except with the approval of TIM’s President or Chief Compliance Officer. Supervised Persons of TIM owe a duty to TIM to advance its legitimate interests when the opportunity to do so arises. In no event, however, shall investment in any security made in accordance with TIM’s Policy on Personal Securities Transactions (or comparable policy or code then in effect) be considered a business opportunity of TIM.

Comment: This section relating to corporate opportunities is substantially the same as the comparable section on the Thornburg Investment Trust Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, but Supervised Persons should recognize that (i) the Trust’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics governs opportunities of the Trust, rather than TIM, and (ii) the procedures for reporting and obtaining an approval under the Trust’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics is different from the procedure under this Code. If an opportunity appears to relate both to the business of the Trust and TIM, the Supervised Person should make disclosure and seek any approval under the Trust’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics.

Confidentiality

Supervised Persons shall exercise care in maintaining the confidentiality of any confidential information respecting TIM or its Investment Clients, except when disclosure is authorized or legally mandated. Supervised Persons should consult with TIM’s Chief Compliance Officer or legal counsel if they believe that have a legal obligation to disclose confidential information. Confidential information includes nonpublic information of TIM that may be helpful to competitors, or otherwise harmful to TIM, or its

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. / Thornburg Investment Trust

Policies and Procedures Manual

 

4


Investment Clients. Confidential information also includes information respecting the portfolio holdings of Investment Clients (including particularly Investment Company Clients). The obligation to preserve confidentiality of this information continues after association with TIM ends.

Comment: Attention is directed to the Internal Confidentiality and Privacy Protections Policy, which appears in TIM’s Manual of Policies and Procedures, and which was adopted by TIM to protect the nonpublic personal information of the Investment Clients of TIM and the shareholders of Thornburg Investment Trust. This section respecting confidentiality is substantially the same as the comparable section in the Thornburg Investment Trust Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, except that a specific reference is made to information respecting portfolio holdings of Investment Clients.

Fair Dealing

Supervised Persons should endeavor to deal fairly with Investment Clients, service providers and competitors, and shall not seek unfair advantage through improper concealment, abuse of improperly acquired confidential information, misrepresentation of material facts when the other party is known by the Supervised Persons to rely justifiably on the individual to disclose those facts truthfully, or improper and unfair dealing.

Foreign Corrupt Practices Act

The Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (the “ FCPA ”) strictly prohibits unauthorized facilitation payments to government officials of foreign countries, including the payment of any money or anything of value to a foreign official for the purposes of:

 

    Influencing any act or decision of a foreign official in his or her official capacity (including, but not limited to, obtaining approval for government issued permits, licenses or work visas);

 

    Inducing a foreign official to perform or abstain from performing any act in violation of the foreign official’s lawful duty;

 

    Securing any improper business advantage; or

 

    Inducing a foreign official to use his or her official influence with a foreign government (or instrumentality thereof) to affect or influence any act or decision of such government in order to assist the inducer in obtaining or retaining business with the government, or directing such business to any person.

In addition, many foreign countries have rules and regulations restricting gifts to people who are employed by the government of that country. TIM intends to fully comply with all of those rules and regulations. If you are at all uncertain about the applicability of the FCPA, or similar laws, to any entertainment, gift or anything of value to any non-U.S. official, consult a Compliance Officer.

Business Gifts and Entertainment

The purpose of business entertainment and gifts in a commercial setting is to create goodwill and sound working relationships, not to gain unfair advantage. No gift or entertainment should ever be offered, given, provided or accepted by any Supervised Person in connection with TIM’s business unless it (1) is

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. / Thornburg Investment Trust

Policies and Procedures Manual

 

5


consistent with customary business practices, (2) is not excessive in value, (3) cannot be construed as a bribe, payoff or kickback, (4) does not violate any laws or regulations and (5) is pre-cleared by Compliance if a government affiliated person (defined below) is involved, directly or indirectly. Receipt of gifts or entertainment by Firm personnel involved in the purchase or sale of registered investment company property that satisfies the criteria herein will not be deemed to be compensation for the purchase or sale of property as prohibited under Section 17(e)(1) of the Investment Company Act of 1940.

No Supervised Person shall provide to, or accept from, any client or prospective client, or person or entity that does or seeks to do business with or on behalf of TIM, more than $100 worth of gifts per year (this limit does not include nominal logo/promotional items). No Supervised Person may give or accept cash or cash equivalent gifts – gift cards that are not exchangeable for cash, are not considered “cash equivalents.” Supervised Persons may provide to, or accept from, any client or prospective client, or person or entity that does or seeks to do business with or on behalf of TIM, a business entertainment event such as a dinner, golf outing, theater or sporting event if the person or entity providing the entertainment is present and as long as the event is not extravagant or excessive so as to give the appearance of impropriety. Meals provided in TIM’s office, a client’s office, or in a similar business setting, shall not be deemed entertainment and TIM does not require Access Persons to report these activities in their quarterly reports, as described below.

On a quarterly basis, all Access Persons will be required to report by midnight on the last day of the second month after quarter end, all entertainment and gifts that were given and received within the previous quarter.

Gifts and Entertainment to Government Affiliated Persons . In addition to the restrictions noted above, no gift, entertainment or any other thing of value may be given, directly or indirectly, to any government affiliated person unless the giving of such thing of value is pre-approved by Compliance. A “ government affiliated person” includes, but is not limited to, any person affiliated with a governmental plan or a governmental entity, at any jurisdictional level. “Anything of value” is very broadly defined and includes, but is not limited to, logo/promotional items, meals (regardless of setting), drinks, business entertainment events, including participation in Thornburg campus seminars/events, and tickets to any type of event.

Political Contributions and Political Activity

Several federal and state regulations seek to prevent so-called “pay to play” practices by investment advisors, such as when an investment advisor makes campaign contributions to an elected official in order to influence the award of advisory contracts to manage government investment accounts. Many of these regulations restrict the ability of an investment advisor’s directors, officers and employees to make or solicit political contributions.

In order to avoid a violation of these regulations, all Supervised Persons are prohibited from any of the following activities, whether done individually or in the name of TIM, unless prior approval has been obtained from TIM’s Chief Compliance Officer or another person designated by TIM’s Chief Compliance Officer. If, after considering all relevant factors, the Chief Compliance Officer or his designee determines that the proposed activity will not violate applicable regulations, then the Chief Compliance Officer or his designee shall approve the proposed activity. In making these determinations, the Chief Compliance Officer or his designee may consult with other persons, including TIM’s president and legal counsel.

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. / Thornburg Investment Trust

Policies and Procedures Manual

 

6


  1. Making a gift, subscription, loan, advance or deposit of money, or giving anything else of value (each, a “ Contribution ”), to an incumbent, candidate or successful candidate for elective office of any State of the United States or political subdivision of a State of the United States.

 

  2. Making a Contribution to a political action committee, political party or other entity organized to fund the political activities of an incumbent, candidate or successful candidate for elective office of any State of the United States or political subdivision of a State of the United States.

 

  3. Working on behalf of an incumbent, candidate or successful candidate for elective office of any State of the United States or political subdivision of a State of the United States (e.g., volunteering on a political campaign), unless such work occurs outside of your normal working hours with TIM and involves no use of TIM’s resources (e.g., TIM’s office space or telephones).

 

  4. Coordinating or soliciting any person (including a family member) or political action committee to make a Contribution to an incumbent, candidate or successful candidate for elective office of any State of the United States or political subdivision of a State of the United States, or to a state or local political party (e.g., hosting a fundraising event on behalf of any such candidate).

 

    Comment: Attention is also directed to TIM’s Third-Party Marketer Policy, which places certain restrictions on the ability of TIM to use a third party to solicit clients.

 

  5. Doing indirectly anything which the preceding four numbered paragraphs would prohibit the Supervised Person from doing directly

 

    Comment: Examples of the types of indirect actions which are prohibited include, but are not limited to, (a) a Supervised Person could not form his own political action committee and make Contributions through that political action committee which the Supervised Person would be prohibited from making in his own name; (b) a Supervised Person could not funnel Contributions through third parties, such as attorneys, family members, friends or affiliated companies; (c) making a contribution to a charitable organization at the request of an incumbent, candidate or successful candidate for elective office of any State of the United States or political subdivision of a State of the United States, if the purpose in making such a contribution is to induce that incumbent, candidate or successful candidate to provide investment advisory business to TIM.

If you have any questions about these restrictions on political contributions and political activities, please contact TIM’s Chief Compliance Officer or, in his/her absence, another member of the Compliance Department, before making the political contribution or participating in the political activity.

Protection and Proper Use of Firm Assets

All Supervised Persons should endeavor to protect the assets of TIM and its Investment Clients, and pursue their efficient investment in accordance with TIM’s business purposes. Any suspected incident of fraud or theft should be immediately reported for investigation as hereinafter described under the caption “Administration and Enforcement of the Code.”

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. / Thornburg Investment Trust

Policies and Procedures Manual

 

7


The obligation of Supervised Persons to protect the assets of TIM includes its proprietary information. Proprietary information includes intellectual property such as trademarks and copyrights, as well as business, marketing and service plans, databases, records, salary information, unpublished financial data and reports. Unauthorized use or distribution of this information violates this Code.

Insider Trading

All Supervised Persons should pay particular attention to potential violations of insider trading laws. Insider trading (also referred to as “trading on material nonpublic information,” and which may include giving inside information to other persons) is both unethical and illegal, and will be dealt with if it occurs. Supervised Persons are expected to familiarize themselves with the Policy on Insider Trading, adopted by TIM. If they have questions about these guidelines, they should consult with TIM’s president, the Chief Compliance Officer, or TIM’s legal counsel before making any trade for TIM or any personal trade, and before giving information to other persons.

Comment: Attention is directed to TIM’s Policy on Insider Trading, which appears in Compliance’s Manual of Policies and Procedures.

Administration and Enforcement of the Code

Certification

Each newly hired Supervised Person of TIM will be provided a copy of the Code. Each such individual must certify in writing within 30 days that they have received a copy of the Code, read and understand all provisions of the Code, and agree to comply with the applicable terms of the Code. TIM will provide its Supervised Persons with any amendments to the Code and will require all such individuals to certify in writing that they have received, read and understand the amendments. Each year the Chief Compliance Officer will conduct an annual meeting with Supervised Persons to review the Code. Supervised Persons will annually certify that they have read, understood and complied with the Code, that they have made all of the reports required by the Code and have not engaged in any prohibited conduct.

Reporting Violations

All Supervised Persons are required to promptly report any actual, apparent or suspected violations of the Code to the Chief Compliance Officer. If the Chief Compliance Officer or another compliance officer is not available the individual should report the violation to their immediate supervisor who is then responsible for reporting it to the Chief Compliance Officer. All reports will be treated confidentially to the extent permitted by law and investigated promptly.

Sanctions

Upon discovering a violation of this Policy, TIM may impose such sanctions as it deems appropriate, including, but not limited to, a letter of censure, fine, suspension or termination of the violator’s employment.

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. / Thornburg Investment Trust

Policies and Procedures Manual

 

8


Glossary

Access Person” means:

i. Any director or officer of TIM.

ii. Any Supervised Person of TIM, unless, in the Chief Compliance Officer’s sole discretion, a particular Supervised Person does not have ongoing access to the Companies’ headquarters or information systems.

iii. Individuals who are registered with the FINRA as an associated person of Thornburg Securities Corporation.

iv. Any director, officer, general partner or employee of any company in a Control relationship with TIM who, in connection with their regular functions or duties, make, participate in, or obtain information regarding the purchase or sale of Securities by any Investment Client, or whose functions relate to the making of any recommendations with respect to those purchases or sales.

v. Any natural person who is in a Control relationship with TIM and who obtains information concerning recommendations made to any Investment Client with regard to the purchase or sale of Securities by the Investment Client.

“Chief Compliance Officer” means, for purposes of this Code, TIM’s chief compliance officer. “Fund” means any series of Thornburg Investment Trust or any other Investment Company as to which TIM is an investment adviser or sub-adviser.

“Investment Client” means any person with whom TIM has a contract to perform discretionary investment management services, including any series of an Investment Company.

“Investment Company” means a company registered as such under the Investment Company Act of 1940.

Investment Company Client” means any Investment Company (or series thereof ) as to which TIM is an investment adviser or investment sub-adviser.

“Policy on Personal Securities Transactions” means TIM’s written policy of that name, as revised from time to time. This Policy can be found in TIM’s Manual of Policies and Procedures.

“Reportable Outside Business Activity” means any activity wherein aTIM Supervised Person acts as an employee, independent contractor, sole proprietor, officer, director or partner of another person, or is compensated, or has a reasonable expectation of compensation, from any other person as a result of any business activity outside the scope of their relationship with the TIM or TSC

“Supervised Person” means any director, managing director, officer (or other person occupying a similar status or performing functions similar to any of those persons) or employee of TIM, and any other persons who are subject to TIM’s supervision and control.

“Trust” means Thornburg Investment Trust.

“TSC ” means Thornburg Securities Corporation.

Thornburg Investment Management, Inc. / Thornburg Investment Trust

Policies and Procedures Manual

 

9

Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

LOGO

WELLS CAPITAL MANAGEMENT, INC.

CODE OF ETHICS

Policy on Personal Securities Transactions

and Trading

January 11, 2016


Introduction

The Code of Ethics and Policy on Personal Securities Transactions and Trading on Insider Information set forth herein apply to Wells Capital Management, Inc. and related entities as follows:

1. Wells Capital Management, Incorporated (“WellsCap”), an SEC registered investment adviser based in San Francisco, California.

2. Wells Fargo Bank, N.A., an SEC registered investment adviser based in Singapore conducting advisory business as Wells Capital Management Singapore.

3. Metropolitan West Capital Management, LLC (“MetWest”), an SEC registered investment adviser based in Newport Beach, California.

4. First International Advisors (“FIA”), an SEC and FCA registered investment adviser based in London, England.

5. ECM Asset Management (“ECM”), an SEC and FCA registered investment adviser based in London, England.

Where the Code of Ethics references WellsCap, it applies to all the entities listed. Unless otherwise noted within the Code, all sections apply to entities noted above.

The policies set out in this document apply to all Access Persons of the Covered Companies listed above. Access Persons not based in the United States must also comply with any local regulations related to personal account dealing and in the event that local requirements are stricter than the firm’s policy, the local regulations will take precedence.

Wells Capital Management, Inc. (WellsCap) is referred to as “we” or “us” throughout this Code.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Contents

 

1.

  O VERVIEW      1  
  1.1    Code of Ethics      1  
  1.2    Regulatory Requirements      2  
  1.3    Our Duties and Responsibilities to You      2  
  1.4    You are considered to be an Access Person      2  
  1.5    Your Duty of Loyalty      3  
  1.6    Your Standard of Business Conduct      3  
  1.7    Exceptions to the Code      3  

2.

  P ERSONAL S ECURITIES T RANSACTIONS      3  
  2.1    Avoid Conflicts of Interest      3  
  2.2    Reporting Your Personal Securities Accounts and Transactions      4  
  2.3    Summary of a Reportable Transaction      6  
  2.4    Your Reports are Kept Confidential      7  

3.

  T RADING R EQUIREMENTS , R ESTRICTIONS , AND E MPLOYEE C OMPENSATION A CCOUNTS      7  
  3.1    Pre-clearance Requirements for Access Persons      7  
  3.2    Trade Restrictions and Prohibitions      9  
  3.3    Ban on Short-term Trading Pre-clearable Securities      12  

4.

  C ODE OF E THICS T EAM      13  
  Trading on Insider Information      13  
  4.1    What is Insider Trading?      13  
  4.2    Using Non-Public Information about an Account or our Advisory Activities      14  
  4.3    Wells Fargo & Co (WFC) Securities      14  

5.

  G IFTS , D IRECTORSHIPS , AND O THER O UTSIDE E MPLOYMENT      14  
  5.1    Gifts      14  
  5.2    Outside Business Activities (OBA)      17  
  5.3    Political Contributions      18  
  5.4    Anti-Bribery and Corruption, Training and Recordkeeping      18  

6.

  T HE V OLCKER R ULE      21  

7.

  C ODE V IOLATIONS      22  
  7.1    Investigating Code Violations      22  
  7.2    Penalties      22  
  7.3    Dismissal and/or Referral to Authorities      24  
  7.4    Your Obligation to Report Violations      24  

A PPENDIX A D EFINITIONS

     25  

A PPENDIX B R EGISTERED P RODUCTS

     30  

A PPENDIX C C OMPLIANCE C ODE C HANGES

     31  

Wells Capital Management, Inc. (WellsCap) is referred to as “we” or “us” throughout this Code.


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

  1. O VERVIEW

 

  1.1 Code of Ethics

We have adopted this Code of Ethics (Code) pursuant to Rule 204A-1 under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, as amended (the Advisers Act). This Code outlines the policies and procedures you must follow and the guidelines we use to govern your Personal Securities Transactions to prevent insider trading. We monitor any activity that may be perceived as conflicting with the fiduciary responsibility we have to our clients.

We are committed to maintaining the highest ethical standards in connection with managing accounts. We have no tolerance for dishonesty, self-dealing, or trading on material, non-public information.

As an employee, you must:

 

    Be ethical,

 

    Act professionally,

 

    Exercise independent judgment,

 

    Comply with all applicable Federal Securities Laws, and

 

    Promptly report violations or suspected violations of the Code to the Code of Ethics Team.

As a condition of your employment, you must acknowledge receipt of this Code and certify, within 10 calendar days of becoming subject to the Code and annually thereafter, that you have read it and complied with it. Code violations, as determined by the Chief Compliance Officer and/or senior management, can result in disciplinary actions including, but not limited to, termination.

In addition to this Code, you need to comply with the policies outlined in the Handbook for Wells Fargo Team Members and the Wells Fargo Team Member Code of Ethics and Business Conduct .

No written code of ethics can explicitly cover every situation that may possibly arise. Even in situations not expressly described, the Code and your fiduciary obligations generally require you to put the interests of our clients ahead of your own. The Code of Ethics Team and/or the Chief Compliance Officer (“CCO”) may have the obligation and duty to review and take appropriate action concerning instances of conduct that, while not necessarily violating the letter of the Code, give the appearance of impropriety. If you have any questions regarding the appropriateness of any action under this Code or under your fiduciary duties generally, you should contact the Code of Ethics Team or your CCO to discuss the matter before taking the action in question. Similarly, you should consult with the Code of Ethics Team if you have any questions concerning the meaning or interpretation of any provision of the Code. Should the Code of Ethics Team need to initiate an investigation or fact-finding process, all team members would be required to cooperate fully and honestly and to respect the confidentiality of the process.

 

Code of Ethics    1    January 2016

 


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

  1.2 Regulatory Requirements

The Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) considers it a violation of the general antifraud provisions of the Federal Securities Laws whenever a Covered Company engages in fraudulent, deceptive, or manipulative conduct.

The SEC can censure or fine us, limit our activities, functions or operations, suspend our activities for up to 12 months, or revoke our registration if we fail to reasonably supervise you and you violate the Federal Securities Laws. However, we won’t be considered to have failed to reasonably supervise you, if we have:

 

    established procedures and a system for applying the procedures, which would reasonably be expected to prevent and detect violations; and

 

    reasonably communicated the duties and obligations of the procedures and system to you, while reasonably enforcing compliance with our procedures and system.

 

  1.3 Our Duties and Responsibilities to You

To help you comply with this Code, the Chief Compliance Officer (CCO), or his or her designee will:

 

    Notify you in writing that you are required to report under the Code and inform you of your specific reporting requirements.

 

    Give you a copy of the Code and require you to sign a form indicating that you read and understand the Code.

 

    Give you a new copy of the Code if we make any material amendments to it and then require you to sign another form indicating that you received and read the revised Code.

 

    Require you, if you have been so designated, to have duplicate copies of trade confirmations and account statements for each disclosed account from your broker-dealer, bank, or other party designated on the initial, quarterly, or annual certification sent to us as soon as readily available.

 

    Typically compare all of your reported Personal Securities Transactions with the portfolio transactions report of the Accounts each quarter. Before we determine if you may have violated the Code on the basis of this comparison, we will give you an opportunity to provide an explanation.

 

    Review the Code at least once a year to assess the adequacy of the Code and how effectively it works.

 

  1.4 You are considered to be an Access Person

Generally, the Code applies to all Access Persons of a Covered Company. However, WellsCap Compliance, in consultation with business line management, will ultimately determine which team members are covered by the Code.

 

January 2016

 

2


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

  1.5 Your Duty of Loyalty

You have a duty of loyalty to our clients. That means you must always act in our clients’ best interests.

You must never do anything that allows (or even appears to allow) you to inappropriately benefit from your relationships with the Accounts.

You cannot engage in activities such as self-dealing and must disclose all conflicts of interest between the interests of our clients and your personal interests to the Code of Ethics Team.

 

  1.6 Your Standard of Business Conduct

You must always observe the highest standards of business conduct and follow all applicable laws and regulations.

You may never:

 

    use any device, scheme, or artifice to defraud a client;

 

    make any untrue statement of a material fact to a client or mislead a client by omitting to state a material fact;

 

    engage in any act, practice, or course of business that would defraud or deceive a client;

 

    engage in any manipulative practice with respect to a client,

 

    engage in any inappropriate trading practices, including price manipulation; or

 

    engage in any transaction that may give the appearance of impropriety.

 

  1.7 Exceptions to the Code

The CCO is responsible for enforcing the Code. The CCO (or his or her designee for any exceptions sought by the CCO) may grant certain exceptions to the Code in compliance with applicable law, provided any requests and any approvals granted must be submitted and obtained, respectively, in advance and in writing. The CCO or his or her designee may refuse to authorize any request for exception under the Code and is not required to furnish any explanation for the refusal.

 

  2. P ERSONAL S ECURITIES T RANSACTIONS

 

  2.1 Avoid Conflicts of Interest

When engaging in Personal Securities Transactions, there may be conflicts between the interests of a client or a client account and your personal interests. Any conflicts that arise in such Personal Securities Transactions must be resolved in a manner that does not inappropriately benefit you or adversely affect our clients. You shall always place the financial and business interests of the Covered Companies and our clients before your own personal financial and business interests.

 

January 2016

 

3


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

Examples of inappropriate resolutions of conflicts are:

 

    Taking an investment opportunity away from an Account to benefit a portfolio of which you have Beneficial Ownership;

 

    Using your position to take advantage of available investments;

 

    Shadowing an Account by duplicating the trades of an Account 1 ;

 

    Front running an Account by trading in securities (or equivalent securities) ahead of the Account; and

 

    Taking advantage of information or using Account portfolio assets to affect the market in a way that personally benefits you or a portfolio of which you have Beneficial Ownership. Any other behavior determined by the CCO to be or have the appearance of a conflict

 

  2.2 Reporting Your Personal Securities Accounts and Transactions

If you have been designated as an Access Person:

You must report all Personal Securities Accounts, along with the reportable holdings and transactions of Reportable Securities in those accounts. Reportable Personal Securities Accounts include accounts with the ability to hold Reportable Securities as defined in Section 2.4, which includes Wells Fargo Advantage mutual funds and mutual funds sub-advised by WellsCap, FIA, ECM, or MetWest, of which you or an Immediate Family Member has Beneficial Ownership. A Reportable Personal Securities Account is not limited to securities accounts maintained at brokerage firms and/or reportable accounts firms, but also includes holdings of Securities owned directly by you or an Immediate Family Member or held through a retirement plan of Wells Fargo & Co. or any other employer, as well as Individual Savings Accounts (ISAs). There are three types of reports: (1) an initial holdings report that we receive when you first become an Access Person, (2) a quarterly transactional report, and (3) an annual holdings report.

Each broker-dealer, bank, or fund company where you have a Personal Securities Account must receive a request from the Code of Ethics Team to receive all account statements and confirmations from such accounts. * The Code of Ethics Team will make the request on your behalf after the accounts are disclosed. Access Persons are prohibited from accepting any discounted brokerage rates or any other inducements from broker-dealers that a Covered Company trades with for its clients.

Initial Holdings Report. Within 10 calendar days of becoming an Access Person:

 

    All Personal Securities Accounts, including broker name, account numbers, and account registration must be provided to the Code of Ethics Team. All holdings of Reportable Securities in Personal Securities Accounts must be input via the Compliance Monitoring System SunGard Protegent PTA (SunGard PTA) and verified

 

1   Limited exceptions may exist with written approval from the CCO
*   You should include all accounts that have the ability to hold securities, even if the account does not hold securities as of the report date.

 

January 2016

 

4


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

through an Initial Holdings Report. The information in the report must be current as of a date no more than 45 calendar days prior to the date of you becoming an Access Person.

 

    Statements (electronic or paper) for all Personal Securities Accounts must be provided by you to the Code of Ethics Team no more than 45 calendar days prior to the date of you becoming an Access Person.

 

    You must complete the Initial Holdings Report and provide the required statements by the business day immediately before the weekend or holiday if the 10th day falls on a weekend or holiday, or when the Code of Ethics Team requests them.

Annual Holdings Reports. Within 30 calendar days of each year-end:

 

    All holdings of Reportable Securities Accounts must be reported to the Code of Ethics Team via SunGard PTA in an Annual Holdings Report. The information in the report must be current as of the calendar year end.

 

    You will certify as to the correctness and completeness of this report.

 

    You must provide the report and certification by the business day immediately before the weekend or holiday if the 30th day falls on a weekend or holiday, or when the Code of Ethics Team requests them.

Quarterly Transactions Reports. Within 30 calendar days of quarter-end:

 

    You must supply to the Code of Ethics Team a report, most commonly via SunGard PTA, showing all Securities trades made in your Personal Securities Accounts during the quarter.

 

    For team members with electronic brokers, a vast majority of transactions will automatically feed into the system. Any remaining transactions must be manually entered by the team member, which includes all reportable transactions executed by team members with manual brokers (paper statements).

 

    You will certify as to the correctness and completeness of this report.

 

    You must provide the report and certification by the business day immediately before the weekend or holiday if the 30th day falls on a weekend or holiday, or when the Code of Ethics Team requests them.

Additional Items Related to Personal Account Disclosure

 

    You must inform the Code of Ethics Team of any new Personal Securities Accounts you establish within 10 calendar days of inception date.

 

    All Managed Accounts must be reported and approved by the Compliance team.

 

    This includes Personal Accounts over which the team member has no direct or indirect influence or control, which includes an account managed on a discretionary basis by someone else.

 

January 2016

 

5


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

The team member claiming to have no direct or indirect influence or control over such a Personal Account and his or her adviser will be required to complete a managed account attestation evidencing such Personal Account arrangement.

 

  2.3 Summary of a Reportable Transaction

The table below serves as a reference to use in determining what transactions are considered reportable under the Code. If you have any questions about Security types not shown below, please contact the Code of Ethics Team.

 

Are the following transactions considered reportable:   
Closed-end Mutual Funds (non-affiliated)    Yes
Corporate Debt Securities    Yes
Exchange Traded Funds (ETF’s) and iShares, both open-end and closed-end, and Unit Investments Trusts    Yes
Equity Securities, including Wells Fargo & Co. Stock    Yes
Municipal Bonds    Yes
Open End Reportable Mutual Funds consists of Wells Fargo Advantage Funds and Subadvised Funds    Yes
Options on Reportable Securities    Yes
Self-directed transactions in Automatic Investment Plans that contain Reportable Securities    Yes
Investment Trust    Yes
Open-end Investment Company (OEIC)    No
Unit Trusts (UT)    No
Banker’s Acceptances, Bank Certificate of Deposits, Commercial Paper, & High-quality Short-term Debt Instruments, including Repurchase Agreements    No
Commodities, Futures, Or Options on Futures    No
Managed Accounts    No
Money Market Mutual funds (affiliated & non-affiliated)    No
Non-Wells Fargo & Co. 401(k) plans that do not or cannot hold Reportable Funds or Securities    No
Open-end, Non-reportable Mutual Funds    No
Wells Fargo & Co. Stock Options – Receipt of unvested grants, unvested restricted shares, and other securities awarded in WFC employee compensation plans    No
Securities purchased through Automatic Investments Plans (AIP)    No
Short-term Cash Equivalents    No
- Government Bonds (direct obligations)    No
U.S. Treasuries/Agencies (direct obligations)    No
529 Plans    No

 

January 2016

 

6


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

  2.4 Your Reports are Kept Confidential

The Covered Companies will use reasonable efforts to ensure that the information you submit to us under this Code are kept confidential. The information will be reviewed by members of the Code of Ethics Team and if necessary our senior executives or legal counsel. Data will be provided to government authorities upon request or others if required to do so by law or court order.

 

  3. TRADING REQUIREMENTS, RESTRICTIONS, AND EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION ACCOUNTS

All Access Persons must pre-clear transactions of certain Securities in Personal Security Accounts, (including those of Immediate Family Members and accounts for which you are Beneficial Owner), as described below, as well as comply with the trading restrictions that follow.

 

  3.1 Pre-clearance Requirements for Access Persons

The table below serves as a reference to use in determining what transactions you will need to pre-clear under the Code. If you have any questions about any types of Securities not shown below, please contact the Code of Ethics Team.

 

Do I need to Pre-clear Transactions in:

  
Closed-end Mutual Funds (non-affiliated)    Yes
Corporate Debt Securities (Bonds)    Yes
Equity Securities (other than Wells Fargo Stock)    Yes
Gifting Shares to any account outside of your Reportable Accounts    Yes
Municipal Bonds (**unless they are rated “A” or higher at the time of trade execution)    Yes
Options on Pre-clearable Securities    Yes
Rights Offerings – Buy or Selling Rights    Yes
Self-directed transactions in Automatic Investment Plans (AIP) that contain Pre-clearable Securities    Yes
Tender Offers    Yes
Banker’s Acceptances, Bank Certificate of Deposits (CDs), Commercial Paper, & High-quality Short-term Debt Instruments, including Repurchase Agreements    No
Commodities, Futures, Or Options on Futures    No
Exchange Traded Funds (ETFs) and iShares, both open-end and closed-end, and Unit Investment Trusts (UITs) and Options on ETFs    No
Margin call in which you are neither consulted nor advised of the trade before it is executed    No
Securities held in Managed Accounts    No
Open-end, Non-reportable Mutual Funds    No
Options on Pre-clearable Securities that were Assigned    No
Rights Offerings Participation    No

 

January 2016

 

7


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

Securities purchased through Automatic Investments Plans (AIP)

   No

Short-term Cash Equivalents

   No

Government Bonds (direct obligations)

   No

U.S. Treasuries/Agencies (direct obligations)

   No

529 Plans

   No

Wells Fargo Stock

   No

Wells Fargo Stock Options – Vested shares and other securities awarded in WFC employee compensation plans

   No

Investment Trust

   Yes

Open-end Investment Company (OEIC)

   No

Unit Trusts (UT)

   No

How to Pre-clear Personal Securities Transactions

Team members must follow the steps below to pre-clear trades:

 

  (1) Request Authorization . Authorization for a transaction that requires pre-clearance must be entered using SunGard PTA. You may only request pre-clearance for market orders or same day limit orders.

 

  (2) Have Your Request Reviewed and Approved . After receiving the electronic request, SunGard PTA will notify you if your trade has been approved or denied via email.

 

  (3) Trading in Foreign Markets . Request for pre-clearance in foreign markets that have already closed for the day may be given approval to trade for the following day because of time considerations. Approval will only be good for that following business day in that local foreign market.

 

  (4) Approval of Transactions

 

    The Request May be Refused. The CCO or his or her designee may refuse to authorize your Personal Securities Transaction and need not provide an explanation for refusal. Reason for refusing your Personal Securities Transaction may be confidential.

 

    Authorization Expiration. Any transaction approved by SunGard PTA or the Code Team is effective until the market close of business of the same day for which the authorization is granted (unless approval was revoked earlier). If the order for the transaction is not executed within that period, you must obtain a new advance authorization before placing your trade.

 

January 2016

 

8


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

  3.2 Trade Restrictions and Prohibitions

All Access Persons must comply with the following trading restrictions and prohibitions:

 

    60-Day Holding Period and Short-term Trading for Reportable Fund Shares (open-end and closed-end). You are required to hold shares you purchase of a Reportable Fund for 60 calendar days, or refrain from re-establishing a position in a Reportable Fund that you sold, for 60 days. This restriction applies without regard to tax lot considerations. If you need to sell Reportable Fund shares before the 60-day holding period has passed, you must obtain advance written approval from the CCO or his or her designee. The 60-day holding period does not apply to transactions pursuant to Automatic Investment Plans. You are NOT required to comply with the 60-day Holding Period for the Adjustable Rate Government Fund, Conservative Income Funds, Ultra Short-Term Income Fund, the Ultra Short-Term Municipal Income, the Wells Fargo Stock Fund (including 401(k) and ESOP accounts), and the money market funds.

 

    Team Member trades are subject to open order restriction . You cannot purchase or sell securities on any day during which an Account has a pending “buy” or “sell” order in for the same security (or equivalent security) of which the Code of Ethics Team is aware until that order is withdrawn.

 

    Team Member trades are subject to a “15-day blackout” restriction. There is a “15-day blackout” on purchases or sales of securities bought or sold by an Account. That means that you may not buy or sell a security (or equivalent security) during the seven-day periods immediately preceding and immediately following the date that the Account trades in the security (blackout security). During the blackout period, activity will be monitored by the CCO or his or her designee and any Personal Securities Transactions during a blackout window will be evaluated and investigated based on each situation. Violations may range from no action in cases where Compliance has determined on a reasonable basis that there was no employee knowledge of portfolio trading activity to potential disgorgement of profits or payment of avoided losses (see Section 8 for Code violations and penalties). During a blackout period, purchases of a blackout security may be subject to mandatory divestment. Similarly, during a blackout period, sales of a blackout security may be subject to mandatory repurchase. In the case of a purchase and subsequent mandatory divestment at a higher price, any profits derived upon divestment may be subject to disgorgement; disgorged profits will be donated to your charity of choice. In the case of a sale and subsequent mandatory repurchase at a lower price, you may be required to make up any avoided losses, as measured by the difference between the repurchase price and the price at which you sold the security; such avoided losses will be donated to your charity of choice.

 

    For example, if an Account trades in a blackout security on July 7, July 15 (the eighth calendar day following the trade date) would be the first day you may engage in a Personal Securities Transaction involving that security, and any purchases and sales in the blackout security made on or after June 30 through July 14 could be subject to divestment or repurchase. Purchases and sales in the security made on or before June 29 (the eighth calendar day before the trade date) would not be within the blackout period.

 

January 2016

 

9


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

    Intention to Buy or Sell for Accounts . You are prohibited from buying or selling securities when you intend, or know of another’s intention, to purchase or sell that security (or an equivalent security) for an Account. This prohibition applies whether the Personal Securities Transaction is in the same direction ( e.g ., two purchases or two sales) or the opposite direction ( e.g., a purchase and sale) as the transaction for the Account.

De Minimis Exception. There is a de minimis exception to the above three restrictions—Access Persons may purchase and sell S&P 500 Securities of up to 500 shares and no more than $10,000, unless this conflicts with the 60-day short-term restriction described below. Notwithstanding the de minimis exception to the foregoing three restrictions, all transactions in S&P 500 Securities must be pre-cleared. De minimis exceptions do not apply to options.

 

    Investment personnel are discouraged from personally trading in securities issued by publicly-traded companies they are covering, researching, or recommending for Covered Company advisory accounts until compliance determines the potential conflicts of interest have been resolved.

 

    IPOs (Initial Public Offering). You may not purchase shares in an Initial Public Offering. You must obtain written approval from the CCO or his or her designee before you sell shares that you acquired in an IPO prior to starting work for us. Please note, this prohibition does not apply to government bond issuances.

 

    Private Placements. You may, subject to pre-clearance requirements, purchase shares in a Private Placement as long as you will hold less than a 10% interest in the issuer or are otherwise permitted under the Policy on Directorships and other Outside Employment as outlined in the Wells Fargo & Co. Team Member Code of Ethics and Business Conduct . Private Placements issued by a client are prohibited.

 

    WFC Derivatives. Team members must comply with the policies outlined in the Wells Fargo Team Member Code of Ethics and Business Conduct which states, “You may not invest or engage in derivative or hedging transactions involving securities issued by Wells Fargo & Co, including but not limited to options contracts (other than employee stock options), puts, calls, short sales, futures contracts, or other similar transactions regardless of whether you have material inside information.”

 

    Wells Fargo Advantage Closed-end Funds. You may not participate in a tender offer made by a Wells Fargo Advantage Closed-end Fund under the terms of which the number of shares to be purchased is limited to less than all of the outstanding shares of such Wells Fargo Advantage Closed-end Fund.

 

January 2016

 

10


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

    You may NOT purchase or sell shares of any Wells Fargo Advantage Closed-end Fund within 60 calendar days or the latter of

 

    (i) the initial closing of the issuance of shares of such fund or

 

    (ii) the final closing of the issuance of shares in connection with an overallotment option.

 

    You may purchase or sell shares of Wells Fargo Advantage Closed-end Funds only during the 10-day period following the release of portfolio holdings information to the public for such fund, which typically occurs on or about the 15th day following the end of each calendar quarter. Certain team members, who shall be notified by the Legal Department, are required to make filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission in connection with purchases and sales of shares of Wells Fargo Advantage Closed-end Funds, and may be required to hold their shares of such funds for longer periods of time and will be subject to potential short-swing profit disgorgement, including in civil litigation, and public disclosure of non-compliance with applicable law.

 

    Investment Clubs. You may not participate in the activities of an Investment Club without prior approval from the CCO or his or her designee. If applicable, trades for an Investment Club would need to be pre-cleared.

 

    Personal Transactions. You are prohibited from executing or processing through a Covered Company’s direct access software:

 

    Your own personal transactions,

 

    Transactions for Immediate Family Members, or

 

    Transactions for accounts of other persons for which you or you

 

    Immediate Family Member have been given investment discretion.

This provision does not exclude you from trading directly with a broker/dealer or using a broker/dealer’s software. The foregoing also does not prohibit you from executing or processing transactions in Wells Fargo & Co. securities granted to you as compensation through an online program designated by Wells Fargo & Co. for such purpose.

 

    You must not attempt to manipulate the market. You must not execute any transactions intended to raise, lower, or maintain the price of any security or to create a false appearance of active trading.

 

    Excessive Trading. Excessive Trading for Personal Securities Accounts is strongly discouraged and Personal Securities Accounts will be monitored for Excessive Trading activity and reported to management. Additional restrictions may be imposed by the Code of Ethics Team if Excessive Trading is noted for a Personal Securities Account. To discourage excessive trading, access persons are typically limited to 25 buy transactions, requiring pre-clearance, in a calendar year. In addition to buy requests, the 25 limit includes all requests for options (both buys and sells). Please note, only approved pre-clearance requests are included in the 25 trade limit.

 

    Spread Betting and Contracts for Differences (CFDs). Spread betting transactions and Contracts for Differences are strictly prohibited.

 

January 2016

 

11


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

    Portfolio Managers. Additional scrutiny may be placed on WellsCap Portfolio Managers acting in their own personal accounts in securities also held in their client’s portfolios.

 

    Loans (ECM Team Members Only): Loan transactions in personal accounts are prohibited for ECM employees.

 

  3.3 Ban on Short-term Trading Pre-clearable Securities

There is a ban on short-term trading pre-clearable securities for Access Persons. Access Persons are not permitted to buy and sell, or sell and buy, the same security (or equivalent security) within 60 calendar days; this will be considered short-term trading. Trading in securities of Wells Fargo Stock or Wells Fargo Stock Fund (including 401(k) and ESOP accounts) are excluded from this restriction.

 

    This prohibition applies without regard to tax lot.

 

    Short sales are subject to the 60-day ban.

 

    You cannot buy and sell options within 60 calendar days. Settlement/expiration date on the opening option transaction must be at least 60 days out.

You may be required to disgorge any profits you make from any purchase or sale before the 60-day period expires. In counting the 60 calendar days, multiple transactions in the same security (or equivalent security) will be counted in such a manner as to produce the shortest time period between transactions.

Although certain transactions may be deemed de minimis (i.e., the exceptions noted in Section 3.3), they are still subject to the ban on short-term trading profits and are required to be input into the Compliance Monitoring System. The ban on short-term trading does not apply to transactions that involve:

 

    Securities not requiring pre-clearance (i.e., ETFs);

 

    Same-day sales of securities acquired through the exercise of employee stock options or other Wells Fargo & Co. securities granted to you as compensation or through the delivery (constructive or otherwise) of previously owned employer stock to pay the exercise price and tax withholding;

 

    Commodities, futures (including currency futures), options on futures, and options on currencies; or

 

    Automated purchases or sales that were done as part of an Automatic Investment Plan (AIP). However, any self-directed purchases or sales outside the pre-set schedule or allocation of the AIP, or other changes to the pre-set schedule or allocation of the AIP, within a 60-day period, are subject to the 60-day ban on short-term trading.

The CCO or his or her designee may approve additional exceptions to the ban on short-term trading. Any additional exceptions require advance written approval.

 

January 2016

 

12


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

  4. C ODE OF E THICS T EAM

Trading on Insider Information

Regulators require WellsCap to have and enforce written policies and procedures to prevent you from misusing material, non-public information. WellsCap does this by:

 

    limiting your access to files likely to contain non-public information,

 

    restricting or monitoring your trades, including trades in securities about which you might have non-public information, and

 

    providing you continuing education programs about insider trading.

Team Members are subject to all requirements of the Wells Fargo Team Member Code of Ethics and Business Conduct set forth under the heading “Avoid Conflicts of Interest—Insider Trading” in Section V.C of Appendix A thereof, as the same may be amended from time to time. A copy of this policy is available on the Wells Fargo & Co website at:

https://www.wellsfargo.com/downloads/pdf/about/team_member_code_ of_ethics.pdf

 

  4.1 What is Insider Trading?

Insider trading is generally defined as occurring when a person has possession of material, non-public information about an issuer and engages in a securities transaction involving securities issued by the issuer, or discloses the information to others who then trade in the issuer’s securities.

Information is considered material if there is a substantial likelihood that a reasonable investor would consider it important in deciding how to act. Information is considered non-public when it has not been made available to investors generally. Information becomes public once it is publicly disseminated. Limited disclosure does not make the information public (for example, if an insider makes information available to a select group of individuals, it is not public).

Examples of illegal and prohibited insider trading and related activity include, but are not limited to, the following:

 

    Tipping of material, non-public information is illegal and prohibited. Tipping occurs when non-public information about an issuer is given to someone else who then trades in securities of the issuer.

 

    Front running is illegal and prohibited. Front running is trading ahead of an Account order in the same or equivalent security (such as options) in order to make a profit or to avoid a loss.

 

    Scalping is illegal and prohibited. S calping consists of realizing a short-term profit on the direct or secondary market reaction to one’s own advice.

 

January 2016

 

13


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

  4.2 Using Non-Public Information about an Account or our Advisory Activities

You may not:

 

    Share with any other person (unless you are permitted or required by law, it’s necessary to carry out your duties and appropriate confidentiality protections are in place, as necessary) any non-public information about an Account, including, without limitation:

 

    any securities holdings or transactions of an Account;

 

    any securities recommendation made to an Account;

 

    any securities transaction (or transaction under consideration) by an Account, including information about actual or contemplated investment decisions;

 

    any changes to portfolio management teams of Reportable Funds; and

 

    any information about planned mergers or liquidations of Reportable Funds.

 

    Use any non-public information regarding an Account in any way that might compete with, or be contrary to, the interest of such Account.

 

    Use any non-public information regarding an Account in any way for personal gain.

 

  4.3 Wells Fargo & Co (WFC) Securities

You are prohibited from engaging in any transaction in Wells Fargo & Co securities that is not in compliance with applicable requirements of the Wells Fargo Team Member Code of Ethics and Business Conduct set forth under the heading “Avoid Conflicts of Interest—Personal Trading and Investment—Derivative and Hedging Transactions in Securities Issued by Wells Fargo” as may be amended from time to time. A copy of this policy is available on the Wells Fargo & Company website at:

Restrictions on Purchases & Sales of WFC Securities

 

5. G IFTS , D IRECTORSHIPS , AND O THER O UTSIDE E MPLOYMENT

 

  5.1 Gifts

We generally follow the Wells Fargo & Company policy regarding receiving gifts and activities with customers as vendors, as generally set forth in the Wells Fargo Team Member Code of Ethics and Business Conduct, although we have made some changes to that policy, making it more restrictive in some instances.

You and your family members must not accept gifts from or participate in activities with (including services, discounts, entertainment, travel, or promotional materials) an actual or potential customer or vendor or from business or professional people to whom you do or may refer business unless the gift or activity was in accordance with accepted, lawful business practices and is of sufficiently limited value that no possible inference can be drawn that the gift or activity could influence you in the performance of your duties for Wells Fargo. It is unlawful for you to corruptly seek or accept anything of value

 

January 2016

 

14


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

from any person, intending to be influenced or rewarded in connection with any business or transaction of Wells Fargo. This rule applies to all team members, including, but not limited to, those involved in recommending or making decisions related to:

 

    Pricing of products sold by the company,

 

    Extension of credit, or

 

    Purchase of goods or services from outside vendors

 

  1. Money —Money (cash, check, money order, electronic funds, Visa or similar gifts cards, or any type of gift that can be exchanged for or deposited as cash) must never be accepted or given.

 

  2. Team members who wish to give gifts to vendors, customers or officials, or who are asked to authorize such gifts, must follow standard expense authorization procedures.

Gifts valued at more than $200 to a current or potential customer within any calendar year must be approved, in writing, by your Code of Ethics Team. Gift pre-clearance requests may be submitted via the SunGard PTA system (Attestations g Submit Disclosures g Gifts and Entertainment Form). Please contact WellsCapCOE@wellsfargo.com with any questions.

Note: In addition to the WellsCap policy, all WFFD licensed team members are subject to WFFD and FINRA requirements. This includes a $100 annual gift limitation to current and potential clients, and may include additional pre-clearance and reporting.

Team members who wish to give personal gifts to other team members must follow the general guideline that the gift be made in accordance with accepted business practices and is of sufficiently limited value that the gift could not influence the giver or the receiver in the performance of their duties for Wells Fargo, nor create actual or perceived pressure to reciprocate. Also, the gift should be of sufficiently limited value, not to exceed $200 or its equivalent in local currency.

 

  3. Accepting Gifts —Unless approved, in writing, by your Code of Ethics Team, you may not accept gifts worth more than $100 from a current or potential customer, vendor or their agent within any calendar year. However, the following items are not subject to the $100 limit:

 

    Gifts based on obvious family or personal relationship when it is clear that the relationship, and not the company’s business, is the basis for the gift;

 

    Discounts or rebates on merchandise or services from an actual or potential customer or vendor if they are comparable to and do not exceed the discount or rebate generally given by the customer or vendor to others;

 

    Awards from civic, charitable, educational, or religious organizations for recognition of service and accomplishment.

 

January 2016

 

15


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

Gift pre-clearance requests may be submitted via the SunGard PTA system (Attestations g Submit Disclosures g Gifts and Entertainment Form). Please contact WellsCapCOE@wellsfargo.com with any questions.

Note Regarding Tickets to Events: Tickets to events are considered entertainment when the donor is in attendance. If a representative from the customer, vendor, or agent’s firm is NOT in attendance, event tickets are considered a gift.

 

  4. Activities with Customers or Vendors —Activities with existing or potential customers or vendors that are paid for by them (including meals, winning door prizes, sporting events, and other entertainment, as well as trips to customer and vendor sites, exhibits, and other activities) may be accepted only if the activity is a customary, accepted, and lawful business practice and is of sufficiently limited value that no possible inference can be drawn that participating in the activity could influence you in the performance of your duties for Wells Fargo. If you have any doubt about the propriety of participating in an activity offered by a customer or a vendor you should consult with your supervisor and Code of Ethics Team before accepting the offer. If the activity includes travel paid for by a customer or vendor, you must obtain management approval before accepting the trip.

Receipt of Entertainment: Activities valued at more than $300 per person, per event (including meals), must be approved through the PTA System by your Code of Ethics Team.

Entertainment pre-clearance requests may be submitted via the SunGard PTA system (Attestation g Submit Disclosures g Gifts and Entertainment Form). Please contact WellsCapCOE@wellsfargo.com with any questions.

** Team members are expected to use their reasonable best efforts when estimating the cost of entertainment prior to a meal or event. Should the cost exceed the anticipated amount, team members should contact compliance to submit and/or revise a pre-clearance request.

Providing Entertainment:

Entertainment provided to current or prospective clients must be reasonable and not so expensive it raises a suggestion of unethical conduct. All entertainment and related expenses must be detailed on an expense form with receipts included in accordance with Wells Fargo corporate requirements.

Note Regarding Tickets to Events: Tickets to events are considered entertainment when a representative from the company is in attendance. If a representative is NOT in attendance, event tickets are considered a gift.

 

January 2016

 

16


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

  5. Dealings with Government Officials —Team members must comply with U.S. law, including the U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, and the laws of foreign countries when dealing with domestic and foreign government officials. Under no circumstances may you pay or offer anything of value directly or indirectly, to a government official, including foreign officials, political parties, and party officials and candidates for the purpose of improperly influencing an official act or decision, securing an improper advantage, or assisting in obtaining or retraining business or directing business to anyone. In countries in which there is a government involvement in business enterprises, such officials may include employees and manager of local enterprises. All Covered Team Members must obtain pre-clearance from the Corporate Operational Risk Political Law Reporting team (PLR-P2P) before providing any gift or entertainment to a public official or their spouse or children. WellsCap Compliance will coordinate the submission of all pre-clearance requests to PLR-P2P. Prior to providing any gift or entertainment to a government entity prospect or client, a pre-clearance request must be submitted via the SunGard PTA system (Attestations g Submit Disclosures g Gifts and Entertainment Form). Please contact WellsCapCOE@wellsfargo.com with any questions.

Please see Section 5.4 Anti-Bribery and Corruption for details regarding gifts and entertainment to Non-US Government officials and entities.

 

  6. Taft Hartley Clients — Under the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act (LMRDA), WellsCap is required to participate in the Wells Fargo corporate level consolidated annual reporting of any gifts or payments made to unions and union officials, irrespective of dollar amount. As such, logging is required for all gifts and entertainment to Taft-Hartley clients.

Taft-Hartley gifts and entertainment may be submitted via the SunGard PTA system (Attestation g Submit Disclosures g Gifts and Entertainment Form). Please contact WellsCapCOE@wellsfargo.com with any questions.

 

  5.2 Outside Business Activities (OBA)

Employment outside of WellsCap is permitted in certain circumstances, as long as the outside employment or business does not involve an activity or business that competes with Wells Fargo, cause an actual or potential conflict of interest, or otherwise negatively affect your duties and responsibilities to Wells Fargo. We follow the Wells Fargo & Co policy regarding holding directorship positions and other outside employment. Please read and follow the Wells Fargo Team Member Code of Ethics and Business Conduct for requirements regarding directorships. If you receive an approval to participate in outside business or employment activities, your participation must be re-disclosed annually when you certify to the Code and reapproved at any time there is a change in relevant facts upon which the original approval was granted. New OBA requests may be submitted via the SunGard PTA system (Attestations g Submit Disclosures g Outside Activity Approval Form). Please contact WellsCapCOE@wellsfargo.com with any questions.

 

January 2016

 

17


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

  5.3 Political Contributions

We follow the Wells Fargo Team Member Code of Ethics and Business Conduct regarding political contributions. Individual political contributions are not restricted; however, Access Persons must take care to ensure that any contribution made is on the behalf of the individual and not on behalf of a Covered Company or Wells Fargo & Co.). As an investment adviser, WellsCap and its employees are subject to SEC requirements as well as state and local regulations regarding political contributions, procurement lobbying, and gifts and entertainment to government entities. Please review the Political Contribution and State and Local Pay to Play/Procurement Lobbying policies and procedures (Sections 1.5 and 1.6) detailed in the Wells Capital Management Policies and Procedures for details regarding pre-clearance requirements.

In order to comply with WellsCap’s SEC requirements, all WellsCap Team Members are required to pre-clear their political contributions with Compliance. Pre-clearance requests for political contributions may be submitted via the SunGard PTA system (Attestations g Submit Disclosures g Personal Political Contribution Request). Please contact WellsCapCOE@wellsfargo.com with any questions.

 

  5.4 Anti-Bribery and Corruption, Training and Recordkeeping

WellsCap complies with the Corporate Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy (ABC Policy), as well as Wholesale Anti-Bribery and Corruption Standards (Wholesale Standards) established to help ensure compliance with applicable laws relating to bribery and corruption, including the U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA), the UK Bribery Act 2010 (UKBA), the U.S. Bank Bribery Act and other anti-bribery and corruption laws in the jurisdictions where Wells Fargo does business. WellsCap sets forth below its internal policies and procedures to implement the requirements of the ABC.

 

  1. Overview of FCPA and Bribery Act

As a subsidiary of a large financial institution such as Wells Fargo Bank, implementing Global Anti-Corruption policies and procedures is important in the current heightened enforcement environment. Generally, the FCPA prohibits Wells Fargo from promising, making, or authorizing payments to foreign government officials to promote its business interests when the payment is intended to induce the official to do any of the following:

 

    Act in violation of his or her lawful duty

 

    Grant any improper advantage

 

    Use his or her influence improperly to affect or influence any act or decision

The Bribery Act is broader in scope as it includes interactions with customers and vendors in addition to government officials. Therefore, Wells Fargo prohibits any payment or receipt of bribes or other corrupt payments by team members, officers, and agents. This includes prohibiting receipt of a financial or other advantage (including gifts) to perform one’s function or activity improperly, and prohibiting payments or gifts to government officials or other third parties as an inducement to do business. A mere promise or offer to pay is a violation and payment does not need to “succeed” in its purpose to be illegal.

 

January 2016

 

18


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

ABC is applicable to all Team Members, but focused training is required for those who are: customer facing or would have occasion to entertain or provide gifts to foreign customers; manage and/or approve customer facing Team Members or those who might have occasion to entertain or provide gifts to foreign officials; prepare expense reports for those who might have occasion to entertain or provide gifts to foreign officials; or who have occasion to engage vendors, consultants, referral sources, joint venture partners, and other parties who act on behalf of WellsCap.

 

  a. Foreign Official or Non-U.S. Government Official includes:

 

    Any officer or employee of a non-U.S. government, agency, or instrumentality thereof (includes employees of state-owned or state-controlled commercial financial institutions, central banks, foreign monetary authorities, and regulatory authorities). State-owned or state controlled means any entity in which a government, political party or official, or combination of such, directly or indirectly owns, controls, or has the power to vote 10% or more of the voting stock and/or controls in any manner the election of a majority of the directors of the foreign entity.

 

    Public international organization or multilateral institution (e.g., World Bank, UN, NATO)

 

    Foreign political party or official or person acting on behalf of a foreign political party

 

    A candidate for public office

 

    Members of a non-U.S. legislature or judiciary

b. Covered Expenses include:

Gifts —Any item purchased for or on behalf of an individual, delivered or given to an individual, directly or through someone else, in the normal course of business. Certain gifts (branded or logo embossed memento or a gift basket/flower arrangement for the benefit of several unspecified individuals) are not subject to pre-approval, however, they are subject to regular expense reporting and must be legal under local foreign law where the recipient is located.

Events/Entertainment —Meals/drinks, entertainment functions including, but not limited to, a golf outing, cab fare, light refreshments, sporting or theater events, or similar entertainment functions, travel, and entertainment expenses. Expenses are prohibited that relate to a non-U.S. government official’s attendance at a sporting or theater event or similar event in which a Team Member will not be present to host the event.

Non-Monetary Benefits in kind— Includes the offer of, or the permission to use, the property or services of one party granted to another. Examples involving Wells Fargo property or services are internships, other paid or unpaid work for family members of a third party, or use of Wells Fargo premises for nominal value or for free, except to the extent permitted by law.

 

January 2016

 

19


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

  2. Risk Assessment and Control —The Corporate ABC and Governance and Wholesale ABC teams coordinate centralized ABC compliance for all of Wells Fargo Bank and oversee periodic company-wide risk assessments. Annually and upon request, WellsCap will complete an ABC risk assessment in accordance with the guidance provided by Corporate ABC and Governance and Wholesale ABC .

Team Members with securities licenses with a registered broker dealer must also comply with gift and entertainment rules established by FINRA, MSRB, and local securities regulatory agencies, including the U.K. FSA.

 

  3. Gifts/Hospitality and Covered Expenses for Non-U.S. Government Officials

Wells Fargo’s Code of Ethics and Business Conduct is the primary source when giving or receiving gifts, entertainment, or financial or other advantages of any kind. In addition, WellsCap Team Members must also consider relevant restrictions and/or prohibitions in accordance with rules that apply to certain types of clients (e.g., ERISA, state or local government regulations). ABC set forth additional requirements for pre-clearing and recording expenses relating to providing gifts, entertainment or other things of value for U.S. and non-U.S. government officials.

Gifts, entertainment and other things of value must be reasonable and appropriate, not too lavish or frequent as to create the appearance of impropriety and have a legitimate business purpose. Team members are prohibited from offering, providing, demanding, or receiving gifts, entertainment, or other things of value to any party as an improper means of obtaining, retaining, or rewarding business or securing an advantage.

To mitigate corruption risk, the below things of value provided to or requested by U.S. and non-U.S. government official s require pre-clearance by the team member’s manager and Wholesale ABC:

U.S. Government Officials – All gifts and entertainment

 

    Non-U.S. Government Officials:

 

    Any gift to a non-U.S. government official irrespective of amount (limited exceptions outlined in the standalone ABC policy)

 

    Any entertainment where the per-person per-event cost is expected to exceed US$100 or local equivalent

 

    A non-monetary benefit in kind, regardless of value, to any non-U.S. government official.

 

    Honoria and Speaker Fees

 

    Sponsorships

 

    Charitable Donations

 

January 2016

 

20


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

Please note, gifts, entertainment or other things of value provided to a U.S. and non- U.S. government official in connection with any of the following type of events still require pre-clearance:

 

    Wells Fargo Conferences and Seminars

 

    Roadshows, Investor Days, Due Diligence & Marketing Trips 2

 

    Closing Events

 

    Training Programs

Restrictions differ depending on jurisdiction, and some jurisdictions are more conservative than the $100/person entertainment limit set forth above. In those circumstances local laws will always prevail. It is a team member’s responsibility to be aware of local rules, and abide by them. If you have any questions regarding Covered Expenses for non-U.S. government officials, please contact Colleen Whalen at cwhalen@wellsfargo.com with any questions.

Team members should complete the Gift, Entertainment and Anything of Value Pre-Clearance Form and submit it to their manager for pre-clearance. Once manager pre-clearance is obtained, the team member should submit the pre-clearance form to the WellsCap COE team for review with Wholesale ABC. The form is available on CapZone at the following location:

http://capzone.wellsfargo.com/RiskManagement/GAC%20PreApproval% 20Form/Forms/AllItems.aspx

Team Members must report all Covered Expenses (except benefit in kind) in the appropriate approved Wells Fargo expense reimbursement system (Concur). International Sales Team Members located in the London, U.K. (WFSIL), or Wells Fargo Bank Hong Kong offices shall submit ABC pre-approval forms to WellsCap (for those impacting WellsCap separate accounts) and not to WFSIL or Wells Fargo Bank Hong Kong Code of Ethics Teams.

For complete details regarding ABC, please refer to WellsCap’s Anti-Bribery and Corruption Procedures.

 

6. T HE V OLCKER R ULE

The Volcker Rule is a section of the Dodd- Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act that with certain exceptions, (i) prohibits banks and their affiliates from engaging in proprietary trading, and (ii) prohibits banks and their affiliates from investing in or sponsoring hedge funds and private equity funds (i.e., funds that are exempt from registration under Section 3(c)(1) or Section 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act of 1940), also known as a (“Covered Fund”). Wells Fargo & Company may sponsor a Covered Fund pursuant to the asset management exemption so long as it meets certain conditions. One of the conditions is that no team member or director may

 

2   The pre-clearance requirements for U.S. government officials and non-U.S. government officials apply regardless of whether the client will ultimately bear the cost.

 

January 2016

 

21


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

acquire or retain an ownership interest in a Covered Fund sponsored by Wells Fargo & Company, unless such director or employee acquired the ownership interest while directly engaged in providing investment advisory, commodity trading advisory or other services to the Covered Fund. These other services include providing investment advice or investment management services to the fund, and providing such services that enable the provision of investment advice or investment management, including but not limited to:

 

    Oversight and risk management,

 

    Deal origination,

 

    Due diligence, and

 

    Administrative or other support services.

Additionally, any permissible investments cannot be financed by Wells Fargo. Team members are responsible for only investing in a Covered Fund when permitted. The investors in a Covered Fund will be periodically checked to confirm no impermissible team member ownership exists.

 

  7. T EAM M EMBER T RAINING

Training courses are designed to ensure that you stay current with the critical issues of our business as well as corporate and regulatory requirements. As such, team members are required to complete all assigned courses. Failure to complete an assigned training course by the scheduled due date may result in a Code of Ethics violation.

 

  8. C ODE V IOLATIONS

 

  8.1 Investigating Code Violations

The CCO is responsible for enforcing the Code. The CCO or his or her designee is responsible for investigating any suspected violation of the Code and if the CCO selects a designee, the designee will report the results of each investigation to the CCO. This includes not only instances of violations against the letter of the Code, but also any instances that may give the appearance of impropriety. The CCO is responsible for reviewing the results of any investigation of any reported or suspected violation of the Code in coordination with the designee. Any confirmed violation of the Code will be reported to your supervisor immediately.

 

  8.2 Penalties

The CCO is responsible for deciding whether an offense is minor, substantive, or serious. In determining the seriousness of a violation of this Code of Ethics, the following factors, among others, may be considered:

 

    the degree of willfulness of the violation;

 

    the severity of the violation;

 

    the extent, if any, to which a team member profited or benefited from the violation;

 

    the adverse effect, if any, of the violation on a Covered Company or an Account; and

 

    any history of prior violation of the Code.

 

January 2016

 

22


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

In addition to offenses that may occur as the result of personal account transactions, failure to comply with the Training, Political Contribution, Gifts & Entertainment, and Outside Employment policies will be treated as violations under WellsCap’s Code of Ethics.

Note: For purposes of imposing sanctions, violations generally will be counted on a rolling 12-month period. However, the CCO or senior management reserves the right to impose a more severe sanction/penalty depending on the severity of the violation and/or taking into consideration violations dating back more than 12 months.

Any serious offenses as described below will be reported immediately to the Chief Compliance Officer. All minor offenses and substantive offenses will be reported to the Chief Compliance Officer periodically. Penalties will be imposed as follows except as subject to exceptions described further below:

Minor Offenses :

 

    First minor offense – Oral warning;

 

    Second minor offense – Written notice;

 

    Third minor offense – 10 Business Day ban on all personal trading

Minor offenses may include, but are not limited to, the following: failure to submit quarterly transaction reports, failure to complete assigned training, failure to submit signed acknowledgments of Code forms and certifications, excessive ( i.e., more than three) late submissions of such documents, and conflicting pre-clear request dates versus actual trade dates or other pre-clearance request errors or omissions involving the de minimis exception or securities not covered by the fifteen day blackout period.

Substantive Offenses:

 

    First substantive offense – Written notice;

 

    Second substantive offense – 30 Business Day ban on all personal trading;

 

    Third substantive offense – 45 Business Day ban on all personal trading and/or termination of employment and/or referral to authorities.

Substantive offenses may include, but are not limited to, the following: unauthorized purchase/sale of restricted investments as outlined in this Code, violations of short-term trading for profit (60-day rule), failure to request trade pre-clearance of restricted transactions, failure to timely report a reportable brokerage account, and violations of the 15-day blackout period.

Serious Offenses:

Trading with inside information, “front running,” and “scalping” are each considered a “serious offense.” We will take appropriate steps, which may include termination of employment and/or referral to governmental authorities for prosecution. WellsCap Senior Management, including the CCO, will be informed immediately of any serious offenses.

 

January 2016

 

23


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

Exceptions

We may deviate from the penalties listed in the Code where the CCO and/or senior management determines that a more or less severe penalty is appropriate based on the specific circumstances of that case. For example, a first substantive offense may warrant a more severe penalty if it follows two minor offenses. Any deviations from the penalties listed in the Code, and the reasons for such deviations, will be documented and maintained in the Code files. The penalties listed in this Section 8.2 are in addition to disgorgement or other penalties imposed by other provisions of this Code.

 

  8.3 Dismissal and/or Referral to Authorities

Repeated violations or a flagrant violation of the Code may result in immediate dismissal from employment. In addition, the CCO and/or senior management may determine that a single flagrant violation of the law, such as insider trading, will result in immediate dismissal and referral to authorities.

 

  8.4 Your Obligation to Report Violations

You must report any violations or suspected violations of the Code to the CCO or to a member of the Code of Ethics Team. Your reports will be treated confidentially and will be investigated promptly and appropriately. Violations include:

 

    non-compliance with applicable laws, rules, and regulations;

 

    fraud or illegal acts involving any aspect of our business;

 

    material misstatements in reports;

 

    any activity that is specifically prohibited by the Code; and

 

    deviations from required controls and procedures that safeguard clients and us.

 

January 2016

 

24


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

A PPENDIX A

D EFINITIONS

 

General Note:

The definitions and terms used in the Code are intended to mean the same as they do under the 1940 Act and the other Federal Securities Laws. If a definition hereunder conflicts with the definition in the 1940 Act or other Federal Securities Laws, or if a term used in the Code is not defined, you should follow the definitions and meanings in the 1940 Act or other Federal Securities Laws, as applicable.

 

Accounts    Accounts of investment advisory clients of Covered Companies, including but not limited to registered and unregistered investment companies and Managed Accounts.
Automatic Investment Plan    A program that allows a person to purchase or sell securities, automatically and on a regular basis, with any further action by the person. May be part of a SIP (systematic investment plan), SWP (systematic withdrawal plan), SPP (stock purchase plan), DRIP (dividend reinvestment plan), or employer-sponsored plan.
Beneficial Owner (Ownership)    You are the “beneficial owner” of any securities in which you have a direct or indirect financial or “pecuniary” interest, whether or not you have the power to buy and sell, or to vote, the securities.
   In addition, you are the “beneficial owner” of securities in which an Immediate Family Member has a direct or indirect financial or pecuniary interest, whether or not you or the Immediate Family Member has the power to buy and sell, or to vote, the securities. For example, you have Beneficial Ownership of securities in trusts of which Immediate Family Members are beneficiaries.
   You are also the “beneficial owner” of securities in any account, including but not limited to those of relatives, friends and entities in which you have a non-controlling interest, over which you exercise investment discretion. Such accounts do not include accounts you manage on behalf of a Covered Company or any other affiliate of Wells Fargo & Co.
Control    The power to exercise a controlling influence over the management or policies of a company, unless the power is solely the result of an official position with such company. Owning 25% or more of a company’s outstanding voting securities is presumed to give you control over the company. (See Section 2(a)(9) of the 1940 Act for a complete definition.)

 

Appendix A    Definitions

 

25


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

Contract for Differences    A Contract for Differences (CFDs) is a derivatives product that allows you to trade on live market price movements without actually owning the underlying instrument on which your contract is based.
Covered Company    Wells Capital Management, Inc.
Equivalent Security    Any security issued by the same entity as the issuer of a subject security that is convertible into the equity security of the issuer. Examples include, but are not limited to, options, rights, stock appreciation rights, warrants and convertible bonds.
Excessive Trading    A high number of transactions during any month could be considered Excessive Trading. Compliance will report any Excessive Trading to management.
Federal Securities Laws    The Securities Act of 1933 (15 U.S.C. 77a-aa), the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78a—mm), the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (Pub. L. 107-204, 116 Stat. 745 (2002)), the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a), the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80b), Title V of the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act (Pub. L. No. 100-102, 113 Stat. 1338 (1999)), any rules adopted by the SEC under any of these statutes, the Bank Secrecy Act (31 U.S.C. 5311-5314; 5316-5332) as it applies to funds and investment advisers, and any rules adopted thereunder by the SEC or the Department of the Treasury.
Financial or Pecuniary Interest    The opportunity for you or your Immediate Family Member, directly or indirectly, to profit or share in any profit derived from a securities transaction. You or your Immediate Family Member may have a financial interest in:

 

    Your accounts or the accounts of Immediate Family Members;

 

    A partnership or limited liability company, if you or an Immediate Family Member is a general partner or a managing member;

 

    A corporation or similar business entity, if you or an Immediate Family Member has or shares investment control; or

 

    A trust, if you or an Immediate Family Member is a beneficiary.

 

Appendix A    Definitions

 

26


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

High-quality short-term

debt instrument

   Any instrument that has a maturity at issuance of less than 366 days and that is rated in one of the two highest rating categories by a nationally recognized statistical rating organization such as Moody’s Investors Service.
Immediate Family Member    Any of the following persons who reside in the same household with you:

 

•    spouse

   •    grandparent    •    mother-in-law

•    domestic partner

   •    grandchild    •    father-in-law

•    parent

   •    brother    •    daughter-in-law

•    stepparent

   •    sister    •    son-in-law

•    child (including adopted)

      •    sister-in-law

•    stepchild

      •    brother-in-law

 

   Immediate Family Member also includes any other relationship that the CCO determines could lead to possible conflicts of interest, diversions of corporate opportunity, or appearances of impropriety.
Individual Savings Account    An ISA is a savings account on which the return is tax-free, and which does not have to be declared in the investor’s tax return. Permissible investments include: (i) cash; and (ii) stocks and shares, and life assurance policies.
Investment Club    An investment club is a group of people who pool their money to make investments. Usually, investment clubs are organized as partnerships and, after the members study different investments, the group decides to buy or sell based on a majority vote of the members. Club meetings may be educational and each member may actively participate in investment decisions.
IPO    An initial public offering, or the first sale of a company’s securities to public investors. Specifically it is an offering of securities registered under the Securities Act of 1933, the issuer of which, immediately before registration, was not subject to the reporting requirements of Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
Large Capitalization Security    A security whose issuer has equity market capitalization of more than $5 billion.

 

Appendix A    Definitions

 

27


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

Managed Account    Any account for which the holder gives, in writing, his/her broker or someone else the authority to buy and sell securities, either absolutely or subject to certain restrictions. In other words, the holder gives up the right to decide what securities are bought or sold for the account.
Non-Public Information    Any information that is not generally available to the general public in widely disseminated media reports, SEC filings, public reports, prospectuses, or similar publications or sources.
Personal Securities Account    Any holding of Securities of which you have Beneficial Ownership, other than a holding of Securities previously approved in writing by the Code of Ethics Compliance Officer over which you have no direct influence or Control. A Personal Securities Account is not limited to securities accounts maintained at brokerage firms and/or reportable accounts firms, but also includes holdings of Securities owned directly by you or an Immediate Family Member or held through a retirement plan of Wachovia, Wells Fargo & Co. or any other employer.
Personal Securities Transaction    A purchase or sale of a Security, of which you have or acquire Beneficial Ownership.
Private Placement    An offering that is exempt from registration under section 4(2) or 4(6) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or Rule 504, Rule 505 or Rule 506 thereunder.
Purchase or Sale of a Security    Includes, among other things, gifting or the writing of an option to purchase or sell a security.
Reportable 529 Plan    Edvest and tomorrow’s scholar. See Section 2.4(1).
Reportable Fund    Reportable Fund means (i) any investment company registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, for which a Covered Company serves as an investment adviser as defined in Section 2(a)(20) of that Act, or (ii) any investment company registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, whose investment adviser or principal underwriter controls a Covered Company, is controlled by a Covered Company, or is under common control with a Covered Company; provided, however, that Reportable Fund shall not include an investment company that holds itself out as a money market fund. For purposes of this definition, “control” has the same meaning as it does in Section 2(a)(9) of the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended. A list of all Reportable Funds shall be maintained and made available for reference under “Reportable Funds” under the “Code of Ethics” tab in the Code of Ethics Team InvestNet web page.

 

Appendix A    Definitions

 

28


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

 

Security/Securities    As defined under Section 2(a)(36) of the 1940 Act or Section 202(a)(18) of the Advisers Act, except that it does not include direct obligations of the U.S. Government; bankers’ acceptances; bank certificates of deposit; commercial paper; high quality short-term debt instruments, including repurchase agreements; shares issued by affiliated or unaffiliated money market mutual funds; or shares issued by open-end investment companies other than the Reportable Funds.
Spread Betting    Spread betting is any of various types of wagering on the outcome of an event, where the pay-off is based on the accuracy of the wager, rather than a simple “win or lose” outcome, such as fixed-odds betting. A spread is a range of outcomes and the bet is whether the outcome will be above or below the spread.
Trust Accounts    An account that is managed by one party for the benefit of another. All Access Persons must report securities for the following types of trust accounts (Note: Access Persons must also pre-clear securities for the account types listed below.):

 

    A trust account for which the Access Person is a trustee, or beneficiary and has both investment control and a pecuniary interest;

 

    A trust account for which the Access Person is a trustee that has investment control and at least one beneficiary of the trust is the trustee’s immediate family member (whether they live with the trustee or not);

 

    A trust account for which the Access Person is a trustee that receives a performance-related fee from the trust;

 

    A trust account for which the Access Person is a settlor that has both the power to revoke the trust without the consent of another person and investment control.

 

Appendix A    Definitions

 

29


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

A PPENDIX B

R EGISTERED P RODUCTS

 

 

PLEASE CONSULT THE WELLSCAP WEBSITE FOR A COMPLETE LIST OF MUTUAL FUNDS AND CLOSED END FUNDS TO WHICH THE CODE APPLIES. PLEASE REFER TO THE FOLLOWING WEBSITE FOR A CURRENT LIST OF REPORTABLE FUNDS:

https://wellscap.ptaconnect.com/pta/openDocument.do?st=T376-RNOQ-YRTQ-RIDI-QL31-7SBY-V91V-JY6E&name=281_1400097842793.PDF&path=//PTANAS01/Clients/WELLSCA P/docs/&st=T376-RNOQ-YRTQ-RIDI-QL31-7SBY-V91V-JY6E

 

Appendix B    Mutual Fund Products

 

30


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

A PPENDIX C

C OMPLIANCE C ODE C HANGES

 

 

1.   

Section 5.3 Political Contributions

Added Political Contribution language for investment advisers.

   April 2012
2.   

Appendix B Relevant Code of Ethics Team Staff List

Added current Compliance staff.

   April 2012
3.   

Appendix C Gifts and Activities with Customers or Vendors

Added ERISA guidelines for gifts

   April 2012
4.   

Section 1.4 You are considered to be an Access Person

Modified definition of an Access Person

   June 2012
5.   

Cover Page and Preamble

Cover page revised and Preamble created for joint use of Policies and Procedures with related entities, as needed

   August 2012
6.   

Preamble

Preamble revised for joint use of Policies and Procedures with related entities, as needed (added Metropolitan West Capital Management, LLC)

   April 2014
7.    Appendix B    December 2014
   Updated appendix to remove Code of Ethics staff names and replace with an email distribution list for all questions related to the Code of Ethics or the Code of Ethics System.   
8.    Various Sections    May 2015
   Introduction   
   Added ECM and FIA as entities the code will apply to   
   Section 3.2 Trade Restrictions and Prohibitions   
   Added language noting yearly 25 buy transaction limit, additional scrutiny placed on PM transactions in securities also held in client accounts, and prohibiting spread betting   
   Section 2.2 Reporting Your Personal Securities Accounts and Transactions Added Individual Savings Accounts (ISAs)   
  

Section 5.1 Gifts

Increased gift limit to $200

  
   Section 5.4 Global Anti-Corruption Policies, Training and Recordkeeping Added Global Anti-Corruption and UK Bribery Act language   
   Appendix A   
   Added definitions for Independent Savings Accounts (ISAs), Spread Betting and Trusts   
   Removed Appendix B & C and incorporated them into the document   

 

Appendix C    Compliance Code Changes

 

31


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

9.   

Section 2.3 Summary of Reportable Transaction Table

Removed “U.S.” from U.S. Govt Bonds to indicate foreign Govt bonds are non-reportable

   July 2015
10.   

Section 3.1 Pre-Clearance Transactions Table

Removed “U.S.” from U.S. Govt Bonds to indicate foreign Govt bonds are non-preclearable

Investment Trusts changed from “No” to “Yes” to indicate they must be pre-cleared

   July 2015
11.   

Section 3.2 Trade Restrictions and Prohibitions

Contract for Differences added to the list of prohibitions IPO Prohibition clarified to exclude Govt bond issues

Loans prohibited for ECM team members

   July 2015
12.   

Section 5.1 Gifts

Added language regarding pre-clearance request submission in PTA Removed “gift cards or gift certificates” from the section on accepting gifts, as they are not permitted

   July 2015
13.   

Section 5.2 Outside Business Activity

Added clarifying language and reference to disclosure submission in PTA

   July 2015
14.   

Section 5.2 Political Contributions

Added clarifying language and reference to pre-clearance request submission in PTA

   July 2015
15.   

Section 5.4 Global Anti-Corruption Policies

Changed all Global Antii-Corruption (GAC) references to Anti-Bribery and Corruption

(ABC) to reflect the Wholesale name change.

Changed the entertainment threshold for Non-US Govt employees to $100 to reflect the current policy

Added cautionary language regarding varying jurisdictional limitations

   July 2015
16.   

Section 6 The Volcker Rule

New section added to the COE

   July 2015
17.    Document Footer    July 2015
   Removed “Wells Fargo Internal Use”   
18.    Appendix A    July 2015
   Added ‘Contract for Differences”   
19.    Section 2.2 Reporting Your Personal Sec Accts and Transactions Language added for new quarterly and annual certs (team members are now responsible for adding their own transactions in PTA). Additional Items: Language regarding Managed Accounts    Jan 2016

 

Appendix C    Compliance Code Changes

 

32


Wells Capital Management Code of Ethics Policy

 

 

 

20.    Section 3.2 Trade Restrictions and Prohibitions ECM Loan statement modified – process has been established    Jan 2016
21.   

Section 4.1 What is Insider Trading

Revised definition of scalping

   Jan 2016
22.    Section 5.1 Gifts    Jan 2016
   Added language for WFFD licensed team members Team member gifts limited to $200 per corporate policy Added clarification regarding tickets Expanded Entertainment language, including receipt of entertainment in excess of $300 must be logged Added Taft-Hartley Language – all G&E must be logged for LMRDA reporting   
23.    Section 5.4 Anti-Bribery and Corruption    Jan 2016
   Modified language to mirror newly adopted Wholesale a Corporate standards, and referenced the new standalone ABC policy   
24.    Section 7 Training    Jan 2016
   Added language regarding failure to complete required courses   
25.    Section 8.2 Penalties    Jan 2016
   Added language about training, G&E, political contributions 3 rd Minor offense changed to 10 day personal trading ban 2 nd Substantive offense changed to 30 day personal trading ban 3 rd Substantive offense changed t0 45 day personal trading ban   
26.    Appendix A    Jan 2016
   Removed language regarding Trusts (added May 2015)   

 

Appendix C    Compliance Code Changes

 

33

NORTHERN CROSS, LLC

Code of Ethics

I. Introduction

The policies in this Code of Ethics reflect the assumption and expectation of Northern Cross, LLC (“Northern Cross”) of unqualified loyalty to the interests of Northern Cross and its clients on the part of each employee of Northern Cross. In the course of their service to Northern Cross, employees must be under no influence which may cause them to serve their own or someone else’s interests rather than those of Northern Cross or its clients.

Northern Cross’s policies reflect its desire to detect and prevent not only situations involving actual or potential conflict of interests, but also those situations involving only an appearance of conflict or of unethical conduct. Northern Cross’s business is one dependent upon public confidence. The mere appearance of possibility of doubtful loyalty is as important to avoid as actual disloyalty itself. The appearance of impropriety could besmirch Northern Cross’s name and damage its reputation to the detriment of all those with whom we do business.

II. Statement of General Principles

It is the policy of Northern Cross that all of its employees must comply with all federal securities laws (as defined below in Section IV) applicable to its business. The fundamental position of Northern Cross is, and has been, that its employees shall place at all times the interests of Northern Cross’s clients first. Accordingly, private financial transactions by Northern Cross employees who are “access persons” (as defined below in Section IV) of Northern Cross must be conducted consistent with this Code of Ethics and in such a manner as to avoid any actual or potential conflict of interest or any abuse of an access person’s position of trust and responsibility. Further, access persons should not take inappropriate advantage of their positions with or on behalf of any client of Northern Cross.

Without limiting in any manner the fiduciary duty owed by access persons to the clients of Northern Cross or the provisions of this Code of Ethics, it should be noted that Northern Cross considers it proper that purchases and sales be made by its access persons in the marketplace of securities owned by the clients of Northern Cross; provided, however, that such securities transactions comply with the spirit of, and the specific restrictions and limitations set forth in, this Code of Ethics. Such personal securities transactions should also be made in amounts consistent with the normal investment practice of the person involved and, with respect to investment personnel (as defined below in Section IV), with an investment, rather than a trading, outlook. Not only does this policy encourage investment freedom and result in investment experience, but it also fosters a continuing personal interest in such investments by those responsible for the continuous supervision of the clients’ portfolios. It is also evidence of confidence in the investments made.

In making personal investment decisions with respect to any security, however, extreme care must be exercised by access persons to insure that the prohibitions of this Code of Ethics are not violated. Further, personal investing by an access person should be conducted in such a manner so as to eliminate the possibility that the access person’s time and attention is being devoted to his or her personal investments at the expense of time and attention that should be devoted to management of a client’s portfolio.


It bears emphasis that technical compliance with procedures, prohibitions and limitations of this Code of Ethics will not automatically insulate from scrutiny personal securities transactions which show a pattern of abuse by an access person of his or her fiduciary duty to any client of Northern Cross.

III. Legal Requirements

Section 17(j) of the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”), provides, among other things, that it is unlawful for any affiliated person of Northern Cross to engage in any act, practice or course of business in connection with the purchase or sale, directly or indirectly, by such affiliated person of any security held or to be acquired by an investment company in contravention of such rules and regulations as the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Commission”) may adopt to define and prescribe means reasonably necessary to prevent such acts, practices or courses of business as are fraudulent, deceptive or manipulative. Pursuant to Section 17(j), the Commission has adopted Rule 17j-1, which states that it is unlawful for any affiliated person of Northern Cross, in connection with the purchase or sale of a security held or to be acquired (as defined in the Rule) by an investment company:

 

  (i) to employ any device, scheme or artifice to defraud a client, which is an investment company;

 

  (ii) to make to a client, which is an investment company, any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state to a client a material fact necessary in order to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading;

 

  (iii) to engage in any act, practice or course of business which operates or would operate as a fraud or deceit upon a client, which is an investment company; or

 

  (iv) to engage in any manipulative practice with respect to a client, which is an investment company.

Rule 17j-1 requires Northern Cross, as an investment adviser to investment companies (as defined below in Section (IV), to adopt a written code of ethics containing provisions reasonably necessary to prevent its access persons from engaging in any of the prohibited conduct referenced above.

In addition, Section 204A of the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, as amended (the “Advisers Act”), requires investment advisers such as Northern Cross to establish, maintain, and enforce written policies and procedures reasonably designed, taking into consideration the nature of such investment adviser’s business, to prevent the misuse in violation of the Advisers Act or the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, or the rules or regulations thereunder, of material, nonpublic information by such investment adviser or any person associated with such investment adviser. Pursuant to Section 204A of the Advisers Act, the Commission has adopted Rule 204A-1, which requires Northern Cross to establish, maintain and enforce a written code of ethics that, at a minimum, includes:


  (i) standards of conduct and compliance with federal securities laws;

 

  (ii) personal securities trading;

 

  (iii) initial public offerings and limited offerings;

 

  (iv) reporting violations of the code; and

 

  (v) educating employees about the code and obtaining an employee acknowledgement.

IV. Definitions

For purposes of this Code of Ethics, the following definitions shall apply:

 

  1. The term “ access person ” shall mean any director, officer or advisory person (as defined below) of Northern Cross.

 

  2. The term “ advisory person ” shall mean: (i) every employee of Northern Cross (or of any company in a control relationship to Northern Cross) (a) who makes, participates in, or obtains or has access to information regarding, the purchase or sale of a security (as defined below) by a client, or whose functions relate to the making of any recommendations with respect to such purchases or sales or (b) who has access to nonpublic information regarding the portfolio holdings of a client; and (ii) every natural person in a control relationship to Northern Cross (a) who obtains information concerning recommendations made to a client with regard to the purchase or sale of a security or (b) who has access to nonpublic information regarding the portfolio holdings of a client.

 

  3. A security is “ being considered for purchase or sale ” when a recommendation to purchase or sell a security has been made and communicated and, with respect to the person making the recommendation, when such person seriously considers making such a recommendation.

 

  4. The term “ beneficial ownership ” shall mean a direct or indirect “pecuniary interest” (as defined in subparagraph (a) (2) of Rule 16a-1 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended) that is held or shared by a person directly or indirectly (through any contract, arrangement, understanding, relationship or otherwise) in a security. While the definition of “pecuniary interest” in subparagraph (a) (2) of Rule 16a-1 is complex, the term generally means the opportunity directly or indirectly to provide or share in any profit derived from a transaction in a security. An indirect pecuniary interest in securities by a person would be deemed to exist as a result of: (i) ownership of securities by any of such person’s immediate family members sharing the same household (including child, stepchild, grandchild, parent, stepparent, grandparent, spouse, sibling, mother- or father-in-law, sister- or brother-in-law, and son- or daughter-in-law; (ii) the person’s partnership interest in the portfolio securities held by a general or limited partnership; (iii) the existence of a performance-related fee (not simply an asset-based fee) received by such person as broker, dealer, investment adviser or


  manager to a securities account; (iv) the person’s right to receive dividends from a security provided such right is separate or separable from the underlying securities; (v) the person’s interest in securities held by a trust under certain circumstances; and (vi) the person’s right to acquire securities through the exercise or conversion of a “derivative security” (which term excludes (a) a broad-based index option or future, (b) a right with an exercise or conversion privilege at a price that is not fixed, and (c) a security giving rise to the right to receive such other security only pro rata and by virtue of a merger, consolidation or exchange offer involving the issuer of the first security).

 

  5. The term “ client ” shall mean an entity (natural person, corporation, investment company or other legal structure having the power to enter into legal contracts), which has entered into a contract with Northern Cross to receive investment management services.

 

  6. The term “ control ” shall mean the power to exercise a controlling influence over the management or policies of Northern Cross, unless such power is solely the result of an official position with Northern Cross, all as determined in accordance with Section 2 (a) (9) of the 1940 Act.

 

  7. The term “ federal securities laws ” shall mean the Securities Act of 1933, the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the 1940 Act, the Advisers Act, Title V of the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, any rules adopted by the Commission under any of these statutes, the Bank Secrecy Act as it applies to funds and investment advisers, and any rules adopted thereunder by the Commission or the Department of the Treasury.

 

  8. The term “ initial public offering ” shall mean an offering of securities registered under the Securities Act of 1933, the issuer of which, immediately before the registration, was not subject to the reporting requirements of sections 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

 

  9. The term “ investment company ” shall mean a management investment company registered as such under the 1940 Act and for which Northern Cross is the investment adviser or sub-adviser regardless of whether the investment company has entered into a contract for investment management services with Northern Cross.

 

  10. The term “ investment personnel ” shall mean all portfolio managers of Northern Cross and other advisory persons who assist the portfolio managers in making investment decisions for a client, including, but not limited to, analysts and traders of Northern Cross.

 

  11. The term “ limited offering ” shall mean an offering that is exempt from registration under the Securities Act of 1933 pursuant to section 4(2) or section 4(6) thereof or pursuant to Rule 504, Rule 505, or Rule 506 thereunder.

 

  12. The term “ material nonpublic information ” with respect to an issuer shall mean information, not yet released to the public that would have a substantial likelihood of affecting a reasonable investor’s decision to buy or sell any securities of such issuer.

 

  13. The term “ Performance Accounts ” shall mean all clients for which Northern Cross receives a performance-related fee and in which Northern Cross is deemed to have an indirect pecuniary interest because of the application of Rule 16a-1(a)(2)(ii)(C) under the Securities and Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, as required by Rule 17j-1 under the 1940 Act.


  14. The term “ purchase ” shall include the writing of an option to purchase.

 

  15. The term “ Review Officer ” shall mean the Chief Compliance Officer of Northern Cross or the employee of Boston Investor Services Inc. designated from time to time by Northern Cross to receive and review reports of purchases and sales by access persons. The term “ Alternate Review Officer ” shall mean the officer of Boston Investor Services Inc. designated from time to time by Northern Cross to receive and review reports of purchases and sales by the Review Officer, and who shall act in all respects in the manner prescribed herein for the Review Officer. If the CCO or Review Officer wishes to enter into a transaction which requires authorization, then the alternate review officer shall act in the role of Review Officer in reviewing and approving the transaction.

 

  16. The term “ sale ” shall include the writing of an option to sell.

 

  17. The term “ security ” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 2 (a)(36) of the 1940 Act, except that it shall not include shares of NON-CLIENT investment companies ( which also do not, either directly or through their underwriters or other investment advisers, control Northern Cross or are not controlled by or under common control with Northern Cross ), securities issued by the United States government, short-term securities which are “government securities” within the meaning of Section 2 (a)(16) of the 1940 Act, bankers’ acceptances, bank certificates of deposit, commercial paper and such other money market instruments as may designated from time to time by Northern Cross.

V. Substantive Restrictions On Personal Trading Activities

A. Prohibited Activities

While the scope of actions which may violate the Statement of General Principles set forth above cannot be defined exactly, such actions would always include at least the following prohibited activities.

1. All access persons and employees shall avoid profiting by securities transactions of a short-term trading nature (including market timing) involving shares of an investment company. Transactions which involve a purchase and sale, or sale and purchase, of shares of the same series of an investment company (excluding Money Market Funds and Short Duration Funds or similar short-term fixed income fund) within sixty (60) calendar days shall be deemed to be of a trading nature and thus prohibited unless prior written approval of the transaction is obtained from the Review Officer. This restriction shall also not apply to purchase and sales of shares an investment company pursuant to an automatic dividend reinvestment plan or automatic investment, exchange or withdrawal plan, which includes purchases of shares of an investment company through automatic contributions to an employer sponsored retirement or employee benefit plan.


2. No access person or employee shall, directly or indirectly, purchase or sell securities in such away that the access person knew, or reasonably should have known, that such securities transactions compete in the market with actual or considered securities transactions for any client of Northern Cross, or otherwise personally act to injure any client’s securities transactions;

3. No access person or employee shall use the knowledge of securities purchased or sold by any client of Northern Cross or securities being considered for purchase or sale by any client of Northern Cross to profit personally, directly or indirectly, by the market effect of such transactions;

4. No access person or employee shall, directly or indirectly, communicate to any person who is not an access person any material nonpublic information relating to any client of Northern Cross or any issuer of any security owned by any client of Northern Cross, including, without limitation, the purchase or sale or considered purchase or sale of a security on behalf or any client of Northern Cross, except to the extent necessary to effectuate securities transactions on behalf of the client of Northern Cross;

5. No access person or employee shall, directly or indirectly, execute a personal securities transaction on a day during which a client of Northern Cross has a pending “buy” or “sell” order in that same or equivalent security until that order is executed or withdrawn;

6. No access person or employee shall accept any gift or other thing of more than de minimis value from any person or entity that does business with or on behalf of client;

7. No access persons or employee shall serve on the board of directors of any publicly traded company, absent prior written authorization and determination by the President of Northern Cross that the board service would be consistent with the interests of clients. Where board service is authorized, access persons serving as directors normally should be isolated from those persons making investment decisions through “Chinese Wall” or other procedures. All access persons and employees are prohibited from accepting any service, employment, engagement, connection, association or affiliation in or with any enterprise, business of otherwise which is likely to materially interfere with the effective discharge of responsibilities to Northern Cross and its clients;

8. Investment personnel shall avoid profiting by securities transactions of a trading nature, which transactions are defined as a purchase and sale, or sale and purchase, of the same (or equivalent) securities within sixty (60) calendar days;

9. Investment personnel shall not, directly or indirectly, purchase any security sold in an initial public offering. Access persons and employees shall not, directly or indirectly, purchase any security sold in an initial public offering without obtaining prior written approval from the Review Officer;

10. Investment personnel, access persons and employees shall not, directly or indirectly, purchase any security issued pursuant to a limited offering without obtaining prior written approval from the Review Officer. Investment personnel who have been authorized to acquire securities in a private placement must disclose such investment when they are involved in a client’s subsequent consideration of an investment in the issuer. In such circumstances, the client’s decision to purchase securities of the issuer must be independently reviewed by investment personnel with no personal interest in the issuer;


11. Investment personnel shall not recommend any securities transaction on behalf of a client without having previously disclosed any beneficial ownership interest in such securities or the issuer thereof to the Review Officer including without limitation:

a. his or her beneficial ownership of any securities of such issuer;

b. any contemplated transaction by such person in such securities;

c. any position with such issuer or its affiliates; and

d. any present or proposed business relationship between such issuer or its affiliates and such person or any party in which such person has a significant interest.

Such interested investment personnel may not participate in the decision for the client to purchase and sell securities of such issuer.

12. No Investment personnel shall, directly or indirectly, purchase or sell any security or equivalent security in which he or she has, or by reason of such purchase acquires, any beneficial ownership within a period of seven (7) calendar days before and after a client has purchased or sold such security.

B. Exempt Transactions and Conduct

This Code of Ethics shall not be deemed to be violated by any of the following transactions:

1. Purchases or sales for an account over which the access person has no direct or indirect influence or control;

2. Purchases or sales which are non-volitional on the part of the access person;

3. Purchases which are part of an automatic dividend reinvestment plan;

4. Purchases made by exercising rights distributed by an issuer pro rata to all holders of a class of its securities, to the extent such rights were acquired by the access person from the issuer, and sales of such rights so acquired;

5. Tenders of securities pursuant to tender offers which are expressly conditioned on the tender offer’s acquisition of all of the securities of the same class;

6. Purchases or sales for which the access person has received prior written approval from the Review Officer. Prior approval shall be granted only if a purchase or sale of securities is consistent with the purposes of this Code of Ethics and the federal securities laws and the rules thereunder; and

7. Purchases or sales made in good faith on behalf of a client, it being understood by, and disclosed to, each client that Northern Cross may make contemporaneous investment decisions and cause to be effected contemporaneous executions on behalf of one or more of the clients and that such executions may increase or decrease the price at which securities are purchased or sold for the clients.


VI. Compliance Procedures

A. Ownership of Shares of an Investment Company

Every access person and employee who beneficially owns shares of an investment company is required to own such shares either:

 

(i) directly with the investment company in the name of the employee or in the name of an immediate family member (or other person or entity whose direct ownership causes the employee to be deemed to be the beneficial owner of the shares),

 

(ii) through a retirement or employee benefit plan sponsored by a family member’s employer to the extent the access person or employee is the beneficial owner of the shares as a result of the ownership of the shares by that family member.

Every access person and employee is required to notify the Review Officer in writing within thirty (30) days of a list of the persons (other than the employee) who are the record owners of the shares of an investment company which are beneficially owned by the access person or employee and the associated account numbers or name of employer sponsoring the retirement or employee benefit plan. Every access person and employee is required to notify the Review Officer in writing within thirty (30) days of any change to that list, including the addition of new persons to the list.

B. Preclearance for Personal Securities Investments

Every access person and employee shall be required to submit on Form III their intent to trade for their own account to the Review Officer. For any equity trade, trades must be precleared with the President of Northern Cross, LLC or in his absence, another Principal of LLC before submitting Form III to the Review Officer. ETF’s (except for those on the pre- approved ETF list) must be precleared and reported in the same manner as equity trades. The President will preclear all equity trades and ETF’s with another Principal of LLC. The Review Officer will be obligated to determine whether any prohibitions or restrictions apply to the relevant securities and respond to the access persons submitting such intent to trade forms in writing. Except with respect to initial public offerings and limited offerings, if the Review Officer does not respond in writing within two business days following the date of submission, the trade may be considered “precleared” and the access person or e mployee may execute such “precleared” trade anytime within two business days following the lapse of the Review Officer’s two day period. If four business days have elapsed, not including the day the form was submitted, and the access person’s trade has not been executed, “preclearance” will lapse and the access person may not trade without violating this preclearance provision. The access person will be required to submit another Form III and have the intended trade “precleared” again.

Access persons and employees are exempt from preclearing employee sponsored investments in company sponsored retirement or employee benefit plan where the employer submits an annual statement of investments for employees.


C. Records of Securities Transactions

1. Upon the discretion and written request of the Review Officer, access persons are required to direct their brokers to supply to Northern Cross on a timely basis duplicate copies of confirmations of all securities transactions and copies of periodic statements for all securities accounts in which the access person has a beneficial ownership interest. Such brokerage reports may be provided in lieu of the reports required under Paragraph D of this Section VI, provided that such brokerage reports contain all the information required by Paragraph D.2 and are provided within the time period specified in Paragraph D.2.

D. Personal Reporting Requirements

1. Each access person and employee shall submit to the Review Officer a report in the form annexed hereto as Form I or in similar form (such as a computer printout), which report shall set forth at least the information described in subparagraph 2 of this Paragraph D as to all securities transactions and any securities accounts opened during each quarterly period, in which such access person has, or by reason of such transactions or new account acquires of disposes of, any beneficial ownership of a security (including, in the case of the account information required under subparagraph D.2.B, securities excepted from the definition of securities in Section IV.17).

Any access person or employee who is the beneficial owner of shares of an investment company which are held through a retirement or employee benefit plan shall submit to the Review Officer a separate report in the form annexed hereto as Form I or in similar form, in addition to the report required by subparagraph 2 of this Paragraph D , which report shall set forth the information described in subparagraph 2 of this Paragraph D solely as to transactions in shares of an investment company. The access person or employee is not required to include in this report transactions in shares of money market funds and short duration funds (or similar short-term fixed income fund) and purchases and sales pursuant to an automatic dividend reinvestment plan or automatic investment, exchange or withdrawal plan, including purchases through automatic contributions to the retirement or employee benefit plan. If no transactions in any investment company shares required to be reported were effected during a quarterly period , such access perso n or employee shall submit to Review Officer a report on Form I within the time-frame specified below stating that no reportable securities transactions were effected.

2. Every report on Form I shall be made not later than thirty (30) days after the end of each calendar quarter in which the transaction(s) to which the report relates was effected and shall contain the following information:

 

  A. Transactions in Securities.

 

  (1) the date of each transaction, the title, the exchange ticker symbol or CUSIP number (as applicable), the interest rate and maturity date (if applicable), the class and number of shares, and the principal amount of each security involved;

 

  (2) the nature of each transaction (i.e., purchases, sale or other type of acquisition or disposition);

 

  (3) the price at which each transaction was effected; and


  (4) the name of the broker, dealer or bank with or through whom each transaction was effected; and

 

  (5) the signature of the employee/access person and the date the report was submitted.

If no transactions in any securities required to be reported were effected during a quarterly period by an access person or employee such access person or employee shall submit to the Review Officer a report on Form I within the time-frame specified above stating that no reportable securities transactions were effected. However, if an access person has provided for the Review Officer to receive all of his or her brokerage statements and confirmations with respect to all accounts over which he or she has beneficial ownership, that access person or employee is not required to submit a report indicating there were no reportable securities transactions during that quarterly period.

An access person need not submit a transactions report under this subparagraph D.2.A:

(1) with respect to any securities (including those excepted from the if the access person has provided for the Review Officer to receive all of his or her brokerage statements and such statements contain all of the information required under this subparagraph.

 

  B. Securities Accounts Opened ( NOTE: This includes accounts holding ANY securities, including those excepted from the definition of securities in Section IV.17. )

 

  (1) the name of the broker, dealer or bank with which the access person established the account;

 

  (2) the date the account was established; and

 

  (3) the date the report was submitted by the access person.

An access person or employee need not submit a report under this Paragraph D:

 

  (1) with respect to transactions effected for, and securities held in, any account over which the person has no direct or indirect influence or control;

 

  (2) with respect to transactions effected pursuant to an automatic investment plan; and

 

  (3) if the access person has provided for the Review Officer to receive all of his or her brokerage statements and such statements contain all of the information required by this Paragraph D.2 and are submitted within the required time period.


E. Disclosure of Personal Holdings

1. Each access person and employee shall submit to Northern Cross an initial holdings report no later than 10 days after the person becomes an access person or employee which contains the following information (with such information current as of a date no more than 30 days before the report is submitted):

(i) The title and type of security, the exchange ticker symbol or CUSIP number (as applicable), the interest rate and maturity date (as applicable), the number of shares and principal amount of each security in which the access person or employee had any beneficial ownership when the person became an access person or employee ;

(ii) The name of any broker, dealer of bank with whom the access person or employee maintained an account in which any securities (including the securities which are excepted from the definition of securities in Section IV.14.) were held for the direct or indirect benefit of the access person or employee s of the date the person became an access person or employee ; and

(iii) The date the report was submitted.

2. Each access person and employee shall submit to Northern Cross an annual holdings report which contains the following information (with such information current as of a date no more than 30 days before the report is submitted):

(i) The title, number of shares and principal amount of each security in which the access person or employee had any beneficial ownership;

(ii) The name of any broker, dealer of bank with whom the access person or employee maintained an account in which any securities (including the securities which are excepted from the definition of securities in Section IV.17.) were held for the direct or indirect benefit of the access person or employee ; and

(iii) The date the report was submitted.

If an access person or employee is the beneficial owner of shares of an investment company which are held through a retirement or employee benefit plan, the access person or employee shall submit to the Review Officer initial an annual holdings reports in the manner set forth above for access persons which disclose the beneficial ownership of shares of an investment company held through the retirement or employee benefit plan. In place of disclosing the name of any broker, dealer or bank with whom the account was maintained, the employee shall disclose the name of the employer sponsoring each retirement or employee benefit plan in which shares of the investment company are held.

An access person or employee need not submit a report under this Paragraph E with respect to securities held in any account over which the person has no direct or indirect influence or control however, all access persons are required to list annually all of the accounts in which they have a beneficial ownership, including brokerage or custodial accounts owned by the access person, their immediate family members or other individuals with whom the access person shares a household.


F. Reporting of Code Violations

All employees of Northern Cross shall have an obligation to report any suspected or actual violations of this Code of Ethics to Northern Cross’s Chief Compliance Officer who shall address the matter with Northern Cross’s President. If the President of Northern Cross, after consultation with the Chief Compliance Officer and, as necessary, legal counsel, determines a violation has occurred, he or she shall immediately impose sanctions as set forth in Section VII, inform the client affected and report such sanctions to the client.

G. Review of Reports

1. The Review Officer or the Alternate Review Officer or their designee shall review all reports required by Paragraphs D and E of this Section VI.

2. At the end of each calendar quarter, the Review Officer shall prepare a summary of all transactions by access persons in securities which were purchased, sold, held or considered for purchase or sale by each client during the prior quarter.

3. Both the Review Officer and the Alternate Review Officer shall compare all reported personal securities transaction with completed and contemplated portfolio transactions of the client to determine whether a violation of this Code of Ethics may have occurred. The Review Officer and Alternative Review Officer shall also compare an access person’s and employee’s reported personal securities transactions with the holdings disclosed on the access person’s or employee’s annual holdings report. Before making any determination that a violation has been committed by any person, the Review Officer shall give such person an opportunity to supply additional explanatory material.

H. Review of Performance Accounts

If Applicable, the Review Officer shall review on a quarterly basis all transactions in securities on behalf of the Performance Accounts that were conducted simultaneously with transactions in the same securities on behalf of other clients.

I. Annual Certification of Compliance

All Northern Cross employees shall certify annually on the form annexed hereto as Form IV that they (i) have received, read and understand this Code of Ethics and recognize that they are subject hereto, (ii) have complied with the requirements of this Code of Ethics and (iii) will comply with all applicable requirements of this Code of Ethics.

J. Joint Participation

Access persons and employees should be aware that a specific provision of the 1940 Act prohibits such persons, in the absence of an order of the Commission, from effecting a transaction in which an investment company is a “joint or a joint and several participant” with such person. Any transaction which suggests the possibility of a question in this area should be presented to legal counsel for review.


K. Investment Company Board Approval and Annual Reports to Board

1. Northern Cross shall submit this Code of Ethics, and any material changes to this Code of Ethics, to the board of directors of any investment company for approval.

2. No less frequently than annually, Northern Cross shall submit to the board of directors of any investment company, a written report that:

 

  (i) describes any issues arising under this Code of Ethics or related procedures since the last report to the board of directors, including, but not limited to, information about material violations of this Code of Ethics or related procedures and sanctions imposed in response to such material violations; and

 

  (ii) certifies that Northern Cross has adopted procedures reasonably necessary to prevent access persons from violating this Code of Ethics.

L. Sub-contractors and Northern Cross

Northern Cross may contract with other investment advisers to provide research and administrative services. Each such sub-contractor is subject to its own Code of Ethics, a copy of which has been made available to Northern Cross. Each sub-contractor is required to submit quarterly to Northern Cross a report that there have been no violations of the sub-contractor’s Code of Ethics during the most recent calendar quarter. If there have been violations of the sub-contractor’s Code of Ethics, the sub-contractor must submit a detailed report of such violations and what remedial action, if any, was taken. If the sub-contractor’s violation involved a client of Northern Cross, such violation will be analyzed by the Review Officer in Section VI F.3. (above); provided, however, that if the sub-contractor is Boston Investor Services, Inc., the analysis of the violation will be done by the President of Northern Cross.

M. Compliance with Federal Securities Laws

All Northern Cross employees are required to comply with all federal securities laws applicable to Northern Cross’s business.

VII. SANCTIONS

Any violation of this Code of Ethics shall result in the imposition of such sanctions as Northern Cross may deem appropriate under the circumstances, which may include, but is not limited to, removal, suspension of demotion from office, imposition of a fine, a letter of censure and/or restitution to the affected client of an amount equal to the advantage the offending person shall have gained by reason of such violation.

The sanction of disgorgement of any profits realized may be imposed for any of the following violations:

a. Violation of the prohibition against investment personnel profiting from securities transactions of a trading nature;

b. Violation of the prohibition against access persons, directly or indirectly, executing a personal securities transaction on a day during which a client in his or her complex has a pending “buy” or “sell” order; and,


c. Violation of the prohibition against portfolio managers, directly or indirectly, purchasing or selling any security in which he or she has, or by reason of such purchase acquired, any beneficial ownership within a period of seven (7) calendar days before and after a client has purchased or sold such security.

VIII. RECORDKEEPING REQUIREMENTS

Northern Cross shall maintain and preserve in an easily accessible place:

 

  a. a copy of the Code of Ethics (and any prior code of ethics that was in effect at any time during the past five years) for a period of five years;

 

  b. a record of any violation of this Code of Ethics and of any action taken as a result of such violation for a period of five years following the end of the fiscal year in which the violation occurs;

 

  c. a copy of each report (or computer printout) submitted under this Code of Ethics for a period of five years, only those reports submitted during the previous two years must be maintained and preserved in an easily accessible place;

 

  d. a copy of each report to the board of directors of any investment company made under Paragraph K of Section VI; and

 

  e. a list of all persons who are, or within the past five years were, required to make reports pursuant to this Code of Ethics;

 

  f. the names of each person who is serving or who has served as Review Officer or Alternative Review Officer within the past five years;

 

  g. a record of all written acknowledgments made under Section VI.I;

 

  h. a record of ever decision and the reasons supporting it under Section VI.B to approve the acquisition of securities by an access person in any initial public offering or limited offering.

IX. MISCELLANEOUS

A. Confidentiality

All information obtained from any access person hereunder shall be kept in strict confidence by Northern Cross, except that reports of securities transaction hereunder will be made available to the Commission or any other regulatory or self-regulatory organization to the extent required by law or regulation.


B. Notice to Access Persons

Northern Cross shall identify all persons who are considered to be “access persons,” “investment personnel” and “portfolio managers,” inform such persons of their respective duties and provide such persons with copies of this Code of Ethics.

Reviewed: February 2016

Harris Associates L.P., Harris Associates Securities L.P. and Harris Associates Investment Trust

Code of Ethics and Statement on Insider Trading

As Amended, Effective as of March 9, 2016

 

I. DEFINITIONS

 

  A. Firm or Harris. The term “Firm” or “Harris” shall include Harris Associates L.P. (“HALP”) and Harris Associates Securities L.P. (“HASLP”).

 

  B. Trust. The term “Trust” shall mean Harris Associates Investment Trust, including any series of shares of beneficial interest of the Trust (each, a “Fund”).

 

  C. Employee. The term “Employee” shall include any person employed by the Firm, whether on a full or part-time basis and all partners, officers, shareholders and directors (other than Non-Access Directors (as defined below)) of the Firm.

 

  D. Access Person. The term “Access Person” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 17j-1(a)(1) of the Investment Company Act of 1940 and rules thereunder (the “Act”) and Section 204A-1(e)(1) of the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 (the “Advisers Act”). Accordingly, Access Person means any director, officer, general partner, or Advisory Person (as defined below) of the Trust or HALP, but shall not include (1) any trustee of the Trust who is not an “interested person” of the Trust; (2) any trustee of the Trust who is designated an “interested person”, as defined in Section 2(a)(19) of the Investment Company Act of 1940, but is not a director, officer, general partner or Advisory Person of HALP, HASLP or Harris Associates, Inc.; and (3) in the case of HALP, shall not include any Non-Access Director.

 

  E. Advisory Person. The term “Advisory Person” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 17j-1(a)(2) of the Act. Accordingly, Advisory Person means any Employee of the Firm, who, in connection with his or her regular functions or duties, makes, participates in, or obtains information regarding the purchase or sale of Covered Securities (as defined below) by a Client (as defined below), or whose functions relate to the making of any recommendations with respect to purchases and sales. For the purpose of this Code, each Employee of the Firm with an office at the Firm’s principal place of business shall be deemed to be an Advisory Person.

 

  F. Persons Subject to this Code. Each Employee is subject to this Code. In addition, Non-Access Directors are subject to the following provisions of this Code: II.A, II.B, II.C.i, II.J, and III (except for III.B.3 (i), (ii) and (iv) and the last sentence of III.B.4).

 

1


  G. Covered Security. The term “Covered Security” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 2(a)(36) of the Act 1 , including any right to acquire such security, except that it shall not include securities which are direct obligations of the Government of the United States or any other country, bankers’ acceptances, bank certificates of deposit, commercial paper, high quality short-term debt instruments (including repurchase agreements), and shares issued by open-end investment companies other than Reportable Funds (defined below). In addition, all exchange-traded funds (“ETFs”), whether registered as open-end management companies or unit investment trusts, shall be treated as Covered Securities for reporting purposes only.

 

  H. Reportable Fund. The term “Reportable Fund” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 204A-1(e)(9) of the Advisers Act. Reportable Fund means any investment company registered under the Act that is advised or sub-advised or distributed by the Firm or any affiliated company (e.g. Natixis Asset Management Advisers, Loomis Sayles). Reportable Funds include, for example, open-ended investment companies and closed-end funds 2 . A current list of Reportable Funds is maintained on the Compliance page of the Firm’s intranet site.

 

  I. Beneficial Interest or Ownership. The term “beneficial interest or ownership” shall be interpreted in the same manner as it would be under Rule 16a-1(a)(2) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 in determining whether a person is subject to the provisions of Section 16 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and rules thereunder, which includes any interest in which a person, directly or indirectly, has or shares a direct or indirect pecuniary interest. A pecuniary interest is the opportunity, directly or indirectly, to profit or share in any profit derived from any transaction. Each person will be assumed to have a pecuniary interest, and therefore, beneficial interest or ownership, in all securities held by that person, that person’s spouse or live-in/domestic partner who shares your household and combines his or her financial resources in a manner similar to that of married persons, all members of that person’s immediate family and adults sharing the same household with that person (other than mere roommates) and all minor children of that person and in all accounts subject to their direct or indirect influence or control and/or through which they obtain the substantial equivalent of ownership, such as trusts in which

 

1   Sec. 2(a)(36) “Security” means any note, stock, treasury stock, bond, debenture, evidence of indebtedness, certificate of interest or participation in any profit-sharing agreement, collateral-trust certificate, pre-organization certificate or subscription, transferable share, investment contract, voting-trust certificate, certificate of deposit for a security, fractional undivided interest in oil, gas, or other mineral rights, any put, call, straddle, option, or privilege on any security (including a certificate of deposit) or on any group or index of securities (including any interest therein or based on the value thereof), or any put, call, straddle, option, or privilege entered into on a national securities exchange relating to foreign currency, or, in general, any interest or instrument commonly known as a “security,” or any certificate of interest or participation in, temporary or interim certificate for, receipt for, guarantee of, or warrant or right to subscribe to or purchase, any of the foregoing.
2  

Reportable Funds that are money market funds are not subject to the Code’s reporting requirements (see Section II.G – Procedures to Implement Trading Restrictions and Reporting Obligations).

 

2


they are a trustee or beneficiary, partnerships in which they are the general partner, corporations in which they are a controlling shareholder or any other similar arrangement. Any questions an Employee may have about whether an interest in a security or an account constitutes beneficial interest or ownership should be directed to the Firm’s General Counsel or Compliance Department. Examples of beneficial interest or ownership are attached as Appendix A.

 

  J. Client . The term “Client” shall mean any client of HALP, including any Fund.

 

  K. Non-Access Director. The term “Non-Access Director” shall mean any person who is a Director of Harris Associates, Inc., the corporate general partner of HALP and HASLP, but who is not an officer or employee of any of HALP, HASLP or Harris Associates, Inc. and who meets all of the following conditions:

 

  i. He or she, in connection with his or her regular functions or duties, does not make, participate in or obtain information regarding the purchase or sale of Covered Securities by a registered investment company, and whose functions do not relate to the making of recommendations with respect to such purchases or sales;

 

  ii. He or she does not have access to nonpublic information regarding any Firm clients’ purchases or sales of securities (other than information contained in standard account statements or reports that the Firm may furnish to such person in his or her capacity as a client of the Firm), or nonpublic information regarding the portfolio holdings of any Reportable Fund; and

 

  iii. He or she is not involved in making securities recommendations to Firm clients, and does not have access to such recommendations that are nonpublic (other than information contained in standard account statements or reports that the Firm may furnish to such person in his or her capacity as a client of the Firm).

 

  II. CODE OF ETHICS

 

  A. GENERAL STATEMENT

Harris seeks to foster a reputation for integrity and professionalism. That reputation is a vital business asset. The confidence and trust placed in us by investors in mutual funds and clients with accounts advised by the Firm is something that is highly valued and must be protected. The Firm owes a fiduciary duty to its advisory clients, and the fundamental principle of the Firm is that at all times the interests of its Clients come first. As a result, any activity which creates even the suspicion of misuse of material non-public information by the Firm or any of its Employees, which gives rise to or appears to give rise to any breach of fiduciary duty owed to any Client, or which creates any actual or potential conflict of interest between any Client and the Firm or any of its Employees or even the appearance of any conflict of interest must be avoided and is prohibited.

 

3


The Investment Company Act and rules make it illegal for any person covered by the Code, directly or indirectly, in connection with the purchase or sale of a security held or to be acquired by the Trust to:

i.) employ any device, scheme, or artifice to defraud the Trust;

ii.) make any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary in order to make the statements made, in light of circumstances under which they are made, not misleading or in any way mislead the Trust regarding a material fact;

iii.) engage in any act, practice, or course of business which operates or would operate as a fraud or deceit upon the Trust; or

iv.) engage in any manipulative practice with respect to the Trust.

The restrictions on personal securities transactions contained in this Code are intended to help the Firm monitor for compliance with these prohibitions.

Additionally, the federal securities laws require that an investment adviser maintain a record of every transaction in any Covered Security and Reportable Fund in which an Access Person acquires any direct or indirect beneficial interest or ownership, except any transaction in an account in which the Access Person has no direct or indirect control or influence.

To attempt to ensure that each Person Subject to this Code satisfies this Code and these record keeping obligations, the Firm has developed the following rules relating to personal securities trading, outside employment, personal investments with external investment managers and confidentiality.

The General Counsel, President, and Chief Compliance Officer, acting in concert, have the authority to grant written waivers of the provisions of this Code in appropriate instances. However, the Firm expects that waivers will be granted only in rare instances, and some provisions of the Code that are mandated by the Act or the Advisers Act cannot be waived.

The Firm expects all Access Persons to comply with the spirit of the Code as well as the specific rules contained in the Code. Any violations of the Code must be reported promptly to the Firm’s Chief Compliance Officer.

 

  B. COMPLIANCE WITH FEDERAL SECURITIES LAWS

More generally, Firm personnel and Non-Access Directors are required to comply with applicable federal securities laws at all times. Examples of applicable federal securities laws include:

 

4


i.) the Securities Act of 1933, Securities Act of 1934, Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and SEC rules thereunder;

ii.) the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 and SEC rules thereunder;

iii.) the Investment Company Act of 1940 and SEC rules thereunder;

iv.) Title V of the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999 (privacy and security of client non-public information); and

v.) the Bank Secrecy Act, as it applies to mutual funds and investment advisers, and SEC and Department of the Treasury rules thereunder.

 

  C. RESTRICTIONS ON EMPLOYEE TRADING

No trading activity by an Employee in any security in which an Employee has any beneficial interest or ownership which is also the subject of a Client portfolio purchase or sale shall disadvantage or appear to disadvantage such Client transaction. Further, the following specific restrictions apply to all trading activity for Advisory Persons:

 

  i.) Any transaction in a security in anticipation of client orders (“frontrunning”) is prohibited,

 

  ii.) Any transaction in a security which is the subject of approval by one of the Firm’s stock selection groups for addition to an approved list is prohibited until the tenth business day following the dissemination of that recommendation, or any longer period specified in this Code,

 

  iii.) Any transaction in a security which the Advisory Person knows or has reason to believe is being purchased or sold or considered for purchase or sale 3 by any investment company advised by the Firm is prohibited until the transaction by such investment company has been completed or consideration of such transaction has been abandoned, 4

 

 

 

3   A security is “being considered for purchase or sale”; the earlier of, when a recommendation to purchase or sell has been made and communicated or the security is placed on the research project list and, with respect to the person making the recommendation, when such person seriously considers making such a recommendation.
4   Among the clients of the Firm are private investment partnerships (“partnerships”) in which various Employees of the Firm have equity interests. This trading prohibition shall not restrict purchases or sales for the accounts of such partnerships provided that the Trust and such accounts are treated fairly and equitably in connection with such purchases and sales.

 

5


  iv.) Any transaction in a security on the same day or within two business days after any Client, including a registered investment company, advised by the Firm has a pending or actual transaction is prohibited. If an Advisory Person places a same day order for such security prior to the Client placing an order, the Employee’s order will be canceled,

 

  v.) Any transaction involving options 5 , single stock futures, or other derivatives relating to any security on the Firm’s approved and project lists, or which are held by any investment company or other client account advised by the Firm that appears to evade the restrictions of the Code is prohibited, and

 

  vi.) Any acquisition of an equity security in an initial public offering is prohibited.

Additionally, no Employee of the Firm shall knowingly sell to or purchase from the Funds or the Trust any security or other property except, in the case of the Funds, securities issued by the Funds. Neither shall the Firm, HASL nor any Employee share in the profits or losses in any account of a customer carried by the Firm or HASL or any other FINRA member, except to the extent provided for by Rule 205-3 of the Investment Advisors Act of 1940 and/or NASD Rule 2330 and/or FINRA Rule 2150, as applicable.

 

  D. PRIVATE PLACEMENTS AND INVESTMENTS WITH EXTERNAL MONEY MANAGERS.

No Advisory Person or Access Person shall acquire any security or interest in a private placement or commit initial capital to any account for which such person has any beneficial interest (other than non-affiliated mutual funds where the account is held directly at such fund) with an external investment manager without the prior written approval of the Firm’s President and Chief Compliance Officer. For purposes of this Code, “private placement” shall mean any limited offering that is generally not available to the public, including unregistered investment pool vehicles (e.g., hedge funds, commodity pools), Rule 144A securities, limited partnerships, etc.

In deciding whether to grant approval, consideration will be given to whether the investment is consistent with the Firm’s investment philosophy and guidelines and should be offered to Clients, and whether the investment creates an actual conflict or the appearance of a conflict of interest. An Advisory Person who has acquired a security in a private placement must disclose that investment to the Firm’s President and Chief Compliance Officer if such Advisory Person later participates in the consideration of that issuer for inclusion on any list of securities approved for purchase by Firm clients.

 

5   The only form of equity option trading that is permitted is writing covered calls on equity securities that are not held in clients’ accounts or on the Firm’s approved or project lists. Index option trading is permitted subject to having an approved option agreement on file with Pershing prior to trading.

 

6


  E. ADDITIONAL RESTRICTION ON FUND MANAGERS OF INVESTMENT COMPANY ACCOUNTS.

Any Access Person who is a fund manager of any registered investment company that is advised or subadvised by the Firm is prohibited from buying or selling a security for an account in which he or she has a beneficial interest within fifteen calendar days before and after the investment company that he/she manages trades in that security. Any profits realized on trades within the proscribed periods shall be required to be disgorged. 6 Any losses realized on trades within the proscribed periods shall be borne by the fund manager if it was the manager’s actions which caused the violation.

 

  F. CERTAIN ACCOUNTS EXEMPT FROM REQUIREMENTS OF CODE.

Any account (including open-end investment companies and limited partnerships) for which the Firm acts as investment adviser or general partner shall be managed in accordance with the Firm’s trading procedures for a Client account. Any such account shall be exempt from the provisions of Sections C and E of Part II of this Code if: (1) the account has been seeded by affiliated persons of the firm and is being managed in anticipation of investments by persons not affiliated with the Firm; or (2) unaffiliated persons of the Firm are also invested in the account; or (3) the account is operated as a model portfolio in contemplation of management of client accounts in the same or a similar strategy.

 

  G. PROCEDURES TO IMPLEMENT TRADING RESTRICTIONS AND REPORTING OBLIGATIONS.

 

  1. Trading through Harris’ Trading Desk.

All Advisory Persons who have personal accounts that hold or can hold Covered Securities are required to maintain such accounts at Pershing LLC (“Pershing”), the Firm’s prime broker. All transactions in Covered Securities in which an Advisory Person has any beneficial interest or ownership, or in any accounts in which an Advisory Person has discretion, other than fee paying accounts that are professionally managed on a discretionary basis, must be pre-approved through the Firm’s automated personal trading system.

 

6  

Any profits disgorged shall be taken as gains in Harris’s error account at Pershing.

 

7


Transactions at brokers or banks other than Pershing are not permitted except in unusual circumstances and then only after the Advisory Person has: (i) provided a request in writing to his/her Supervisor and the Chief Compliance Officer prior to opening or placing an initial order in an account with such other broker or bank, (ii) obtained the written approval of his/her Supervisor and the Chief Compliance Officer prior to opening or placing an initial order in such account, (iii) provided such other broker or bank with a written notice of the Advisory Person’s affiliation with Harris and request that copies of confirmations and statements be sent to the Firm’s Compliance Department, and provide a report to the Firm that includes the name of the broker or bank with whom the account was established, the date the account was established, and the date the report is submitted. A copy of such written notice and request should also be provided to his/her Supervisor and the Compliance Department.

Reportable Funds in which an Advisory Person has any beneficial interest or ownership may be held in a Pershing account, an approved outside brokerage account, directly with the Fund or through the Firm’s profit sharing and savings plan, and are subject to the reporting requirements described in Section II.G.6 below. Reportable Fund transactions effected pursuant to an automatic investment plan, or in any account over which the Access Person has no direct or indirect influence or control, do not need to be reported.

Even after an Advisory Person has obtained approval to open a non-discretionary account at a bank or broker to execute Covered Securities transactions, the Advisory Person must acquire approval through the automated personal trading system. The Advisory Person must promptly present Compliance with a confirmation reflecting the details of the transaction and clearly indicating that the transaction has been completed. Non-Pershing discretionary account transactions do not need to be presented to Trading for review and approval. Compliance will review these statements upon their receipt.

 

  2. Monitoring of Trades.

Transactions for an account of an Advisory Person that are executed through the Firm’s trading desk are to be monitored by Compliance and reviewed and approved by the Chief Compliance Officer (or such party to whom he or she delegates). These transactions are non-discretionary transactions and may not be executed if they are in conflict with Harris’ discretionary orders.

The Firm’s Compliance Department will access Advisory Person trade information online from Pershing (including the title and exchange ticker symbol or CUSIP number of each Covered Security or Reportable Fund involved, the date of the transaction, the interest rate and maturity rate (if applicable), the number of shares and principal amount of each Covered Security or Reportable Fund involved, the nature of the transaction (i.e. buy/sell), the price at which the transaction was effected, the name of the broker or bank through which the transaction was effected, and the date on which the report is submitted).

Transactions at brokers other than Pershing are to be monitored by the Compliance Department. To accomplish this, all Access Persons shall submit to the Compliance Department within thirty days after the month end in which any transaction occurred a report which includes the title and

 

8


exchange ticker or CUSIP number of the Covered Security or Reportable Fund, the date of the transaction, the interest rate and maturity rate (if applicable), the number of shares and principal amount of each Covered Security or Reportable Fund involved, the nature of the transaction (i.e. buy/sell), the price at which the transaction was effected, the name of the broker or bank through which the transaction was effected and the date on which the report is submitted. This requirement may be satisfied by having the broker or bank send the Firm duplicate copies of confirmations and statements, provided that such confirmations and statements contain all of the information otherwise required to be provided in the report. The Compliance Department will maintain copies of all such transaction reports.

 

  3. Cancellation of Trades.

Any transaction for an account of an Access Person is subject to cancellation or reversal if it is determined by either the President or the CCO (or such party to whom he or she delegates) that the transaction is or was in conflict with or appeared to be in conflict with any Client transaction or any of the trading restrictions of this Code. Cancellations or reversals of transactions may be required after an extended period past the settlement date. A trader may also prevent the execution of orders for an Advisory Person’s account if it appears that the trade may have to be canceled or reversed.

Client transactions include transactions for any investment company managed by the Firm, any other discretionary advisory clients or any other accounts managed or advised by Employees of the Firm for a fee.

The determination that a transaction of an Access Person may conflict with a Client transaction will be subjective and individualized and may include questions about timely and adequate dissemination of information, availability of bids and offers, as well as many other factors deemed pertinent for that transaction or series of transactions. It is possible that a cancellation or reversal of a transaction could be costly to an Access Person or his/her family. Therefore, great care is required to adhere to the Firm’s trading restrictions and avoid conflicts or the appearance of conflicts.

 

  4. Participation in Dividend Reinvestment Plans and Systematic Purchase Plans.

Advisory Persons may purchase Covered Securities through dividend reinvestment plans or systematic purchase plans without processing such transactions through the Firm’s automated personal trading system. Purchases are permitted only after the Advisory Person has: (i) provided notice in writing to his/her Supervisor and the Compliance Department prior to opening an account or placing an initial purchase, and (ii) obtained the written approval of his/her Supervisor and the Compliance Department prior to opening an account or placing an initial purchase. Notice and approval shall not be required in connection with purchase of shares or units of ETFs. Even after the Advisory Person has obtained approval to invest in such a plan, the Advisory Person must provide the Compliance Department with duplicate copies of statements

 

9


within thirty days after the end of each calendar quarter. Such report or statements must contain all of the information required to be reported with respect to transactions in Covered Securities under II(F)(2) above. The Compliance Department will maintain copies of all such transaction reports.

 

10


  5. Reporting All Other Securities Transactions.

Because the obligations of an investment adviser to maintain records of Employee’s personal securities transactions is broader than the type of transactions discussed above in this Section, all Employees have the following additional reporting obligations. Any transaction in a Covered Security not required to be placed through the Firm’s automated personal trading system in which an Employee has any beneficial interest or ownership (such as, real estate or oil and gas limited partnership interests and other privately placed securities and funds) must be reported to the Compliance Department. This report must be submitted within thirty days after the end of each calendar quarter and include: the title and exchange ticker symbol or CUSIP number, price, number of shares and principal amount of each Covered Security involved, the date and nature of the transaction (i.e. buy/sell), the name of the broker or bank used, if any, interest rate and maturity, if applicable, and the date on which the report is submitted. This report may be in any form, including a copy of a confirmation or monthly statement. However, no report is necessary for any transaction in an account in which the Employee has no control or influence.

 

  6. Initial, Quarterly and Annual Reporting Requirements.

Each Access Person shall initially disclose in writing to the Compliance Department within ten days of becoming an Access Person, and annually thereafter, within forty-five days after each calendar year-end, the title and exchange ticker or CUSIP number, type of security, number of shares and principal amount of all Covered Securities and Reportable Funds beneficially owned by such Access Person, and the date the Access Person submits the report, with information as of a date that is no more than forty-five days from the date of becoming a Access Person, or as of the preceding December 31 for annual reporting, and the name of the broker or bank with whom the Access Person maintains an account in which he or she has beneficial ownership of any security. An Access Person need not make an Initial or Annual Report for Covered Securities held in any account over which the Employee has no direct or indirect influence or control.

Additionally, each Access Person shall submit quarterly transaction reports and responses to quarterly questionnaires no later than 30 days after the end of each calendar quarter.

 

  H. CONFIDENTIALITY & OBLIGATIONS OF EMPLOYEES

During the period of employment with the Firm an Employee will have access to certain “confidential information” concerning the Firm and its clients. This information is a valuable asset and the sole property of the Firm and may not be misappropriated and used outside of the Firm by an Employee or former Employee. “Confidential Information”, defined as all information not publicly available about the business of the Firm, may include, but is not limited to, Client and prospect names and records, research, trading and portfolio information and systems, information concerning externally managed entities or accounts which have been considered or made on behalf of fee paying clients, and the financial records of the Firm and/or its Employees. In order to protect the interests of the Firm, an Employee or ex-Employee shall

 

11


not, without the express written consent of the Firm’s President, disclose directly or indirectly confidential information to anyone outside of the Firm. An Employee should be extremely careful to avoid inadvertent disclosures and to exercise maximum effort to keep confidential information confidential. Any questions concerning the confidentiality of information should be directed to the Chief Compliance Officer or the General Counsel. An abuse of the Firm’s policy of confidentiality could subject an Employee to immediate disciplinary action that may include dismissal from the Firm. Nothing in this Code is intended to prevent an Employee from reporting a violation of applicable laws or regulations to an appropriate regulatory authority.

 

  I. OUTSIDE EMPLOYMENT, ASSOCIATIONS AND BUSINESS ACTIVITIES 7

 

  1. Outside Employment and Associations.

Harris requires that all Advisory Persons make their positions with the Firm their primary employment. Except in the case of business entities managed or sponsored by the Firm, it is Harris’s policy not to permit Advisory Persons to hold outside positions of authority, including that of being an officer, partner, director or employee, in another business entity. The approval of Harris, and in some cases the approval of FINRA, is required before any Advisory Person may hold any outside position with any business organization, regardless of whether such position is compensated or not. Any exception to this policy must be approved in writing by the Firm’s President or his or her designee and the Advisory Person’s Supervisor, and a copy of such approval is maintained by the Compliance Department. Any change in the status of such approved position immediately must be reported in writing to the Compliance Department and the Advisory Person’s Supervisor. Any income or compensation received by an Advisory Person for serving in such position must be paid in full to the Firm, unless a waiver is granted by the Firm’s President. Under no circumstance may an Advisory Person represent or suggest that Harris has approved or recommended the business activities of the outside organization or any person associated with it.

Certain types of associations with non-business entities - charitable or volunteer organizations where the Advisory Person does not hold a position of authority (e.g., is not a member of the board or senior management), and the activity is voluntary in nature (e.g., Boy or Girl Scouts leader, Parent/Teacher Association), or involve random and infrequent participation in industry associations or marketing focus groups where an honorarium is paid, and other similarly situated positions are exempted from this section’s restrictions and reporting.

 

 

7   As used in this section, the terms “business entity” and “business organization” include nonprofits such as charities, foundations, religious and arts organizations, universities, and other similar types of entities.

 

12


  2. Outside Business Activities.

To further avoid actual or potential conflicts of interest and to maintain impartial investment advice, and equally important, the appearance of impartial investment advice, each Advisory Person must disclose in writing to the Compliance Department any special relationships and/or investments or business activities that they or their families have which could influence the investment activities of the Firm. If an Employee has any questions about any activities and the need for disclosure, the Employee should be cautious and direct any questions to the Firm’s General Counsel or Compliance Department.

 

  J. Certification of Compliance by Access Persons.

In addition to new-hire training on the Code, each Access Person will receive annual training over certain aspects of the Code. The Firm shall distribute the Code to each Employee and Non-Access Director upon inception of employment and whenever the Code is amended, but no less frequently than annually. Each Access Person and Non-Access Director is required to certify in writing annually that (i) he or she has read and understands the Code, (ii) recognizes that he or she is subject to the Code, and, in the case of Access Persons, (iii) he or she has disclosed or reported all Personal Securities Transactions required to be disclosed or reported under the Code.

Each Access Person who has not engaged in any personal securities transactions during the preceding year for which a report was required to be filed pursuant to the Code shall include a certification to that effect in his or her annual certification.

 

  K. Annual Report to the Trust’s Board of Trustees.

HALP, as the adviser to the Trust, shall prepare an annual report to the board of trustees of the Trust that:

 

  i.) summarizes existing procedures concerning personal investing and any changes in those procedures during the past year;

 

  ii.) describes issues that arose during the previous year under the Code or procedures concerning personal investing, including but not limited to information about material violations of the Code and sanctions imposed;

 

  iii.) certifies to the board that the Trust, the Trust’s adviser (HALP), and the Trust’s principal distributor (HASLP) have adopted procedures reasonably necessary to prevent their Investment Personnel and Access Persons from violating the Code; and

 

13


  iv.) identifies any recommended changes in existing restrictions or procedures based upon experience under the Code, evolving industry practices, or developments in applicable laws or regulations.

 

  III. POLICY STATEMENT ON INSIDER TRADING

 

  A. BACKGROUND

Trading securities while in possession of material, nonpublic information or improperly communicating that information to others may expose you to stringent penalties. Criminal sanctions may include a fine of up to $1,000,000 and/or ten years imprisonment. The Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) can recover the profits gained or losses avoided through the violative trading, obtain a penalty of up to three times the illicit windfall and issue an order permanently barring you from the securities industry. Finally, you may be sued by investors seeking to recover damages for insider trading violations.

Regardless of whether a government inquiry occurs, Harris views seriously any violation of this Policy Statement. Such violations constitute grounds for disciplinary sanctions, including dismissal.

The law of insider trading is unsettled; an individual legitimately may be uncertain about the application of the Policy Statement in a particular circumstance. Often, a single question can forestall disciplinary action or complex legal problems. You should direct any questions relating to the Policy Statement to the General Counsel, the Chief Compliance Officer or, in their absence, their respective deputies. You also must notify the General Counsel, the Chief Compliance Officer or, in their absence, their respective deputies immediately if you have any reason to believe that a violation of the Policy Statement has occurred or is about to occur.

 

  B. POLICY STATEMENT ON INSIDER TRADING

No person to whom this Policy Statement applies may trade , either personally or on behalf of others (such as Clients), while in possession of material, nonpublic information; nor may such persons communicate material, nonpublic information to others in violation of the law. This Policy Statement is drafted broadly; it will be applied and interpreted in a similar manner. This Policy Statement applies to securities trading and information handling by all Access Persons (including their spouse or domestic/live-in partner, minor children and adult members of their households).

The section below reviews principles important to this Policy Statement.

 

14


  1. What is Material Information?

Information is “material” when there is a substantial likelihood that a reasonable investor would consider it important in making his or her investment decisions. Generally, this is information whose disclosure will have a substantial effect on the price of a company’s securities. No simple “bright line” test exists to determine when information is material; assessments of materiality involve a highly fact-specific inquiry. For this reason, you should direct any questions about whether information is material to the General Counsel or Chief Compliance Officer, or, in their absence, the President of Harris.

Material information often relates to a company’s results and operations including, for example, dividend changes, earnings results, changes in previously released earnings estimates, significant merger or acquisition proposals or agreements, major litigation, liquidation problems, and extraordinary management developments.

Material information also may relate to the market for a company’s securities. Information about a significant order to purchase or sell securities may, in some contexts, be deemed material. Similarly, prepublication information regarding reports in the financial press also may be deemed material.

 

  2. What is Nonpublic Information?

Information is “nonpublic” until it has been disseminated broadly to investors in the marketplace. Tangible evidence of such dissemination is the best indication that the information is public. For example, information is public after it has become available to the general public through a public filing with the SEC or some other governmental agency, the Dow Jones “tape” or the WALL STREET JOURNAL or some other publication of general circulation, and after sufficient time has passed so that the information has been disseminated widely.

 

  3. Identifying Inside Information

Before executing any trade for yourself or others, including Clients, you must determine whether you have access to material, nonpublic information. If you think that you might have access to material, nonpublic information, you should take the following steps:

 

  i.) Immediately alert the Trading Department to restrict trading in the security. No reason or explanation should be given to the Trading Department for the restriction.

 

  ii.) Report the information and proposed trade immediately to the General Counsel or the Chief Compliance Officer, or in their absence, the President of Harris.

 

  iii.) Do not purchase or sell the securities on behalf of yourself or others, including Clients.

 

15


  iv.) Do not communicate the information inside or outside Harris other than to the above individuals.

 

  v.) After the above individuals have reviewed the issue, the Firm will determine whether the information is material and nonpublic and, if so, what action(s) the Firm should take.

 

  4. Contacts with Public Companies

For Harris, contacts with public companies represent an important part of our research efforts. Harris may make investment decisions on the basis of the Firm’s conclusions formed through such contacts and analysis of publicly-available information. Difficult legal issues arise, however, when, in the course of these contacts, an Access Person becomes aware of material , nonpublic information. This could happen, for example, if a company’s Chief Financial Officer prematurely discloses quarterly results to an analyst or an investor relations representative makes a selective disclosure of adverse news to a handful of investors. In such situations, Harris must make a judgment as to its further conduct. To protect yourself, Clients and the Firm, you should contact the General Counsel the Chief Compliance Officer or, in their absence, the President of the Firm immediately if you believe that you may have received material, nonpublic information.

 

  5. Tender Offers

Tender offers represent a particular concern in the law of insider trading for two reasons. First, tender offer activity often produces extraordinary gyrations in the price of the target company’s securities. Trading during this time period is more likely to attract regulatory attention (and produces a disproportionate percentage of insider trading cases). Second, the SEC has adopted a rule which expressly forbids trading and “tipping” while in possession of material, nonpublic information regarding a tender offer received from the tender offeror, the target company or anyone acting on behalf of either. Employees should exercise particular caution any time they become aware of nonpublic information relating to a tender offer.

 

  C. PROCEDURES TO IMPLEMENT THE POLICY STATEMENT ON INSIDER TRADING

 

  1. Personal Securities Trading

The restrictions on Employee trading and procedures to implement those restrictions and the Firm’s reporting obligations, which are set forth in Section II above and in the Procedures for Personal Trading by Employees, constitute the same procedures to implement this Policy Statement. Review those procedures carefully and direct any questions about their scope or applicability to the General Counsel or the Compliance Department.

 

16


  2. Restrictions on Disclosures

Harris Employees shall not disclose any nonpublic information (whether or not it is material) relating to Harris or its securities transactions to any person outside Harris (unless such disclosure has been authorized by Harris). Material, nonpublic information may not be communicated to anyone, including persons within Harris, except as provided in Section III(B)(3) above. Such information must be secured. For example, access to files containing material, nonpublic information and computer files containing such information should be restricted, and conversations containing such information, if appropriate at all, should be conducted in private.

 

  IV. RETENTION OF RECORDS

The Compliance Department or the Secretary of the Trust will maintain the records listed below for a period of five years. Such records shall be maintained at the Firm’s principal place of business in an easily accessible place:

 

  i.) a list of all persons subject to the Code during that period;

 

  ii.) receipts signed by all persons subject to the Code acknowledging receipt of copies of the Code and acknowledging that they are subject to it;

 

  iii.) a copy of each Code of Ethics that has been in effect at any time during the period;

 

  iv.) a copy of each report filed pursuant to the Code and a record of any known violations and actions taken as a result thereof during the period as well as a record of all persons responsible for reviewing these reports; and

 

  v.) a copy of any decision and the reasons supporting the decision, to approve the acquisition of Limited Offerings.

 

17


ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF RECEIPT OF CODE OF ETHICS AND STATEMENT ON

INSIDER TRADING

Code of Ethics .

Harris Associates L.P. (“HALP”), Harris Associates Securities L.P. (“HASLP”) and Harris Associates Investment Trust (the “Trust”) have adopted a written Code of Ethics and Statement on Insider Trading (the “Code”) and Procedures for Personal Trading by Employees to avoid potential conflicts of interest by HALP and HASLP personnel and to govern the use and handling of material non-public information. A copy of the Code and Procedures for Personal Trading by Employees is attached to this acknowledgement. As a condition of your continued employment with HALP and HASLP, and/or the retention of your position, if any, as an officer of the Trust or a member of the board of HALP’s general partner, you are required to read, understand and abide by the Code and Procedures for Personal Trading by Employees.

Compliance Program .

The Code requires that all personnel (other than Non-Access Directors) furnish to the Compliance Department information regarding any investment account in which you have a “beneficial interest.” You are also required to furnish to the Compliance Department copies of your monthly or quarterly account statements, or other documents, showing all purchases or sales of securities in any such account, or which are effected by you or for your benefit, or the benefit of any member of your household. Additionally, you are required to furnish a report of your personal securities holdings within ten calendar days of commencement of your employment with HALP or HASLP and annually thereafter. These requirements apply to any investment account, such as an account at a brokerage house, trust account at a bank, custodial account or similar types of accounts.

This compliance program also requires that employees report any contact with any securities issuer, government or its personnel, or others, that, in the usual course of business, might involve material non-public financial information. The Code requires that employees bring to the attention of the General Counsel any information they receive from any source, which might be material non-public information.

Any questions concerning the Code or Procedures for Personal Trading by Employees should be directed to the General Counsel or the Compliance Department.

I affirm that I have received new-hire training covering certain key aspects of the Code and Procedures for Personal Trading by Employees from Compliance, and have read and understand the Code and Procedures for Personal Trading by Employees. I agree to the terms and conditions set forth in the Code and Procedures for Personal Trading by Employees.

If I am acting in the capacity as a contractor, consultant, temporary employee or intern to Harris, I acknowledge that all references to “employee” in the Code and Procedures for Personal Trading by Employees shall be construed to mean “agent”. My agreement and affirmation are made in the capacity as an agent, and not as an employee of Harris, and are not intended to impact my status as an independent contractor.

 

 

Signature

    

 

Date

 

1


ANNUAL AFFIRMATION OF COMPLIANCE

FOR ACCESS PERSONS AND NON-ACCESS DIRECTORS

I affirm that:

 

1. I have received annual training pertaining to certain aspects of the Code of Ethics and Statement of Insider Trading (the “Code”) and Procedures for Personal Trading by Employees, and have again read and, to the best of my knowledge, have complied with provisions of the Code and Procedures for Personal Trading by Employees that pertain to me during the past year.

 

2. I have provided to the Compliance Department the names and addresses of each investment account that I have with any firm, including, but not limited to, broker-dealers, banks and others. (List of known accounts attached.) (Access Persons only)

 

3. I have provided to the Compliance Department copies of account statements or other reports showing each and every transaction in any security in which I have a beneficial interest, as defined in the Code, during the most recently ended calendar year

or

during the most recent calendar year there were no transactions in any security in which I had a beneficial interest required to be reported pursuant to the Code. (Access Persons only)

 

4. I have provided to the Compliance Department a report of my personal securities holdings as of the end of the most recent calendar year, including all required information for each security in which I have any direct or indirect beneficial ownership. (Access Persons only)

 

5. With respect to the activities conducted at Harris, I am unaware of any violations of applicable laws or regulations that have not otherwise been reported to the Chief Compliance Officer or an appropriate regulatory authority.

 

6. If I am acting in the capacity as a contractor, consultant, temporary employee or intern at Harris, I acknowledge that any reference to “employee” in the Code shall be construed to mean “agent”. My agreement and affirmation made herein are made in the capacity as an agent, and not as an employee of Harris, and are not intended to impact my independent contractor status.

 

 

Signature

    

 

Date

 

1


APPENDIX A

Examples of Beneficial Interest

For purposes of the Code, you will be deemed to have a beneficial interest in a security if you have the opportunity, directly or indirectly, to profit or share in any profit derived from a transaction in the security. Examples of beneficial ownership under this definition include:

 

    securities you own, no matter how they are registered, and including securities held for you by others (for example, by a custodian or broker, or by a relative, executor or administrator) or that you have pledged to another (as security for a loan, for example);

 

    securities held by a trust of which you are a beneficiary (except that, if your interest is a remainder interest and you do not have or participate in investment control of trust assets, you will not be deemed to have a beneficial interest in securities held by the trust);

 

    securities held by you as trustee or co-trustee, where either you or any member of your immediate family ( i.e. , spouse, domestic/live-in partner, children or descendants, stepchildren, parents and their ancestors, and stepparents, in each case treating a legal adoption as blood relationship) has a beneficial interest (using these rules) in the trust.

 

    securities held by a trust of which you are the settlor, if you have the power to revoke the trust without obtaining the consent of all the beneficiaries and have or participate in investment control;

 

    securities held by any partnership in which you are a general partner, to the extent of your interest in partnership capital or profits;

 

    securities held by a personal holding company controlled by you alone or jointly with others;

 

    securities held by (i) your spouse or domestic/live-in partner, unless legally separated, or you and your spouse or domestic/live-in partner jointly, or (ii) your minor children or any immediate family member of you or your spouse or domestic/live-in partner (including an adult relative), directly or through a trust, who is sharing your home, even if the securities were not received from you and the income from the securities is not actually used for the maintenance of your household; or

 

    securities you have the right to acquire (for example, through the exercise of a derivative security), even if the right is not presently exercisable, or securities as to which, through any other type of arrangement, you obtain benefits substantially equivalent to those of ownership.

You will not be deemed to have beneficial ownership of securities in the following situations:

 

1


APPENDIX A

 

    securities held by a limited partnership in which you do not have a controlling interest and do not have or share investment control over the partnership’s portfolio; and

 

    securities held by a foundation of which you are a trustee and donor, provided that the beneficiaries are exclusively charitable and you have no right to revoke the gift.

These examples are not exclusive. There are other circumstances in which you may be deemed to have a beneficial interest in a security. Any questions about whether you have a beneficial interest should be directed to the General Counsel or Compliance Department.

 

2

LOGO

Sands Capital Management, LLC

Code of Ethics

(Amended March 2017)


Sands Capital Management Code of Ethics

Table of Contents

 

              Page  

I.

  DEFINITIONS      1  

II.

  STATEMENT OF GENERAL PRINCIPLES      3  

III.

  DUTY OF CONFIDENTIALITY      3  

IV.

  DISQUALIFIED PERSONS      4  

V.

  PROHIBITED TRANSACTIONS AND CONDUCT      4  
  A.    Fraudulent Purchases or Sales      4  
  B.    Initial Public Offerings and Limited Offerings      5  
  C.    Options and Short Sales      5  
  D.    Blackout Periods      5  
  E.    Securities Pre-Clearance      5  
  F.    Prohibition on Short-Term Trading Profits      6  
  G.    Investment Clubs      6  
  H.    Exempt Transactions      6  
  I.    Hardship Exemptions      6  
  J.    Directorships      7  
  K.    Sands Capital Ventures Investments      7  

VI.

  REPORTING AND CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS      7  
  A.    Duplicate Brokerage Statements      7  
  B.    Initial Holdings Report      7  
  C.    Annual Holdings Reports      8  
  D.    Quarterly Transaction Reports      8  
  E.    Exceptions to Reporting Requirements      9  
  F.    Annual Certifications      10  
  G.    Reporting of Code Violations      10  

VII.

  GIFTS & ENTERTAINMENT      10  
  A.    General Guidance on Gifts and Entertainment      10  
  B.    Additional Guidance on Gifts and Entertainment      11  
  C.    Reporting of Gifts & Entertainment      12  
  D.    Exceptions      12  

VIII.

  REPORTS TO FUND CLIENTS      13  

IX.

  SANCTIONS      13  

X.

  OTHER DISCLAIMERS      13  

XI.

  RECORDS      13  

 

 

LOGO


CODE OF ETHICS

 

 

This Code of Ethics (this “ Code ”) is adopted by Sands Capital Management, LLC (“ Sands Capital”) pursuant to Section 204A of the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, as amended, and Rule 204A-1 thereunder, and Section 17(j) of the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, and Rule 17j-1 thereunder, to: (1) set forth standards of conduct, including compliance with the federal securities laws; (2) require reporting of personal securities transactions, including transactions in mutual funds advised and sub-advised by Sands Capital; and (3) require prompt reporting of violations of this Code.

This Code is applicable to supervised persons (as defined below) of Sands Capital, and to activities within and outside of their duties at Sands Capital. Each Supervised Person is required to read this Code carefully, sign and return to the Compliance Team the accompanying acknowledgement, and retain a copy of this Code in a readily accessible place for reference.

The Compliance Team will notify access persons (as defined below) of their reporting obligations under this Code. Any questions regarding this Code should be directed to the Chief Compliance Officer, a member of the Compliance Team or the General Counsel.

 

I. DEFINITIONS

“Access person” means (i) any supervised person who has access to nonpublic information regarding any client’s purchase or sale of securities, or nonpublic information regarding the portfolio holdings of any Reportable Fund, or who is involved in making securities recommendations to clients, or who has access to such recommendations that are nonpublic; and (ii) any advisory person (as defined below). For this purpose, all supervised persons are presumed to be access persons.

“Accredited investor” in the context of a natural person, includes anyone who earned income that exceeded $200,000 (or $300,000 together with a spouse) in each of the prior two years, and reasonable expects the same for the current year, or has a net worth over $1 million, either alone or together with a spouse (excluding the value of the person’s primary residence).

“Advisers Act” means the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, as amended, and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission.

“Advisory person” means (i) any employee who, in connection with his or her regular functions or duties, makes, participates in, or obtains information regarding the purchase or sale of covered securities by a Reportable Fund, or whose functions relate to the making of any recommendations with respect to such purchases or sales; and (ii) any natural person in a control relationship to Sands Capital who obtains information concerning recommendations made to a Reportable Fund with regard to the purchase or sale of covered securities by the Reportable Fund.

“Automatic investment plan” means a program in which regular periodic purchases (or withdrawals) are made automatically in (or from) investment accounts in accordance with a predetermined schedule and allocation. An automatic investment plan includes a dividend reinvestment plan.

“Beneficial ownership” is interpreted in a manner as it would be under Rule 16a-1(a)(2) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, in determining whether a person has beneficial ownership of a security for purposes of Section 16 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules and regulations thereunder. (See Attachment A for more information about beneficial ownership.)

 

 

LOGO

1


“Chief Compliance Officer” means the individual (or his or her designee) designated by Sands Capital as having the authority and responsibilities set forth in this Code; provided, however, that if that individual proposes to engage in any conduct or transaction requiring approval or other action by the Chief Compliance Officer, the approval shall be granted or other action shall be taken by such other individual as Sands Capital shall designate.

Conflicts of Interest Board” means senior executives of Sands Capital or its affiliates that will assess and make recommendations with respect to certain conflicts of interest and related policies and procedures that are applicable to Sands Capital and/or its affiliates.

Control ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2(a)(9) of the Investment Company Act. Section 2(a)(9) provides that “control” means the power to exercise a controlling influence over the management or policies of a company, unless such power is solely the result of an official position with the company. Ownership of more than 25% of a company’s outstanding voting securities is presumed to give the holder control over the company. The facts and circumstances of a given situation may counter this presumption.

Covered security” means a security as defined in Section 202(a)(18) of the Advisers Act or Section 2(a)(36) of the Investment Company Act, and includes notes, bonds, stocks, convertible securities, preferred stock, options on securities, futures on broad-based market indices, exchange-traded Funds (ETFs), warrants and rights, and shares of closed-end Funds and Reportable Funds, but does not include direct obligations of the United States Government, bankers’ acceptances, bank certificates of deposit, commercial paper and high quality short-term debt instruments, including repurchase agreements, and shares issued by money market and other open-end (mutual) Funds.

Federal securities laws” means the Securities Act of 1933, the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the Investment Company Act, the Advisers Act, Title V of the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, and any rules adopted by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission under any of those statutes, the Bank Secrecy Act as it applies to registered investment advisers and investment companies, and any rules adopted thereunder by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission or the Department of the Treasury.

Fund ” means an investment company registered under the Investment Company Act.

General Counsel” means the Chief Legal Officer of Sands Capital or his or her delegate.

Initial public offering” means an initial public offering of securities, including any securities registered under the Securities Act of 1933.

Investment Company Act” means the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission.

Limited offering” means any offering of securities that is not a public offering, including any offering that is exempt from registration under the Securities Act of 1933 pursuant to Section 4(2) or Section 4(6) or pursuant to Rule 504, Rule 505 or Rule 506 under the Securities Act of 1933.

Public company” means any company whose securities are listed for trading on a public market, including those companies subject to the reporting requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

 

 

LOGO

2


“Purchase or sale of a security” includes, among other things, the writing of an option to purchase or sell a security.

“Reportable Fund” means any Fund, or separate investment portfolio of such Fund, for which Sands Capital serves as an investment adviser as defined in Section 2(a)(20) of the Investment Company Act. A list of Reportable Funds can be found on the intranet.

“Supervised Person” means any partner, officer, director (or other person occupying a similar status or performing similar functions), or staff member of Sands Capital, or other person who provides investment advice on behalf of Sands Capital and is subject to the supervision and control of Sands Capital.

 

II. STATEMENT OF GENERAL PRINCIPLES

Sands Capital and the Supervised Persons owe fiduciary duties to Sands Capital’s clients. As fiduciaries, Sands Capital and the Supervised Persons stand in a special relationship of trust, confidence, and responsibility with Sands Capital’s clients. Accordingly, Supervised Persons must avoid activities, interests and relationships that might interfere, or appear to interfere, with acting in the best interests of clients. Supervised Persons must, at all times, observe the following general fiduciary principles:

 

  1. in the course of fulfilling your duties and responsibilities to clients, you must place the interests of clients first;

 

  2. you must conduct your personal securities transactions in compliance with this Code and in a manner that avoids any actual or potential conflict of interest or any abuse of your position of trust and responsibility; and

 

  3. you must not take inappropriate advantage of your position.

Supervised Persons must comply with applicable federal securities laws and adhere to these general principles and the specific provisions of this Code. Supervised Persons may be held personally liable for any improper or illegal act. “Ignorance of the law” is not a defense. Technical compliance with this Code will not insulate a Supervised Person from scrutiny where his or her activities violate fiduciary duties owed to Sands Capital’s clients. Conversely, a technical breach of this Code may not necessarily cause harm to Sands Capital or its clients and may require subjective analysis by the Compliance Team in order to determine impact and consequences.

 

III. DUTY OF CONFIDENTIALITY

Supervised Persons may not disclose confidential information (as described below) to any person unless (i) the recipient has a clear and compelling need to know such information, and (ii) such disclosure does not violate applicable law or any contractual covenant. Confidential information includes any nonpublic information obtained in the course of their duties at Sands Capital, including:

 

  1. information of or regarding Sands Capital’s (or its affiliate’s) clients or prospective clients, including personal identifying information, such as name, address, Social Security Number or Tax Identification Number, and account information, such as recent or impending securities transactions by or on behalf of clients, account numbers and balances;

 

 

LOGO

3


  2. information on Sands Capital’s personnel, including pay, benefits, position level and performance ratings; and

 

  3. information on the business of Sands Capital and its affiliates, including investment strategies, technologies and business activities.

 

IV. DISQUALIFIED PERSONS

Section 9 of the Investment Company Act prohibits persons who have committed various acts from serving in certain capacities with respect to mutual funds. Under Section 9(a), an “ineligible person” generally cannot serve as an employee, officer, trustee, member of advisory board, investment adviser, or principal underwriter of a Fund (each a “Fund Position”) . Ineligible persons include:

 

  1. persons with convictions within the last 10 years who are tied to securities transactions or employment in the securities field;

 

  2. persons with permanent or temporary injunctions from acting in certain capacities in the securities arena;

 

  3. persons who have an affiliate that is ineligible under clause (1) or (2) above; or

 

  4. persons subject to an SEC order declaring them ineligible under Section 9 of the Investment Company Act.

The Chief Compliance Officer will monitor compliance with Section 9. A Supervised Person who becomes an “ineligible person” (or who believes he or she may have hired or employed an “ineligible person”) as described above must promptly notify the Compliance Team.

 

V. PROHIBITED TRANSACTIONS AND CONDUCT

 

  A. Fraudulent Purchases or Sales

Supervised Persons may not, directly or indirectly, in connection with the purchase or sale of a security held or to be acquired by any client:

 

  1. employ any device, scheme or artifice to defraud the client;

 

  2. make to the client any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary in order to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which they are made, not misleading;

 

  3. engage in any act, practice or course of business which would operate as a fraud or deceit upon the client; or

 

  4. engage in any manipulative practice with respect to the client.

 

 

LOGO

4


  B. Initial Public Offerings and Limited Offerings

Supervised Persons may not, directly or indirectly, acquire ownership of any security in an initial public offering or a limited offering without first obtaining written approval of the Chief Compliance Officer. In the event approval is granted, the Chief Compliance Officer will document the reasons for approval.

 

  C. Options and Short Sales

Supervised Persons may not trade in options or sell securities “short” (except in the limited situations where an exchange traded fund, mutual fund, or foreign currency contract that is eligible for investment by the Supervised Person transacts in options or short sales).

 

  D. Blackout Periods

Supervised Persons may not trade any security that is the subject of an “investment action” for a specified “blackout period.” An “investment action” occurs when Sands Capital acts to add (or eliminate) a security to (or from), or increase (or reduce) the weighting of a security in the portfolio of an investment strategy. Specifically, Supervised Persons may not, directly or indirectly, purchase or sell any security involved in an investment action during the:

 

  1. 10 calendar days before the beginning of the investment action;

 

  2. during the investment action; and

 

  3. 7 calendar days after completion of the investment action (an investment action is deemed completed on the date notification of such action is sent to advisory clients).

 

  E. Securities Pre-Clearance

Supervised Persons are required to pre-clear all securities transactions (other than opened ended mutual funds, ETFs, annuities, fixed income products, including U.S. government securities, systematic investment plans, foreign currency contracts, receipt of spousal stock options or grants, and non-discretionary accounts). Pre-clearance requests for publicly traded securities must be submitted through the Compliance Science PTCC trading platform, and pre-clearance requests for private securities transactions must be submitted through email and sent to preclearance@sandscap.com .

With regard to the window of trading 10 days prior to the start of an investment action, the Compliance Team will analyze any breaches to determine if the Supervised Person had prior knowledge of the investment action. In this regard, the Compliance Team will seek to ascertain if the investment action had been decided upon and communicated to Supervised Persons by the Portfolio Manager Decision Teams. If prior knowledge is not established, the breach will not be deemed a violation of this Code.

By requesting pre-clearance you represent that you (or the registered account holder):

 

  1. have no knowledge of a pending investment action involving the security;

 

  2. are not in possession of any material nonpublic information concerning the security to which this request relates;

 

  3. are not engaging in any manipulative or deceptive trading activity; and

 

 

LOGO

5


  4. the transaction does not violate the “Short-Term Trading” prohibition.

The Compliance Team has the discretion to approve or decline any pre-clearance request. Any pre-clearance that is granted is valid for the day your personal trade request is approved plus one (1) business day after approval is granted.

 

  F. Prohibition on Short-Term Trading Profits

Supervised Persons may not profit from the purchase and sale of the same (or equivalent) covered securities, including Reportable Funds, within 30 calendar days. This prohibition does not apply to transactions resulting in a loss.

 

  G. Investment Clubs

An investment club is a group of people who pool their money to make investments. Usually, after the members study different investments, the group decides to buy or sell based on a majority vote of the members. Club meetings may be educational and each member may actively participate in investment decisions.

Supervised Persons may not form or participate in an investment club unless prior written clearance has been obtained from the Chief Compliance Officer or General Counsel. Generally, transactions by the investment club in which an access person has beneficial ownership or control are subject to the same pre-clearance and reporting requirements applicable to an individual’s trades in covered securities.

 

  H. Exempt Transactions

The prohibitions and restrictions of this Section V do not apply to:

 

  1. purchases or sales effected in any account over which the Supervised Person has no direct or indirect influence or control;

 

  2. purchases, sales or other acquisitions of securities that are non-volitional on the part of the Supervised Person, such as sales from a margin account pursuant to bona fide margin calls, stock dividends, stock splits, mergers, consolidations, spin-offs, or other similar corporate reorganizations or distributions;

 

  3. purchases that are part of an automatic investment plan;

 

  4. purchases effected upon the exercise of rights issued pro rata to all holders of a class of its securities, to the extent such rights were acquired from such issuer; and

 

  5. acquisitions of securities through gifts or bequests.

 

  I. Hardship Exemptions

A Supervised Person may submit to the Chief Compliance Officer or General Counsel a request for an exemption from the blackout period of the personal trading policy for an unforeseen hardship situation (e.g., the purchase of a home, a large unforeseen expense, such as a medical expense). All requests must be in writing and must state the reasons for the hardship. The Chief Compliance Officer or General Counsel will make a determination in light of all relevant facts and circumstances, including any actual or apparent conflict of interests generated by the possible exception when reviewing exceptions. These exceptions are granted rarely and only in extreme circumstances.

 

 

LOGO

6


  J. Directorships

Supervised Persons may not serve on the board of directors of any public company without first obtaining written approval of the Chief Compliance Officer or General Counsel. Supervised Persons may not serve as a member of the board of directors of any organization where Sands Capital directly serves as the investment manager of funds owned and/or directed by that organization without written approval from the Chief Compliance Officer.

 

  K. Sands Capital Ventures Investments

Sands Capital’s affiliate, Sands Capital Ventures, LLC, has offered, and from time to time is expected to offer, staff members the opportunity to invest directly or indirectly in privately held businesses. Staff members who choose to participate in such an investment may or may not receive allocations based upon availability, and accept all risks up to and including the loss of their total investment. Requests for investment must be pre-cleared by the Chief Compliance Officer, or her designee prior to closing the transaction.

Staff members who invest in Sands Capital Ventures’ investment opportunities are typically required to represent that they are qualified to invest, including that they are accredited investors.

Privately-held securities acquired by staff members through Sands Capital Ventures that become eligible for trading on a public exchange will generally be locked-up for a period of time. Staff members may also be subject to an additional lock-up imposed by Sands Capital (generally three months) with respect to the shares acquired in the private markets and those acquired in the initial public offering. The Conflicts of Interest Board will be responsible for assessing conflicts of interest, if any, that may arise when staff members have interests in a private company that is conducting its initial public offering. Purchases of additional shares of any such company on the open market will be subject to the pre-clearance criteria and restrictions that apply generally under this Code.

 

VI. REPORTING AND CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

Reports pursuant to this Section VI shall be made to and reviewed by the Compliance Team.

 

  A. Duplicate Brokerage Statements

Supervised persons are required to instruct their broker-dealers, banks or other financial services firms to provide duplicate statements (no less than quarterly) for any account in which they have any direct or indirect beneficial ownership. These statements may be received electronically via the PTCC system or in traditional paper format.

 

  B. Initial Holdings Report

No later than 10 days after becoming a Supervised Person, such person shall report the following:

 

  1. the title and exchange ticker symbol or CUSIP number, type of security, number of shares and principal amount (if applicable) of each covered security in which he or she has any direct or indirect beneficial ownership; or

 

 

LOGO

7


  2. in the event that the Supervised Person has no beneficial ownership in any covered securities, either a statement to that effect or the word “None” (or similar designation); and

 

  3. the name of any broker, dealer or bank with which the Supervised Person maintains an account in which any securities are held for his or her direct or indirect benefit; and

 

  4. the date the Supervised Person submits the report.

The information in an Initial Holdings Report must be current as of a date not more than 45 days prior to the date the person became a Supervised Person.

 

  C. Annual Holdings Reports

On or before February 14 th of each year, supervised persons must report the following:

 

  1. the title and exchange ticker symbol or CUSIP number, type of security, number of shares and principal amount (if applicable) of each covered security in which the Supervised Person has any direct or indirect beneficial ownership (generally, duplicate brokerage statements will be used to satisfy this requirement); or

 

  2. in the event that he or she has no beneficial ownership in any covered securities, either a statement to that effect or the word “None” (or some similar designation); and

 

  3. the name of any broker, dealer or bank with which the Supervised Person maintains an account in which any securities are held for his or her direct or indirect benefit; and

 

  4. the date the Supervised Person submits the report.

The information in an Annual Holdings Report shall be current as of December 31st of the preceding year.

 

  D. Quarterly Transaction Reports

No later than 30 days after the end of each calendar quarter, supervised persons must report the following:

 

  1. With respect to any transaction during the quarter in a covered security in which the Supervised Person has, or by reason of such transaction acquires, any direct or indirect beneficial ownership (generally, duplicate brokerage statements will be used to satisfy this requirement):

 

  a. the trade date of the transaction, the title and exchange ticker symbol or CUSIP number, the interest rate and maturity date (if applicable), the number of shares and the principal amount (if applicable) of each covered security involved;

 

 

LOGO

8


  b. the nature of the transaction ( i.e. , purchase, sale or any other type of acquisition or disposition);

 

  c. the price of the covered security at which the transaction was effected; and

 

  d. the name of the broker, dealer or bank with or through which the transaction was effected; or

 

  e. in the event there were no such transactions during the quarter, either a statement to that effect or the word “None” (or some similar designation); and

 

  f. the date the Supervised Person submits the report.

 

  2. With respect to any account established by the Supervised Person in which any covered securities were held during the quarter for the direct or indirect benefit of the Supervised Person:

 

  a. the name of the broker, dealer or bank with whom the account is established; and

 

  b. the date the account was established; or

 

  c. in the event there were no such accounts established during the quarter, either a statement to that effect or the word “None” (or some similar designation); and

 

  d. the date the Supervised Person submits the report.

 

  E. Exceptions to Reporting Requirements

A Supervised Person need not submit:

 

  1. any report with respect to securities held in accounts over which he or she has no direct or indirect influence or control;

 

  2. a transaction report with respect to transactions effected pursuant to an automatic investment plan;

 

  3. a transaction report if the report would duplicate information contained in broker trade confirmations or account statements that are received by the Compliance Team with respect to such person, so long as the Compliance Team receives the confirmations or statements no later than 30 days after the end of the applicable calendar quarter; and

 

  4. qualified tuition programs established pursuant to Section 529 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, otherwise known as 529 plans that are not managed by Sands Capital.

 

 

LOGO

9


Any report required by this Section IV may contain a statement that the report shall not be construed as an admission by the person making the report that he or she has any direct or indirect beneficial ownership in the security to which the report relates.

 

  F. Annual Certifications

Supervised Persons shall certify in writing at least annually that they (i) have read and understand this Code; (ii) recognize that they are subject to this Code; and (iii) will comply with the requirements of this Code, including reporting all information required to be reported by this Code.

 

  G. Reporting of Code Violations

Each Supervised Person is required to notify the Chief Compliance Officer promptly if he or she knows of any violation of this Code. Failure to do so is a violation of this Code. In the event that a matter implicates the Chief Compliance Officer, notice of a violation may be provided to the General Counsel or another executive officer of Sands Capital.

Consistent with Sands Capital’s policies, no person or group within Sands Capital shall retaliate, nor shall Sands Capital or any Supervised Person tolerate any retaliation by any other person or group within the firm, directly or indirectly, against anyone who, in good faith, reports any violation of this Code or provides assistance to management or any other person or group, including any governmental, regulatory or law enforcement body, investigating any violation of this Code.

Sands Capital shall not reveal the identity of any person who reports a violation of this Code and who asks that his or her identity as the person who made such report remain confidential. Sands Capital shall not make any effort, or tolerate any effort made by any other person or group, to ascertain the identity of any person who reports a violation anonymously, unless (i) such information is required to be disclosed by law or applicable legal process or by applicable securities or commodities exchange, self-regulatory organization, or other rules or regulations; or (ii) disclosure of such information, or ascertaining such identity, is supported by a clear and compelling interest of clients that is sufficient in the particular case to overcome an expectation of anonymity.

 

VII. GIFTS & ENTERTAINMENT

A. General Guidance on Gifts and Entertainment

Section 17(e)(1) prohibits the acceptance, by Supervised Persons, of gifts, entertainment, or any compensation (other than salary) from persons doing business, or hoping to do business with Sands Capital. By refusing inappropriate inducements of any kind, Supervised Persons will be preserving assets of far greater value: their good name, the reputation of Sands Capital, and our clients’ financial welfare.

General rules for Supervised Persons:

 

    You may give and receive modest business gifts, and this policy is not intended to restrict normal business activity.

 

    You may not give or accept any gift of more than de minimis value (currently $250 per year) from any person, entity, client or prospective client that does business with or is seeking to do business with Sands Capital or its affiliates.

 

    Gifts of cash or cash equivalents may not be given or received regardless of value.

 

 

LOGO

10


    Gifts do not apply to ordinary and usual business entertainment, such as an occasional meal, sporting event, theater production or comparable entertainment event so long as it is neither so frequent nor so extensive as to raise any question of propriety.

At times it could be difficult to discern between a gift and entertainment. If you are attending an event with the giver of the tickets to the event it is typically considered entertainment. In comparison, gifts are given and used/consumed only by the Supervised Person and his/her family. Please refer to definitions below:

Gift

The term “gift” includes the giving or receipt of gratuities, merchandise and the enjoyment or use of property or facilities for weekends, vacations, trips, dinners, and the like, including transportation and lodging costs.

Business Entertainment

“Business entertainment” is a normal part of a business relationship and occurs when a Sands Capital staff member is in the presence of a business contact (either when the business contact is being entertained by a Sands Capital staff member or vice versa). Some examples may include meals, snacks, drinks, or sporting events.

Please contact the Compliance Team if you are unable to determine if something is a gift or entertainment.

 

  B. Additional Guidance on Gifts and Entertainment

It is important to remember that some entities (e.g., clients or potential clients that are states, municipalities, or qualified retirement plans) have very stringent restrictions and/or prohibitions on the acceptance of gifts or business entertainment by the personnel. Care must be taken to ensure that Sands Capital does not inadvertently give a gift or provide business entertainment that might cause a business contact to violate any of these restrictions.

Public and Foreign Officials

Supervised Persons are prohibited from giving or providing any gift, including a personal gift, to any official of a Public Fund without the express prior approval of the Chief Compliance Officer or General Counsel. U.S. states may adopt rules that govern the provision of gifts and business entertainment. These rules may impose increased reporting requirements.

In addition, Sands Capital prohibits any Supervised Person or agent, either personally or on behalf of others, from making, offering or promising to make, authorizing or directing any payment of anything of value (including cash or property), directly or indirectly, to a foreign government official for the purpose of inducing or influencing the foreign government official to use his or her position in order to assist in obtaining or retaining business or securing any improper business advantage. Giving gifts to and receiving gifts from foreign officials is prohibited.

For more information on gifts and entertainment in relation to foreign public officials, see Sands Capital Management’s FCPA policy and procedure, available on the intranet.

Financial Conduct Authority of the United Kingdom (FCA) Clients

 

 

LOGO

11


Supervised Persons are prohibited from providing any gift, including a personal gift, to any client (or potential client), who is regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority of the United Kingdom (the “FCA”). In addition, when hosting or providing non-monetary benefits to a client (or potential client), Supervised Persons must assess whether all aspects of the benefit or event are designed to enhance the quality of the service to the client, including the location and nature of the venue. Hosting events or providing benefits is prohibited if they are not conducive to business discussions or if business discussions could better take place without them. Hosting sporting and social events or otherwise subsidizing entertainment, for example, is prohibited.

While activities/benefits such as hosting a meal, providing welcome bags at a client event or validating parking are not prohibited, they may require Sands Capital to disclose whatever information the client or potential client deems necessary to enable them to comply with FCA reporting regulations.

ERISA

In accordance with guidance from the Department of Labor the annual limit on gifts and business entertainment the annual limit on gifts and business entertainment provided to an ERISA plan fiduciary representative is $250. Generally meals provided at educational conferences, or associated with business meetings do not count towards the $250 annual limit.

Taft-Hartley

Any gifts, payments of money or anything of value made directly or indirectly by you to a labor organization or officer, agent, shop steward, or other representative or employee of any labor organization (including union officials serving in some capacity to a Taft-Hartley Plan) must be reported to the Chief Compliance Officer. All items regardless of the amount or value must be reported. Following are examples of potentially reportable items:

    Meals

 

    Gifts (e.g., holiday gifts)

 

    Travel and lodging costs

 

    Bar bills

 

    Sporting event tickets

 

    Theatre tickets

 

    Clothing or equipment

 

    Raffle donations

 

    Retirement dinners

 

    Golf (including charity golf tournaments)

 

    Hole sponsorships for golf tournament
    Advertising at union or Taft-Hartley fund related functions

 

    Sponsorship of union conferences, picnics, other events

 

    Donations to union related charities or scholarship funds

 

    Conferences attended by union officials, Supervised Persons, etc.

 

    Receptions attended by union officials, Supervised Persons, etc.

 

    Donations for apprenticeship graduation dinners
 

 

  C. Reporting of Gifts & Entertainment

All gifts of which you are the recipient must be reported in writing via email to the Chief Compliance Officer or General Counsel if the value is reasonably judged to exceed $250 per year. Reporting must include the name(s) of the giver, the date, the organization of the giver, a description of the gift or event, and the value or estimated value of the gift or event.

 

  D. Exceptions

Exceptions to the gift limit may be made by the Chief Compliance Officer or General Counsel. Supervised Persons should request exceptions for personal circumstances in which the employee has a personal relationship with a third party (such as receiving or providing personal gifts as wedding gifts or gifts for the birth of a child).

 

 

LOGO

12


VIII. REPORTS TO FUND CLIENTS

Sands Capital shall furnish to the board of directors/trustees of each Reportable Fund, at the direction and timing specified by such boards, but no less frequently than annually, a written report that (i) describes any issues affecting the Reportable Fund arising under this Code or related procedures since the last report, including, but not limited to, information about material violations of this Code or such procedures and the sanctions imposed; and (ii) certifies that Sands Capital has adopted procedures reasonably necessary to prevent its Supervised Persons from violating this Code.

 

IX. SANCTIONS

Supervised Persons who violate this Code will be subject to such sanctions as deemed necessary and appropriate under the circumstances and in the best interest of clients. The range of sanctions include but are not limited to a written warning or reprimand, cancellation of trades, disgorgement of profits or sale of positions at a loss, restriction on trading privileges, fines, suspension of employment without pay, termination of employment, and/or referral to regulatory or law enforcement authorities.

 

X. OTHER DISCLAIMERS

Notwithstanding the foregoing and anything else contained in these policies and procedures, nothing in these policies and procedures is intended to prevent, delay or otherwise restrict a staff member’s rights under applicable law to notify government authorities of suspected or actual wrongdoing by Sands Capital or its employees and representatives.

 

XI. RECORDS

Sands Capital shall maintain such records relating to this Code of Ethics, in the manner and as required by Rule 204-2(a)(12) under the Advisers Act and Rules 17f-1(f) and 31a-1(f) under the Investment Company Act.

 

 

LOGO

13


Attachment A

BENEFICIAL OWNERSHIP

As used in the Code of Ethics, beneficial ownership is interpreted in the same manner as it would be in determining whether a person is subject to Section 16 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), except that the determination of such ownership applies to all securities.

For the purposes of the Exchange Act, beneficial ownership includes:

 

  (a) the receipt of benefits substantially equivalent to those of ownership through relationship, understanding, agreement, contract or other arrangements; or

 

  (b) the power to vest or reinvest such ownership in oneself at once, or at some future time.

Using the above definition as a broad guideline, the ultimate determination of beneficial ownership will be made in light of the facts of the particular case. Key factors are the degree of the individual’s ability to exercise discretion to invest in, sell or exercise voting rights of the security, and the ability of the individual to benefit from the proceeds of the security.

 

1. Securities Held by Family Members

As a general rule, a person is regarded as having beneficial ownership of a security held in the name of his or her spouse and their minor children. In the absence of special circumstances, these family relationships ordinarily confer benefits substantially equivalent to ownership.

In addition, absent countervailing facts, it is expected that a security held by a relative who shares the same household as the reporting person will be reported as beneficially owned by such person.

 

2. Securities Held by a Company

Generally, ownership of a security of a company does not constitute beneficial ownership with respect to the holdings of the company in the securities of another issuer. However, an owner of securities in a holding company will be deemed to have beneficial ownership in the holdings of the holding company where:

 

  (a) the company is merely a medium through which one or several persons in a small group invest or trade in securities; and

 

  (b) the company has no other substantial business.

In such cases, the persons who are in a position of control of the holding company are deemed to have beneficial interest in the securities of the holding company.

 

3. Securities Held in Trust

Beneficial ownership of securities in a private trust includes:

 

  (a) the ownership of securities as a trustee where either the trustee or members of his or her immediate family have a vested interest in the income or corpus of the trust;

 

 

LOGO

14


  (b) the ownership of a vested beneficial interest in a trust; and

 

  (c) the ownership of securities as a settlor of a trust in which the settlor has the power to revoke the trust without obtaining the consent of all the beneficiaries.

As used in this section, the “immediate family” of a trustee means:

 

  (a) a son or daughter of the trustee or a descendent of either;

 

  (b) a stepson or stepdaughter of the trustee;

 

  (c) the father or mother of the trustee, or an ancestor of either;

 

  (d) a stepfather or stepmother of the trustee; and

 

  (e) a spouse of the trustee.

For the purposes of determining whether any of the foregoing relations exists, a legally adopted child of a person shall be considered a child of such person by blood.

 

4. Miscellaneous Issues

Beneficial ownership does not include, however, a person’s interest in portfolio securities held by:

 

  (a) any holding company registered under the Public Utility Holding Company Act;

 

  (b) any investment company registered under the Investment Company Act;

 

  (c) a pension or retirement plan holding securities of an issuer whose employees generally are the beneficiaries of the plan; and

 

  (d) a business trust with over 25 beneficiaries.

Participation in a pension or retirement plan will result in beneficial ownership of the portfolio securities if plan participants can withdraw and trade the securities without withdrawing from the plan.

 

 

LOGO

15

 

Water Island Capital, LLC

Code of Ethics

 

 

January 2017


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

1.   Definitions      1  
2.   Introduction      3  
3.   Standards of Business Conduct      4  
4.   Personal Trading      4  
  4.1    Maintenance and Oversight of Personal Trading      4  
  4.2    Access Person Accounts      5  
  4.3    Pre-Clearance      5  
  4.4    Restrictions on Access Person Securities Transactions      6  
  4.5    Reporting      6  
5.   Gifts and Entertainment      7  
  5.1    General Provisions      7  
  5.2    Receiving Gifts and Entertainment      7  
  5.3    Providing Gifts and Entertainment      8  
  5.4    Quarterly Certifications      9  
6.   Outside Business Activities      9  
  6.1    General Provisions      9  
  6.2    Conflict Mitigation      9  
7.   Political Contributions      10  
  7.1    General Provisions      10  
  7.2    Exceptions      10  
  7.3    Reporting      11  
  7.4    Recordkeeping Requirements      11  
  7.5    Compliance Monitoring      11  
8.   Foreign Corrupt Practices Act      12  
  8.1    Prohibited Payments      12  
  8.2    Permissible Payments      13  
  8.3    Compliance Pre-Approval      13  
9.   Administration of the Code of Ethics      13  
  9.1    Confidentiality      13  
  9.2    Review and Disciplinary Action      13  
  9.3    Authority to Provide Exemptions      13  
  9.4    Recordkeeping Requirements      14  
  9.5    Acknowledgment      14  
10.   Mutual Fund Board Reporting and Approval of the Code of Ethics      14  


1. Definitions

Employees are responsible for reading and being familiar with each of the definitions below, which are used throughout the Code of Ethics. It is important that you understand the meaning of the definitions as their meaning may be more expansive or restricted than in another context. All defined terms are capitalized in the Code of Ethics.

 

    Access Person(s) – Any partner, officer, director, employee, intern, or consultant 1 who has or may obtain access to non-public information regarding Clients’ purchase or sale of securities, or non-public information regarding the portfolio holdings of any Client, or any person who is involved in making investment decisions on behalf of Clients, or who has access to such recommendations that are non-public. As the Adviser’s primary business is providing investment advice, all personnel are presumed to be Access Persons unless otherwise confirmed with the CCO. Each Access Person is required to understand and comply with applicable reporting requirements of this Code. 2

 

    Access Person Account – Any account holding Reportable Securities in which an Access Person has Beneficial Ownership.

 

    Adviser – Water Island Capital, LLC.

 

    Automatic Investment Plan – A program in which regular periodic purchases (or withdrawals) are made automatically in (or from) investment accounts in accordance with a predetermined schedule and allocation, including a dividend reinvestment plan.

 

    Beneficial Ownership – Having or sharing the opportunity, directly or indirectly, to profit or share in any profit derived from a transaction in securities. Generally, an individual is considered to have a “Beneficial Ownership” interest in Securities held in any account maintained by or for:

 

  a. Any member of an Access Person’s Immediate Family sharing the same household;

 

  b. Any individuals who live in the Access Person’s household and over whose purchases, sales or trading activities the Access Person exercises control or investment discretion;

 

  c. Any persons for whom the Access Person provides financial support and (a) whose financial affairs the Access Person controls, or (b) for whom the Access Person provides discretionary advisory services with respect to such person’s ownership of securities;

 

  d. Any trust or other arrangement that names the Access Person as a beneficiary or remainderman; or

 

  e. Any partnership, corporation or other entity in which the Access Person has a 25% or greater beneficial interest, or in which the Access Person exercises, either individually or together with others, effective control.

 

    CCO – The individual designated by the Adviser to serve as Chief Compliance Officer.

 

    Client / Client Account – Any account, or public or Private Fund advised or sub-advised by the Adviser.

 

    Covered Associate – Any general partners, managing members or executive officers of the Adviser, employees who solicit government entities for the Adviser and their supervisors, and any political action committee controlled by the Advisers. Executive officers include the president, a vice president in charge of a principal business unit, division or function, and any other officer of the Adviser or any other person who performs policy-making functions for the Adviser.

 

1   The CCO shall determine on a case-by-case basis whether interns, consultants, and temporary employees are Access Persons.
2   A list of all Access Persons will be maintained by the Firm’s Compliance Department.

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 1 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


    Ethics Committee – A committee composed of the CCO, Managing Member, and a third employee chosen by the CCO and Managing Member. The Ethics Committee may be empaneled from time to time at the request of the CCO to determine disciplinary action for violations of the Code.

 

    Exempt Security – An Exempt Security means any:

 

  a. Direct obligations of the government of the United States;

 

  b. Cash or cash equivalents, bankers’ acceptances, bank certificates of deposit, commercial paper, bank repurchase agreements and other high quality short term debt instruments;

 

  c. Shares issued by registered open end mutual funds (including money-market funds), and unit investment trusts, in each case provided they are not shares issued by Client Accounts. ETFs and shares issued by Client Accounts (e.g., interests in private funds and mutual funds advised or sub-advised by WIC) are NOT exempt from pre-clearance and reporting requirements.

 

    Federal Securities Laws – The Securities Act of 1933, the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the Investment Company Act of 1940, the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, Title V of the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, any rules adopted by the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) under any of these statutes, the Bank Secrecy Act as it applies to funds and investment advisers, and any rules adopted thereunder by the SEC or the Department of the Treasury.

 

    Foreign Official – Any officer or employee of a foreign government or any department, agency or instrumentality thereof, or of a public international organization, or any person acting in an official capacity for or on behalf of any such government or department, agency or instrumentality, or for or on behalf of any such public international organization. The definition of Foreign Official should be interpreted broadly, and also includes:

 

    Officials in the executive, legislative or judicial branches of a foreign government whether at federal (national), state or local level;

 

    Employees and officers of state-owned, state-controlled, or state-operated enterprises;

 

    Employees and officers of foreign-government controlled funds, such as pension funds or sovereign-wealth funds;

 

    Political parties, political party officials and candidates for political office; and

 

    Employees of public international organizations (e.g., the World Bank, IMF and EU).

 

    Immediate Family – means any child, stepchild, grandchild, parent, stepparent, grandparent, spouse, domestic partner, sibling, mother-in-law, father-in-law, daughter-in-law, son-in-law, brother-in-law, sister-in-law, and includes any adoptive relationship.

 

    Limited Offering – An offering that is exempt from registration pursuant to sections 4(a)(2) or 4(6) of the Securities Act, or pursuant to Rules 504, 505, or 506 of Regulation D; also known as a private placement.

 

    Material Non-Public Information – Information that (i) has not been made generally available to the public, and that (ii) a reasonable investor would likely consider important in making an investment decision. Access Persons should consult with Compliance about any questions as to whether information constitutes Material Non-Public Information.

 

    Political Contribution – Any gift, subscription, loan, advance, or deposit of money or anything of value made for (i) the purpose of influencing any election for federal, state or local office; (ii) payment of debt incurred in connection with any such election; or (iii) transition or inaugural expenses of the successful candidate for state or local office.

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 2 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


    Private Fund – A pooled investment vehicle, such as a hedge fund, that is not subject to registration requirements under the Securities Act of 1933 and Investment Company Act of 1940.

 

    Reportable Security – Any Security, except (i) Exempt Securities, or (ii) Securities in an account over which you do not have any direct or indirect influence or control, including Third Party Managed Accounts;

 

    Restricted Security – Any non-Exempt Security that:

 

  a. A Client Account owns or is in the process of buying or selling, with the exception of broad-based ETFs with market capitalizations in excess of $5 billion;

 

  b. The Firm is researching, analyzing or considering buying or selling for a Client or Client Account (see pre-clearance procedures for investment and risk team members); or

 

  c. Is subject to a restriction on trading issued by Compliance pursuant to the Firm’s Insider Trading policies and procedures.

 

    Security – Any note, stock, treasury stock, security future, bond, debenture, evidence of indebtedness, certificate of interest or participation in any profit-sharing agreement, collateral-trust certificate, preorganization certificate or subscription, transferable share, investment contract, voting-trust certificate, certificate of deposit for a security, fractional undivided interest in oil, gas, or other mineral rights, any put, call, straddle, option, or privilege on any security (including a certificate of deposit) or on any group or index of securities (including any interest therein or based on the value thereof), or any put, call, straddle, option, or privilege entered into on a national securities exchange relating to foreign currency, or, in general, any interest or instrument commonly known as a “security”, or any certificate of interest or participation in, temporary or interim certificate for, receipt for, guaranty of, or warrant or right to subscribe to or purchase any of the foregoing. Any questions about whether an instrument is a Security for purposes of the Code of Ethics should be directed to the CCO. For the avoidance of doubt, the term “Security” as used in this Code includes all ETFs.

 

    Third Party Managed Account – An account in which an Access Person has Beneficial Ownership and as to which:

 

  a. Pursuant to an agreement and in actual practice, an investment adviser or broker (who is not an Access Person or affiliate of WIC) has full discretionary authority to purchase and sell Securities without prior notification to, discussion with or consent of the accountholder or his/her representatives (including the Access Person);

 

  b. The Access Person retains no discretion over decisions to purchase or sell securities; and

 

  c. With respect to which communications with the adviser or broker are limited to confirmations and account statements, fee discussions, and other communications and discussions that do not relate to purchases or sales of specific Securities.

 

    529 Plan – A college tuition savings plan that meets the requirements of Section 529 of the Internal Revenue Code.

 

2. Introduction

Water Island Capital, LLC (“WIC”, “Adviser” or the “Firm”) is registered as an investment adviser under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, as amended (the “Advisers Act”). Rule 204A-1 under the Advisers Act requires all registered investment advisers to adopt a code of ethics that sets forth standards of conduct for Access Persons and requires them to comply with applicable Federal Securities Laws.

This Code establishes the standards of conduct required of all WIC Access Persons. The Code is designed to govern personal Securities trading activities in a manner consistent with the Advisers Act and Rule 17j-1 under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”), as well as other regulatory requirements.

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 3 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


The information collected pursuant to this Code is a required element of the Firm’s reporting to the Board of Trustees of each registered investment company advised or sub-advised by the Firm.

 

3. Standards of Business Conduct

WIC has a fiduciary duty to act in the best interests of its Clients. High ethical standards are essential to maintaining the confidence of Clients and investors in funds managed by the Firm. The Firm’s success and long term business interests are best served by adherence to the principle that the interests of Clients come first. Accordingly, the Firm has adopted the following principles to be followed by all of its Access Persons:

 

    You must put the interests of the Firm’s Clients before your own personal interests and must act honestly and fairly in all respects in dealings with Clients.

 

    You must effect all personal Securities transactions in a manner that avoids any actual or perceived conflict between your personal interests and those of our Clients and fund shareholders.

 

    You must avoid actions or activities that allow you or your family to take inappropriate advantage from your position with the Firm, or that bring into question your independence or judgment.

 

    You must not disclose Material Non-Public Information to others or engage in the purchase or sale, or recommend or suggest the purchase or sale, of any Security to which such information relates.

 

    You must comply with all Federal Securities Laws.

Adherence to the Code of Ethics is a basic condition of employment by the Firm. If you have any doubt as to the propriety of any activity, you should consult with Compliance.

 

4. Personal Trading

For the avoidance of doubt, securities transactions effected by Private Funds and mutual funds advised by WIC are exempt from Personal Trading requirements. 3 However, transactions in Securities issued by such funds (e.g., transactions in interests in Private Funds and mutual funds advised by WIC) are subject to the Personal Trading requirements.

 

  4.1 Maintenance and Oversight of Personal Trading

The Firm must be in a position to properly oversee the personal trading activity of its Access Persons. To assist with this oversight requirement, the Firm uses Cordium’s Compliance Employee Level Filing (“ELF”), an online platform designed to facilitate the collection and analysis of the information required by Rule 204A-1. Each Access Person has been provided an ELF account to comply with many of the reporting requirements of this Code, such as maintenance of Access Person Account information, pre-clearance requests, transaction records, initial and annual holdings reports, new employee on-boarding, document distribution, annual and ad-hoc attestations, and compliance questionnaires.

 

3   Compliance conducts surveillance of trading in all accounts managed by WIC.

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 4 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


  4.2 Access Person Accounts

The Firm requires that all Access Person Accounts be held with broker/dealers that are capable of providing electronic transaction and holdings feeds directly to ELF. A list of such brokers may be obtained from Compliance. All new Access Person Accounts must be pre-approved by Compliance prior to being opened by submitting a “New Brokerage Account” notification via the ELF system. It is the responsibility of each Access Person to ensure all of their Access Person Accounts have been approved by Compliance and linked to ELF. Failure to report an account will be treated as a serious breach of this Code.

 

  4.3 Pre-Clearance

It is the responsibility of Access Persons to ensure that all Securities transactions being considered for their Access Person Accounts are not subject to a restriction contained in this Code. Prior to execution, Access Persons are required to obtain pre-clearance through the ELF system for all Reportable Securities transactions in their Access Person Accounts. Pre-clearance for transactions in Reportable Securities will only be effective until the end of the trading day on which the pre-clearance authorization is granted, unless otherwise specified by Compliance in writing.

Private Placements/Limited Offerings

Access Persons must obtain approval from Compliance prior to a transaction in a Limited Offering, including Private Funds managed by WIC. Access Persons seeking approval to transact in a Limited Offering must submit a request via email to Compliance, and furnish any prospectus, private placement memoranda, subscription documents and/or other materials about the investment as Compliance may request. If the request is approved, Compliance will add the Private Placement to the list of Securities in the ELF system, at which time the Access Person can submit the request through ELF. The effective period for pre-approval for a private placement is at the discretion of Compliance, but will be limited to a reasonable period of time prior to the date of the intended transaction.

Pre-Clearance Procedures for Investment and Risk Team Members

All investment and risk team members are required to obtain written approval from the Trading team prior to requesting pre-clearance in the ELF system for any trades in their Access Person Accounts. The Trading team will copy Compliance on all approvals. Compliance will notify the Trading Team immediately of any violations of these procedures.

Exceptions to the Pre-Clearance Requirements

Pre-clearance is not required with respect to the following transactions:

 

    Transactions in Exempt Securities;

 

    Transactions made pursuant to an Automatic Investment Plan;

 

    Transactions in a 529 plan;

 

    Transactions made in a Third Party Managed Account; and

 

    Transactions effected by Private Funds and mutual funds advised by WIC. (Note, however, that transactions in interests issued by Private Funds and mutual funds advised or sub-advised by WIC are subject to pre-clearance, reporting, and minimum holding period requirements).

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 5 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


  4.4 Restrictions on Access Person Securities Transactions

Restricted Securities

Access Persons may not acquire Beneficial Ownership of Restricted Securities in their Access Person Accounts.

Sale of a Restricted Security

If an Access Person holds a Security in an Access Person Account that subsequently becomes a Restricted Security, the Access Person may be permitted to close the position under the following circumstances:

 

    The sale may only take place on a day when the Firm is not trading in the Security;

 

    Pre-approval request must be submitted through ELF. Once pre-approval has been rejected by ELF, the Access Person must then submit the request to Compliance; and

 

    Compliance may approve or reject the request, in writing, based on discussions with trading staff.

 

    If approved, the sale can only take place on the same day approval is obtained.

Initial Public Offerings

Access Persons are prohibited from acquiring for their Access Person Accounts any Security distributed in an initial public offering until trading of the Security commences in the secondary market. (An initial public offering is an offering of Securities registered under the Securities Act of 1933 where the issuer, immediately before the registration, was not subject to the reporting requirements of sections 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act or 1934).

Holding Period

The Firm believes that short-term or excessive personal trading by its Access Persons can raise conflicts of interests. Except as otherwise approved by Compliance in very limited circumstances (such as an unforeseen financial hardship), Access Persons are subject to a minimum 30-calendar day holding period for any Reportable Security in their Access Person Accounts.

 

  4.5 Reporting

Access Persons are required to report their Securities Transactions and Holdings via the ELF system as set forth below.

Holdings Reports

 

    Initial – Each Access Person must submit a holdings report disclosing all Securities of which he or she has Beneficial Ownership (including Securities held in Third Party Managed Accounts) within 10 days of the start of employment. The information contained in the initial holdings report must be current as of a date no more than 45 days prior to the start of employment.

 

    Annual – Each Access Person must submit an annual holdings report disclosing all Securities of which he or she has Beneficial Ownership (including Securities held in Third Party Managed Accounts) at least once in each 12-month period after submitting the initial holdings report. The information contained in the annual holdings report must be current as of a date no more than 45 days prior to the date the report was submitted.

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 6 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


Quarterly Trade Reporting Requirements

Within 30 days after the end of each quarter, all Access Persons must review and confirm a report generated by ELF listing all Reportable Securities transactions effected in their Access Person Accounts during the prior quarter. If any Reportable Securities transactions are missing from the pre-populated ELF report they will need to be added manually prior to submission.

Access Persons who did not effect any Reportable Securities transactions during the previous quarter are required to submit a certification on ELF indicating that no Reportable Securities transactions need to be reported.

Exceptions to the Quarterly Reporting Requirements

Transactions reports do not need to be filed for:

 

    Automatic Invest Plan accounts;

 

    529 Plan accounts;

 

    Transactions effected by accounts managed by WIC. (Transactions in interests in mutual funds and Private Funds managed by WIC are reportable); and

 

    Accounts where the Access Person has no investment discretion (e.g., Third Party Managed Accounts). Access Persons are required to inform Compliance of these types of accounts and if requested, provide a letter from their Broker/Dealer or Financial Advisor confirming that the Access Person has no discretion over investment decisions.

 

5. Gifts and Entertainment

 

  5.1 General Provisions

Gifts and entertainment can foster goodwill in business relationships; however, the giving or receiving of gifts or other items of value to or from persons doing business or seeking to do business with the Firm could call into question the independence of its judgment as a fiduciary of its Clients. If the Firm and/or an employee were found to be acting in a position of undisclosed conflict of interest, it could be considered a breach of fiduciary duty.

Employees may not give or accept cash gifts or cash equivalents to or from Clients, brokers, vendors, or other persons that do business with the Firm.

With respect to dollar limits and reporting thresholds, gifts and entertainment must be valued at the higher of cost or market value. For example, the market value of tickets to a sold-out event may exceed their face value. Employees are responsible for researching the market value of event tickets.

 

  5.2 Receiving Gifts and Entertainment

Prohibitions

Solicitation of gifts or entertainment is strictly prohibited. Employees may not solicit charitable contributions from Clients, brokers, vendors, or other persons that do business with the Firm without the prior approval of Compliance, who shall maintain a record of each such solicitation.

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 7 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


Employees may not accept any gifts or entertainment in exchange for the purchase or sale of any securities to or for any of the mutual funds advised by the Firm. If there is any question about the appropriateness of any particular gift, employees should consult Compliance.

Gifts

On occasion, employees may be offered, or may receive gifts from Clients, brokers, vendors, or other persons that do business with the Firm. Employees are required to report all gifts via the ELF system unless they are promotional items of nominal value that display the donor firm’s logo (e.g., umbrellas, tote bags, shirts, etc.). Employees are limited to accepting gifts that have an aggregate value of no more than $100 annually from a single donor. All gifts should be sent to employees at the Firm’s offices and may not be sent to their homes.

Gifts for infrequent life events (e.g., a wedding gift or congratulatory gift for the birth or adoption of a child) are not subject to the annual limit provided they are customary and reasonable, personal in nature or not in relation to the business of the Firm. In determining whether a gift is “personal in nature and not in relation to the business” of the Firm, Compliance will consider the nature of any pre-existing personal or family relationship between the donor and the recipient.

Entertainment

Unsolicited business entertainment from Clients, brokers, vendors, or other persons that do business with the Firm, including meals or tickets to cultural and sporting events are permitted if they are not so frequent, lavish or extravagant in the context of the Firm’s geographic location, or of such high value as to raise a question of impropriety. Employees may not accept entertainment unless (i) there is a business purpose for such event (e.g., relationship building) and (ii) both the employee and the donor are present. Entertainment received that is valued at or estimated to be more than $100 must be reported via the ELF system.

 

  5.3 Providing Gifts and Entertainment

Gifts

Employees may not give any gift(s) with an aggregate value in excess of $100 per year to any person associated with a securities or financial organization, including brokerage firms or other investment management firms, to members of the news media, or to Clients or prospective Clients of the Firm without reporting such gifts to Compliance via the ELF system. Please note that some clients may have gift policies that are more restrictive and may be prohibited from accepting gifts other than promotional items from the Firm.

Entertainment

Employees may provide reasonable entertainment to persons associated with a securities or financial organization, members of the news media, or Clients or prospective Clients of the Firm provided that both the employee and the recipient are present, there is a business purpose for the entertainment and if it is not so frequent, lavish or extravagant in the context of the Firm’s geographic location, or of such high value as to raise a question of impropriety.

ERISA

ERISA prohibits the acceptance of fees, kickbacks, gifts, loans, money, and anything of value that are given with the intent of influencing decision-making with respect to any employee benefit plan. Many public employee benefit plans are subject to similar restrictions. Employees may never offer gifts or

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 8 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


other favors for the purpose of influencing decisions of existing or prospective ERISA Clients. Entertainment of ERISA or public plan trustees may be permissible if there is a business purpose for the entertainment (e.g., review of account performance), but any such entertainment must be consistent with the Code of Conduct of the ERISA plan.

 

  5.4 Quarterly Certifications

Employees are required to certify each quarter that:

 

    The gift and entertainment information submitted via the ELF system is accurate and complete; and

 

    No gifts or entertainment were received in exchange for the purchase or sale of any securities to or for any of the mutual funds advised by the Firm.

 

6. Outside Business Activities

 

  6.1 General Provisions

The Firm requires that employees devote their full professional attention to the interests of the Firm and its Clients. Accordingly, employees are prohibited from engaging in any of the following outside business activities without the prior written consent of the Chief Compliance Officer:

 

    Engaging in any other business;

 

    Acting as an officer of or employed or compensated by any other person for business-related activities;

 

    Serving as general partner, managing member or in a similar capacity with partnerships, limited liability companies or Private Funds other than those managed by the Firm or its affiliates;

 

    Engaging in personal investment transactions to an extent that diverts an employee’s attention from or impairs the performance of his or her duties in relation to the business of the Firm and its Clients;

 

    Having any direct or indirect financial interest or investment in any dealer, broker or other current or prospective supplier of goods or services to the Firm or the Funds (other than ownership of publicly traded securities) from which the employee might benefit or appear to benefit materially; or

 

    Serving on the board of directors (or in any similar capacity) of another company, including not-for-profit corporations. Authorization for board service will normally require that the Firm not hold or purchase any securities of the company on whose board the employee sits.

 

  6.2 Conflict Mitigation

The Chief Compliance Officer may consult with the Firm’s Managing Member and/or Management Committee to determine whether the requested outside business activity could pose potential conflicts of interests with the employee’s duties to the Firm or its Clients, including compliance with the Firm’s Insider Trading Policy. In addition, all approved outside business activities are subject to the following conditions:

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 9 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


    The employee is prohibited from implying that he or she is acting on behalf of, or as a representative of, the Firm;

 

    The employee is prohibited from using the Firm’s offices, equipment or stationery for any purpose not directly related to the Firm’s business;

 

    The employee must immediately report to the Chief Compliance Officer any material change with respect to the outside business activity, as well as any conflicts of interests that may arise after the activity is approved.

 

7. Political Contributions

 

  7.1 General Provisions

Rule 206(4)-5 under the Advisers Act prohibits investment advisers from providing advisory services for compensation to a government entity—either directly or through a pooled investment vehicle—if the adviser or its Covered Associates have made a Political Contribution within the previous two years to an elected official of a state (or political subdivision of a state) who is in a position to influence the selection of the adviser.

The rule further prohibits advisers and Covered Associates from:

 

    Soliciting or coordinating campaign contributions from others for an elected official who is in a position to influence the selection of the adviser;

 

    Soliciting and coordinating payments to political parties in the state or locality where the adviser is seeking business;

 

    Paying a third party, such as a solicitor or placement agent, to solicit a government Client on behalf of the investment adviser, unless that third party is an SEC-registered investment adviser, broker-dealer or municipal advisor subject to similar pay-to-play restrictions;

 

    Engaging in pay-to-play conduct indirectly, such as by directing or funding contributions through third parties such as spouses, lawyers or companies affiliated with the adviser, if that conduct would violate the rule if the adviser or Covered Associate did it directly.

 

  7.2 Exceptions

Political Contributions that would otherwise disqualify an adviser from providing investment advisory services to a government entity can be made under the following circumstances:

 

    De Minimis Contributions SEC rules permit a Covered Associate to make contributions to officials for whom he or she was entitled to vote at the time of the contribution if, in the aggregate, the contributions do not exceed $350 to any one official, per election. If the Covered Associate was not entitled to vote for the official at the time of the contribution, such contribution may not exceed $150, in the aggregate, to any one official, per election.

 

    New Covered Associates – Contributions made by new Covered Associates more than six months prior to joining the adviser will not disqualify the adviser, as long as such Covered Associates do not solicit Clients for the adviser.

 

    Returned Contributions – In very limited circumstances, an adviser might not be disqualified from providing investment advisory services to a government entity if the prohibited contribution was less than $350, is discovered within four months of the date of the contribution, and returned within 60 days after the date of discovery. The Firm may not take advantage of this exception more than two times per calendar year, and not more than once per Covered Associate regardless of the time period.

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 10 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


  7.3 Reporting

All employees are required to report all Political Contributions on the ELF system promptly. Contributions in excess of the de Minimis amounts stated above must be pre-approved by Compliance.

New employees are required to report all Political Contributions made within the two years preceding the start of employment with the Firm.

 

  7.4 Recordkeeping Requirements

The Firm is required to make and keep records for five years of:

 

    The names, titles, and business and residence addresses of all Covered Associates;

 

    All direct or indirect Political Contributions made by the Firm or Covered Associates to an official of a government entity, or direct or indirect payments to a political party of a state or political subdivision thereof, or to a political action committee. These records must include the name and title of each contributor, the amount and date of each contribution or payment, the name and title of each recipient (including any city/county/state or other political subdivision) of a contribution or payment, and whether any such contribution was the subject of the exception for certain returned contributions;

 

    The name and business address of any person or entity to whom the Firm provides or agrees to provide, directly or indirectly, payment to solicit a government entity for investment advisory services on its behalf;

 

    All government entities whose accounts were identified as those of a government entity—at or around the time of the initial investment—to the Firm or one of its Client servicing employees or Covered Associates;

 

    All government entities that sponsor or establish a 529 Plan and have selected a Fund advised by the Firm as an option to be offered by such 529 Plan;

 

    All government entities that have been solicited to invest in a Fund advised by the Firm either (i) by a Covered Associate, or (ii) by an intermediary of the Fund if a Covered Associate or Client servicing employee of the Firm participated in or was involved in such solicitation, regardless of whether such government entity invested in the Fund; and

 

    All government entities that invest in Funds advised by the Firm whose accounts can reasonably be identified as being held in the name or for the benefit of such government entity on the records of the Fund or the transfer agent.

 

  7.5 Compliance Monitoring

Compliance will monitor all requests for new Client accounts and subscriptions to identify any U.S. federal, state or local governmental units (including pension and other benefit plans of such units) that may become Clients of the Firm or investors in its funds. Compliance will review Political Contributions made by Covered Associates for the prior two years to determine whether the Firm will be permitted to provide services to such Clients or investors, and if contributions have been made, whether corrective action, including seeking a return of the contribution, should be taken. With respect to investment

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 11 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


companies advised by the Firm, Compliance will obtain from the Transfer Agent, on a quarterly basis, a list of shareholder accounts that may be coded as government entities. Compliance will assess such information and make a reasonable determination as to whether the accounts are deemed to be a state or local government entity.

 

8. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act

The Foreign Corrupt Practices Act of 1997, as amended (“FCPA”), prohibits improper payment to, or other improper transactions with, foreign government officials to influence performance of official duties. The FCPA prohibits offering to pay, paying, promising to pay, or authorizing the payment, directly or indirectly through a third party, of money or anything of value to any foreign official in order to influence any act or decision of the foreign official in his or her official capacity or to secure any other improper advantage in order to obtain or retain business. The FCPA applies to U.S. entities and persons and their officers, directors and employees. Non-U.S. persons are also subject to the FCPA to the extent that they carry out any part of any prohibited activity in or from the U.S.

Business and Client-related investment activities of the Firm that may raise issues under the FCPA include:

 

    Raising funds or capital or seeking investment management Clients outside the U.S. (including from foreign government or state-owned investment entities or sovereign wealth funds);

 

    Acquisition of a significant or controlling interest in a non-U.S. company;

 

    Investment in an entity or joint venture owned or partially owned by a foreign government; and

 

    Use of consultants, agents, or other third parties in soliciting non-U.S. investors or Clients or in seeking or making non-U.S. investments.

 

  8.1 Prohibited Payments

Employees are prohibited from making a payment of anything of value to a Foreign Official, directly or indirectly, with the intent to induce the recipient to misuse his or her official position, to obtain any improper advantage or to direct business wrongfully to the Firm. Specifically, employees are prohibited from paying, offering to pay or promising to pay money or anything of value, including but not limited to cash, gifts, entertainment or travel-related expenses. Additional examples of the types of payments that may be considered payments of value that can violate the FCPA include:

 

    In-kind contributions;

 

    Investment opportunities;

 

    Subcontracts;

 

    Positions in joint ventures;

 

    Favorable contracts;

 

    Consulting fees;

 

    Business opportunities or employment opportunities for family members;

 

    Political contributions; and

 

    Charitable donations and sponsorships.

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 12 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


  8.2 Permissible Payments

The FCPA permits certain small “facilitating” or “expediting” payments to Foreign Officials to ensure that they perform routine, nondiscretionary governmental duties (e.g. expediting permits, licenses, or other official documents; processing governmental papers, such as visas and work orders; providing police protection, mail pick-up and delivery; providing phone service, power and water supply, or protecting perishable products; and scheduling inspections associated with contract performance or transit of goods across country). The FCPA also permits payment or reimbursement of reasonable and bona fide expenses of a foreign official (e.g., travel and lodging expenses) relating to the promotion, demonstration or explanation of a product or service or to the execution or performance of a contract with a foreign government.

 

  8.3 Compliance Pre-Approval

Employees are required to obtain written approval from Compliance prior to:

 

    Entering into an arrangement on behalf of the Firm or any of its Clients with a third party intermediary who will act as placement agent or otherwise assist in the solicitation of investors or Clients outside the U.S.;

 

    Entering into a transaction on behalf of the Firm or any of its Clients for the acquisition of a significant or controlling interest in a non-U.S. company;

 

    Entering into a joint venture on behalf of the Firm or any of its Clients to be owned or to be partially owned by a foreign government or Foreign Official; and

 

    Giving a gift of more than a de Minimis value to a Foreign Official.

 

9. Administration of the Code of Ethics

 

  9.1 Confidentiality

All information submitted pursuant to this Code will be treated as confidential to the extent permitted by law.

 

  9.2 Review and Disciplinary Action

All information supplied pursuant to the Code will be reviewed by Compliance. 4 Violations of the Code will be discussed with the Ethics Committee. The Firm may impose such sanctions or remedial action as deemed appropriate by the CCO and the Ethics Committee. These sanctions may include, among other things, suspension of trading privileges, disgorgement of profits, suspension or termination of employment. In addition, violators may be subject to civil or criminal penalties.

 

  9.3 Authority to Provide Exemptions

The CCO has the authority to exempt any Access Person from certain provisions of this Code upon a determination that such exemption would not be inconsistent with Clients’ interests or applicable law. The CCO will prepare a written memorandum of any exemption granted, including a description of the circumstances and reasons for the exemption, and will provide a summary of exemptions granted to the Firm’s Management Committee on a quarterly basis.

 

4   The Firm currently has two compliance officers. The Director of Compliance is responsible for reviewing the CCO’s transaction reports and vice-versa. In the absence of the Director of Compliance, the Firm’s Managing Member will be responsible for reviewing the CCO’s compliance with the Code.

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 13 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017


  9.4 Recordkeeping Requirements

Copies of Access Person’s reports, confirmations, account statements, compliance reviews, and each version of the Code of Ethics will be maintained as required by applicable recordkeeping requirements.

 

  9.5 Acknowledgment

Compliance will distribute a copy of the Code to all Access Persons annually or when material changes are made to the Code. All Access Persons are required to sign and acknowledge their receipt of this Code by signing an attestation through ELF.

 

10. Mutual Fund Board Reporting and Approval of the Code of Ethics

The Firm serves as adviser or sub-adviser to a number of mutual funds. The Board of Trustees of each mutual fund advised or sub-advised by the Firm, including a majority of the Independent Directors, must approve the Firm’s Code of Ethics. In addition, no less frequently than annually, the Firm must provide each mutual fund Board a written report that:

 

    Describes any issues arising under the Code since the previous report to the Board, including, but not limited to, information about material violations of the Code or procedures and sanctions imposed in response to the material violations; and

 

    Certifies that the Firm has adopted procedures reasonably necessary to prevent Access Persons from violating the Code.

The Firm’s CCO is required to notify the Board of each mutual fund advised or sub-advised by the Firm of any material changes to the Code of Ethics within six months of adoption of any such change. The CCO will also provide a memorandum describing the changes to the Code and the reasons for the changes, if applicable.

 

Water Island Capital, LLC    Page 14 of 14
Code of Ethics    Amended: January 9, 2017

CODE OF ETHICS AND PERSONAL INVESTMENT POLICY

For

Lazard Asset Management LLC

Lazard Asset Management Securities LLC

Lazard Asset Management (Canada), Inc.

Lazard Alternatives, LLC

And

Certain Registered Investment Companies

This Code of Ethics and Personal Investment Policy (the “Policy”) has been adopted by Lazard Asset Management LLC, Lazard Asset Management Securities LLC, Lazard Asset Management (Canada), Inc., Lazard Alternatives, LLC (collectively “LAM”), and the U.S.-registered investment companies advised, managed or sponsored by LAM that have adopted this Policy (“LAM Funds”), to set forth (A) the standards of business conduct expected of Covered Persons (as defined below) and (B) certain procedures designed to minimize conflicts and potential conflicts of interest between LAM employees and LAM’s clients (including the LAM Funds), and between LAM Fund directors or trustees (“Directors”) and the LAM Funds. The Policy is intended to comply with Rule 204A-1 under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 (the “Advisers Act”), Rule 17j-1 under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (“1940 Act”) and NFA Compliance Rule 2-9. Section II of the Policy, in particular, is designed to prevent fraudulent or manipulative practices, including such practices respecting purchases or sales of Securities held or to be acquired by LAM client accounts. It is also designed to prevent such practices, including short-term trading or “market timing,” as they relate to Covered Persons’ investments in open-end mutual funds whether or not managed by LAM.

All employees of LAM, including employees who serve as Fund officers or directors, are treated as access persons under the Advisers Act. They are herein referred to as “Covered Persons,” and are required to adhere to this Policy as well as all laws and regulations applicable to LAM’s business activities. Consultants to LAM also may be deemed Covered Persons by LAM’s Chief Compliance Officer and his/her designees. Additionally, all Directors of the Funds are subject to this Policy as indicated below.

I. Statement of Principles

LAM is an investment adviser registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission and offers discretionary and non-discretionary asset management services to its clients, including the Funds. Accordingly, LAM and its employees serve as fiduciaries to these clients. This fiduciary relationship requires LAM and Covered Persons to adhere to the highest standards of ethical conduct and seek to avoid even the appearance of improper behavior. In addition, when acting as fiduciaries LAM and Covered Persons must place the interests of the firm’s clients above their own. (Detailed descriptions of LAM’s fiduciary duties are set forth in Section 1 of the LAM Compliance Manual.)

 

Appendix O-1


In order to promote compliance with these fiduciary duties, and to manage potential conflicts of interest, LAM has adopted without limitation:

 

    The personal investment procedures set forth in Section II of this Policy;

 

    Restrictions on the provision and receipt of gifts and business entertainment, as set forth in Section 33 of the LAM Compliance Manual;

 

    The political contribution pre-clearance requirements set forth in Section 36 of the LAM Compliance Manual;

 

    The outside business activity pre-clearance requirements set forth in Section 34 of the LAM Compliance Manual;

 

    The policies promoting best execution and prohibiting directed brokerage consistent with Rule 12b-1(h)(1), as set forth in Section 16 of the Compliance Manual;

 

    The insider trading and Lazard Information Barrier policies set forth in Section 32 of the LAM Compliance Manual; and

 

    Policies requiring adherence to anti-corruption laws, including the U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, as set forth in Section 4 of the LAM Compliance Manual.

LAM employees are also bound by the Lazard Ltd. Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, a copy of which is published on Lazard.com.

Ensuring compliance with the firm’s policies and applicable laws is the responsibility of every Covered Person. LAM employees are required to report suspected violations to their supervisors or the LAM Legal & Compliance Department. As a matter of policy, LAM will not retaliate against individuals who report suspected violations in good faith. (Details of LAM’s non-retaliation policy may be found in Section 1 of the LAM Compliance Manual.)

II. Personal Investment Policy & Procedures

A. Overview

All Covered Persons owe a fiduciary duty to LAM’s clients when conducting their personal investment transactions. Covered Persons must place the interest of clients first and avoid activities, interests and relationships that might interfere with the duty to make decisions in the best interests of the clients. The fundamental standard to be followed in personal securities transactions is that Covered Persons and Directors may not take inappropriate advantage of their positions.

 

Appendix O-2


Covered Persons are reminded that they also are subject to other policies of LAM, including the policies noted above concerning insider trading and the receipt of gifts and entertainment. It bears noting that Covered Persons must never trade in a security while in possession of material, non-public information about the issuer or the market for those securities, even if the Covered Person has satisfied all other requirements of this policy.

LAM’s Chief Compliance Officer shall be responsible for supervising the firm’s implementation of this Code of Ethics and Personal Investment Policy and all record-keeping functions mandated hereunder, including the review of all initial and annual holding reports as well as the quarterly transactions reports described below. The Chief Compliance Officer may delegate certain of the functions under this Policy to others in the Legal & Compliance Department, and shall promptly report to LAM’s General Counsel or the Chief Executive Officer all material violations of, or material deviations from, this Policy. This Policy will be delivered as appropriate to the Directors, who also will be asked to approve any material amendments to the Policy.

B. Definitions

“Investment Personnel” of a LAM Fund or LAM, for purposes of this Policy, includes:

 

  1. Any employee of the LAM Fund or LAM (or of any company in a control relationship to the LAM Fund or LAM) who, in connection with his or her regular functions or duties, makes or participates in making recommendations regarding the purchase or sale of securities by the LAM Fund.

 

  2. Any natural person who controls the LAM Fund or LAM and who obtains information concerning recommendations made to the LAM Fund regarding the purchase or sale of securities by the LAM Fund.

“Personal Securities Accounts,” for purposes of this Policy include any account in or through which a Security can be purchased or sold, which includes, but is not limited to, a brokerage account; a custody account; an individual retirement account; a 401(k) plan account that allows investments in Securities beyond open-end mutual funds; and variable annuity accounts or variable life insurance policies that allow investments in Securities beyond open-end mutual funds. Such Personal Securities Accounts include:

 

  1. Accounts in the Covered Person’s or Director’s name or accounts in which the Covered Person or Director has a direct or indirect beneficial interest (a definition of Beneficial Ownership is included in Exhibit A);

 

  2. Accounts in the name of the Covered Person’s or Director’s spouse;

 

Appendix O-3


  3. Accounts in the name of children under the age of 18, whether or not living with the Covered Person or Director, and accounts in the name of relatives or other individuals living with the Covered Person or Director or for whose support the Covered Person or Director is wholly or partially responsible (together with the Covered Person’s or Director’s spouse and minor children, “Related Persons”); 1

 

  4. Accounts in which the Covered Person or Director or any Related Person directly or indirectly controls, participates in, or has the right to control or participate in, investment decisions.

For purposes of this Policy, Personal Securities Accounts do not include the following, and each such Account and any transaction in Securities in such Account are not subject to Section II.C through Section II.I of this Policy 2 :

 

  1. Estate or trust accounts in which a Covered Person or Related Person has a beneficial interest, but no power to affect investment decisions and fully discretionary accounts managed by LAM, another registered investment adviser, a registered representative of a registered broker-dealer or another person/entity approved by the Legal & Compliance Department are permitted if, (i) for Covered Persons and Related Persons, the Covered Persons receives permission from the Legal & Compliance Department, and (ii) for all persons covered by this Code, there is no communication between the adviser to the account and such person with regard to investment decisions prior to execution;

 

  2. Other accounts over which the Covered Person or Related Person has no direct or indirect influence or control, provided the Covered Person obtains consent to maintain the account by the Legal & Compliance Department;

 

  3. Direct investment programs, which allow the purchase of Securities directly from the issuer without the intermediation of a broker-dealer, provided that the timing and size of the purchases are established by a pre-arranged schedule (e.g., dividend reinvestment plans). Covered Persons must pre-clear the transaction at the time that participation in the direct investment program is being established. Covered Persons also must provide documentation of these arrangements and arrange to have their statements forwarded to the Legal & Compliance Department;

 

  4. 401(k) plan account and similar retirement accounts that permit the participant to invest only in open-end mutual funds and where the Covered Person or Related Person agree not to invest in any LAM Funds;

 

  5. Qualified state tuition programs (also known as “529 Programs”) where investment options and frequency of transactions are limited by state or federal laws.

 

1   Unless otherwise indicated, all provisions of this Code apply to Related Persons.
2   Except that Investment Personnel of a LAM Fund or LAM are not exempt from Section II.D.3 through Section II.D.5 of this Policy with respect to transactions in Securities through such Personal Securities Accounts.

 

Appendix O-4


A “Security” or “Securities,” for purposes of this Policy, generally includes any instrument defined in Section 2(a)(36) of the 1940 Act, including the following:

 

  1. stocks

 

  2. bonds

 

  3. shares of closed-end funds, exchange-traded funds (commonly referred to as “ETFs”), exchange-traded notes (“ETNs”) and unit investment trusts

 

  4. shares of open-end mutual funds (including the LAM Funds or any mutual fund for which LAM serves as a sub-adviser) 3 (“Sub-advised Funds”)

 

  5. interests in hedge funds

 

  6. interests in private equity funds

 

  7. limited partnerships

 

  8. private placements or unlisted securities

 

  9. debentures, and other evidences of indebtedness, including senior debt and, subordinated debt

 

  10. investment, commodity or futures contracts

 

  11. all derivative instruments such as swaps, options, warrants and structured securities

For purposes of this Policy, a Security does not include:

 

  1. money market mutual funds

 

  2. U.S. Treasury obligations

 

  3. mortgage pass-throughs (e.g., Ginnie Maes) that are direct obligations of the U.S. government

 

  4. bankers’ acceptances

 

  5. bank certificates of deposit

 

  6. commercial paper

 

  7. high quality short-term debt instruments (meaning any instrument that has a maturity at issuance of less than 366 days and that is rated in one of the two highest rating categories by a nationally recognized statistical rating organization, such as S&P or Moody’s), including repurchase agreements.

 

3   Aa current list of sub-advised funds is maintained by LAM’s operations group and shared with the Legal & Compliance Department.

 

Appendix O-5


C. Opening and Maintaining Employee Accounts

All Covered Persons and their Related Persons must generally maintain their Personal Securities Accounts at a broker-dealer approved by the Legal & Compliance Department which will electronically transmit Personal Securities Account information to the Financial Tracking System (the “Approved Broker-Dealers”). Covered Persons and their Related Persons who have Personal Securities Accounts at a broker-dealer that is not capable of transmitting information to the Financial Tracking System electronically generally will be required to transfer such Accounts to an Approved Broker-Dealer (including Fidelity Investments and Charles Schwab).

LAM’s Chief Compliance Office or his/her designee may allow Covered Persons or Related Persons to maintain Personal Securities Accounts at firms other than Approved Broker-Dealers where (A) Approved Broker-Dealers do not offer a particular investment product or service desired by the Covered Person or Related Person, or (B) a Related Person must maintain their Accounts at a specific broker-dealer, by reason of their employment, or (C) in other exceptional circumstances. Covered Persons may submit a request for exemption to the Legal & Compliance Department. For any Personal Securities Account not maintained at an Approved Broker-Dealer, Covered Persons and their Related Persons must arrange to have duplicate copies of trade confirmations and statements provided to the Legal & Compliance Department at the following address: Lazard Asset Management LLC, Attn: Chief Compliance Officer, 30 Rockefeller Plaza, 55 th Floor, New York, NY 10112-6300. All other provisions of this policy will continue to apply to any Personal Securities Account that is not maintained at an Approved Broker-Dealer.

It is the responsibility of Covered Persons to disclose all relevant Personal Securities Accounts to LAM’s Legal & Compliance Department. Pursuant to Section H below, new Covered Persons must disclose their Personal Securities Accounts, and those of their Related Persons, through the Financial Tracking System (or directly to the Legal & Compliance Department) within ten (10) calendar days of joining LAM. Existing Covered Persons must disclose new Personal Securities Accounts for which they or their Related Persons have a beneficial interest promptly to the Legal & Compliance Department, before any trading in Securities takes place.

D. Restrictions

All trades by Covered Persons or Related Persons in Securities through Personal Securities Accounts must be pre-approved through the Financial Tracking System (or directly by the Legal & Compliance Department where access to the System is not possible) pursuant to the procedures and exceptions set forth in Section E below (the “Pre-Clearance Requirement”).

 

  1. Conflicts with Client Activity. Subject to the exceptions below, no Security may be purchased or sold in any Personal Securities Account seven (7) calendar days before or after a LAM client account trades in the same security (the “Blackout Period”).

 

  2. Conflicts with LAM Restricted List. No Security on the LAM Restricted List may be purchased or sold in any Personal Securities Account.

 

  3. 60 Day Holding Period. Securities transactions, including transactions in LAM Funds or Sub-Advised Funds and any derivatives, must be for investment purposes rather than for speculation. Consequently, Covered Persons or their Related Persons may not profit from the purchase and sale of the same Securities within sixty (60) calendar days (i.e., the security may be purchased or sold on the 61 st day), calculated on a First In, First Out (FIFO) basis (the “60 Day Hold”). Profits from short-term trades are subject to disgorgement or other sanctions pursuant to Section J below.

 

Appendix O-6


  4. Public Offerings. No transaction for a Personal Securities Account may be made in Securities sold in an initial public offering or secondary offering.

 

  5. Private Placements. Securities offered pursuant to a private placement (e.g., hedge funds, private equity funds or any other pooled investment vehicle the interests or shares of which are offered in a private placement) may not be purchased or sold by a Covered Person or Related Person without the prior approval of LAM’s Chief Compliance Officer or his/her designee. Pre-approval of such investments must be requested by Covered Persons through the Financial Tracking System. In connection with any decision to approve such a private placement, the Legal & Compliance Department will prepare a report of the decision that explains the reasoning for the decision and an analysis of any potential conflict of interest. Any Covered Person receiving approval to acquire Securities in a private placement must disclose that investment when the Covered Person participates in a subsequent consideration of an investment in such issuer by or for a LAM client and any decision by or made on behalf of the LAM client to invest in such issuer will be subject to an independent review by investment personnel of LAM with no personal interest in the issuer.

 

  6. Hedge Funds. Hedge funds are sold on a private placement basis and as noted above are subject to prior approval by LAM’s Legal & Compliance Department through the Financial Tracking System. In considering whether or not to approve an investment in a hedge fund, the Chief Compliance Officer or his or her designee, will review a copy of the fund’s offering memorandum, subscription documents and other governing documents (“Offering Documents”), along with any side letters, as deemed appropriate in order to ensure that the proposed investment is being made in a manner that does not conflict with LAM’s fiduciary duties.

Upon receipt of a request by a Covered Person to invest in a hedge fund, the Legal & Compliance Department will contact the Fund of Funds Group (the “Team”) and identify the fund in which the Covered Person has requested permission to invest. The Team will advise the Legal & Compliance Department if the fund is on the Team’s approved list or if the Team is otherwise interested in investing client assets in the fund. If the fund is not on the Team’s approved list and the Team is not interested in investing in the fund, the Chief Compliance Officer will generally approve the Covered Person’s investment, unless other considerations warrant denying the investment. If the fund is on the approved list or the Team may be interested in investing in the fund, then the Legal & Compliance Department will determine whether the fund is subject to capacity constraints. If the fund is subject to capacity constraints, then the Covered Person’s request will be denied and priority will be given to the Team to invest client assets in the fund. If the fund is not subject to capacity constraints, then the Covered Person will generally be permitted to invest along with the Team. If the fund is on the approved list or the Team may be interested in investing in the fund, then the Covered Person’s investment will be reviewed by the Chief Compliance Officer or his or her designee as described above.

 

Appendix O-7


  7. Short Sales. Covered Persons are prohibited from engaging in short sales of any security. However, provided the investment is otherwise permitted under this Policy and has received all necessary approvals, an investment in a hedge fund or other permitted Security that engages in short selling is permitted. Covered Persons are prohibited from buying or going long a put option when they do not hold the underlying stock since this can result in a short sale on expiration date of the contract.

 

  8. Inside Information. No transaction may be made in violation of the Material Non-Public Information Policies and Procedures (“Inside Information”) as outlined in Section 32 of the LAM Compliance Manual; and

 

  9. Lazard Ltd Stock (LAZ). All trading in shares of LAZ by Covered Persons or Related Persons must be pre-cleared pursuant to Section F below, unless such trading is conducted by Lazard on behalf of Covered Persons or Related Persons through company programs. Trading in LAZ shares is subject to special trading prohibitions, the dates and conditions of which are determined by Lazard senior management; typically, LAZ trading will be prohibited beginning two weeks before each calendar quarter end through a date that is two business days after a public earnings announcement. Covered Persons are prohibited from entering into options contracts related to LAZ shares.

 

  10. Directorships. Covered Persons may not serve on the board of directors of any corporation or entity (other than a related Lazard entity) without the prior approval of LAM’s Chief Compliance Officer or General Counsel, pursuant to Section 34 of the LAM Compliance Manual.

 

  11. Control of Issuer. Covered Persons and Related Persons may not acquire any security, directly or indirectly, for purposes of obtaining control of the issuer.

E. Exceptions

The Chief Compliance Officer or his/her designee may determine that one of the following exemptions to the Policy applies:

 

1. Exceptions to Pre-Clearance Requirement, Blackout Period and 60-Day Hold .

 

  a) Investments in open-end mutual funds other than LAM Funds or Sub-Advised Funds are exempt from these three requirements. However, Covered Persons and Related Persons are required to trade in such fund shares in compliance with the applicable prospectus. For purposes of clarity, investments in LAM Funds and Sub-Advised Funds remain subject to the Pre-Clearance Requirement and 60 Day Hold.

 

  b) Investments in the broad-based ETFs and ETNs listed on Exhibit B to this Policy are also exempt from these three requirements.

 

Appendix O-8


2. Exceptions to the Pre-Clearance and/or Blackout Period

 

  a) Discretionary Exceptions . Purchases or sales of Securities which receive the prior approval of the Chief Compliance Officer or, in his or her absence, another senior member of the Legal & Compliance Department, may be exempted from the Blackout Period if such purchases or sales are determined to be unlikely to have any material negative economic impact on or give rise to an appearance of impropriety with respect to any client account managed or advised by LAM. For example, the Chief Compliance Officer or his/her designee may find no conflicts or improprieties where client activity within a Blackout Period is related to non-material inflows or outflows rather than discretionary investment decisions.

 

  b) De Minimis Exemptions . The Blackout Period shall not apply to any transaction in (1) an equity Security which does not exceed an aggregate transaction amount of $50,000 of the security, provided the issuer has a market capitalization greater than US $5 billion; (2) an equity Security which does not exceed an aggregate transaction amount of $25,000 of the security, provided the issuer has a market capitalization between US $500 million and US $5 billion; and (3) fixed income Securities, or series of related transactions, involving up to $25,000 face value of that fixed income security, provided that the issuer has a market capitalization of greater than US $5 billion for its equity Securities.

 

  c) Non-Volitional Transactions . The Pre-Clearance and/or Blackout Period restrictions generally shall not apply to transactions for which the Covered Person or Related Person does not have, or has relinquished, control. Examples include trades related to (1) dividend reinvestments or other automatic investment plans or securities deliveries (exempt from both restrictions); (2) corporate actions (exempt from both); (3) deferred compensation award vestings (exempt from both); (4) the exercise of Security-related rights on a pro rata basis (exempt from both); (5) trades relating to tax loss harvesting (exempt from Blackout Period); and (6) a commitment to trade predetermined amounts of a Security on a specific future date, pre-arranged with the Legal & Compliance Department (exempt from Blackout Period).

For purposes of clarity, any Securities subject to an exception above must be included on reports required to be submitted to the Legal & Compliance Department consistent with this Policy. Exceptions are not applicable to trades in any Security on the LAM Restricted List or trades in LAZ when a corporate trading prohibition is applicable.

F. Prohibited Recommendations

No Investment Personnel shall recommend or execute any Securities transaction for any LAM client account under his/her discretionary management, without having disclosed, through the Financial Tracking System or otherwise in writing, to the Chief Compliance Officer or his/her designee any direct or indirect interest in such Securities or issuers (including any such interest held by a Related Person). Similarly, no Investment Personnel shall execute any Securities transaction for his/her Personal Securities Account without having disclosed through the

 

Appendix O-9


Financial Tracking System or otherwise in writing, to the Chief Compliance Officer or his/he designee, any direct or indirect interest that LAM client accounts under his/her discretionary management may have. The interest could be in the form of:

 

  1. Any direct or indirect beneficial ownership of any Securities of such issuer;

 

  2. Any contemplated transaction by the person in such Securities;

 

  3. Any position with such issuer or its affiliates; or

 

  4. Any present or proposed business relationship between such issuer or its affiliates and the Investment Personnel or any party in which such Investment Personnel have a significant interest.

The Exceptions in Section E(2), above, may apply to the pre-clearance requests subject to this Section F, within the discretion of the Chief Compliance Officer or his/her designee.

G. Transaction Approval Procedures – Financial Tracking System

All Security transactions by Covered Persons and Related Persons in Personal Securities Accounts must receive prior approval from the LAM Legal & Compliance Department as described below. To pre-clear a transaction, Covered Persons must on behalf of themselves or a Related Person:

 

  1. Electronically complete and “sign” the relevant trade request form in the Financial Tracking system, completing all fields accurately [https://secure.financial-tracking.com/login ].

 

  2. After the request is processed, the Covered Person will be notified by the Financial Tracking System if the order is approved or not approved. If the order is approved, the Covered Person or Related Person is responsible to transmit the order to the broker-dealer where his or her account is maintained.

Trade approvals from the Financial Tracking System are only valid for the business day in which they are issued . If the approved trade is not executed by the broker-dealer of the Covered Person or Related Person on the business day the approval is received, the proposed trade must be re-submitted to the Financial Tracking System for re-approval.

Pre-clearance requests will be processed though the Financial Tracking System each business day from approximately 8:30 a.m. ET through 3:45 p.m. ET . The Legal & Compliance Department endeavors to preclear transactions promptly; however, transactions may not always be approved on the day in which they are received. This is especially the case where pre-clearance requests are received late in the business day. Certain factors, such as time of day the order is submitted or length of time it takes to confirm client activity, all play a role in the length of time it takes to preclear a transaction.

 

Appendix O-10


H. Required Reporting

 

  1. Initial Certification. Within 10 days of becoming a Covered Person, such Covered Person must submit to the Legal & Compliance Department an acknowledgement that they have received a copy of this Policy, and that they have read and understood its provisions.

 

  2. Initial Holdings Report. Within 10 days of becoming a Covered Person, the Covered Person must submit to the Legal & Compliance Department a statement of all Securities in which such Covered Person has any direct or indirect beneficial ownership. This statement must include (i) the title, number of shares and principal amount of each Security, (ii) the name of any broker, dealer, insurance company, or bank with whom the Covered Person maintained an account in which any Securities were held for the direct or indirect benefit of such Covered Person and (iii) the date of submission by the Covered Person. The information provided in this statement must be current as of a date no more than 45 days prior to the Covered Person’s date of employment at LAM.

 

  3. Quarterly Report. Within 30 days after the end of each calendar quarter, each Covered Person must provide information to the Legal & Compliance Department via the Financial Tracking System relating to securities transactions executed during the previous quarter for all Personal Securities Accounts and any new Personal Securities Accounts in which any Securities were held established during the previous quarter for the direct or indirect benefit of the Covered Person. Any such report may contain a statement that the report shall not be construed as an admission by the person making such report that he or she has any direct or indirect beneficial ownership in the security to which the report relates.

 

  4. Annual Report. Each Covered Person shall submit within 45 days after the end of each calendar year an annual report to the Legal & Compliance Department via the Financial Tracking System showing, as of the end of the calendar year (1) all holdings in Securities in which the Covered Person had any direct or indirect beneficial ownership and (2) the name of any broker, dealer, insurance company, or bank with whom the person maintains an account in which any Securities are held for the direct or indirect benefit of the Covered Person or Related Persons.

 

  5. Annual Certification. All Covered Persons are required to certify annually via the Financial Tracking System that they have (i) read and understand this Policy and recognize that they are subject to its terms and conditions, (ii) complied with the requirements of this policy and (iii) disclosed or reported all Personal Securities Accounts and transactions required to be disclosed or reported pursuant to this Code of Ethics and Personal Investment Policy. LAM will maintain a copy of this Policy on the intranet site accessible to all Covered Persons, and its annual certification request will identify the location of the Policy to all Covered Persons. Amendments to the Policy, if any, will be transmitted to Covered Persons electronically.

 

Appendix O-11


I. Fund Directors.

Each Director who is not an “interested person” (as defined in the 1940 Act) of a LAM Fund and who would be required to provide reports pursuant to Section II.H of this Policy solely by reason of being a Director is excepted from such reporting requirements pursuant to Rule 17j-1(d)(2), except that the Director shall make a quarterly report to the Legal & Compliance Department of transactions in Securities if the Director knew or, in the ordinary course of fulfilling his or her official duties as a Director should have known, that during the 15-day period immediately before or after the Director’s transaction a LAM Fund on whose board the Director serves purchased or sold a Security, or the LAM Fund or LAM considered purchasing or selling the Security.

J. Sanctions.

The Legal & Compliance Department shall track all violations of this Policy and may impose appropriate sanctions, including without limitation warnings, disgorgement of trading profits to charity, and suspension of personal trading privileges. The Department shall report all material violations to LAM’s Chief Executive Officer or General Counsel, who may impose such sanctions as deemed appropriate, including, among other things, a letter of censure, fines, or suspension / termination of the violator’s employment.

K. Retention of Records.

All records relating to personal Securities transactions hereunder and other records meeting the requirements of applicable law, including a copy of this policy and any other policies covering the subject matter hereof, shall be maintained in the manner and to the extent required by applicable law, including Rule 204-2 under the Advisers Act and Rule 17j-1 under the 1940 Act. The Legal & Compliance Department shall have the responsibility for maintaining records created under this policy.

L. Board Review.

The Chief Compliance Officer shall provide to the Board of Directors of each Fund, on a quarterly basis, a written report regarding activity under this policy, and at least annually, a written report and certification meeting the requirements of Rule 17j-1 under the 1940 Act.

M. Other Codes of Ethics.

To the extent that any officer of any Fund is not a Covered Person hereunder, or an investment subadviser of or, for an open-end Fund only, principal underwriter for any Fund and their respective access persons (as defined in Rule 17j-1) are not Covered Persons hereunder, those persons must be covered by separate codes of ethics which are approved in accordance with applicable law.

 

Appendix O-12


Exhibit A

EXPLANATION OF BENEFICIAL OWNERSHIP

You are considered to have “Beneficial Ownership” of Securities if you have or share a direct or indirect “Pecuniary Interest” in the Securities.

You have a “Pecuniary Interest” in Securities if you have the opportunity, directly or indirectly, to profit or share in any profit derived from a transaction in the Securities.

The following are examples of an indirect Pecuniary Interest in Securities:

 

  1. Securities held by members of your immediate family sharing the same household; however, this presumption may be rebutted by convincing evidence that profits derived from transactions in these Securities will not provide you with any economic benefit. “Immediate family” means any child, stepchild, grandchild, parent, stepparent, grandparent, spouse, sibling, mother-in-law, father-in-law, son-in-law, daughter-in-law, brother-in-law, or sister-in-law, and includes any adoptive relationship.

 

  2. Your interest as a general partner in Securities held by a general or limited partnership.

 

  3. Your interest as a manager-member in the Securities held by a limited liability company.

 

  4. A performance-related fee, other than an asset-based fee, received by any broker, dealer, bank, insurance company, investment company, investment adviser, investment manager, trustee or person or entity performing a similar function.

You do not have an indirect Pecuniary Interest in Securities held by a corporation, partnership, limited liability company or other entity in which you hold an equity interest, unless you are a controlling equity holder or you have or share investment control over the Securities held by the entity.

The following circumstances constitute Beneficial Ownership by you of Securities held by a trust:

 

  1. Your status as a trustee where either you or a member of your immediate family is a trust beneficiary.

 

  2. Your status as a trust beneficiary and you have or share investment control over trust transactions.

 

Appendix O-13


  3. Your status as a settler of a trust if you have the right to revoke the trust without the consent of a beneficiary and you have or share investment control over the Securities in the trust.

The foregoing is only a summary of the meaning of “beneficial ownership”. For purposes of the attached policy, “beneficial ownership” shall be interpreted in the same manner, as it would be in determining whether a person is subject to the provisions of Section 16 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and the rules and regulations thereunder.

 

Appendix O-14


Exhibit B

Exempt Broad-Based Index ETFs and ETNs

 

ETF or ETN Name

  

Ticker

iShares Barclays 1-3 Year Treasury Bond ETF

   SHY

iShares Barclays 7-10 Year Treasury Bond ETF

   IEF

iShares CDN Composite Index Fund

   XIC

iShares DAX ETF

   DAXEX

iShares DJ EuroStroxx 50

   EUE

iShares FTSE 100

   ISF

iShares FTSE Xinhua A50 China

   2823

iShares MSCI EAFE

   EFA

iShares MSCI EAFE Growth

   EFG

iShares MSCI EAFE Value

   EFV

iShares MSCI Emerging Markets

   EEM

iShares MSCI Japan

   EWJ

iShares MSCI Kokusai

   TOK

iShares Russell 1000 Index

   IWB

iShares Russell 1000 Growth

   IWF

iShares Russell 1000 Value

   IWD

iShares S&P 500 Index Fund

   IVV

iPath S&P 500 VIX Short Term Futures ETN

   VXX

ProShares QQQ Trust

   QQQ

ProShares Short S&P 500

   SH

SPDR Trust

   SPY

Vanguard 500 Index ETF

   VOO

Vanguard FTSE All World Ex-US ETF

   VEU

Vanguard FTSE Developed Markets Index ETF

   VEA

Vanguard FTSE Emerging Markets Index ETF

   VWO

Vanguard Large Cap Index Fund ETF

   VV

Vanguard Mega Cap Index Fund ETF

   MGC

Vanguard Russell 1000 Index Fund ETF

   VONE

Vanguard Russell 2000 Index Fund ETF

   VTWO

Vanguard Russell 3000 Index ETF

   VTHR

Vanguard Total Stock Market Index ETF

   VTI

Vanguard Total Int’l Stock Index ETF

   VXUS

Vanguard Total World Stock Index

   VT

 

Appendix O-15

LOGO


LOGO

 

 

1        Overview      3  
   1.1    Introduction      3  
   1.2    Persons Covered by the Code      3  
   1.3    General Principles      4  
      1.3.1    Obeying Laws and Regulations      4  
      1.3.2    Anticompetitive Activities      5  
      1.3.3    Illegal Use of Pictet’s Funds and False Records      5  
   1.4    Chief Compliance Officer (“CCO”)      5  
   1.5    Code Interpretation and Enforcement      6  
      1.5.1    Dispensation      6  
   1.6    Reporting Code Violations      6  
   1.7    Sanctions for Breaches of the Code      6  
   1.8    Certification of Compliance      7  
2    Personal Account Dealing Rules (“PA Dealing Rules”)      8  
   2.1    Legal Requirements      8  
   2.2    Definitions      8  
   2.3    Restrictions on Activities      9  
      2.3.1    Blackout Periods      9  
      2.3.2    Interested Transactions      9  
      2.3.3    Initial Public Offerings (IPO) and Private Placements      9  
      2.3.4    Limit Orders      10  
      2.3.5    Exclusions from the Requirements of this Chapter 2.3      10  
   2.4    Minimum Holding Period      11  
   2.5    Pre-Clearance of Personal Transactions      11  
   2.6    Reporting of Transactions and Disclosure of Holdings      12  
      2.6.1    Quarterly Transaction Reports      12  
      2.6.2    Disclosure of Personal Holdings      13  
      2.6.3    Confidentiality      13  
      2.6.4    Important Notes      13  
   2.7    Record Keeping Requirements      14  
   2.8    Waiving the requirements of the Pictet Personal Account Dealing Rules      14  
   2.9    Maximum number of transactions per month (Pictet Directive 8)      14  
   2.10    Personal Account Dealing rule applicability table      15  
3    Gifts and Entertainment      16  
   3.1    Introduction      16  
   3.2    Reporting Requirements      16  
      3.2.1    Acceptable Gifts at all times      16  
      3.2.2    Gifts < CHF300 / £200 / €250 / SGD 400      17  
      3.2.3    Gifts > CHF300 / £200 / €250 / SGD 400      17  
      3.2.4    Determination of the value of a gift or entertainment      17  
      3.2.5    Considerations for the approval of a gift or entertainment      17  
   3.3    Prohibited Behaviour      17  

 

- 1 -


LOGO

 

 

   3.4    Provision of Gifts or Entertainment to certain US clients      18  
   3.5    Other Considerations      18  
      3.5.1    Travel to and accommodation at Entertainment Events      18  
      3.5.2    Leave for Entertainment      18  
      3.5.3    Entertainment not attended by the Provider’s staff      18  
      3.5.4    Christmas Charity Raffle      18  
   3.6    Record Keeping      19  
   3.7    Failure to Report Gifts      19  
   3.8    US Political Contributions      19  
4        Dealing with Personal Conflicts of Interest      20  
   4.1    Introduction      20  
   4.2    Self-Dealing      20  
   4.3    Outside Business Activities      20  
   4.4    Accepting Honoraria      21  
   4.5    Accepting Fiduciary Appointments      21  
   4.6    Participating in Civic Affairs      21  
   4.7    Serving as an External Director or Officer of a Public Company      21  
   4.8    Participating in Political Activities      22  
   4.9    Giving Advice to Clients      22  
5    Respecting Pictet Confidential Information      23  
   5.1    In General      23  
   5.2    Talking to the Press      23  
   5.3    Information obtained from Business      24  
   5.4    Pictet Financial Information      24  
   5.5    Pictet Examination Information      24  
   5.6    Pictet Proprietary Information      24  
   5.7    Electronic and Voice Communication Systems      25  
   5.8    Information Security Systems      25  
   5.9    Computer Software      25  
   5.10    Inside Information      25  
   5.11    “Chinese Wall” Policy      25  
   5.12    Social Media      26  
6    E-mail Retention      27  
7    Compliance and Code of Ethics Contact Sheet      28  
8    Appendix A - Definition of Beneficial Ownership      29  

 

- 2 -


LOGO

 

 

1 Overview

 

1.1 Introduction

Today’s financial services marketplace is filled with a host of new challenges, changes and opportunities. Amidst these, there is one guiding principle, which will always remain constant: the mandate for integrity.

Only by conducting ourselves and our business in accordance with the highest standards of legal, ethical and moral integrity can we achieve our vision of excellence and our goals for the future.

This Code of Ethics (“the Code”) does not cover every issue that may arise in the course of the business activities of Pictet Asset Management business line (“PAM”), but it sets out both the basic principles and the practical steps which must be taken by PAM and its employees to ensure their conduct is at all times consistent with the highest standards of honesty and fair dealing required under relevant securities laws and expected by our clients.

The Code has been established in accordance with SEC Rule 204A-1 of the Investment Advisers Act 1940, and SEC Rule 17j-1 of the Investment Company Act 1940. It also complies with the rules of other regulatory authorities that regulate PAM, including the Financial Conduct Authority (“FCA”), the Swiss Financial Market Supervisory Authority (“FINMA”), the Monetary Authority of Singapore (“MAS”) and the Hong Kong Securities & Futures Commission (“SFC”) together with the internal provisions imposed by Banque Pictet & Cie SA.

The Executive Board of PAM is responsible for ensuring that there are adequate systems and controls in place to manage the conflicts arising from the behaviour of staff. Therefore, this Code has been approved by and has the support of the PAM ExBo.

 

1.2 Persons Covered by the Code

SEC rules require that SEC registered Investment Advisers define who must comply with the Code. Put simply, the Code must apply to any person who has access to non-public information regarding clients’ purchase or sale of securities, or the portfolio holdings of any client account is involved in making securities recommendations to clients or who has access to such recommendations that are non-public. The SEC expects the definition of these “Access Persons” to be widely drawn for investment management firms.

Therefore, the PAM ExBo has decided that all members of staff of PAM wherever located, with the exception of PAMJ which has its own internal rules, are deemed to be Access Persons and therefore must comply with all the provisions of this Code.

For the sake of clarity, this includes all PAM business line employees, including staff in the following entities.

 

    Pictet Asset Management Ltd, its Branches and Rep Offices;

 

    Pictet Asset Management SA;

 

    Pictet Asset Management (Singapore) Pte Ltd;

 

    Pictet Asset Management Inc;

 

    Pictet Asset Management (Hong Kong) Limited;

 

    Pictet Funds (Europe) SA;

 

    Banque Pictet & Cie SA Dubai Representative Office;

 

    Pictet & Cie Europe SA branches in Spain, France and Germany;

 

    Pictet & Cie Europe SA Representative offices in Holland and Belgium; and

 

    Pictet Securities Investment Consulting Enterprise (Taiwan) Ltd.

 

- 3 -


LOGO

 

In the case of any dispute over the applicability of this Code, the decision of the Head of Compliance shall be final.

Each person is responsible for maintaining the highest ethical standards when conducting business. This includes the following:

 

1. Always placing the interests of our clients first;

 

2. Ensuring that all personal securities transactions are conducted in compliance with this Code and in such a manner as to avoid any actual or potential conflict of interest or any abuse of your position of trust and responsibility;

 

3. Ensuring that the identity of security holdings and financial circumstances of clients remains confidential;

 

4. Ensuring the independence in the decision making process of Pictet, including any entity of the Pictet Group; and

 

5. Not using your position within Pictet inappropriately or taking part in any fraudulent or manipulative practice.

 

1.3 General Principles

The general principles discussed in this section govern all conduct whether or not the conduct is also covered by the specific standards and procedures set forth below.

 

  1.3.1 Obeying Laws and Regulations

Numerous laws, rules and regulations of the countries where PAM offices are based, together with the USA apply to the business activities of PAM, and it is of course essential that PAM fully complies with these regulations.

As an employee, you are expected to conduct all business dealings in compliance with applicable laws and regulations. Breaching any of them could subject you and/or PAM to criminal, regulatory and civil penalties. If you have questions about any of these laws or regulations or how they apply to particular situations, ask your departmental head or consult the Compliance Department.

Examples of activities prohibited by the Criminal laws are:

 

    Accepting or soliciting anything of value with the intention of being influenced or rewarded in connection with Pictet’s business or in return for confidential information;

 

    Stealing, embezzling or misapplying Pictet’s funds or assets;

 

    Using Pictet’s funds or assets to finance political campaigns;

 

    Misusing legal records and documents and client lists;

 

    Obtaining a computer to gain unauthorised access to a client’s records;

 

    Knowing that a criminal offence has been committed and helping the criminal avoid capture or punishment;

 

    Making false reports to government and/or regulatory officials;

 

    Using software in knowing breach of a licensing agreement; and

 

    Money Laundering and Terrorist Financing.

 

- 4 -


LOGO

 

  1.3.2 Anticompetitive Activities

The Sherman Antitrust Act in the United States prohibits any combination, conspiracy or agreement among competitors to restrict or prevent competition. A specific breach of this Act could be a formal or informal agreement between you and a competitor of Pictet to fix prices, allocate markets, allocate clients or refuse to deal with particular suppliers or clients.

If you are in contact with Pictet’s competitors, you must avoid any agreements with them (or even circumstances that might give the appearance of such agreements) relating to how Pictet conducts its business. You should be especially careful at social or professional gatherings and at trade association meetings where discussions or exchanges of information relating to competitive matters could occur.

 

  1.3.3 Illegal Use of Pictet’s Funds and False Records

The purpose of any transaction that relates to Pictet’s funds or assets must be revealed and recorded at the time of the transaction. As an employee, you may not participate in any of the activities listed below:

 

    Establish or maintain secret or unrecorded funds for the purposes of facilitating illegal payments;

 

    Engage in any transaction knowing that part or all of a payment is to be used for unlawful or improper purposes;

 

    Record or participate in recording incorrect, fictitious or misleading entries in Pictet’s books or records;

 

    Use Pictet’s funds or corporate assets for political contributions in connection with political elections. Some US States have strict laws restricting the use of corporate funds or assets in connection with state elections, and such contributions could prevent PAM from soliciting for business in those states. “Corporate assets” include your time during regular working hours, Pictet’s equipment and supplies, office space, clerical help and advertising facilities;

 

    Make any payment for an expressed purpose on Pictet’s behalf to any individual who you know intends to use the money for a different purpose; and

 

    Make payments of cash or other items of value to political candidates, government officials, other businesses or individuals that are designed to influence the judgement or actions of the recipients in connection with any Pictet’s activity.

Questions concerning the permissibility of any of the above kinds of payments, which may raise issues under any relevant laws or regulations, should be directed to the Chief Compliance Officer.

 

1.4 Chief Compliance Officer (“CCO”)

The Chief Compliance Officer of PAM is David Cawthrow, who is based in London and is responsible for the following:

 

    Establishing and interpreting the requirements of the Code;

 

    Determining whether violations of the Code have occurred;

 

    Reviewing the contents of the Code on at least an annual basis;

 

    Updating the Code. Significant changes to the core principles require the approval of ExBo, but minor amendments and clarifications may be made at the discretion of the CCO and Chief Risk Officer.

 

    Determining, in conjunction with HR and the PAM ExBo, the nature of any sanctions that may be imposed against employees for violations of the Code; and

 

    Reporting at least annually on compliance with the Code to the PAM ExBo.

 

- 5 -


LOGO

 

1.5 Code Interpretation and Enforcement

The CCO shall interpret, monitor compliance with and enforce the Code. All violations of this Code will be reported by the CCO to the PAM ExBo who, in conjunction with HR, may impose such sanctions as it deems appropriate.

Material violations of this code may also, where appropriate, be reported to any client with respect to whose securities the violation has occurred or who may be deemed to have been disadvantaged by the violation.

From time to time the CCO will issue interpretations to facilitate compliance with the Code. These shall be appended to the Code and shall be considered part of it. A violation of any clarification shall be deemed a violation of the Code itself.

 

  1.5.1 Dispensation

Application can be made to the CCO on a case-by-case basis for dispensation from certain provisions of the Code. Dispensations are granted only in exceptional circumstances, where it can be established that:

 

    No conflict of interest arises and no Client would be disadvantaged or potentially disadvantaged as a result of the dispensation;

 

    An employee, by virtue of his / her position and knowledge, does not have an unfair advantage (for example, of information on client recommendations or transactions in a particular security or an equivalent security);

 

    The position of the employee himself / herself (e.g. dispensation may be granted on a hardship basis);

 

    The general position of PAM in respect of its fiduciary duties and its disclosure obligations is not in any way harmed or compromised.

Every dispensation will be documented as it occurs. A breach of a dispensation constitutes a breach of this Code.

 

1.6 Reporting Code Violations

All persons must report Code violations as soon as they occur. If you are aware of any violation of this Code, you must report it immediately. You can report confidentially to the CCO on ext 830 5040 or directly to your manager or department head.

Compliance will retain records of breaches of this Code, and any action taken as a result of the breach, for at least 5 years.

 

1.7 Sanctions for Breaches of the Code

Upon discovering that an employee has not complied with the requirements of this Code, the CCO or the management of PAM may, at their absolute discretion, impose appropriate remedial action. Employees may be required to cancel trades, disgorge profits or sell positions at a loss, and may face internal reprimands, fines, or termination of employment.

 

- 6 -


LOGO

 

In relation to the Rules on Personal Account Dealing, the typical sanctions operate on a sliding scale and are set out below:

 

TYPICAL SANCTIONS

    
Flagrant breach of the Rules    Warning or dismissal depending on the circumstances, together with a reversal of the trade (no profits to members of staff)
Repeated failure to comply with the Rules due to negligence    Ban on personal trading for an agreed period together with a reversal of the trade (no profits to members of staff)
Infrequent failures to comply with the rules, or innocent or passive breaches    Possible reversal of the trade (no profits to members of staff) at the discretion of the CCO

The Compliance department records all breaches of the Code of Ethics and other compliance rules, together with all failures to complete the required compliance returns and training on a timely basis. This information is presented to the PAM ExBo, and may be used when determining bonus payments and scores on Balanced Scorecards. The failings considered in these reports include the following 4 categories:

 

Category

  

Description

1    Serious breaches of Code of Ethics requirements (i.e. trading without valid consent, failure to obtain consent for gifts / entertainment or materially understating the value of a gifts / entertainment received)
2    Active breaches of client and fund investment guidelines
3   

Persistent failure to follow procedures

 

Persistent failure to address outstanding actions within due timescale, unless extension agreed with Internal Audit / Compliance.

 

Persistent passive breaches and / or failure to promptly correct passive breaches

 

Persistent failure to respond to compliance requests for assistance and information

4    Other breaches of the Code of Ethics – e.g. late submission of returns, or late completion of attestations and Compliance training

 

1.8 Certification of Compliance

The Compliance Department will provide all employees with a copy of the Code, and any amendments thereto. The Code is also available on the Compliance page of the PAM intranet

All employees are required to certify when requested by Compliance following changes to the Code that they have read, understood and will abide by the requirements of the Code. In order to comply with the SEC and other relevant recordkeeping requirements, Compliance will maintain copies of all applicable versions of the Code in force during the past 5 years.

 

- 7 -


LOGO

 

2 Personal Account Dealing Rules (“PA Dealing Rules”)

Dealing in securities which are owned, or which may at some stage be purchased, for those accounts that are under a manager’s control or influence will always create the potential for a conflict of interest.

Employees should understand that their first duty is to the client, and therefore they should avoid activities that could create conflicts of interest or even the appearance of conflicts of interest with PAM or its clients.

In addition to complying with the PA Dealing Rules as set out in this Code, all employees must also comply with Pictet Directive 8, which can be accessed via the Pictet internet. Where there are any conflicts between this Code and Pictet Directive 8, the stricter requirement shall apply.

The requirements of section 2 of this Code apply to the transactions and holdings of all employees and their connected persons as defined in Appendix A.

 

2.1 Legal Requirements

The rules of the FCA, FINMA, MAS, SFC and most other regulators require all firms to implement adequate systems and controls to manage and monitor the conflicts arising from personal account trading.

The US Investment Advisers Act 1940 is more specific, and makes it unlawful for any employee, in connection with the purchase or sale of a security “held or to be acquired” by a Client:

 

1. To employ any device, scheme or artifice to defraud PAM’s clients;

 

2. To mislead PAM’s clients;

 

3. To engage in any act, practice, or course of business which operates or would operate as a fraud or deceit upon PAM’s clients; or

 

4. To engage in any manipulative practice with respect to PAM’s clients.

The Code requires you to comply with any applicable federal securities laws and rules of other regulatory bodies which apply to you from time to time.

 

2.2 Definitions

The definition of “Covered securities” is very broad and includes the list below. However this list is not exhaustive. If you have any doubt whether a transaction comes within the scope of the PA Dealing Rules, you must seek advice from the Compliance Department.

 

    Equities in companies, including Investment Trusts;

 

    Warrants, options, and futures on individual securities;

 

    All kinds of limited partnerships;

 

    Private investment funds, hedge funds, and investment clubs;

 

    Bonds, convertible bonds, loan stocks, debentures and other debt instruments;

 

    Swaps, Contracts for Difference and financial market bets (e.g. City Index), where the underlying or reference investment is a Covered Security;

 

    All Reportable Mutual Funds. This includes all Pictet Mutual Funds, (excluding the Cash, Money Market, Sovereign Money Market and Liquidity Funds) and all third party mutual funds that PAM acts as investment adviser or sub-investment adviser to;

 

    Any interest in precious metals or commodities; and

 

- 8 -


LOGO

 

    Any related security, that is a security related to or otherwise derived from a Covered security.

The following are excluded from all the requirements of this Chapter:

 

    Transactions and holdings in direct obligations of the Government of the United States or any other OECD member state, together with options and futures thereon;

 

    Bankers Acceptances;

 

    Bank Certificates of Deposit;

 

    Commercial Paper and high quality short term debt instruments including repurchase agreements;

 

    Non-Pictet mutual funds, except all third party mutual funds that PAM acts as investment adviser or sub-investment adviser to ;

 

    Pictet Cash, Money Market, Sovereign Money Market and Liquidity Funds; and

 

    Cash, foreign exchange, all forward foreign exchange instruments and FX options.

 

2.3 Restrictions on Activities

 

  2.3.1 Blackout Periods

No employee or their connected person shall purchase or sell, directly or indirectly, any security in which he or she has, or by reason of such transaction acquires, any direct or indirect beneficial ownership (as defined in Appendix A):

 

  (a) on a day during which any Client has a pending “buy” or “sell” order in that same security until that order is executed or withdrawn.

 

  (b) within seven calendar days before, or one day after any Client trades in that security.

 

  2.3.2 Interested Transactions

No employee or their connected persons shall initiate any securities transactions for a Client without having disclosed his or her interest, if any, in such securities or the issuer thereof, including without limitation:

 

    Any direct or indirect beneficial ownership (as defined in Appendix A to this Code) of any securities of such issuer;

 

    Any contemplated transaction by such person in such securities;

 

    Any position with such issuer or its affiliates; and

 

    Any present or proposed business relationship between such issuer or its affiliates and such person or any party in which such person has a significant interest.

 

  2.3.3 Initial Public Offerings (IPO) and Private Placements

In accordance with Pictet Directive 8 employees and their connected persons shall not acquire directly or indirectly, beneficial ownership in any securities in an IPO for their personal account.

In very limited cases, Employees and their Connected Persons may apply to the Compliance Department for a waiver of this requirement. However, Employees are still required to obtain prior approval and complete full reporting in relation to such trades.

 

- 9 -


LOGO

 

  2.3.4 Limit Orders

Limit orders are permitted in the following circumstances:

 

    For securities with market caps in excess of USD10 billion or securities listed on the main index of countries in the MSCI World Index, limit orders may be placed up to £50,000, CHF75,000, €60,000, SGD 100,000 or the equivalent amount in other currencies. Pre-clearance for such limit orders from Compliance must be obtained in the normal manner, and are only valid for one month, after which approval must be re-sought. NB when seeking pre-clearance for limit orders the price limit must be disclosed. If price limits are changed, approval should be sought again; and

 

    For limit orders on other securities, Compliance approval is only valid until the end of the next business day. After this time, Compliance approval must be obtained again.

 

  2.3.5 Exclusions from the Requirements of this Chapter 2.3

The restrictions and prohibitions in this Chapter (2.3) shall not apply to:

 

1. Purchases or sales in any account over which the employee or their connected persons has no direct or indirect influence or control; (See definition in Appendix A);

 

2. Purchases or sales that are non-discretionary on the part of the employee or their connected persons;

 

3. Purchases that are part of an automatic dividend / coupon reinvestment plan;

 

4. Purchases effected upon the exercise of rights issued by an issuer pro rata to all holders of a class of its securities, to the extent such rights were acquired from the issuer, and sales of such rights so acquired;

 

5. Index Futures and Index Options, subject to prior Compliance approval;

 

6. Exchange Traded Funds (“ETFs”) based on indices subject to prior Compliance approval;

 

7. Purchases or sales of Reportable mutual funds (as defined in section 2.2 above), subject to prior compliance approval except for Pictet Cash, Money Market, Sovereign Money Market and Liquidity Funds, where no compliance approval is required;

 

8. Subject to the advance approval of the compliance department, purchases or sales which are only remotely potentially harmful to a client, because such purchases or sales would be very unlikely to affect an institutional market, or because such transactions are clearly not related economically to the securities held, purchased or sold by the client. E.g. securities with market caps in excess of USD10 billion or those securities listed on the main index of countries in the MSCI World Index. However, this exemption shall only apply for transactions under the value of £50,000, CHF75,000, €60,000, SGD 100,000 or the equivalent amount in other currencies, executed over the course of any 7 day period; and

 

9. Regular contributions for purchases made as part of a regular savings scheme, including personal pension arrangements, where investment is made into a predetermined list of funds or reportable securities.

In the event of lump sum additions to regular savings plans, pre-clearance is not required where investment is made into the predetermined list of funds or reportable securities.

For any other investment decision taken in respect of regular savings plan investments, for example where investment is made outside of the previously selected list of funds or reportable securities, or a sale is requested, the normal pre-clearance rules apply.

However, all other requirements of Chapter 2 refer to these trades, except as stated in 2.4 below, and apply.

 

- 10 -


LOGO

 

2.4 Minimum Holding Period

No employee or their connected persons shall profit from, or avoid a loss from, the purchase and sale, or sale and purchase, of the same (or equivalent) Covered Security of which they have beneficial ownership within 30 calendar days. Any prohibited profit so realised, or loss avoided shall be paid over to a charity of the employee’s choosing.

This minimum holding period requirement also applies to derivative and spread-betting transactions, where the underlying investment is a Covered Security as defined in Chapter 2.2. However, the 30 day holding period does not apply to holdings of Index / Interest Rates Futures and Options, or Exchange Traded Funds, based on indices.

The purpose of this requirement is to address the real and perceived threat of front-running or other fraudulent and abusive practices involved in short-term trading, including market timing. The SEC approves of advisers mandating disgorgement of any profits, or losses avoided if an employee affects a short-term trade.

In exceptional circumstances, such as personal hardship, or a significantly declining market then an exemption may be obtained in writing from the Chief Compliance Officer. A significantly declining market exemption may be applied for when the price of a security has fallen by more than 20% since purchase and the stock has been held for at least 14 calendar days.

When assessing compliance with this requirement, sales will be considered on a Last-In-First-Out basis. For example, if a member of staff has an existing holding of 1,000 shares in stock X acquired more than 30 days ago, and then acquires a further 250 shares on 1 September, then no shares in stock X may be sold prior to 1 October.

The requirements of this section do not apply to the exclusions stated in items (i), (ii), (iii), (v) and (vi) of Chapter 2.3.5.

 

2.5 Pre-Clearance of Personal Transactions

An employee or their connected person may directly or indirectly, acquire or dispose of beneficial ownership of a covered security, as defined, only if:

 

1. Such purchase or sale has been approved in advance by the Compliance Department;

 

2. The approved transaction is completed by the close of the following business day after approval is received; (subject to Chapter 2.3.4 on limit orders on large cap securities) and

 

3. Compliance has not rescinded such approval prior to execution of the transaction.

 

Note: if a transaction has not been completed by the end of the next business day after approval has been given, then approval to trade must be sought again. Failure to do so will constitute a breach of these rules, and the sanctions as set out in Section 1.7 of this Code may be applied.

Compliance monitors all personal transactions to ascertain any pattern of conduct that may indicate conflicts or potential conflicts with the principles and objectives of this Code. It includes analyzing patterns of front running, parallel running or “too close” to client order trading, especially if the client has not finished accumulating a large position over many days. Such behaviour may not be tolerated as it may breach this Code, as well as the SEC and other applicable regulators’ rules, and may reveal trading behaviour detrimental to PAM client order flow.

Advance trade clearance in no way waives or absolves any employee or their connected persons of the obligation to abide by the provisions, principles and objectives of this Code.

For each request to trade, employees are required to certify that:

 

  1. They have no knowledge of any material, non-public information regarding the proposed transaction; and

 

- 11 -


LOGO

 

  2. They are not involved in, or aware of any PAM activity relating to this transaction.

For the avoidance of doubt, the certification in (2) above relates to any PAM activity in the issuer of the transaction contemplated. Therefore, if the individual is aware of any PAM activity in for example UBS Bonds, this covers all UBS issued bonds and not just a specific bond with a specified rate and maturity. The requirements of this Section do not apply to the exclusions stated in items (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) of Chapter 2.3.5.

Compliance will endeavour to respond to PA dealing requests as soon as practicable, but employees should note that there may be occasions when delays may occur, for example:

 

  1. when other work priorities take precedence,

 

  2. when Compliance is awaiting responses to enquiries from other departments

 

  3. there are large volumes of trading requests.

If a dealing request is urgent then employees should make Compliance aware (using the contact details in section 7) and Compliance will endeavour to approve the request within the desired timeframe, subject to the above.

 

2.6 Reporting of Transactions and Disclosure of Holdings

 

  2.6.1 Quarterly Transaction Reports

Every employee must submit, no later than 30 calendar days after the end of each calendar quarter, a report containing the following information about each transaction in a Covered Security undertaken during the preceding quarter. The report must contain information concerning any direct or indirect beneficial ownership (as defined in Appendix A to this Code) of a “Covered Security” as defined in 2.2.1.

 

a) The date of the transaction, the title and as applicable the exchange ticker symbol or CUSIP number, interest rate and maturity date, number of shares, and principal amount of each reportable security involved;

 

b) The nature of the transaction (i.e. purchase, sale or other acquisition or disposition);

 

c) The price at which the transaction was effected;

 

d) The name of the broker, dealer or bank with or through whom the transaction was effected;

 

e) The date the report is submitted by the employee;

 

f) The name of the account, and account number if a Pictet account

 

g) With respect to any account established by the employee in which securities were held during the quarter for the direct or indirect benefit of the employee; (i) the name of the broker, dealer or bank with whom the employee established the account, and (ii) the date the account was established.

Pictet Asset Management (Singapore) Pte Ltd (“PAM(S)”)

In addition to the requirements above, PAM(S) staff must submit, no later than 7 calendar days after the date that he or she acquired any interest in securities, a report in the prescribed MAS Form 15, containing the particulars of the securities acquired, as described in (a) to (f) above, together with :

 

h) The balance of the number of shares held;

Where there is change in any interest in securities, the employee shall update the register within 7 days after the date of change.

 

- 12 -


LOGO

 

An employee shall not be required to make a report with respect to any transaction effected for any account over which such person does not have any direct or indirect influence or control or which would duplicate information.

An employee will be deemed to have complied with the transaction reporting requirements by arranging for duplicate brokerage statements to be sent to the Compliance Department. These statements must contain all transactions required to be reported and include all required information.

Any employee who has no personal securities transactions to report during the quarter will be required to confirm this by completion of a nil return.

 

  2.6.2 Disclosure of Personal Holdings

 

2.6.2.1 Initial Holdings Report

Each employee and their connected persons shall supply the Compliance Department with an initial holdings report within 10 business days of becoming an employee, containing the following information:

 

1. The name of security, type of security, and as applicable the exchange ticker symbol or CUSIP number, number of shares, and principal amount of each reportable security in which the employee and their connected persons has any direct or indirect beneficial ownership, as defined in Appendix A;

 

2. The name of any broker, dealer or bank, with which the employee maintains an account in which any securities are held for the employee’s direct or indirect benefit;

 

3. The date the employee submits the report; and

 

4. The name of the account, and account number if a Pictet account.

The information submitted must be current as of a date no more than 45 days before the person commenced employment with PAM.

 

2.6.2.2 Annual Holdings Reports

Each employee shall as at June 30th each year file an annual holdings report containing the same information required in the above initial holdings report. This report must be submitted within 45 days, i.e. by August 14th each year.

 

  2.6.3 Confidentiality

All information obtained from any employee and their connected persons hereunder shall be kept in confidence. However, records of holdings and / or transactions may be subject to review by PAM’s auditors or other professional advisers, and may be made available to the SEC, the FCA and FINMA or any other relevant regulatory or self-regulatory organisation, and may otherwise be disclosed to the extent required by law or regulation.

 

  2.6.4 Important Notes

Failure to submit a transaction report or personal holdings disclosure within the timescales stated above will constitute a breach of the Code and will be recorded in the PAM breach register. A number of clients require disclosure of such breaches, and therefore all employees should take every precaution not to breach this Code.

Furthermore, failure to comply with these reporting requirements will be taken into consideration when determining staff bonuses.

 

- 13 -


LOGO

 

2.7 Record Keeping Requirements

In accordance with SEC and other regulatory recordkeeping requirements, the following documentation will be retained by the Compliance Department for at least 5 years:

 

1. All transaction and holding reports.

 

2. Details of all dealing requests, including rejected requests with a rationale for rejection.

 

3. Details of all IPOs that Compliance, in very limited cases, permits employees or their connected persons to participate in together with an explanation as to why there is no conflict of interest arising.

 

4. All breaches of the PA Dealing Rules.

 

2.8 Waiving the requirements of the Pictet Personal Account Dealing Rules

In certain circumstances the requirements of these rules may be waived or amended at the complete discretion of the Chief Compliance Officer or his nominated deputy, where there is no impact or potential impact to clients, and there are no additional conflicts caused by the trade.

For example:

 

1. Seeking approval to trade shares held via the employee share scheme of a previous employer, where there are limited opportunities to trade (due to rules of employers scheme, and timing of the execution of the trade is determined by scheme administrators); or

 

2. Cases of personal hardship.

In each case, approval must still be sought from Compliance for each instance, and Compliance will judge each individual request on its merits at the time of the request. The approval of a previous trade or a similar trade for another staff member does not constitute a precedent.

 

2.9 Maximum number of transactions per month (Pictet Directive 8)

The maximum number of purchase transactions allowed in a calendar month is 15. This maximum number of 15 is valid for all instruments including those which do not require pre-clearance from Compliance such as Forex. However, the following transactions do not fall under this limit of 15:

 

    Purchases in any account over which the employee or their connected persons has no direct or indirect influence or control; (See definition in Appendix A);

 

    Purchases that are non-discretionary on the part of the employee or their connected persons;

 

    Purchases that are part of an automatic dividend / coupon reinvestment plan; and

 

    Purchases effected upon the exercise of rights issued by an issuer pro rata to all holders of a class of its securities, to the extent such rights were acquired from the issuer.

 

- 14 -


LOGO

 

2.10 Personal Account dealing rule applicability table

 

Instrument

   Pre-clearance
required
   No
trading
within 7
days
before or
one day
after a
client
trades
  

Length of validity of
Compliance pre-
clearance

   Minimum
Holding
period
   Quarterly
transaction
reports
   Annual
holdings
disclosure

Equities – non large cap

         Next business day    30 days      

Equities - large cap trades

      N/A    Next business day    30 days      

<£50k/CHF75k/€60k/SGD100k

                 

Equities - large cap trades

         Next business day    30 days      

>£50k/CHF75k/€60k/SGD100k

                 

Limit orders – large cap trades

      N/A    1 month    30 days      

<£50k/CHF75k/€60k/SGD100k

                 

All other limit orders

         Next business day    30 days      

Warrants, Options & Futures on covered securities

         Next business day    30 days      

Hedge Funds, private investment funds and clubs

         Next business day    30 days      

Bonds, convertibles, debentures etc

         Next business day    30 days      

Spread-betting referenced on covered securities

         Next business day    30 days      

Reportable mutual funds

      N/A    Next business day    30 days      

OECD Government Debt plus related derivatives

   N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A

Bankers Acceptances and Certificates of Deposit

   N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A

Commercial Paper, and high quality short term debt

   N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A

Non-Pictet mutual funds

   N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A

Cash, FFX, and FX and options thereon

   N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A
Pictet Cash, Money Market, Sovereign Money Market and Liquidity Funds    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A

Index / Interest Rate Futures and Options

      N/A    Next business day    N/A      

Exchange Traded Funds based on indices

      N/A    Next business day    N/A      
Precious metals, Commodities and related derivatives (incl. ETF, ETC and Certificates)       N/A    Next business day    30 days      

Non-discretionary trades

   N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A      

Trades made under a dividend reinvestment plan

   N/A    N/A    N/A    N/A      

Purchases under a rights issue

   N/A    N/A    N/A    30 days      

Note: Pictet Directive 8 limits the maximum number of purchase transactions per account to 15 per calendar month.

 

- 15 -


LOGO

 

 

3 Gifts and Entertainment

 

3.1 Introduction

Giving, receiving or soliciting gifts in a business setting may create an appearance of impropriety or may raise a potential conflict of interest arising from the potential undue influencing of PAM staff. For the protection of all staff and PAM even the appearance of a possible conflict of interest should be avoided. Therefore, PAM has adopted the policies set out below to guide all staff in this area. These apply equally to the offering of gifts as to the receipt of gifts.

The general principles are:

 

    Staff should not accept or provide any gifts or favours that might influence the decisions you or the recipient might make in business transactions involving PAM or that others might reasonably believe would influence those decisions;

 

    Modest gifts and favours, which would not be regarded by others as improper, may be accepted or given on an occasional basis. Entertainment that satisfies these requirements and conforms to generally accepted business practices is also permissible;

 

    Staff must not offer or accept gifts or other items of value (including entertainment) unless it is clearly reasonable to do so in the circumstances and provided their frequency and value are not of an excessive or lavish nature;

 

    Where there is a law or rule that applies to the conduct of a particular business or the acceptance of gifts of even nominal value, the law or rule must be followed.

 

    The rules in this section apply not only to gifts / entertainment received from firms, but also those received from a member of staff of a provider firm.

 

3.2 Reporting Requirements

 

  3.2.1 Acceptable Gifts at all times

Certain gifts and entertainment do not create the risk of corruption or breach of trust to PAM and are permissible. Therefore you may accept or give the following without the approval of Compliance:

 

    Gifts, gratuities, amenities or favours based on obvious family or personal relationships (e.g. between a member of staff’s parents, children or spouse) where the circumstances make it clear that those relationships (rather than PAM’s business) are the motivating factor;

 

    Meals and refreshments of reasonable value in the course of a meeting or other occasion held for business discussions, provided that the expenses would have been paid by PAM as a reasonable business expense;

 

    Advertising or promotional material, such as pens, pencils, note pads, key chains, umbrellas, calendars, Pictet chocolates and similar items, typically with the Pictet logo;

 

    Civic, charitable, educational or religious organisation awards for recognition of service and accomplishment; and

 

    Small gifts with a value up to CHF10 / £6 / €7 SGD15 or the equivalent thereof.

All other gifts must be approved by Compliance and / or Business Unit Heads as set in Chapter 3.2.2 and 3.2.3.

 

- 16 -


LOGO

 

  3.2.2 Gifts < CHF300 / £200 / €250 / SGD 400

Staff who accept/give, directly or indirectly, anything of value (in excess of the value of small gifts, as set out on page 13), from / to any person or entity that does business with or on behalf of PAM including gifts, entertainment and gratuities must:

 

    Notify Compliance via the Lotus Notes gifts database; and

 

    Obtain prior approval from Compliance before accepting/giving such a gift.

Compliance will approve or deny requests based upon the reasonableness of the circumstances and whether the circumstances pose a threat to PAM’s integrity. This will include the frequency of gifts and entertainment received/given from/to the same source.

Compliance will maintain records of all requests and responses and monitor the Gifts register.

 

  3.2.3 Gifts > CHF300 / £200 / €250 / SGD 400

The receipt or giving of gifts and entertainment in excess of CHF300 / £200 / €250 / SGD 400, or an equivalent amount in local currencies, must be cleared by a Business Unit Head prior to clearance by the Compliance Department.

 

  3.2.4 Determination of the value of a gift or entertainment

The value of a gift or entertainment for the purposes of this Code is on the basis of the cost incurred by the provider or the market value of the entertainment, whichever is the higher, and not on the basis of the face value of the ticket. Recipients should always enquire of the provider what the value of the entertainment is.

For example, the value of being entertained in a box at a major sporting event would be determined by the current market value of acquiring such entertainment in a private box. The fact that the provider may already have purchased a box does not reduce the value of the entertainment received.

 

  3.2.5 Considerations for the approval of a gift or entertainment

When considering whether to approve gifts and entertainment, Compliance and ExBo members will consider not only the value of an individual request, but also the frequency and cumulative value of gifts and entertainment from the same provider.

On occasions, entertainment offered may also include a member of staff’s partner and / or children. In this case, the normal rules apply, with the value of the entertainment being calculated on the basis of the total cost of the entertainment provided to the member of staff and their partner / children as appropriate.

 

3.3 Prohibited Behaviour

 

    Soliciting for themselves, a Connected Person or for a third party anything of value from anyone in return for PAM business, service or confidential information;

 

    Accepting cash from a Client, supplier or person to whom you refer business;

 

    Using your position to obtain anything of value from a Client, supplier or person to whom you refer business;

 

    Except as provided above, accepting anything of value from anyone outside Pictet in connection with the business of PAM.

As well as constituting a breach of this Code, any of the above prohibited behaviours may also constitute a breach of the UK Bribery Act if carried out in relation to PAM LTD or a UK based customer, broker or supplier, and could result in a criminal conviction. Please refer to PAM’s anti-Bribery Policy for further information.

 

- 17 -


LOGO

 

3.4 Provision of Gifts or Entertainment to certain US clients

US Clients subject to ERISA or Department of Labour legislation are generally prohibited from accepting gifts or entertainment of any description, sometimes including lunch and refreshments.

Therefore, staff should not offer gifts or entertainment to these clients. If in any doubt please check with the client or Compliance prior to offering the gift or entertainment.

Some US ERISA and Government clients have strict and complicated reporting requirements relating to the value of gifts / entertainment received or given. It is therefore extremely important that staff fully report all gifts and entertainments, and provide a fair value of all gifts and entertainment received or provided.

 

3.5 Other Considerations

 

  3.5.1 Travel to and Accommodation at Entertainment Events

Employees must pay their own travel expenses and / or accommodation costs. If the provider of the entertainment has paid for the travel / accommodation costs, the member of staff should make a donation to charity for a similar sum.

 

  3.5.2 Leave for Entertainment

Business Unit Heads must sanction leave of absence taken by staff to attend corporate hospitality events during working time. Unless otherwise agreed, absence during working time must be taken as holiday.

 

  3.5.3 Entertainment not attended by the Provider’s staff

Only on rare occasions should entertainment be accepted where a member of the Provider’s staff will not be present. In each case, the approval of the relevant ExBo member is required, irrespective of the value of the gift received, and the member of staff must explicitly state in their gift request that the Provider’s staff will not be present.

 

  3.5.4 Christmas Charity Raffle

Christmas traditionally sees the giving of presents to / from clients and typically from brokers.

In order to ensure fairness to all members of staff and to avoid any conflict of interest, all non-perishable tangible gifts received in the Christmas period, whether they are required to be reported or not, should be given to the Compliance Department irrespective of their value. Compliance will then organise a charity raffle in the New Year to distribute the gifts among staff.

The only exceptions to the above relate to the receipt of items that would be perishable before Christmas, which may be retained by members of staff. Such gifts must still be declared to Compliance.

Please, note that all gifts that are given to Compliance for the Christmas Charity Raffle must still be reported as set out in Chapter 3.2.2 or 3.2.3.

 

- 18 -


LOGO

 

3.6 Record Keeping

In accordance with FCA, SEC, MAS and FINMA and other relevant regulators’ record keeping requirements, Compliance will keep records of all gifts / entertainment received or provided for a period of five years.

 

3.7 Failure to Report Gifts

The failure to report the receipt of, or giving of a gift or entertainment will constitute a breach of this Code and will be recorded in the PAM breaches register. These failures will also be taken into consideration when determining staff bonuses.

 

3.8 US Political Contributions

The SEC “pay to play rule”, (206(4)-5) prohibits SEC registered investment advisers from providing advisory services for compensation to government clients for a two year period after the adviser or certain of its executives make a contribution to a public official or candidate for such office.

Therefore to prevent PAM being excluded from managing money from US public bodies, it is important that any member of staff involved in client solicitation, or members of the ExBos do not make any US political donations to a public official or candidate for such office in excess of USD 150.

Therefore, all Investment, BD and CRM staff and ExBo members must obtain approval from Compliance prior to making any US political contributions to a public official or candidate for such office.

Compliance will then require a quarterly declaration of any such contribution.

 

- 19 -


LOGO

 

4 Dealing with Personal Conflicts of Interest

 

4.1 Introduction

A conflict of interest is generally defined as a person or entity having two or more interests that are inconsistent with each other and may arise where an employee’s personal interests interfere in some way with the interests of a client, PAM, and the wider Pictet group. You should not cause Pictet or yourself to have a conflict of interest, and should be particularly sensitive to situations involving family or household members. A conflict of interest occurs when you allow any interest, activity or influence outside of Pictet to:

 

    Influence your judgment when acting on behalf of Pictet;

 

    Compete against Pictet in any business activity;

 

    Divert business from Pictet;

 

    Diminish the efficiency with which you perform your regular duties;

 

    Harm or impair Pictet’s financial or professional reputation; or

 

    Benefit you at the expense of Pictet.

As an employee you are not permitted to participate in any activity that causes a conflict of interest or gives the appearance of a conflict. Areas frequently involved in conflicts of interest and examples of prohibited activities are described below.

If you believe that you have, or may be perceived to have, a conflict of interest, you must disclose it in writing to the CCO who will keep copies of all such disclosures.

Conflicts of interest may not always be clear cut, so if you are in any doubt as to whether a conflict of interest arises, you should consult the Compliance Department.

 

4.2 Self-Dealing

You are restricted from becoming involved in certain business dealings with Pictet. As an employee, you are prohibited from:

 

    Directly or indirectly buying assets from (other than assets being offered to the public or employees generally), or selling assets to, Pictet or any account for which Pictet acts as an investment manager or adviser, unless you have prior approval from the CCO;

 

    Representing Pictet in any activity (whether an internal Pictet activity or a transaction between Pictet and a third party) requiring your judgement or discretion which affects a person or organisation in which you have a material interest, financial or otherwise; and

 

    Representing any non-Pictet company in any transaction with Pictet, which involves the exercise of discretion by either party.

 

4.3 Outside Business Activities

You are expected to avoid any outside interest or activity that will interfere with your duties. Generally, your outside interests or activities should not:

 

    Materially encroach on the time or attention you devote to your duties;

 

    Adversely affect the quality of your work;

 

    Compete with Pictet’s activities;

 

    Involve any significant use of Pictet’s equipment, facilities or supplies;

 

- 20 -


LOGO

 

    Imply Pictet’s sponsorship or support (for example, through the use of Pictet stationery for personal purposes); or

 

    Adversely affect the reputation of Pictet.

 

4.4 Accepting Honoraria

Neither you nor any connected person may accept cash honoraria for your public speaking or writing services on Pictet’s behalf.

If a cash honorarium is tendered, you should donate it to PAM and request that it be donated to a charity of PAM’s choice. You may accept non-cash honoraria of modest value (as per gifts policy) or may accept reimbursement for related expenses.

 

4.5 Accepting Fiduciary Appointments

A fiduciary appointment is an appointment as an administrator, executor, guardian, custodian for a minor, trustee or managing agent. Unless you are acting on behalf of a connected person to you, or you have obtained approval from the CCO, you may not accept a fiduciary or co-fiduciary appointment. If such approval is given you must ensure that your appointment does not interfere with the time and attention that is required to affect your job responsibilities.

 

4.6 Participating in Civic Affairs

You are encouraged to take part in charitable, educational or other civic affairs, as long as such affairs do not interfere or conflict with your responsibilities at Pictet. Please review the requirements of “Serving as an External Director or Officer” (below) as they may apply to your participation in civic affairs. You should not imply Pictet’s sponsorship or support of any outside event or organisation without the approval of a Director or ExBo member.

 

4.7 Serving as an External Director or Officer of a Public Company

In view of the potential conflicts of interest and the possible liability for both you and Pictet, you should be cautious when considering service as an officer, partner or director of any non-Pictet entity other than as a representative of Pictet. Before agreeing to such service, you should disclose it to the CCO and to your appropriate ExBo member.

If you are serving as an officer, or director of an external entity, you should:

 

    Not attempt to influence or take part in any vote or decision that may lead to the use of a Pictet product or service by the external entity, or result in the conferring of a special benefit to Pictet by the external entity and ensure that the external entity’s records reflect your abstention;

 

    Relinquish any responsibility you may have for any Pictet relationship with the external entity unless acting as a representative of Pictet; and

 

    Be satisfied that the external entity conducts its affairs lawfully, ethically and in accordance with prudent management and financial practices.

On an annual basis all staffs are required to confirm to Compliance details of any firms to which they serve as directors, subject to a number of exceptions, including acting as a director of a flat management company.

 

- 21 -


LOGO

 

4.8 Participating in Political Activities

Pictet encourages you to keep informed concerning political issues. If you do participate in any political activity, you may not act as a representative of Pictet unless you are specifically authorised in writing to do so by a Director or ExBo member of PAM.

As previously stated, it is unlawful to use Pictet’s funds or assets in connection with political elections. In the US many states also restrict the use of corporate funds and assets in connection with state elections. Please also refer to Chapter 3.8 for further details regarding US political donations.

 

4.9 Giving Advice to Clients

Unless your regular duties specifically permit it, and you are qualified to do so, you may not give legal, tax or investment advice to clients.

You may be asked by a client to make a statement regarding the legal implications of a proposed transaction. If you are not authorised to give legal advice to clients, be sure that nothing you say might be interpreted as legal advice.

Please remember that PAM is not a legal or tax advisor, and cannot give such advice. Clients should be sure that nothing said or written constitutes tax or legal advice.

 

- 22 -


LOGO

 

5 Respecting Pictet Confidential Information

 

5.1 In General

As an employee, you may have access to confidential and privileged information concerning Pictet’s clients, fellow employees and suppliers. Such access to confidentiality must be maintained and the information used only for valid business purposes. Under no circumstances may you use such information for personal gain or pass it on to any person outside Pictet, including family or friends, or even to other employees who do not need such information to perform their jobs or to provide services to or for Pictet.

 

5.2 Talking to the Press

Background

From time to time certain staff members may be approached by the press for comment (verbal or written) which can be in many different forms including face to face interviews, telephone questions and answers and written commentary.

In respect of relations with the press, all staff must adhere to “Directive 49 – Communication and Events” in respect of appropriate prior approval and internal notification, and Chapter 1.2 in particular.

The following paragraph sets out in more detail the specific requirements covering the minimum standards that all staff must adhere to in complying with the Group Directive.

These standards focus on front office investment (e.g. investment managers and analysts) and senior Distribution staff who may be called upon to communicate with the press in their area of expertise. Other staff members would not typically be expected to communicate with the press and if approached must refer in all cases directly to Group Corporate Communications who will advise accordingly.

Minimum Standards

 

    Only Investment staff specifically approved by their CIO, and Distribution staff specifically approved by the Head of Distribution (or Country Heads at the discretion of the Head of Distribution) are deemed to be “expert commentators” for the purposes of Directive 49 and these minimum standards. A central list of these expert commentators is maintained by Group Corporate Communications. However if in doubt refer to your CIO or the Head of Distribution as appropriate;

 

    Expert commentators should only speak about their area of specialty;

 

    Expert commentators must proactively seek and receive prior approval from Group Corporate Communications and their CIO / Head of Distribution before communicating with the press (except as noted in paragraph 4 below);

 

    In exceptional cases certain expert commentators may speak to the press without CIO prior approval but prior approval must always be obtained from Group Corporate Communications. This exception only applies where the press approaches the individual and where agreed by the relevant CIO / Head of Distribution;

 

    If an expert commentator wishes to proactively approach the press to make a comment then prior written approval must be sought from both their CIO / Head of Distribution and Group Corporate Communications;

 

- 23 -


LOGO

 

    If asked to comment on a specific stock or bond, the individual must declare that they may have a direct or indirect economic interest in that stock or bond (but note below regarding short positions);

 

    In no circumstances can specific stock/bond comments be made where net short positions are held in portfolios within the expert commentator’s area of responsibility;

 

    It must be assumed in all cases that any comments made will, or may be specifically attributable to an individual and/or Pictet and therefore individuals communicating with the press must ensure that they do so with the utmost integrity and professionalism and in compliance with all relevant regulatory requirements (e.g. Market Behaviour Rules – especially concerning rumours and price sensitive information);

 

    Once the communication is completed, a summary must be provided to Group Corporate Communications immediately thereafter and copied to the relevant CIO; and

 

    Approved individuals must ensure they have received appropriate media training and maintain training records as necessary.

 

5.3 Information obtained from Business

You may possess confidential information about those with whom Pictet has business relations. If released, such information could have a significant effect on their operations, their business reputations or the market price of their securities. Disclosing such information could expose both you and Pictet to liability for damages.

 

5.4 Pictet Financial Information

Non-public financial information about Pictet is strictly confidential, and except as required by law, regulation or approved by the Chief Financial Officer or CCO, is not to be released to any person or organisation.

 

5.5 Pictet Examination Information

Regulatory examiners periodically review Pictet. Certain reports made by those regulatory agencies are the property of those agencies and are strictly confidential. Giving information from those reports to anyone not officially connected with Pictet is a violation of this Code and may be a breach of the rules of the relevant regulator. Therefore, copies of regulatory reports may only be given to third parties with the prior written consent of the CCO.

 

5.6 Pictet Proprietary Information

Certain non-financial information developed by Pictet (such as business plans, client lists and records, methods of doing business, employee records, models, computer software, source codes, databases and related documentation) is valuable information that is proprietary and confidential. You are not to disclose it to anyone outside Pictet or to anyone inside Pictet who does not have a need to know such information. This obligation survives your employment with Pictet. Employees are prohibited from using Pictet time, resources and assets (including its proprietary information) for personal gain. Pictet has proprietary rights in any materials, products or services that you create which relates to your work at Pictet, that use Pictet’s resources (equipment, etc.) or that are created during your regular working hours. You must disclose such materials, products or services to Pictet.

 

- 24 -


LOGO

 

5.7 Electronic and Voice Communication Systems

E-mail, voice and other electronic communications systems provided by Pictet are primarily intended for Pictet’s business. Communications made using these systems are subject to retention, review and inspection. You should not expect communications made using these systems to be treated as private and confidential. You should limit the transmission of highly sensitive information on these systems. Messages created in these systems should comply with all relevant Pictet Directives.

 

5.8 Information Security Systems

If you have access to Pictet’s information systems, you are responsible for taking the precautions necessary to prohibit unauthorised entry to the system. You should safeguard your passwords or other means of entry.

 

5.9 Computer Software

Computer software is to be used for Pictet’s business only and must be used in accordance with the terms of the licensing agreement. No copying of software is permitted except in accordance with the licensing agreement.

 

5.10 Inside Information

Inside information is material non-public information relating to any corporation issuing or that has issued securities. Information is considered “material” if it is important enough to affect the judgment of investors about whether to buy, sell or hold securities, or to influence the market price of the securities.

Global Regulators and Law courts have ruled that inside information about issuers must be made public before anyone possessing it can trade or recommend the purchase or sale of the securities concerned. Under law, you, Pictet and the person who receives the information could be held legally responsible for misusing insider information.

The inside information laws are complex. Employees must be extremely cautious in providing any inside information to any person outside of Pictet or in using inside information obtained at Pictet in making personal or client investment decisions.

Further details of the law relating to, and the procedures for dealing with, inside information are contained in the Market Abuse Chapter of the Compliance Manual. If you have any doubts about whether or not information is inside information or whether or how it can be used, you should consult the Compliance Department.

 

5.11 “Chinese Wall” Policy

To facilitate compliance with the prohibition on trading in securities while in possession of insider information, many financial services organisations, including Pictet, have adopted “Chinese Wall” policies. The Chinese Wall separates the business units or employees likely to receive insider information from the business units or employees that trade in securities or provide investment advice.

PAMs Chinese Wall policy is contained in Chapter 3.4 of the Compliance Manual and in the Policies section of the PAM intranet. The policy establishes rules restricting the flow of information between PAM and other members of the Pictet Group, procedures to be used by employees to obtain information from other departments or other associated entities and procedures for reporting the receipt of material non-public information by employees.

 

- 25 -


LOGO

 

You must be familiar with this policy, particularly if you work in an area that handles investment decisions or if you supply or might be asked to supply information to employees in such areas. Under no circumstances should you receive or pass on information that may lead to a violation of the insider trading laws, or otherwise create a conflict of interest, or interfere with a legal or business obligation of Pictet.

 

5.12 Social Media

Regulatory requirements mandate that regulated firms have the ability to capture and archive staff’s communications with the public. PAM is currently producing a Social Media Policy which will be disseminated in due course, but until then, all staff should follow the guideline below.

PAM and its staff should not use any Social Media for work related communications and / or work related activities including, but not limited to Facebook, Twitter, Linkedln or any similar Social Media (“Social Media”).

More specifically, PAM staff should not use Social Media to market or advertise its services, communicate with Clients or Prospects, make recommendations, discuss investments or financial products, etc.

PAM Staff may use Social Media only for private purposes and may only indicate the position held at PAM while respecting the above restrictions at all times (no Social Media for work related use). They shall not post testimonials concerning PAM, Pictet or any of its related entities. The SEC considers that the use of a “like” button in a Social Media might imply a testimonial under the Advisers Act. Employees must be aware at all times of their duties to Pictet and PAM while using Social Media.

Moreover, PAM staff are not allowed to use Social Media out of their workstation, for security reasons. Social Media websites and related information have often proven not so well protected. Accordingly, Social Media represents a high risk of malware infiltration, theft of data, leakage of confidential data, etc.

Compliance may, from time to time, browse social media to verify compliance with the present policy. Should a breach occur or inappropriate content be found, Compliance will report to Management and HR for appropriate sanctions.

 

- 26 -


LOGO

 

6 E-mail Retention

The SEC and FCA requires that registered Investment Advisers retain all messages (including e-mail, Bloomberg, Sametime and SMS on Blackberries) sent by staff for 5 years. As a result, all inbound and outbound messages for staff of PAM including internal and personal messages are retained, including those deleted by staff members.

Under relevant data protection and secrecy laws, we are required to protect the confidentiality of personal messages. Therefore, whilst we retain all staff messages, the following procedures are in place to ensure compliance with these requirements.

 

1. Only Compliance and a restricted number of Lotus Notes Administrators have access to messages, and may carry out periodic monitoring of messages as required by SEC rules, and as recommended by the FCA and other relevant regulators.

 

2. Where any other person needs access to messages, this will require the approval of, and supervision by Compliance. Access will only be granted for business use, which will include compliance monitoring and investigations.

 

3. In all cases where access to messages is granted, Compliance and any other person reviewing messages will disregard any private messages as soon as it becomes obvious that a message is private, and will not copy or forward or use in any other way any private messages, which have no bearing on PAM’s or Pictet’s business, or any investigation being undertaken.

 

4. In the event of a regulatory inspection, the SEC, FINMA, FCA and other regulatory inspectors are required to respect the privacy of private messages where they have no bearing on the business of PAM or Pictet.

All messages you send or receive will be retained for 5 years, including those relating to Banque Pictet & Cie SA clients.

During an inspection a regulator could ask to view any person’s messages, although the SEC should only review those mails relating to US clients, who have signed an agreement with PAM LTD, PAM SA or PAM (S), and not another entity such as Banque Pictet & Cie SA.

However, there are some PAM staff members such as CRM, BD, Operations and MIS, who have relationships with both SEC and non SEC clients. They will be considered as “double-hatted”. If the SEC requires the e-mail of a “double-hatted” staff member, all his / her e-mails for the period requested by the SEC will have to be printed and any name / identification of non SEC clients will have to be crossed out. This process will be overseen by Compliance, and as this task will be very time consuming, the list of double-hatted staff member should be as short as possible.

 

- 27 -


LOGO

 

7 Compliance and Code of Ethics Contact Sheet

 

David Cawthrow - Chief Compliance Officer   
Phone: 0044 207 847 5040   
Fax: 0044 207 847 5046   
Email: dcawthrow@pictet.com   
London   
Marc Tonnerre    Simon Greaves
Senior Compliance Manager    Senior Compliance Manager
Phone: 0044 207 847 5041    Phone: 0044 207 847 5486
Email: mtonnerre@pictet.com    E-Mail: sgreaves@pictet.com
Bhawna Panchal    Cihem Vanderpuije
Compliance Manager    Compliance Monitoring Officer
Phone: 0044 207 847 5114    Phone: 0044 207 847 5181
Email: bpanchal@pictet.com    Email: cvanderpuije@pictet.com
Catherine Stanbridge    Christina Coldman
Compliance Manager    Compliance Monitoring Officer
Phone: 0044 207 847 5042    Phone: 0044 207 847 5454
Email: cstanbridge@pictet.com    Email: ccoldman@pictet.com
Chloe Fernandes    Sesini Paulos
Compliance Administrator    Junior Compliance Monitoring Officer
Phone: 0044 207 847 6431    Phone: 0044 207 847 6439
Email: cfernandes @pictet.com    Email: spaulos @pictet.com
Fax: 0044 207 847 5046 (confidential)   
Geneva   
Erika Beaumier    Lilia Andreeva Verschueren
Head of PAM SA Compliance    Compliance Manager
Phone: 0041 58 323 1580    Phone: 0041 58 323 5781
E-mail: ebeaumier@pictet.com    Email: landreeva @pictet.com
Dominique De La Barre    Aurelie Dykmans
Compliance Manager    Compliance Monitoring Officer
Phone: 0041 58 323 5809    Phone: 0041 58 323 5765
Email: ddelabarre @pictet.com    Email: adykmans@pictet.com
Sophie Schaad   
Junior Compliance Monitoring Officer   
Phone: 0041 58 323 5824   
E-mail: sschaad @pictet.com    Fax: 0041 58 323 3030 (not confidential)
Singapore   
Melaine Tan    Hong Kong
Compliance Manager    Winnie Cheung
Phone: 0065 6306 3774    Compliance Manager
E-mail: meytan @pictet.com    Phone : 00852 3191 1878
Fax: 0065 6306 3985 (not confidential)    E-Mail wcheung@pictet.com

 

- 28 -


LOGO

 

8 Appendix A - Definition of Beneficial Ownership

“Beneficial ownership”, for purposes of this Code, shall be determined in accordance with the definition of “beneficial owner “ set forth in Rule 16a-1(a) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, i.e. a person must have a “direct or indirect pecuniary interest” to have “beneficial ownership”. Although the following list is not intended to be exhaustive, pursuant to the rule, a person is generally regarded as the beneficial owner of the following securities:

 

1. Securities held in the person’s own name;

 

2. Securities held with another in joint tenancy, community property or other joint ownership;

 

3. Securities held by a bank or broker as nominee or custodian on such person’s behalf of securities pledged as collateral for a loan;

 

4. Securities held by members of the person’s immediate family sharing the same household (“immediate family” means any child, stepchild, grandchild, parent, stepparent, grandparent, spouse (including unmarried partner), sibling, mother-in-law, father-in-law, son-in-law, daughter-in-law, brother-in-law, or sister-in-law, including adoptive relationships);

 

5. Securities held by a relative not residing in the person’s home if the person is a custodian, guardian or otherwise has controlling influence over the purchase, sale or voting of such securities;

 

6. Securities held by a trust in which the person is a beneficiary and has or shares the power to make purchase or sales decisions;

 

7. Securities held by a trust for which the person serves as a trustee and in which the person has a pecuniary interest (including pecuniary interests by virtue of performance fees and by virtue of holdings by the person’s immediate family);

 

8. Securities held by a general partnership or limited partnership in which the person is a general partner;

 

9. Securities owned by a corporation in which the person has a control position or in which the person has or shares investment control over the portfolio securities (other than a registered investment company);

 

10. Securities in a portfolio giving the person certain performance related fees; and

 

11. Securities held by another person or entity pursuant to any agreement, understanding, relationship or other arrangement giving the person any direct or indirect pecuniary interest.

 

- 29 -

A PPENDIX VII.A.-1 – E VERMORE G LOBAL A DVISORS , LLC C ODE OF E THICS

P REAMBLE

The interests of our clients, and the interests of shareholders of the funds we advise, are, at all times, our highest priority. In order to maintain this priority, all personal securities transactions are conducted in a manner consistent with this Code of Ethics (the “Code”). We are committed to maintaining the integrity of our business by exercising vigilance in the avoidance of all actual or potential conflicts of interest or abuses of our position of trust and responsibility.

As an investment adviser, we owe a fiduciary duty to each of our clients and the shareholders of the funds that we advise. Included in this duty is the duty of loyalty whereby we must place our clients’ interests first, conduct all of our securities transactions in compliance with this Code and avoid taking any positions that are against our clients’ interests.

The Code should be read in conjunction with this Preamble.

Section 1: Definitions

All definitions shall be interpreted pursuant to the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “1940 Act”) and its Rule 17j-1, and the Investment Advisers Act and its Rule 204-(2).

 

  (A) “Adviser” means Evermore Global Advisors, LLC, and any firm which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with Adviser and any other firm adopting this Code.

 

  (B) “Access Person” means any director, officer, general partner, or Advisory Person of the Adviser or a Fund. Access Person shall not include:

 

  (1) disinterested Directors who are Access Persons solely by reason of being a Director of a Fund; or

 

  (2) Officers of a Fund who are Access Persons solely by reason of being an Officer of a Fund;

if such Disinterested Directors and Officers do not, in connection with their regular functions or duties, obtain information regarding the purchase or sale of a security by that Fund prior to disclosure in a regular meeting of Directors.*

 

  (C) “Advisory Person” means

 

  (1) any employee of the Adviser or a Fund who, in connection with his/her regular functions or duties, makes, participates in, or obtains information regarding the purchase or sale of a Covered Security by a Client, or whose functions relate to the making of any recommendations with respect to such purchases or sales;

 

  (2) any natural person in a control relationship to the Adviser or a Fund who obtains information concerning recommendations made to such Fund or Adviser’s Client with regard to the purchase of a Covered Security; or

 

  (3) any person who obtains information concerning any recommendations or executions of Client transactions in Covered Securities and has been designated by the Chief Compliance Officer as an Advisory Person.*

 

* This Code requires the Chief Compliance Officer to maintain a list of all Access Persons and Advisory Persons and to provide these persons with notice of their status.

 

200


  (D) “Security held or to be Acquired by a Client” means:

 

  (1) any Covered Security which, within the most recent 15 days:

 

  (a) is or has been held by a Client; or

 

  (b) is being or has been seriously considered for purchase by a Client; and

 

  (2) any option to purchase or sell, and any security convertible into or exchangeable for, a Covered Security described in part (i) of this section.

A Covered Security is seriously considered for purchase by a Client when a recommendation to purchase or sell a Covered Security has been communicated to a portfolio manager for a Client and the portfolio manager is considering the recommendation. A Covered Security is not being seriously considered for purchase by a Client solely by reason of that Covered Security being subject to normal review procedures applicable to portfolio securities of the Client, or normal review procedures which are part of a general industrial or business study, review, survey or research or monitoring of securities markets.

 

  (E) “Beneficial Owner” shall be determined in the same manner as it would be in determining whether a person is subject to the provisions of Section 16 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and the rules and regulations thereunder. (The meaning of the term “Beneficial Owner” is summarized and illustrated in Appendix A attached to this Code.)

 

  (F) “Client” means any party for whom the Adviser provides investment advisory services. Clients include Funds, whether or not the Adviser serves as the primary investment adviser or serves as sub-adviser.

 

  (G) “Chief Compliance Officer” shall mean an Adviser’s designated Chief Compliance Officer or, in the case of such designated Chief Compliance Officer’s unavailability or inability to act, any officer of the Adviser designated to act in such circumstances.

 

  (H) “Control” shall have the same meaning as set forth in Section 2(a)(9) of the 1940 Act.

 

  (I) “Covered Security” means a security as defined in Section 2(a)(36) of the 1940 Act , except that it does not include: (1) direct obligations of the Government of the United States, (2) banker’s acceptances, bank certificates of deposit, commercial paper, and high quality short-term debt instruments, including repurchase agreements; and (3) shares issued by open-end funds registered under the 1940 Act other than funds advised by the Adviser.

 

  (J) “Disinterested Director” means a director of a Fund who is not an “interested person” of the Fund within the meaning of Section 2(a)(19) of the 1940 Act.

 

  (K) “Fund” means each investment company and for whom the Adviser serves as the investment adviser and manages such entities daily business affairs.

 

  (L) “Limited Offering” means an offering that is exempt from registration under the Securities Act of 1933 pursuant to Section 4(2), Section 4(6), Rule 505, or Rule 506,

 

  (M) “Purchase or Sale of a Covered Security” includes, inter alia, the writing of an option to purchase or sell a Covered Security.

 

201


  (N) “Supervised Person” means any employee, director, officer, general partner, or Advisory Person of the Adviser.

S ECTION 2: U NLAWFUL A CTIONS

No Access Person, in connection with the purchase or sale of any Security Held or to be acquired by a Client shall

 

  (A) employ any device, scheme or artifice to defraud a Client;

 

  (B) make any untrue statement of a material fact (or omit to state a material fact necessary in order to make the statements made not misleading) to an Adviser employee making investment decisions or to an Adviser officer investigating securities transactions;

 

  (C) engage in any act, practice or course of business that operates or would operate as a fraud or deceit to a Client; or

 

  (D) engage in any manipulative practice with respect to a Client.

Section 3: Sanctions for Violations of the Code of Ethics

Upon discovering any violation of the Code of Ethics, the Chief Compliance Officer shall impose a fine or other corrective action in a manner he or she deems appropriate. In determining the appropriate corrective action, the CCO may consult with members of the Adviser’s Senior Management and/or the Board of Directors of any Fund affected by the violation. Types of corrective actions include, but are not limited to, written warnings, monetary sanctions, a letter of censure, suspension or termination of the employment of the violator, civil referral to the SEC or other civil regulatory authorities, or criminal referral.

Section 4: Prohibited Purchases and Sales

 

  (A) Pre-Clearing . No Access Person shall, directly or indirectly, purchase or sell the Fund or any Covered Security (or any security sold in a Limited Offering) in which such person has, or by reason of such transaction acquires, any direct or indirect beneficial ownership without the prior approval of the Chief Compliance Officer, or Adviser’s Chief Executive Officer, Chief Operating Officer or Chief Financial Officer. The Chief Compliance Officer shall pre-clear his personal transactions in any Covered Security (or any security sold in a Limited Offering) with Adviser’s Chief Executive Officer, Chief Operating Officer or Chief Financial Officer (see Attachment 2).

 

  (B) Initial Public Offerings . No Access Person shall acquire any Securities in an initial public offering.

 

  (C) Fifteen Day Trading Window . No Access Person shall, directly or indirectly, purchase or sell any Covered Security in which he or she has, or by reason of such transaction acquires, any direct or indirect beneficial ownership, and which to his or her actual knowledge at the time of such purchase or sale is being seriously considered for purchase or sale by or for a Client, or is the subject of a pending buy or sell order by a Client, or is programmed for purchase or sale by or for a Client; or was purchased or sold by or for a Client within the fifteen (15) calendar day period preceding or following the purchase or sale by such Access Person.

 

202


  (D) For purposes of the prohibitions in Section 3 of this Code on purchases and sales of certain Securities, “directly or indirectly” shall be deemed to include within such prohibitions any transaction involving any other substantially similar Covered Securities of the same issuer, and any derivatives of such Covered Security.

Section 5: Exempted Transactions

 

  (A) The prohibitions of Section 3 of this Code shall not apply to:

 

  (1) No Control . Purchases or sales effected for any account over which the Access Person has no direct or indirect influence or control.

 

  (2) Automatic Dividend Reinvestment Plan . Purchases that are part of an automatic dividend reinvestment plan.

 

  (3) Pro Rata Rights . Purchases effected upon the exercise of rights issued by an issuer pro rata to all holders of a class of its securities, to the extent such rights were acquired from such issuer, and sales of such rights so acquired.

 

  (4) Systematic Investment Plan . Purchases effected through a systematic investment plan involving the automatic investment of a predetermined amount on predetermined dates, provided the Chief Compliance Officer has been previously notified by the employee that he or she (or his or her spouse) will be participating in the plan.

 

  (5) Gifts . Subject to the provisions of Sections 8, 9 and 10, the giving or receiving of any security as a gift.

 

  (6) Futures Contracts, Options on Futures Contracts . Any purchase or sale involving futures contracts on broad securities indices, such as the S&P, or interest rate futures contracts, or options on such futures contracts.

Section 6: Limited Offerings

In reviewing requests for approval of a transaction by an Access Person involving a limited offering, the Chief Compliance Officer shall take into account, among other factors, whether the investment opportunity should be reserved for a Client, and whether the opportunity is being offered to such Access Person by virtue of his or her position with the Adviser.

An Advisory Person who has been authorized to acquire Securities in a limited offering shall be required to disclose such investment when that Advisory Person plays a part in any Fund’s subsequent consideration of an investment in the issuer. Any such consideration of an investment in the issuer shall be subject to review by Advisory Persons with no personal interest in the issuer.

Section 7: Insider Trading

These procedures are intended to prevent the use of material, nonpublic information by Supervised Persons and to prevent, detect and correct any violations of the prohibition on insider trading. Evermore Global Advisors strictly prohibits trading while in possession of material, nonpublic information, tipping of nonpublic information, and scalping by all Supervised Persons for their personal accounts or for Advisory Clients.

 

203


  (A) Overview

Insider trading is based on a simple, well-established principle: if you receive material, nonpublic information about a public company from any source, you are prohibited from discussing or acting on that information.

Under the Advisers Act, the SEC may sue any person (or any person who controls or supervises such person) who trades while in possession of “material, nonpublic information” or who communicates or “tips” such information. Trading the securities of any company while in possession of material, nonpublic information about that company is generally prohibited by the securities laws of the United States and Firm policy. Under insider trading laws, a person or company that illegally trades in securities of a company while in possession of material, nonpublic information about that company may be subject to severe sanctions, including civil penalties, fines and imprisonment.

The rules contained in this Code apply to securities trading and information handled by Supervised Persons of Evermore Global Advisors. The law of insider trading is complicated and continuously developing. Individuals may be uncertain about the application of insider trading rules in some circumstances and any questions about insider trading rules should be addressed with the Chief Compliance Officer. You must notify the Chief Compliance Officer immediately if you have any reason to believe that insider trading has occurred or is about to occur.

 

204


  (B) Policy on Insider Trading

No person to whom these procedures apply may trade, either personally or on behalf of others (such as Advisory Client accounts managed by Evermore Global Advisors), while in possession of material, nonpublic information, nor may any Supervised Person communicate material, nonpublic information to others in violation of the law.

 

  (1) Who is an Insider?

Corporate insiders who possess material, nonpublic information about a corporation may be required either to disclose that information to the investing public or to refrain from passing such information along to others, trading in or recommending the purchase or sale of the corporation’s securities. Similarly, as a general rule, those to whom corporate insiders “tip” material, nonpublic information must refrain from passing such information along to others, trading in or recommending the corporation’s securities. In addition, under most circumstances, tipping or trading on material, nonpublic information about a tender offer may violate the rules of the SEC. Tipping may include spreading rumors about potential tender offers. For example, personnel may not pass along a rumor regarding a tender offer to those who are likely to trade on the information or further spread the rumor if the rumor emanated, directly or indirectly, from someone connected with the target, the offeror, or their respective officers, directors, partners, employees or persons acting on their behalf, even if such information was inadvertently communicated.

 

  (2) What is Material Information?

The question of whether information is material is not always easily resolved. Generally, the courts have held that a fact is material if there is substantial likelihood that a reasonable investor would consider the information “important” in making an investment decision. As such, material information would include information which would likely affect the market price of any securities, or which would likely be considered important by a reasonable investor in determining whether to buy, sell or hold such securities. Examples of material information may include the following:

 

    Significant dividend increases or decreases

 

    Significant earnings information or estimates

 

    Significant changes in earnings information or estimates previously released by a company

 

    Significant expansion or curtailment of operations

 

    Significant increases or declines in orders

 

    Significant merger, acquisition or divestiture proposals or agreements

 

    Significant new products or discoveries

 

    Extraordinary borrowing

 

    Major litigation

 

    Significant liquidity problems

 

    Extraordinary management developments

 

    Purchase or sale of substantial assets

 

    Capital restructuring, such as exchange offers

 

    Block and/or Restricted Securities transactions

Material information also may relate to the market for a company’s securities. Information about a significant order to purchase or sell securities may, in some contexts, be material. Prepublication information regarding reports in the financial press also may be material. For example, the United States Supreme Court upheld the criminal convictions of insider trading defendants who capitalized on prepublication information about The Wall Street Journal’s “Heard on the Street” column.

 

205


You should also be aware of the SEC’s position that the term “material, nonpublic information” relates not only to issuers but also to Evermore Global Advisors’ securities recommendations and client securities holdings and transactions.

 

  (3) What is Nonpublic Information?

Information is “nonpublic” if it has not been disclosed generally to the investing public. Information is made public if it has been broadly disseminated and made available to the general public by publication in the newspapers or other media or if it has been the subject of a press release addressing the general investing public. However, information is not necessarily made public merely because such information is communicated through rumors or other unofficial statements in the marketplace.

 

  (4) Identifying Inside Information

Before executing any trade for yourself or others, including private accounts managed by Evermore Global Advisors, you must determine whether you have access to material, nonpublic information. If you think that you might have access to material, nonpublic information, you should take the following steps:

 

    Prior to taking any action, report the information and proposed trade immediately to the Chief Compliance Officer;

 

    Do not purchase or sell the securities on behalf of yourself or others, including private accounts managed by the firm;

 

    Do not communicate the information inside or outside the firm, other than to the Chief Compliance Officer; and

 

    After the Chief Compliance Officer has reviewed the issue, the firm will determine whether the information is material and nonpublic and, if so, what action the firm will take.

You should consult with the Chief Compliance Officer before taking any action or engaging in any transaction which inside information may have been provided. This degree of caution will protect you, our clients, and the firm.

The Chief Compliance Officer shall use the following reviews and procedures to detect any possible trading on inside information:

 

    review of the personal securities statements for all Supervised Persons and any related accounts;

 

    review of trading activity in Advisory Client accounts;

 

    investigation of any circumstances about any possible receipt, trading or other use of inside information.

Section 8: Disgorgement by Access Persons of Certain Short-Term Trading Profits

 

  (A) No Access Person shall profit from the purchase and sale, or sale and purchase, of the same (or equivalent) securities within 60 calendar days. Any profits realized by such Access Person on such short-term trades shall be disgorged.

 

206


  (B) Any profits realized by an Access Person on trades made in violation of Section 3(C) of this Code (the Fifteen Day Trading Window) shall be disgorged.

Section 9: Gifts

In addition to those provisions of the FINRA Rules of Fair Practice or similar ethical rules relating to the receipt of gifts and other benefits, all Access Persons are prohibited from receiving any gift, gratuity, favor award or other item or benefit having a market value in excess of $100 per person, per year, from or on behalf of any person or entity that does, or seeks to do, business with or on behalf of the Adviser or its Clients. Gifts in excess of $100 per person, per year, must be pre-cleared by the CCO or COO prior to receipt. Business meals and entertainment received by Access Persons must be reported if over the de minimis amount of $250.

Entertainment and gifts paid for by brokers to Adviser or affiliated persons of Adviser who sought and obtain securities transactions on behalf of Adviser’s Fund Client at times may be deemed to be “compensation,” which is prohibited under Section 17(e)(1). The Adviser and its affiliated persons are not permitted to receive entertainment and gifts from any broker executing securities transactions on behalf of a Fund Client or a broker the Adviser is considering doing business with on behalf of Fund Clients. For purposes of this policy, (i) broker-sponsored meetings with global corporate management teams where food and beverages may be served and (ii) business meals with brokers, their analysts, investment bankers or corporate clients for the purpose of discussing or evaluating investments on behalf of Adviser’s clients are not deemed “compensation” which is prohibited under Section 17(e)(1).

Any Covered Person receiving entertainment and gifts from a broker (other than the broker-sponsored meetings or business meals referenced in the paragraph above) must report such receipt immediately to the CCO. The CCO must make a determination if the receipt of such entertainment and gifts is a violation of Section 17(e)(1). If the CCO determines there is no connection between the entertainment or gift(s) received and the use of the broker that provided the entertainment or gift(s), then it will not deem the receipt of such entertainment or gift(s) to be a violation of Section 17(e)(1). The CCO can also consult with Adviser’s counsel to assist in making the determination of a nexus between the receipt of entertainment or gift(s) and the use of the broker executing securities transactions on behalf of Adviser’s Fund Client giving such entertainment or gift(s).

Section 10: Additional Labor Organization Reporting Requirements

In addition, any gifts, entertainment, any payment of money or anything of value made directly or indirectly by you to a labor organization or officer, agent, shop steward, or other representative or employee of any labor organization (including union officials serving in some capacity to a Taft-Hartley Plan) must be reported to the Chief Compliance Officer. All items regardless of the amount or value must be reported. Following are examples of potentially reportable items:

 

•    Meals

  

•    Golf (including charity golf tournaments

•    Gifts (e.g., holiday gifts)

  

•    Hole sponsorships for golf tournament

•    Travel and lodging costs

  

•    Advertising at union or Taft-Hartley fund related functions

•    Bar bills

  

•    Sponsorship of conferences, picnics, other events

•    Sporting event tickets

  

•    Donations to charities or scholarship funds

•    Theater tickers

  

•    Conferences attended by officials, Supervised Persons, etc.

•    Clothing or equipment

  

•    Receptions attended by officials, Supervised Persons

•    Raffle donations

  

•    Donations for apprenticeship graduation dinners

•    Retirement dinners

  

 

207


Section 11: Additional Government Employees and Officials Reporting Requirements

Any gifts, entertainment, any payment of money or anything of value made directly or indirectly by you to a government employee or government official must be reported to the Chief Compliance Officer. All items regardless of the amount or value must be reported.

In the United States, there are specific laws governing gifts and entertainment for government officials. Under the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA), Bank Bribery Law, Elections Law and other applicable legal authority, severe penalties may be imposed on the Firm and on individuals who violate these laws and regulations. Similar laws and regulations may also apply in other jurisdictions where Evermore Global Advisors may conduct business.

Inside the United States - In the United States, a business gift may not be given to any state, federal or other government employee or official unless previously coordinated with and approved by Government Relations. Business entertainment hosted for any state, federal or other government employee or official must also be approved by Government Relations PRIOR to extending the invitation.

U.S. federal law, and Congressional rules, covering lobbying, disclosure and ethics ban most gifts to members and their staff, and contain substantial periodic disclosure requirements. Disclosure provisions also cover executive branch officials. Congress has registered its intention and sense that certain provisions apply also concerning the executive and judicial branch. Because of the complexity of the requirements, it is critical to work with Government Relations contacts prior to ANY business gifts or business entertainment activity involving U.S. federal government officials. Whether you are considering providing gifts, entertainment, attendance at an event, or even local travel, you must confirm applicable rules and required reporting with Government Relations prior to any activity with federal officials, even those activities that you might consider incidental, such as a modest meal, local transportation, or a nominal value exempt item. Most company logo items will be acceptable gifts, but may still be reportable; and Government Relations should first be consulted.

Outside the United States - In jurisdictions other than the United States, a business gift to government employees and officials must be permissible under local law, must not violate the FCPA, must be related to a business purpose and expected by the Company as part of your responsibilities. Business entertainment must also meet the same standards. Refer specific questions to the Chief Compliance Officer, who will coordinate as needed.

 

208


Section 12: Service as a Director and Outside Business Activities

Access Persons are prohibited from serving on the boards of directors of publicly traded companies unless the Compliance Officer determines, in writing, that such service is not inconsistent with the interests of the Clients and their shareholders. If the Chief Compliance Officer has approved such service, and such Access Person is also an Advisory Person, that Advisory Person shall be isolated, through screening procedures, from persons making investment decisions with respect to such issuer.

In order to monitor for any conflicts of interest, all Access Persons’ other board memberships, advisory positions, trade group positions, management or officer positions, employment or contract work or any other involvement with public or private companies must be fully disclosed and submitted for prior approval to the CCO. Approval must be obtained through the CCO, and will ordinarily require consideration by Senior Management of the Adviser. CCO and/or the Adviser can deny approval for any reason. This prohibition does not apply to service as an officer or board member of any parent, subsidiary or affiliate of the Adviser.

Section 13: Policy regarding Pay-to-Play

For purposes of this policy a Covered associate of Evermore means: (i) Any general partner, managing member or executive officer, or other individual with a similar status or function; (ii) Any employee who solicits a government entity for the investment adviser and any person who supervises, directly or indirectly, such employee; and (iii) Any political action committee controlled by the investment adviser or by any person described in (i) and (ii) of this definition.

From time to time, Evermore or its Covered Associates may be asked to make a political contribution. In addition, Covered Associates, by their own volition, may seek to make individual political contributions. As an investment manager, Evermore is often eligible to manage money on behalf of a state or municipality. To avoid any real or perceived conflict of interests, Evermore requires that individual political contributions be subject to a preclearance policy as further detailed below.

For the purposes of this policy, political contributions include direct payments of money to a campaign organization, volunteer work, or fund raising work done on behalf of, or to benefit, a political campaign, organization or candidate.

 

  1. Firm Contributions

Evermore does not intend to make political contributions.

 

  2. Individual Contributions

Political activity must occur strictly in your individual and private capacity and not on behalf of Evermore. Evermore resources, financial or otherwise, may not be used to support political parties, candidates or causes, unless approved in advance by Evermore’s CCO and Counsel. Accordingly:

 

    Evermore will not reimburse any covered person for individual political contributions;

 

    corporate credit cards issued to covered associates cannot be used to make contributions; and

 

    Evermore’s Covered Associates are not permitted to use Evermore’s name in connection with any political campaign other than to state that they are affiliated with or employed by Evermore.

Except with the prior consent of the CCO and Counsel, Covered Associates may make political contributions to elected officials at the State, County and local levels only if the Covered Associate is entitled to vote for such official and the contributions, in total, are not in excess of $350 or foreign currency equivalent by any covered associate to each official, per election for whom they may vote, and $150 to other candidates.

 

209


Preclearance is required for any political contribution made by any Covered Associate to a state or local candidate outside of the contributor’s jurisdiction for whom the contributor is not eligible to vote.

Preclearance is not required prior to individual personal contributions to national election campaigns, national political parties, or political action committees or candidates for national office such as President of the US or members of the US Senate or House of Representatives. Certain contributions, even within your voting jurisdiction, may restrict or prohibit Evermore from transacting business with a related public entity. To assure that your individual political contributions do not give rise to conflicts of interest that may implicate Evermore, you should avoid the appearance of impropriety in making political contributions. For example, you should carefully consider whether to contribute to political candidates’ campaigns or causes who or which, if successful, could have a financial impact on Evermore’s business. If a planned contribution could in any way be looked upon as involving Evermore Clients, property or services, or which could create the appearance of impropriety , you should discuss this contribution in advance with Evermore’s CCO and Counsel. A political contribution pre-clearance form for this purpose has been attached hereto as Attachment 5.

Section 14: Reporting

 

  (A) Duplicate Confirmation Statements . Every Access Person shall instruct the broker, dealer or bank with or through whom a Covered Security transaction is effected in which every Access Person has, or by reason of such transaction acquires or sells, any direct or indirect beneficial ownership in the Covered Security, to furnish the Chief Compliance Officer duplicate copies of transaction confirmations and statements of account at the same time such confirmations and statements of account are sent to the Access Person, or the Access Person shall provide copies directly to the Chief Compliance Officer.

 

  (B) Initial and Annual Disclosure (Attachment 1) . Every Access Person shall:

 

  (1) Sign the acknowledgement of receipt of the Compliance Manual and Code of Ethics.

 

  (2) Report all personal holdings of Covered Securities within 10 days of becoming an Access Person (Tables 1 and 2); and

 

  (3) Report all personal holdings of Covered Securities as of December 31st (or other date acceptable to the Chief Compliance Officer) within 30 days of calendar year-end (Tables 1 and 2).

 

  (4) In the initial disclosure, report all outside business activities (Table 3).

 

  (5) On an annual basis, sign the Code of Ethics Certification.

 

  (C) Personal Trade Pre-Clearance Form (Attachment 2) . Access Persons must obtain pre-clearance prior to acquiring or disposing of a direct or indirect Beneficial Ownership interest in any Covered Security or Fund, other than for exempt securities and transactions.

 

  (D) Quarterly Reporting (Attachment 3) . Within 30 days of each calendar quarter-end, every Access Person shall:

 

  (1) Certify that all brokerage accounts, securities, political contributions, gift transactions and outside business activities required to be reported by the Codes of Ethics and Compliance Manuals of the Adviser and Evermore Funds Trust have been reported.

 

210


  (2) Report all securities transactions during the quarter.

 

  (3) Report all new brokerage accounts opened during the quarter.

 

  (4) Report all gifts given and gifts received above the de minimis amounts during the quarter.

 

  (5) Report all business meals and entertainment with existing or prospective clients if over the de minimis amount during the quarter.

 

  (6) Report all gifts given to government employees or officials, or labor organizations and their affiliates during the quarter.

 

  (7) Report all political contributions made during the quarter.

 

  (8) Report all outside business activities.

 

  (E) Opening Brokerage Accounts . Prior to the opening of an account for the purpose of executing transactions in Covered Securities, every Access Person shall obtain the written consent of the Chief Compliance Officer.

 

  (F) Non-Discretionary Accounts . Access Persons shall be required to include in the Annual Disclosure report any account over which such person does not have any direct or indirect influence or control, and for each account in which the Access Person has no direct influence or control, the Access Person must complete and return to the CCO a Non-Discretionary Account Certification (see Attachment 4).

 

  (G) Non-Admission Statement . Any such disclosure report may contain a statement that the report shall not be construed as an admission by the person making such report that he or she has any direct or indirect beneficial ownership in the Covered Security to which the report relates.

Section 15: Administration of the Code

 

  (A) Appointment of a Chief Compliance Officer . Adviser shall appoint a Chief Compliance Officer and shall keep a record for five years of the persons serving as Chief Compliance Officer and their dates of service.

 

  (B) Administration of the Code . The Chief Compliance Officer shall administer the Code and shall use reasonable diligence and institute procedures reasonably necessary to review reports submitted by Access Persons and to prevent violations of the Code.

 

  (C) Analysis of Violations of Pre-Clearance Requirements . On a quarterly basis, the CCO will review each Access Person’s account statements to ensure that all transactions of Covered Securities have met the Code’s pre-clearance requirements as set forth in Section 3 above.

 

  (D) Record of Violations of the Code . The Chief Compliance Officer shall maintain a record of all violations of the Code, and of any action taken as a result of the violation, which shall be maintained for five years in an easily accessible place.

 

  (E) List of Access and Advisory Persons . The Chief Compliance Officer shall prepare a list of the Access Persons and Advisory Persons, shall update the list as necessary, and shall maintain a record (for 5 years) of former lists of Access and Advisory Persons.

 

  (F) Notice of Status as Access or Advisory Person . The Chief Compliance Officer shall notify each Access and Advisory Person of their status, provide them with a copy of this Code, and obtain an acknowledgment from such person of receipt thereof.

 

211


  (G) Notice of Amendments to the Code . Amendments to this Code shall be provided to each Access and Advisory Person, who shall acknowledge receipt thereof.

 

  (H) Exemptions to the Code . The Board of Directors of the Funds may exempt any person from application of any Section(s) of this Code. A written memorandum shall specify the Section(s) of this Code from which the person is exempted and the reasons therefore.

 

  (I) Quarterly Directors’ Report . The Chief Compliance Officer shall compile a quarterly report to be presented to the Board of Directors of each of the Funds. Such report shall discuss compliance with this Code, and shall provide details with respect to any failure to comply and the actions taken by the Adviser upon discovery of such failure.

 

  (J) Annual Directors’ Report . Not less than once a year the Chief Compliance Officer shall furnish to Directors of each of the Funds, and the Directors shall consider, a written report that:

 

  (1) Describes any issues arising under the Code since the last report to the Directors, including, but not limited to, information about material violations of the Code and sanctions imposed in response to the material violations. The annual written report may incorporate by reference information included in written quarterly reports previously presented to the Directors; and

 

  (2) Certifies that Adviser has adopted procedures reasonably necessary to prevent Access Persons from violating the Code.

Section 16: Adoption of Code by Entities Other Than Adviser

The Chief Compliance Officer of Adviser shall ensure that all firms controlling, controlled by, or under common control with Adviser that employ persons who obtain information concerning recommendations or executions of Covered Security transactions of any Client have adopted the Code or have imposed similar ethical constraints on their personnel.

Section 17: Material Changes to the Code

(A) All material changes to the Code must be approved by a majority of the Board of Directors (including independent directors voting separately) of Funds at their next regular meeting (and in no event more than 6 months after material change). Adviser shall provide the Directors with a certification that Adviser has adopted procedures reasonably necessary to prevent Access Persons from violating the Code. The Directors shall base their approval on a determination that the Code contains provisions reasonably necessary to prevent Access persons from violating Section 2 of this Code.

(B) A copy of each version of the Code shall be maintained for five years in an easily accessible place.

 

212


CODE OF ETHICS

E VERMORE G LOBAL A DVISORS , LLC

And The Clients For Which They Serve As Investment Adviser

Beneficial Ownership

For purposes of the Code of Ethics, a beneficial owner of a security includes any person who, directly or indirectly, through any contract, arrangement, understanding, relationship or otherwise, has or shares a direct or indirect pecuniary interest in such security.

You have a pecuniary interest in a security if you have the opportunity, directly or indirectly, to profit or share in the profit derived from a transaction in such security. You are deemed to have a pecuniary interest in any securities held by members of your immediate family sharing your household. “Immediate family” means your son or daughter (including any legally adopted child) or any descendants of either your stepson or stepdaughter, your father or mother or any ancestor of either, your stepfather or stepmother, and your spouse. Also, you are deemed to have a pecuniary interest in securities held by a partnership of which you are a general partner, and beneficial ownership of the securities held by such partnership will be attributed to you in proportion to the greater of your capital account or interest in the partnership at the time of any transaction in such securities. You are also deemed to have a pecuniary interest in the portfolio securities held by a corporation if you are a controlling shareholder of such corporation and have or share investment control over such portfolio securities. Additionally, certain performance-related fees received by brokers, dealers, banks, insurance companies, investment companies, investment advisors, trustees and others may give rise to pecuniary interests in securities over which such persons have voting or investment control.

Securities owned of record or held in your name are generally considered to be beneficially owned by you if you have a pecuniary interest in such securities. Beneficial ownership may include securities held by others for your benefit regardless of record ownership (e.g., securities held for you or members of your immediate family by agents, custodians, brokers, trustees, executors or other administrators; securities owned by you but which have not been transferred into your name on the books of a company; and securities which you have pledged) if you have or share a pecuniary interest in such securities.

With respect to ownership of securities held in trust, beneficial ownership includes the ownership of securities as a trustee in instances either where you as trustee have, or where a member of your immediate family has, a pecuniary interest in the securities held by the trust (e.g., by virtue of being a beneficiary of the trust).

The final determination of beneficial ownership is a question to be determined in light of the facts of a particular case. Thus, while you may include security holdings of other members of your family, you may nonetheless disclaim beneficial ownership of such securities. Any uncertainty as to whether you are the beneficial owner of a security should be brought to the attention of the Chief Compliance Officer.

 

213


Attachment 1. Initial & Annual Holdings Reports

 

 

 

Access Person Last Name    First Name    MI
          Office Location
   Phone #   

ACKNOWLEDGMENTOF RECEIPT OF COMPLIANCE MANUAL, CODE OF ETHICS, and INSIDER TRADING POLICIES

 

Please specify:    ☐  Initial Report or    ☐  Annual Renewal

1. Acknowledgement

I acknowledge that I have received copies of the current Compliance Manual and Code of Ethics for both Evermore Global Advisors, LLC and Evermore Funds Trust and I represent that:

 

  a. I acknowledge receipt of copies of the Compliance Manuals, including but not limited to the Code of Ethics and Insider Trading Policies & Procedures contained therein, for both Evermore Global Advisors, LLC and Evermore Funds Trust. I have read the terms and understand that I am fully subject to its provisions.

 

  b. I have specifically read each Code of Ethics and I understand that it applies to me and to all Investments in which I have or acquire Beneficial Ownership . I have read the definition of “Beneficial Ownership” contained within each Code of Ethics, and I understand that I may be deemed to have Beneficial Ownership in Investments owned by members of my Household and that transactions effected by members of my Household may therefore be subject to each Code of Ethics.

 

  c. I agree that in case of a violation, I may be subject to various possible sanctions (pursuant to both the Codes of Ethics and the Compliance Manuals) and as determined by the Compliance Committee (or its delegate) of the Adviser. Possible sanctions include verbal and written warnings, fines, trading suspensions, reversal of trades by which I agree to disgorge and forfeit any profits or absorb any loss on prohibited transactions, termination of employment, civil referral to the Securities and Exchange Commission, and criminal referral.

 

  d. I will comply with the Compliance Manuals and the Codes of Ethics in all respects.

CCS’s Compliance personnel provide training on the Compliance Manuals and Codes of Ethics annually to each Advisory Person. However, each Advisory Person is responsible for understanding and complying with both the Compliance Manual and Code of Ethics of their own volition.

 

Access Person’s Signature:  

 

   Date:   

 

2. Personal Investment Holdings Report

The following is a list of all investment accounts and Securities not held in such accounts in which I have Beneficial Ownership, and such information is current as of a date no more than 30 days prior to the date hereof:

 

214


Table 1 – Investment Accounts

Instructions:

 

    Provide the information requested below for each investment account in which you have Beneficial Ownership . Indicate “N/ A” or “None” if appropriate.

 

    If Initial Report, attach the most recent account statement for each account identified.

 

    Attach separate sheets if necessary

 

NAME OF BROKER
DEALER, BANK, OR
OTHER FINANCIAL
INTERMEDIARY

 

ACCOUNT TITLE
acct holder’s name
and (acct type)

 

RELATIONSHIP
if acct holder is
not the Access
Person

   ACCOUNT
NUMBER
   CHECK HERE IF
DISCRETIONARY
ACCOUNT
         

 

215


Table 2 – Other Securities Not Held in Investment Accounts Listed in Table 1

Instructions:

 

    Please list your Beneficial Ownership of any non-publically traded securities not held in a brokerage account, including limited partnership units/shares, physical stock certificates, and any other interests in privately held or limited offerings (for e.g., private equity funds and hedge funds not sold to the general public).

 

NAME OF

SECURITY OWNER

 

RELATIONSHIP
if security
owner is not the
Access Person

 

NAME/TITLE OF
SECURITY

   TYPE OF
SECURITY
   TICKER OR
CUSIP
   NUMBER OF
SHARES /
PRINCIPAL
AMOUNT
            

Table 3 -Outside Business Activities

The following is all outside business activities that I am engaged in Indicate “N/A” or “None” if appropriate.

 

NAME OF COMPANY

  

NATURE OF MY INVOLVEMENT

  

 

216


Table 4 – Political Contributions Disclosure (Initial Holdings Report Only)

I have made the following political contributions (as defined within the Code of Ethics) in the two year period prior to my date of hire with Evermore Global Advisors, LLC.

 

Name of Recipient

 

Amount of
Contribution /
Gift

 

Office and State of
Campaign

 

Date

 

Eligible
to
Vote?

       

Annual Certification

 

  a. I hereby certify that since the date of my last certification under the Codes of Ethics, I have fully complied with all applicable requirements of the Codes. In particular, in connection with each Securities transaction that I have engaged in since such date, I hereby certify that:

 

  i. I did not execute any transaction in a Security (or equivalent instrument) at a time when I possessed material nonpublic information regarding the Security or the issuer of the Security.

 

  ii. I did not execute any transactions with the intent of raising, lowering, or maintaining the price of any Security or to create a false appearance of active trading.

 

  iii. I did not execute any transaction in a Security (or equivalent instrument) at a time when I was in possession of non-public information to the effect that (i) Adviser is or may be considering an investment in or sale of such Security on behalf of its clients, or (ii) have or may have open, executed, or pending portfolio transactions in such Security on behalf of its clients.

 

  iv. I did not use my knowledge of the portfolio holdings of any of the Adviser’s clients (including any series of Evermore Funds Trust) to engage in any trade or short-term trading strategy involving any of the Adviser’s clients that may have conflicted with the best interests of the Adviser’s clients (or any series of Evermore Funds Trust or its shareholders).

 

  v. If an Investment was acquired in an initial public offering which Adviser may have been reasonably considering for purchase for one or more Clients or private placement, I obtained the written approval of the Chief Compliance Officer or his or her designee prior to acquiring such Security.

 

  vi. I have reported and acknowledged all gifts received on a quarterly basis since the date of my last certification under the Codes of Ethics, and that I have not accepted any gift with a fair market value in excess of $100 without the prior written approval of the Chief Compliance Officer or his or her designee. I have reported and acknowledged all business meals and entertainment with existing or prospective clients over $250 per person.

 

  vii. I have also reported all political contributions, gifts given and outside business activities as required by the Codes of Ethics.

 

217


  b. I further certify that the information on this form is accurate and complete in all material respects.

 

Access Person’s Name:  

 

     
Access Person’s Signature:  

 

   Date:   

 

 

218


A TTACHMENT 2. P ERSONAL T RADE P RE -C LEARANCE F ORM

 

Broker Name:            
     
Account Name:            
     
Account Number:            
     

 

BUY    SELL    SELL SHORT    BUY TO COVER

 

Security Name:          
   
Security Symbol:          
   

Number of Shares / Par Value    

/ $ Amount:    

     

To the best of my knowledge, the above security has not been purchased or sold by any of the Adviser’s Clients within the past 15 calendar days, or is being considered for purchase or sale by any of the Adviser’s Clients. I further certify that I do not have any confidential or inside information relating to the issuer of this security and that the security is not on the Adviser’s Restricted Security List.

 

                
S IGNATURE      P RINT N AME       D ATE

 

 

 

   

APPROVED

 

      

NOT APPROVED

 

    
             
 

P RINT N AME

 

    

T ITLE

 

  
             
  S IGNATURE      D ATE   

 

219


A TTACHMENT 3. Q UARTERLY R EPORT

F OR THE Q UARTER E NDED :                             

To: The Chief Compliance Officer:

I hereby certify that I have included on this report all brokerage accounts, securities, political contributions, gift transactions, and outside business activities required to be reported pursuant to the Codes of Ethics and Compliance Manuals of Evermore Global Advisors, LLC and/or Evermore Funds Trust during the calendar quarter indicated above. I hereby submit this report within thirty (30) days after the end of that quarter.

Name of Reporting Person:                                                                                               

 

Signature:  

 

    Date:  

 

Securities Transactions

Please provide the following information for any reportable securities transactions during the quarter. (Note: you do not need to complete the securities portion of this report if all of your trading confirmations and account statements are already being delivered to the Chief Compliance Officer or his or her designee)

 

Date of
Transaction

 

Title of
Security

 

Ticker
Symbol
or
CUSIP

 

Number
of
Shares

 

Price

 

Principal
Amount,
Maturity
Date and
Interest
Rate (if
applicable)

 

Type of
Transaction

 

Name of
Broker,
Dealer or
Bank
Effecting
Transaction

             

 

All relevant transactions other than those noted above are contained in statements which are submitted directly to Adviser by the broker-dealers with which I have securities accounts.

I have established the following new accounts with brokers, dealers or banks in which my securities are held for my direct or indirect benefit. Indicate “N/A” or “None” if appropriate .

 

Name of Broker, Dealer or
Bank

 

Date Account was
Established

 

Name(s) on and Type of
Account

   

 

220


I have given or received the following gifts or other accommodations during the prior quarter. This excludes reasonable meals and entertainment at which I was present. Indicate “N/A” or “None” if appropriate.

 

Description of Gift
/ Accommodation

 

Date

 

Given or
Received

 

Name &
Company/Organization of

Recipient

 

Approx
Value

       

 

221


I have received business meals and entertainment over the current de minimis amount of $250. Indicate “N/A” or “None” if appropriate.

 

Description of

Entertainment

Event

 

Date

 

Business Purpose

 

Name & Company

 

Approx. Value

       

I have given the following gifts to a government employee or official, a labor organization or officer, agent, shop steward, or other representative or employee of any labor organization. Indicate “N/A” or “None” if appropriate.

 

Description of Gift

/ Accommodation

 

Date

 

Given or
Received

 

Name &
Company/Organization of

Recipient

 

Approx
Value

       

I have made the following political contributions (as defined within the Code of Ethics). This includes contributions under the $150 preclearance requirement. Indicate “N/A” or “None” if appropriate .

 

Name of Recipient

 

Amount of
Contribution /

Gift

 

Office and State of
Campaign

 

Date

 

Eligible
to
Vote?

       

The following is all outside business activities that I am engaged in. Indicate “N/A” or “None” if appropriate .

 

NAME OF COMPANY

 

NATURE OF MY INVOLVEMENT

 

222


Attachment 4

EVERMORE GLOBAL ADVISORS, LLC

NON-DISCRETIONARY ACCOUNT CERTIFICATION

I hereby certify that, with respect to the account or accounts listed on Appendix A attached hereto, I do not directly or indirectly influence or control the investment decisions for such account or accounts, and the person or persons making the investment decisions for such accounts do not make such decisions, in whole or in part, based upon any information provided by me, the certifying Access Person. This certification, and list of accounts on Appendix A, includes those securities over which I have any direct or indirect beneficial ownership.

 

By:  

 

  Certifying Access Person
Date:  

 

 

223


Appendix A

Non-Discretionary Account(s)

 

ACCOUNT NAME

  

ADVISER/ BROKER  *

  

 

* Is there a written agreement with the adviser or broker giving the adviser or broker full investment discretion over the named account?    ☐  Yes    ☐  No.

If “No” then please state by what arrangement the adviser or broker has investment discretion.

These include securities owned by members of your “Immediate family” including any son or daughter (including any legally adopted child) or any descendants of either, any stepson or stepdaughter, your father or mother or any ancestor of either, any stepfather or stepmother, and your spouse, or any other security over which I may have beneficial ownership, as defined in the Code of Ethics.

 

 

 

224